*A        -i  - 


m. 


'■;f  <•, 


^4i<'^':;--^'^;v-:n 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/furcountryorseveOOvernrich 


THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Mrs  Jolijfe  served  out  slice  after  slice.''  —  Page  4. 


THE    FUR   COUNTRY; 


OR, 


Seventy  Degrees  North  Latitude. 

TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  FRENCH  OF 

JULES    VERNE. 

BY 

N.  D'ANVJERS. 
Wi\\\^  ^ne  SttttlJreli  lUtrjstrattotijEf. 


BOSTON: 
JAMES    R.  OSGOOD    AND    COMPANY, 

Late  Ticknor  &  Fields,  and  Fields,  Osgood,  &  Co. 
1874. 


r-' 


aiPt 


TO  MY  NEPHEWS, 

HERBERT,    EDGAR,    AND    ROBERT, 
([Dfjig    2rranslati0n 

AFFECTIONATELY   DEDICATED, 

N.  D'ANVERS. 


Clapham,  1873. 


420 


CONTENTS. 


PAET  L 


I.    A  SOIREE  AT  FORT  RELIANCE, 

n.  THE  Hudson's  bay  pdr  company,  . 

in.    A  SAVANT  THAWED, 
IV.    A  FACTORY, 
V.    FROM  FORT  RELIANCE  TO  FOBT  ENTERFRISB, 
VL    A  WAPITI  DUEL, 
Vn.    THE  ARCTIC  CIRCLE, 
VIIL    THE  GREAT  BEAR  LAKE, 
IX.    A  STORM  ON  THE  LAKE, 
X.    A  RETROSPECT, 
XL    ALONG  THE  COAST,  . 
Xn.    THE  MIDNIGHT  SUN, 

XIII.  FORT  HOPE, 

XIV.  SOME  EXCURSIONS,  . 
XV.    FIFTEEN  MILES  FROM  CAPE  BATHXTBST, 

XVI.    TWO  SHOTS, 
XVn.    THE  APPROACH  OF  WINTER, 
XVnL    THE  POLAR  NIGHT,  . 
XIX.    A  NEIGHBOURLY  VISIT, 
XX.    MERCURY   FREEZES, 
XXI.    THE  LARGE  POLAR  BEARS, 
XXn.    FIVE  MONTHS  MORE, 
XXIU.    TELE  EOLIPSB  OF  THE  18tH  JUKE 


riOB 

1 

8 
14 
20 
26 
83 
41 
48 
66 
63 
69 
76 
83 
90 
97 
103 
110 
117 
126 
135 
141 
160 
168 


CONTENTS. 


PAKT  11. 


OHAP. 

I.    A   FLOATING  FORT,  . 
II.    WHERE  ARE  WE?      . 

III.  A  TOUR  OF  THE  ISLAND, 

IV.  A  NIGHT  ENCAMPMENT, 
V.    FROM  JULY  25TH  TO  AUGUST  20tH, 

VI.    TEN  DAYS  OF  TEMPEST, 
VII.    A  FIRE  AND  A  CRY, 
VIII.    MRS  PAULINA  BARNETT'S  EXCURSION, 
IX.    KALUMAH's  ADVENTURES,     . 
X.    THE  KAMTCHATKA  CURRENT, 
XL    A  COMMUNICATION  FROM  LIEUTENANT  HOBSON, 
XII.    A  CHANCE  TO  BE  TRIED, 

XIII.  ACROSS  THE  ICE-FIELD, 

XIV.  THE  WINTER  MONTHS, 
XV.    A  LAST  EXPLORING  EXPEDITION, 

XVI.    THE  BREAK-UP  OF  THE  ICE, 
XVIL    THE  AVALANCHE,      . 
XVIII.    ALL  AT  WORK, 
XIX.    BEHRING  SEA, 
XX.    IN  THE  OFFING, 
XXL    THE  ISLAND  BECOMES  AN  ISLET, 
XXII.    THE  FOUR  FOLLOWING  DAYS, 
XXIII.    ON  A  PIECE  QF  ICE,  « 

XXrV.    CONCLUSION,  . 


MOB 

169 

176 
183 
191 
199 
207 
214 
223 
232 
239 
246 
253 
260 
266 
273 
282 
289 
295 
303 
310 
315 
320 
325 
333 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


•*  Mrs  Joliffe  served  out  slice  after  slice,' 

Lieutenant  Hobson  and  Sergeant  Long, 

"  The  Corporal,  match  in  hand,  awaited  the  order  of  his 

The  arrival  of  Thomas  Black, 

A  savant  thawed,  , 

Thomas  Black  introduces  himself, 

The  start  from  Fort  Reliance, 

"  Lieutenant  Hobson  and  the  Sergeant  led  the  way," 

Corporal  Joliffe  proves  his  skill  in  driving, 

The  beginning  of  the  thaw, 

The  effects  of  the  thaw,    . 

A  wapiti  duel,      .  •  • 

"  To  the  icebergs !  to  the  icebergs  !  " 

"  There  were  bears  prowling  in  the  pass. 

The  Hare  Indians, 

A  storm  on  the  lake, 

**  Hobson  uttered  a  last  despairing  cry !  " 

Saved!      .... 

The  mouth  of  the  Coppermine  River, 

"  Thousands  of  birds  were  shot," 

Traces  of  an  encampment. 

The  footprints  of  a  dancer, 

A  temporary  encampment, 

"  I  promise  you  double  pay," 

The  site  of  the  fort, 

Collecting  materials  for  the  new  factory, 

A  hunting  party, . 

Sergeant  Long  and  Madge  fishing, 

"  From  this  position  they  were  able,"  &c., 

A  Morse  Hunt^    .... 


Captain, 


MOB 

4 
5 

13 

14 

15 

16 

27 

27 

32 

34 

35 

37 

46 

47 

54 

60 

61 

62 

64 

72 

73 

74 

79 

82 

84 

86 

92 

93 

99 


XII 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Walrus  Bay,  .... 

Two  shots,  ..... 

Rival  claimants,      .  .  . 

*'  A  new  country  was  springing  into  being," 

"  A  kind  ol  fete  was  held," 

"Mrs  Barnett  read  aloud," 

*'  The  dogs  rushed  out,"  &c., 

"  The  body  was  hauled  up,"  &c.,    . 

Some  living  creatures  came  out  of  the  hut," 
"  She  ran  up  to  it,"  &c.,    . 

"  It  is  more  beautiful  than  an  Aurora  Borealis  !  " 
"  The  bears  were  walking  about  on  the  roof," 
*'  Mrs  Barnett  pressed  the  brave  man's  hand," 
*•  Mrs  Barnett  discharged  the  contents,"  &c., 
**  Mingled  howls  and  screams  were  heard," 
**  Just  look  at  our  house  now  !  "    . 
"The  ice  burst,"  &c., 
"  Its  waters  were  still  sweet,"  &c., 
**  He  might  be  seen  standing  motionless  and  silent," 
*•  All  might  watch  the  progress  of  the  phenomenon," 
**  Please,  sir,  it 's  because  of  the  pay," 
"  He  shook  his  fist  at  the  sun," 
**  I  think  not,"       .... 
*'  Tlie  carpenter  fixed  upon  the  beach,"  &c., 
"  Thomas  Black  would  not  even  join  the  exploring  party,'* 
♦*  They  breakfasted,"  &c.,  . 
"Numerous  furred  animals,"  &c., 
•'  He  was  able  to  look  closely  at  the  steep  wall,"  &c 
♦'Keep  hold!"       .... 
**  Corporal  Joliffe  was  extremely  fond  of  him," 
**  Thanks  to  the  Corporal's  unwearying  exertions,' 
«*  We  are  sinking  gradually," 
*'  Hobson  remained  crouching,"  &c., 
"  The  Lieutenant  promised,"  &c., 
««  Not  that  way,"    .... 
*'  Sergeant !     Where  are  you  ? "    . 
*'  We  saw  their  fire  ;  they  will  see  ours  !  " 
"Look,  Madge,  look!"      . 
"  The  bear  seized  Kalumah  by  the  clothes," 
"  It  was  the  young  Esquimaux  girl  Kalumah," 
"She  murmured,  *  Mrs  Barnett,'  "  , 

"  The  waves  dashed  over  her  kayak," 
"  She  covered  him  with  kisses,"    .  • 


UST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS, 


Xlll 


**  The  Lieutenant  tied  round  their  necks," 

**  Hobson  was  in  dismay," 

**  The  wolves  came  within  musket  range," 

*'  We  knew  it,  sir  !  " 

"It  was  a  Polar  bear," 

*'  Two  large  waggon  sledges  were  built,"  . 

"Some  of  the  icebergs  assumed  extraordinary  forma," 

"  We  must  pass  somehow," 

"  Marbre  flung  his  running  noose  skilfully," 

"  Everybody  started  back," 

"  It  was  dashed  upon  the  ice-field  with  a  fearful  crash, 

"  I  think  it  is  time  to  retrace  our  steps," 

"  It  is  a  frost-rime," 

"  He  took  the^altitude,"    . 

"When  an  unexpected  noise," 

"  It  was  like  an  army  of  icebergs,"  &e.,     . 

"  Poor  things  !  poor  things  !  " 

"  And  a  figure  appeared,"  &c., 

"  Examining  the  state  of  the  sea,"  &c.,     . 

"  Mrs  Barnett  sobbed  aloud," 

"  The  lower  framework  was  already  floating," 

"  He  escaped  with  a  ducking," 

"  The  embarkation  of  provisions,  &c.,  had  to  be  put  oflT," 

"  He  tightened  them,"  &c., 

"  Mrs  Barnett  turned  and  looked  Madge  full  in  the  face, 

"A  beam  .  .  .  was  sunk  deep  into  the  earth,"  &c., 

"  The  colonists,  falling  on  their  knees,  returned  thanks  to  God," 

Kalumah  and  the  bear,      .... 


PAGE 

242 
242 
249 
252 
25" 
258 
262 


272 
277 

278 
288 
288 


800 
801 
307 
809 
310 
312 
318 
319 
324 
829 
832 
334 


PART  I. 


THE    FUR    COUNTRY, 

CHAPTER  L 

A   SOIREE   AT  FORT  RELIANCE, 


I 


N  the  evening  of  the  I7th  March  1859,  Captain  Craventy  gave 
a  f^te  at  Fort  Reliance.  Our  readers  must  not  at  once 
imagine  a  grand  entertainment,  such  as  a  court  ball,  or  a 
musical  soiree  with  a  fine  orchestra.  Captain  Craventy's  reception 
was  a  very  simple  affair,  yet  he  had  spared  no  pains  to  give  it 
eclat. 

In  fact,  under  the  auspices  of  Corporal  Joliffe,  the  large  room  on 
the  ground-floor  was  completely  transformed.  The  rough  walls, 
constructed  of  roughly-hewn  trunks  of  trees  piled  up  horizontally, 
were  still  visible,  it  is  true,  but  their  nakedness  was  disguised  by 
arms  and  armour,  borrowed  from  the  arsenal  of  the  fort,  and  by  an 
English  tent  at  each  corner  of  the  room.  Two  lamps  suspended 
by  chains,  like  chandeliers,  and  provided  with  tin  reflectors,  relieved 
the  gloomy  appearance  of  the  blackened  beams  of  the  ceiling,  and 
sufficiently  illuminated  the  misty  atmosphere  of  the  room.  The 
narrow,  windows,  some  of  them  mere  loop-holes,  were  so  encrusted 
with  hoar-frost,  that  it  was  impossible  to  look  through  them ;  but 
two  or  three  pieces  of  red  bunting,  tastily  arranged  about  them, 
challenged  the  admiration  of  all  who  entered.  The  floor,  of  rough  • 
joists  of  wood  laid  parallel  with  each  other,  had  been  carefully 
swept  by  Corporal  Joliti'e.  No  sofas,  chairs,  or  other  modern  furni- 
ture, impeded  the  free  circulation  of  the  guests.  Wooden  benches 
half  fixed  against  the  walls,  huge  blocks  of  wood  cut  with  the  axe, 
and  two  tables  with  clumsy  legs,  were  all  the  appliances  of  luxury 
the  saloon  could  boast  of.  But  the  partition  wall,  with  a  narrow 
door  leading  into  the  next  room,  was  decorated  in  a  style  alike 

A 


THE  PUR  COUNTRY. 


costly  and  picturesque.  From  the  beams  hung  magnificent  furs 
admirably  arranged,  the  equal  of  which  could  not  be  seen  in  the 
more  favoured  regions  of  Regent  Street  or  the  Perspective-Newski. 
It  seemed  as  if  the  whole  fauna  of  the  ice-bound  North  were  here 
represented  by  their  finest  skins.  The  eye  wandered  from  the  furs 
of  wolves,  grey  bears,  polar  bears,  otters,  wolverenes,  beavers,  musk 
rats,  water  pole-cats,  ermines,  and  silver  foxes  ;  and  above  this 
display  was  an  inscription  in  brilliantly-coloured  and  artistically- 
shaped  cardboard — the  motto  of  the  world-famous  Hudson's  Bay 
Company — 

"PROPELLE    CUTX7M." 

**  Really,  Corporal  Joliffe,  you  have  surpassed  yourself ! "  said 
Captain  Craventy  to  his  subordinate. 

"  I  think  I  have,  I  think  I  have  1"  replied  the  Corporal;  "but 
honour  to  whom  honour  is  due,  Mrs  JolifFe  deserves  part  of  your 
commendation  ;  she  assisted  me  in  everything." 

"  A  wonderful  woman,  Corporal." 

"  Her  equal  is  not  to  be  found,  Captain." 

An  immense  brick  and  earthenware  stove  occupied  the  centre  of 
the  room,  with  a  huge  iron  pipe  passing  from  it  through  the  ceiling, 
and  conducting  the  dense  black  smoke  into  the  outer  air.  This 
stove  contained  a  roaring  fire  constantly  fed  with  fresh  shovelfuls 
of  coal  by  the  stoker,  an  old  soldier  specially  appointed  to  the  ser- 
vice. Now  and  then  a  gust  of  wind  drove  back  a  volume  of  smoke 
into  the  room,  dimming  the  brightness  of  the  lamps,  and  adding 
fresh  blackness  to  the  beams  of  the  ceiling,  whilst  tongues  of  flame 
shot  forth  from  the  stove.  But  the  guests  of  Fort  Reliance  thought 
little  of  this  slight  inconvenience ;  the  stove  warmed  them,  and  they 
could  not  pay  too  dearly  for  its  cheering  heat,  so  terribly  cold  was 
it  outside  in  the  cutting  north  wind. 

The  storm  could  be  heard  raging  without,  the  snow  fell  fast,  be- 
coming rapidly  solid  and  coating  the  already  frosted  window  panes 
with  fresh  ice.  The  whistling  wind  made  its  way  through  the 
cranks  and  chinks  of  the  doors  and  windows,  and  occasionally  the 
rattling  noise  drowned  every  other  sound.  Presently  an  awful 
silence  ensued.  Nature  seemed  to  be  taking  breath ;  but  suddenly 
the  squall  recommenced  with  terrific  fury.  The  house  was  shaken 
to  its  foundations,  the  planks  cracked,  the  beams  groaned.  A 
stranger  less  accustomed  than  the  habitues  of  the  fort  to  the  war  of 
the  elements,  would  have  asked  if  the  end  of  the  world  were  come. 


LIEUTENANT   HOBSON   AND    SERGEANT   LONG.  —  Page    5. 


A  SOIREE  AT  FORT  RELIANCE, 


But,  with  two  exceptions,  Captain  Craventy's  guests  troubled 
themselves  little  about  the  weather,  and  if  they  had  been  outside 
they  would  have  felt  no  more  fear  than  the  stormy  petrels  disport- 
ing themselves  in  the  midst  of  the  tempest.  Two  only  of  the 
assenibled  company  did  not  belong  to  the  ordinary  society  of  the 
neighbourhood,  two  women,  whom  we  shall  introduce  when  we 
have  enumerated  Captain  Craventy's  other  guests :  these  were, 
Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobson,  Sergeant  Long,  Corporal  Joliflfe,  and  his 
bright  active  Canadian  wife,  a  certain  Mac-Nab  and  his  wife,  both 
Scotch,  John  Rae,  married  to  an  Indian  woman  of  the  country,  and 
some  sixty  soldiers  or  employes  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company. 
The  neighbouring  forts  also  furnished  their  contingent  of  guests,  for 
in  these  remote  lands  people  look  upon  each  other  as  neighbours 
although  their  homes  may  be  a  hundred  miles  apart.  A  good  many 
employes  or  traders  came  from  Fort  Providence  or  Fort  Resolution, 
of  the  Great  Slave  Lake  district,  and  even  from  Fort  Chippeway 
and  Fort  Liard  further  south.  A  rare  break  like  this  in  the 
monotony  of  their  secluded  lives,  in  these  hyberborean  regions, 
was  joyfully  welcomed  by  all  the  exiles,  and  even  a  few  Indian 
chiefs,  about  a  dozen,  had  accepted  Captain  Craventy's  invi- 
tation. They  were  not,  however,  accompanied  by  their  wives, 
the  luckless  squaws  being  still  looked  upon  as  little  better  than 
slaves.  The  presence  of  these  natives  is  accounted  for  by  the  fact 
that  they  are  in  constant  intercourse  with  the  traders,  and  supply 
the  greater  number  of  furs  which  pass  through  the  hands  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company,  in  exchange  for  other  commodities.  They 
are  mostly  Chippeway  Indians,  well  grown  men  with  hardy  con- 
stitutions. Their  complexions  are  of  the  peculiar  reddish  black 
colour  always  ascribed  in  Europe  to  the  evil  spirits  of  fairyland. 
They  wear  very  picturesque  cloaks  of  skins  and  mantles  of  fur,  with 
a  head-dress  of  eagle's  feathers  spread  out  like  a  lady's  fan,  and 
quivering  with  every  motion  of  their  thick  black  hair. 

Such  was  the  company  to  whom  the  Captain  was  doing  the 
honours  of  Fort  Reliance.  There  was  no  dancing  for  want  of 
music,  but  the  "  buffet "  admirably  supplied  the  want  of  the  hired 
musicians  of  the  European  balls.  On  the  table  rose  a  pyramidal 
pudding  made  by  Mrs  Joliffe's  own  hands ;  it  was  an  immense 
truncated  cone,  composed  of  flour,  fat,  rein-deer  venison,  and  musk 
beef.  The  eggs,  milk,  and  citron  prescribed  in  recipe  books  were, 
it  is  true,  wanting,  but  their  absence  was  atoned  for  by  its  hu2« 


THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


proportions.  Mrs  JolifFe  served  out  slice  after  slice  with  liberal 
hands,  yet  there  remained  enough  and  to  spare.  Piles  of  sandwiches 
also  figured  on  the  table,  in  which  ship  biscuits  took  the  place  of 
thin  slices  of  English  bread  and  butter,  and  dainty  morsels  of  corned 
beef  that  of  the  ham  and  stuffed  veal  of  the  old  world.  The 
sharp  teeth  of  the  Chippeway  Indians  made  short  work  of  the 
tough  biscuits;  and  for  drink  there  was  plenty  of  whisky  and  gin 
handed  round  in  little  pewter  pots,  not  to  speak  of  a  great  bowl  of 
punch  which  was  to  close  the  entertainment,  and  of  which  the 
Indians  talked  long  afterwards  in  their  wigwams. 

Endless  were  the  compliments  paid  to  the  Joliffes  that  evening, 
but  they  deserved  them ;  how  zealously  they  waited  on  the  guests, 
with  what  easy  grace  they  distributed  the  refreshments  !  They 
did  not  need  prompting,  they  anticipated  the  wishes  of  each  one. 
The  sandwiches  were  succeeded  by  slices  of  the  inexhaustible 
pudding,  the  pudding  by  glasses  of  gin  or  whisky. 

"  No,  thank  you,  Mr  Joliffe." 

"  You  are  too  good,  Corporal ;  but  let  me  have  time  to  breathe." 

"  Mrs  Joliffe,  I  assure  you,  I  can  eat  no  more." 

"  Corporal  Joliffe,  I  am  at  your  mercy." 

"  No  more,  Mrs  Joliffe,  no  more,  thank  you  ! " 

Such  were  the  replies  met  with  on  every  side  by  the  zealous  pair, 
but  their  powers  of  persuasion  were  such  that  the  most  reluctant 
yielded  in  the  end.  The  quantities  of  food  and  drink  consumed 
were  really  enormous.  The  hubbub  of  conversation  increased.  The 
soldiers  and  employes  became  excited.  Here  the  talk  was  of  hunt- 
ing, there  of  trade.  What  plans  were  laid  for  next  season  !  The 
entire  fauna  of  the  Arctic  regions  would  scarcely  supply  game 
enough  for  these  enterprising  hunters.  They  already  saw  bears, 
foxes,  and  musk  oxen,  falling  beneath  their  bullets,  and  pole-cats  by 
hundreds  caught  in  their  traps.  Their  imagination  pictured  the 
costly  furs  piled  up  in  the  magazines  of  the  Company,  which  was 
this  year  to  realise  hitherto  unheard  of  profits.  And  whilst  the 
spirits  thus  freely  circulated  inflamed  the  imagination  of  the 
Europeans,  the  large  doses  of  Captain  Craventy's  "  fire-water " 
imbibed  by  the  Indians  had  an  opposite  effect.  Too  proud  to  sliow 
admiration,  too  cautious  to  make  promises,  the  taciturn  chiefs 
listened  gravely  and  silently  to  the  babel  of  voices  around  them. 

The  captain  enjoying  the  hurly  burly,  and  pleased  to  see  the 
poor  people,  brought  back  as  it  were  to  the  civilised  world,  enjoying 


"  The  Corporal,  match  in  hand,  awaited  the  order  of  his  Captain."  —  Page  13. 


A  SOIREE  A  T  FORT  RELIANCE,  5 

themselves  so  thoroughly,  was  here,  there,  and  everywhere,  answer- 
ing all  inquiries  about  the  fete  with  the  words — 

"Ask  JolifFe,  ask  Joliflfe  !  " 

And  they  asked  JolifFe,  who  had  a  gracious  word  for  every- 
body. 

Some  of  those  employed  in  the  garrison  and  civil  service  of 
Fort  Reliance  must  here  receive  a  few  words  of  special  notice,  for 
they  were  presently  to  go  through  experiences  of  a  most  terrible 
nature,  which  no  human  perspicacity  could  possibly  have  foreseen. 
Amongst  others  we  must  name  Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobson,  Ser- 
geant Long,  Corporal  and  Mrs  Joliffe,  and  the  two  foreign  women 
already  alluded  to,  in  whose  honour  Captain  Craventy's  f^te  was 
given. 

Jaspar  Hobson  was  a  man  of  forty  years  of  age.  He  was  short 
and  slight,  with  little  muscular  power  ;  but  a  force  of  will  which 
carried  him  successfully  through  all  trials,  and  enabled  him  to  rise 
superior  to  adverse  circumstances.  He  was  "  a  child  of  the  Com- 
pany." His  father.  Major  Hobson,  an  Irishman  from  Dublin,  who 
had  now  been  dead  for  some  time,  lived  for  many  years  at  Fort 
Assiniboin  with  his  wife.  There  Jaspar  Hobson  was  born.  His 
childhood  and  youth  were  spent  at  the  foot  of  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains. His  father  brought  him  up  strictly,  and  he  became  a  man 
in  self  control  and  courage  whilst  yet  a  boy  in  years.  Jaspar 
Hobson  was  no  mere  hunter,  but  a  soldier,  a  brave  and  intelligent 
officer.  During  the  struggles  in  Oregon  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Com- 
pany with  the  rival  companies  of  the  Union,  he  distinguished  himself 
by  his  zeal  and  intrepidity,  and  rapidly  rose  to  the  rank  of  lieutenant. 
His  well-known  merit  led  to  his  appointment  to  the  command  of  an 
expedition  to  the  north,  the  aim  of  which  was  to  explore  the  northern 
shores  of  the  Great  Bear  Lake,  and  to  found  a  fort  on  the  confines 
of  the  American  continent.  Jaspar  Hobson  was  to  set  out  on  his 
journey  early  in  April. 

H  the  lieutenant  was  the  type  of  a  good  officer.  Sergeant  Long 
was  that  of  a  good  soldier.  He  was  a  man  of  fifty  years  of  age,  with 
a  rough  beard  that  looked  as  if  it  were  made  of  cocoa-nut  fibre. 
Constitutionally  brave,  and  disposed  to  obey  rather  than  to  com- 
mand, he  had  no  ambition  but  to  obey  the  orders  he  received — 
never  questioning  them,  however  strange  they  might  appear,  never 
reasoning  for  himself  when  on  duty  for  the  Company — a  true  machine 
in  uniform  ;  but  a  perfect  machine,  never  wearing  out ;  ever  on  the 


THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


march,  yet  never  showing  signs  of  fatigue.  Perhaps  Sergeant  Long 
was  rather  hard  upon  his  men,  as  he  was  upon  himself.  He  would 
not  tolerate  the  slightest  infraction  of  discipline,  and  mercilessly- 
ordered  men  into  confinement  for  the  slightest  neglect,  whilst  he 
himself  had  never  been  reprimanded.  In  a  word,  he  was  a  man 
born  to  obey,  and  this  self-annihilation  suited  his  passive  tempera- 
ment. Men  such  as  he  are  the  materials  of  which  a  formidable 
army  is  formed.  They  are  the  arms  of  the  service,  obeying  a 
single  head.  Is  not  this  the  only  really  powerful  organisation  ? 
The  two  types  of  fabulous  mythology,  Briareus  with  a  hundred 
arms  and  Hydra  with  a  hundred  heads,  well  represent  the  two 
kinds  ot  armies;  and  in  a  conflict  between  them,  which  would  be 
victorious?     Briareus  without  a  doubt ! 

We  have  already  made  acquaintance  with  Corporal  Joliffe.  He 
was  the  busy  bee  of  the  party,  but  it  was  pleasant  to  hear  him  hum- 
ming. He  would  have  made  a  better  major-domo  than  a  soldier; 
and  he  was  himself  aware  of  this.  So  he  called  himself  the  "  Cor- 
poral in  charge  of  details,"  but  he  would  have  lost  himself  a 
hundred  times  amongst  these  details,  had  not  little  Mrs  Joliflfe 
guided  him  with  a  firm  hand.  So  it  came  to  pass,  that  Corporal 
Joliffe  obeyed  his  wife  without  owning  it,  doubtless  thinking  to 
himself,  like  the  philosopher  Sancho,  "  a  woman's  advice  is  no  such 
great  thing,  but  he  must  be  a  fool  who  does  not  listen  to  it." 

It  is  now  time  to  say  a  few  words  of  the  two  foreign  women  already 
alluded  to  more  than  once.  They  were  both  about  forty  years 
old,  and  one  of  them  well  deserved  to  take  first  rank  amongst  cele- 
brated female  travellers.  The  name  of  Paulina  Barnett,  the  rival 
of  the  Pfeiffers,  Tinnis,  and  Haimaires  of  Hull,  has  been  several  times 
honourably  mentioned  at  the  meetings  of  the  Royal  Geographical 
Society.  In  her  journeys  up  the  Brahmaputra,  as  far  as  the 
mountains  of  Thibet,  across  an  unknown  corner  of  New  Holland, 
from  Swan  Bay  to  the  Gulf  of  Carpentaria,  Paulina  Barnett  had 
given  proof  of  the  qualities  of  a  great  traveller.  She  had  been  a 
widow  for  fifteen  years,  and  her  passion  for  travelling  led  her  con- 
stantly to  explore  new  lands.  She  was  tall,  and  her  face,  framed 
in  long  braids  of  hair,  already  touched  with  white,  was  full  of 
energy.  She  was  near-sighted,  and  a  double  eye-glass  rested  upon 
her  long  straight  nose,  with  its  mobile  nostrils.  We  must  confess 
that  her  walk  was  somewhat  masculine,  and  her  whole  appearance 
was  suggestive  of  moral  power,  rather  than  of  female  grace.     She 


A  SOIRi.E  A  T  FORT  RELIANCE. 


was  an  Englishwoman  from  Yorkshire,  possessed  of  some  fortune, 
the  greater  part  of  which  was  expended  in  adventurous  expeditions, 
and  some  new  scheme  of  exploration  had  now  brought  her  to  Fort 
Reliance.  Having  crossed  the  equinoctial  regions,  she  was  doubt- 
less anxious  to  penetrate  to  the  extreme  limits  of  the  hyperborean. 
Her  presence  at  the  fort  was  an  event.  The  governor  of  the 
Company  had  given  her  a  special  letter  of  recommendation  to 
Captain  Craventy,  according  to  which  the  latter  was  to  do  all  in  his 
power  to  forward  the  design  of  the  celebrated  traveller  to  reach  the 
borders  of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  A  grand  enterprise !  To  follow  in 
the  steps  of  Hearne,  Mackenzie,  Rae,  Franklin,  and  others.  What 
fatigues,  what  trials,  what  dangers  would  have  to  be  gone  through 
in  the  conflict  with  the  terrible  elements  of  the  Polar  climate !  How 
could  a  woman  dare  to  venture  where  so  many  explorers  have  drawn 
back  or  perished  ?  But  the  stranger  now  shut  up  in  Fort  Reliance 
was  no  ordinary  woman ;  she  was  Paulina  Barnett,  a  laureate  of  the 
Royal  Society. 

We  must  add  that  the  celebrated  traveller  was  accompanied  by 
a  servant  named  Madge.  This  faithful  creature  was  not  merely  a 
servant,  but  a  devoted  and  courageous  friend,  who  lived  only  for 
her  mistress.  A  Scotchwoman  of  the  old  type,  whom  a  Caleb 
might  have  married  without  loss  of  dignity.  Madge  was  about  five 
years  older  than  Mrs  Barnett,  and  was  tall  and  strongly  built.  The 
two  were  on  the  most  intimate  terms ;  Paulina  looked  upon  Madge  as 
an  elder  sister,  and  Madge  treated  Paulina  ;is  her  daughter. 

It  was  in  honour  of  Paulina  Barnett  that  Captain  Craventy  was 
this  evening  treating  his  employes  and  the  Chippeway  Indians.  In 
fact,  the  lady  traveller  was  to  join  the  expedition  of  Jaspar  Hobson 
for  the  exploration  of  the  north.  It  was  for  Paulina  Barnett  that 
the  large  saloon  of  the  factory  resounded  with  joyful  hurrahs.  And 
it  was  no  wonder  that  the  stove  consumed  a  hundredweight  of  coal 
on  this  memorable  evening,  for  the  cold  outside  was  t\venty-f*>ur 
degrees  Fahrenheit  below  zero,  and  Fort  Reliance  is  situated  in 
61°  47'  N.  Lat.,  at  least  four  degrees  from  the  Polar  circle. 


CHAPTER  IL 

THE  Hudson's  bay  fur  company, 

tAPTAIX  Craventy  ? '» 
'' Mrs  Barnett  r' 
"  What    do    you    think   of    your   Lieutenant,  Jaspar 
Hobsonl" 

"  I  think  he  is  an  officer  who  will  go  far." 

*'  What  do  you  mean  by  the  words,  Will  go  far  ?  Do  you  mean 
that  he  will  go  beyond  the  Twenty-fourth  parallel?" 

Captain  Craventy  could  not  help  smiling  at  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett's 
question.  They  were  talking  together  near  the  stove,  whilst  the 
guests  were  passing  backwards  and  forwards  between  the  eating 
and  drinking  tables. 

"  Madam,"  replied  the  Captain,  "  all  that  a  man  can  do,  will  be 
done  by  Jaspar  Hobson.  The  Company  has  charged  him  to  explore 
the  north  of  their  possessions,  and  to  establish  a  factory  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  confines  of  the  American  continent^  and  he  will 
establish  it." 

"  That  is  a  great  responsibility  for  Lieutenant  Hobson  1"  said 
the  traveller. 

"  It  is.  Madam,  but  Jaspar  Hobson  has  never  yet  drawn  back 
from  a  task  imposed  upon  him,  however  formidable  it  may  have 
appeared," 

"  I  can  quite  believe  it.  Captain,"  replied  Mrs  Bamett,  "  and  we 
shall  now  see  the  Lieutenant  at  work.  But  what  induces  the  Com- 
pany to  construct  a  fort  on  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  I " 

"  They  have  a  powerful  motive.  Madam,"  replied  the  Captain. 
"  I  may  add  a  double  motive.  At  no  very  distant  date,  Russia  will 
probably  cede  her  American  possessions  to  the  Government  of  the 
United  States.^  When  this  cession  has  taken  place,  the  Company 
will  find  access  to  the  Pacific  Ocean  extremely  difficult,  unless  the 
North-west  passage  discovered  by  M'Clure  be  practicable.  Fresh 
^  Captain  Craventy's  prophecy  has  since  been  realised. 


THE    AJaLEITAL    OF    THOMAS    BLACSL.  Page  14:, 


THE  Hudson's  bay  fur  company.  g 

explorations  will  decide  this,  for  the  Admiralty  is  about  to  send  a 
vessel  which  will  coast  along  the  North  American  continent,  from 
Behring  Strait  to  Coronation  Gulf,  on  the  eastern  side  of  which  the 
new  fort  is  to  be  established.  If  the  enterprise  succeed,  this  point 
will  become  an  important  factory,  the  centre  of  the  northern  fur 
trade.  The  transport  of  furs  across  the  Indian  territories  involves 
a  vast  expenditure  of  time  and  money,  whereas,  if  the  new  route  be 
available,  steamers  will  take  them  from  the  new  fort  to  the  Pacific 
Ocean  in  a  few  days." 

"  That  would  indeed  be  an  important  result  of  the  enterprise,  if 
this  North-west  passage  can  really  be  used,"  replied  Mrs  Paulina 
Barnett ;  "  but  I  think  you  spoke  of  a  double  motive." 

"  I  did.  Madam,"  said  the  Captain,  "  and  I  alluded  to  a  matter  of 
vital  interest  to  the  Company.  But  I  must  beg  of  you  to  allow  me 
to  explain  to  you  in  a  few  words  how  the  present  state  of  things 
came  about,  how  it  is  in  fact  that  the  very  source  of  the  trade  of 
this  once  flourishing  Company  is  in  danger  of  destruction." 

The  Captain  then  proceeded  to  give  a  brief  sketch  of  the  history 
of  the  famous  Hudson's  Bay  Company. 

In  the  earliest  times  men  employed  the  skins  and  furs  of  animals 
as  clothing.  The  fur  trade  is  therefore  of  very  great  antiquity. 
Luxury  in  dress  increased  to  such  an  extent,  that  sumptuary  laws 
were  enacted  to  control  too  great  extravagance,  especially  in  furs,  for 
which  there  was  a  positive  passion.  Vair  and  the  furs  of  Siberian 
squirrels  were  prohibited  at  the  middle  of  the  1 2th  century.  -^ 

In  1553  Russia  founded  several  establishments  in  the  northern 
steppes,  and  England  lost  no  time  in  following  her  example.  The 
trade  in  sables,  ermines,  and  beavers,  was  carried  on  through  the 
agency  of  the  Samoiedes ;  but  during  the  reign  of  Elizabeth,  a  royal 
decree  restricted  the  use  of  costly  furs  to  such  an  extent,  that  for 
several  years  this  branch  of  industry  was  completely  paralysed. 

On  the  2nd  May,  1670,  a  licence  to  trade  in  furs  in  the  Hudson's 
Bay  Territory  was  granted  to  the  Company,  which  numbered  several 
men  of  high  rank  amongst  its  shareholders  :  the  Duke  of  York,  the 
Duke  of  Albemarle,  the  Earl  of  Shaftesbury,  &c.  Its  capital  was 
then  only  £8420.  Private  companies  were  formidable  rivals  to  its 
success  ;  and  French  agents,  making  Canada  their  headquarters, 
ventured  on  hazardous  but  most  lucrative  expeditions.  The  active 
competition  of  these  bold  hunters  threatened  the  very  existence  of 
the  infant  Company. 


10  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


The  conquest  of  Canada,  however,  somewhat  lessened  the  danger 
of  its  position.  Three  years  after  the  taking  of  Quebec,  1776,  the 
fur  trade  received  a  new  impulse.  English  traders  became  familiar 
with  the  difficulties  of  trade  of  this  kind ;  they  learned  the 
customs  of  the  country,  the  ways  of  the  Indians  and  their  system 
of  exchange  of  goods,  but  for  all  this  the  Company  as  yet  made  no 
profits  whatever.  Moreover,  towards  1784  some  merchants  of 
Montreal  combined  to  explore  the  fur  country,  and  founded  that 
powerful  North-west  Company,  which  soon  became  the  centre  of  the 
fur  trade.  In  1798  the  new  Company  shipped  furs  to  the  value  of 
no  less  than  £120,000,  and  the  existence  of  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  was  again  threatened. 

We  must  add,  that  the  North-west  Company  shrank  from  no  act, 
however  iniquitous,  if  •  its  interests  were  at  stake.  Its  agents 
imposed  on  their  own  employes,  speculated  on  the  misery  of  the 
Indians,  robbed  them  when  they  had  themselves  made  them  drunk, 
setting  at  defiance  the  Act  of  Parliament  forbidding  the  sale  of 
spirituous  liquors  on  Indian  territory  ;  and  consequently  realising 
immense  profits,  in  spite  of  the  competition  of  the  various  Russian 
and  American  companies  which  had  sprung  up — the  American  Fur 
Company  amongst  others,  founded  in  1809,  with  a  capital  of  a 
million  of  dollars,  which  was  carrying  on  operations  on  the  west 
of  the  Rocky  Mountains. 

The  Hudson's  Bay  Company  was  probably  in  greater  danger  of 
ruin  than  any  other  ;  but  in  1821,  after  much  discussion,  a  treaty  was 
made,  in  accordance  with  which  its  old  rival  the  North-west  Company 
became  amalgamated  with  it,  the  two  receiving  the  common  title  of 
*'  The  Hudson's  Bay  Fur  Company." 

Now  the  only  rival  of  this  important  association  is  the  American 
St  Louis  Fur  Company.  The  Hudson's  Bay  Company  has  numerous 
establishments  scattered  over  a  domain  extending  over  3,700,000 
square  miles.  Its  principal  factories  are  situated  on  James  Bay, 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Severn,  in  the  south,  and  towards  the  frontiers 
of  Upper  Canada,  on  Lakes  Athapeskow,  Winnipeg,  Superior, 
Methye,  Buffalo,  and  near  the  Colombia,  Mackenzie,  Saskatchewan, 
and  Assiniboin  rivers,  &c.  Fort  York,  commanding  the  course  of 
the  river  Nelson,  is  the  headquarters  of  the  Company,  and  contains 
its  principal  fur  depot.  Moreover,  in  1842  it  took  a  lease  of 
all  the  Russian  establishments  in  North  America  at  an  annual 
rent  of  £40,000,  so  that  it  is  now  working  on  its  own  account 


THE  Hudson's  bay  fur  company. 


ir 


the  vast  tracts  of  country  between  the  Mississippi  and  the  Pacific 
Ocean.  It  has  sent  out  intrepid  explorers- in  every  direction: 
Hearne.  towards  the  Polar  Sea,  in  1770,  to  the  discovery  of  the  Cop- 
permine River;  Franklin,  in  1819  to  1822,  along  5550  miles  of  the 
American  coast ;  Mackenzie,  who,  after  having  discovered  the  river 
to  which  he  gave  his  name,  reached  the  shores  of  the  Pacific  at 
52°  24'  N.  Lat.  The  following  is  a  list  of  the  quantities  of  skins 
and  furs  despatched  to  Europe  by  the  lludson's  Bay  Company  in 
1833-34,  which  will  give  an  exact  idea  of  the  extent  of  its  trade  : — 


Beavers,  . 

. 

1,074 

Skins  and  young 

Beavers, 

.      92,288 

Musk  Rats, 

694,092 

Badgers, . 

1,069 

Bears,       .             , 

7,451 

Ermines, 

491 

Foxes,      . 

9,937 

Lynxes,    .             , 

14,255 

Sables,     .    ' 

.      64,490 

Polecats, . 

.       25,100 

Otters,     . 

22,303 

Racoons, . 

713 

Swans,     . 

7,918 

Wolves,   . 

8,484 

Wolverines, 

1,571 

Such  figures  ought  to  bring  in  a  large  profit  to  the  Hudson's 
Bay  Company,  but  unfortunately  they  have  not  been  maintained, 
and  for  the  last  twenty  years  have  been  decreasing. 

The  cause  of  this  decline  was  the  subject  of  Captain  Craventy's 
explanation  to  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett. 

**  Until  1839,  Madam,"  said  he,  "  the  Company  was  in  a  flourish- 
ing condition.  In  that  year  the  number  of  furs  exported  was 
2,350,000,  but  since  then  the  trade  has  gradually  declined,  and 
this  number  is  now  reduced  by  one-half  at  least." 

"  But  what  do  you  suppose  is  the  cause  of  this  extraordinary 
decrease  in  the  exportation  of  furs  1 "  inquired  Mrs  Barnett. 

"The  depopulation  of  the  hunting  territories,  caused  by  the 
activity,  and,  I  must  add,  the  want  of  foresight  of  the  hunters. 
The  game  was  trapped  and  killed  without  mercy.  These  massacres 
were  conducted  in  the  most  reckless  and  short-sighted  fashion. 
Even  females  witii  young  and  their  little  ones  did  not  escape.  The 
consequence  is,  that  the  animals  whose  fur  is  valuable  have  become 
extremely  rare.     The  otter  has  almost  entirely  disappeared,  and  is 


I 


12  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

only  to  be  found  near  the  islands  of  the  North  Pacific.  Small 
colonies  of  beavers  have  taken  refuge  on  tlie  shores  of  the  most  dis- 
tant rivers.  It  is  the  same  with  many,  other  animals,  compelled  to 
flee  before  the  invasion  of  the  hunters.  The  traps,  once  crowded 
with  game,  are  now  empty.  The  price  of  skins  is  rising  just  when 
a  great  demand  exists  for  furs.  Hunters  have  gone  away  in  disgust, 
leaving  none  but  the  most  intrepid  and  indefatigable,  who  now 
penetrate  to  the  very  confines  of  the  American  continent." 

*'  Yes,"  said  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett,  "  the  fact  of  the  fur-bearing 
animals  having  taken  refuge  beyond  the  polar  circle,  is  a  sufficient 
explanation  of  the  Company's  motive  in  founding  a  factory  on  the 
borders  of  the  Arctic  Ocean." 

"Not  only  so.  Madam,"  replied  the  Captain,  "the  Company  is  also 
compelled  to  seek  a  more  northern  centre  of  operations,  for  an  Act 
of  Parliament  has  lately  greatly  reduced  its  domain.'' 

"  And  the  motive  for  this  reduction  % "  inquired  the  traveller. 
*'  A  very  important  question  of  political  economy  was  involved, 
Madam  ;  one  which  could  not  fail  greatly  to  interest  the  statesmen 
of  Great  Britain.  In  a  word,  the  interests  of  the  Company  and 
those  of  civilisation  are  antagonistic.  It  is  to  the  interest  of  the 
Company  to  keep  the  territory  belonging  to  it  in  a  wild  unculti- 
vated condition.  Every  attempt  at  clearing  ground  was  pitilessly 
put  a  stop  to,  as  it  drove  away  the  wild  animals,  so  that  the  mono- 
poly enjoyed  by  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  was  detrimental  to 
all  agricultural  enterprise.  All  questions  not  immediately  relating 
to  their  own  particular  trade,  were  relentle.^^sly  put  aside  by  the 
governors  of  the  association.  It  was  this  despotic,  and,  in  a  certain 
sense,  immoral  system,  which  provoked  the  measures  taken  by  Par- 
liament, and,  in  1837,  a  commission  appointed  by  the  Colonial 
Secretary  decided  that  it  was  necessary  to  annex  to  Canada  all  the 
territories  suitable  for  cultivation,  such  as  the  Red  River  and  Sas- 
katchewan districts,  and  to  leave  to  the  Company  only  that  portion 
of  its  land  which  appeared  to  be  incapable  of  future  civilisation. 
The  next  year  the  Company  lost  the  western  slopes  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains,  which  it  held  direct  from  the  Colonial  Office,  and  you 
will  now  understand.  Madam,  how  the  agents  of  the  Company,  hav- 
ing lost  their  power  over  their  old  territories,  are  determined  before 
giving  up  their  trade  to  try  to  work  the  little  known  countries  of 
the  north,  and  so  open  a  communication  with  the  Pacific  by  means 
of  the  North-west  passage." 


A   SAVANT   THAWED,  —  Pa^^e   15. 


THE  HUDSON 's  BA  Y  FUR  COMPANY.  1 3 


Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  was  now  well  informed  as  to  the  ulterior 
projects  of  the  celebrated  Company.  Captain  Craventy  had  given 
her  a  graphic  sketch  of  the  situation,  and  it  is  probable  he  would 
have  entered  into  further  details,  had  not  an  incident  cut  short  his 
harangue. 

Corporal  Joliffe  announced  in  a  loud  voice  that,  with  Mrs  Joliffe's 
assistance,  he  was  about  to  mix  the  punch.  This  news  was  received 
as  it  deserved.  The  bowl — or  rather,  the  basin — was  filled  with 
the  precious  liquid.  It  contained  no  less  than  ten  pints  of  coarse 
rum.  Sugar,  measured  out  by  Mrs  Joliflfe,  was  piled  up  at  the 
bottom,  and  on  the  top  floated  slices  of  lemon  shrivelled  with' age. 
Nothing  remained  to  be  done  but  to  light  this  alcoholic  hike,  and 
the  Corporal,  match  in  hand,  awaited  the  order  of  his  Captain,  as  if 
he  were  about  to  spring  a  mine. 

"All  right,  Joliffe !"  at  last  said  Captain  Craventy. 

The  light  was  applied  to  the  bowl,  and  in  a  moment  the  punch 
was  in  flames,  whilst  the  guests  applauded  and  clapped  their  hands. 
Ten  minutes  afterwards,  full  glasses  of  the  delightful  beverage  were 
circulating  amongst  the  guests,  fresh  bidders  for  them  coming  for- 
ward in  endless  succession,  like  speculators  on  the  Stock  Exchange. 

"  Hurrah  !  hurrah  !  hurrah  I  three  cheers  for  Mrs  Barnett !  A 
cheer  for  the  Captain." 

In  the  midst  of  these  joyful  shouts  cries  were  heard  from  outside. 
Silence  immediately  fell  upon  the  company  assembled. 

"Sergeant  Long,"  said  the  Captain,  "go  and  see  what  is  the 
matter." 

And  at  his  chiefs  order,  the  Sergeant,  leaving  his  glass  unfinished, 
left  the  room. 


CHAPTER  HI. 

A    SAVANT   THAWED. 

|)ERGEANT  LONG  liastened  to  the  narrow  passage  from 
\^J^  which  opened  the  outer  door  of  the  fort,  and  heard  the 
cries  redoubled,  and  combined  with  violent  blows  on  the 
postern  gate,  surrounded  by  high  walls,  which  gave  access  to  the 
court.  The  Sergeant  pushed  open  the  door,  and  plunging  into  the 
snow,  already  a  foot  deep  ;  he  waded  through  it,  although  half- 
blinded  by  the  cutting  sleet,  and  nipped  by  the  terrible  cold. 

"  What  the  devil  does  any  one  want  at  this  time  of  night  1 " 
exclaimed  the  Sergeant  to  himself,  as  he  mechanically  removed  the 
heavy  bars  of  the  gate  ;  "  none  but  Esquimaux  would  dare  to  brave 
such  a  temperature  as  this  !  " 

"  Open  1  open  1  open  !  "  they  shouted  from  without. 

"I  am  opening,"  replied  Sergeant  Long,  who  really  seemed  to  be 
a  long  time  about  it. 

At  last  the  door  swung  open,  and  the  Sergeant  was  almost  upset 
by  a  sledge,  drawn  by  six  dogs,  which  dashed  past  him  like  a  flash 
of  lightning.  Worthy  Sergeant  Long  only  just  escaped  being  crushed, 
but  he  got  up  without  a  murmur,  closed  the  gate,  and  returned  to 
the  house  at  his  ordinary  pace,  that  is  to  say,  at  the  rate  of  seventy- 
five  .strides  a  minute. 

But  Captain  Craventy,  Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobspn,  and  Corporal 
Joliffe  were  already  outside,  braving  the  intense  cold,  and  staring 
at  the  sledge,  white  with  snow,  which  had  just  drawn  up  in  front 
of  them. 

A  man  completely  enveloped  in  furs  now  descended  from  it. 

"  Fort  Reliance  1 "  he  inquired. 

"  The  same,"  replied  the  Captain. 

"  Captain  Craventy  1 " 

"  Behold  him  !     Who  are  you  ? " 

*'  A  courier  of  the  Company." 

"  Are  you  alone  ?  '* 


A  SA  VANT  THA  WED.  1 5 

"  No,  I  bring  a  traveller." 

*' A  traveller  !  And  what  does  he  want?" 

"  He  is  come  to  see  the  moon." 

At  this  reply,  Captain  Craventy  said  to  himself  the  man  must  be 
a  fool.  But  there  was  no  time  to  announce  this  opinion,  for  the 
courier  had  taken  an  inert  mass  from  the  sledge,  a  kind  of  bag 
covered  with  snow,  and  was  about  to  carry  it  into  the  house,  when 
the  Captain  inquired —  -^ 

"What  is  that  bagT' 

"  It  is  my  traveller,"  replied  the  courier. 

"  Who  is  this  traveller  ?  " 

"  The  astronomer,  Thomas  Black." 

**  But  he  is  frozen." 

"Well,  he  must  be  thawed." 

Thomas  Black,  carried  by  the  Sergeant,  the  Corporal,  and  the 
courier,  now  made  his  entrance  into  the  house  of  the  fort,  and  was 
taken  to  a  room  on  the  first  floor,  the  temperature  of  which  was 
bearable,  thanks  to  a  glowing  stove.  He  was  laid  upon  a  bed,  and 
the  Captain  took  his  hand. 

It  was  literally  frozen.  The  wrappers  and  furred  mantles,  in 
which  Thomas  Black  was  rolled  up  like  a  parcel  requiring  care,  were 
removed,  and  revealed  a  man  of  about  fifty.  He  was  short  and 
stout,  his  hair  was  already  touched  with  grey,  his  beard  was  un- 
trimmed,  his  eyes  were  closed,  and  his  lips  pressed  together  as  if 
glued  to  one  another.  If  he  breathed  at  all,  it  was  so  slightly  that 
the  frost-work  on  the  windows  would  not  have  been  aff"ected  by  it. 
Joliffe  undressed  him,  and  turned  him  rapidly  on  to  his  face  and 
back  again,  with  the  words — 

"  Come,  come,  sir,  when  do  you  mean  to  return  to  conscious- 
ness 1 " 

But  the  visitor  who  had  arrived  in  so  strange  a  manner  showed 
no  signs  of  returning  life,  and  Corporal  Joliffe  could  think  of  no 
better  means  to  restore  the  lost  vital  heat  tlian  to  give  him  a  bath 
in  the  bowl  of  hot  punch. 

Very  happily  for  Thomas  Black,  however,  Lieutenant  Jaspar 
Hobson  had  another  idea. 

"  Snow,  bring  snow  !  "  he  cried. 

There  was  plenty  of  it  in  the  court  of  Fort  Reliance ; — and 
whilst  the  Sergeant  went  to  fetch  the  snow,  Joliffe  removed  all 
the  astronomer's  clothes.     The  body  of  the  unfortunate  man  was 


1 6  THE  FUR  CO  UNTR  Y. 


covered  with  white  frost-bitten  patches.  It  was  urgently  neces- 
sary to  restore  the  circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  affected  por- 
tions. This  result  Jaspar  Hobson  hoped  to  obtain  by  vigorous 
friction  with  the  snow.  We  know  that  this  is  the  means  generally 
employed  in  the  polar  countries  to  set  going  afresh  the  circulation 
of  the  blood  arrested  by  the  intense  cold,  even  as  the  rivers  are 
arrested  in  their  courses  by  the  icy  touch  of  winter^  Sergeant 
Long  soon  returned,  and  he  and  Joliffe  gave  the  new  arrival  such 
a  rubbing  as  he  had  probably  never  before  received.  It  Vvas  no 
soft  and  agreeable  friction,  but  a  vigorous  shampooing  most  lustily 
performed,  more  like  the  scratching  of  a  curry-comb  than  the 
caresses  of  a  human  hand. 

And  during  the  operation  the  loquacious  Corporal  continued  ta 
exhort  the  unconscious  traveller. 

"  Come,  come,  sir.  What  do  you  mean  by  getting  frozen  like 
this.     Now,  don't  be  so  obstinate  !  " 

Probably  it  was  obstinacy  which  kept  Thomas  Black  from  deign- 
ing to  show  a  sign  of  life.  At  the  end  of  half  an  hour  the  rubbers 
began  to  despair,  and  were  about  to  discontinue  their  exhausting 
efforts,  when  the  poor  man  sighed  several  times. 

"  He  lives  ;  he  is  coming  to  !  "  cried  Jaspar  Hobson. 

After  having  warmed  the  outside  of  his  body,  Corporal  Joliffe 
hurried  to  do  the  same  for  the  inside,  and  hastily  fetched  a  few 
glasses  of  the  punch.  The  traveller  really  felt  much  revived  by 
them ;  the  colour  returned  to  his  cheeks,  expression  to  his  eyes,  and 
words  to  his  lips,  so  that  Captain  Craventy  began  to  hope  that  he 
should  have  an  explanation  from  Tliomas  Black  himself  of  his  strange 
arrival  at  the  fort  in  such  a  terrible  condition. 

At  last  the  traveller,  well  covered  with  wraps,  rose  on  his  elbow^ 
and  said  in  a  voice  still  faint — 

"  Fort  Reliance  ?  " 

*'  The  same,"  replied  the  Captain. 

"  Captain  Craventy  ?  " 

"  He  is  before  you,  and  is  happy  to  bid  you  welcome.  But  may 
I  inquire  what  brings  you  to  Fort  Reliance?" 

"  He  is  come  to  see  the  moon,"  replied  the  courier,  who  evidently 
thought  this  a  happy  answer. 

It  satisfied  Thomas  Black  too,  for  he  beat  his  head  in  assent  and 
resumed — 

'•  Lieutenant  Hobson  ]  "    . 


THOMAS   BLACK    INTRODUCES    HIMSELF. Page  16 


A  SA  VANT  THA  WED.  1/ 


-"  I  am  here,"  replied  the  Lieutenant, 

"  You  have  not  yet  started  %  " 

"  Not  yet,  sin" 

"  Then,"  replied  Thomas  Black,  "  I  have  only  to  thank  you,  and 
to  go  to  sleep  until  to-morrow  morning/' 

The  Captain  and  his  companions  retired,  leaving  their  strange 
visitor  to  his  repose.  Half  an  hour  later  the  fete  was  at  an  end,  and 
the  guests  had  regained  their  respective  homes,  either  in  the  diflftrent 
rooms  of  the  fort,  or  the  scattered  houses  outside  the  enceinte. 

The  next  day  Thomas  Black  was  rather  better.  His  vigorous 
constitution  had  thrown  off  the  effects  of  the  tenible  chill  he  had 
had.  Any  one  else  would  have  died  from  it ;  but  he  was  uot  like 
other  men. 

And  now  who  was  this  astronomer  ?  Where  did  he  come  from  ? 
Why  had  he  undertaken  this  journey  across  the  territories  of  the 
Company  in  the  depth  of  winter  %  What  did  the  courier's  reply 
signify] — To  see  the  moon!  The  moon  could  be  seen  anywhere; 
there  was  no  need  to  come  to  the  hyperborean  regions  to  look 
at  it! 

Such  were  the  thoughts  which  passed  through  Captain  Craventy's 
mind.  But  the  next  day,  after  an  hour's  talk  with  his  new  guest, 
he  had  learned  all  he  wished  to  know. 

Thomas  Black  was  an  astronomer  attached  to  the  Greenwich 
Observatory,  so  brilliantly  presided  over  by  Professor  Airy.  Mr 
Black  was  no  theorist,  but  a  sagacious  and  intelligent  observer ; 
and  in  the  twenty  years  during  which  he  had  devoted  himself  to 
astronomy,  he  had  rendered  great  services  to  the  science  of  ourano- 
graphy.  In  private  life  he  was  a  simple  nonentity  ;  he  existed  only 
for  astronomy;  he  lived  in  the  heavens,  not  upon  the  earth ;  and  was 
a  true  descendant  of  the  witty  La  Fontaine's  savant  who  fell  into 
a  well.  He  could  talk  of  nothing  but  stars  and  constellations.  He 
ought  to  have  lived  in  a  telescope.  As  an  observer  he  had  not  his 
rival;  his  patience  was  inexhaustible ;  he  could  watch  for  months  for 
a  cosmical  phenomenon.  He  had  a  specialty  of  his  own,  too ;  he 
had  studied  luminous  meteors  and  shooting  stars,  and  his  discoveries 
in  this  branch  of  astronomical  science  were  considerable.  When-- 
ever  minute  observations  or  exact  measurements  and  definitions 
were  required,  Thomas  Black  was  chosen  for  the  service  ;  for  his 
clearness  of  sight  was  something  remarkable.  -  The  power  of  obser 
vation  is  not  given  to  every  one,  and  it  will  not  therefore  be  surpris 

B 


1 8  T^E  EUR  CO  UNTR  Y. 


ing  that  the  Greenwich  astronomer  should  have  been  chosen  for  the 
mission  we  are  about  to  describe,  which  involved  results  so  interest- 
ing for  selenographic  science. 

We  know  that  during  a  total  eclipse  of  the  sun  the  moon  is 
surrounded  by  a  luminous  corona.  But  what  is  the  origin  of  this 
corona  ?  Ig  it  a  real  substance  1  or  is  it  only  an  effect  of  the  diffrac- 
tion of  the  sun's  rays  near  the  moon  1  This  is  a  question  which 
science  has  hitherto  been  unable  to  answer. 

As  early  as  1706  this  luminous  halo  was  scientifically  described. 
The  corona  was  minutely  examined  during  the  total  eclipse  of 
1715  by  Lonville  and  Halley,  by  Maraldi  in  1724,  by  Antonio  de' 
Ulloa  in  1778,  and  by  Bonditch  and  Ferrer  in  1806  ;  but  their 
theories  were  so  contradictory  that  no  definite  conclusion  could  be 
arrived  at.  During  the  total  eclipse  of  1842,  learned  men  of  all 
nations — Airy,  Arago,  Keytal,  Langier,  Mauvais,  Otto,  Struve,  Petit, 
Baily,  &c. — endeavoured  to  solve  the  mystery  of  the  origin  of  the 
phenomenon ;  but  in  spite  of  all  their  efforts,  "  the  disagreement," 
says  Arago,  **  of  the  observations  taken  in  different  places  by  skilful 
astronomers  of  one  and  the  same  eclipse,  have  involved  the  question 
in  fresh  obscurity,  so  that  it  is  now  impossible  to  come  to  any  certain 
conclusion  as  to  the  cause  of  the  phenomenon."  Since  this  was 
written,  other  total  eclipses  have  been  studied  with  no  better 
results. 

Yet  the  solution  of  the  question  is  of  such  vast  importance  to 
selenographic  science  that  no  price  would  be  too  great  to  pay  for 
it.  A  fresh  opportunity  was  now  about  to  occur  to  study  the 
much-discussed  corona.  A  total  eclipse  of  the  sun — total,  at  least, 
for  the  extreme  north  of  America,  for  Spain  and  North  Africa — 
was  to  take  place  on  July  18th,  1860.  It  was  arranged  between  the 
astronomers  of  different  countries  that  simultaneous  observations 
should  be  taken  at  the  various  points  of  the  zone  where  the  eclipse 
would  be  total.  Thomas  Black  was  chosen  for  the  expedition  to 
North  America,  and  was  now  much  in  the  same  situation  as  the 
English  astronomers  who  were  transported  to  Norway  and  Sweden 
on  the  occasion  of  the  eclipse  of  1851. 

It  will  readily  be  imagined  that  Thomas  Black  seized  with 
avidity  the  opportunity  offered  him  of  studying  this  luminous  halo. 
He  was  also  to  examine  into  the  nature  of  the  red  prominences 
which  appear  on  different  parts  of  the  edge  of  the  terrestrial 
satellite  when    the  totality  of  the  eclipse  has    commenced  ;   and 


A  SAVANT  THAWED.  1 9 

should  he  be  able  satisfactorily  to  establish  their  origin,  he  would 
be  entitled  to  the  applause  of  the  learned  men  of  all  Europe. 

Thomas  Black  eagerly  prepared  for  his  journey.  He  obtained 
urgent  letters  of  recommendation  to  the  principal  agents  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company.  He  ascertained  that  an  expedition  was 
to  go  to  the  extreme  north  of  the  continent  to  found  a  new  fort. 
It  was  an  opportunity  not  to  be  lost ;  so  he  set  out,  crossed  the 
Atlantic,  landed  at  New  York,  traversed  the  lakes  to  the  Red  River 
settlement,  and  pressed  on  from  fort  to  fort  in  a  sledge,  under  the 
escort  of  a  courier  of  the  Company ;  in  spite  of  the  severity  of  the 
winter,  braving  all  the  dangers  of  a  journey  across  the  Arctic 
regions,  and  arriving  at  Fort  Reliance  on  the  19th  March  in  the 
condition  we  have  described. 

Such  was  the  explanation  given  by  the  astronomer  to  Captain 
Craventy.  He  at  once  placed  himself  entirely  at  Mr  Black's 
service,  but  could  not  refrain  from  inquiring  why  he  had  been  in 
such  a  great  hurry  to  arrive,  when  the  eclipse  was  not  to  take  place 
until  the  following  year,  1860? 

"  But,  Captain,"  replied  the  astronomer,  "  I  heard  that  the  Com- 
pany was  sending  an  expedition  along  the  northern  coast  of  America, 
and  I  did  not  wish  to  miss  the  departure  of  Lieutenant  Hobson." 

"  Mr  Black,"  replied  the  Captain,  '*  if  the  Lieutenant  had  already 
started,  I  should  have  felt  it  my  duty  to  accompany  you  myself  to 
the  shores  of  the  Polar  Sea." 

And  with  fresh  assurances  of  his  willingness  to  serve  him,  the 
Captain  again  bade  his  new  guest  welcome  to  Fort  Reliance. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

A  FACTORY. 

^^vv  NE  of  tlie  largest  of  the  lakes  beyond  the  61st  parallel  is  that 
<^rlj(^  called  the  Great  Slave  Lake ;  it  is  two  hundred  and  fifty 
V^S^  miles  long  by  fifty  across,  and  is  situated  exactly  at  61° 
25'  N.  lat.  and  114°  W.  long.  The  surrounding  districts  slope 
down  to  it,  and  it  completely  fills  a  vast  natural  hollow.  The 
position  of  the  lake  in  the  very  centre  of  the  hunting  districts, 
once  swarming  with  game,  early  attracted  the  attention  of  the 
Company.  Numerous  streams  either  take  their  rise  from  it  or 
flow  into  it — the  Mackenzie,  the  Athabasca,"  <fec. ;  and  several  im- 
portant forts  have  been  constructed  on  its  shores — Fort  Providence 
on  the  north,  and  Fort  Resolution  on  the  south.  Fort  Reliance  is 
situated  on  the  north-east  extremity,  and  is  about  three  hundred 
miles  from  the  Chesterfield  inlet,  a  long  narrow  estuary  formed  by 
the  waters  of  Hudson's  Bay. 

The  Great  Slave  Lake  is  dotted  with  little  islands,  the  granite 
and  gneiss  of  which  they  are  formed  jutting  up  in  several  places. 
Its  northern  banks  are  clothed  with  thick  woods,  shutting  out  the 
barren  frozen  district  beyond,  not  inaptly  called  the  "  Cursed 
Land."  The  southern  regions,  on  the  other  hand,  are  flat,  without 
a  rise  of  any  kind,  and  the  soil  is  mostly  calcareous.  The  large 
ruminants  of  the  polar  districts — the  buffaloes  oc  bisons,  the  flesh 
of  which  forms  almost  the  only  food  of  the  Canadian  and  native 
hunters — seldom  go  further  north  than  the  Great  Slave  Lake. 

The  trees  on  the  northern  shores  of  the  lake  form  magnificent 
forests.  We  need  not  be  astonished  at  meetincr  with  such  fine  ve^eta- 
tion  in  this  remote  district.  The  Great  Slave  Lake  is  not  really 
in  a  higher  latitude  than  Stockholm  or  Christiania.  We  have  only 
to  remember  that  the  isothermal  lines,  or  belts  of  equal  heat,  along 
which  heat  is  distributed  in  equal  quantities,  do  not  follow  the 
terrestrial  parallels,  and  that  with  the  same  latitude,  America  is  ever 
80  much  colder  than  Europe.     In  April  the  streets  of  New  York 


THE    START    FROM    FORT   RELIANCE. Page  27. 


I 


A  FACTORY.  21 


are  still  white  with  snow,  yet  the  latitude  of  New  York  is  nearly 
the  same  as  that  of  the  Azores.  The  nature  of  a  country,  its 
position  with  regard  to  the  oceans,  and  even  the  conformation  of  its 
soil,  all  influence  its  climate. 

In  summer  Fort  Reliance  was  surrounded  with  masses  of  verdure, 
refreshing  to  the  sight  after  the  long  dreary  winter.  Timber  was 
plentiful  in  these  forests,  which  consisted  almost  entirely  of  poplar, 
pine,  and  birch.  The  islets  on  the  lake  produced  very  fine  willows. 
Game  was  abundant  in  the  underwood,  even  during  the  bad  season. 
Further  south  the  hunters  from  the  fort  successfully  pursued 
bisons,  elks,  and  Canadian  porcupines,  the  flesh  of  which  is  excellent. 
The  waters  of  the  Slave  Lake  were  full  of  fish  ;  trout  in  them  attained 
to  an  immense  size,  their  weight  often  exceeding  forty  pounds.  Pikes, 
voracious  lobes,  a  sort  of  cbarr  or  grayling  called  "  blue  fish,"  and 
countless  legions  of  tittamegs,  the  Coregonus  of  naturalists,  disported 
themselves  in  the  water,  so  that  the  inhabitants  of  Fort  Reliance 
were  well  supplied  with  food.  Nature  provided  for  all  their  wants ; 
and  clothed  in  the  skins  of  foxes,  martens,  bears,  and  other  Arctic 
animals,  they  were  able  to  brave  the  rigour  of  the  winter. 

The  fort,  properly  so  culled,  consisted  of  a  wooden  house  with  a 
ground-floor  and  one  upper  storey.  In  it  lived  the  commandant  and 
his  officers.  The  barracks  lor  the  soldiers,  the  magazines  of  the 
Company,  and  the  offices  where  exchanges  were  made,  surrounded 
this  house.  A  little  chapel,  which  wanted  nothing  but  a  clergyman, 
and  a  powder-magazine,  completed  the  buildings  of  the  settlement. 
The  whole  was  surrounded  by  palisades  twenty-five  feet  high, 
defended  by  a  small  bastion  with  a  pointed  roof  at  each  of  the  four 
corners  of  the  parallelogram  formed  by  the  enceinte.  The  fort  was 
thus  protected  from  surprise,  a  necessary  jn-ecaution  in  the  days 
when  the  Indians,  instead  of  being  the  purveyors  of  the  Company, 
fought  for  the  independence  of  their  native  land,  and  when  the 
agents  and  soldiers  of  rival  associations  disputed  the  possession  of 
the  rich  fur  country. 

At  that  time  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  employed  about  a 
million  men  on  its  territories.  It  held  supreme  authority  over 
them,  an  authority  which  could  even  inflict  death.  The  governors 
of  the  factories  could  regulate  salaries,  and  arbitrarily  fix  the  price  of 
provisions  and  furs;  and  as  a  result  of  this  irresponsible  power,  C^ey 
often  realised  a  profit  of  no  less  than  three  hundred  per  cent. 

We  shall  see  from  the  following  table,  taken  from  the  "  Voyage 


22 


THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


of  Captain  Robert  Lade,"  on  what  terms  exchanges  were  formerly 
made  with  those  Indians  who  have  since  become  the  best  hunters 
of  the  Company.     Beavers'  skins  were  then  the  currency  employed 
in  buying  and  selling. 
The  Indians  paid — 

skins. 


^ov 

one  gun. 

.     10  beavers' 

ii 

half  a  pound  of  powder, 

»i 

four  pounds  of  shot,             , 

» 

one  axe, 

tt 

six  knives,  . 

f> 

one  pound  of  glass  beadfl,    . 

*t 

one  laced  coat,         .              , 

6        !! 

it 

one  coat  not  laced, 

5 

n 

one  laced  female  dress. 

6 

t* 

one  pound  of  tobacco. 

1 

ft 

one  box  of  powder. 

1 

«« 

one  comb  and  one  looking-j 

;lass,     . 

2 

But  a  few  years  ago  beaver-skins  became  so  scarce  that  the  cur- 
rency had  to  be  changed.  Bison-furs  are  now  the  medium  of  trade. 
When  an  Indian  presents  himself  at  the  fort,  the  agents  of  the 
Company  give  him  as  many  pieces  of  wood  as  he  brings  skins,  and 
he  exchanges  these  pieces  of  wood  for  manufactured  articles  on  the 
premises  ;  and  as  the  Company  fix  the  price  of  the  articles  they  buy 
and  sell,  they  cannot  fail  to  realise  large  profits. 

Such  was  the  mode  of  proceeding  in  Fort  Reliance  and  other 
factories ;  so  that  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  was  able  to  watch  the  work- 
ing of  the  system  during  her  stay,  which  extended  until  the  16th 
April.  Many  a  long  talk  did  she  have  with  Lieutenant  Hobson, 
many  were  the  projects  they  formed,  and  firmly  were  they  both 
determined  to  allow  no  obstacle  to  check  their  advance.  As  for 
Thomas  Black,  he  never  opened  his  lips  except  when  his  own  special 
mission  was  discussed.  He  was  wrapped  up  in  the  subject  of  the 
luminous  corona  and  red  prominences  of  the  moon ;  he  lived  but  to 
solve  the  problem,  and  in  the  end  made  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  nearly 
as  enthusiastic  as  himself.  How  eager  the  two  were  to  cross  the 
Arctic  Circle,  and  how  far  off  the  18th  July  1860  appeared  to 
both,  but  especially  to  the  impatient  Greenwich  astronomer,  can 
easily  be  imagined. 

The  preparations  for  departure  could  not  be  commenced  until  the 
middle  of  March,  and 'a  month  passed  before  they  w^ere  completed. 
In  fact,  it  was  a  formidable  undertaking  to  organise  such  an  ex- 


A  FACTORY.  2$ 


peditioii  for  crossing  the  Polar  regions.  Everything  had  to  be  taken 
with  them — food,  clothes,  tools,  arms,  ammunition,  and  a  nonde- 
script collection  of  various  requisites. 

The  troops,  under  the  command  of  Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobson, 
were  one  chief  and  two  subordinate  officers,  with  ten  soldiers,  three 
of  whom  took  their  wives  with  them.  They  were  all  picked  men, 
chosen  by  Captain  Craventy  on  account  of  their  energy  and  resolution. 
We  append  a  list  of  the  whole  party  : — 


1.  Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobson. 

11,   Sabine,  soldier. 

2.  Sergeant  Long. 

12.  Hope,         do. 

3.   Corporal 

Joliffe. 

13.   Kellet,       do. 

4.  Petersen, 

soldier. 

14.  Mrs  Rae. 

5.  Belcher, 

do. 

15.  MrsJoliflfe. 

6.  Rae, 

do. 

16.  Mrs  Mac-Nab. 

7.  Marbre, 

do. 

17.   Mrs  Paulina  Barnett. 

8.  Garry, 

do. 

18.  Madge. 

9.  Pond, 

do. 

19.  Thomas  Black. 

10.  Mac-Nab, 

do. 

In  all,  nineteen  persons  to  be  transported  several  hundreds  of  miles 
through  a  desert  and  imperfectly-known  country. 

With  this  project  in  view,  however,  the  Company  had  collected 
everything  necessary  for  the  expedition.  A  dozen  sledges,  with 
their  teams  of  dogs,  were  in  readiness.  These  primitive  vehicles 
consisted  of  strong  but  light  planks  joined  together  by  transverse 
bands.  A  piece  of  curved  wood,  turning  up  at  the  end  like  a  skate, 
was  fixed  beneath  the  sledge,  enabling  it  to  cleave  the  snow  without 
sinking  deeply  into  it.  Six  swift  and  intelligent  dogs,  yoked  two 
and  two,  and  controlled  by  the  long  thong  brandished  by  the  driver, 
drew  the  sledges,  and  could  go  at  a  rate  of  fifteen  miles  an 
hour. 

The  wardrobe  of  the  travellers  consisted  of  garments  made  of 
reindeer-skins,  lined  throughout  with  thick  furs.  All  wore  linen 
next  the  skin  as  a  protection  against  the  sudden  changes  of  tempera- 
ture frequent  in  these  latitudes.  Each  one,  officer  or  soldier,  male 
or  female,  wore  seal-skin  boots  sewn  with  twine,  in  the  manufacture 
of  which  the  natives  excel.  These  boots  are  absolutely  impervious, 
and  are  so  flexible  that  they  are  admirably  adapted  for  walking. 
Pine-wood  snow-shoes,  two  or  three  feet  long,  capable  of  supporting 
the  weight  of  a  man  on  the  most  brittle  snow,  and  enabling  him 
to  pass  over  it  with  the  rapidity  of  a  skater  on  ice,  can  oe  fastened 


24  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


to  the  soles  of  the  seal-skin  boots.  Fur  caps  and  deer-skin  belts 
completed  the  costumes. 

For  arms,  Lieutenant  Hobson  had  the  regulation  musketoons 
provided  by  the  Company,  pistols,  ordnance  sabres,  and  plenty  of 
ammunition ;  for  tools  :  axes,  saws,  adzes,  and  other  instruments 
required  in  carpentering.  Then  there  was  the  collection  of  all  that 
would  be  needed  for  setting  up  a  factory  in  the  remote  district  for 
which  they  were  bound  :  a  stove,  a  smelting  furnace,  two  air- 
pumps  for  ventilation,  an  india-rubber  boat,  only  inflated  when 
required,  &c.,  &c. 

The  party  might  have  relied  for  provisions  on  the  hunters  amongst 
them.  Some  of  the  soldiers  were  skilful  trackers  of  game,  and 
there  were  plenty  of  reindeer  in  the  Polar  regions.  Whole  tribes  of 
Indians  or  Esquimaux,  deprived  of  bread  and  all  other  nourishment, 
subsist  entirely  on  this  venison,  which  is  both  abundant  and 
palatable.  But  as  delays  and  difficulties  had  to  be  allowed  for,  a 
certain  quantity  of  provisions  was  taken  with.  them.  The  flesh  of 
the  bison,  elk,  and  deer,  amassed  in  the  large  hattues  on  the  south  of 
the  lake  j  corned  beef,  which  will  keep  for  any  length  of  time  ;  and 
some  Indian  preparations,  in  which  the  flesh  of  animals,  ground 
to  powder,  retains  its  nutritive  properties  in  a  very  small  bulk, 
requiring  no  cooking,  and  forming  a  very  nourishing  diet,  were 
amongst  the  stores  provided  in  case  of  need. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  likewise  took  several  casks  of  rum  and  whisky; 
but  he  was  firmly  resolved  to  economise  these  spirits,  so  injurious 
to  the  health  in  cold  latitudes,  as  much  as  possible.  The  Company 
had  placed  at  his  disposal  a  little  portable  medicine-chest,  con- 
taining formidable  quantities  of  lime-juice,  lemons,  and  other  simple 
remedies  necessary  to  check,  or  if  possible  to  prevent,  the  scorbutic 
afiections  which  take  such  a  terrible  form  in  these  regions. 

All  the  men  had  been  chosen  with  great  care  ;  none  were  too  stout 
or  too  thin,  and  all  had  for  years  been  accustomed  to  the  severity 
of  the  climate,  and  could  therefore  more  easily  endure  the  fatigues 
of  an  expedition  to  the  Polar  Sea.  They  were  all  brave,  high-spirited 
fellows,  who  had  taken  service  of  their  own  accord.  Double  pay 
had  been  promised  them  during  their  stay  at  the  confines  of  the 
American  continent,  should  they  succeed  in  making  a  settlement  be- 
yond the  seventieth  parallel. 

The  sledge  provided  for  Mrs  Barnett  and  her  faithful  Madge 
was  rather  more  comfortable  than  the  others.     She  did  not  wish  to 


LIEUTENANT    HOBSON    AND   THE    SERGEANT   LED   THE    WAY. — Page  2, 


I. 


A  FACTORY.  2$ 


be  treated  better  than  her  travelling  companions,  but  yielded  to  the 
urgent  request  of  Captain  Craventy,  who  was  but  carrying  out  the 
wishes  of  the  Company. 

The  vehicle  which  brought  Thomas  Black  to  Fort  Reliance  also 
conveyed  him  and  his  scientific  apparatus  from  it.  A  few  astrono- 
mical instruments,  of  which  there  were  not  many  in  those  days — a 
telescope  for  his  selenographic  observations,  a  sextant  for  taking  the 
latitude,  a  chronometer  for  determining  the  longitudes,  a  few  maps, 
a  few  books,  were  all  stored  away  in  this  sledge,  and  Thomas  Black 
relied  upon  his  faithful  dogs  to  lose  nothing  by  the  way. 

Of  course  the  food  for  the  various  teams  was  not  forgotten.  There 
were  altogether  no  less  than  seventy-two  dogs,  quite  a  herd  to  pro- 
vide for  by  the  way,  and  it  was  the  business  of  the  hunters  to  cater 
for  them.  These  strong  intelligent  animals  were  bought  of  the 
Chippeway  Indians,  who  know  well  how  to  train  them  for  their 
arduous  calling. 

The  little  company  was  most  skilfully  organised.  The  zeal  of 
Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobson  was  beyond  all  praise.  Proud  of  his 
mission,  and  devoted  to  his  task,  he  neglected  nothing  which  could 
insure  success.  Corporal  Joliflfe,  always  a  busybody,  exerted  himself 
without  producing  any  very  tangible  results  ;  but  his  wife  was  most 
useful  and  devoted;  and  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  had  already  struck  up 
a  great  friendship  with  the  brisk  little  Canadian  woman,  whose  fair 
hair  and  large  soft  eyes  were  so  pleasant  to  look  at. 

We  need  scarcely  add  that  Captain  Craventy  did  all  in  his  power 
to  further  the  enterprise.  The  instructions  he  had  received  from 
the  Company  showed  what  great  importance  they  attached  to  the 
success  of  the  expedition,  and  the  establishment  of  a  new  factory 
beyond  the  seventieth  parallel.  We  may  therefore  safely  affirm  that 
every  human  effort  likely  to  insure  success  which  could  be  made 
was  made ,  but  who  could  tell  what  insurmountable  difficulties 
nature  might  place  in  the  path  of  the  brave  Lieutenant  ]  who  could 
tell  what  awaited  him  and  his  devoted  little  band? 


CHAPTER  V. 

FROM  FORT  RELIANCE    TO   FORT  ENTERPRISE. 

I  HE  first  fine  days  came  at  last.      The  green  carpet  of  the 

j{^  hills  began  to  appear  here  and  there  where  the  snow  had 
melted.  A  few  migratory  birds  from  the  south — such  as 
swans,  bald-headed  eagles,  &c. — passed  through  the  warmer  air. 
The  poplars,  birches,  and  willows  began  to  bud,  and  the  red- 
headed ducks,  of  which  there  are  so  many  species  in  North  America, 
to  skim  the  surface  of  the  numerous  pools  formed  by  the  melted 
snow.  Guillemots,  puffins,  and  eider  ducks  sought  colder  latitudes  ; 
and  little  shrews  no  bigger  than  a  hazel-nut  ventured  from  their 
holes,  tracing  strange  figures  on  the  ground  with  their  tiny-pointed 
tails.  It  was  intoxicating  once  more  to  breathe  the  fresh  air  of 
spring,  and  to  bask  in  the  sunbeams.  Nature  awoke  once  more 
from  her  heavy  sleep  in  the  long  winter  night,  and  smiled  as  she 
opened  her  eyes. 

The  renovation  of  creation  in  spring  is  perhaps  more  impressive 
in  the  Arctic  regions  than  in  any  other  portion  of  the  globe,  on 
account  of  the  greater  contrast  with  what  has  gone  before. 

The  thaw  was  not,  however,  complete.  The  thermometer,  it  is 
true,  marked  41°  Fahrenheit  above  zero  ;  but  the  mean  temperature 
of  the  nights  kept  the  surface  of  the  snowy  plains  solid — a  good 
thing  for  the  passage  of  sledges,  of  which  Jaspar  Hobson  meant  to 
avail  himself  before  the  thaw  became  complete. 

The  ice  of  the  lake  was  still  unbroken.  During  the  last  month 
several  successful  hunting  expeditions  had  been  made  across  the  vast 
smooth  plains,  which  were  already  frequented  by  game.  Mrs 
Barnett  was  astonished  at  the  skill  with  which  the  men  used  their 
snow-shoes,  scudding  along  at  the  pace  of  a  horse  in  full  gallop. 
Following  Captain  Craventy's  advice,  the  lady  herself  practised 
walking  in  these  contrivances,  and  she  soon  became  very  expert  in 
sliding  over  the  snow. 

During  the  last  few  da^s  several  bauds  of  Indians  had  arrived  at 


FROM  FORT  RELIANCE  TO  FORT  ENTERPRISE.  2J 

the  fort  to  exchange  the  spoils  of  the  winter  chase  for  manufactured 
goods.  The  season  had  been  bad.  There  were  a  good  many  polecats 
and  sables  ;  but  the  furs  of  beavers,  otters,  lynxes,  ermines,  and 
foxes  were  scarce.  It  was  therefore  a  wise  step  for  the  Company 
to  endeavour  to  explore  a  new  country,  where  the  wild  animals  had 
hitherto  escaped  the  rapacity  of  man. 

On  the  morning  of  the  16th  April  Lieutenant  Jaspar  Hobson  and 
his  party  were  ready  to  start.  The  route  across  the  known  districts, 
between  the  Slave  Lake  and  that  of  the  Great  Bear  beyond  the 
Arctic  Circle,  was  already  determined.  Jaspar  Hobson  was  to  make 
for  Fort  Confidence,  on  the  northern  extremity  of  the  latter  lake  ; 
and  he  was  to  revictual  at  Fort  Enterprise,  a  station  two  hundred 
miles  further  to  the  north-west,  on  the  shores  of  the  Snare  Lake, 
By  travelling  at  the  rate  of  fifteen  miles  a  day  the  Lieutenant 
hoped  to  halt  there  about  the  beginning  of  May. 

From  this  point  the  expedition  was  to  take  the  shortest  route 
to  Cape  Bathurst,  on  the  North  American  coast.  It  was  -agreed 
that  in  a  year  Captain  Craventy  should  send  a  convoy  with  provi- 
sions to  Cape  Bathurst,  and  that  a  detachment  of  the  Lieutenant's 
men  was  to  go  to  meet  this  convoy,  to  guide  it  to  the  spot  where 
the  new  fort  was  to  be  erected.  This  plan  was  a  guarantee  against 
any  adverse  circumstances,  and  left  a  means  of  communication  with 
their  fellow- creatures  open  to  the  Lieutenant  and  his  voluntary  com- 
panions in  exile. 

On  the  16th  April  dogs  and  sledges  were  awaiting  the  travellers 
at  the  postern  gate.  Captain  Craventy  called  the  men  of  the  party 
together  and  said  a  few  kind  words  to  them.  He  urged  them 
above  all  things  to  stand  by  one  another  in  the  perils  they  might 
be  called  upon  to  meet ;  reminded  them  that  the  enterprise  upon 
which  they  were  about  to  enter  required  self-denial  and  devotion, 
and  that  submission  to  their  officers  was  an  indispensable  condition 
of  success.  Cheers  greeted  the  Captain's  speech,  the  adieux  were 
quickly  made,  and  each  one  took  his  place  in  the  sledge  assigned 
to  him.  Jnspar  Hobson  and  Sergeant  Long  went  first ;  then  Mrs 
Paulina  Barnett  and  Madge,  the  latter  dexterously  wielding  the  long 
Esquimaux  whip,  terminating  in  a  stiff  thong.  Thomas  Black  and 
one  of  the  soldiers,  the  Canadian,  Petersen,  occupied  the  third 
sledge  ;  and  the  others  followed.  Corporal  and  Mrs  Joliffe  bringing 
up  the  rear.  According  to  the  orders  of  Lieutenant  Hobson,  each 
driver  kept  as  nearly  as  possible  at  the  same   distance  from  the 


28  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

preceding  sledge,  so  as  to  avoid  all  confusion — a  necessary  precau- 
tion, as  a  collision  between  two  sledges  going  at  full  speed,  might 
have  had  disastrous  results. 

On  leaving  Fort  Reliance,  Jaspar  Hobson  at  once  directed  his 
course  towards  the  north-west.  The  first  thing  to  be  done  was  to 
cross  the  large  river  connecting  Lakes  Slave  and  Wolmsley,  which 
was,  however,  still  frozen  so  hard  as  to  be  undistinguishable  from  the 
vast  white  plains  around.  A  uniform  carpet  of  snow  covered  tiie 
whole  country,  and  the  sledges,  drawn  by  their  swift  teams,  sped 
rapidly  over  the  firm  smooth  surface. 

The  weather  was  fine,  but  still  very  cold.  The  sun,  scarce  above 
the  horizon,  described  a  lengthened  curve  ;  and  its  rays,  reflected  on 
the  snow,  gave  more  light  than  heat.  Fortunately  not  a  breath  of 
air  stirred,  and  this  lessened  the  severity  of  the  cold,  although  the 
rapid  pace  of  the  sledges  through  the  keen  atmosphere  must  have 
been  trying  to  any  one  not  inured  to  the  rigour  of  a  Polar  climate. 

"  A. good  beginning,''  said  Jaspar  Hobson  to  the  Sergeant,  who 
sat  motionless  beside  him  as  if  rooted  to  his  seat ;  "  the  journey  has 
commenced  favourably.  The  sky  is  cloudless,  the  temperature  pro- 
pitious, our  equipages  shoot  along  like  express  trains,  and  as  long 
as  this  fine  weather  lasts  we  shall  get  on  capitally.  What  do  you 
think,  Sergeant  Long  %  " 

''  I  agree  with  you,  Lieutenant,"  replied  the  Sergeant,  who  never 
differed  from  his  chief. 

"  Like  myself,  Sergeant,  you  are  determined  to  push  on  as  far 
north  as  possible — are  you  not  % "  resumed  Lieutenant  Hobson. 

"  You  have  but  to  command  to  be  obeyed.  Lieutenant." 

"  I  know  it,  Sergeant ;  I  know  that  with  you  to  hear  is  to  obey. 
Would  that  all  our  men  understood  as  you  do  the  importance  of 
our  mission,  and  would  devote  themselves  body  and  soul  to  the 
interests  of  the  Company !  Ah,  Sergeant  Long,  I  know  if  I  gave 
you  an  impossible  order  " 

"  Lieutenant,  there  is  no  such  thing  as  an  impossible  order." 

"  What^  Suppose  now  I  ordered  you  to  go  to  the  North  Pole  ?** 

"  Lieutenant,  I  should  go  !  " 

"  And  to  come  back  !  "  added  Jaspar  Hobson  with  a  smile. 

"  I  should  come  back,"  replied  Sergeant  Long  simply. 

During  this  colloquy  between  Lieutenant  Hobson  and  his  Sergeant 
a  slight  ascent  compelled  the  sledges  to  slacken  speed,  and  Mrs 
Barnett  and  Madge  also  exchanged  a  few  sentences.     These  two 


CORPORAL   JOLIFFE    PROVES    HIS    SKILL    IN    DRIVING. Page  32. 


FROM  FORT  RELIANCE  TO  FORT  ENTERPRISE.  2g 


intrepid  women,  in  their  otter-skin  caps  and  white  bear-skin  mantles, 
gazed  in  astonishment  upon  the  rugged  scenery  around  them,  and  at 
the  white  outlines  of  the  huge  glaciers  standing  out  against  the  hori- 
zon. They  had  already  left  behind  them  the  hills  of  the  northern 
banks  of  the  Slave  Lake,  with  their  summits  crowned  with  the  gaunt 
skeletons  of  trees.  The  vast  plains  stretched  before  them  in  ap- 
parently endless  succession.  The  rapid  flight  and  cries  of  a  few 
birds  of  passage  aloi'e  broke  the  monotony  of  the  scene.  Now  and 
then  a  troop  of  swans,  with  plumage  so  white  that  the  keenest  sight 
could  not  distinguish  them  from  the  snow  when  they  settled  on 
the  ground,  rose  into  view  in  the  clear  blue  atmosphere  and  pur- 
sued their  journey  to  the  north. 

"  What  an  extraordinary  country  ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Paulina  Bar- 
nett.  "  What  a  diflerence  between  these  Polar  regions  and  the  green 
prairies  of  Australia  !  You  remember,  Madge,  how  we  suffered  from 
the  heat  on  the  shores  of  the  Gulf  of  Carpentaria — you  remember 
the  cloudless  sky  and  the  parching  sunbeams  1 " 

"  My  dear,"  replied  Madge,  "  I  have  not  the  gift  of  remembering 
like  you.     You  retain  your  impressions,  I  forget  mine." 

"  What,  Madge  !  "  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  "  you  have  forgotten  the 
tropical  heat  of  India  and  Australia  ?  You  have  no  recollection  of 
our  agonies  when  water  failed  us  in  the  desert,  when  the  pitiless 
sun  scorched  us  to  the  bone,  when  even  the  night  brought  us  no 
relief  from  our  sufferings  ! " 

"  No,  Paulina,"  replied  Madge,  wrapping  her  furs  more  closely 
round  her,  "  no,  I  remember  nothing.  How  could  I  now  recollect 
the  sufferings  to  which  you  allude — the  heat,  the  agonies  of  thirst 
— when  we  are  surrounded  on  every  side  by  ice,  and  I  have  but  to 
stretch  my  arm  out  of  this  sledge  to  pick  up  a  handful  of  snow  ] 
You  talk  to  me  of  heat  when  we  are  freezing  beneath  our  bear- 
skins ;  you  recall  the  broiling  rays  of  the  sun  when  its  April  beams 
cannot  melt  the  icicles  on  our  lips  !  No,  child,  no,  don't  try  to  per- 
suade me  it 's  hot  anywhere  else  ;  don't  tell  me  I  ever  complained 
of  being  too  warm,  for  I  sha'n't  believe  you  ! " 

Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  could  not  help  smiling. 

"  So,  poor  Madge,"  she  said,  "  you  are  very  cold  1  *' 

*'  Yes,  child,  I  am  cold  ;  but  I  rather  like  this  climate.  I  Ve  no 
doubt  it 's  very  healthy,  and  I  think  North  America  will  agree  with 
me.    It 's  really  a  very  fine  country  !  " 

"  Yes,  Madge,  it  u  a  fine  country,  and  we  have  as  yet  seen  none 


V 

so  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

Qii  the  wonders  it  contains.  But  wait  until  we  reach  the  Arctic 
Ocean  ;  wait  until  the  winter  shuts  us  in  with  its  gigantic  icebergs 
and  thick  covering  of  snow  ;  wait  till  the  northern  storms  break  over 
us,  and  the  glories  of  the  Aurora  Borealis  and  of  the  splendid  con- 
stellations of  the  Polar  skies  are  spread  out  above  our  heads  ;  wait 
till  we  have  lived  through  the  strange  long  six  months'  night,  and 
then  indeed  you  will  understand  the  infinite  variety,  the  infinite 
beauty,  of  our  Creator's  handiwork  !  " 

Thus  spoke  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett,  carried  away  by  her  vivid 
imagination.  She  could  see  nothing  but  beauty  in  these  deserted 
regions,  with  their  rigorous  climate.  Her  enthusiasm  got  the  bettei 
for  the  time  of  her  judgment.  Her  sympathy  with  nature  enabled 
her  to  read  the  touching  poetry  of  the  ice-bound  north — the  poetry 
embodied  in  the  Sagas,  and  sung  by  the  bards  of  the  time  of  Ossian. 
But  Madge,  more  matter  of  fact  than  her  mistress,  disguised  from 
herself  neither  the  dangers  of  an  expedition  to  the  Arctic  Ocean, 
nor  the  sufferings  involved  in  wintering  only  thirty  degrees  at  the 
most  from  the  North  Pole. 

And  indeed  the  most  robust  had  sometimes  succumbed  to  the 
fatigues,  privations,  and  mental  and  bodily  agonies  endured  in  this 
severe  climate,  Jaspar  Hobson  had  not,  it  is  true,  to  press  on  to 
the  very  highest  latitudes  of  the  globe ;  he  had  not  to  reach  the  pole 
itself,  or  to  follow  in  the  steps  of  Parry,  Ross,  M'Clure,  Kane,  Morton, 
and  others.  But  after  once  crossing  the  Arctic  Circle,  there  is  little^ 
variation  in  the  temperature  ;  it  does  not  increase  in  coldness  in 
proportion  to  the  elevation  reached.  Granted  that  Jaspar  Hobson 
did  not  think  of  going  beyond  the  seventieth  parallel,  we  must  still 
remember  that  Franklin  and  his  unfortunate  companions  died  of 
cold  and  hunger  before  they  had  penetrated  beyond  68°  N.  lat. 

Very  different  was  the  talk  in  the  sledge  occupied  by  Mr  and 
Mrs  Joliffe.  Perhaps  the  gallant  Corporal  had  too  often  drunk  to 
the  success  of  the  expedition  on  starting  ;  for,  strange  to  say,  he  was- 
disputing  with  his  little  wife.  Yes,  he  was  actually  contradicting 
her,  which  never  happened  except  under  extraordinary  circum- 
stances ! 

"  No,  Mrs  Joliffe,"  he  was  saying,  "  no,  you  have  nothing  to  fear. 
A  sledge  is  not  more  difficult  to  guide  than  a  pony-carriage,  and  the 
devil  take  me  if  I  can't  manage  a  team  of  d<»gs  ! " 

"  I  don't  question  your  skill,"  replied  Mrs  Joliffe ;  "  I  only  ask 
you  not  to  go  so  fast.     You  are  in  front  of  the  whole  caravan  now, 


THE    BEGINNING    OF    THE    THAW. PaffC  33. 


FROM  FORT  RELIANCE  TO  FORT  ENTERPRISE,  3 1 

and  I  hear  Lieutenant  Hobson  calling  out  to  you  to  resume  your 
proper  place  behind." 

"  Let  him  call,  Mrs  JolifFe,  let  him  call." 

And  the  Corporal,  urging  on  his  dogs  with  a  fresh  cut  of  the 
whip,  dashed  along  at  still  greater  speed. 

"Take  care,  Joliffe,"  repeated  his  little  wife  ;  "  not  so  fast,  we 
are  going  down  hill," 

"  Down  hill,  Mrs  Joliffe  ;  you  call  that  down  hill  %  why,  it 's  up 
hilir' 

"  I  tell  you  we  are  going  down  1 "  repeated  poor  Mrs  Joliffe. 

"And  I  tell  you  we  are  going  up  ;  look  how  the  dogs  pull  I  '* 

Whoever  was  right,  the  dogs  became  uneasy.  The  ascent  was, 
in  fact,  pretty  steep ;  the  sledge  dashed  along  at  a  reckless  pace,  and 
was  already  considerably  in  advance  of  the  rest  of  the  party.  Mr 
and  Mi's  Joliffe  bumped  up  and  down  every  instant,  the  surface  of 
the  snow  became  more  and  more  uneven,  and  the  pair,  flung  first  to 
one  side  and  then  to  the  other,  knocked  against  each  other  and  the 
sledge,  and  were  horribly  bruised  and  shaken.  But  the  Corporal 
would  listen  neither  to  the  advice  of  his  wife  nor  to  the  shouts  of 
Lieutenant  Hobson.  The  latter,  seeing  the  danger  of  this  reckless 
course,  urged  on  his  own  animals,  and  the  rest  of  the  caravan  fol- 
lowed at  a  rapid  pace. 

But  the  Corporal  became  more  and  more  excited — ^the  speed  of  his 
equipage  delighted  him.  He  shouted,  he  gesticulated,  and  flour- 
ished his  long  whip  like  an  accomplished  sportsman. 

"Wonderful  things  these  whips!"  he  cried  ;  "the  Esquimaux 
wield  them  with  unrivalled  skill ! " 

"  But  you  are  not  an  Esquimaux ! "  cried  Mrs  Joliffe,  trying  in 
vain  to  arrest  the  arm  of  her  imprudent  husband. 

"  I  have  heard  tell,''  resumed  the  Corporal — "  I  've  heard  tell  that 
the  Esquimaux  can  touch  any  dog  they  like  in  any  part,  that  they 
can  even  cut  out  a  bit  of  one  of  their  ears  with  the  stiff  thong  at 
the  end  of  the  whip.     I  am  going  to  try.*' 

"  Don't  try,  don't  try,  Joliffe  ! "  screamed  the  poor  little  woman, 
frightened  out  of  her  wits. 

"  Don't  be  afraid,  Mrs  Joliffe,  don't  be  afraid ;  I  know  what  I  can 
do.  The  fifth  dog  on  the  right  is  misbehaving  himself ;  I  will  cor- 
rect him  a  little  !  " 

But  Corporal  Joliffe  was  evidently  not  yet  enough  of  an  Esqui- 
maux to  be  able  to  manage  the  whip  with  its  thong  four  feet  longer 


32  THE  FUR  COUNTRY 


than  the  sledge ;  for  it  unrolled  with  an  ominous  hiss,  and  rebound- 
ing, twisted  itself  round  Corporal  Joliffe's  own  neck,  sending  his  fui 
cap  into  the  air,  perhaps  with  one  of  his  ears  in  it. 

At  this  moment  the  dogs  flung  themselves  on  one  side,  the  sledge 
was  overturned,  and  the  pair  were  flung  into  the  snow.  Fortunately 
it  was  thick  and  soft,  so  that  they  escaped  unhurt.  But  what  a 
disgrace  for  the  Corporal !  how  reproachfully  his  little  wife  looked 
at  him,  and  how  stern  was  the  reprimand  of  Lieutenant  Hobson  ! 

The  sledge  was  picked  up,  but  it  was  decided  that  henceforth  the 
reins  of  the  dogs,  like  those  of  the  household,  were  to  be  in  the 
hands  of  Mrs  Joliffe.  The  crest-fallen  Corporal  was  obliged  to  sub- 
mit, and  the  interrupted  journey  was  resumed. 

No  incident  worth  mentioning  occurred  during  the  next  fifteen 
days.  The  weather  continued  favourable,  the  cold  was  not  toe 
severe,  and  on  the  1st  May  the  expedition  arrived  at  Fort  Enter- 
prise. 


THE    EFFECTS   OP   THE   THAW. Page  35. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

A    WAPITI  DUEL, 

WO  hundred  miles  had  been  traversed  since  the  expedition 
§  left  Fort  Reliance.  The  travellers,  taking  advantage  of 
the  long  twilight,  pressed  on  day  and  night,  and  were 
literally  overcome  with  fatigue  when  they  reached  Fort  Enterprise, 
near  the  shores  of  Lake  Snare, 

This  fort  was  no  more  than  a  dep6t  of  provisions,  of  little  import- 
ance, erected  a  few  years  before  by  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company. 
It  served  as  a  resting-place  for  the  men  taking  the  convoys  of  furs 
from  the  Great  Bear  Lake,  some  three  hundred  miles  further  to  the 
north-west.  About  a  dozen  soldiers  formed  the  garrison.  The  fort 
consisted  of  a  wooden  house  surrounded  by  palisades.  But  few  as 
were  the  comforts  it  offered,  Lieutenant  Hobson's  companions  gladly 
took  refuge  in  it  and  rested  there  for  two  days. 

The  gentle  influence  of  the  Arctic  spring  was  beginning  to  be 
felt.  Here  and  there  the  snow  had  melted,  and  the  temperature  of 
the  nights  was  no  longer  below  freezing  point.  A  few  delicate 
mosses  and  slender  grasses  clothed  the  rugged  ground  with  their  soft 
verdure ;  and  from  between  the  stones  peeped  the  moist  calices  of 
tiny,  almost  colourless,  flowers.  These  faint  signs  of  reawakening 
vegetation,  after  the  long  night  of  winter,  were  refreshing  to  eyes 
weary  of  the  monotonous  whiteness  of  the  snow  ;  and  the  scattered 
specimens  of  the  Flora  of  the  Arctic  regions  were  welcomed  with 
delight. 

Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  and  Jaspar  Hobson  availed  themselves  of 
this  leisure  time  to  visit  the  shores  of  the  little  lake.  They  were 
both  students  and  enthusiastic  lovers  of  nature.  Together  they 
wandered  amongst  the  ice  masses,  already  beginning  to  break  up, 
and  the  waterfalls  created  by  the  action  of  the  rays  of  the  sun. 
The  surface  itself  of  Lake  Snare  was  still  intact,  not  a  crack 
denoted  the  approaching  thaw  ;  but  it  was  strewn  with  the  ruins  of 
mighty  icebergs,  which  assumed  all  manner  of  picturesque  forms,  and 


34  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


the  beauty  of  which  was  heightened  when  the  light,  diffracted  by  the 
sharp  edges  of  tlie  ice,  touched  them  with  all  manner  of  colours. 
One  might  have  fancied  that  a  rainbow,  crushed  in  a  powerful  hand, 
had  been  flung  upon  the  ground,  its  fragments  crossing  each  other 
as  they  fell. 

"  What  a  beautiful  scene ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Paulina  Bamett. 
"  These  prismatic  effects  vary  at  every  change  of  our  position. 
Does  it  not  seem  as  if ,  we  were  bending  over  the  opening  of  an 
immense  kaleidoscope,  or  are  you  already  weary  of  a  sight  so  new 
and  interesting  to  me  % " 

"No,  madam,''  replied  tlie  Lieutenant;  "although  I  was  bom 
and  bred  on  this  continent,  its  beauties  never  pall  upon  me.  But  if 
your  enthusiasm  is  so  great  when  you  see  this  scenery  with  the  sun 
shining  upon  it,  what  will  it  be  when  you  are  privileged  to  behold 
the  terrible  grandeur  of  the  winter  1  To  own  the  truth,  I  think 
the  sun,  so  much  thought  of  in  temperate  latitudes,  spoils  my  Arctic 
home." 

"  Indeed  !  "  exclaimed  Mrs  Bamett,  smiling  at  the  Lieutenant's 
last  remark  ;  "  for  my  part,  I  think  the  sun  a  capital  travelling 
companion,  and  I  shall  not  be  disposed  to  grumble  at  the  warmth 
it  gives  even  in  the  Polar  regions  1 " 

"  A.h,  madam,"  replied  Jaspar  Hobson,  **  I  am  one  of  those  who 
think  it  best  to  visit  Russia  in  the  winter,  and  the  Sahara  Desert 
in  the  summer.  You  then  see  their  peculiar  characteristics  to 
advantage.  The  sun  is  a  star  of  the  torrid  and  temperate  zones, 
and  is  out  of  place  thirty  degrees  from  the  North  Pole.  The  true 
sky  of  this  country  is  the  pure  frigid  sky  of  winter,  bright  with 
constellations,  and  sometimes  flushed  with  the  glory  of  the  Aurora 
Borealis.  This  land  is  the  land  of  the  night,  not  of  the  day ;  and 
you  have  yet  to  make  acquaintance  with  the  delights  and  marvels  of 
the  long  Polar  night." 

"  Have  you  ever  visited  the  temperate  zones  of  Europe  and 
America  1 "  inquired  Mrs  Bamett. 

"  Yes,  madam ;  and  I  admired  them  as  they  deserved.  But  I 
returned  home  with  fresh  love  and  enthusiasm  for  my  native  land. 
Cold  is  my  element,  and  no  merit  is  due  to  me  for  braving  it.  It 
has  no  power  over  me  ;  and,  like  the  Esquimaux,  I  can  live  for 
months  together  in  a  snow  hut." 

"  Really,  Lieutenant  Hobson,  it  is  quite  cheering  to  hear  our 
dreaded  enemy  spoken  of  in  such  terms.     I  hope  to  prove  myself 


A  WAPITI  DUEL.  —  Page  37. 


A    WAPITI  DUEL.  35 


worthy  to  be  your  companion,  and  wherever  you  venture,  we  will 
venture  together." 

"  I  agree,  madam,  I  agree ;  and  may  all  the  women  and  soldiers^ 
accompanying  nie  show  themselves  as  resolute  as  you.  If  so,  God 
helping  us,  we  shall  indeed  advance  far." 

"  You  have  nothing  to  complain  of  yet,"  observed  the  lady. 
"  Not  a  single  accident  has  occurred,  the  weather  has  been 
propitious,  the  cold  not  too  severe — everything  has  combined  to 
aid  us." 

"  Yes,  madam ;  but  the  sun  which  you  admire  so  much  will 
soon  create  difficulties  for  us,  and  strew  obstacles  in  our  path." 

*'  What  do  you  mean,  Lieutenant  Hobson  % " 

**  I  mean  that  the  heat  will  soon  have  changed  the  aspect  of  the 
country ;  that  the  melted  ice  will  impede  the  sliding  of  the  sledges  • 
that  the  ground  will  become  rough  and  uneven;  that  our  panting 
dogs  will  no  longer  carry  us  along  with  the  speed  of  an  arrow  ;  that 
the  rivers  and  lakes  will  resume  their  liquid  state,  and  that  we  shall 
have  to  ford  or  go  round  them.  All  these  changes,  madam,  due  to 
the  influence  of  the  solar  rays,  will  cause  delays,  fatigue,  and  dangers, 
the  very  least  of  which  will  be  the  breaking  of  the  brittle  snow 
beneath  our  feet,  or  the  falling  of  the  avalanches  from  the  summits 
of  the  icebergs.  For  all  this  we  have  to  thank  the  gradual  rise  of 
the  sun  higher  and  higher  above  the  horizon.  Bear  this  in  mind, 
madam :  of  the  four  elements  of  the  old  creation,  only  one  is 
necessary  to  us  here,  the  air ;  the  other  three,  fire,  earth,  and  water, 
are  de  trop  in  the  Arctic  regions." 

Of  course  the  Lieutenant  was  exaggerating,  and  Mrs  Barnett 
could  easily  have  retorted  with  counter-arguments ;  but  she  liked 
to  hear  his  raptures  in  praise  of  his  beloved  country,  and  she  felt 
that  his  enthusiasm  was  a  guarantee  that  he  would  shrink  from  no 
obstacle. 

Yet  Jaspar  Hobson  was  right  when  he  said  the  sun  would 
cause  difficulties.  This  was  seen  when  the  party  set  out  again  on 
the  4th  May,  three  days  later.  The  thermometer,  even  in  the  coldest 
part  of  the  night,  marked  more  than  32°  Fahrenheit.  A  complete 
thaw  set  in,  the  vast  white  sheet  of  snow  resolved  itself  into  water. 
The  irregularities  of  the  rocky  soil  caused  constant  jolting  of  the 
sledges,  and  the  passengers  were  roughly  shaken.  The  roads  wen^ 
80  heavy  that  the  dogs  had  to  go  at  a  slow  trot,  and  the  reins  were 
therefore  asrain  entrusted  to  the  hands  of  the  imprudent  Corporal 


3^  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


JolifFe.  Neither  shouts  nor  flourishings  of  the  whip  had  the  slightest 
effect  on  the  jaded  animals. 

From  time  to  time  the  travellers  lightened  the  sledges  by  walking 
a  little  way.  This  mode  of  locomotion  suited  the  hunters,  who  were 
now  gradually  approaching  the  best  districts  for  game  in  the  whole 
of  English  America.  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  and  Madge  took  a  great 
interest  in  the  chase,  whilst  Thomas  Black  professed  absolute  indiffer- 
ence to  all  athletic  exercise.  He  had  not  come  all  this  distance  to  hunt 
the  polecat  or  the  ermine,  but  merely  to  look  at  the  moon  at  the  mo- 
ment when  her  disc  should  cover  that  of  the  sun.  When  the  queen 
of  the  night  rose  above  the  horizon,  the  impatient  astronomer  would 
gaze  at  her  with  eager  eyes,  and  one  day  the  Lieutenant  said  to  him — 

"  It  would  be  a  bad  look-out  for  you,  Mr  Black,  if  by  any  un- 
lucky chance  the  moon  should  fail  to  keep  her  appointment  on  the 
16th  July  1860." 

*' Lieutenant  Hobson,"  gravely  replied  the  astronomer,  "if  the 
moon  were  guilty  of  such  a  breach  of  good  manners,  I  should  indeed 
have  cause  to  complain." 

The  chief  hunters  of  the  expedition  were  the  soldiers  Marbre  and 
Sabine,  both  very  expert  at  their  business.  Tlieir  skill  was  won- 
derful ;  and  the  cleverest  Indians  would  not  have  surpassed  them 
in  keenness  of  sight,  precision  of  aim,  or  manual  address.  They 
were  alike  trappers  and  hunters,  and  were  acquainted  with  all  the 
nets  and  snares  for  taking  sables,  otters,  wolves,  foxes,  bears,  <fec. 
No  artifice  was  unknown  to  them,  and  Captain  Craventy  had  shown 
his  wisdom  in  choosing  two  such  intelligent  men  to  accompany  the 
little  troop. 

Whilst  on  the  march,  however,  Marbre  and  Sabine  had  no  time 
for  setting  traps.  They  could  not  separate  from  the  others  for  more 
than  an  hour  or  two  at  a  time,  and  were  obliged  to  be  content  with 
the  game  which  passed  within  range  of  their  rifles.  Still  they  were 
fortunate  enough  to  kill  two  of  the  large  American  ruminants, 
seldom  met  with  in  such  elevated  latitudes. 

On  the  morning  of  the  15th  May  the  hunters  asked  permission 
to  follow  some  fresh  traces  they  had  found,  and  the  Lieutenant  not 
only  granted  it,  but  himself  accompanied  them  with  Mrs  Paulina 
Barnett,  and  they  went  several  miles  out  of  their  route  towards  the 
east. 

The  impressions  were  evidently  the  result  of  the  passage  of  about 
half-a-dozen  large  deer.    There  could  be  no  mistake  about  it;  Marbre 


To  the  icebergs  !  to  the  icebergs  !  "  —  Page  46, 


A   WAPITI  DUEL,  2i7 


and  Sabine  were  positive  on  that  point,  and  could  even  have  named 
the  species  to  which  the  animals  belonged. 

"  You  seem  surprised  to  have  met  with  traces  of  these  animals 
here,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett. 

"Well,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "this  species  is  rarely  seen 
beyond  57"  N.  lat.  We  generally  hunt  them  at  the  south  of  the 
Slave  Lake,  where  they  feed  upon  the  shoots  of  willows  and  poplars, 
and  certain  wild  roses  to  which  th^  are  very  partial." 

"  I  suppose  these  creatures,  like  those  with  valuable  furs,  have 
fled  from  the  districts  scoured  by  the  hunters." 

"  I  see  no  other  explanation  of  their  presence  at  Qo°  N.  lat," 
replied  the  Lieutenant — "  that  is,  if  the  men  are  not  mistaken  as  to 
the  origin  of  the  footprints." 

"No,  no,  sir,"  cried  Sabine;  "Marbre  and  I  are  not  mistaken. 
These  traces  were  left  by  deer,  the  deer  we  hunters  call  red  deer, 
and  the  natives  wapitis." 

"  He  is  quite  right,"  added  Marbre  ;  "  old  trappers  like  us  are  not 
to  be  taken  in  ;  besides,  don't  you  hear  that  peculiar  whistling 
sound?" 

The  party  had  now  reached  the  foot  of  a  little  hill,  and  as  the 
snow  had  almost  disappeared  from  its  sides  they  were  able  to  climb 
it,  and  hastened  to  the  summit,  the  peculiar  whistling  noticed  by 
Marbre  becoming  louder,  mingled  with  cries  resembling  the  braying 
of  an  ass,  and  proving  that  the  two  hunters  were  not  mistaken. 

Once  at  the  top  of  the  hill,  the  adventurers  looked  eagerly  towards 
the  east.  The  undulating  plains  were  still  white  with  snow,  but  its 
dazzling  surface  was  here  a!id  there  relieved  with  patches  of  stunted 
light  green  vegetation.  A  few  gaunt  shrubs  stretched  forth  their 
bare  and  shrivelled  branches,  and  huge  icebergs  with  precipitous 
sides  stood  out  against  the  grey  background  of  the  sky. 

"  Wapitis  !  wapitis  ! — there  they  are  !  "  cried  Sabine  and  Marbre 
at  once,  pointing  to  a  group  of  animals  distinctly  visible  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  east. 

"  What  are  they  doing  1 "  asked  Mrs  Barnett. 
*'  They  are  fighting,  madam,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  they  always  do 
when   the   heat  of   the  Polar  sun   inflames   their   blood — another 
deplorable  result  of  the  action  of  the  radiant  orb  of  day  ! " 

From  where  they  stood  the  party  could  easily  watch  the  group 
of  wapitis.  They  were  fine  specimens  of  the  family  of  deer  known 
under  the  various  names  of  stags  with  rounded  antlers,  American 


38  THR  FUR  COUNTRY, 


stags,  roebucks,  grey  elks  and  red  elks,  &c.  These  graceful  creatures 
have  slender  legs  and  brown  skins  with  patches  of  red  hair,  the 
colour  of  which  becomes  darker  in  the  warmer  season.  The  fierce 
males  are  easily  distinguished  from  the  females  by  their  fine  white 
antlers,  the  latter  being  entirely  without  these  ornaments.  These 
wapitis  were  once  very  numerous  all  over  North  America,  and  the 
United  States  imported  a  great  many ;  but  clearings  were  begun  on 
every  side,  the  forest  trees  fell  beneath  the  axe  of  the  pioneer  of 
civilisation,  and  the  wapitis  took  refuge  in  the  more  peaceful  dis- 
tricts of  Canada ;  but  they  were  soon  again  disturbed,  and  wandered 
to  the  shores  of  Hudson's  Bay.  So  that  although  the  wapiti  thrives 
in  a  cold  country,  Lieutenant  Hobson  was  right  in  saying  that  it 
seldom  penetrates  beyond  57°  N.  latitude ;  and  the  specimens  now 
found  had  doubtless  fled  before  the  Chippeway  Indians,  who  hunt 
them  without  mercy. 

The  wapitis  were  so  engrossed  in  their  desperate  struggle  that 
they  were  unconscious  of  the  approach  of  the  hunters ;  but  they 
would  probably  not  have  ceased  fighting  had  they  been  aware  of  it. 
Marbre  and  Sabine,  aware  of  their  pecutiarity  in  this  respect,  might 
therefore  have  advanced  fearlessly  upon  them,  and  have  taken  aim 
at  leisure. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  suggested  that  they  should  do  so. 

"Beg  pardon,  sir,*'  replied  Marbre;  *' but  let  us  spare  our  pow- 
der and  shot.  These  beasts  are  engaged  in  a  war  to  the  death,  and 
we  shall  arrive  in  plenty  of  time  to  pick  up  the  vanquished." 

*'  Have  these  wapitis  a  commercial  value  % "  asked  Mrs  Paulina 
Barnett. 

"  Yes,  madam,"  replied  Hobson ;  "  and  their  skin,  which  is  not 
quite  so  thick  as  that  of  the  elk,  properly  so  called,  makes  very 
valuable  leather.  By  rubbing  this,  skin  with  the  fat  and  brains  of 
the  animal  itself,  it  is  rendered  flexible,  and  neither  damp  nor  dry- 
ness injures  it.  The  Indians  are  therefore  always  eager  to  procure 
the  skins  of  the  wapitis." 

"  Does  not  the  flesh  make  admirable  venison  1 " 

"  Pretty  good,  madam  ;  only  pretty  good.  It  is  tough,  and  does 
not  taste  very  nice  ;  the  fat  becomes  hard  directly  it  is  taken  from 
the  fire,  and  sticks  to  the  teeth.  It  is  certainly  inferior  as  an  article 
of  food  to  the  flesh  of  other  deer ;  but  when  meat  is  scarce  we  are 
glad  enough  to  eat  it,  and  it  supports  life  as  well  as  anything 
else." 


THERE    WERE    BEARS    PROWLING    IN    THE    PASS. 'Pose  4?. 


A   WAPITI  DUEL,  39 


Mrs  Barnett  and  Lieutenant  Hobson  had  been  chatting  together 
for  some  minutes,  when,  with  the  exception  of  two,  the  wapitis 
suddenly  ceased  fighting.  Was  their  rage  satiated  1  or  had  they 
perceived  the  hunters,  and  felt  the  approach  of  danger  ]  Whatever 
the  cause,  all  but  two  fine  creatures  fled  towards  the  east  with 
incredible  speed;  in  a  few  instants  they  were  out  of  sight,  and  the 
swiftest  horse  could  not  have  caught  them  up. 

Meanwhile,  however,  two  magnificent  specimens  remained  on  the 
field  of  battle.  Heads  down,  antlers  to  antlers,  hind  legs  stretched 
and  quivering,  they  butted  at  each  other  without  a  moment's 
pause.  Like  two  wrestlers  struggling  for  a  prize  which  neither  will 
yield,  they  would  not  separate;  but  whirled  round  and  round  to- 
gether on  their  front  legs  as  if  riveted  to  one  another. 

"  What  implacable  rage  ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  Yes,"  replied  the  Lieutenant ;  "  the  wapitis  really  are  most 
spiteful  beasts.  I  have  no  doubt  they  are  fighting  out  an  old 
quarrel" 

"  Would  not  this  be  the  time  to  approach  them,  when  they  are 
blinded  with  rage  1 " 

"There's  plenty  of  time,  ma'am,"  said  Sabine;  "they  won't 
escape  us  now.  They  will  not  stir  from  where  they  are  when  we 
are  three  steps  from  them,  the  rifles  at  our  shoulders,  and  our 
fingers  on  the  triggers  ! " 

"Indeed?" 

"  Yes,  madam,"  added  Hobson,  who  had  carefully  examined  the 
wapitis  after  the  hunter's  remark ;  "  and  whether  at  our  hands  or 
from  the  teeth  of  wolves,  those  wapitis  will  meet  death  where  they 
now  stand," 

"I  don't  understand  what  you  mean.  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs 
Barnett. 

"  Well,  go  nearer,  madam,"  he  replied ;  "  don't  be  afraid  of 
startling  the  animals ;  for,  as  our  hunter  says,  they  are  no  longer 
capable  of  flight." 

The  four  now  descended  the  hill,  and  in  a  few  minutes  gained 
the  theatre  of  the  struggle.  The  wapitis  had  not  moved.  They 
were  pushing  at  each  other  like  a  couple  of  rams,  and  seemed  to  be 
inseparably  glued  together. 

In  fact,  in  the  heat  of  the  combat  the  antlers  of  the  two  creatures 
had  become  entangled  together  to  such  an  extent  that  they  could 
no  longer  separate  without  breaking  them.     This  often  happens  in 


I 


40  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


the  hunting  districts.  It  is  not  at  all  uncommon  to  find  antlers 
thus  connected  lying  on  the  ground ;  the  poor  encumbered  animals 
soon  die  of  hunger,  or  they  become  an  easy  prey  to  wild  beasts. 

Two  bullets  put  an  end  to  the  fight  between  the  wapitis ;  and 
Marbre  and  Sabine  taking  immediate  possession,  carried  off  their 
skins  to  be  subsequently  prepared,  leaving  their  bleeding  carcasses 
to  be  devoured  by  wolves  and  bears. 


Wi 


CHAPTER  VIL 

THE   ARCTIC  CIRCLE. 

|EIE  expedition  continued  to  advance  towards  the  north- 
west; but  the  great  inequalities  of  the  ground  made  it 
hard  work  for  the  dogs  to  get  along,  and  the  poor  creatures, 
who  could  hardly  be  held  in  when  they  started,  were  now  quiet 
enough.  Eight  or  ten  miles  a  day  were  as  much  as  they  could  accom- 
plish, although  Lieutenant  Hobson  urged  them  on  to  the  utmost. 
He  was  anxious  to  get  to  Fort  Confidence,  on  the  further  side  of  the 
Great  Bear  Lake,  where  he  hoped  to  obtain  some  useful  information. 
Had  the  Indians  frequenting  the  northern  banks  of  the  lake  been 
able  to  cross  the  districts  on  the  shores  of  the  sea  %  was  the  Arctic 
Ocean  open  at  this  time  of  yearl  These  were  grave  questions,  the 
reply  to  which  would  decide  the  fate  of  the  new  factory. 

The  country  through  which  the  little  troop  was  now  passing  was 
intersected  by  numerous  streams,  mostly  tributaries  of  the  two 
large  rivers,  the  Mackenzie  and  Coppermine,  which  flow  from  the 
south  to  the  north,  and  empty  themselves  into  the  Arctic  Ocean. 
Lakes,  lagoons,  and  numerous  pools  are  formed  between  these  two 
principal  arteries ;  and  as  they  were  no  longer  frozen  over,  the 
sledges  could  not  venture  upon  them,  and  were  compelled  to  go 
round,  them,  which  caused  considerable  delay.  Lieutenant  Hobson 
was  certainly  right  in  saying  that  winter  is  the  time  to  visit  the 
hyperborean  regions,  for  they  are  then  far  easier  to  traverse.  Mrs 
Paulina  Barnett  had  reason  to  own  the  justice  of  this  assertion  more 
than  once. 

This  region,  included  in  the  "Cursed  Land,"  was,  besides, 
completely  deserted,  as  are  the  greater  portion  of  the  districts  of 
the  extreme  north  of  America.  It  has  been  estimated  that  there  is 
but  one  inhabitant  to  every  ten  square  miles.  Besides  the  scattered 
natives,  there  are  some  few  thousand  agents  or  soldiers  of  the 
different  fur-trading  companies ;  but  they  mostly  congregate  in  the 
southern   districts   and   about  the  various  factories.     No  human 


42  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


footprints  gladdened  the  eyes  of  the  travellers,  the  only  traces  on 
the  sandy  soil  were  those  of  ruminants  and  rodents.  Now  and  then 
a  fierce  polar  bear  was  seen,  ;ind  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  expressed  her 
surprise  at  not  meeting  more  of  these  terrible  carnivorous  beasts,  of 
whose  daily  attacks  on  whalers  and  persons  shipwrecked  in  BaflSn's 
Bay  and  on  the  coasts  of  Greenland  and  Spitzbergen  she  had  read 
in  the  accounts  of  those  who  had  wintered  in  the  Arctic  regions. 

"  Wait  for  the  winter,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant ;  "  wait 
till  the  cold  makes  them  hungry,  and  then  you  will  perhaps  see  as 
many  as  you  care  about !  " 

On  the  23d  May,  after  a  long  and  fatiguing  journey,  the  expe- 
dition at  last  reached  the  Arctic  Circle.  We  know  that  this  lati- 
tude 23°27'57"  from  the  North  Pole,  forms  the  mathematical  limit 
beyond  which  the  rays  of  the  sun  do  not  penetrate  in  the  winter, 
when  the  northern  districts  of  the  globe  are  turned  away  from  the 
orb  of  day.  Here,  then,  the  travellers  entered  the  true  Arctic 
region,  the  northern  Frigid  Zone. 

The  latitude  had  been  very  carefully  obtained  by  means  of  most 
accurate  instruments,  which  were  handled  with  equal  skill  by  the 
astronomer  and  by  Lieutenant  Hobson.  Mrs  Barnett  was  present 
at  the  operation,  and  had  the  satisfaction  of  hearing  that  she  was  at 
last  about  to  cross  the  Arctic  Circle.  It  was  with  a  feeling  of  just 
pride  that  she  received  the  intelligence. 

"  You  have  already  passed  through  the  two  Torrid  Zones  in  your 
previous  journeys,"  said  the  Lieutenant,  "  and  now  you  are  on  the 
verge  of  the  Arctic  Circle.  Few  explorers  have  ventured  into  such 
totally  different  regions.  Some,  so  to  speak,  have  a  specialty  for 
hot  countries,  and  choose  Africa  or  Australia  as  the  field  for  their 
investigations.  Such  were  Barth,  Burton,  Livingstone,  Speke, 
Douglas,  Stuart,  &c.  Others,  on  the  contrary,  have  a  passion  for 
the  Arctic  regions,  still  so  little  known.  Mackenzie,  Franklin, 
Penny,  Kane,  Parry,  Rae,  &c.,  preceded  us  on  our  present  journey; 
but  we  must  congratulate  you^  Mrs  Barnett,  on  being  a  more 
cosmopolitan  traveller  than  all  of  them." 

"I  must  see  everything,  or  at  least  try  to  see  everything, 
Lieutenant,"  replied  Mrs  Paulina;  "and  I  think  the  dangers  and 
difficulties  are  about  equal  everywhere.  Although  we  have  not  to 
dread  the  fevers  of  the  unhealthy  torrid  regions,  or  the  attacks  of 
the  fierce  black  races,  in  this  Frigid  Zone,  the  cold  is  a  no  less  formid- 
able enemy ;  and  I  suspect  that  the  white  bears  we  are  liable  to  meet 


THE  ARCTIC  CIRCLE.  43 

with  here  will  give  us  quite  as  warm  a  reception  as  would  the 
tigers  of  Thibet  or  the  lions  of  Africa.  In  Torrid  and  Frigid  Zones 
alike  there  are  vast  unexplored  tracts  which  will  long  defy  the 
efforts  of  the  boldest  adventurers." 

"  Yes,  madam,"  replied  Jaspar  Hobson ;  "  but  I  think  the 
hyperborean  regions  will  longer  resist  thorough  exploration.  The 
natives  are  the  chief  obstacle  in  tropical  regions,  and  I  am  well 
aware  how  many  travellers  have  fallen  victims  to  savages.  But 
civilisation  will  necessarily  subdue  the  wild  races  sooner  or  later ; 
whereas  in  the  Arctic  and  Antarctic  Zones  it  is  not  the  inhabitants 
who  arrest  the  progress  of  the  explorer,  but  Nature  herself  who 
repels  those  who  approach  her,  and  paralyses  their  energies  with  the 
bitter  cold  ! " 

"  You  think,  then,  that  the  secrets  of  the  most  remote  districts  of 
Africa  and  Australia  will  have  been  fathomed  before  the  Frigid  Zone 
has  been  entirely  examined  ?  " 

"  Yes,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant;  "  and  I  think  my  opinion 
is  founded  on  facts.  The  most  intrepid  discoverers  of  the  Arctic 
regions — Parry,  Penny,  Franklin,  M'Clure,  Kane,  and  Morton — did 
not  get  beyond  83°  north  latitude,  seven  degrees  from  the  pole — 
whereas  Australia  has  several  times  been  crossed  from  south  to 
north  by  the  bold  Stuart ;  and  even  Africa,  with  all  its  terrors,  was 
traversed  by  Livingstone  from  the  Bay  of  Loanga  to  the  mouth  of 
the  Zambesi.  We  are,  therefore,  nearer  to  geographical  knowledge 
of  the  equatorial  countries  than  of  the  Polar  districts." 

"  Do  you  think  that  the  Pole  itself  will  ever  be  reached  by  man?** 
inquired  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett. 

'*  Certainly,"  replied  Hobson,  adding  with  a  smile,  "  by  man  or 
woman.  But  I  think  other  means  must  be  tried  of  reaching  this 
point,  where  all  the  meridians  of  the  globe  cross  each  other,  than 
those  hitherto  adopted  by  travellers.  We  hear  of  the  open  sea,  of 
which  certain  explorers  are  said  to  have  caught  a  glimpse.  But  if 
such  a  sea,  free  from  ice,  really  exist,  it  is  very  difficult  to  get  at,  and 
no  one  can  say  positively  whether  it  extends  to  the  North  Pole.  For 
my  part,  I  think  an  open  sea  would  increase  rather  than  lessen  the 
difficulties  of  explorers.  As  for  me,  I  would  rather  count  upon  firm 
footing,  whether  on  ice  or  rock,  all  the  way.  Then  I  would  organise 
successive  expeditions,  establishing  depdts  of  provisions  and  fuel 
nearer  and  nearer  to  the  Pole;  and  so,  with  plenty  of  time,  plenty  of 
money,  and  perhaps  the  sacrifice  of  a  good  many  lives,  I  should  in 


I 


44  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

the  end  solve  the  great  scientific  problem.  I  should,  I  think,  at  last 
reach  the  hitherto  inaccessible  goal !  " 

"  I  think  you  are  right,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  and  if 
ever  you  try  the  experiment,  I  should  not  be  afraid  to  join  you,  and 
would  gladly  go  to  set  up  the  Union  Jack  at  the  North  Pole.  But 
that  is  not  our  present  object." 

"  Not  our  immediate  object,  madam,"  replied  Hobson ;  "  but 
when  once  the  projects  of  the  Company  are  realised,  when  the  new 
fort  has  been  erected  on  the  confines  of  the  American  continent,  it 
may  become  the  natural  starting-point  of  all  ex[)editions  to  the 
north.  Besides,  should  the  fur-yielding  animals,  too  zealously 
hunted,  take  refuge  at  the  Pole,  we  should  have  to  follow  them." 

"Unless  costly  furs  should  go  out  of  fashion,"  replied  Mrs 
Barnett. 

"  0  madam,"  cried  the  Lieutenant,  "  there  will  always  be  some 
pretty  woman  whose  wish  for  a  sable  mulf  or  an  ermine  tippet 
must  be  gratified  ! " 

"  I  am  afraid  so,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  laughing ;  "and  probably  the 
first  discoverer  of  the  Pole  will  have  been  led  tliither  in  pursuit  of  a 
sable  or  a  silver  fox." 

"  That  is  my  firm  conviction,"  replied  Hobson.  "  Such  is  human 
nature,  and  greed  of  gain  will  always  carry  a  man  further  than  zeal 
for  science." 

**  What  !  do  you  utter  such  sentiments  ? "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  Well,  madam,  what  am  I  but  an  employe  of  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  %  and  does  the  Company  risk  its  capital  and  agents  with 
any  other  hope  than  an  increase  of  profits  %  " 

"  Lieutenant  Hobson,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  *'  I  think  I  know  you 
well  enough  to  assert  that  on  occasion  you  would  be  ready  to  devote 
body  and  soul  to  science.  If  a  purely  geographical  question  called 
you  to  the  Pole,  I  feel  sure  you  would  not  hesitate  to  go.  But,' 
she  added,  with  a  smile,  "the  solution  of  this  great  problem  is 
still  far  distant.  We  have  but  just  reached  the  verge  of  the 
Arctic  Circle,  but  I  hope  we  may  cross  it  without  any  very  great 
difficulty." 

"That  I  fear  is  doubtful,"  said  the  Lieutenant,  who  had  been 
attentively  examining  the  sky  during  their  conversation.  "The 
weather  has  looked  threatening  for  the  last  few  days.  Look  at  the 
uniformly  grey  hue  of  the  heavens.  That  mist  will  presently  resolve 
itself  into  snow  ;  and  if  the  wind  should  rise  ever  so  little,  we  shall 


THE    HAEE    INDIANS. — -Page  54. 


THE  ARCTIC  CIRCLE,  45 


have  to  battle  with  a  fearful  storm.  I  wish  we  were  at  the  Great 
Bear  Lake  ! " 

"  Do  not  let  us  lose  any  time,  then,"  said  Mrs  Bamett,  rising  ; 
"  give  the  signal  to  start  at  once." 

The  Lieutenant  needed  no  urging.  Had  he  been  alone,  or  accom- 
panied by  a  few  men  as  energetic  as  himself,  he  would  have  pressed 
on  day  and  night ;  but  he  was  obliged  to  make  allowance  for  the 
fatigue  of  others,  although  he  never  spared  himself.  He  therefore 
granted  a  few  hours  of  rest  to  his  little  party,  and  it  was  not  until 
three  in  the  afternoon  that  they  again  set  out. 

Jaspar  Hobson  was  not  mistaken  in  prophesying  a  change  in  the 
weather.  It  came  very  soon.  During  the  afternoon  of  the  same  day 
the  mist  became  thicker,  and  assumed  a  yellowish  and  threatening 
hue.  The  Lieutenant,  although  very  uneasy,  allowed  none  of  his 
anxiety  to  ap[)ear,  but  had  a  long  consultation  with  Sergeant  Long 
whilst  the  dogs  of  his  sledge  were  laboriously  preparing  to  start. 

Unfortunately,  the  district  now  to  be  traversed  was  very  un- 
suitable for  sledges.  The  ground  was  very  uneven  ;  ravines'  were  of 
frequent  occurrence ;  and  masses  of  granite  or  half -thawed  icebergs 
blocked  up  the  road,  causing  constant  delay.  The  poor  dogs  did 
their  best,  but  the  drivers'  whips  no  longer  produced  any  effect 
upon  them. 

And  so  the  Lieutenant  and  his  men  were  often  obliged  to  walk 
to  rest  the  exhausted  animals,  to  push  the  sledges,  or  even  sometimes 
to  lift  them  when  the  roughness  of  the  ground  threatened  to  upset 
them.  The  incessant  fatigue  was,  however,  borne  by  all  without  a 
murmur.  Thomas  Black  alone,  absorbed  in  his  one  idea,  never  got 
out  of  his  sledge,  and  indeed  he  was  so  corpulent  that  all  exertion 
was  disagreeable  to  him. 

The  nature  of  the  soil  changed  from  the  moment  of  entering  the 
Arctic  Circle.  Some  geological  convulsion  had  evidently  upheaved 
the  enormous  blocks  strewn  upon  the  surface.  The  vegetation,  too, 
was  of  a  more  distinctive  character.  Wherever  they  were  sheltered 
from  the  keen  north  winds,  the  flanks  of  the  hills  were  clothed  not 
only  with  shrubs,  but  with  large  trees,  all  of  the  same  species — pines, 
willows,  and  firs — proving  by  their  presence  that  a  certain  amount 
of  vegetative  force  is  retained  even  in  the  Frigid  Zone.  Jaspar 
Hobson  hoped  to  find  such  specimens  of  the  Arctic  Flora  even  on 
the  verge  of  the  Polar  Sea ;  for  these  trees  would  supply  him  with 
wood  to  build  his  fort,   and  fuel  to  warm  its  inhabitants.     The 


I 


.# 


46  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


same  thought  passed  through  the  minds  of  his  companions,  and 
they  could  not  help  wondering  at  the  contrast  between  this  compara- 
tively fertile  region,  and  the  long  white  plains  stretching  between 
the  Great  Slave  Lake  and  Fort  Enterprise. 

At  night  the  yellow  mist  became  more  opaque ;  the  wind  rose, 
the  snow  began  to  fall  in  large  flakes,  and  the  ground  was  soon 
covered  with  a  thick  white  carpet.  In  less  than  an  hour  the  snow 
was  a  foot  deep,  and  as  it  did  not  freeze  but  remained  in  a  liquid 
state,  the  sledges  could  only  advance  with  extreme  difficulty ;  the 
curved  fronts  stuck  in  the  soft  substance,  and  the  dogs  were  obliged 
to  stop  again  and  again. 

Towards  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening  the  wind  became  very 
boisterous.  The  snow,  driven  before  it,  was  flung  upon  the  ground 
or  whirled  in  the  air,  forming  one  huge  whirlpool.  The  dogs, 
beaten  back  by  the  squall  and  blinded  with  snow,  could 
advance  no  further.  The  party  was  then  in  a  narrow  gorge  between 
huge  icebergs,  over  which  the  storm  raged  with  fearful  fury. 
Pieces  of  ice,  broken  off  by  the  hurricane,  were  hurled  into  the  pass  ; 
partial  avalanches,  any  one  of  which  could  have  crushed  the  sledges 
and  their  inmates,  added  to  its  dangers,  and  to  press  on  became 
impossible.  Tbe  Lieutenant  no  longer  insisted,  and  after  consulting 
with  Sergeant  Long,  gave  the  order  to  halt.  It  was  now  necessary 
to  find  a  shelter  from  the  snow-drift  j  but  this  was  no  difficult 
matter  to  men  accustomed  to  Polar  expeditions.  Jaspar  Hobson 
and  his  men  knew  well  what  they  had  to  do  under  the  circumstances. 
It  was  not  the  first  time  they  had  been  surprised  by  a  tempest  some 
hundred  miles  from  the  forts  of  the  Company,  without  so  much  as 
an  Esquimaux  hut  or  Indian  hovel  in  which  to  lay  their  heads. 

"  To  the  icebergs !  to  the  icebergs  !  "  cried  Jaspar  Hobson. 

Every  one  understood  what  he  meant.  Snow  houses  were  to  be 
hollowed  out  of  the  frozen  masses,  or  rather  holes  were  to  be  dug, 
in  which  each  person  could  cower  until  the  storm  was  over.  Knives 
and  hatchets  were  soon  at  work  on  the  brittle  masses  of  ice,  and  in 
three-quarters  of  an  hour  some  ten  dens  had  been  scooped  out  large 
enough  to  contain  two  or  three  persons  each.  The  dogs  were  left 
to  themselves,  their  own  instinct  leading  them  to  find  sufficient 
shelter  under  the  snow. 

Before  ten  o'clock  all  the  travellers  were  crouching  in  the  snow 
houses,  in  groups  of  two  or  three,  each  choosing  congenial  com- 
panions.    Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  and  Lieutenant  Hobson  occupied 


THE  ARCTIC  CIRCLE.  47 

one  hut,  Thomas  Black  and  Sergeant  Long  another,  and  so  on. 
These  retreats  were  warm,  if  not  comfortable ;  and  the  Esquimaux 
and  Indians  have  no  other  refuge  even  in  the  bitterest  cold.  The 
adventurers  could  therefore  fearlessly  await  the  end  of  the  storm 
as  long  as  they  took  care  not  to  let  the  openings  of  their  holes 
become  blocked  up  with  the  snow,  which  they  had  to  shovel  away 
every  half  hour.  So  violent  was  the  storm  that  even  the  Lieutenant 
and  his  soldiers  could  scarcely  set  foot  outside.  Fortunately,  all 
were  provided  with  sufficient  food,  and  were  able  to  endure  their 
beaver-like  existence  without  suffering  from  cold  or  hunger. 

For  forty- eight  h(mrs  the  fury  of  the  tempest  continued  to  increase. 
The  wind  roared  in  the  narrow  pass,  and  tore  off  the  tops  of  the 
icebergs.  Loud  reports,  repeated  twenty  times  by  the  echoes,  gave 
notice  of  the  fall  of  avalanches,  and  Jaspar  Hobson  began  to  fear 
that  his  further  progress  would  be  barred  by  the  masses  of  debris 
accumulated  between  tlie  mountains.  Other  sounds  mingled  with 
these  reports,  which  Lieutenant  Hobson  knew  too  well,  and  he  did 
not  disguise  from  Mrs  Barnett  that  bears  were  prowling  about  the 
pass.  But  fortunately  these  terrible  animals  were  too  much  occupied 
with  their  own  concerns  to  discover  the  retreat  of  the  travellers  ; 
neither  the  dogs  nor  the  sledges,  buried  in  the  snow,  attracted  their 
attention,  and  they  passed  on  without  doing  any  harm. 

The  last  night,  that  of  the  25th  or  26th  May,  was  even  more 
tenible.  So  great  was  the  fury  of  the  hurricane  that  a  general 
overthrow  of  icebergs  appeared  imminent.  A  fearful  death  would 
then  have  awaited  the  unfortunate  travellers  beneath  the  ruins  of  the 
broken  masses.  The  blocks  of  ice  cracked  wit.^  <x^  awful  noise,  and 
certain  oscillations  gave  warning  that  breaches  had  been  made 
threatening  their  solidity.  However,  no  great  crash  occurred,  the 
huge  mountains  remained  intact,  and  towards  the  end  of  the  night 
one  of  those  sudden  changes  so  frequent  in  the  Arctic  regions  took 
place  ;  the  tempest  ceased  suddenly  beneath  the  influence  of  intense 
cold,  and  with  the  first  dawn  of  day  peace  was  restored. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
THE  GREAT  BEAR  LAKE, 

■HIS  sudden  increase  of  cold  was  most  fortunate.  Even  in 
'§i^fe  temperate  climes  there  are  generally  three  or  four  bitter 
@|<^  days  in  May  ;  and  they  were  most  serviceable  now  in  con- 
solidating the  freshly-fallen  snow,  and  making  it  practicable  for 
sledges.  Lieutenant  Hobson,  therefore,  lost  no  time  in  resuming 
his  journey,  urging  on  the  dogs  to  their  utmost  speed. 

The  route  was,  however,  slightly  changed.  Instead  of  bearing  due 
north,  the  expedition  advanced  towards  the  west,  following,  so  to 
speak,  the  curve  of  the  Arctic  Circle.  The  Lieutenant  was  most 
anxious  to  reach  Fort  Confidence,  built  on  the  northern  extremity 
of  the  Great  Bear  Lake.  These  few  cold  days  were  of  the  greatest 
service  to  him  ;  he  advanced  rapidly,  no  obstacle  was  encountered, 
and  his  little  troop  arrived  at  the  factory  on  the  30th  May, 

At  this  time  Forts  Confidence  and  Good  Hope  were  the  most 
advanced  posts  of  the  Company  in  the  north.  Fort  Confidence  was 
a  most  important  position,  built  on  the  northern  extremity  of  the 
lake,  close  to  its  waters,  which  being  frozen  over  in  winter,  and 
navigable  in  summer,  afforded  easy  access  to  Fort  Franklin,  on 
the  southern  shores,  and  promoted  the  coming  and  going  of  the 
Indian  hunters  with  their  daily  spoils.  Many  were  the  hunting 
and  fishing  expeditions  which  started  from  Forts  Confidence  and 
Good  Hope,  especially  from  the  former.  The  Great  Bear  Lake  i» 
quite  a  Mediterranean  Sea,  extending  over  several  degrees  of  latitude 
and  longitude.  Its  shape  is  very  irregular  :  two  promontories  jut 
into  it  towards  the  centre,  and  the  upper  portion  forms  a  triangle  ; 
its  appearance,  as  a  whole,  much  resembling  the  extended  skin  of  a 
ruminant  without  the  head. 

Fort  Confidence  was  built  at  the  end  of  the  "  right  paw,"  at  least 
two  hundred  miles  from  Coronation  Gulf,  one  of  the  numerous 
estuaries  which  irregularly  indent  the  coast  of  North  America.      It 


' '^-^^^^^^^^^B^Mj' 

:-',---* 

''  1 

r.^1 

^S^l^^^^^^g^^^^^^gi:   f&^:-^^^^^^Us 

i9^ 

^^"^ 

^^^^ 

^j:;^^ 

y 

A    STORM    ON   THE    LAKE,  —  Pasje   60. 


i 


t' 


k 


THE  GREA  T  BEAR  LAKE,  Ar9 


was  therefore  situated  beyond  tlie  Arctic  Circle,  but  three  degrees 
south  of  the  seventieth  parallel,  north  of  which  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  proposed  forming  a  new  settlement. 

Fort  Confidence,  as  a  whole,  much  resembled  other  factories 
further  south.  It  consisted  of  a  house  for  the  officers,  barracks  for 
the  soldiers,  and  magazines  for  the  furs — all  of  wood,  surrounded 
by  palisades.  The  captain  in  command  was  then  absent.  He  had 
gone  towards  the  east  on  a  hunting  expedition  with  a  few  Indiana 
and  soldiers.  The  last  season  had  not  been  good,  costly  furs  had 
been  scarce  ;  but  to  make  up  for  this  the  lake  had  supplied  plenty 
of  otter-skins.  The  stock  of  them  had,  however,  just  been  sent 
to  the  central  factories  in  the  south,  so  that  the  magazines  of  Fort 
Confidence  were  empty  on  the  arrival  of  our  party. 

In  the  absence  of  the  Captain  a  Sergeant  did  the  honours  of  the 
fort  to  Jaspar  Hobsou  and  his  companions.  This  second  officer. 
Felton  by  name,  was  a  brother-in-law  of  Sergeant  Long.  He 
showed  the  greatest  r^diness  to  assist  the  views  of  the  Lieutenant, 
who  being  anxious  to  rest  his  party,  decided  on  remaining  two  or 
three  days  at  Fort  Confidence.  In  the  absence  of  the  little  garrison 
there  was  plenty  of  room,  and  dogs  and  men  were  soon  comfortably 
installed.  The  best  room  in  the  largest  house  was  of  course  given 
to  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett,  who  was  delighted  with  the  politeness  oi 
Sergeant  Felton. 

Jaspar  Hobson's  first  care  was  to  ask  Felton  if  any  Indians  from 
the  north  were  then  beating  the  shores  of  the  Great  Bear  Lake 

"  Yes,  Lieutenant,"  replied  the  Sergeant ;  "  we  have  just  received 
notice  of  the  encampment  of  a  party  of  Hare  Indians  on  the  other 
northern  extremity  of  the  lake." 

"  How  far  from  here  1 "  inquired  Hobson. 

"  About  thirty  miles,"  replied  Sergeant  Felton.  '*  Do  you  wish 
to  enter  into  communication  with  these  Indians  ? " 

"  Yes,"  said  Hobson;  "  they  may  be  able  to  give  me  some  valuable 
information  about  the  districts  bordering  on  the  Arctic  Ocean,  and 
bounded  by  Cape  Bathurst.  Should  the  site  be  favourable,  I  pro- 
pose constructing  our  new  fort  somewhere  about  there." 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,  nothing  is  easier  than  to  go  to  the  Hare  en- 
campment." 

"  Along  the  shores  of  the  lake  ? " 

"No,  across  it ;  it  is  now  free  from  ice,  and  the  wind  is  favour 

D 


50  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


able.     We  will  place  a  cutter  and  a  boatman  at  your  service,  and 
in  a  few  hours  you  will  be  in  the  Indian  settlement." 

"  Thank  you,  Sergeant ;  to-morrow,  then." 

"  Whenever  you  like,  Lieutenant." 

The  start  was  fixed  for  the  next  morning ;  and  when  Mrs  Paulina 
Barnett  heard  of  the  plan,  she  begged  the  Lieutenant  to  allow  her  to 
accompany  him,  which  of  course  he  readily  did. 

But  now  to  tell  how  the  rest  of  this  first  day  was  passed.  Mrs 
Barnett,  Hobson,  two  or  three  soldiers,  Madge,  Mrs  Mac-Nab,  and 
Joliffe  explored  the  shores  of  the  lake  under  the  guidance  of  Felton. 
The  neighbourhood  was  by  no  means  barren  of  vegetation  ;  the  hills, 
now  free  from  snow,  were  crowned  by  resinous  trees  of  the  Scotch 
pine  species.  These  trees,  which  attain  a  height  of  some  forty  feet, 
supply  the  inhabitants  of  the  forts  with  plenty  of  fuel  through  the 
long  winter.  Their  thick  trunks  and  dark  gloomy  branches  form  a 
striking  feature  of  the  landscape  ;  but  the  regular  clumps  of  equal 
height,  sloping  down  to  the  very  edge  of  the  water,  are  somewhat 
monotonous.  Between  the  groups  of  trees  the  soil  was  clothed  with 
a  sort  of  whitish  weed,  which  perfumed  the  air  with  a  sweet  thymy 
odour.  Sergeant  Felton  informed  his  guests  that  this  plant  was 
called  the  '*  herb  of  incense"  on  account  of  the  fragrance  it  emits 
when  burnt. 

Some  hundred  steps  from  the  fort  the  party  came  to  a  little 
natural  harbour  shut  in  by  high  granite  rocks,  which  formed  an 
admirable  protection  from  the  heavy  surf.  Here  was  anchored  the 
fleet  of  Fort  Confidence,  consisting  of  a  single  fishing-boat — the 
very  one  which  was  to  take  Mrs  Barnett  and  Hobson  to  the  Indian 
encampment  the  next  day.  From  this  harbour  an  extensive  view 
was  obtained  'of  the  lake;  its  waters  slightly  agitated  by  the  wind, 
with  its  irregular  shores  broken  by  jagged  capes  and  intersected  by 
creeks.  The  wooded  heights  beyond,  with  here  and  there  the  rugged 
outline  of  a  floating  iceberg  standing  out  against  the  clear  blue  air,' 
formed  the  background  on  the  north ;  whilst  on  the  south  a  regular 
sea  horizon,  a  circular  line  clearly  cutting  sky  and  water,  and  at  this 
moment  glittering  in  the  sunbeams,  bounded  the  sight. 

The  whole  scene  was  rich  in  animal  and  vegetable  life.  The 
surface  of  the  water,  the  shores  strewn  with  flints  and  blocks  of 
granite,  the  slopes  with  their  tapestry  of  herbs,  the  tree-crowned 
hill-tops,  were  all  alike  frequented  by  various  specimens  of  the 
feathered  tribe.     Several  varieties  of  ducks,  uttering  their  different 


THE  GREA  T  BEAR  LAKE,  5  I 

cries  and  calls,  eider  ducks,  whistlers,  spotted  redshanks,  "  old 
women,"  those  loquacious  birds  whose  beak  is  never  closed,  skimmed 
the  surface  of  the  lake.  Hundreds  of  puffins  and  guillemots  with 
outspread  wings  darted  about  in  every  direction,  and  beneath  the 
trees  strutted  ospreys  two  feet  high — a  kind  of  hawk  with  a  grey 
body,  blue  beak  and  claws,  and  orange-coloured  eyes,  which  build 
their  huge  nests  of  marine  plants  in  the  forked  branches  of  trees. 
The  hunter  Sabine  managed  to  bring  down  a  couple  of  these  gigantic 
ospreys,  which  measured  nearly  six  feet  from  tip  to  tip  of  their  wings, 
and  were  therefore  magnificent  specimens  of  these  migratory  birds, 
who  feed  entirely  on  fish,  and  take  refuge  on  the  shores  of  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico  when  winter  sets  in,  only  visiting  the  higher  latitudes  of 
North  America  during  the  short  summer. 

But  the  most  interesting  event  of  the  day  was  the  capture  of  an 
otter,  the  skin  of  which  was  worth  several  hundred  roubles. 

The  furs  of  these  valuable  amphibious  creatures  were  once  much 
sought  after  in  China  ;  and  although  the  demand  for  them  has  con- 
siderably decreased  in  the  Celestial  Empire,  they  still  command  very 
high  prices  in  the  Russian  market.  Russian  traders,  ready  to  buy 
up  sea-otter  skins,  travel  all  along  the  coasts  of  New  Cornwall  as 
far  as  the  Arctic  Ocean ;  and  of  course,  thus  hunted,  the  animal  is 
becoming  very  rare.  It  has  taken  refuge  further  and  further  north, 
and  the  trackers  have  now  to  pursue  it  on  the  shores  of  the 
Kamtchatka  Sea,  and  in  the  islands  of  the  Behring  Archipelago. 

**But/'  added  Sergeant  Felton,  after  the  preceding  explanation, 
"  American  inland  otters  are  not  to  be  despised,  and  those  which 
frequent  the  Great  Bear  Lake  are  worth  from  £50  to  X60  each." 

The  Sergeant  was  right ;  magnificent  otters  are  found  in  these 
waters,  and  he  himself  skilfully  tracked  and  killed  one  in  the  pre- 
sence of  his  visitors  which  was  scarcely  inferior  in  value  to  those 
from  Kamtchatka  itself.  The  creature  measured  three  feet  from 
the  muzzle  to  the  end  of  its  tail ;  it  had  webbed  feet,  short  legs,  and 
its  fur,  darker  on  the  upper  than  on  the  under  part  of  its  body,  was 
long  and  silky. 

"  A  good  shot.  Sergeant,"  said  Lieutenant  Hobson,  who  with  Mrs 
Barnett  had  been  attentively  examining  the  magnificent  fur  of  the 
dead  animal. 

"  Yes,  Lieutenant,"  replied  Felton ;  "  and  if  each  day  brought  us 
such  a  skin  as  that,  we  should  have  nothing  to  complain  of.  But 
much  time  is  wasted  in  watching  these  animals,  who  swim  and  dive 


5a  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


With  marvellous  rapidity.  We  generally  hunt  them  at  night,  as  they 
very  seldom  venture  from  their  homes  iu  the  trunks  of  trees  or  the 
holes  of  rocks  in  the  daytime,  and  even  expert  hunters  find  it  very 
difficult  to  discover  their  retreats." 

"  And  are  these  otters  also  becoming  scarcer  and  scarcer?"  inquired 
Mrs  Barnett. 

"Yes,  madam,"  replied  the  Sergeant;  "and  when  this  speciea 
becomes  extinct,  the  profits  of  the  Company  will  sensibly  decline. 
All  the  hunters  try  to  obtain  its  fur,  ;ind  the  Americans  in  particular 
are  formidable  rivals  to  us.  Did  you  not  meet  any  American  agents 
on  your  journey  up.  Lieutenant?" 

"  Not  one,"  replied  Hobson.  "  Do  they  ever  penetrate  as  far  as 
this  ? " 

"  Oh  yes  1  "  said  the  Sergeant ;  "  and  when  you  hear  of  their 
approach,  I  advise  you  to  be  on  your  guard." 

"  Are  these  agents,  then,  highway  robbers  ? "  asked  Mrs  Paulina 
Barnett. 

"  No,  madam,"  replied  the  Sergeant ;  "  but  they  are  formidable 
rivals,  and  when  game  is  scarce,  hunters  often  come  to  blows  about 
it.  I  daresay  that  if  the  Company's  attempt  to  establish  a  fort  on 
the  verge  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  be  successful,  its  example  will  at  once 
be  followed  by  these  Americans,  whom  Heaven  confound ! " 

"Bah!"  exclaimed  the  Lieutenant;  "  the  hunting  districts  are 
vast,  and  there  's  room  beneath  the  sun  for  everybody.  As  for  us, 
let 's  make  a  start  to  begin  with.  Let  us  press  on  as  long  as  we  have 
firm  ground  beneath  our  feet,  and  God  be  with  us  !  " 

After  a  walk  of  three  hours  the  visitors  returned  to  Fort  Confi- 
dence, where  a  good  meal  of  fish  and  fresh  venison  awaited  them. 
Sergeant  Long  did  the  honours  of  the  table,  and  after  a  little 
pleasant  conversation,  all  retired  to  rest  to  forget  their  fatigues  in  a 
healthy  and  refreshing  sleep. 

The  next  day.  May  31st,  Mrs  Barnett  and  Jaspar  Hobson  were 
on  foot  at  five  a.m.  The  Lieutenant  intended  to  devote  this  day  to 
visiting  the  Indian  encampment,  and  obtaining  as  much  useful 
information  as  possible.  He  asked  Thomas  Black  to  go  with  him, 
but  the  astronomer  preferred  to  remain  on  terra  firma.  He  wished  to 
make  a  few  astronomical  observations,  and  to  determine  exactly  the 
latitude  and  longitude  of  Fort  Confidence  ;  so  that  Mrs  Barnett  and 
Jaspar  Hobson  had  to  cross  the  lake  alone,  under  the  guidance  of  an 


"  Iloo.'ifm  niuirfd  a  last  despairing  cry."  —  Paije 


61. 


i 


THE  GREAT  BEAR  LAKE,  53 

old  boatman  named  Norman,  who  had  long  been  in  the  Company's 
service. 

The  two  travellers  were  accompanied  by  Sergeant  Long  as  far  as 
the  little  harbour,  where  they  found  old  Norman  ready  to  embark. 
Their  little  vessel  was  but  an  open  fishing-boat,  16  feet  long,  rigged 
like  a  cutter,  which  one  man  could  easily  manage.  The  weather 
was  beautiful,  and  the  slight  breeze  blowing  from  the  north-east 
was  favourable  to  the  crossing.  Sergeant  Felton  took  leave  of  his 
guests  with  many  apologies  for  being  unable  to  accompany  them  in 
the  absence  of  his  chief.  The  boat  was  let  loose  from  its  moorings, 
and  tacking  to  starboard,  shot  across  the  clear  waters  of  the  lake. 

The  little  trip  passed  pleasantly  enough.  The  taciturn  old 
sailor  sat  silent  in  the  stern  of  the  boat  with  the  tiller  tucked  under 
his  arm.  Mrs  Barnett  and  Lieutenant  Hobson,  seated  opposite  to 
each  other,  examined  with  interest  the  scenery  spread  out  before 
them.  The  boat  skirted  the  northern  shores  of  the  lake  at  about 
three  miles'  distance,  following  a  rectilinear  direction,  so  that  the 
wooded  heights  sloping  gradually  to  the  west  were  distinctly  visible. 
From  this  side  the  district  north  of  the  lake  appeared  perfectly  flat, 
and  the  horizon  receded  to  a  considerable  distance.  The  whole 
of  this  coast  contrasted  strongly  with  the  sharp  angle,  at  the 
extremity  of  which  rose  Fort  Confidence,  framed  in  green  pines. 
The  flag  of  the  Company  was  still  visible  floating  from  the  tower 
of  the  fort.  The  oblique  rays  of  the  sun  lit  up  the  surface  of  the 
*  water,  and  striking  on  the  floating  icebergs,  seemed  to  convert 
them  into  molten  silver  of  dazzling  brightness.  No  trace  remained 
of  the  solid  ice-mountains  of  the  winter  but  these  moving  relics, 
which  the  solar  rays  could  scarcely  dissolve,  and  which  seemed,  as 
it  were,  to  protest  against  the  brilliant  but  not  very  powerful  Polar 
sun,  now  describing  a  diurnal  arc  of  considerable  length. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  the  Lieutenant,  as  was  their  custom,  communi- 
cated to  each  other  the  thoughts  suggested  by  the  strange  scenes 
through  which  they  were  passing.  They  laid  up  a  store  of  pleasant 
recollections  for  the  future  whilst  the  boat  floated  rapidly  along 
upon  the  peaceful  waves. 

The  party  started  at  six  in  the  morning,  and  at  nine  they  neared 
the  point  on  the  northern  bank  at  which  they  were  to  land.  The 
Indian  encampment  was  situated  at  the  north-west  angle  of  the 
Great  Bear  Lake.  Before  ten  o'clock  old  Norman  ran  the  boat 
aground  on  a  low  bank  at  the  foot  of  a  cliff  of  moderate  height. 


54  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Mrs  Barnett  and  the  Lieutenant  landed  at  once.  Two  or  three 
Indians,  with  their  chief,  wearing  gorgeous  plumes,  hastened  to 
meet  them,  and  addressed  them  in  fairly  intelligible  English. 

These  Hare  Indians,  like  the  Copper  and  Beaver  Indians,  all 
belong  to  the  Chippeway  race,  and  differ  but  little  in  customs  and 
costumes  from  their  fellow-tribes.  They  are  in  constant  communica- 
tion with  the  factories,  and  have  become,  so  to  speak,  "Britainised" 
— at  least  as  much  so  as  is  possible  for  savages.  They  bring 
the  spoils  of  the  chase  to  the  forts,  and  there  exchange  them  for 
the  necessaries  of  life,  which  they  no  longer  provide  for  them- 
selves. They  are  in  the  pay  of  the  Company,  they  live  upon 
it,  and  it  is  not  surprising  that  they  have  lost  all  originality.  To 
find  a  native  race  as  yet  uninfluenced  by  contact  with  Europeans 
we  must  go  to  still  higher  latitudes,  to  the  ice-bound  regions 
frequented  by  the  Esquimaux,  who,  like  the  Greenlanders,  are  the 
true  children  of  Arctic  lands. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Jaspar  Hobson  accompanied  the  Indians  to 
their  camp,  about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  found  some  thirty 
natives  there,  men,  women,  and  children,  who  supported  themselves 
by  hunting  and  fishing  on  the  borders  of  the  lake.  These  Indians 
had  just  come  from  the  northernmost  districts  of  the  American 
continent,  and  were  able  to  give  the  Lieutenant  some  valuable, 
although  necessarily  incomplete,  information  on  the  actual  state  of 
the  sea-coast  near  the  seventieth  parallel.  The  Lieutenant  heard  with 
considerable  satisfaction  that  a  party  of  Americans  or  Europeans 
had  been  seen  on  the  confines  of  the  Polar  Sea,  and  that  it  was 
open  at  this  time  of  year.  About  Cape  Bathurst,  properly  so 
called,  the  point  for  which  he  intended  to  make,  the  Hare 
Indians  could  tell  him  nothing.  Their  chief  said,  however,  that  the 
district  between  the  Great  Bear  Lake  and  Cape  Bathurst  was  very 
difficult  to  cross,  being  hilly  and  intersected  by  streams,  at  this 
season  of  the  year  free  from  ice.  He  advised  the  Lieutenant  to  go 
down  the  Coppermine  river,  from  the  north-east  of  the  lake,  which 
would  take  him  to  the  coast  by  the  shortest  route.  Once  at  the 
Arctic  Ocean,  it  would  be  easy  to  skirt  along  its  shores  and  to 
choose  the  best  spot  at  which  to  halt. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  thanked  the  Indian  chief,  and  took  leave  after 
giving  him  a  few  presents.  Then  accompanied  by  Mrs  Barnett,  he 
explored  the  neighbourhood  of  the  camp,  not  returning  to  the  boat 
until  nearly  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon. 


SAVED  !  — •  Paorc  62. 


II! 


CHAPTER  IX. 

A   STORM  ON    THE   LAKE. 

fHE  old  sailor  was  impatiently  awaiting  the  return  of  the 
travellers ;  for  during  the  last  hour  the  weather  had 
changed,  and  the  appearance  of  the  sky  was  calculated  to 
render  any  one  accustomed  to  read  the  signs  of  the  clouds  uneasy. 
The  sun  was  obscured  by  a  thick  mist,  the  wind  had  fallen,  but  an 
ominous  moaning  was  heard  from  the  south  of  the  lake.  These 
symptoms  of  an  approaching  change  of  temperature  were  developed 
with  all  the  rapidity  peculiar  to  these  elevated  latitudes. 

"  Let  us  be  off,  sir  !  let  us  be  off ! "  cried  old  Norman,  looking 
anxiously  at  the  fog  above  his  head.  **  Let  us  start  without  losing 
an  instant.     There  are  terrible  signs  in  the  air !  " 

"  Indeed,"  exclaimed  the  Lieutenant,  "  the  appearance  of  the  sky 
is  quite  changed,  and  we  never  noticed  it,  Mrs  Barnett ! " 

"  Are  you  afraid  of  a  storm  ? "  inquired  the  lady  of  old  Norman. 

"Yes,  madam,"  replied  the  old  sailor;  "and  the  storms  on  the 
Great  Bear  Lake  are  often  terrible.  The  hurricane  rages  as  if 
upon  the  open  Atlantic  Ocean.  This  sudden  fog  bodes  us  no  good  ; 
but  the  tempest  may  hold  back  for  three  or  four  hours,  and  by  that 
time  we  shall  be  at  Fort  Confidence.  Let  us  then  start  without  a 
moment's  delay,  for  the  boat  would  not  be  safe  near  these  rocks." 

The  Lieutenant,  feeling  that  the  old  man,  accustomed  as  he  was 
to  navigate  these  waters,  was  better  able  to  judge  than  himself, 
decided  to  follow  his  advice,  and  embarked  at  once  with  Mrs  Barnett 

But  just  as  they  were  pushing  off,  old  Norman,  as  if  possessed  by 
some  sudden  presentiment,  murmured — 

"  Perhaps  it  would  be  better  to  wait." 

Lieutenant  Hobson  overheard  these  words,  and  looked  inquiringly 
at  the  old  boatman,  already  seated  at  the  helm.  Had  he  been  alone 
he  would  not  have  hesitated  to  start,  but  as  Mrs  Barnett  was  with 
him  caution  was  necessary.  The  lady  at  once  saw  and  understood 
his  hesitation. 


56  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


"  Never  mind  about  me,  Lieutenant,"  she  said ;  "  act  as  if  I  were 
not  present.     Let  us  start  immediately,  as  our  brave  guide  suggests," 

"  We  are  off,  then,"  cried  Norman,  letting  go  the  moorings,  '*  to 
the  fort  by  the  shortest  route." 

For  about  an  hour  the  bark  made  little  head.  The  sail,  scarcely 
filled  by  the  fitful  breeze,  flapped  against  the  mast.  The  fog  became 
thicker.  The  waves  began  to  rise  and  the  boat  to  rock  consider- 
ably; for  the  approaching  hurricane  affected  the  water  sooner  than 
the  atmosphere  itself.  The  two  travellers  sat  still  and  silent,  whilst 
the  old  sailor  peered  into  the  darkness  with  bloodshot  eyes. 
Prepared  for  all  contingencies,  he  awaited  the  shock  of  the  wind, 
ready  to  pay  out  rapidly  should  the  attack  be  very  violent.  The 
conflict  of  the  elements  had  not,  however,  as  yet  commenced  ;  and  all 
would  have  been  well  if  they  had  been  able  to  advance,  but  after  an 
hour's  sail  they  were  still  only  about  two  hours'  distance  from  the 
Indian  encampment.  A  few  gusts  of  wind  from  the  shore  drove 
them  out  of  their  course,  and  the  dense  fog  rendered  it  impossible 
for  them  to  make  out  the  coast-line.  Should  the  wind  settle  in 
the  north  it  would  probably  go  hard  with  the  light  boat,  which, 
unable  to  hold  its  own  course,  would  be  drifted  out  into  the  lake 
no  one  knew  where. 

"We  are  scarcely  advancing  at  all,"  said  the  Lieutenant  to  old 
Norman. 

"  No,  sir,"  replied  Norman  ;  "the  wind  is  not  strong  enough  to  fill 
the  sail,  and  if  it  were,  I  fear  it  comes  from  the  wrong  quarter.  If 
so,"  he  added,  pointing  to  the  south,  "  we  may  see  Fort  Franklin 
before  Fort  Confidence." 

"Well,"  said  Mrs  Barnett  cheerfully,  "our  trip  will  have  been 
all  the  more  complete.  This  is  a  magnificent  lake,  well  worth  ex- 
ploring from  north  to  south.  I  suppose,  Norman,  one  might  get 
back  even  from  Fort  Franklin  %  " 

"  Yes,  madam,  if  we  ever  reach  it,"  replied  the  old  man.  "  But 
tempests  lasting  fifteen  days  are  by  no  means  rare  on  this  lake ;  and 
if  our  bad  luck  should  drive  us  to  the  south,  it  may  be  a  month 
before  Lieutenant  Hobson  again  sees  Fort  Confidence." 

"  Let  us  be  careful,  then,"  said  the  Lieutenant ;  "  for  such  a  delay 
would  hinder  our  projects  very  much.  Do  the  best  you  can  under 
the  circumstances,  and  if  you  think  it  would  be  prudent,  go  back 
to  the  north.  I  don't  suppose  Mrs  Barnett  would  mind  a  walk  of 
twenty  or  twenty-five  miles." 


A  STORM  ON  THE  LAKE.  57 

"  I  should  be  glad  enough  to  go  back  to  the  north.  Lieutenant," 
replied  Norman,  "  if  it  were  still  possible.  But  look,  the  wind 
seems  likely  to  settle  against  us.  All  I  can  attempt  is  to  get  to  the 
cape  on  the  north-east,  and  if  it  doesn't  blow  too  hard,  I  hope  to 
succeed." 

But  at  about  half-past  four  the  storm  broke.  The  shrill  whistling 
of  the  wind  was  heard  far  above  their  heads,  but  the  state  of  the 
atmosphere  prevented  it  from  as  yet  descending  upon  the  lake ;  this 
was,  however,  only  delayed  for  a  brief  space  of  time.  The  cries  of 
frightened  birds  flying  through  the  fog  mingled  with  the  noise  of 
the  wind.  Suddenly  the  mist  was  torn  open,  and  revealed  low 
jagged  masses  of  rain-cloud  chased  towards  the  south.  The  fears 
of  the  old  sailor  were  realised.  The  wind  blew  from  the  north, 
and  it  was  not  long  before  the  travellers  learned  the  meaning  of  a 
squall  upon  the  lake. 

"  Look  out !  "  cried  old  Norman,  tightening  sail  so  as  to  get  his 
boat  ahead  of  the  wind,  whilst  keeping  her  under  control  of  the 
helm. 

The  squall  came.  It  caught  the  boat  upon  the  flank,  and  it  was 
turned  over  on  its  side ;  but  recovering  itself,  it  was  flung  upon 
the  crest  of  a  wave.  The  billows  surged  as  if  upon  an  open  sea. 
The  waters  of  the  lake  not  being  very  deep,  struck  against  the 
bottom  and  rebounded  to  an  immense  height. 

"  Help  !  help  !  "  cried  old  Norman,  hurriedly  struggling  to  haul 
down  his  sail. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Jiobson  endeavoured  to  come  to  his  assistance, 
but  without  success,  for  they  knew  nothing  of  the  management  of 
a  boat.  Norman,  unable  to  leave  the  helm,  and  the  halliards 
being  entangled  at  the  top  of  the  mast,  could  not  take  in  the  sail. 
Every  moment  the  boat  threatened  to  capsize,  and  heavy  seas  broke 
over  its  sides.  The  sky  became  blacker  and  blacker,  cold  rain  mingled 
with  snow  fell  in  torrents,  whilst  the  squall  redoubled  its  fury,  lash- 
ing the  crests  of  the  waves  into  foam. 

"  Cut  it  !  cut  it ! "  screamed  Norman  above  the  roaring  of  the 
storm. 

,       The  Lieutenant,  his  cap  blown  away  and  his  eyes  blinded  by  the 
1  spray,  seized  Norman's  knife  and  cut  the  halliard  like  a  harp-string; 
but  the  wet  cordage  no  longer  acted  in  the  grooves  of  the  pulleys,  and 
the  yard  remained  attached  to  the  top  of  the  mast. 

Norman,  totally  unable  to  make  head  against  the  wind,  now 


58  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


resolved  to  tack  about  for  the  south,  dangerous  as  it  would  be  to 
have  the  boat  before  the  wind,  pursued  by  waves  advancing  at 
double  its  speed.  Yes,  to  tack,  although  this  course  would  probably 
bring  them  all  to  the  southern  shores  of  the  lake,  far  away  from 
their  destination. 

The  Lieutenant  and  his  brave  companion  were  well  aware  of  the 
danger  which  threatened  them.  The  frail  boat  could  not  long  resist 
the  blows  of  the  waves,  it  would  either  be  crushed  or  capsized;  the 
lives  of  those  within  it  were  in  the  hands  of  God. 

But  neither  yielded  to  despair;  clinging  to  the  sides  of  the  boat,  wet 
to  the  skin,  chilled  to  the  bone  by  the  cutting  blast,  they  strove  to 
gaze  through  the  thick  mist  and  fog.  All  trace  of  the  land  had  dis- 
appeared, and  so  great  was  the  obscurity  that  at  a  cable's  length  from 
the  boat  clouds  and  waves  could  not  be  distinguished  from  each 
other.  Now  and  then  the  two  travellers  looked  inquiringly  into  old 
Norman's  face,  who,  with  teeth  set  and  hands  clutching  the  tiller, 
tried  to  keep  his  boat  as  much  as  possible  under  wind. 

But  the  violence  of  the  squall  became  such  that  the  boat  could 
not  long  maintain  this  course.  The  waves  which  struck  its  bow 
would  soon  have  inevitably  crushed  it ;  the  front  planks  were 
already  beginning  to  separate,  and  when  its  whole  weight  was 
flung  into  the  hollows  of  the  waves  it  seemed  as  if  it  could  rise  no 
more. 

*'  We  must  tack,  we  must  tack,  whatever  happens  !  "  murmured 
the  old  sailor. 

And  pushing  the  tiller  and  paying  out  sail,  he  turned  the  head  of 
the  boat  to  the  south.  The  sail,  stretched  to  the  utmost,  brought  the 
boat  round  with  giddy  rapidity,  and  the  immense  waves,  chased  by 
the  wind,  threatened  to  engulf  the  little  bark.  This  was  the 
great  danger  of  shifting  with  the  wind  right  aft.  The  billows 
hurled  themselves  in  rapid  succession  upon  the  boat,  which  could 
not  evade  them.  It  filled  rapidly,  and  the  water  had  to  be  baled 
out  without  a  moment's  pause,  or  it  must  have  foundered.  As  they 
got  nearer  and  nearer  to  the  middle  of  the  lake  the  waves  became 
rougher.  Nothing  there  broke  the  fury  of  the  wind  ;  no  clumps  of 
trees,  no  hills,  checked  for  a  moment  the  headlong  course  of  the  hur- 
ricane. Now  and  then  momentary  glimpses  were  obtained  through 
the  fog  of  icebergs  dancing  like  buoys  upon  the  waves,  and  driven 
towards  the  south  of  the  lake. 

It  was  half  past  five.     Neither  Norman  nor  the  Lieutenant  had 


THE    MOUTH    OP   THE    COPPERMINE    RIVER.  —  Page  64. 


A  STORM  ON  THE  LAKE.  59 

any  idea  of  where  they  were,  or  whither  they  were  going.  They 
had  lost  all  control  over  the  boat,  and  were  at  the  mercy  of  the 
winds  and  waves. 

And  now  at  about  a  hundred  feet  behind  the  boat  a  huge  wave 
upreared  its  foam-crowned  crest,  whilst  in  front  a  black  whirlpool 
was  formed  by  the  sudden  sinking  of  the  water.  All  su-rface  agita- 
tion, crushed  by  the  wind,  had  disappeared  around  this  awful  gulf, 
which,  growing  deeper  and  blacker  every  moment,  drew  the  devoted 
little  vessel  towards  its  fatal  embrace.  Ever  nearer  came  the 
mighty  wave,  all  lesser  billows  sinking  into  insignificance  before  it. 
It  gained  upon  the  boat,  another  moment  and  it  would  crush  it  to 
atoms.  Norman,  looking  round,  saw  its  approach;  and  Mrs  Barnett 
and  the  Lieutenant,  with  eyes  fixed  and  staring,  awaited  in  fearful 
suspense  the  blow  from  which  there  was  no  escape.  The  wave 
broke  over  them  with  the  noise  of  thunder ;  it  enveloped  the  stern 
of  the  boat  in  foam,  a  fearful  crash  was  heard,  and  a  cry  burst  from 
the  lips  of  the  Lieutenant  and  his  companion,  smothered  beneath  the 
liquid  mass. 

They  thought  that  all  was  over,  and  that  the  boat  had  sunk;  but 
no,  it  rose  once  more,  although  more  than  half  filled  with  water. 

The  Lieutenant  uttered  a  cry  of  despair.  Where  was  Norman  j 
The  poor  old  sailor  had  disappeared  ! 

Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  looked  inquiringly  at  Hobson. 

"  Norman  !  "  he  repeated,  pointing  to  his  empty  place. 

"  Unhappy  man  ! "  murmured  Mrs  Barnett ;  and  at  the  risk  of 
being  flung  from  the  boat  rocking  on  the  waves,  the  two  started  to 
their  feet  and  looked  around  them.  But  they  could  see  and  hear 
nothing.  No  cry  for  help  broke  upon  their  ears.  No  dead  body 
floated  in  the  white  foam.  The  old  sailor  had  met  his  death  in  the 
element  he  loved  so  well. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Hobson  sank  back  upon  their  seats.  They  were 
now  alone,  and  must  see  to  their  own  safety ;  but  neither  of  them 
knew  anything  of  the  management  of  a  boat,  and  even  an  experi- 
enced hand  could  scarcely  have  controlled  it  now.  They  were  at  the 
mercy  of  the  waves,  and  the  bark,  with  distended  sail,  swept  along 
in  mad  career.  What  could  the  Lieutenant  do  to  check  or  direct  its 
course  ? 

What  a  terrible  situation  for  our  travellers,  to  be  thus  overtaken 
by  a  tempest  in  a  frail  bark  which  they  could  not  manage ! 

"  We  are  lost !  "  said  the  Lieutenant. 


6o  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


"  No,  Lieutenant,"  replied  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  let  us  make  another 
eflfort.      Heaven  helps  those  who  help  themselves  !  " 

Lieutenant  Hobson  now  for  the  first  time  realised  with  how  in- 
trepid a  woman  fate  had  thrown  him. 

The  first  thing  to  be  done  was  to  get  rid  of  the  water  which 
weighed  down  the  boat.  Another  wave  shipped  would  have  filled 
it  in  a  moment,  and  it  must  have  sunk  at  once.  The  vessel  light- 
ened, it  would  have  a  better  chance  of  rising  on  the  waves ;  and  the 
two  set  to  work  to  bale  out  the  water.  This  was  no  easy  task  ;  for 
fresh  waves  constantly  broke  over  them,  and  the  scoop  could  not  be 
laid  aside  for  an  instant.  Mrs  Barnett  was  indefatigable,  and  the 
Lieutenant,  leaving  the  baling  to  her,  took  the  helm  himself,  and 
did  the  best  he  could  to  guide  the  boat  with  the  wind  right  aft. 

To  add  to  the  danger,  night,  or  rather  darkness,  for  in  these  lati- 
tudes night  only  lasts  a  few  hours  at  this  time  of  year,  fell  upon 
them.  Scarce  a  ray  of  light  penetrated  through  the  heavy  clouds 
and  fog.  They  could  not  see  two  yards  before  them,  and  the  boat 
must  have  been  dashed  to  pieces  had  it  struck  a  floating  iceberg. 
This  danger  was  indeed  imminent,  for  the  loose  ice-masses  advance 
with  such  rapidity  that  it  is  impossible  to  get  out  of  their  way. 

"  You  have  no  control  over  the  helm  % "  said  Mrs  Barnett  in  a 
slight  lull  of  the  storm. 

"  No,  madam,"  he  replied  ;  "  and  you  must  prepare  for  the  worst.** 

"  I  am  ready  ! "  replied  the  courageous  woman  simply. 

As  she  spoke  a  loud  ripping  sound  was  heard.  The  sail,  torn 
away  by  the  wind,  disappeared  like  a  white  cloud.  The  boat  sped 
rapidly  along  for  a  few  instants,  and  then  stopped  suddenly,  the 
waves  buffeting  it  about  like  an  abandoned  wreck.  Mrs  Barnett 
and  Hobson,  flung  to  the  bottom  of  the  boat,  bruised,  shaken,  and 
torn,  felt  that  all  was  lost.  Not  a  shred  of  canvas  was  left  to  aid  in 
navigating  the  craft ;  and  what  with  the  spray,  the  snow,  and  the 
rain,  they  could  scarcely  see  each  other,  whilst  the  uproar  drowned 
their  voices.  Expecting  every  moment  to  perish,  they  remained 
for  an  hour  in  painful  suspense,  commending  themselves  to  God, 
who  alone  could  save  them. 

Neither  of  them  could  have  said  how  long  they  waited  when  they 
were  aroused  by  a  violent  shock. 

The  boat  had  just  struck  an  enormous  iceberg,  a  floating  block 
with  rugged,  slippery  sides,  to  which  it  would  be  impossible  to  cling. 


A  STORM  ON  THE  LAKE.  6 1 

At  this  sudden  blow,  whicli  could  not  have  been  parried,  the  bow 
of  the  boat  was  split  open,  and  the  water  poured  into  it  in  torrents. 

"  We  are  sinking  !  we  are  sinking  !  "  cried  Jaspar  Hobson. 

He  was  right.  The  boat  was  settling  down ;  the  water  had  already 
reached  the  seats. 

"  Madam,  madam,  I  am  here !  I  will  not  leave  you ! "  added  the 
Lieutenant. 

"No,  no,"  cried  Mrs  Bamett :  "alone,  you  may  save  yourself; 
together,  w'e  should  perish.     Leave  me  I  leave  me  ! " 

"  Never ! "  cried  Hobson. 

But  he  had  scarcely  pronounced  this  word  when  the  boat,  struck 
by  another  wave,  filled  and  sank. 

Both  were  drawn  under  water  by  the  eddy  caused  by  the  sudden 
settling  down  of  the  boat,  but  in  a  few  instants  they  rose  to  the 
surface.  Hobson  was  a  strong  swimmer,  and  struck  out  with  one 
arm,  supporting  his  companion  with  the  other.  But  it  was  evident 
that  he  could  not  long  sustain  a  conflict  with  the  furious  waves,  and 
that  he  must  perish  with  her  he  wished  to  save. 

At  this  moment  a  strange  sound  attracted  his  attention.  It  was 
not  the  cry  of  a  frightened  bird,  but  the  shout  of  a  human  voice  ! 
By  one  supreme  effort  Hobson  raised  himself  above  the  waves  and 
looked  around  him. 

But  he  could  distinguish  nothing  in  the  thick  fog.  And  yet  he 
again  heard  cries,  this  time  nearer  to  him.  Some  bold  men  were 
coming  to  his  succour  !  Alas  !  if  it  were  so,  they  would  arrive  too 
late.  Encumbered  by  his  clothes,  the  Lieutenant  felt  himself  sink- 
ing with  the  unfortunate  lady,  whose  head  he  could  scarcely  keep 
above  the  water.  With  a  last  despairing  effort  he  uttered  a  heart- 
rending cry  and  disappeared  beneath  the  waves. 

It  was,  however,  no  mistake — he  had  heard  voices.  Three  men, 
wandering  about  by  the  lake,  had  seen  the  boat  in  danger,  and  put 
off  to  its  rescue.  They  were  Esquimaux,  the  only  men  who  could 
have  hoped  to  weather  such  a  storm,  for  theirs  are  the  only  boats 
constructed  to  escape  destruction  in  these  fearful  tempests. 

The  Esquimaux  boat  or  hayak  is  a  long  pirogue  raised  at  each 
end,  made  of  a  light  framework  of  wood,  covered  with  stretched 
seal-skins  strongly  stitched  with  the  sinews  of  the  Walrus.  In 
the  upper  part  of  the  boat,  also  covered  with  skins,  is  an  opening 
in  which  the  Esquimaux  takes  his  placo,  fastening  his  waterproof 
jacket  to  the  back  of  his  seat ;  so  that  he  is  actually  joined  to  his  bark. 


62  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


wliich  not  a  drop  of  water  can  penetrate.  This  light,  easily-managed 
kayak,  floating,  as  it  does,  on  the  crests  of  the  waves,  can  never  be 
submerged;  and  if  it  be  sometimes  capsized,  a  blow  of  the  paddle 
rights  it  again  directly  ;  so  that  it  is  able  to  live  and  make  way  in 
seas  in  which  any  other  boat  would  certainly  be  dashed  to  pieces. 

The  three  Esquimaux,  guided  by  the  Lieutenant's  last  despairing 
cry,  arrived  at  the  scene  of  the  wreck  just  in  time.  Hobson  and  Mrs 
Barnett,  already  half  drowned,  felt  themselves  drawn  up  by  power- 
ful hands;  but  in  the  darkness  they  were .  unable  to  discover  who- 
were  their  deliverers.  One  of  the  men  took  the  Lieutenant  and 
laid  him  across  his  own  boat,  another  did  the  same  for  Mrs  Barnett, 
and  the  three  kayaks,  skilfully  managed  with  the  paddles,  six  feet 
long,  sped  rapidly  over  the  white  foam. 

Half  an  hour  afterwards,  the  shipwrecked  travellers  were  lying 
on  the  sandy  beach  three  miles  above  Fort  Providence. 

The  old  sailor  alone  was  missing  ! 


THOUSANDS   OF   BIRDS    WERE    SHOT.  —  Page  72. 


CHAPTER  X 

A    RETROSPECT. 

jST  was  about  ten  o'clock  the  same  night  when  Mrs  Bamett 
and  Lieutenant  Hobson  knocked  at  the  postern  gate  of  the 
fort.  Great  was  the  joy  on  seeing  them,  for  they  had  been 
given  up  for  lost ;  but  this  joy  was  turned  to  mourning  at  the  news 
of  the  death  of  Norman.  The  brave  fellow  had  been  beloved  by 
all,  and  his  loss  was  sincerely  mourned.  The  intrepid  and  devoted 
Esquimaux  received  phlegmatically  the  earnest  expressions  of 
gratitude  of  those  they  had  saved,  and  could  not  be  persuaded  to 
come  to  the  fort.  What  they  had  done  seemed  to  them  only 
natural,  and  these  were  not  the  first  persons  they  had  rescued  ;  so 
they  quietly  returned  to  their  wild  life  of  adventure  on  the  lake, 
where  they  hunted  the  otters  and  water-birds  day  and  night. 

For  the  next  three  nights  the  party  rested.  Hobson  always 
intended  to  set  out  on  June  2d  ;  and  on  that  day,  all  having 
recovered  from  their  fatigues  and  the  storm  havirg  abated,  the 
order  was  given  to  start. 

Sergeant  Felton  had  done  all  in  his  power  to  make  his  guests 
comfortable  and  to  aid  their  enterprise  ;  some  of  the  jaded  dogs 
were  replaced  by  fresh  animals,  and  now  the  Lieutenant  found  all 
his  sledges  drawn  up  in  good  order  at  the  door  of  the  enceinte, 
and  awaiting  the  travellers. 

The  adieux  were  soon  over.  Each  one  thanked  Sergeant  Felton 
for  his  hospitality,  and  Mrs  Paulina  Bariiett  was  most  profuse  in 
her  expressions  of  gratitude.  A  hearty  shake  of  the  hand  between 
the  Sergeant  and  his  brother-in-law,  Long,  completed  the  leave- 
taking. 

Each  pair  got  into  the  sledge  assigned  to  them  ;  but  this  time 
Mrs  Bamett  and  the  Lieutenant  shared  one  vehicle,  Madge  and 
Sergeant  Long  following  them. 

According  to  the  advice  of  the  Indian  chief,  Hobson  determined 
to  get  to  the  coast  by  the  shortest  route,  and  to  take  a  north-easterly 


I 


64  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

direction.  After  consulting  his  map,  which  merely  gave  a  rough 
outline  of  the  configuration  of  the  country,  it  seemed  best  to  him 
to  descend  the  valley  of  the  Coppermine,  a  large  river  which  flows 
into  Coronation  Gulf. 

The  distance  between  Fort  Confidence  and  the  mouth  of  this 
river  is  only  a  degree  and  a  half — that  is  to  say,  about  eighty-five  or 
ninety  miles.  The  deep  hollow  formed  by  the  gulf  is  bounded  on 
the  north  by  Cape  Krusenstein,  and  from  it  the  coast  juts  out 
towards  the  north-west,  ending  in  Cape  Bathurst,  which  is  above 
the  seventieth  parallel. 

The  Lieutenant,  therefore,  now  changed  the  route  he  had  hitherto 
followed,  directing  his  course  to  the  east,  so  as  to  reach  the  river  in 
a  few  hours. 

In  the  afternoon  of  the  next  day,  June  3d,  the  river  was  gained. 
It  was  now  free  from  ice,  and  its  clear  and  rapid  waters  flowed 
through  a  vast  valley,  intersected  by  numerous  but  easily  fordable 
streams.  The  sledges  advanced  pretty  rapidly,  and  as  they  went 
along,  Hobson  gave  his  companion  som^  account  of  the  country 
through  which  they  were  passing.  A  sincere  friendship,  founded  on 
mutual  esteem,  had  sprung  up  between  these  two.  Mrs  Paulina 
Bamett  was  an  earnest  student  with  a  special  gift  for  discovery,  and 
was  therefore  always  glad  to  converse  with  travellers  and  explorers. 
Hobson,  who  knew  his  beloved  North  America  by  heart,  was  able 
to  answer  all  her  inquiries  fully. 

"  About  ninety  years  ago,"  he  said,  "  the  territory  through  which 
the  Coppermine  flows  was  unknown,  and  we  are  indebted  for  its 
discovery  to  the  agents  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company.  But  as 
always  happens  in  scientific  matters,  in  seeking  one  thing,  another 
was  found.  Columbus  was  trying  to  find  Asia,  and  discovered 
America." 

"  And  what  were  the  agents  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company 
seeking  %     The  famous  North- West  Passage '? " 

"  No,  madam,"  replied  the  young  Lieutenant.  "  A  century  ago 
the  Comi)any  had  no  interest  in  the  opening  of  a  new  route,  which 
would  have  been  more  valuable  to  its  rivals  than  to  it.  It  is  even 
said  that  in  1741  a  certain  Christopher  Middleton,  sent  to  explore 
these  latitudes,  was  publicly  charged  with  receiving  a  bribe  of 
X0OO  from  the  Company  to  say  that  there  was  not,  ami  could  not 
be,  a  sea  passage  between  the  oceans." 


A  RETROSPECT.  65 


"  That  was  not  much  to  the  credit  of  the  celebrated  Company," 
said  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  I  do  not  defend  it  in  the  matter,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  and  its 
interference  was  severely  censured  by  Parliament  in  1746,  when  a 
reward  of  £20,000  was  offered  by  the  Governnient  for  the  discovery 
of  the  passage  in  question.  In  that  year  two  intrepid  explorers, 
William  Moor  and  Francis  Smith,  penetrated  as  far  as  Repulse  Bay 
in  the  hope  of  discovering  the  much-longed-for  passage.  But  they 
were  unsuccessful,  and  returned  to  England  after  an  absence  of  a 
year  and  a  half." 

"  But  did  not  other  captains  follow  in  their  steps,  resolved  to 
conquer  where  they  had  failed  % "  inquired  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  No,  madam  ;  and  in  spite  of  the  large  reward  offered  by  Par- 
liament, no  attempt  was  made  to  resume  explorations  in  English 
America  until  thirty  years  afterwards,  when  some  agents  of  the 
Company  took  up  the  unfinished  task  of  Captains  Moor  and 
Smith." 

"The  Company  had  then  relinquished  the  narrow-minded  egotis- 
tical position  it  had  taken  up  ?  " 

"  No,  madam,  not  yet.  Samuel  Hearne,  the  agent,  only  went  to 
reconnoitre  the  position  of  a  copper-mine  which  native  miners  had 
reported.  On  November  6,  1769,  this  agent  left  Fort  Prince  of 
Wales,  on  the  river  Churchill,  near  the  western  shores  of  Hudson's 
Bay.  He  pressed  boldly  on  to  the  north-west ;  but  the  excessive 
cold  and  the  exhaustion  of  his  provisions  compelled  him  to  return 
without  accomplishing  anything.  Fortunately  he  was  not  easily 
discouraged,  and  on  February  23d  of  the  next  year  he  set  out 
again,  this  time  taking  some  Indians  with  him.  Great  hardships 
were  endured  in  this  second  journey.  The  fish  and  game  on  which 
Hearne  had  relied  often  failed  him  ;  and  he  had  once  nothing  to  eat 
for  seven  days  but  wild  fruit,  bits  of  old  leather,  and  burnt  bones. 
He  was  again  compelled  to  return  to  the  fort  a  disappointed  man. 
But  he  did  not  even  yet  despair,  and  started  a  third  time,  December 
7th,  1770  ;  and  after  a  struggle  of  nineteen  months,  he  discovered 
the  Coppermine  river,  July  13th,  1772,  the  course  of  which  he  fol- 
lowed to  its  mouth.  According  to  his  own  account,  he  saw  the  open 
sea,  and  in  any  case  he  was  the  first  to  penetrate  to  the  northern 
coast  of  America." 

"  But  the  North- West  Passage — that  is  to  say,  the  direct  com- 

E 


66  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

munication  by  sea  between  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  Oceans — was 
not  then  discovered  ? " 

"  Oh  no,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant ;  "  and  what  countless 
adventurous  sailors  have  since  gone  to  seek  it  I  Phipps  in  1773, 
James  Cook  and  Gierke  in  1776  to  1779,  Kotzebue  in  1815  to 
1818,  Ross,  Parry,  Franklin,  and  others  have  attempted  this  diffi- 
cult task ;  but  it  was  reserved  to  M'Clure  in  our  own  day  to  pass 
from  one  ocean  to  the  other  across  the  Polar  Sea." 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,  that  was  a  geographical  discovery  of  which 
we  English  may  well  be  proud.  But  do  tell  me  if  the  Hudson's 
Bay  Company  did  not  adopt  more  generous  views,  and  send  out 
some  other  explorer  after  the  return  of  Hearne." 

"  It  did,  madam  j  and  it  was  thanks  to  it  that  Captain  Franklin 
was  able  to  accomplish  his  voyage  of  1819  to  1822  between  the 
river  discovered  by  Hearne  and  Cape  Turnagain.  This  expedition 
endured  great  fatigue  and  hardships ;  provisions  often  completely 
failed,  and  two  Canadians  were  assassinated  and  eaten  by  their 
comrades.  But  in  spite  of  all  his  sufferings,  Captain  Franklin 
explored  no  less  than  five  thousand  five  hundred  and  fifty  miles 
of  the  hitherto  unknown  coast  of  North  America  ! " 

*'  He  was  indeed  a  man  of  energy,"  added  Mrs  Barnett ;  '*  and  he 
gave  proof  of  his  great  qualities  in  starting  on  a  fresh  Polar  expedi- 
tion after  all  he  had  gone  through." 

"  Yes,"  replied  the  Lieutenant ;  "  and  he  met  a  terrible  death  in 
the  land  his  own  intrepidity  had  discovered.  It  has  now  been 
proved,  however,  that  all  his  companions  did  not  perish  with  him. 
Many  are  doubtless  still  wandering  about  on  the  vast  ice-fields. 
I  cannot  think  of  their  awful  condition  without  a  shudder.  One 
day,"  he  added  earnestly,  and  with  strange  emotion — "  one  day  I 
will  search  the  unknown  lands  where  the  dreadful  catastrophe  took 
place,  and  " 

"And,"  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett,  pressing  his  hand,  "I  will  ac- 
company you.  Yes,  this  idea  has  occurred  to  me  more  than  once, 
as  it  has  to  you  ;  and  my  heart  beats  high  when  I  think  that  fellow- 
countrymen  of  my  own — Englishmen — are  awaiting  succour  " 

"  Which  will  come  too  late  for  most  of  them,  madam,"  said  the 
Lieutenant ;  "  but  rest  assured  some  will  even  yet  be  saved." 

"  God  grant  it,  Lieutenant ! "  replied  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  and  it  appears 
to  me  that  the  agents  of  the  Company,  living  as  they  do  close  to 


A  RETROSPECT,  67 


the  coast,  are  better  fitted  than  any  one  else  to  fulfil  this  duty  of 
humanity." 

"  I  agree  with  you,  madam  ;  they  are,  as  they  have  often  proved, 
inured  to  the  rigours  of  the  Arctic  climate.  Was  it  not  they  who 
aided  Captain  Back  in  his  voyage  in  1834,  when  he  discovered 
King  William's  Land,  where  Franklin  met  his  fate  %  Was  it  not 
two  of  us,  Dease  and  Simpson,  who  were  sent  by  the  Governor  of 
Hudson's  Bay  to  explore  the  shores  of  the  Polar  Sea  in  1838,  and 
whose  courageous  efforts  first  discovered  Victoria  Landl  It  is  my 
opinion  that  the  future  reserves  for  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company 
the  final  conquest  of  the  Arctic  regions.  Gradually  its  factories 
are  advancing  further  and  further  north,  following  the  retreat  of  the 
fur-yielding  animals  ;  and  one  day  a  fort  will  be  erected  on  the 
Pole  itself,  that  mathematical  point  where  meet  all  the  meridians  of 
the  globe." 

During  this  and  the  succeeding  journeys  Jaspar  Hobson  related 
his  own  adventures  since  he  entered  the  service  of  the  Company — 
his  struggles  with  the  agents  of  rival  associations,  and  his  efforts  to 
explore  the  unknown  districts  of  the  north  or  west ;  and  Mrs  Barnett, 
on  her  side,  told  of  her  travels  in  the  tropics.  She  spoke  of  all 
she  had  done,  and  of  all  she  hoped  still  to  accomplish;  so  that  the 
long  hours,  lightened  by  pleasant  conversation,  passed  rapidly  away.. 

Meanwhile  the  dogs  advanced  at  full  gallop  towards  the  north. 
The  Coppermine  valley  widened  sensibly  as  they  neared  the  Arctic 
Ocean.  The  hills  on  either  side  sank  lower  and  lower,  and  only 
scattered  clumps  of  resinous  trees  broke  the  monotony  of  the 
landscape.  A  few  blocks  of  ice,  drifted  down  by  the  river,  still 
resisted  the  action  of  the  sun ;  but  each  day  their  number  decreased, 
and  a  canoe,  or  even  a  good-sized  boat,  might  easily  have  descended 
the  stream,  the  course  of  which  was  unimpeded  by  any  natural 
barrier  or  aggregation  of  rocks.  The  bed  of  the  Coppermine  was 
both  deep  and  wide  ;  its  waters  were  very  clear,  and  being  fed  by 
the  melted  snow,  flowed  on  at  a  considerable  pace,  never,  however, 
forming  dangerous  rapids.  Its  course,  at  first  very  sinuous, 
became  gradually  less  and  less  winding,  and  at  last  stretched 
along  in  a  straight  line  for  several  miles.  Its  banks,  composed  of 
fine  firm  sand,  and  clothed  in  part  with  short  dry  herbage,  were 
wide  and  lev  el,,  so  that  the  long  train  of  sledges  sped  rapidly  over 
them. 

The  expedition  travelled  day  and  night — if  we  can  speak  of  the 


68  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


night,  when  the  sun,  describing  an  almost  horizontal  circle,  scarcely- 
disappeared  at  all.  The  true  night  only  lasted  two  hours,  and  the 
dawn  succeeded  the  twilight  almost  immediately.  The  weather 
was  fine ;  the  sky  clear,  although  somewhat  misty  on  the  horizon ; 
and  everything  combined  to  favour  the  travellers. 

For  two  days  they  kept  along  the  river-banks  without  meeting 
with  any  difficulties.  They  saw  but  few  fur-bearing  animals  ;  but 
there  were  plenty  of  birds,  which  might  have  been  counted  by  thou- 
sands. The  absence  of  otters,  sables,  beavers,  ermines,  foxes,  &c., 
did  not  trouble  the  Lieutenant  much,  for  he  supposed  that  they  had 
been  driven  further  north  by  over-zealous  tracking  ;  and  indeed  the 
marks  of  encampments,  extinguished  fires,  &c,,  told  of  the  more  or 
less  recent  passage  of  native  hunters.  Hobson  knew  that  he  would 
have  to  penetrate  a  good  deal  further  north,  and  that  part  only  of 
his  journey  would  be  accomplished  when  he  got  to  the  mouth  of  the 
Coppermine  river.  He  was  therefore  most  eager  to  reach  the  limit 
of  Hearne's  exploration,  and  pressed  on  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

Every  one  shared  the  Lieutenant's  impatience,  and  resolutely 
resisted  fatigue  in  order  to  reach  the  Arctic  Ocean  with  the  least 
;  ossible  delay.  '  They  were  drawn  onwards  by  an  indefinable  attrac- 
tion ;  the  glory  of  the  unknown  dazzled  their  sight.  Probably  real 
hardships  would  commence  when  they  did  arrive  at  the  much-desired 
coast.  But  no  matter,  they  longed  to  battle  with  difficulties,  and  to 
press  straight  onwards  to  their  aim.  The  district  they  were  now 
traversing  could  have  no  direct  interest  for  them ;  the  reul  explora- 
tion would  only  commence  on  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  Each 
(.  ne,  then,  would  gladly  hail  the  arrival  in  the  elevated  western  dis- 
tricts for  which  they  were  bound,  cut  across  though  they  were  by 
the  seventieth  parallel  of  north  latitude. 

On  the  5th  June,  four  days  after  leaving  Fort  Confidence,  the 
river  widened  considerably.  The  western  banks,  curving  slightly, 
ran  almost  due  north;  whilst  the  eastern  rounded  off  into  the  coast- 
line, stretching  away  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  paused,  and  waving  his  hand  to  his  com- 
panions, pointed  to  the  boundless  ocean. 


TRACES    OF    AN    ENCAMPMENT.  PaSje  73. 


CHAPTER  XL 

ALONG    THE    COAST. 

PRONATION  GULF,  the  large  estuary  dotted  with  the 
islands  forming  the  Duke  of  York  Archipelago,  which  the 

^^^  party  had  now  reached,  was  a  sheet  of  water  with  irregular 
banks,  let  in,  as  it  were,  into  the  North  American  continent.  At 
its  western  angle  opened  the  mouth  of  the  Coppermine ;  and  on  the 
east  a  long  narrow  creek  called  Bathurst  Inlet  ran  into  the  mainland, 
from  which  stretched  the  jagged  broken  coast  with  its  pointed  capes 
and  rugged  promontories,  ending  in  that  confusion  of  straits,  sounds, 
and  channels  which  gives  such  a  strange  appearance  to  the  maps  of 
North  America,  On  the  other  side  the  coast  turned  abruptly  to  the 
north  beyond  the  mouth  of  the  Coppermine  river,  and  ended  in  Cape 
Krusenstem. 

After  consulting  with  Sergeant  Long,  Lieutenant  Hobson  decided 
to  give  his  party  a  day's  rest  here. 

The  exploration,  properly  so  called,  which  was  to  enable  the 
Lieutenant  to  fix  upon  a  suitable  site  for  the  establishment  of  a  fort, 
was  now  really  about  to  begin.  The  Company  had  advised  him  to 
keep  as  much  as  possible  above  the  seventieth  parallel,  and  on  the 
shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  To  obey  his  orders  Hobson  was  obliged 
to  keep  to  the  west;  for  on  the  east — with  the  exception,  perhaps,  of 
the  land  of  Boothia,  crossed  by  the  seventieth  parallel — the  whole 
country  belongs  rather  to  the  Arctic  Circle,  and  the  geographical 
conformation  of  Boothia  is  as  yet  but  imperfectly  known. 

After  carefully  ascertaining  the  latitude  and  longitude,  and  veri- 
fying his  position  by  the  map,  the  Lieutenant  found  that  he  was  a 
hundred  miles  below  the  seventieth  degree.  But  beyond  Cape 
Krusenstem,  the  coast-line,  running  in  a  north-easterly  direction, 
abruptly  crosses  the  seventieth  parallel  at  a  sharp  angle  near  the 
one  hundred  and  thirtieth  meridian,  and  at  about  the  same  elevation 
as  Cape  Bathurst,  the  spot  named  as  a  rendezvous   by    Captain 


70  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Craventy.  He  must  therefore  make  for  that  point,  and  should  the 
site  appear  suitable  the  new  fort  would  be  erected  there. 

"  There,"  said  the  Lieutenant  to  his  subordinate,  Long,  "  we 
shall  be  in  the  position  ordered  by  the  Company.  There  the  sea, 
open  for  a  great  part  of  the  year,  will  allow  the  vessels  from  Behring 
Strait  to  come  right  up  to  the  fort,  bringing  us  fresh  provisions 
and  taking  away  our  commodities." 

"  Not  to  mention,"  added  Sergeant  Long,  "  that  our  men  will  be 
entitled  to  double  pay  all  the  time  they  are  beyond  the  seventieth 
parallel." 

"  Of  course  that  is  understood,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  and  I  daresay 
they  will  accept  it  without  a  murmur." 

"  Well  then,  Lieutenant,'*  said  Long  simply,  "  we  have  now  only 
to  start  for  Cape  Bathurst." 

But  as  a  day  of  rest  had  been  promised,  the  start  did  not  actually 
take  place  until  the  next  day,  June  6th. 

The  second  part  of  the  journey  would  naturally  be  very  different 
from  the  first.  The  rules  with  regard  to  the  sledges  keeping  their 
rank  need  no  longer  be  enforced,  and  each  couple  drove  as  it  pleased 
them.  Only  short  distances  were  traversed  at  a  time  \  halts  were 
made  at  every  angle  of  the  coast,  and  the  party  often  walked. 
Lieutenant  Hobson  only  urged  two  things  upon  his  companions : 
not  to  go  further  than  three  miles  from  the  coast,  and  to  rally 
their  forces  twice  a  day,  at  twelve  o'clock  and  in  the  evening.  At 
night  they  all  encamped  in  tents. 

The  weather  continued  very  fine  and  the  temperature  moderate, 
maintaining  a  mean  height  of  59°  Fahrenheit  above  zero.  Two  or 
three  times  sudden  snowstorms  came  on ;  but  they  did  not  last  long, 
and  exercised  no  sensible  influence  upon  the  temperature. 

The  whole  of  the  American  coast  between  Capes  Krusenstem  and 
Parry,  comprising  an  extent  of  more  than  two  hundred  and  fifty 
miles,  was  examined  with  the  greatest  care  between  the  6th  and 
20th  of  June,  Geographical  observations  were  accurately  taken, 
and  Hobson,  most  effectively  aided  by  Thomas  Black,  was  able  to 
rectify  certain  errors  in  previous  marine  surveys ;  whilst  the  primary 
object  of  the  expedition — the  examination  into  the  quality  and 
quantity  of  the  game  in  the  surrounding  districts — was  not  neglected. 

Were  these  lands  well  stocked  with  game?  Could  they  count 
with  certainty  not  only  on  a  good  supply  of  furs,  but  also  of  meat  t 
Would  the  resources  of  the  country  provide  a  fort  with  provisions  in 


ALONG  THE  COAST.  J I 


the  summer  months  at  least  ?  Such  were  the  grave  questions  which 
Lieutenant  Hobson  had  to  solve,  and  which  called  for  immediate  atten- 
tion.    We  give  a  summary  of  the  conclusions  at  which  he  arrived. 

Game,  properly  so  called,  of  the  kind  for  which  Corporal  Joliffe 
amongst  others  had  a  special  predilection,  was  not  abundant.  There 
were  plenty  of  birds  of  the  duck  tribe ;  but  only  a  few  Polar  hares, 
difficult  of  approach,  poorly  represented  the  rodents  of  the  north. 
There  seemed,  however,  to  be  a  good  many  bears  about.  Marbre- 
and  Sabine  had  come  upon  the  fresh  traces  of  several.  Some  were 
even  seen  and  tracked;  but,  as  a  rule,  they  kept  at  a  respectful 
distance.  In  the  winter,  however,  driven  by  famine  from  higher 
latitudes,  there  would  probably  be  more  than  enough  of  these 
ravenous  beasts  prowling  about  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

'*  There  is  certainly  no  denying,"  said  Corporal  Joliffe,  "  that 
bear's  flesh  is  very  good  eating  when  once  it's  in  the  larder;  but 
there  is  something  very  problematical  about  it  beforehand,  and  it 's 
always  just  possible  that  the  hunters  themselves  may  meet  the  fate- 
they  intended  for  the  bears  ! " 

This  was  true  enough.  It  was  no  use  counting  upon  the  bears 
ta  provision  their  fort.  Fortunately  traces  were  presently  found  of 
herds  of  a  far  more  useful  animal,  the  flesh  of  which  is  the  principal 
food  of  the  Indians  and  Esquimaux.  We  allude  to  the  reindeer ; 
and  Corporal  Joliffe  announced  with  the  greatest  satisfaction  that 
there  were  plenty  of  these  ruminants  on  this  coast.  The  ground 
was  covered  with  the  lichen  to  which  they  are  so  partial,  and  which 
they  cleverly  dig  out  from  under  the  snow. 

There  could  be  no  mistake  as  to  the  footprints  left  by  the  rein- 
deer, as,  like  the  camel,  they  have  a  small  nail-like  hoof  with  a  con- 
vex surface.  Large  herds,  sometimes  numbering  several  thousand 
animals,  are  seen  running  wild  in  certain  parts  of  America.  Being 
easily  domesticated,  they  are  employed  to  draw  sledges ;  and  they 
also  supply  the  factories  with  excellent  milk,  more  nourishing  than 
that  of  cows.  Their  dead  bodies  are  not  less  useful.  Their  thick 
skin  provides  clothes,  their  hair  makes  very  good  thread,  and  their 
flesh  is  palatable ;  so  that  they  are  really  the  most  valuable  animals- 
to  be  found  in  these  latitudes,  and  Hobson,  being  assured  of  their 
presence,  was  relieved  from  half  his  anxiety. 

As  he  advanced  he  had  also  reason  to  be  satisfied  with  regard  to 
the  fur-bearing  animals.  By  the  little  streams  rose  many  beaver 
lodges  and  musk-rat  tunnels.     Badgers,  lynxes,  ermines,  wolverenes,. 


7  2  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TR  Y, 


sables,  polecats,  «fec.,  frequented  these  districts,  hitherto  undisturbed 
by  hunters.  They  had  thus  far  come  to  no  trace  of  the  presence  of 
man,  and  the  animals  had  chosen  their  refuge  well.  Footprints  were 
also  found  of  the  fine  blue  and  silver  foxes,  which  are  becoming 
more  and  more  rare,  and  the  fur  of  which  is  worth  its  weight  in  gold. 
Sabine  and  Mac- Nab  might  many  a  time  have  shot  a  very  valuable 
animal  on  this  excursion,  but  the  Lieutenant  had  wisely  forbidden  all 
hunting  of  the  kind.  He  did  not  wish. to  alarm  the  animals  before 
the  approaching  season — that  is  to  say,  before  the  winter  months, 
when  their  furs  become  thicker  and  more  beautiful.  It  was  also 
desirable  not  to  overload  the  sledges.  The  hunters  saw  the  force  of 
his  reasoning ;  but  for  all  that,  their  fingers  itched  when  they  came 
within  shot-range  of  a  sable  or  some  valuable  fox.  Their  Lieutenant's 
orders  were,  however,  not  to  be  disobeyed. 

Polar  bears  and  birds  were,  therefore,  all  that  the  hunters  had  to 
practise  upon  in  this  second  stage  of  their  journey.  The  former, 
however,  not  yet  rendered  bold  by  hunger,  soon  scampered  off,  and 
no  serious  struggle  with  them  ensued. 

The  poor  birds  suffered  for  the  enforced  immunity  of  the  quad- 
rupeds. White-headed  eagles,  huge  birds  with  a  harsh  screeching 
cry  ;  fishing  hawks,  which  build  their  nests  in  dead  trees  and 
migrate  to  the  Arctic  regions  in  the  summer ;  snow  buntings  with 
pure  white  plumagb ;  wild  geese,  which  afford  the  best  food  of  all 
the  Anspres  tribe  ;  ducks  with  red  heads  and  black  breasts ;  ash- 
coloured  crows,  a  kind  of  mocking  jay  of  extreme  ugliness  ;  eider 
ducks ;  scoters  or  black  divers,  <fec.  &c.,  whose  mingled  cries  awake 
the  echoes  of  the  Arctic  regions,  fell  victims  by  hundreds  to  the 
unerring  aim  of  Marbre  and  Sabine.  These  birds  haunt  the  high 
latitudes  by  millions,  and  it  would  be  impossible  to  form  an  accurate 
estimate  of  their  number  on  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  Their 
flesh  formed  a  very  pleasant  addition  to  the  daily  rations  of  biscuit 
and  corned  beef,  and  we  can  understand  that  the  hunters  laid  up  a 
good  stock  of  them  in  the  fifteen  days  during  which  they  were 
debarred  from  attacking  more  valuable  game. 

There  would  then  be  no  lack  of  animal  food;  the  magazines  of 
the  Company  would  be  well  stocked  with  game,  and  its  offices  filled 
with  furs  and  traders ;  but  something  more  was  wanted  to  insure 
success  to  the  undertaking.      Would  it  be  possible  to  obtain  a- 
sufficient  supply  of  fuel  to  contend  with  the  rigour  of  an  Arctic  J 
winter  at  so  elevated  a  latitude  ? 


THE    FOOTPRINTS    OF    A    DANCER.  —  PagC  75. 


ALONG  THE  COAST,  73 


Most  fortunately  the  coast  was  well  wooded;  the  hills  which 
sloped  down  towards  the  sea  were  crowned  with  green  trees,  amongst 
which  the  pine  predominated.  Some  of  the  woods  might  even  be 
called  forests,  and  would  constitute  an  admirable  reserve  of  timber 
for  the  fort.  Here  and  there  Hobson  noticed  isolated  groups  of 
willows,  poplars,  dwarf  birch-trees,  and  numerous  thickets  of  arbutus. 
At  this  time  of  the  warm  season  all  these  trees  were  covered  with 
verdure,  and  were  an  unexpected  and  refreshing  sight  to  eyes  so 
long  accustomed  to  the  rugged,  barren  polar  landscape.  The 
ground  at  the  foot  of  the  hills  was  carpeted  with  a  short  herbage 
devoured  with  avidity  by  the  reindeer,  and  forming  their  only  sus- 
tenance in  winter.  On  the  whole,  then,  the  Lieutenant  had  reason 
to  congratulate  himself  on  having  chosen  the  north-west  of  the 
American  continent  for  the  foundation  of  a  new  settlement. 

We  have  said  that  these  territories,  so  rich  in  animals,  were 
apparently  deserted  by  men.  The  travellers  saw  neither  Esquimaux,' 
who  prefer  the  districts  round  Hudson's  Bay,  nor  Indians,  who" 
seldom  venture  so  far  beyond  the  Arctic  Circle.  And  indeed  in  these 
remote  latitudes  hunters  may  be  overtaken  by  storms,  or  be  suddenly 
surprised  by  winter,  and  cut  off  from  all  communication  with  their 
fellow  creatures.  We  can  easily  imagine  that  Lieutenant  Hobson 
was  by  no  means  sorry  not  to  meet  any  rival  explorers.  What  he 
wanted  was  an  unoccupied  country,  a  deserted  land,  suitable  as  a 
refuge  for  the  fur-bearing  animals ;  and  in  this  matter  he  had  the 
full  sympathy  of  Mrs  Barnett,  who,  as  the  guest  of  the  Company, 
naturally  took  a  great  interest  in  the  success  of  its  schemes. 

Fancy,  then,  the  disappointment  of  the  Lieutenant,  when  on  the 
morning  of  the  20th  June  he  came  to  an  encampment  but  recently 
abandoned. 

It  was  situated  at  the  end  of  a  narrow  creek  called  Damley  Bay, 
of  which  Cape  Parry  is  the  westernmost  point.  There  at  the  foot 
of  a  little  hill  were  the  stakes  which  had  served  to  mark  the  limits 
of  the  camp,  and  heaps  of  cinders,  the  extinct  embers  of  the  fires. 

The  whole  party  met  at  this  encampment,  and  all  understood  how 
great  a  disappointment  it  involved  for  Lieutenant  Hobson. 

"  What  a  pity  !  "  he  exclaimed.  "  I  would  rather  have  met  a 
whole  family  of  polar  bears  !  " 

"  But  I  daresay  the  men  who  encamped  here  are  already  far  ofiP," 
said  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  very  likely  they  have  returned  to  their  usual 
hunting  grounds." 


k 


74  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

"  That  is  as  it  may  be,"  replied  the  Lieutenant.  *'  If  these  be  the 
traces  of  Esquimaux,  they  are  more  likely  to  have  gone  on  than  to 
have  turned  back;  and  if  they  be  those  of  Indians,  they  are  pro- 
bably, like  ourselves,  seeking  a  new  hunting  district ;  and  in  either 
case  it  will  be  very  unfortunate  for  us." 

"  But,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "cannot  we  find  out  to  what  race  the 
travellers  do  belong  %  Can't  we  ascertain  if  they  be  Esquimaux  or 
Indians  from  the  south  ?  I  should  think  tribes  of  such  a  different 
origin,  and  of  such  dissimilar  customs,  would  not  encamp  in  the 
same  manner." 

Mrs  Barnett  was  right ;  they  might  possibly  solve  the  mystery 
after  a  thorough  examination  of  the  ground. 

Jaspar  Hobson  and  others  set  to  work,  carefully  examining  every 
trace,  every  object  left  behind,  every  mark  on  the  ground ;  but  in 
vain,  there  was  nothing  to  guide  them  to  a  decided  opinion.  The 
bones  of  some  animals  scattered  about  told  them  nothing,  and  tlie 
Lieutenant,  much  annoyed,  w^s  about  to  abandon  the  useless  search, 
when  he  heard  an  exclamation  from  Mrs  Joliffe,  who  had  wandered 
a  little  way  to  the  left. 

All  hurried  towards  the  young  Canadian,  who  remained  fixed  to 
the  spot,  looking  attentively  at  the  ground  before  her. 

As  her  companions  came  up  she  said — 

"  You  are  looking  for  traces.  Lieutenant ;  well,  here  are  some." 

And  Mrs  Joliffe  pointed  to  a  good  many  footprints  clearly  visible 
in  the  firm  clay.  •■ 

These  might  reveal  something ;  for  the  feet  of  the  Indians  and 
Esquimaux,  as  well  as  their  boots,  are  totally  different  from  each 
other. 

But  what  chiefly  struck  Lieutenant  Hobson  was  the  strange 
arrangement  of  these  impressions.  They  were  evidently  made  by  a 
human  foot,  a  shod  foot ;  but,  strange  to  say,  the  ball  alone  appeared 
to  have  touched  the  ground  !  The  marks  were  very  numerous, 
close  together,  often  crossing  one  another,  but  confined  to  a  very 
small  circle. 

Jaspar  Hobson  called  the  attention  of  the  rest  of  the  party  to 
this  singular  circumstance. 

**  Theise  were  not  made  by  a  person  walking,"  he  said. 

"  Nor  by  a  person  jumping,"  added  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  for  there  is 
no  mark  of  a  heel." 

"  No,"  said  Mrs  Joliffe  ;  "  these  footprints  were  left  by  a  dancer." 


A  TEMPORARY    ENCAMPMENT.  —  Page  79. 


ALONG   THE'COASX.  75 


She  was  right,  as  further  examination  proved.  They  were  the 
marks  left  by  a  dancer,  and  a  dancer  engaged  in  some  light  and 
graceful  exercise,  for  they  were  neither  clumsy  nor  deep. 

But  who  could  the  light-hearted  individual  be  who  had  been 
impelled  to  dance  in  this  sprightly  fashion  some  degrees  above  the 
Arctic  Circle? 

"  It  was  certainly  not  an  Esquimaux,"  said  the  Lieutenant. 

"  Nor  an  Indian,"  cried  Corporal  Joliffe. 

"  No,  it  was  a  Frenchman,"  said  Sergeant  Long  quietly. 

And  all  agreed  that  none  but  a  Frenchman  could  have  been 
capable  of  dancing  on  such  a  spot ! 


CHAPTER  XII. 

THE  MIDNIGHT  SUN» 

ERGEANT  LONG'S  assertion  must  appear  to  have  been 
founded  on  insufficient  evidence.  That  there  had  been 
dancing  no  one  could  deny,  but  that  the  dancer  was  a 
Frenchman,  however  probable,  could  not  be  considered  proved. 

However,  the  Lieutenant  shared  the  opinion  of  his  subordinate, 
which  did  not  appear  too  positive  to  any  of  the  party,  who  all 
agreed  in  feeling  sure  that  some  travellers,  with  at  least  one 
compatriot  of  Vestris  amongst  them,  had  recently  encamped  on 
this  spot. 

Of  course  Lieutenant  Hobson  was  by  no  means  pleased  at  this  : 
he  was  afraid  of  having  been  preceded  by  rivals  in  the  north-western 
districts  of  English  America ;  and  secret  as  the  Company  had  kept 
its  scheme,  it  had  doubtless  been  divulged  in  the  commercial  centres 
of  Canada  and  the  United  States. 

The  Lieutenant  resumed  his  interrupted  march  ;  but  he  was  full 
of  care  and  anxiety,  although  he  would  not  now  have  dreamed  of 
retracing  his  steps. 

"  Frenchmen  are  then  sometimes  met  with  in  these  high  lati- 
tudes?" was  Mrs  Barnett's  natural  question  after  this  incident. 

*'  Yes,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant ;  "  or  if  not  exactly 
Frenchmen,  the  descendants  of  the  masters  of  Canada  when  it 
belonged  to  France,  which  comes  to  much  the  same  thing.  These 
men  are  in  fact  our  most  formidable  rivals." 

"  But  I  thought,"  resumed  Mrs  Barnett,  "  that  after  the  absorp- 
tion by  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  of  the  old  North-West 
Company,  that  it  had  no  longer  any  rivals  on  the  American 
continent." 

"  Although  there  is  no  longer  any  important  association  for 
trading  in  furs  except  our  own,  there  are  a  good  many  perfectly 
independent  private  companies,  mostly  American,  which  have 
retained  French  agents  or  their  descendants  in  their  employ.*' 


"  I  promise  you  double  pay.''  -—  Page  82. 


THE  MIDNIGHT  SUN.  77 


"  Are  these  agents  then  held  in  such  high  esteem  ? "  asked  Mrs 
Barnett. 

"  Yes,  madam,  and  with  good  reason.  During  the  ninety-four 
years  of  French  supremacy  in  Canada,  French  agents  always  proved 
themselves  superior  to  ours.  We  must  be  just  even  to  our 
rivals." 

"  Especially  to  our  rivals,"  added  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  Yes,  especially.  .  .  At  that  time  French  hunters,  starting  from 
Montreal,  their  headquarters,  pressed  on  to  the  north  with  greater 
hardihood  than  any  others.  They  lived  for  years  with  the  Indian 
tribes,  sometimes  intermarrying  with  them.  The  natives  called  them 
the  '  Canadian  travellers,'  and  were  on  the  most  intimate  terms 
with  them.  They  were  bold,  clever  fellows,  expert  at  navigating 
streams,  light-hearted  and  merry,  adapting  themselves  to  circum- 
stances with  the  easy  flexibility  of  their  race,  and  always  ready  to 
sing  or  dance," 

"  And  do  you  suppose  that  hunting  is  the  only  object  of  the 
party  whose  traces  we  have  just  discovered  ? " 

"  I  don't  think  any  other  hypotheses  at  all  likely,"  replied 
Hobson.  "  They  are  sure  to  be  seeking  new  hunting  grounds.  But 
as  we  cannot  possibly  stop  them,  we  must  make  haste  to  begin  our 
own  operations,  and  compete  boldly  with  all  rivals." 

Lieutenant  Hobson  was  now  prepared  for  the  competition  he 
could  not  prevent,  and  he  urged  on  the  march  of  his  party  as  much 
as  possible,  hoping  that  his  rivals  might  not  follow  him  beyond 
the  seventieth  parallel. 

The  expedition  now  descended  towards  the  south  for  some  twenty 
miles,  in  order  the  more  easily  to  pass  round  Franklin  Bay.  The 
country  was  still  covered  with  verdure,  and  the  quadrupeds  and 
birds  already  enumerated  were  as  plentiful  as  ever ;  so  that  they 
could  reasonably  hope  that  the  whole  of  the  north-western  coasts 
of  the  American  continent  were  populated  in  the  same  manner. 

The  ocean  which  bathed  these  shores  stretched  away  as  far  as 
the  eye  could  reach.  Recent  atlases  give  no  land  beyond  the  north 
American  coast-line,  and  it  is  only  the  icebergs  which  impede  the 
free  navigation  of  the  open  sea  from  Behring  Strait  to- the  Pole 
itself. 

On  the  4th  July  the  travellers  skirted  round  another  deep  bay 
called  Washburn  Bay,  and  reached  the  furthest  point  of  a  little 
lake,  until  then  imperfectly  known,  covering  but  a  small  extent  of 


78  THE  BUR  COUNTRY, 


territory,  scarcely  two  square  miles — in  fact  it  was  rather  a  lagoon, 
or  large  pond  of  sweet  water,  than  a  lake. 

The  sledges  went  on  easily  and  rapidly,  and  the  appearance  of 
the  country  was  most  encouraging  to  the  explorers.  It  seemed 
that  the  extremity  of  Cape  Bathurst  would  be  a  most  favourable 
site  for  the  new  fort,  as  with  this  lagoon  behind  them,  and  the  sea 
open  for  four  or  five  months  in  the  warm  season,  and  giving  access 
to  the  great  highway  of  Behring  Strait,  before  them,  it  would  be 
easy  for  the  exiles  to  lay  in  fresh  provisions  and  to  export  their 
commodities. 

On  the  5th  June,  about  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  the  party 
at  last  halted  at  the  extremity  of  Cape  Bathurst.  It  remained  to 
ascertain  the  exact  position  of  this  cape,  which  the  maps  place 
above  the  seventieth  parallel.  It  was,  however,  impossible  to  rely 
upon  the  marine  surveys  of  the  coast,  as  they  had  never  yet  been 
made  with  exactitude.  Jaspar  Hobson  decided  to  wait  and  ascertain 
the  latitude  and  longitude. 

"  What  prevents  us  from  settling  here  % "  asked  Corporal  Joliffe. 
*'  You  will  own,  Lieutenant,  that  it  is  a  very  inviting  spot." 

"  It  will  seem  more  inviting  still  if  you  get  double  pay  here,  my 
worthy  Corporal,"  replied  Hobson. 

'*  No  doubt,"  said  JoliflFe ;  "  and  the  orders  of  the  Company  must 
be  obeyed." 

"  Then  wait  patiently  till  to-morrow,"  added  Hobson  ;  "  and  if  we 
find  that  Cape  Bathurst  is  really  beyond  70°  north  latitude,  we 
will  pitch  our  tent  here." 

The  site  was  indeed  admirably  suited  for  the  foundation  of  a 
new  settlement.    The  wooded  heights  surrounding  the  lagoon  would 
supply  plenty  of  pine,  birch,  and  other  woods  for  the  construction 
of  the  fort,  and  for  stocking  it  with  fuel.     The  Lieutenant  and 
some  of   bis,  companions  went  to  the  very  edge  of  the  cape,  and 
found  that  towards  the  west  the  coast-line  formed  a  lengthened 
curve,  beyond  which  icebergs  of  a  considerable  height  shut  out  the^ 
view.     The  water  of  the  lagoon,  instead  of  being  brackish,  as  the] 
expected  from  its  close  vicinity  to  the  sea,  was   perfectly  sweet 
but  had  it  not  been  so,  drinkable  water  would  not  have  failed  the 
little  colony,  as  a  fresh  and  limpid  stream  ran  a  few  yards  to  the 
south-east  of  Cape  Bathurst,  and  emptied  itself  into  the  Arctic  Oce 
through  a  narrow  inlet,  which,  protected  by  a  singular  accumul 
tion  of  sand  and  earth  instead  of  by  rocks,  would  have  afforded 


THE  MIDNIGHT  SUN.  -g 


refuge  to  several  vessels  from  the  winds  of  the  offing,  and  might  be 
tum«i  to  account  for  the  anchorage  of  the  ships  which  it  was  hoped 
would  come  to  the  new  settlement  from  Behring  Strait  Out  of 
comphment  to  the  lady  of  the  party,  and  m„l  to  her  de^ht 
Lieutenant  Hobson  named  the  stream  Paulina  river,  and  the  little 
harbour  Port  Barnett. 

By  building  the  fort  a  little  behind  the  actual  cape,  the  principal 
tiZ  ""^  "agazines  would  be  quite  sheltered  from  the  coldest 
wmds      The   elevation   of  the  cape  would  help  to  protect   them 

IZt  T.^\  '''"''  '°'"'"'°^  •=°-"Pl^*«'y  b"y  We  build 
ings  beneath  their  heavy  avalanches  in  a  few  hou,/    There  was 

plen  y  of  room  between  the  foot  of  the  promontoiy  and  the  bank  of 
the  lagoon  for  all  the  constructions  necessary  to  a  fort  It  could 
ZIk  '"""""/f  by  palisades,  which  would  break  the  shock  of 
the  icebergs;  and  the  cape  itself  might  be  surrounded  with  a  fortified 
redoubt.  If  the  vicinity  of  rivals  should  render  such  a  purely  defe n 
sive  erection  neces^ry ;  and  the  Lieutenant,  although  with  no  idea  of 
commencing  anything  of  the  kind  as  yet,  naturally  rejoiced  at 
having  met  with  an  easily  defensible  position 

The  weather  remained  fine,  and  it  was  quite  warm  enough.  There 
was  not  a  cloud  upon  the  sky  ;  but,  of  course,  the  clear  blue  aTr  of 
temperate  and  tomd  zones  could  not  be  expected  here,  and  the 
atmosphere  was  generally  charged  with  a  light  mist.  What  wo^d 
Cape  Bathurst  be  hke  in  the  long  winter  night  of  four  months,  when 
he  ice-mountams  became  fixed  and  rigid,  and  the  hoarse  north  wind 
swept  down  upon  the  icebergs  in  all  its  furs' '  None  of  the  pTrtv 
gave  a  thought  to  that  time  now ;  for  the  weTther  was  ^L^^TZ 
V  rdan  landscape  smUed,  and  the  waves  sparkled  in  the  sunbekms 
wh  1st  the  temperatare  remained  warm  and  pleasant  '°'"''™^' 

A  provisional  camp,  the  sledges  forming  its  only  Material  was 

Th„r^  Mrs  Barnet,  the  Lieutenant,   Sergeant  Long,    and    even 
Thomas  Black,  explored  the  surrounding  district  in  order  to  7 

a^nT  """""•     ^'  ^PP^^--^"  '"  ""^  -  --^  respect    uiablT- 
and  Hobson  was  eager  for  the  next  day,  that  he  might  determ  ne 

was^r'-^hTstT'C  said  the  astronomer  when  the  examination 

iZZ^  J^Il      ^  ^  *  f  r"""S  'P"*'  '""^  '^  I  should  not  have 
unagmed  could  have  existed  beyond  the  Arctic  Circle." 


80  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


"  Ah,  Mr  Black ! "  cried  Hobson,  "  the  finest  countries  in  the 
world  are  to  be  found  here,  and  I  am  impatient  to  ascertain  our 
latitude  and  longitude." 

"  Especially  the  latitude,"  said  the  astronomer,  whose  eclipse  was 
never  out  of  his  thoughts  ;  "  and  I  expect  your  brave  companions  are 
as  eager  as  yourself.     Double  pay  beyond  the  seventieth  parallel ! " 

"  But,  Mr  Black,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  do  you  not  yourself  take  an 
interest,  a  purely  scientific  interest,  in  getting  beyond  that  parallel  1 " 

"  Of  course,  madam,  of  course  I  am  anxious  to  get  beyond  it, 
but  not  so  terribly  eager.  According  to  our  calculations,  however, 
made  with  absolute  accuracy,  the  solar  eclipse  which  I  am  ordered  to 
watch  will  only  be  total  to  an  observer  placed  beyond  the  seventieth 
degree,  and  on  this  account  I  share  the  Lieutenant's  impatience  to 
determine  the  position  of  Cape  Bathurst." 

"  But  I  understand,  Mr  Black,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  that  this 
solar  eclipse  will  not  take  place  until  the  18th  July  I860]" 

"Yes,  madam,  on  the  18th  July  1860." 

"And  it  is  now  only  the  15th  June  1859  !  So  that  the  pheno- 
menon will  not  be  visible  for  more  than  a  year  ! " 

"  I  am  quite  aware  of  it,  Mrs  Barnett,"  replied  the  astronomer ; 
"  but  if  I  had  not  started  till  next  year  I  should  have  run  a  risk 
of  being  too  late." 

"  You  would,  Mr  Black,"  said  Hobson,  "  and  you  did  well  to  start 
a  year  beforehand.  You  are  now  quite  sure  not  to  miss  y.our  eclipse. 
I  own  that  our  journey  from  Fort  Reliance  has  been  accom- 
plished under  exceptionally  favourable  circumstances.  We  have 
had  little  fatigue  and  few  delays.  To  tell  you  the  truth,  I  did  not 
expect  to  get  to  this  part  of  the  coast  until  the  middle  of  August ; 
and  if  the  eclipse  had  been  expected  this  year,  instead  of  next,  you 
really  might  have  been  too  late.  Moreover,  we  do  not  yet  know 
if  we  are  beyond  the  seventieth  parallel." 

"  I  do  not  in  the  least  regret  the  journey  I  have  taken  in  your 
company.  Lieutenant,  and  I  shall  patiently  wait  until  next  year  for 
my  eclipse  The  fair  Phoebe,  I  fancy,  is  a  suflSciently  grand  lady  to 
be  waited  for." 

The  next  day,  July  6th,  a  little  after  noon,  Hobson  and  the  astro- 
nomer made  their  preparations  for  taking  the  exact  bearings  of  Cai^e 
Bathurst.  The  sun  shone  clearly  enough  for  them  to  take  the  out- 
lines exactly.  At  this  season  of  the  year,  too,  it  had  reached  its 
maximum  height  above  the  horizon ;  and  consequently  its  culmina- 


THE    SITE    OF   THE    FORT. Page  84. 


THE  MIDNIGHT  S  UN.  8 1 


tion,  on  its  transit  across  the  meridian,  would  facilitate  the  work 
of  the  two  observers. 

Already  the  night  before,  and  the  same  morning,  by  taking  differ- 
ent altitudes,  and  by  means  of  a  calculation  of  right  ascensions,  the 
Lieutenant  and  the  astronomer  had  ascertained  the  longitude  with 
great  accuracy.  But  it  was  about  the  latitude  that  Hobson  was 
most  anxious ;  for  what  would  the  meridian  of  Cape  Bathurst 
matter  to  him  should  it  not  be  situated  beyond  the  seventieth 
parallel  ? 

Noon  approached.  The  men  of  the  expedition  gathered  round 
the  observers  with  their  sextants  ready  in  their  hands.  The  brave 
fellows  awaited  the  result  of  the  observation  with  an  impatience 
which  will  be  readily  understood.  It  was  now  to  be  decided 
whether  they  had  come  to  the  end  of  their  journey,  or  whether  they 
must  search  still  farther  for  a  spot  fulfilling  the  conditions  imposed 
by  the  Company. 

Probably  no  good  result  would  have  followed  upon  further  explora- 
tions According  to  the  maps  of  North  America — imperfect,  it  is 
true — the  western  coast  beyond  Cape  Bathurst  sloped  down  below 
the  seventieth  parallel,  not  again  rising  above  it  until  it  entered 
Russian  America,  where  the  English  had  as  yet  no  right  to  settle  j 
so  that  Hobson  had  shown  considerable  judgment  in  directing  his 
course  to  Cape  Bathurst  after  a  thorough  examination  of  the  maps 
of  these  northern  regions.  This  promontory  is,  in  fact,  the  only  one 
which  juts  out  beyond  the  seventieth  parallel  along  the  whole  of 
the  North  American  continent,  properly  so  called — that  is  to  say,  in 
English  America.  It  remained  to  be  proved  that  it  really  occupied 
the  position  assigned  to  it  in  maps. 

At  this  moment  the  sun  was  approaching  the  culminating-point 
of  its  course,  and  the  two  observers  pointed  the  telescopes  of  their 
sextants  upon  it.  By  means  of  inclined  mirrors  attached  to  the 
instruments,  the  sun  ought  apparently  to  go  back  to  the  horizon 
itself;  and  the  moment  when  it  seemed  to  touch  it  with  the  lower 
side  of  its  disc  would  be  precisely  that  at  which  it  would  occupy 
the  highest  point  of  the  diurnal  arc,  and  consequently  the  exact 
moment  when  it  would  pass  the  meridian — in  other  words,  it  would 
be  noon  at  the  place  where  the  observation  was  taken. 

All  watched  in  anxious  silence. 

"  Noon  !  "  cried  Jaspar  Hobson  and  the  astronomer  at  once. 

The  telescopes  were  immediately  lowered.     The  Lieutenant  and 


82  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

Thomas  Black  read  on  the  graduated  limbs  the  value  of  the  angles 
they  had  just  obtained,  and  at  once  proceeded  to  note  down  their 
observations.  , 

A  few  minutes  afterwards,  Lieutenant  Hobson  rose  and  said, 
addressing  his  companions — 

"My  friends,  from  this  date,  July  6th,  I  promise  you  double  pay 
in  the  name  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  ! " 

"  Hurrah  !  hurrah !  hurrah  for  the  Company  ! "  shouted  the 
worthy  companions  of  the  Lieutenant  with  one  voice. 

Cape  Bathurst  and  its  immediate  neighbourhood  were  in  very 
truth  above  the  seventieth  degree  of  north  latitude. 

We  give  the  result  of  these  simultaneous  observations,  -which 
agreed  to  a  second. 

Longitude,  127°  36'  12"  west  of  the  meridian  of  Greenwich. 

Latitude,  70"  44'  37"  north. 

And  that  very  evening  these  hardy  pioneers,  encamped  so  far 
from  the  inhabited  world,  watched  the  mighty  luminary  of  day  touch, 
the  edges  of  the  western  horizon  without  dipping  beneath  it. 

For  the  first  time  they  saw  the  shining  of  the  midnight  sun. 


COLLECTING    MATERIALS    J<01i   THE    NEW    PACTOttY. Page  86. 


CHAPTER    XIIL 

FORT  HOPE, 

^  p^^HE  site  of  tbe  new  fort  was  now  finally  determined  on.  It 
^'^  would  be  impossible  to  find  a  better  situation  than  on  tlie 
^^2^^^^  level  ground  behind  Cape  Bathurst,  on  the  eastern  bank  of 
the  lagoon.  Hobson  determined  to  commence  the  construction  of  the 
principal  house  at  once.  Meanwhile  all  must  accommodate  them- 
selves as  best  they  could ;  and  the  sledges  were  ingeniously  utilised 
to  form  a  provisional  encampment. 

His  men  being  very  skilful,  the  Lieutenant  hoped  to  have  the 
principal  house  ready  in  a  month.  It  was  to  be  large  enough  to 
accommodate  for  a  time  the  nineteen  persons  of  the  party.  Later, 
and  before  the  excessive  cold  set  in,  if  there  should  be  time,  the 
barracks  for  the  soldiers  and  the  magazines  for  the  furs  and  skins 
were  to  be  built.  There  was  not  much  chance  of  getting  it  all  done 
before  the  end  of  September;  and  after  that  date,  the  winter,  with  its 
first  bitter  frosts  and  long  nights,  would  arrest  all  further  progress. 

Of  the  ten  soldiers  chosen  by  Captain  Craventy,  two — Marbre  and 
Sabine — were  skilful  hunters ;  the  other  eight  handled  the  hatchet 
with  as  much  address  as  the  musket.  Like  sailors,  they  could  turn 
their  hands  to  anything,  and  were  now  to  be  treated  more  like  work- 
men than  soldiers,  for  they  were  to  build  a  fort  which  there  was  as 
yet  no  enemy  to  attack.  Petersen,  Belcher,  Rae,  Garry,  Pond,  Hope, 
and  Kellet  formed  a  body  of  clever,  zealous  carpenters,  under  the 
able  superintendence  of  Mac-Nab,  a  Scotchman  from  Stirling,  who 
had  had  considerable  experience  in  the  building  both  of  houses  and 
boats.  The  men  were  well  provided  with  tools — hatchets,  centre- 
bits,  adzes,  planes,  hand-saws,  mallets,  hammers,  chisels,  <fec.  <fec.  Rae 
was  most  skilful  at  blacksmith's  work,  and  with  the  aid  of  a  little 
portable  forge  he  was  able  to  make  all  the  pins,  tenons,  bolts,  nails, 
screws,  nuts,  &c.,  required  in  carpentry.  They  had  no  mason  in  the 
party;  but  none  was  wanted,  as  all  the  buildings  of  the  factories  in 
the  north  are  of  wood.     Fortunately  there  were  plenty  of  trees  about 


84  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Cape  Bathurst,  although,  as  Hobson  had  already  renjarked  to  Mrs 
Barnett,  there  was  not  a  rock,  a  stone,  not  even  a  flint  or  a  pebble, 
to  be  seen.  The  shore  was  strewn  with  innumerable  quantities  of 
bivalve  shells  broken  by  the  surf,  and  with  seaweed  or  zoophytes, 
mostly  sea-urchins  and  asteriadse ;  but  the  soil  consisted  entirely  of 
earth  and  sand,  without  a  morsel  of  silica  or  broken  granite ;  and  the 
cape  itself  was  but  an  accumulation  of  soft  earth,  the  particles  of 
which  were  scarcely  held  together  by  the  vegetation  with  which  it 
was  clothed. 

In  the  afternoon  of  the  same  day,  July  6th,  Hobson  and  Mac-Nab 
the  carpenter  went  to  choose  the  site  of  the  principal  house  on  the 
plateau  at  the  foot  of  Cape  Bathurst.  From  this  point  the  view 
embraced  the  lagoon  and  the  western  districts  to  a  distance  of  ten 
or  twelve  miles.  On  the  right,  about  four  miles  off,  towered  icebergs 
of  a  considerable  height,  partly  draped  in  mist ;  whilst  on  the  left 
stretched  apparently  boundless  plains,  vast  steppes  which  it  would 
be  impossible  to  distinguish  from  the  frozen  surface  of  the  lagoon 
or  from  the  sea  itself  in  the  winter. 

The  spot  chosen,  Hobson  and  Mac-Nab  set  out  the  outer  walls  of 
the  house  with  the  line.  This  outline  formed  a  rectangle  measur- 
ing sixty  feet  on  the  larger  side,  and  thirty  on  the  smaller.  The 
fa9ade  of  the  house  would  therefore  have  a  length  of  sixty  feet : 
it  was  to  have  a  door  and  three  windows  on  the  side  of  the 
promontory,  where  the  inner  court  was  to  be  situated,  and  four 
windows  on  the  side  of  the  lagoon.  The  door  was  to  open  at  the 
left  corner,  instead  of  in  the  middle,  of  the  back  of  the  house,  for 
the  sake  of  warmth.  This  arrangement  would  impede  the  entrance 
of  the  outer  air  to  the  further  rooms,  and  add  considerably  to  the 
comfort  of  the  inmates  of  the  fort. 

According  to  the  simple  plan  agreed  upon  by  the  Lieutenant  and 
his  master- carpenter,  there  were  to  be  four  compartments  in  the 
house :  the  first  to  be  an  antechamber  with  a  double  door  to  keep 
out  the  wind ;  the  second  to  serve  as  a  kitchen,  that  the  cooking, 
which  would  generate  damp,  might  be  all  done  quite  away  from 
the  living-rooms  ;  the  third,  a  large  hall,  where  the  daily  meals  were 
to  be  served  in  common ;  and  the  fourth,  to  be  divided  into  several 
cabins,  like  the  state-rooms  on  board  ship. 

The  soldiers  were  to  occupy  the  dining-hall  provisionally,  and  a 
kind  of  camp-bed  was  arranged  for  them  at  the  end  of  the  room. 
The  Lieutenant,  Mrs  Barnett,  Thomas  Black,  Madge,  Mrs  Joliflfe,  Mrs 


FORT  HOPE,  85 


Mac-Nab,  and  Mrs  Rae  were  to  lodge  in  the  cabins  of  the  fourth 
compartment.  They  would  certainly  be  packed  pretty  closely  ;  but 
it  was  only  a  temporary  state  of  things,  and  when  the  barracks  were 
constructed,  the  principal  house  would  be  reserved  to  the  officer  in 
command,  his  sergeant,  Thomas  Black,  Mrs  Barnett,  and  her  faith- 
ful Madge,  who  never  left  her.  Then  the  fourth  compartment 
might  perhaps  be  divided  into  three  cabins,  instead  of  four ;  for  to 
avoid  corners  as  much  as  possible  is  a  rule  which  should  never  be 
forgotten  by  those  who  winter  in  high  latitudes.  Nooks  and  corners 
are,  in  fact,  so  many  receptacles  of  ice.  The  partitions  impede  the 
ventilation;  and  the  moisture,  generated  in  the  air,  freezes  readily, 
and  makes  the  atmosphere  of  the  rooms  unhealthy,  causing  grave 
maladies  to  those  who  sleep  in  them. 

On  this  account  many  navigators  who  have  to  winter  in  the 
midst  of  ice  have  one  large  room  in  the  centre  of  their  vessel,  which 
is  shared  by  officers  and  sailors  in  common.  For  obvious  reasons, 
however,  Hobson  could  not  adopt  this  plan. 

From  the  preceding  description  we  shall  have  seen  that  the  future 
house  was  to  consist  merely  of  a  ground-floor.  The  roof  was  to  be 
high,  and  its  sides  to  slope  considerably,  so  that  water  could  easily 
run  off  them.  The  snow  would,  however,  settle  upon  them ;  and 
when  once  they  were  covered  with  it,  the  house  would  be,  so  to 
speak,  hermetically  closed,  and  the  inside  temperature  would  be 
kept  at  the  same  mean  height.  Snow  is,  in  fact,  a  very  bad  con- 
ductor of  heat :  it  prevents  it  from  entering,  it  is  true  ;  but,  what 
is  more  important  in  an  Arctic  winter,  it  also  keeps  it  from  getting 
out. 

The  carpenter  was  to  build  two  chimneys — one  above  the  kitchen, 
the  other  in  connection  with  the  stove  of  the  large  dining-room, 
which  was  to  heat  it  and  the  compartment  containing  the  cabins. 
The  architectural  effect  of  the  whole  would  certainly  be  poor ;  but 
the  house  would  be  as  comfortable  as  possible,  and  what  more  could 
any  one  desire  ? 

Certainly  an  artist  who  had  once  seen  it  would  not  soon  forget 
this  winter  residence,  set  down  in  the  gloomy  Arctic  twilight  in  the 
midst  of  snow-drifts,  half  hidden  by  icicles,  draped  in  white  from 
roof  to  foundation,  its  walls  encrusted  with  snow,  and  the  smoke 
from  its  fires  assuming  strangely-contorted  forms  in  the  wind. 

But  now  to  tell  of  the  actual  construction  of  this  house,  as  yet 
existing  only  in  imagination.     This,  of  course,  was  the  business  of 


S6  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Mac-Nab  and  his  men ;  and  while  the  carpenters  were  at  work, 
the  foraging  party  to  whom  the  commissariat  was  entrusted  would 
not  be  idle.     There  was  plenty  for  every  one  to  do. 

The  first  step  was  to  choose  suitable  timber,  and  a  species  of 
Scotch  fir  was  decided  on,  which  grew  conveniently  upon  the  neigh- 
bouring hills,  and  seemed  altogether  well  adapted  to  the  multifarious 
uses  to  which  it  would  be  put.  For  in  the  rough  and  ready  style  of 
habitation  which  they  were  planning,  there  could  be  no  variety  of 
material;  and  every  part  of  the  house — outside  and  inside  walls, 
flooring,  ceiling,  partitions,  rafters,  ridges,  framework,  and  tiling — 
would  have  to  be  contrived  of  planks,  beams,  and  timbers.  As  may 
readily  be  supposed,  f:nished  workmanship  was  not  necessary  for 
such  a  description  of  building,  and  Mac-Nab  was  able  to  proceed 
very  rapidly  without  endangering  the  safety  of  the  building. 
About  a  hundred  of  these  firs  were  chosen  and  felled — they  were 
neither  barked  nor  squared — and  formed  so  many  timbers,  averag- 
ing some  twenty  feet  in  length.  The  axe  and  the  chisel  did  not 
touch  them  except  at  the  ends,  in  order  to  form  the  tenons  and 
mortises  by  which  they  were  to  be  secured  to  one  another.  Very 
few  days  sufficed  to  complete  this  part  of  the  work,  and  the 
timbers  were  brought  down  by  the  dogs  to  the  site  fixed  on  for 
the  principal  building.  To  start  with,  the  site  had  been  carefully 
levelled.  The  soil,  a  mixture  of  fine  earth  and  sand,  had  been 
beaten  and  consolidated  with  heavy  blows.  The  brushwood  with 
which  it  was  originally  covered  was  burnt,  and  the  thick  layer  of 
ashes  thus  produced  would  prevent  the  damp  from  penetrating  the 
floors.  A  clean  and  dry  foundation  having  been  thus  secured  on 
which  to  lay  the  first  joists,  upright  posts  were  fixed  at  each  corner 
of  the  site,  and  at  the  extremities  of  the  inside  walls,  to  form 
the  skeleton  of  the  building.  The  posts  were  sunk  to  a  depth  of 
some  feet  in  the  ground,  after  their  ends  had  been  hardened  in  the 
fire ;  and  were  slightly  hollowed  at  each  side  to  receive  the  cross- 
beams of  the  outer  wall,  between  which  the  openings  for  the  doors 
and  windows  had  been  arranged  for.  These  posts  were  held 
together  at  the  top  by  horizontal  beams  well  let  into  the  mortises, 
and  consolidating  the  whole  building.  On  these  horizontal  beams, 
which  represented  the  architraves  of  the  two  fronts,  rested  the  high 
trusses  of  the  roof,  which  overhung  the  walls  like  the  eaves  of 
a  chalet.  Above  this  squared  architrave  were  laid  the  joists 
of  the  ceiling,  and  those  of  the   floor   upon  the   layer   of   ashes. 


A    HUNTING    PAKTY.  —  Page  92. 


FORT  HOPE,  Sy 


The  timbers,  both  in  the  inside  and  outside  walls,  were  only 
laid  side  by  side.  To  insure  their  being  properly  joined, 
Eae  the.  blacksmith  drove  strong  iron  bolts  through  them  at  inter- 
vals; and  when  even  this  contrivance  proved  insufficient  to  close  the 
interstices  as  hermetically  as  was  necessary,  Mac-Nab  had  recourse  to 
calking,  a  process  which  seamen  find  invaluable  in  rendering  vessels 
water-tight ;  only  as  a  substitute  for  tow  he  used  a  sort  of  dry  moss, 
with  which  the  eastern  side  of  the  cape  was  covered,  driving  it  into 
the  crevices  with  calking-irons  and  a  hammer,  filling  up  each  hollow 
with  layers  of  hot  tar,  obtained  without  difficulty  from  the  pine-trees> 
and  thus  making  the  walls  and  boarding  impervious  to  the  rain  and 
damp  of  the  winter  season. 

The  door  and  windows  in  the  two  fronts  were  roughly  but 
fitrongly  built,  and  the  small  panes  of  the  latter  glazed  with  isinglass, 
which,  though  rough,  yellow,  and  almost  opaque,  was  yet  the  best 
substitute  for  glass  which  the  resources  of  the  country  afforded ;  and 
its  imperfections  really  mattered  little,  as  the  windows  were  sure  to 
be  always  open  in  fine  weather ;  while  during  the  long  night  of  the 
Arctic  winter  they  would  be  useless,  and  have  to  be  kept  closed  and 
defended  by  heavy  shutters  with  strong  bolts  against  the  violence  of  the 
gales.  Meanwhile  the  house  was  being  quickly  fitted  up  inside.  By 
means  of  a  double  door  between  the  outer  and  inner  halls,  a  too  sudden 
change  of  temperature  was  avoided,  and  the  wind  was  prevented 
from  blowing  with  unbroken  force  into  the  rooms.  The  air-pumps, 
brought  from  Fort  Reliance,  were  so  fixed  as  to  let  in  fresh  air 
whenever  excessive  cold  prevented  the  opening  of  doors  or  windows 
— one  being  made  to  eject  the  impure  air  from  within,  the  other  to 
renew  the  supply ;  for  the  Lieutenant  had  given  his  whole  mind  to 
this  important  matter. 

The  principal  cooking  utensil  was  a  large  iron  furnace,  which  had 
been  brought  piecemeal  from  Fort  Reliance,  and  which  the  carpenter 
put  up  without  any  difficulty.  The  chimneys  for  the  kitchen  and 
hall,  however,  seemed  likely  to  tax  the  ingenuity  of  the  workmen  to 
the  utmost,  as  no  material  within  their  reach  was  strong  enough  for 
the  purpose,  and  stone,  as  we  have  said  before,  was  nowhere  to  be 
found  in  the  country  around  Cape  Bathurst. 

The  difficulty  appeared  insurmountable,  when  the  invincible 
Lieutenant  suggested  that  they  should  utilise  the  shells  with  which 
the  shore  was  strewed. 

"  Make  chimneys  of  shells  ! "  cried  the  carpenter. 


88  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

"  Yes,  Mac-Nab,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  we  must  collect  the  shells, 
grind  them,  burn  the;n,  and  make  them  into  lime,  then  mould  the 
lime  into  bricks,  and  use  them  in  the  same  way." 

"  Let  us  try  the  shells,  by  all  means,"  replied  the  carpenter ;  and 
so  the  idea  was  put  in  practice  at  once,  and  many  tons  collected  of 
calcareous  shells  identical  with  those  found  in  the  lowest  stratum 
of  the  Tertiary  formations. 

A  furnace  was  constructed  for  the  decomposition  of  the  carbonate 
which  is  so  large  an  ingredient  of  these  shells,  and  thus  the  lime 
required  was  obtained  in  the  space  of  a  few  hours.  It  would 
perhaps  be  too  much  to  say  that  the  substance  thus  made  was  as 
entirely  satisfactory  as  if  it  had  gone  through  all  the  usual  processes ; 
but  it  answered  its  purpose,  and  strong  conical  chimneys  soon 
adorned  the  roof,  to  the  great  satisfaction  of  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett, 
who  congratulated  the  originator  of  the  scheme  warmly  on  its 
success,  only  adding  laughingly,  that  she  hoped  the  chimneys  would 
not  smoke. 

"  Of  course  they  will  smoke,  madam,"  replied  Hobson  coolly ;  "  all 
chimneys  do ! " 

All  this  was  finished  within  a  month,  and  on  the  6th  of  August 
they  were  to  take  possession  of  the  new  house. 

While  Mac-Nab  and  his  men  were  working  so  hard,  the  foraging 
party,  with  the  Lieutenant  at  its  head,  had  been  exploring  the 
environs  of  Cape  Bathurst,  and  satisfied  themselves  that  there 
would  be  no  difficulty  in  supplying  the  Company's  demands  for  fur 
and  feathers,  so  soon-  as  they  could  set  about  hunting  in  earnest. 
In  the  meantime  they  prepared  the  way  for  future  sport,  content- 
ing themselves  for  the  present  with  the  capture  of  a  few  couples  of 
reindeer,  which  they  intended  to  domesticate  for  the  sake  of  their 
milk  and  their  young.  They  were  kept  in  a  paddock  about  fifty 
yards  from  the  house,  and  entrusted  to  the  care  of  Mac-Nab's  wife, 
an  Indian  woman,  well  qualified  to  take  charge  of  them. 

The  care  of  the  household  fell  to  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett,  and  this 
good  woman,  with  Madge's  help,  was  invaluable  in  providing  for  all 
the  small  wants,  which  would  inevitably  have  escaped  the  notice  of 
the  men. 

After  scouring  the  country  within  a  radius  of  several  miles,  the 
Lieutenant  notified,  as  the  result  of  his  observations,  that  the  terri- 
tory on  which  they  had  established  themselves,  and  to  which  he 
gave  the  name  of  Victoria  Land,  was  a  large  peninsula  about  one 


FORT  HOPE,  89 


hundred  and  fifty  square  miles  in  extent,  with  very  clearly-defined 
boundaries,  connected  with  the  American  continent  by  an  isthmus, 
extending  from  the  lower  end  of  Washburn  Bay  on  the  east,  as  far 
as  the  corresponding  slope  on  the  opposite  coast  The  Lieutenant 
next  proceeded  to  ascertain  what  were  the  resources  of  the  lake  and 
river,  and  found  great  reason  to  be  satisfied  with  the  result  of  his 
examination.  The  shallow  waters  of  the  lake  teemed  with  trout, 
pike,  and  other  available  fresh-water  fish ;  and  the  little  river  was 
a  favourite  resort  of  salmon  and  shoals  of  whitebait  and  smelts. 
The  supply  of  sea-fish  was  not  go  good;  and  though  many  a  grampus 
and  whale  passed  by  in  the  offing,  the  latter  probably  flying  from 
the  harpoons  of  the  Behring  Strait  fishermen,  there  were  no  means 
of  capturing  them,  unless  one  by  chance  happened  to  get  stranded 
on  the  coast;  nor  would  Hobson  allow  any  of  the  seals  which 
abounded  on  the  western  shore  to  be  taken  until  a  satisfactory 
conclusion  should  be  arrived  at  as  to  how  to  use  them  to  the  best 
advantage. 

The  colonists  now  considered  themselves  fairly  installed  in  their 
new  abode,  and  after  due  deliberation  unanimously  agreed  to  bestow 
upon  the  settlement  the  name  of  Fort  Good  Hope. 

Alas  !  the  auspicious  title  was  never  to  be  inscribed  upon  a  map. 
The  undertaking,  begun  so  bravely  and  with  such  prospects  of  success, 
was  destined  never,  to  be  carried  out,  and  another  disaster  would 
have  to  be  added  to  the  long  list  of  failures  in  Arctic  enterprise. 


.  CHAPTER  XIV. 

SOME    EXCURSIONS. 

^nWi^  did  not  take  long  to  furnish  the  new  ahode.  A  camp-bed 
^  •  ^  was  set  up  in  the  hall,  and  the  carpenter  Mac-Nab  con- 
^^^^  structed  a  most  substantial  table,  around  which  were 
ranged  fixed  benches.  A  few  movable  scats  and  two  enormous 
presses  completed  the  furniture  of  this  apartment.  The  inner 
room,  which  was  also  ready,  was  divided  by  solid  partitions  into  six 
dormitories,  the  two  end  ones  alone  being  lighted  by  windows 
looking  to  the  front  and  back.  The  only  furniture  was  a  bed  and 
a  table.  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  and  Madge  were  installed  in  one 
which  looked  immediately  out  upon  the  lake.  Hobson  offered 
the  other  with  the  window  in  it  to  Thomas  Black,  and  the  astro- 
nomer took  immediate  possession  of  it.  The  Lieutenant's  own  room 
was  a  dark  cell  adjoining  the  hall,  with  no  window  but  a  bull's  eye 
pierced  through  the  partition.  Mrs  Joliffe,  Mrs  Mac-Nab,  and  Mrs 
Rae,  with  their  husbands,  occupied  the  other  dormitories.  These 
good  people  agreed  so  well  together  that  it  would  have  been  a 
pity  to  separate  them.  Moreover,  an  addition  was  expected  shortly 
to  the  little  colony ;  and  Mac-Nab  had  already  gone  so  far 
as  to  secure  the  services  of  Mrs  Barnett  as  god-mOther,  an 
honour  which  gave  the  good  woman  much  satisfaction.  The  sledges 
had  been  entirely  unloaded,  and  the  bedding  carried  into  the 
different  rooms.  All  utensils,  stores,  and  provisions  which  were  not 
required  for  immediate  use  were  stowed  away  in  a  garret,  to  which 
a  ladder  gave  access.  The  winter  clothing — such  as  boots,  overcoats, 
furs,  and  skins — were  also  taken  there,  and  protected  from  the  damp 
in  large  chests.  As  soon  as  these  arrangements  were  completed, 
the  Lieutenant  began  to  provide  for  the  heating  of  the  house. 

Know'ing  that  the  most  energetic  measures  were  necessary  to 
combat  the  severity  of  the  Arctic  winter,  and  that  during  the  weeks 
of  intensest  cold  there  would  be  no  possibility  of  leaving  the  house 
to  forage  for  supplies,  he  ordered  a  quantity  of  fuel  to  be  brought 


SERGEANT    LONG    AND    MADGE    FISHING.  —  Page  93. 


SOME  EXCURSIONS,  9 1 

from  the  wooded  hills  in  the  neighbourhood,  and  took  care  to 
obtain  a  plentiful  store  of  oil  from  the  seals  which  abounded  on  the 
shore. 

In  obedience  to  his  orders,  and  under  his  directions,  the  house  was 
provided  with  a  condensing  apparatus  which  would  receive  the 
internal  moisture,  and  was  so  constructed  that  the  ice  which  would 
form  in  it  could  easily  be  removed. 

This  question  of  heating  was  a  very  serious  one  to  the  Lieutenant. 

"  I  am  a  native  of  the  Polar  regions,  madam,"  he  often  said  to 
Mrs  Bamett ;  "  I  have  some  experience  in  these  matters,  and 
I  have  read  over  and  over  again  books  written  by  those  who 
have  wintered  in  these  latitudes.  It  is  impossible  to  take  too  many 
precautions  in  preparing  to  pass  a  winter  in  the  Arctic  regions,  and 
nothing  must  be  left  to  chance  where  a  single  neglect  may  prove 
fatal  to  the  enterprise." 

"Very  true,  Mr  Hobson,"  replied  Mrs  Bamett;  "and  you 
have  evidently  made  up  your  mind  to  conquer  the  cold ;  but  there 
is  the  food  to  be  thought  of  too." 

"  Yes,  indeed ;  I  have  been  thinking  of  that,  and  mean  to  make 
all  possible  use  of  the  produce  of  the  country  so  as  to  economise  our 
stores.  As  soon  as  we  can,  we  will  make  some  foraging  expedi- 
tions. We  need  not  think  about  the  furs  at  present,  for  there  will 
be  plenty  of  time  during  the  winter  to  stock  the  Company's  depdts. 
Besides,  the  furred  animals  have  not  got  their  winter  clothing  on 
yet,  and  the  skins  would  lose  fifty  per  cent,  of  their  value  if  taken 
now.  Let  us  content  ourselves  for  the  present  with  provisioning 
Fort  Hope.  Reindeer,  elk,  and  any  wapitis  that  may  have 
ventured  so  far  nofth  are  the  only  game  worth  our  notice  just  now; 
it  will  be  no  small  undertaking  to  provide  food  for  twenty  people 
and  sixty  dogs." 

The  Lieutenant  loved  order,  and  determined  to  do  everything  in 
the  most  methodical  manner,  feeling  confident  that  if  his  com- 
panions would  help  him  to  the  utmost  of  their  power,  nothing  need 
be  wanting  to  the  success  of  the  expedition. 

The  weather  at  this  season  was  almost  always  fine,  and  might  be 
expected  to  continue  so  for  five  weeks  longer,  when  the  snow  would 
begin  to  fall.  It  was  very  important  that  the  carpenters  should  make 
all  possible  use  of  the  interval ;  and  as  soon  as  the  principal  house 
was  finished,  Hobson  set  them  to  work  to  build  an  enormous  kennel 
or  shed  in  which  to  keep  the  teams  of  dogs.     This  doghouse  was 


92  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


built  at  the  very  foot  of  the  promontory,  against  the  hill,  and  about 
forty  yards  to  the  right  of  the  house.  Barracks  for  the  accommoda- 
tion of  the  men  were  to  be  built  opposite  this  kennel  on  the  left, 
while  the  store  and  powder  magazines  were  to  occupy  the  front  of 
the  enclosure. 

Hobson  determined  with  almost  excessive  prudence  to  have 
the  Factory,  enclosed  before  the  winter  set  in.  A  strong  feace 
of  pointed  stakes,  planted  firmly  in  the  ground,  was  set  up  as  a 
protection  against  the  inroads  of  wild  animals  or  the  hostilities  of 
the  natives.  The  Lieutenant  had  not  forgotten  an  outrage  which 
had  been  committed  along  the  coast  at  no  great  distance  from  Fort 
Hope,  and  he  well  knew  how  essential  it  was  to  be  safe  from  a  coup 
de  main.  The  factory  was  therefore  entirely  encircled,  and  at  each 
extremity  of  the  lagoon  Mac-Nab  undertook  to  erect  a  wooden 
sentry-box  commanding  the  coast-line,  from  which  a  watch  could 
be  kept  without  any  danger.  The  men  worked  indefatigably,  and 
it  seemed  likely  that  everything  would  be  finished  before  the  cold 
season  set  in. 

In  the  meantime  hunting  parties  were  organised.  The  capture 
of  seals  being  put  off  for  a  more  convenient  season,  the  sportsmen 
prepared  to  supply  the  fort  with  game,  which  might  be  dried  and 
preserved  for  consumption  during  the  bad  season. 

Accordingly  Marbre  and  Sabine,  sometimes  accompanied  by  the 
Lieutenant  and  Sergeant  Long,  whose  experience  was  invaluable, 
scoured  the  country  daily  for  miles  round ;  and  it  was  no  uncommon 
sight  to  see  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  join  them  and  step  briskly  along, 
shouldering  her  gun  bravely,  and  never  allowing  herself  to  be  out- 
stripped by  her  companions. 

Throughout  the  month  of  August  these  expeditions  were  con- 
tinued with  great  success,  and  the  store  of  provisions  increased 
rapidly.  Marbre  and  Sabine  were  skilled  in  all  the  artifices  which 
sportsmen  employ  in  stalking  their  prey — particularly  the  reindeer, 
which  are  exceedingly  wary.  How  patiently  they  would  face  the 
wind  lest  the  creature's  keen  sense  of  smell  should  warn  it  of  their 
approach!  and  how  cunningly  they  lured  it  on  to  its  destruction  by 
displaying  the  magnificent  antlers  of  some  former  victim  above  the 
birch-bushes ! 

They  found  a  useful  alley  in  a  certain  little  traitorous  bird  to 
which  the  Indians  have  given  the  name  of  **  monitor."  It  is  a  kind 
of  daylight  owl,  about  the  size  of  a  pigeon,  and  has  earned  its  name 


SOME  EXCURSIONS,  93 


by  its  habit  of  calling  the  attention  of  hunters  to  their  quarry,  by 
uttering  a  sharp  note  like  the  cry  of  a  child. 

When  about  fifty  reindeer,  or,  to  give  them  their  Indian  name, 
"  caribous,"  had  been  brought  down  by  the  guns,  the  flesh  was  cut 
into  long  strips  for  food,  the  skins  being  kept  to  be  tanned  and  used 
for  shoe-leather. 

-Besides  the  caribous,  there  were  also  plenty  of  Polar  hares,  which 
formed  an  agreeable  addition  to  the  larder.  They  were  much  less 
timorous  than  the  European  species,  and  allowed  themselves  to  be 
caught  in  great  numbers.  They  belong  to  the  rodent  family,  and 
have  long  ears,  brown  eyes,  and  a  soft  fur  resembling  swan's  down. 
They  weigh  from  ten  to  fifteen  pounds  each,  and  their  flesh  is 
excellent.  Hundreds  of  them  were  cured  for  winter  use,  and  the 
remainder  converted  into  excellent  pies  by  the  skilful  hands  of  Mrs 
Joliff'e. 

While  making  provision  for  future  wants,  the  daily  supplies  were 
not  neglected.  In  addition  to  the  Polar  hares,  which  underwent 
every  variety  of  culinary  treatment  from  Mrs  Joliffe,  and  won  for 
her  compliments  innumerable  from  hunters  and  workmen  alike, 
many  waterfowl  figured  in  the  bill  of  fare.  Besides  the  ducks  which 
abounded  on  the  shores  of  the  lagoon,  large  flocks  of  grouse  congre- 
gated round  the  «lunips  of  stunted  willows.  They  belong,  as  their 
zoological  name  implies,  to  the  partridge  family,  and  might  be  aptly 
described  as  white  partridges  with  long  black-spotted  feathers  in 
the  tail.  The  Indians  call  them  willow-fowl  ^  but  to  a  European 
sportsman  they  are  neither  more  nor  less  than  blackcock  {Tetrao 
tetrix).  When  roasted  slightly  before  a  quick  clear  fire  they  proved 
delicious. 

Then  there  were  the  supplies  furnished  by  lake  and  stream. 
Sergeant  Long  was  a  first-rate  angler,  and  nothing  could  surpass  the 
skill  and  patience  with  which  he  whipped  the  water  and  cast  his 
line.  The  faithful  Madge,  another  worthy  disciple  of  Isaak  Walton, 
was  perhaps  his  only  equal.  Day  after  day  the  two  sallied  forth 
together  rod  in  hand,  to  spend  the  day  in  mute  companionship  by 
the  river-side,  whence  they  were  sure  to  return  in  triumph  laden 
with  some  splendid  specimens  of  the  salmon  tribe. 

But  to  return  to  our  sportsmen;  they  soon  found  that  their 
hunting  excursions  were  not  to  be  free  from  periL  Hobson  per- 
ceived with  some  alarm  that  bears  were  very  numerous  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood, and  that  scarcely  a  day  passed  without  one  or  more  of 


94  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


them  being  sighted.  Sometimes  these  unwelcome  visitors  belonged 
to  the  family  of  brown  bears,  so  common  throughout  the  whole 
*'  Cursed  Laud  ; "  but  now  and  then  a  solitary  specimen  of  the 
formidable  Polar  bear  warned  the  hunters  what  dangers  they  might 
have  to  encounter  so  soon  as  the  first  frost  should  drive  great  num- 
bers of  these  fearful  animals  to  the  neighbourhood  of  Cape  Bathurst, 
Every  book  of  Arctic  explorations  is  full  of  accounts  of  the  frequent 
perils  to  which  travellers  and  whalers  are  exposed  from  the  ferocity 
of  these  animals. 

Now  and  then,  too,  a  distant  pack  of  wolves  was  seen,  which 
receded  like  a  wave  at  the  approach  of  the  hunters,  or  the  sound  of 
their  bark  was  heard  as  they  followed  the  trail  of  a  reindeer  or 
wapiti.  These  creatures  were  large  grey  wolves,  about  three  feet 
high,  with  long  tails,  whose  fur  becomes  white  in  the  winter.  They 
abounded  in  this  part  of  the  country,  where  food  was  plentiful;  and 
frequented  wooded  spots,  where  they  lived  in  holes  like  foxes.  During 
the  temperate  season,  when  they  could  get  as  much  as  they  wanted 
to  eat,  they  were  scarcely  dangerous,  and  fled  with  the  characteristic 
cowardice  of  their  race  at  the  first  sign  of  pursuit ;  but  when  im- 
pelled by  hunger,  their  numbers  rendered  them  very  formidable ; 
and  from  the  fact  of  their  lairs  being  close  at  hand,  they  never  left 
the  country  even  in  the  depth  of  winter. 

One  day  the  sportsmen  returned  to  Fort  Hope,  bringing  with  them 
an  unpleasant-looking  animal,  which  neither  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett 
nor  the  astronomer,  Thomas  Black,  had  ever  before  seen.  It  was  a 
carnivorous  creature  of  the  plantigrada  family,  and  greatly  resembled 
the  American  glutton,  being  strongly  built,  with  short  legs,  and,  like 
all  animals  of  the  feline  tribe,  a  very  supple  back  \  its  eyes  were 
small  and  horny,  and  it  was  armed  with  curved  clawS  and  formid- 
able jaws. 

"  What  is  this  horrid  creature  % "  inquired  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett 
of  Sabine,  who  replied  in  his  usual  sententious  manner — 

"A  Scotchman  would  call  it  a  *  quick-hatch,'  an  Indian  an 
*  okelcoo-haw-gew,'  and  a  Canadian  a  '  carcajou.' " 

*'  And  what  do  you  call  it  ]  " 

"  A  wolverene,  ma'am,"  returned  Sabine,  much  delighted  with  the 
elegant  way  in  which  he  had  rounded  his  sentence. 

The  wolverene,  as  this  strange  quadruped  is  called  by  zoologists, 
lives  in  hollow  trees  or  rocky  caves,  whence  it  issues  at  night  and 
creates  great  havoc  amongst  beavers,  musk-rats,  and  other  rodents, 


"From  this  position  they  were  able,''  ^c.  —  Page  99. 


SOME  EXCURSIONS,  95 

sometimes  fighting  with  a  fox  or  a  wolf  for  its  spoils.  Its  chief  charac- 
teristics are  great  cunning,  immense  muscular  power,  and  an  acute 
sense  of  smell.  It  is  found  in  very  high  latitudes ;  and  the  short  fur 
with  which  it  is  clothed  becomes  almost  black  in  the  winter  months, 
and  forms  a  large  item  in  the  Company*s  exports. 

DAring  their  excursions  the  settlers  paid  as  much  attention  to 
the  Flora  of  the  country  as  to  its  Fauna ;  but  in  those  regions  vege- 
tation has  necessarily  a  hard  struggle  for  existence,  as  it  must  brave 
€very  season  of  the  year,  whereas  the  animals  are  able  to  migrate 
to  a  warmer  climate  during  the  winter. 

The  hills  on .  the  eastern  side  of  the  lake  were  well  covered  with 
pine  and  fir  trees;  and  Jaspar  also  noticed  the  *'  tacamahac,"  a  species 
of  poplar  which  grows  to  a  great  height,  and  shoots  forth  yellowish 
leaves  which  turn  green  in  the  autumn.  These  trees  and  larches  were, 
however,  few  and  sickly  looking,  as  if  they  found  the  oblique  rays  of 
the  sun  insufiScient  to  make  them  thrive.  The  black  fir,  or  Norway 
spruce  fir,  throve  better,  especially  when  situated  in  ravines  well 
sheltered  from  the  north  wind.  The  young  shoots  of  this  tree  are 
very  valuable,  yielding  a  favourite  beverage  known  in  North 
America  as  "  spruce-beer."  A  good  crop  of  these  branchlets  was 
gathered  in  and  stored  in  the  cellar  of  Fort  Hope.  There  were  also 
the  dwarf  birch,  a  shrub  about  two  feet  high,  native  to  very  cold 
climates,  and  whole  thickets  of  cedars,  which  are  so  valuable  for  fiiel. 

Of  vegetables  which  could  be  easily  grown  and  used  for  food,  this 
barren  land  yielded  but  few;  and  Mrs  JolifFe,  who  took  a  great 
interest  in  "economic"  botany,  only  met  with  two  plants  which 
were  available  in  cooking. 

One  of  these,  a  bulb,  very  difficult  to  classify,  because  its  leaves 
fall  off  just  at  the  flowering  season,  turned  out  to  be  a  wild  leek, 
and  yielded  a  good  crop  of  onions,  each  about  the  size  of  an  Qgg. 

The  other  plant  was  that  known  throughout  North  America  as 
"  Labrador  tea ; "  it  grew  abundantly  on  the  shores  of  the  lagoon 
between  the  clumps  of  willow  and  arbutus,  and  formed  the  principal 
food  of  the  Polar  hares.  Steeped  in  boiling  water,  and  flavoured 
with  a  few  drops  of  brandy  or  gin,  it  formed  an  excellent  beverage, 
and  served  to  economise  the  supply  of  China  tea  which  the  party 
had  brought  from  Fort  Reliance. 

Knowing  the  scarcity  of  vegetables,  Jaspar  Hobson  had  plenty 
of  seeds  with  him,  chiefly  sorrel  and  scurvy-grass  {Gochlearia)^  the 
antiscorbutic  properties  of  which  are  invaluable  in  these  latitudes    In 


96  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


choosing  the  site  of  the  settlement,  such  care  had  been  taken  to 
find  a  spot  sheltered  from  the  keen  blasts,  which  shrivel  vegetation 
like  a  fire,  that  there  was  every  chance  of  these  seeds  yielding  a 
good  crop  in  the  ensuing  season. 

The  dispensary  of  the  new  fort  contained  other  antiscorbutics, 
in  the  shape  of  casks  of  lemon  and  lime  juice,  both  of  which  are 
absolutely  indispensable  to  an  Arctic  expedition.  Still  the  greatest 
economy  was  necessary  with  regard  to  the  stores,  as  a  long  period 
of  bad  weather  might  cut  off  the  communication  between  Fort  Hope^ 
and  the  southern  stations. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

FIFTEEN  MILES  FROM  CAPE  BATHURST. 

EPTEMBER  had  now  commenced,  and  as  upon  the  most;. 
^  favourable  calculation  only  three  more  weeks  would  in- 
tervene before  the  bad  season  set  in  and  interrupted  the 
labours  of  the  explorers,  the  greatest  haste  was  necessary  in  com^ 
pleting  the  new  buildings,  and  Mac-Nab  and  his  workmen  surpassed 
themselves  in  industry.  The  dog-house  was  on  the  eve  of  being 
finished,  and  very  little  remained  to  be  done  to  the  palisading 
which  was  to  encircle  the  fort.  An  inner  court  had  been  con- 
structed, in  the  shape  of  a  half-moon,  fenced  with  tall  pointed 
stakes,  fifteen  feet  high,  to  which  a  postern  gave  entrance.  Jaspar 
Hobson  favoured  the  system  of  an  unbroken  enclosure  with 
detached  forts  (a  great  improvement  upon  the  tactics  of  Vauban 
and  Cormontaigne),  and  knew  that  to  make  his  defence  complete 
the  summit  of  Cape  Bathurst,  which  was  the  key  of  the  position, 
must  be  fortified ;  until  that  could  be  done,  however,  he  thought 
the  palisading  would  be  a  sufficient  protection,  at  least  against 
quadrupeds. 

The  next  thing  was  to  lay  in  a  supply  of  oil  and  lights,  and 
accordingly  an  expedition  was  organised  to  a  spot  about  fifteen 
mile^  distant  where  seals  were  plentiful,  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  being 
invited  to  accompany  the  sportsmen,  not  indeed  for  the  sake  of 
watching  the  poor  creatures  slaughtered,  but  to  satisfy  her  curiosity 
with  regard  to  the  country  around  Cape  Bathurst,  and  to  see  some 
cliffs  on  that  part  of  the  coast  which  were  worthy  of  notice.  The 
Lieutenant  chose  as  his  other  companions,  Sergeant  Long,  and  the 
soldiers  Petersen,  Hope,  and  Kellet,  and  the  party  set  off  at  eight 
o'clock  in  the  morning  in  two  sledges,  each  drawn  by  six  dogs,  on 
which  the  bodies  of  the  seals  were  to  be  brought  back.  The 
weather  was  fine,  but  the  fog  which  lay  low  along  the  horizon  veiled 
the  rays  of  the  sun,  whose  yellow  disk  was  now  beginning  to  dis- 

G 


98  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


appear  for  some  hours  during  tlie  night,  a  circumstance  which  at- 
tracted the  Lieutenant's  attention,  for  reasons  which  we  will  explain. 

That  part  of  the  shore  to  the  west  of  Cape  Bathurst  rises  but  a 
few  inches  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  the  tides  are — or  are 
said  to  be — very  high  in  the  Arctic  Ocean — many  navigators,  such 
as  Parry,  Franklin,  the  two  Rosses,  M'Clure,  and  M'Clintock, 
having  observed  that  when  the  sun  and  moon  were  in  conjunction 
the  waters  were  sometimes  twenty-five  feet  above  the  ordinary  level 
How  then  was  it  to  be  explained  that  the  sea  did  not  at  high  tide 
inundate  Cape  Bathurst,  which  possessed  no  natural  defences  such 
as  cliffs  or  downs  ?  What  was  it,  in  fact,  which  prevented  the  entire 
submersion  of  the  whole  district,  and  the  meeting  of  the  waters  of 
the  lake  with  those  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  ? 

Jaspar  Hobson  could  not  refrain  from  remarking  on  this  peculiarity 
to  Mrs  Barnett,  who  replied  somewhat  hastily  that  she  supposed  that 
there  were — in  spite  of  all  that  had  been  said  to  the  contrary — no 
tides  in  the  Arctic  Ocean.         • 

"  On  the  contrary,  madam,"  said  Hobson,  "  all  navigators  agree 
that  the  ebb  and  flow  of  Polar  seas  are  very  distinctly  marked,  and 
it  is  impossible  to  believe  that  they  can  have  been  mistaken  on 
such  a  subject." 

"  How  is  it,  then,"  inquired  Mrs  Barnett,  *'  that  this  land  is  not 
flooded  when  it  is  scarcely  ten  feet  above  the  sea  level  at  low 
tide?'' 

"  That  is  just  what  puzzles  me,"  said  Hobson ;  "  for  I  have  been 
attentively  watching  the  tides  all  through  this  month,  and  during 
that  time  they  have  not  varied  more  than  a  foot,  and  I  feel  certain, 
that  even  during  the  September  equinox,  they  will  not  rise  more 
than  a  foot  and  a  half  all  along  the  shores  of  Cape  Bathurst." 

"  Can  you  not  explain  this  phenomenon  ? "  inquired  Mrs 
Barnett. 

"  Well,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "  two  conclusions  are 
open  to  us,  either  of  which  I  find  it  difiBcult  to  believe  ;  such  men  as 
Franklin,  Parry,  Boss,  and  others,  are  mistaken,  and  there  are  no 
tides  on  this  part  of  the  American  coast ;  or,  as  in  the  Mediterranean, 
to  which  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic  have  not  free  ingress,  the  straits 
are  too  narrow  to  be  affected  by  the  ocean  currents." 

"  The  latter  would  appear  to  be  the  more  reasonable  hypothesis^ 
Mr  Hobson." 

"  Itis  not,  however,  thoroughly  satisfactory,"  said  the  Lieutenant, 


FIFTEEN  MILES  FROM  CAPE  BATHURST.  99 


"  and  I  feel  sure  that  if  we  could  but  find  it,  there  is  some  simple 
and  natural  explanation  of  the  phenomenon." 

After  a  monotonous  journey  along  a  flat  and  sandy  shore,  the 
party  reached  their  destination,  and,  having  unharnessed  the  teams, 
they  were  left  behind  lest  they  should  startle  the  seals. 

At  the  first  glance  around  them,  all  were  equally  struck  with  the 
contrast  between  the  appearance  of  this  district  and  that  of  Cape 
Bathurst. 

Here  the  coast  line  was  broken  and  fretted,  showing  manifest 
traces  of  its  igneous  origin  ;  whereas  the  site  of  the  fort  was  of 
sedimentary  formation  and  aqueous  origin.  Stone,  so  conspicuously 
absent  at  the  cape,  was  here  plentiful ;  the  black  sand  and  porous 
lava  were  strewn  with  huge  boulders  deeply  imbedded  in  the  soil, 
and  there  were  large  quantities  of  the  aluminium,  silica,  and  felspar 
pebbles  peculiar  to  the  crystalline  strata  of  one  class  of  igneous 
rocks.  Glittering  Labrador  stones,  and  many  other  kinds  of  felspar, 
red,  green,  and  blue,  were  sprinkled  on  the  unfrequented  beach, 
with  grey  and  yellow  pumice  stone,  and  lustrous  variegated 
obsidian.  Tall  cliffs,  rising  some  two  hundred  feet  above  the  sea, 
frowned  down  upon  the  bay  3  and  the  Lieutenant  resolved  to 
climb  them,  and  obtain  a  good  view  of  the  eastern  side  of  the 
country.  For  this  there  was  plenty  of  time,  as  but  few  of  the 
creatures  they  had  come  to  seek  were  as  yet  to  be  seen,  and  the 
proper  time  for  the  attack  would  be  when  they  assembled  for  the 
afternoon  siesta  in  which  the  amphibious  mammalia  always  indulge. 
The  Lieutenant,  however,  quickly  discovered  that  the  animals 
frequenting  this  coast  were  not,  as  he  had  been  led  to  suppose,  true 
seals,  although  they  belonged  to  the  Phocidse  family,  but  morses 
or  walruses,  sometimes  called  sea-cows.  They  resemble  the  seals  in 
general  form,  but  the  canine  teeth  of  the  upper  jaw  curved  down- 
wards are  much  more  largely  developed. 

Following  the  coast  line,  which  curved  considerably,  and  to  which 
they  gave  the  name  of  "  Walruses'  Bay,"  the  party  soon  reached  the 
foot  of  the  cliff,  and  Petersen,  Hope,  and  Kellet,  took  up  their 
position  as  sentinels  on  the  little  promontory,  whilst  Mrs  Barnett, 
Hobson,  and  Long,  after  promising  not  to  lose  sight  of  their  comrades, 
and  to  be  on  the  look-out  for  their  signal,  proceeded  to  climb  the 
cliff,  the  summit  of  which  they  reached  in  about  a  quarter  of  an 
hour.  From  this  position  they  were  able  to  survey  the  whole 
surrounding   country;    at  their  feet  lay  the  vast    sea,  stretching 


lOO  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


northwards  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach,  its  expanse  so  entirely 
unbroken  by  islands  or  icebergs  that  the  travellers  came  to  the 
conclusion,  that  this  portion  of  the  Arctic  waters  was  navigable  as 
far  as  Behring  Straits,  and  that  during  the  summer  season  the  North- 
West  Passage  to  Cape  Bathurst  would  be  open  to  the  Company's 
ships.  On  the  west,  the  aspect  of  the  xiountry  explained  the  presence 
of  the  volcanic  d^hria  on  the  shore  \  for  at  a  distance  of  about  ten 
miles  was  a  chain  of  granitic  hills,  of  conical  form,  with  blunted 
crests,  looking  as  if  their  summits  had  been  cut  off,  and  with  jagged 
tremulous  outlines  standing  out  against  the  sky.  They  had 
hitherto  escaped  the  notice  of  our  party,  as  they  were  concealed  by 
the  cliffs  on  the  Cape  Bathurst  side,  and  Jaspar  Hobson  examined 
them  in  silence,  but  with  great  attention,  before  he  proceeded  to 
study  the  eastern  side,  which  consisted  of  a  long  strip  of  perfectly 
level  coast-line  stretching  away  to  Cape  Bathurst.  Any  one  pro- 
vided with  a  good  field-glass  would  have  been  able  to  distinguish 
the  fort  of  Good  Hope,  and  perhaps  even  the  cloud  of  blue  smoke, 
which  was  no  doubt  at  that  very  moment  issuing  from  Mrs  Joliffe's 
kitchen  chimney. 

The  country  behind  them  seemed  to  possess  two  entirely  distinct 
characters  ;  to  the  east  and  south  the  cape  was  bounded  by  a  vast 
plain,  many  hundreds  of  square  miles  in  extent,  while  behind  the 
cliff,  from  "  Walruses'  Bay  "  to  the  mountains  mentioned  above,  the 
country  had  undergone  terrible  convulsions,  showing  clearly  that  it 
owed  its  origin  to  volcanic  eruptions.  The  Lieutenant  was  much 
struck  with  this  marked  contrast,  and  Sergeant  Long  asked  him 
whether  he  thought  the  mountains  on  the  western  horizon  wer& 
volcanoes. 

"  Undoubtedly,"  said  Hobson ;  "  all  these  pumice-stones  and 
pebbles  have  been  discharged  by  them  to  this  distance,  and  if  we 
were  to  go  two  or  three  miles  farther,  we  should  find  ourselvea 
treading  upon  nothing  but  lava  and  ashes." 

"Do  you  suppose,"  inquired  the  Sergeant,  "that  all  these  vol- 
canoes are  still  active  % " 

"  That  I  cannot  tell  you  yet." 

"  But  there  is  no  smoke  issuing  from  any  of  them,"  added  the 
Sergeant. 

"  That  proves  nothing ;  your  pipe  is  not  always  in  your  mouth, 
and  it  is  just  the  same  with  volcanoes,  they  are  not  always- 
smoking." 


A  MOESE  HUNT. — -Page  101. 


FIFTEEN  MILES  FROM  CAFE  BATHURST.  lOI 

'*  I  see,"  said  the  Sergeant ;  "  but  it  is  a  great  puzzle  to  me  how 
volcanoes  can  exist  at  all  on  Polar  continents." 

*'  Well,  there  are  not  many  of  them  1 "  said  Mrs  Bamett. 

**  No,  madam,''  replied  Jaspar,  "  but  they  are  not  so  very  rare 
either;  they  are  to  be  found  in  Jan  Mayen's  Land,  the  Aleutian 
Isles,  Kamchatka,  Russian  America,  and  Iceland,  as  well  as  in  the 
Antarctic  circle,  in  Tierra  del  Fuego,  alid  Australasia.  They  are  the 
chimneys  of  the  great  furnace  in  the  centre  of  the  earth,  where 
Nature  makes  her  chemical  experiments,  and  it  appears  to  me  that 
the  Creator  of  all  things  has  taken  care  to  place  these  safety-valves 
wherever  they  were  most  needed." 

"  I  suppose  so,"  replied  the  Sergeant  \  "  and  yet  it  does  seem  very 
strange  to  find  them  in  this  icy  climate." 

"Why  should  they  not  be  here  as  well  as  anywhere  else, 
Sergeant  %  I  should  say  that  ventilation  holes  are  likely  to  be  more 
numerous  at  the  Poles  than  at  the  Equator  !" 

"  Why  so  % "  asked  the  Sergeant  in  much  surprise. 

"  Because,  if  these  safety-valves  are  forced  open  by  the  pressure 
of  subterranean  gases,  it  will  most  likely  be  at  the  spots  where  the 
surface  of  the  earth  is  thinest,  and  as  the  globe  is  flattened  at  the 

poles,  it  would  appear  natural  that but  Kellet  is  making  signs 

to  us,"  added  the  Lieutenant,  breaking  off  abruptly  ;  "  will  you  join 
us,  Mrs  Bamett  r' 

**  No,  thank  you.  I  will  stay  here  until  we  return  to  the  fort.  I 
don't  care  to  watch  the  walrus  slaughtered  ! " 

"  Very  well,"  replied  Hobson,  "  only  don't  forget  to  join  us  in 
an  hour's  time,  meanwhile  you  can  enjoy  the  view." 

The  beach  was  soon  reached,  and  some  hundred  walrus  had 
collected,  either  waddling  about  on  their  clumsy  webbed  feet,  or 
sleeping  in  family  groups.  Some  few  of  the  larger  males — creatures 
nearly  four  feet  long,  clothed  with  very  short  reddish  fur — ^kept 
guard  over  the  herd. 

Great  caution  was  required  in  approaching  these  formidable- 
looking  animals,  and  the  hunters  took  advantage  of  every  bit  of 
cover  afforded  by  rocks  and  inequalities  of  the  ground,  so  as 
to  get  within  easy  range  of  them  and  cut  off  their  retreat  to  the 
sea. 

On  land  these  creatures  are  clumsy  and  awkward,  moving  in 
jerks  or  with  creeping  motions  like  huge  caterpillars,  but  in  water 
— their  native  element — they  are  nimble  and  even  graceful ;  indeed 


102  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


their  strength  is  so  great,  that  they  have  been  known  to  overturn 
the  whalers  in  pursuit  of  them. 

As  the  hunters  drew  near  the  sentinels  took  alarm,  and  raising 
their  heads  looked  searchingly  around  them ;  but  before  they  could 
warn  their  companions  of  danger,  Hobson  and  Kellet  rushed  upon 
them  from  one  side,  the  Sergeant,  Petersen,  and  Hope  from  the  other, 
and  after  lodging  a  ball  in  each  of  their  bodies,  despatched  them 
with  their  spears,  whilst  the  rest  of  the  herd  plunged  into  the  sea. 

The  victory  was  an  easy  one ;  the  five  victims  were  very  large 
and  their  tusks,  though  slightly  rough,  of  the  best  quality.  They 
were  chiefly  valuable,  however,  on  account  of  the  oil ;  of  which — 
being  in  excellent  condition — they  would  yield  a  large  quantity. 
The  bodies  were  packed  in  the  sledges,  and  proved  no  light  weight 
for  the  dogs. 

It  was  now  one  o'clock,  and  Mrs  Barnett  having  joined  them,  the 
party  set  out  on  foot — the  sledges  being  full — to  return  to  the  fort. 
There  were  but  ten  miles  to  be  traversed,  but  ten  miles  in  a  straight 
line  is  a  weary  journey,  proving  the  truth  of  the  adage  "  It 's  a  long 
lane  that  has  no  turning."  They  beguiled  the  tediousness  of  the 
way  by  chatting  pleasantly,  and  Mrs  Barnett  was  ready  to  join  in 
the  conversation,  or  to  listen  with  interest  to  the  accounts  the 
worthy  soldiers  gave  of  former  adventures ;  but  in  spite  of  the  brave 
struggle  against  ennui  they  advanced  but  slowly,  and  the  poor 
dogs  found  it  hard  work  to  drag  the  heavily-laden  sledges  over  tlie 
rough  ground.  Had  it  been  covered  with  frozen  snow  the  distance 
would  have  been  accomplished  in  a  couple  of  hours. 

The  merciful  Lieutenant  often  ordered  a  halt  to  give  the  teams 
breathing-time,  and  the  Sergeant  remarked  that  it  would  be  much 
more  convenient  for  the  inhabitants  of  the  fort,  if  the  morses  would 
settle  a  little  nearer  Cape  Bathurst. 

"  They  could  not  find  a  suitable  spot,"  replied  the  Lieutenant, 
with  a  melancholy  shake  of  the  head. 

"Why  not?"  inquired  Mrs  Barnett  with  some  surprise. 

"  Because  they  only  congregate  where  the  slope  of  the  beach  is 
gradual  enough  to  allow  of  their  creeping  up  easily  from  the  sea. 
Now  Cape  Bathurst  rises  abruptly,  like  a  perpendicular  wall,  from 
water  three  hundred  fathoms  deep.  It  is  probable  that  ages  ago  a 
portion  of  the  continent  was  rent  away  in  some  violent  volcanic 
convulsion,  and  flung  into  the  Arctic  Ocean.  Hence  the  absence 
of  morses  on  the  beach  of  our  cape." 


CHAPTER  XVL 

TWO  SHOTS, 

^j^HE  first  half  of  September  passed  rapidly  away.  Had 
%4'p^  Fort  Hope  been  situated  at  the  Pole  itself,  that  is  to  say, 
^^^^^  twenty  degrees  farther  north,  the  Polar  night  would 
have  set  in  on  the  21st  of  that  month.  But  under  the  seventieth 
parallel  the  sun  would  be  visible  above  the  horizon  for  another 
month.  Nevertheless,  the  temperature  was  already  decidedly  colder, 
the  thermometer  fell  during  the  night  to  31°  Fahrenheit;  and  thin 
coatings  of  ice  appeared  here  and  there,  to  be  dissolved  again  in  the 
day-time. 

But  the  settlers  were  able  to  await  the  coming  of  winter  without 
alarm;  they  had  a  more  than  sufficient  store  of  provisions,  their 
supply  of  dried  venison  had  largely  increased,  another  score  of 
morses  had  been  killed,  the  tame  rein-deer  were  warmly  and  com- 
fortably housed,  and  a  huge  wooden  shed  behind  the  house  was  filled 
with  fuel.     In  short,  everything  was  prepared  for  the  Polar  night. 

And  now  all  the  wants  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  fort  being  pro- 
vided for,  it  was  time  to  think  of  the  interests  of  the  Company. 
The  Arctic  creatures  had  now  assumed  their  winter  furs,  and  were 
therefore  of  the  greatest  value,  and  Hobson  organised  shooting 
parties  for  the  remainder  of  the  fine  weather,  intending  to  set  traps 
when  the  snow  should  prevent  further  excursions. 

They  would  have  plenty  to  do  to  satisfy  the  requirements  of  the 
Company,  for  so  far  north  it  was  of  no  use  to  depend  on  the 
Indians,  who  are  generally  the  purveyors  of  the  factories. 

The  first  expedition  was  to  the  haunt  of  a  family  of  beavers, 
long  since  noted  by  the  watchful  Lieutenant,  on  a  tributary  of  the 
stream  already  referred  to.  It  is  true,  the  fur  of  the  beaver  is  not 
now  as  valuable  as  when  it  was  used  for  hats,  and  fetched  £16  per 
kilogramme  (rather  more  than  21b.) ;  but  it  still  commands  a  high 
price  as  the  animal  is  becoming  very  scarce,  in  consequence  of  the 
reckless  way  in  which  it  has  been  hunted. 


104  ^^^  ^^^  COUNTRY. 

When  the  party  reached  their  destination,  the  Lieutenant  called 
Mrs  Barnett's  attention  to  the  great  ingenuity  displayed  by  beavera 
in  the  construction  of  their  submarine  city.  There  were  some 
hundred  animals  in  the  little  colony  now  to  be  invaded,  and  they 
lived  together  in  pairs  in  the  "holes"  or  "vaults"  they  had 
hollowed  out  near  the  stream.  They  had  already  commenced  their 
preparations  for  the  winter,  and  were  hard  at  work  constructing 
their  dams  and  laying  up  their  piles  of  wood.  A  dam  of  admirable 
structure  had  already  been  built  across  tlie  stream,  which  was  deei> 
and  rapid  enough  not  to  freeze  far  below  the  surface,  even  in  the- 
severest  weather.  This  dam,  which  was  convex  towards  the  current, 
consisted  of  a  collection  of  upright  stakes  interlaced  with  branches 
and  roots,  the  whole  being  cemented  together  and  rendered  water- 
tight with  the  clayey  mud  of  the  river,  previously  pounded  by  the 
animals'  feet.  The  beavers  use  their  tails — which  are  large  and 
flat,  with  scales  instead  of  hair  at  the  root — for  plastering  over  their 
buildings  and  beating  the  clay  into  shape.  ' 

"  The  object  of  this  dam,"  said  the  Lieutenant  to  Mrs  Barnett, 
"is  to  secure  to  the  beavers  a  sufficient  depth  of  water  at  all  seasons- 
of  the  year,  and  to  enable  the  engineers  of  the  tribe  to  build  the 
round  huts  called  houses  or  lodges,  the  tops  of  which  you  can  just 
see.  They  are  extremely  solid  structures,  and  the  walls  made  of 
stick,  clay,  roots,  Ac,  are  two  feet  thick.  They  can  only  be  entered 
from  below  the  water,  and  their  owners  have  therefore  to  dive 
when  they  go  home — an  admirable  arrangement  for  their  protection. 
Each  lodge  contains  two  stories  ;  in  the  lower  the  winter  stock  of 
branches,  bark,  and  roots,  is  laid  up,  and  the  upper  is  the  residence 
of  the  householder  and  his  family." 

"  There  is,  however,  not  a  beaver  in  sight,"  said  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  is 
this  a  deserted  village  ? " 

"  Oh  no,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "  the  inhabitants  are  now  all 
asleep  and  resting  \  they  only  work  in  the  night,  and  we  mean  to 
.  surprise  them  in  their  holes." 

This  was,  in  fact,  easily  done,  and  in  an  hour's  time  about  a 
hundred  of  the  ill-fated  rodents  had  been  captured,  twenty  of  which 
were  of  very  great  value,  their  fur  being  black,  and  therefore 
especially  esteemed.  That  of  the  others  was  also  long,  glossy,  and 
silky,  but  of  a  reddish  hue  mixed  with  chestnut  brown.  Beneath 
the  long  fur,  the  beavers  have  a  second  coat  of  close  short  hair  of  & 
greyish-white  colour.  ' 


walruses'  bay.  —  Page  106. 


TWO  SNOTS.  105 


The  hunters  returned  to  the  fort  much  delighted  with  the  result 
of  their  expedition.  The  beavers*  skins  were  warehoused  and  labelled 
as  "  parchments  "  or  "  young  beavers,"  according  to  their  value. 

Excursions  of  a  similar  kind  were  carried  on  throughout  the 
month  of  September,  and  during  the  first  half  of  October,  with 
equally  happy  results. 

A  few  badgers  were  taken,  the  skin  being  used  as  an  ornament 
for  the  collars  of  draught  horses,  and  the  hair  for  making  brushes  of 
every  variety.  These  carnivorous  creatures  belong  to  the  bear 
family,  and  the  specimens  obtained  by  Hobson  were  of  the  genus 
peculiar  to  North  America,  sometimes  called  the  Taxel  badger. 

Another  animal  of  the  rodent  family,  nearly  as  industrious  as  the 
beaver,  largly  contributed  to  the  stores  of  the  Company.  This  was 
the  musk-rat  or  musquash.  Its  head  and  body  are  about  a  foot 
long,  and  its  tail  ten  inches.  Its  fur  is  in  considerable  demand. 
These  creatures,  like  the  rest  of  their  family,  multiply  with  extreme 
rapidity,  and  a  great  number  were  easily  unearthed. 

In  the  pursuit  of  lynxes  and  wolverines  or  gluttons,  fire-arms  had 
to  be  used.  The  lynx  has  all  the  suppleness  and  agility  of  the  feline 
tribe  to  which  it  belongs,  and  is  formidable  even  to  the  rein-deer ; 
Marbre  and  Sabine  were,  however,  well  up  to  their  work,  and 
succeeded  in  killing  more  than  sixty  of  them.  A  few  wolverines  or 
gluttons  were  also  despatched,  their  fur  is  reddish-brown,  and  that  of 
the  lynx,  light-red  with  black  spots ;  both  are  of  considerable  value. 

Very  few  ermines  or  stoats  were  seen,  and  Jaspar  Hobson 
ordered  his  men  to  spare  any  which  happened  to  cross  their  path 
until  the  winter,  when  they  should  have  assumed  their  beautiful 
snow-white  coats  with  the  one  black  spot  at  the  tip  of  the  tail.  At 
present  the  upper  fur  was  reddish-brown  and  the  under  yellowish- 
white,  so  that,  as  Sabine  expressed  it,  it  was  desirable  to  let  them 
"  ripen,"  or,  in  other  words, — to  wait  for  the  cold  to  bleach  them. 

Their  cousins,  the  polecats,  however,  which  emit  so  disagreeable 
an  odour,  fell  victims  in  great  numbers  to  the  hunters,  who  either 
tracked  them  to  their  homes  in  hollow  trees,  or  shut  them  as  they 
glided  through  the  branches. 

Martens,  properly  so-called,  were  hunted  with  great  zeal.  Their 
far  is  in  considerable  demand,  although  not  so  valuable  as  that  of 
the  sable,  which  becomes  a  dark  lustrous  brown  in  the  winter.  The 
latter  did  not,  however,  come  in  the  way  of  our  hunters,  as  it  only 
frequents  the  north  of  Europe  and  Asia  as  far  as  Kamchatka,  and 


I06  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


is  chiefly  hunted  by  the  inhabitants  of  Siberia.  They  had  to  be  con- 
tent with  the  polecats  and  pine- martens,  called  "  Canada-martens," 
which  frequent  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

All  the  weasels  and  martens  are  very  difficult  to  catch ;  they 
wriggle  their  long  supple  bodies  through  the  smallest  apertures  with 
great  ease,  and  thus  elude  their  pursuers.  In  the  winter,  however, 
they  are  easily  taken  in  traps,  and  Marbre  and  Sabine  looked 
forward  to  make  up  for  lost  time  then,  when,  said  they,  "  there  shall 
be  plenty  of  their  furs  in  the  Company's  stores." 

We  have  now  only  to  mention  the  Arctic  or  blue  and  silver  foxes, 
to  complete  the  list  of  animals  which  swelled  the  profits  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company. 

The  furs  of  these  foxes  are  esteemed  in  the  Russian  and 
English  markets  above  all  others,  and  that  of  the  blue  fox  is  the 
most  valuable  of  all.  This  pretty  creature  has  a  black  muzzle,  and 
the  fur  is  not  as  one  would  suppose  blue,  but  whitish-brown  ;  its 
great  price — six  times  that  of  any  other  kind — arises  from  its 
superior  softness,  thickness,  and  length.  A  cloak  belonging  to  the 
Emperor  of  Russia,  composed  entirely  of  fur  from  the  neck  of  the 
blue  fox  (the  fur  from  the  neck  is  considered  better  than  that  from 
any  other  part),  was  shown  at  the  London  Exhibition  of  1851,  and 
valued  at  X3400  sterling. 

Several  of  these  foxes  were  sighted  at  Cape  Bathurst,  but  all 
escaped  the  hunters  ;  whilst  only  about  a  dozen  silver  foxes  fell  into 
their  hands.  The  fur  of  the  latter — of  a  lustrous  black  dotted  with 
white — is  much  sought  after  in  England  and  Russia,  although  it 
does  not  command  so  high  a  price  as  that  of  the  foxes  mentioned 
above. 

One  of  the  silver  foxes  captured  was  a  splendid  creature,  with  a 
coal-black  fur  tipped  with  white  at  the  extreme  end  of  the  tail,  and 
with  a  dash  of  the  same  on  the  forehead.  The  circumstances 
attending  its  death  deserve  relation  in  detail,  as  they  proved  that 
Hobson  was  right  in  the  precautions  he  had  taken. 

On  the  morning  of  the  24th  September,  two  sledges  conveyed 
Mrs  Barnett,  the  Lieutenant,  Sergeant  Long,  Marbre,  and  Sabine, 
to  Walruses'  Bay.  Some  traces  of  foxes  had  been  noticed  the  evening 
before,  amongst  some  rocks  clothed  with  scanty  herbage,  and  the 
direction  taken  by  the  animals  was  very  clearly  indicated.  The 
hunters  followed  up  the  trail  of  a  large  animal,  and  were  rewarded 
by  bringing  down  a  very  fine  silver  fox. 


TWO  SHOTS.  —  Page  107. 


TWO  SHOTS.  107 


Several  other  animals  of  the  same  species  were  sighted,  and  the 
hunters  divided  into  two  parties — Marbre  and  Sabine  going  after 
one  foe,  and  Mrs  Barnett,  Hobson,  and  the  Sergeant,  trying  to  cut 
off  the  retreat  of  another  fine  animal  hiding  behind  some  rocks. 

Great  caution  and  some  artifice  was  necessary  to  deal  with  this 
crafty  animal,  which  took  care  not  to  expose  itself  to  a  shot.  The 
pursuit  lasted  for  half-an-hour  without  success;  but  at  last  the  poor 
creature,  with  the  sea  on  one  side  and  its  three  enemies  on  the  other, 
had  recourse  in  its  desperation  to  a  flying  leap,  thinking  thus  to 
escape  with  its  life.  But  Hobson  was  too  quick  for  it ;  and  as  it 
bounded  by  like  a  flash  of  lightning,  it  was  struck  by  a  shot,  and  to 
every  one's  surprise,  the  report  of  the  Lieutenant's  gun  was  succeeded 
by  that  of  another,  and  a  second  ball  entered  the  body  of  the  fox, 
which  fell  to  the  ground  mortally  wounded. 

"  Hurrah  !  hurrah  ! "  cried  Hobson,  "  it  is  mine  ! " 

"  And  mine ! "  said  another  voice,  and  a  stranger  stept  forward 
and  placed  his  foot  upon  the  fox  just  as  the  Lieutenant  was  about  to 
raise  it. 

Hobson  drew  back  in  astonishment  He  thought  the  second  ball 
had  been  fired  by  the  Sergeant,  and  found  himself  face  to  face  with 
a  stranger  whose  gun  was  still  smoking. 

The  rivals  gazed  at  each  other  in  silence. 

The  rest  of  the  party  now  approached,  and  the  stranger  was 
quickly  joined  by  twelve  comrades,  four  of  whom  were  like  himself 
**  Canadian  travellers,"  and  eight  Chippeway  Indians. 

The  leader  wasa  tall  man — a  fine  specimen  of  his  class — those  Cana- 
dian trappers  described  in  the  romances  of  Washington  Irving,  whose 
competition  Hobson  had  dreaded  with  such  good  reason.  He  wore 
the  traditional  costume  ascribed  to  his  fellow-hunters  by  the  great 
American  writer;  a  blanket  loosely  arranged  about  his  person,  a 
striped  cotton  shirt,  wide  cloth  trousers,  leather  gaiters,  deerskin 
mocassins,  and  a  sash  of  checked  woollen  stufl'  round  the  waist, 
from  which  were  suspended  his  knife,  tobacco-pouch,  pipe,  and  a 
few  useful  tools. 

Hobson  was  right.  The  man  before  him  was  a  Frenchman,  or  at 
least  a  descendant  of  the  French  Canadians,  perhaps  an  agent  of  the 
American  Company  come  to  act  as  a  spy  on  the  settlers  in  the  fort. 
The  other  four  Canadians  wore  a  costume  resembling  that  of  their 
leader,  but  of  coarser  materials. 

The  Frenchman  bowed  politely  to  Mrs  Barnett,  and  the  Lieutenant 


I08  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


was  the  first  to  break  the  silence,  during  which  he  had  not  removed 
his  eyes  from  his  rival's  face. 

"  This  fox  is  mine,  sir,"  he  said  quietly. 

"  It  is  if  you  killed  it !  "  replied  the  other  in  good  English,  but 
with  a  slightly  foreign  accent. 

"  Excuse  me,  sir,"  replied  Hobson  rather  sharply,  "  it  is  mine  in 
any  case." 

The  stranger  smiled  scornfully  at  this  lofty  reply,  so  exactly  what 
he  expected  from  an  agent  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company,  which 
claims  supremacy  over  all  the  northern  districts,  from  the  Atlantic 
to  the  Pacific. 

"  Do  you  mean  to  say,"  he  said  at  last,  gracefully  toying  with  his 
gun,  **that  you  consider  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  mistress  of  the 
whole  of  North  America  % " 

"Of  course  I  do,"  said  Hobson;  "  and  if,  as  I  imagine,  you  belong 
to  an  American  company  " 

"  To  the  St  Louis  Fur  Company,"  replied  the  stranger  with  a 
bow. 

"  I  think,"  added  the  Lieutenant,  "  that  you  will  find  it  difficult 
to  show  the  grants  entitling  you  to  any  privileges  here." 

"  Grants  !  privileges  !  "  cried  the  Canadian  scornfully,  *'  old  world 
terms  which  are  out  of  place  in  America  ! " 

"  You  are  not  now  on  American  but  on  English  ground,"  replied 
the  Lieutenant  proudly. 

"  This  is  no  time  for  such  a  discussion,"  said  the  hunter  rather 
warmly.  "  We  all  know  the  old  claims  made  by  the  English  in 
general,  and  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  in  particular,  to  these 
bunting  grounds ;  but  I  expect  coming  events  will  soon  alter  this 
state  of  things,  and  America  will  be  America  from  the  Straits  of 
Jilagellan  to  the  North  Pole  !  " 

'•  I  do  not  agree  with  you,"  replied  Hobson  dryly. 

"  Well,  sir,  however  that  may  be,"  said  the  Canadian,  *'  let  us 
suffer  this  international  question  to  remain  in  abeyance  for  the 
present.  Whatever  rights  the  Company  may  arrogate  to  itself,  it  is 
very  clear  that  in  the  extreme  north  of  the  continent,  and  especially 
on  the  coast,  the  territory  belongs  to  whoever  occupies  it.  You 
have  founded  a  factory  on  Cape  Bathurst,  therefore  we  will  respect 
your  domain,  and  you  on  your  side  will  avoid  ours,  when  the  St 
Louis  fur- traders  have  established  their  projected  fort  at  another 
point  on  the  northern  shore  of  Aniericji." 


RIVAL  CLAIMANTS.  —  Page  108. 


TWO  SHOTS.  109 


The  Lieutenant  frowned  at  this  speech,  for  he  well  knew  what 
complications  would  arise  in  the  future  when  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  would  be  compelled  to  struggle  for  supremacy  with  power- 
ful rivals,  and  that  quarrelling  and  even  bloodshed  would  ensue ;  he 
could  not,  however,  but  acknowledge  that  this  was  not  the  time  to 
begin  the  discussion,  and  he  was  not  sorry  when  the  hunter,  whose 
manners,  to  tell  the  truth,  were  very  polite,  placed  the  dispute  on 
another  footing. 

"  As  for  this  present  matter,**  said  the  Canadian,  "  it  is  of  minor 
importance,  and  we  must  settle  it  according  to  the  rules  of  the  chase. 
Our  guns  are  of  different  calibre,  and  our  balls  can  be  easily  dis- 
tinguished ;  let  the  fox  belong  to  whichever  of  us  really  killed 
it." 

The  proposition  was  a  fair  one,  and  the  body  of  the  victim  was 
examined  accordingly.  One  ball  had  entered  at  the  side,  the  other 
at  the  heart ;  and  the  latter  was  from  the  gun  of  the  Canadian. 

"  The  fox  is  your  property,  sir,"  said  Jaspar  Hobson,  vainly 
endeavouring  to  conceal  his  chagrin  at  seeing  this  valuable  spoil 
fall  into  the  enemy's  hands. 

The  Canadian  took  it,  but  instead  of  throwing  it  over  his  shoulder 
and  carrying  it  off,  he  turned  to  Mrs  Barnett,  and  said — 

"  Ladies  are  fond  of  beautiful  furs,  and  although,  perhaps,  if  they 
knew  better  what  dangers  and  difficulties  have  to  be  surmounted  in 
order  to  obtain  them,  they  might  not  care  so  much  about  them,  they 
are  not  likely  to  refuse  to  wear  them  on  that  account,  and  I  hope, 
madam,  you  will  favour  me  by  accepting  this  one  in  remembrance 
of  our  meeting." 

Mrs  Barnett  hesitated  for  a  moment,  but  the  gift  was  offered 
with  so  much  courtesy  and  kindliness  of  manner,  that  it  would 
have  seemed  churlish  to  refuse,  and  she  therefore  accepted  it  with 
many  thanks. 

This  little  ceremony  over,  the  stranger  again  bowed  politely,  and, 
followed  by  his  comrades,  quickly  disappeared  behind  the  rocks, 
whilst  the  Lieutenant  and  his  party  returned  to  Fort  Good  Hope. 
Hobson  was  very  silent  and  thoughtful  all  the  way ;  for  he  could 
not  but  feel  that  the  existence  of  a  rival  company  would  greatly 
compromise  the  success  of  his  undertaking,  and  lead  to  many 
future  difficulties. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

THE   APPROACH  OF    WINTER. 

^T  was  the  21st  of  September.  The  sun  was  then  passing 
through  the  autumnal  equinox,  that  is  to  say,  the  day  and 
night  were  of  equal  length  all  over  the  world.  These 
successive  alternations  of  light  and  darkness  were  hailed  with 
delight  by  the  inhabitants  of  the  fort.  It  is  easier  to  sleep  in  the 
absence  of  the  sun,  and  darkness  refreshes  and  strengthens  the 
eyes,  weary  with  the  unchanging  brightness  of  several  months  of 
daylight. 

We  know  that  during  the  equinox  the  tides  are  generally  at 
their  greatest  height ;  we  have  high  water  or  flood,  for  the  sun  and 
moon  being  in  conjunction,  their  double  influence  is  brought  to  bear 
upon  the  waters.  It  was,  therefore,  necessary  to  note  carefully  the 
approaching  tide  at  Cape  Bathurst.  Jaspar  Hobson  had  made  bench 
marks  some  days  before,  so  as  to  estimate  exactly  the  amount  of 
vertical  displacement  of  the  waters  between  high  and  low  tide  ;  he 
found,  however,  that  in  spite  of  all  the  reports  of  previous  observers, 
the  combined  solar  and  lunar  influence  was  hardly  felt  in  this  part 
of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  There  was  scarcely  any  tide  at  all,  and  the 
statements  of  navigators  on  the  subject  were  contradicted. 

"  There  is  certainly  something  unnatural  here  1 "  said  Lieutenant 
Hobson  to  himself. 

He  did  not  in  fact  know  what  to  think,  but  other  cares  soon 
occupied  his  mind,  and  he  did  not  long  endeavour  to  get  to  the 
rights  of  this  singular  peculiarity. 

On  the  29th  September  the  state  of  the  atmosphere  changed 
considerably.  The  thermometer  fell  to  41o  Fahrenheit,  and  the  sky 
became  covered  with  clouds  which  were  soon  converted  into  heavy 
rain.     The  bad  season  was  approaching. 

Before  the  ground  should  be  covered  with  snow,  Mrs  Joliff'e  waa 
busy  sowing  the  seeds  of  Cochlearia  (scurvy  grass)  and  sorrel,  in 
the  hope  that  as  they  were  very  hardy,  and  would  be  well  protected 


THE  APPROACH  OF  WINTER.  Ill 

from  the  rigour  of  the  winter  by  the  snow  itself,  they  would  come  up 
in  the  spring.  Her  garden,  consisting  of  several  acres  hidden  behind 
the  cliff  of  the  cape,  had  been  prepared  beforehand,  and  it  was  sown, 
during  the  last  days  of  September. 

Hobson  made  his  companions  assume  their  winter  garments 
before  the  great  cold  set  in,  and  all  were  soon  suitably  clothed  in 
the  linen  under  vests,  deerskin  cloaks,  sealskin  pantaloons,  fur 
bonnets,  and  waterproof  boots  with  which  they  were  provided. 
We  may  also  say  that  the  rooms  were  suitably  dressed ;  the  wooden 
walls  were  hung  with  skins,  in  order  to  prevent  the  formation  upon 
them  of  coats  of  ice  in  sudden  falls  of  temperature.  About  this 
time,  Rae  set  up  his  condensers  for  collecting  the  vapour  suspended 
in  the  air,  which  were  to  be  emptied  twice  a  week.  The  heat  of 
the  stove  was  regulated  according  to  the  variations  of  the  external 
temperature,  so  as  to  keep  the  thermometer  of  the  rooms  at  50** 
Fahrenheit.  The  house  would  soon  be  covered  with  thick  snow, 
which  would  prevent  any  waste  of  the  internal  warmth,  and  by  this 
combination  of  natural  and  artificial  protections  they  hoped  to  be 
able  successfully  to  contend  with  their  two  most  formidable  enemies, 
cold  and  damp. 

On  the  2nd  October  the  thermometer  fell  still  lower,  and  the 
first  snow  storm  came  on  \  there  was  but  little  wind,  and  there 
were  therefore  none  of  tliose  violent  whirlpools  of  snow  called  drifts, 
but  a  vast  white  carpet  of  uniform  thickness  soon  clothed  the  cape, 
the  enceinte  of  fort,  and  the  coast.  The  waters  of  the  lake  and  sea, 
not  yet  petrified  by  the  icy  hand  of  winter,  were  of  a  dull,  gloomy, 
greyish  hue,  and  on  the  northern  horizon  the  first  icebergs  stood  out 
against  the  misty  sky.  The  blockade  had  not  yet  commenced,  but 
nature  was  collecting  her  materials,  soon  to  be  cemented  by  the  cold 
into  an  impenetrable  barrier. 

The  "  young  ice  "  was  rapidly  forming  on  the  liquid  surfaces  of 
sea  and  lake.  The  lagoon  was  the  first  to  freeze  over ;  large 
whitish-grey  patches  appeared  here  and  there,  signs  of  a  hard  frost 
setting  in,  favoured  by  the  calmness  of  the  atmosphere,  and  after 
a  night  during  which  the  thermometer  had  remained  at  15°  Fahren- 
heit, the  surface  of  the  lake  was  smooth  and  firm  enough  to  satisfy 
the  most  fastidious  skaters  of  the  Serpentine.  On  the  verge  of  the 
horizon,  the  sky  assumed  that  peculiar  appearance  which  whalers 
call  ice-blink,  and  which  is  the  result  of  the  glare  of  light  reflected 
obliquely  from  the  surface  of  the  ice  against  the  opposite  atmos- 


1 1 2  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


phere.  Vast  tracts  of  the  ocean  became  gradually  solidified,  the  ice- 
fields, formed  by  the  accumulation  of  icicles,  became  welded  to  the 
coast,  presenting  a  surface  broken  and  distorted  by  the  action  of  the 
waves,  and  contrasting  strongly  with  the  smooth  mirror  of  the  lake. 
Here  and  there  floated  these  long  pieces,  scarcely  cemented  together 
at  the  edges,  known  as  "  drift  ice,"  and  the  "  hummocks,"  or  pro- 
tuberances caused  by  the  squeezing  of  one  piece  against  another, 
were  also  of  frequent  occurrence. 

In  a  few  days  the  aspect  of  Cape  Bathurst  and  the  surrounding 
districts  was  completely  changed.  Mrs  Barnett's  delight  and 
enthusiasm  knew  no  bounds ;  everything  was  new  to  her,  and  she 
would  have  thought  no  fatigue  or  suffering  too  great  to  be  endured 
for  the  sake  of  witnessing  such  a  spectacle.  She  could  imagine 
nothing  more  sublime  than  this  invasion  of  winter  with  all  its 
mighty  forces,  this  conquest  of  the  northern  regions  by  the  cold. 
All  trace  of  the  distinctive  features  of  the  country  had  disappeared  ; 
the  land  was  metamorphosed,  a  new  country  was  springing  into  being 
before  her  admiring  eyes,  a  country  gifted  with  a  grand  and  touch- 
ing beauty.  Details  were  lost,  only  the  large  outlines  were  given, 
scarcely  marked  out  against  the  misty  sky.  One  transformation 
scene  followed  another  with  magic  rapidity.  The  ocean,  which  but 
lately  lifted  up  its  mighty  waves,  was  hushed  and  still ;  the  verdant 
soil  of  various  hues  was  replaced  by  a  carpet  of  dazzling  whiteness ; 
the  woods  of  trees  of  different  kinds  were  converted  into  groups  of 
gaunt  skeletons  draped  in  hoar-frost ;  the  radiant  orb  of  day  had 
become  a  pale  disc,  languidly  running  its  allotted  course  in  the 
thick  fog,  and  visible  but  for  a  few  hours  a  day,  whilst  the  sea- 
horizon,  no  longer  clearly  cut  against  the  sky,  was  hidden  by  an  end- 
less chain  of  ice-bergs,  broken  into  countless  rugged  forms,  and 
building  up  that  impenetrable  ice- wall,  which  Nature  has  set  up 
between  the  Pole  and  the  bold  explorers  who  endeavour  to  reach 
it. 

We  can  well  understand  to  how  many  discussions  and  conversa- 
tions the  altered  appearance  of  the  country  gave  rise.  Thomas 
Black  was  the  only  one  who  remained  indifferent  to  the  sublime 
beauty  of  the  scene.  But  what  could  one  expect  of  an  astronomer 
so  wrapped  up  in  his  one  idea,  that  he  might  be  said  to  be  present 
in  the  little  colony  in  the  body,  but  absent  in  spirit  %  He  lived  in 
the  contemplation  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  passing  from  the  examina- 
tion of  one  constellation  to  that  of  another,  roving  in  imagination 


A  new  country  was  springing  into  being"  ^c.  —  Page  112. 


THE  APPROACH  OF  WINTER.  II3 


through  the  vast  realms  of  space,  peopled  by  countless  radiant  orbs, 
and  fuming  with  rage  when  fogs  or  clouds  hid  the  objects  of  his 
devotion  from  his  sight.  Hobson  consoled  him  by  promising  him 
fine  cold  nights  admirably  suited  to  astronomical  observations,  when 
he  could  watch  the  beautiful  Aurora  Borealis,  the  lunar  halos,  and 
other  phenomena  of  Polar  countries  worthy  even  of  his  admira- 
tion. 

The  cold  was  not  at  this  time  too  intense  ;  there  was  no  wind,  and 
it  is  the  wind  which  makes  the  cold  so  sharp  and  biting.  Hunting 
was  vigorously  carried  on  for  some  days.  The  magazines  became 
stocked  with  new  furs,  and  fresh  stores  of  provisions  were  laid  up. 
Partridges  and  ptarmigans  on  their  way  to  the  south  passed  over 
the  fort  in  great  numbers,  and  supplied  fresh  and  wholesome  meat. 
Polar  or  Arctic  hares  were  plentiful,  and  had  already  assumed  their 
white  winter  robes.  About  a  hundred  of  these  rodents  formed  a 
valuable  addition  to  the  reserves  of  the  colony. 

There  were  also  large  flocks  of  the  whistling  swan  or  hooper,  one  of 
the  finest  species  of  North  America.  The  hunters  killed  several  couples 
of  them,  handsome  birds,  four  or  five  feet  in  entire  length,  with  white 
plumage,  touched  with  copper  colour  on  the  head  and  upper  part  of 
neck.  They  were  on  their  way  to  a  more  hospitable  zone,  where 
they  could  find  the  aquatic  plants  and  insects  they  required  for 
food,  and  they  sped  through  the  air  at  a  rapid  pace,  for  it  is  as 
much  their  native  element  as  water.  Trumpeter  swans,  with  a  cry 
like  the  shrill  tone  of  a  clarion,  which  are  about  the  same  size  as  the 
hoopers,  but  have  black  feet  and  beaks,  also  passed  in  great  numbers, 
but  neither  Marbre  nor  Sabine  were  fortunate  enough  to  bring  down 
any  of  them.  However,  they  shouted  out  "att  revoir^^  in  significant 
tones,  for  they  knew  that  they  would  return  with  the  first  breezes  of 
spring,  and  that  they  could  then  be  easily  caught.  Their  skin, 
plumage,  and  down,  are  all  of  great  value,  and  they  are  therefore 
eagerly  hunted.  In  some  favourable  years  tens  of  thousands  of 
them  have  been  exported,  fetching  half  a  guinea  a  piece. 

During  these  excursions,  which  only  lasted  for  a  few  hours,  and 
were  often  interrupted  by  bad  weather,  packs  of  wolves  were  often 
met  with.  There  was  no  need  to  go  far  to  find  them,  for,  rendered 
bold  by  hunger,  they  already  ventured  close  to  the  factory.  Their 
scent  is  very  keen,  and  they  were  attracted  by  the  smell  from  the 
kitchen.  During  the  night  they  could  be  heard  howling  in  a  threat- 
ening manner.     Although  not  dangerous  individually,  these  carnivo- 

H 


1 14  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


rous  beasts  are  formidable  in  packs,  and  the  hunters  therefore  took 
care  to  be  well  armed  when  they  went  beyond  the  enceinte  of  the  fort. 

The  bears  were  still  more  aggressive.  Not  a  day  passed  without 
several  of  these  animals  being  seen.  At  night  they  would  come  close 
up  to  the  enclosure,  and  some  were  even  wounded  with  shot,  but  got 
off,  staining  the  snow  with  their  blood,  so  that  up  to  October  10th 
not  one  had  left  its  warm  and  valuable  fur  in  the  hands  of  the 
hunters.  Hobson  would  not  have  them  molested,  rightly  judging 
that  with  such  formidable  creatures  it  was  best  to  remain  on  the 
defensive,  and  it  was  not  improbable  that,  urged  on  by  hunger,  they 
might  attack  Fort  Hope  before  very  long.  Then  the  little  colony 
could  defend  itself,  and  provision  its  stores  at  the  same  time. 

For  a  few  days  the  weather  continued  dry  and  cold,  the  surface 
of  the  snow  was  firm  and  suitable  for  walking,  so  that  a  few 
excursions  were  made  without  difficulty  along  the  coast  on  the 
south  of  the  fort.  The  Lieutenant  was  anxious  to  ascertain  if  the 
agents  of  the  St  Louis  Fur  Company  had  left  the  country.  No 
traces  were,  however,  found  of  their  return  march,  and  it  was 
therefore  concluded  that  they  had  gone  down  to  some  southern  fort 
to  pass  the  winter  by  another  route. 

The  few  fine  days  were  soon  over,  and  in  the  first  week  of 
November  the  wind  veered  round  to  the  south,  making  the  tem- 
perature warmer,  it  is  true,  but  also  bringing  heavy  snow-storms. 
The  ground  was  soon  covered  with  a  soft  cushion  several  feet  thick, 
which  had  to  be  cleared  away  round  the  house  every  day,  whilst  a 
lane  was  made  through  it  to  the  postern,  the  shed,  and  the  stable  of 
the  dogs  and  rein-deer.  Excursions  became  more  and  more  rare, 
and  it  was  impossible  to  walk  without  snow-shoes. 

When  the  snow  has  become  hardened  by  frost,  it  easily  sustains 
the  weight  of  a  man ;  but  when  it  is  soft  and  yielding,  and  the 
unfortunate  pedestrian  sinks  into  it  up  to  his  knees,  the  snow-shoes 
used  by  Indians  are  invaluable. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  and  his  companions  were  quite  accustomed  to 
walk  in  them,  and  could  glide  about  over  the  snow  as  rapidly  as 
skaters  on  ice ;  Mrs  Barnett  had  early  practised  wearing  them,  and 
was  quite  as  expert  in  their  use  as  the  rest  of  the  party.  The 
frozen  lake  as  well  as  the  coast  was  scoured  by  these  indefatigable 
explorers,  who  were  even  able  to  advance  several  miles  from 
the  shore  on  the  solid  surface  of  the  ocean  now  covered  with  ice 
several  feet  thick.     It  was,  however,  very  tiring  work,  for  the  ice 


THE  APPROACH  OF   WINTER.  II5 

fields  were  rugged  and  uneven,  strewn  with  piled-up  ridges  of  ice 
and  hummocks  which  had  to  be  turned.  Further  out  a  chain  of 
icebergs,  some  five  hundred  feet  high,  barred  their  progress.  These 
mighty  icebergs,  broken  into  fantastic  and  picturesque  forms,  were 
a  truly  magnificent  spectacle.  Here  they  looked  like  the  whitened 
ruins  of  a  town  with  curtains  battered  in,  and  monuments  and 
columns  overthrown  ;  there  like  some  volcanic  land  torn  and 
convulsed  by  earthquakes  and  eruptions  ;  a  confusion  of  glaciers 
and  glittering  ice  peaks  with  snowy  ramparts  and  buttresses, 
valleys,  and  crevasses,  mountains  and  hillocks,  tossed  and  distorted 
like  the  famous  Alps  of  Switzerland.  A  few  scattered  birds, 
petrels,  guillemots,  and  puflSns,  lingering  behind  their  fellows,  still 
enlivened  the  vast  solitude  with  their  piercing  cries  ;  huge  white 
bears  roamed  about  amongst  the  hummocks,  their  dazzling  coats 
scarcely  distinguishable  from  the  shining  ice — truly  there  was 
enough  to  interest  and  excite  our  adventurous  lady  traveller,  and 
even  Madge,  the  faithful  Madge,  shared  the  enthusiasm  of  her 
mistress.  How  far,  how  very  far,  were  both  from  the  tropic  zones  of 
India  or  Australia ! 

The  frozen  ocean  was  firm  enough  to  have  allowed  of  the  passage 
of  a  park  of  artillery,  or  the  erection  of  a  monument,  and  many 
were  the  excursions  on  its  surface  until  the  sudden  lowering  of  the 
temperature  rendered  all  exertion  so  exhausting  that  they  had  to  be 
discontinued.  The  pedestrians  were  out  of  breath  after  taking  a 
few  steps,  and  the  dazzling  whiteness  of  the  glittering  snow  could 
not  be  endured  by  the  naked  eye ;  indeed,  the  reverberation  or 
flickering  glare  of  the  undulatory  reflection  of  the  light  from  the 
surface  of  the  snow,  has  been  known  to  cause  several  cases  of  blind- 
ness amongst  the  Esquimaux. 

A  singular  phenomenon  due  to  the  refraction  of  rays  of  light  was 
now  observed :  Distances,  depths,  and  heights  lost  their  true  pro- 
portions, five  or  six  yards  of  ice  looked  like  two,  and  many  were 
the  falls  and  ludicrous  results  of  this  optical  illusion. 

On  October  14th  the  thermometer  marked  3°  Fahrenheit  below 
zero,  a  severe  temperature  to  endure,  especially  when  the  north 
wind  blows  strongly.  The  air  seemed  to  be  made  of  needles, 
and  those  who  ventured  out  of  the  house  were  in  great  danger 
of  being  frost-bitten,  when  death  or  mortification  would  ensue 
if  the  suspended  circulation  of  the  blood  were  not  restored  by 
immediate  friction  with  snow.     Garry,  Belcher,  Hope,  and  other 


Il6  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


members  of  the  little  community  were  attacked  by  frost-bite,  but 
tbe  parts  affected  being  rubbed  in  time  they  escaped  without  serious 
injury. 

It  will  readily  be  understood  that  all  manual  labour  had  now 
become  impossible.  The  days  were  extremely  short,  the  sun  was 
only  above  the  horizon  for  a  few  hours  and  the  actual  winter,  imply- 
ing entire  confinement  within  doors;  was  about  to  commence.  The 
last  Arctic  birds  forsook  the  gloomy  shores  of  the  Polar  Sea,  only  a 
few  pairs  of  those  speckled  quails  remained  which  the  Indians 
appropriately  call  "  winter  birds,"  because  they  wait  in  the  Arctic 
regions  until  the  commencement  of  the  Polar  night,  but  they  too 
were  soon  to  take  their  departure. 

Lieutenant  Hobson,  therefore,  urged  on  the  setting  of  the  traps 
and  snares  which  were  to  remain  in  different  parts  of  Cape  Bathurst 
throughout  the  winter. 

These  traps  consisted  merely  of  rough  joists  supported  on  a  square, 
formed  of  three  pieces  of  wood  so  balanced  as  to  fall  on  the  least 
touch— in  fact,  the  same  sort  of  trap  as  that  used  for  snaring  birds 
in  fields  on  a  large  scale.  The  end  of  the  horizontal  piece  of  wood 
was  baited  with  venison,  and  every  animal  of  a  moderate  height, 
a  fox  or  a  marten,  for  instance,  which  touched  it  with  its  paw,  could 
not  fail  to  be  crushed.  Such  were  the  traps  set  in  the  winter  over 
a  space  of  several  miles  by  the  famous  hunters  whose  adventurous 
life  has  been  so  poetically  described  by  Cooper.  Some  thirty  of 
these  snares  were  set  round  Fort  Hope,  and  were  to  be  visited  at 
pretty  frequent  intervals. 

On  the  12th  November  a  new  member  was  bom  to  the  little 
colony.  Mrs  Mac-Nab  was  safely  confined  of  a  fine  healthy  boy,  of 
whom  the  head  carpenter  was  extremely  proud.  Mrs  Barnett  stood 
god-mother  to  the  child,  which  received  the  name  of  Michael  Hope. 
The  ceremony  of  baptism  was  performed  with  considerable 
solemnity,  and  a  kind  of  fete  was  held  in  honour  of  the  little 
creature  which  had  just  come  into  the  world  beyond  the  70th 
degree  N.  Lat. 

A  few  days  afterwards,  on  November  20th,  the  sun  sunk  below 
the  horizon  not  to  appear  again  for  two  months.  The  Polar  night 
had  commenced  I 


"  A  kind  of  fete  was  held"  ^c.  -^  Page  116. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE   POLAR   NIGHT, 

'HE  long  night  was  ushered  in  by  a  violent  storm.     The  cold 

r^  was  perhaps  a  little  less  severe,  but  the  air  was  very  damp, 
and,  in  spite  of  every  precaution,  the  humidity  penetrated 
into  the  house,  and  the  condensers,  which  were  emptied  every  morn- 
ing, contained  several  pounds  of  ice. 

Outside  drifts  whirled  past  like  waterspouts — the  snow  seemed 
no  longer  to  fall  horizontally  but  vertically.  The  Lieutenant  was 
obliged  to  insist  upon  the  door  being  kept  shut,  for  had  it  been 
opened  the  passages  would  immediately  have  become  blocked  up. 
The  explorers  were  literally  prisoners. 

The  window  shutters  were  hermetically  closed,  and  the  lamps 
were  kept  burning  through  the  long  hours  of  the  sleepless  night. 

But  although  darkness  reigned  without,  the  noise  of  the  tempest 
replaced  the  silence  usually  so  complete  in  these  high  latitudes.  The 
roaring  of  the  wind  between  the  house  and  the  cliff  never  ceased 
for  a  moment,  the  house  trembled  to  its  foundations,  and  had  it 
not  been  for  the  solidity  of  its  construction,  must  have  succumbed 
to  the  violence  of  the  hurricane.  Fortunately  the  accumulation  of 
snow  round  the  walls  broke  the  force  of  the  squall,  and  Mac-Nab's 
only  fear  was  for  the  chimneys,  which  were  liable  to  be  blown  over. 
However,  they  remained  firm,  although  they  had  constantly  to 
be  freed  from  the  snow  which  blocked  up  the  openings. 

In  the  midst  of  the  whistling  of  the  wind,  loud  reports  were  heard, 
of  which  Mrs  Barnett  could  not  conjecture  the  cause.  It  was  the 
falling  of  icebergs  in  the  offing.  The  echoes  caught  up  the  sounds, 
which  were  rolled  along  like  the  reverberations  of  thunder.  The 
ground  shook  as  the  ice-fields  split  open,  crushed  by  the  falling  of 
these  mighty  mountains,  and  none  but  those  thoroughly  inured  to 
the  horrors  of  these  wild  rugged  climates  could  witness  these  strange 
phenomena  without  a  shudder.  Lieutenant  Hobson  and  his  com- 
panions were  accustomed  to  all  these  things,  and  Mrs  Barnett  and 
Madge  were  gradually  becoming  so,  and  were,  besides,  not  altogether 


Il8  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


unfamiliar  with  those  terrible  winds  which  move  at  the  rate  of  forty 
miles  an  hour,  and  overturn  twenty-four  pounders.  Here,  however, 
the  darkness  and  the  snow  aggravated  the  dread  might  of  the 
storm ;  that  which  was  not  crushed  was  buried  and  smothered,  and, 
probably  twelve  hours  after  the  commencement  of  the  tempest, 
house,  kennel,  shed,  and  enceinte  would  have  disappeared  beneath 
a  bed  of  snow  of  uniform  thickness. 

The  time  was  not  wasted  during  this  long  imprisonment.  All 
these  good  people  agreed  together  perfectly,  and  neither  ill-humour 
nor  ennui  marred  the  contentment  of  the  little  party  shut  up  in  such 
a  narrow  space.  They  were  used  to  life  under  similar  conditions 
at  Forts  Enterprise  and  Reliance,  and  there  was  nothing  to  excite 
Mrs  Barnett's  surprise  in  their  ready  accommodation  of  themselves  to 
circumstances. 

Part  of  the  day  was  occupied  with  work,  part  with  reading  and 
games.  Garments  had  to  be  made  and  mended,  arms  to  be  kept 
bright  and  in  good  repair,  boots  to  be  manufactured,  and  the  daily 
journal  to  be  issued  in  which  Lieutenant  Hobson  recorded  the 
slightest  events  of  this  northern  wintering — the  weather,  the  tempera- 
ture, the  direction  of  the  wind,  the  appearance  of  meteors  so  fre- 
quent in  the  Polar  regions,  &c.,  <fec.  Then  the  house  had  to  be  kept 
in  order,  the  rooms  must  be  swept,  and  the  stores  of  furs  must  be 
visited  every  day  to  see  if  they  were  free  from  damp  ;  the  fires  and 
stoves,  too,  required  constant  superintendence,  and  perpetual  vigil- 
ance was  necessary  to  prevent  the  accumulation  of  particles  of  mois- 
ture in  the  corners. 

To  each  one  was  assigned  a  task,  the  duty  of  each  one  was  laid 
down  in  rules  fixed  up  in  the  large  room,  so  that  without  being 
overworked,  the  occupants  of  the  fort  were  never  without  something 
to  do.  Thomas  Black  screwed  and  unscrewed  his  instruments,  and 
looked  over  his  astronomical  calculations,  remaining  almost  always 
shut  up  in  his  cabin,  fretting  and  fuming  at  the  storm  which  pre- 
vented him  from  making  nocturnal  observations.  The  three  married 
women  had  also  plenty  to  see  to  :  Mrs  Mac-Nab  busied  herself  with 
her  baby  who  got  on  wonderfully,  whilst  Mrs  Joliffe,  assisted  by 
Mrs  Rae,  and  with  the  Corporal  always  at  her  heels,  presided  in  the 
kitchen. 

When  work  was  done  the  entire  party  assembled  in  the  large 
room,  spending  the  wliole  of  Sunday  together.  Reading  was  the  chief 
amusement.     The  Bible  and  some  books  of  travels  were  the  whole^ 


Mrs  Barnett  read  aloud"  —  Page  119. 


THE  POLAR  NIGHT.  I  1 9 


library  of  the  fort ;  but  they  were  all  the  good  folks  required.  Mrs 
Barnett  generally  read  aloud,  and  her  audience  listened  with  delight. 
The  Bible  and  accounts  of  adventures  received  a  fresh  charm  when 
read  out  in  her  clear  earnest  voice ;  her  gestures  were  so  expressive 
that  imaginary  persons  seemed  to  live  when  she  spoke  of  them,  and 
all  were  glad  when  she  took  up  the  book.  She  was,  in  fact,  the  life 
and  soul  of  the  little  community,  eager  alike  to  give  and  receive 
instruction ;  she  combined  the  charm  and  grace  of  a  woman  with  the 
energy  of  a  man,  and  she  consequently  became  the  idol  of  the  rough 
soldiers,  who  would  have  willingly  laid  down  their  lives  in  her  ser- 
vice. Mrs  Barnett  shared  everything  with  her  companions,  never 
holding  herself  aloof  or  remaining  shut  up  in  her  cabin,  but  working 
zealously  amongst  the  others,  drawing  out  the  most  reticent  by  her 
intelligent  questions  and  warm  sympathy.  Good  humour  and  good 
health  prevailed  throughout  the  little  community,  and  neither  hands 
nor  tongues  were  idle. 

The  storm,  however,  showed  no  signs  of  abating.  The  party  had 
now  been  confined  to  the  house  for  three  days,  and  the  snow-drifts 
were  as  wild  and  furious  as  ever.  Lieutenant  Hobsou  began  to  get 
anxious.  It  was  becoming  imperatively  necessary  to  renew  the  air 
of  the  rooms,  which  was  too  much  charged  with  carbonic  acid.  The 
light  of  the  lamps  began  to  pale  in  the  unhealthy  atmosphere,  and 
the  air-pumps  would  not  act,  the  pipes  being  choked  up  with  ice; 
they  were  not,  in  fact,  intended  to  be  used  when  the  house  was 
buried  in  snow.  It  was  necessary  to  take  counsel  \  the  Lieutenant 
and  Sergeant  Long  put  their  heads  together,  and  it  was  decided  on 
November  23d  that,  as  the  wind  beat  with  rather  less  violence  on 
the  front  of  the  house,  one  of  the  windows  at  the  end  of  the  passage 
on  that  side  should  be  opened. 

This  was  no  light  matter.  It  was  easy  enough  to  open  the  win- 
dow from  inside,  but  the  shutter  outside  was  encrusted  over  with  thick 
lumps  of  ice,  and  resisted  every  effort  to  move  it.  It  had  to  be  taken 
off  its  hinges,  and  the  hard  mass  of  snow  was  then  attacked  with 
pickaxe  and  shovel ;  it  was  at  least  ten  feet  thick,  and  it  was  not 
until  a  kind  of  channel  had  been  scooped  out  that  the  outer  air  was 
admitted. 

Hobson,  the  Sergeant,  several  soldiers,  and  Mrs  Barnett  herself 
ventured  to  creep  through  this  tunnel  or  channel,  but  not  without 
considerable  difficulty,  for  the  wind  rushed  in  with  fearful  fury. 

What  a  scene  was  presented  by  Cape  Bathurst  and  the  surrounding 


I20  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

plain.  It  was  mid-day,  and  but  a  few  faint  twilight  rays  glimmered 
upon  the  southern  horizon.  The  cold  was  not  so  intense  as  one 
would  have  supposed,  and  the  thermometer  marked  only  15°  Fahren- 
heit above  zero  ;  but  the  snow-drifts  whirled  along  with  terrific 
force,  and  all  would  inevitably  have  been  thrown  to  the  ground,  had 
not  the  snow  in  which  they  were  standing  up  to  their  waists  helped 
to  sustain  them  against  the  gusts  of  wind.  Everything  around  them 
was  white,  the  walls  of  the  enceinte,  and  the  whole  of  the  house 
even  to  the  roof  were  completely  covered  over,  and  nothing  but  a 
few  blue  wreaths  of  smoke  would  have  betrayed  the  existence  of  a 
human  habitation  to  a  stranger. 

Under  the  circumstances  the  "  promenade  "  was  soon  over ;  but 
Mrs  Barnett  had  made  good  use  of  her  time,  and  would  never  forget 
the  awful  beauty  of  the  Polar  regions  in  a  snow-storm,  a  beauty 
upon  which  few  women  had  been  privileged  to  look. 

A  few  moments  sujBSced  to  renew  the  atmosphere  of  the  house, 
and  all  unhealthy  vapours  were  quickly  dispersed  by  the  introduc- 
tion of  a  pure  and  refreshing  current  of  air. 

The  Lieutenant  and  his  companions  hurried  in,  and  the  window 
was  again  closed ;  but  after  that  the  snow  before  it  was  removed 
every  day  for  the  sake  of  ventilation. 

The  entire  week  passed  in  a  similar  manner  ;  fortunately  the 
rein-deer  and  dogs  had  plenty  of  food,  so  that  there  was  no  need  to 
visit  them.  The  eight  days  during  which  the  occupants  of  the  fort 
were  imprisoned  so  closely,  could  not  fail  to  be  somewhat  irksome 
to  strong  men,  soldiers  and  hunters,  accustomed  to  plenty  of  ex- 
ercise in  the  open  air  ;  and  we  must  own  that  listening  to  reading 
aloud  gradually  lost  its  charm,  and  even  cribbage  became  uninterest- 
ing. The  last  thought  at  night  was  a  hope  that  the  tempest  might 
have  ceased  in  the  morning,  a  hope  disappointed  every  day.  Fresh 
snow  constantly  accumulated  upon  the  windows,  the  wind  roared, 
the  icebergs  burst  with  a  crash  like  thunder,  the  smoke  was  forced 
back  into  the  rooms,  and  there  were  no  signs  of  a  diminution  of  the 
fury  of  the  storm. 

At  last,  however,  on  the  28th  November  the  Aneroid  barometer 
in  the  large  room  gave  notice  of  an  approaching  change  in  the  state 
of  the  atmosphere.  It  rose  rapidly,  whilst  the  thermometer  outside 
fell  almost  suddenly  to  less  than  four  degrees  below  zero.  These  were 
symptoms  which  could  not  be  mistaken,  and  on  the  29th  November 
the  silence  all  around  the  fort  told  that  the  tempest  had  ceased. 


THE  POLAR  NIGHT.  121 


Every  one  was  eager  to  get  out,  the  confinement  had  lasted  long 
enough.  The  door  could  not  be  opened,  and  all  had  to  get  through  the 
•window,  and  clear  away  the  fresh  accumulation  of  snow  ;  this  time, 
however,  it  was  no  soft  mass  they  had  to  remove,  but  compact  blocks 
of  ice,  which  required  pick  axes  to  break  them  up. 

It  took  about  half-an-hour  to  clear  a  passage,  and  then  every 
one  in  the  fort,  except  Mrs  Mac-Nab,  who  was  not  yet  up, 
hastened  into  the  interior  court,  glad  once  more  to  be  able  to 
walk  about. 

The  cold  was  still  intense,  but  the  wind  having  gone  down  it  was 
possible  to  endure  it,  although  great  care  was  necessary  to  escape 
serious  consequences  on  leaving  the  heated  rooms  for  the  open  air, 
the  difference  between  the  temperature  inside  and  outside  being 
some  fifty-four  degrees. 

It  was  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning.  Myriads  of  brilliant  con- 
stellations studded  the  sky,  and  at  the  zenith  shone  the  Pole  star. 
Although  in  both  hemispheres  there  are  in  reality  but  5000  fixed 
stars  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  their  number  appeared  to  the 
observers  incalculable.  Exclamations  of  admiration  burst  involun- 
tarily from  the  lips  of  the  delighted  astronomer  as  he  gazed  into 
the  cloudless  heavens,  once  more  undimmed  by  mists  or  vapours. 
Never  had  a  more  beautiful  sky  been  spread  out  before  the  eyes  of 
an  astromoner. 

Whilst  Thomas  Black  was  raving  in  ecstasy,  dead  to  all  terrestrial 
matters,  his  companions  had  wandered  as  far  as  the  enceinte.  The 
snow  was  as  hard  as  a  rock,  and  so  slippery  that  there  were  a  good 
many  tumbles,  but  no  serious  injuries. 

It  is  needless  to  state  that  the  court  of  the  fort  was  completely 
filled  up.  The  roof  of  the  house  alone  appeared  above  the  white 
mass,  the  surface  of  which  had  been  worn  smooth  by  the  action  of 
the  wind ;  of  the  palisade  nothing  was  visible  but  the  top  of  the 
stakes,  and  the  least  nimble  of  the  wild  animals  they  dreaded 
could  easily  have  climbed  over  them.  But  what  was  to  be  done  % 
It  was  no  use  to  think  of  clearing  away  a  mass  of  frozen  snow  ten 
feet  thick,  extending  over  so  large  an  extent  of  ground.  All  they 
could  attempt  would  be  to  dig  away  the  ice  inside  the  enceinte,  so 
as  to  form  a  kind  of  moat,  the  counterscarp  of  which  would  protect 
the  palisade.  But  alas  the  winter  was  only  beginning,  and  a  fresh 
tempest  might  at  any  time  fill  in  the  ditch  a  few  hours. 

Whilst  the  Lieutenant  was  examining  the  works,  which  could  no 


122  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


more  protect  his  fort  than  a  single  sunbeam  could  melt  the  solid 
layer  of  snow,  Mrs  Joliffe  suddenly  exclaimed  : 

"  And  our  dogs  !  our  reindeer  !  " 

It  was  indeed  time  to  think  about  the  poor  animals.  The  dog- 
house and  stable  being  lower  than  the  house  were  probably 
entirely  covered,  and  the  supply  of  air  had  perhaps  been  completely 
cut  off.  Some  hurried  to  the  dog-house,  others  to  the  reindeer 
stable,  and  all  fears  were  quickly  dispelled.  The  wall  of  ice,  which 
connected  the  northern  corner  of  the  house  with  the  cliff,  had  partly 
protected  the  two  buildings,  and  the  snow  round  them  was  not 
more  than  four  feet  thick,  so  that  the  apertures  left  in  the  walls 
had  not  been  closed  up.  The  animals  were  all  well,  and  when  the 
door  was  opened,  the  dogs  rushed  out  barking  with  delight. 

The  cold  was  so  intense,  that  after  an  hour's  walk  every  one 
began  to  think  of  the  glowing  stove  in  the  large  room  at  home. 
There  was  nothing  left  to  be  done  outside,  the  traps  buried  beneath 
ten  feet  of  snow  could  not  be.  visited,  so  all  returned  to  the  house, 
the  window  was  closed,  and  the  party  sat  down  to  the  dinner 
awaiting  them  with  sharpened  appetites. 

We  can  readily  imagine  that  the  conversation  turned  on  the 
intensity  of  the  cold,  which  had  so  rapidly  converted  the  soft  snow 
into  a  solid  mass.  It  was  no  light  matter,  and  might  to  a  certain 
extent  compromise  the  safety  of  the  little  colony. 

"  But,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  can  we  not  count  upon  a 
few  days'  thaw — will  not  all  this  snow  be  rapidly  converted  into 
water  % " 

"  Oh  no,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "  a  thaw  at  this  time  of  year  is 
not  at  all  likely.  Indeed  I  expect  the  thermometer  will  fall  still 
lower,  and  it  is  very  much  to  be  regretted  that  we  were  unable  to 
remove  the  snow  when  it  was  soft." 

"  What,  you  think  the  temperature  likely  to  become  much 
colder?" 

'*  I  do  most  certainly,  madam,  4°  below  zero — what  is  that  at 
this  latitude  % " 

"  What  would  it  be  if  we  were  at  the  Pole  itself?  " 

"  The  Pole,  madam,  is  probably  not  the  coldest  point  of  the  globe, 
for  most  navigators  agree  that  the  sea  is  there  open.  From 
certain  peculiarities  of  its  geographical  position  it  would  appear  that 
a  certain  spot  on  the  shores  of  North  Georgia,  95°  longitude  and 
78°  latitude,  has  the  coldest,  mean  temperature  in  the  world:  2° 


"  The  dogs  rushed  out"  ^c.  —  Page  122. 


THE  POLAR  NIGHT.  1 23 


below  zero  all  the  year  round.  It  is,  therefore,  called  the  *  pole 
of  cold.' " 

*'  But,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  we  are  more  than  8°  further  south 
than  that  famous  point." 

"  Well,  I  don't  suppose  we  shall  suffer  as  much  at  Cape  Bathurst 
as  we  might  have  done  in  North  Georgia.  I  only  tell  you  of  the 
*  pole  of  cold,'  that  you  may  not  confound  it  with  the  Pole  properly 
so-called  when  the  lowness  of  the  temperature  is  discussed. 
Great  cold  has  besides  been  experienced  on  other  points  of  the 
globe.  The  difference  is,  that  the  low  temperature  is  not  there 
maintained." 

"  To  what  places  do  you  allude  ? "  inquired  Mrs  Bamett ;  "  I 
assure  you  I  take  the  greatest  interest  in  this  matter  of  degrees  of 
cold." 

"As  far  as  I  can  remember,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant, 
"  Arctic  explorers  state  that  at  Melville  Island  the  temperature  fell 
to  61*  below  zero,  and  at  Port  Felix  to  65°." 

"  But  Melville  Island  and  Port  Felix  are  some  degrees  farther 
north  latitude  than  Cape  Bathurst,  are  they  not  ? " 

"Yes,  madam,  but  in  a  certain  sense  we  may  say  that  their 
latitude  proves  nothing.  A  combination  of  different  atmospheric 
conditions  is  requisite  to  produce  intense  cold.  Local  and  other 
causes  largely  modify  climate.  If  I  remember  rightly  in  1846  .  .  . 
Sergeant  Long,  you  were  at  Fort  Reliance  at  that  date  % 

"  Yes,  sir,"  replied  Long. 

"  Well,  was  it  not  in  January  of  that  year  that  the  cold  was  so 
excessive  % " 

"Yes  it  was,  I  remember  only  too  well  that  the  thermometer 
marked  70°  below  zero.'* 

"What!"  exclaimed  Mrs  Bamett,  "at  Fort  Reliance,  on  the 
Great  Slave  Laker' 

"Yes,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "and  that  was  at  65° 
north  latitude  only,  which  is  the  same  parallel  as  that  of  Christiania 
and  St  Petersburg." 

"  Then  we  must  be  prepared  for  everything.'* 

"Yes,  indeed,  we  must  when  we  winter  in  Arctic  countries." 

During  the  29th  and  30th  November,  the  cold  did  not  decrease, 
and  it  was  necessary  to  keep  up  huge  fires  to  prevent  the  f feez- 
ing in    all   the    corners    of    the   house   of   the   moisture   in   the 


124  2^^^  PU^  COUNTRY. 


atmosphere.  Fortunately  there  was  plenty  of  fuel,  and  it  was  not 
spared.  A  mean  temperature  of  52°  Fahrenheit  was  maintained  in- 
doors in  spite  of  the  intensity  of  the  cold  without. 

Thomas  Black  was  so  anxious  to  take  stellar  observations,  now 
that  the  sky  was  so  clear,  that  he  braved  the  rigour  of  the  outside 
temperature,  hoping  to  be  able  to  examine  some  of  the  magnifi- 
cent constellations  twinkling  on  the  zenith.  But  he  was  compelled 
to  desist — his  instruments  "burnt"  his  hands!  "Burnt"  is  the 
only  word  to  express  the  sensation  produced  by  touching  a  metallic 
body  subjected  to  the  influence  of  intense  cold.  Exactly  similar 
results  are  produced  by  the  sudden  introduction  of  heat  into  an 
animate  body,  and  the  sudden  withdrawal  of  the  same  from  it,  as 
the  astronomer  found  to  his  cost  when  he  left  the  skin  of  his  fingers 
on  his  instruments.     He  had  to  give  up  taking  observations. 

However,  the  heavens  made  him  the  best  amends  in  their  power 
by  displaying  the  most  beautiful  and  indescribable  phenomena  of 
a  lunar  halo  and  an  Aurora  Borealis. 

The  lunar  halo  was  a  white  corona  with  a  pale  red  edge  encir- 
cling the  moon.  This  luminous  meteor  was  about  forty-five  degrees 
in  diameter,  and  was  the  result  of  the  difi^raction  of  the  lunar  rays 
through  the  small  prismatic  ice-crystals  floating  in  the  atmosphere. 
The  queen  of  the  night  shone  with  renewed  splendour  and  heightened 
beauty  from  the  centre  of  the  luminous  ring,  the  colour  and 
consistency  of  which  resembled  the  milky  transparent  lunar  rain- 
bows which  have  been  so  often  described  by  astronomers. 

Fifteen  hours  later  the  heavens  were  lit  up  by  a  magnificent 
Aurora  Borealis,  the  arch  of  which  extended  over  more  than  a 
hundred  geographical  degrees.  The  vertex  of  this  arch  was  situated 
in  the  magnetic  meridian,  and,  as  is  often  the  case,  the  rays  darted 
by  the  luminous  meteor  were  of  all  the  colours  of  the  rainbow,  red 
predominating.  Here  and  there  the  stars  seemed  to  be  floating  in 
blood.  Glowing  lines  of  throbbing  colour  spread  from  the  dark 
segment  on  the  horizon,  some  of  them  passing  the  zenith  and 
quenching  the  light  of  the  moon  in  their  electric  waves,  which 
oscillated  and  trembled  as  if  swept  by  a  current  of  air. 

No  description  could  give  an  adequate  idea  of  the  glory  which 
flushed  the  northern  sky,  converting  it  into  a  vast  dome  of  fire,  but 
after  the  magnificent  spectacle  had  been  enjoyed  for  about  half  an 
hour,  it  suddenly  disappeared — not  fading  gradually  away  after  a 


THE  POLAR  NIGHT,  125 


concentration  of  its  rays,  or  a  diminution  of  its  splendour,  but  dying 
abruptly,  as  if  an  invisible  hand  had  cut  off  the  supply  of  electricity 
which  gave  it  life. 

It  was  time  it  was  over,  for  the  sake  of  Thomas  Black,  for  in 
another  five  minutes  he  would  have  been  frozen  where  he  stood  ! 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

A  NEIGHBOURLY  VISIT, 

N  the  2nd  December,  the  intensity  of  the  cold  decreased. 
(^^j^  The  phenomena  of  the  lunar  halo  and  Aurora  Borealis  were 
symptoms  which  a  meteorologist  would  have  been  at  no 
to  interpret.  They  implied  the  existence  of  a  certain  quantity 
of  watery  vapour  in  the  atmosphere,  and  the  barometer  fell  slightly, 
whilst  the  thermometer  rose  to  15°  above  zero. 

Although  this  temperature  would  have  seemed  very  cold  to  the  in- 
habitants of  a  temperate  zone,  it  was  easily  endured  by  the  colonists. 
The  absence  of  wind  made  a  great  difference,  and  Hobson  having 
noticed  that  the  upper  layers  of  snow  were  becoming  softer,  ordered 
his  men  to  clear  it  away  from  the  outer  approaches  of  the  enceinte. 
Mac-Nab  and  his  subordinates  set  to  work  zealously,  and  completed 
their  task  in  a  few  days.  The  traps  were  now  uncovered  and  re-set. 
A  good  many  footprints  showed  that  there  were  plenty  of  furred 
animals  about  the  cape,  and  as  they  could  not  get  any  other  food, 
it  was  probable  that  the  bait  in  the  snares  would  soon  attract  them. 
In  accordance  with  the  advice  of  Marbre  the  hunter,  a  reindeer  trap 
was  constructed  in  the  Esquimaux  style.  A  trench  was  dug  twelve 
feet  deep,  and  of  a  uniform  width  of  ten  feet.  A  see-saw  plank, 
which  would  rebound  when  lowered,  was  laid  across  it.  A  bait  of 
herbs  was  placed  at  one  end  of  the  plank,  and  any  animal  venturing 
to  take  them,  was  inevitably  flung  to  the  bottom  of  the  pit,  and 
the  plank  immediately  returning  to  its  former  position,  would  allow 
of  the  trapping  of  another  animal  in  the  same  manner.  Once  in, 
there  was  no  getting  out.  The  only  difficulty  Marbre  had  to  contend 
with  in  making  his  trap,  was  the  extreme  hardness  of  the  ground 
to  be  dug  out,  but  both  he  and  the  Lieutenant  were  not  a  little 
surprised  at  finding  beneath  some  five  feet  of  earth  and  sand  a  bed 
of  snow,  as  hard  as  a  rock,  which  appeared  to  be  very  thick. 

After  closely  examining  the  geological  structure  of  the  ground, 
Hobson  observed : 


"  The  body  was  hauled  up."  — Page  127. 


A  NEIGHBOURLY  VISIT,  12/ 

*'  This  part  of  the  coast  must  have  been  subjected  to  intense  cold 
for  a  considerable  length  of  time  a  great  many  years  ago.  Probably 
the  ice  rests  on  a  bed  of  granite,  and  the  earth  and  sand  upon  it 
Lave  accumulated  gradually." 

"Well,  sir,  our  trap  won't  be  any  the  worse  for  that,  the  reindeer 
will  find  a  slippery  wall,  which  it  will  be  impossible  for  them  to 
climb." 

Marbre  was  right,  as  the  event  proved. 

On  the  5th  September,  he  and  Sabine  were  on  their  way  to  the 
trench,  when  they  heard  loud  growls.  They  stood  still  and 
listened. 

"  It 's  no  reindeer  making  that  noise, "  said  Marbre,  "  I  know 
well  enough  what  creature  has  fallen  into  our  pit." 

"  A  bear  ?  "  replied  Sabine. 

"  Yes,"  said  Marbre,  whose  eyes  glistened  with  delight. 

"  Well,"  remarked  Sabine,  "  we  won't  grumble  at  that,  bears' 
steaks  are  as  good  as  reindeers',  and  we  get  the  fur  in  !  Come 
along." 

The  two  hunters  were  armed.  They  quickly  slipped  balls  into 
their  guns,  which  were  already  loaded  with  lead,  and  hurried  to  the 
trap.  The  see-saw  plank  had  swung  back  into  its  place,  but  the 
bait  had  disappeared,  having  probably  been  dragged  down  into  the 
trench.  The  growls  became  louder  and  fiercer,  and  looking  down 
the  hunters  saw  that  it  was  indeed  a  bear  they  had  taken.  A  huge 
mass  was  huddled  together  in  one  corner  of  the  pit,  looking  in  the 
gloom  like  a  pile  of  white  fur  with  two  glittering  eyes.  The  sides 
of  the  trench  had  been  ploughed  up  by  the  creature's  sharp  claws,  and 
had  they  been  made  of  earth  instead  of  ice,  it  would  certainly  have 
managed  to  scramble  out,  but  it  could  get  no  hold  on  the  slippery 
surface,  and  it  had  only  managed  to  enlarge  its  prison,  not  to  escape 
from  it. 

Under  the  circumstances  the  capture  was  easy.  Two  balls 
carefully  aimed  put  an  end  to  the  bear's  life,  and  the  next  thing  to 
do  was  to  get  it  out  of  the  pit.  The  two  hunters  returned  to  the 
fort  for  reinforcements,  and  ten  of  the  soldiers,  provided  with  ropes, 
returned  with  them.  It  was  not  without  considerable  difficulty 
that  the  body  was  hauled  up.  It  was  a  huge  creature,  six  feet  long, 
weighing  six  hundred  pounds,  and  must  have  possessed  immense 
strength.  It  belonged  to  the  sub-order  of  white  bears,  and  had  the 
flattened  head,  long  neck,  short  and  slightly  curved  claws,  narrow 


1 2  8  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TR  Y. 


muzzle,  and  smooth  white  fur  characteristic  of  the  species.  The 
edible  portions  of  this  valuable  animal  were  confided  to  Mrs  Joliffe, 
and  by  her  carefully  prepared  for  the  table. 

The  next  week  the  traps  were  in  full  activity.  Some  twenty 
martens  were  taken,  in  all  the  beauty  of  their  winter  clothing,  but 
only  two  or  three  foxes.  These  cunning  creatures  divined  the  snare 
laid  for  them,  and  scratching  up  the  ground  near  the  trap,  they 
often  managed  to  run  off  with  the  bait  without  being  caught.  This 
made  Sabine  beside  himself  with  rage  ;  *'  for,"  he  said,  "  such  a 
subterfuge  was  unworthy  of  a  respectable  fox." 

About  the  10th  December,  the  wind  having  veered  round  to  the 
south-west,  the  snow  again  began  to  fall,  but  not  in  thick  flakes,  or 
in  larufe  quantities.  The  wind  being  high,  however,  the  cold  was 
severely  felt,  and  it  was  necessary  to  settle  in-doors  again,  and  resume 
domestic  occupations.  Hobson  distributed  lime  lozenges  and  lime 
juice  to  every  one  as  a  precaution  against  the  scorbutic  affections, 
which  damp  cold  produces.  No  symptoms  of  scurvy  had  fortunately 
as  yet  appeared  amongst  the  occupants  of  the  fort,  thanks  to  the 
sanitary  precautions  taken. 

The  winter  solstice  was  now  approaching,  when  the  darkness  of 
the  Polar  night  would  be  most  profound,  as  the  sun  would  be  at  the 
lowest  maximum  point  below  the  horizon  of  the  northern  hemi- 
sphere. At  midnight  the  southern  edges  of  the  long  white  plains 
were  touched  with  a  faint  glimmer  of  twilight,  that  was  all,  and  it 
would  be  impossible  to  imagine  anything  more  melancholy  than  the 
gloomy  stillness  and  darkness  of  the  vast  expanse. 

Hobson  felt  more  secure  from  the  attacks  of  wild  beasts,  now  that 
the  approaches  to  the  enceinte  had  been  cleared  of  snow,  which  was 
a  fortunate  circumstance,  as  ominous  growlings  were  heard,  the 
nature  of  which  no  one  could  mistake. 

There  was  no  fear  of  visits  from  Indian  hunters  or  Canadians  at 
this  time  of  year,  but  an  incident  occurred  proving  that  these  dis- 
tricts were  not  altogether  depopulated  even  in  the  winter,  and  which 
was  quite  an  episode  in  the  long  dreary  dark  months.  Some  human 
beings  still  lingered  on  the  coast  hunting  morses  and  camping  under 
the  snow.  They  belonged  to  the  race  of  Esquimaux,  "  or  eaters  of 
raw  flesh,"  which  is  scattered  over  the  continent  of  North  America, 
from  Baffin's  Bay  to  Behring  Strait,  seldom,  however,  advancing 
farther  south  than  the  Great  Slave  Lake. 

On  the  morning  of  the  14th  December,  or  rather  nine  hours 


creatures  came  out  of  the  hut"  —  Page  129. 


A  NEIGHBOURLY  VISIT.  12g 

before  midday,  Sergeant  Long,  on  his  return  from  an  excursion  along 
the  coast,  ended  his  report  to  the  Lieutenant  by  saying,  that  if  his 
eyes  had  not  deceived  him,  a  tribe  of  nomads  were  encamped  about 
four  miles  from  the  fort,  near  a  little  cape  jutting  out  from  the 
coast. 

*'  What  do  you  suppose  these  nomads  are?  "  inquired  Hobson. 

*  Either  men  or  morses,"  replied  the  Sergeant.  "  There 's  no 
medium ! " 

The  brave  Sergeant  would  have  been  considerably  .surprised  if 
any  one  had  told  him  that  some  naturalists  admit  the  existence  of 
the  "  medium,"  the  idea  of  which  he  scouted;  and  certain  savants 
have  with  some  humour  classed  the  Esquimaux  as  an  "  intermediate 
species  "  between  man  and  the  sea-cow. 

Lieutenant  Hobson,  Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  and  a  few  others  at  once 
went  to  ascertain  the  truth  of  the  report.  Well  wrapt  up,  and  on 
their  guard  against  a  sudden  chill,  their  feet  cased  in  furred  boots, 
and  guns  and  hatchets  in  their  hands,  they  issued  from  the  postern, 
\nd  made  their  way  over  the  frozen  snow  along  the  coast,  strewn 
with  masses  of  ice. 

The  moon,  already  in  the  last  quarter,  shed  a  few  faint  rays  through 
the  mists  which  shrouded  the  ice-fields.  After  marching  for  about 
an  hour,  the  Lieutenant  began  to  think  that  the  Sergeant  had  been 
mistaken,  and  that  what  he  had  seen  were  morses,  who  had  returned 
to  their  native  element  through  the  holes  in  the  ice  which  they 
always  keep  open. 

But  Long,  pointing  to  a  grey  wreath  of  smoke  curling  out  of  a 
conical  protuberance  on  the  ice-field  some  hundred  steps  off,  con- 
tented himself  with  observing  quietly — 

**  The  morses  are  smoking,  then  !  " 

As  he  spoke  some  living  creatures  came  out  of  the  hut  dragging 
themselves  along  the  snow.  They  were  Esquimaux,  but  whether 
male  or  female  none  but  a  native  could  have  said,  for  their  costumes 
were  all  exactly  alike. 

Indeed,  without  in  the  least  sharing  the  opinion  of  the  naturalist 
quoted  above,  any  one  might  have  taken  the  rough  shaggy  figures 
for  seals  or  some  other  amphibious  animals.  There  were  six  of  them 
— four  full-grown,  and  two  children.  Although  very  short,  they 
were  broad-chested  and  muscular.  They  iiad  the  flat  noses,  long 
eye-lashes,  large  mouths,  thick  lips,  long  black  coarse  hair,  and 
beardless  chins  of  their  race.     Their  costume  consisted  of  a  round 

1 


130  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

coat  made  of  the  skin  of  the  walrus,  a  hood,  boots,  trousers,  and 
mittens  of  the  same  material.  They  gazed  at  the  Europeans  in 
silence. 

"Does  any  one  understand  Esquimaux  1"  inquired  the  Lieu- 
tenant. 

No  one  was  acquainted  with  that  idiom,  and  every  one  started 
when  a  voice  immediately  exclaimed  in  English,  "  Welcome  !  wel- 
come ! " 

It  was  an  Esquimaux,  and,  as  they  learned  later,  a  woman,  who, 
approaching  Mrs  Barnett,  held  out  her  hand. 

The  lady,  much  surprised,  replied  in  a  few  words,  which  the  native 
girl  readily  understood,  and  the  whole  family  was  invited  to  follow 
the  Europeans  to  the  fort. 

The  Esquimaux  looked  searchingly  at  the  strangers,  and  after  a 
few  moments'  hesitation  they  accompanied  the  Lieutenant,  keeping 
close  together,  however. 

Arrived  at  the  enceinte,  the  native  woman,  seeing  the  house,  of 
the  existence  of  which  she  had  had  no  idea,  exclaimed — 

"  House  !   snow-house  !  " 

She  asked  if  it  were  made  of  snow,  which  was  a  natural  question 
enough,  for  the  house  was  all  but  hidden  beneath  the  white  mass 
which  covered  the  ground.  She  was  made  to  understand  that  it 
was  built  of  wood  ;  she  then  turned  and  said  a  few  words  to  her 
companions,  who  made  signs  of  acquiescence,  and  they  all  passed 
through  the  postern,  and  were  taken  to  the  large  room  in  the  chief 
building. 

They  removed  their  hoods,  and  it  became  possible  to  distinguish 
sexes.  There  were  two  men,  about  forty  or  fifty  years  old,  with 
yellowish-red  complexions,  sharp  teeth,  and  projecting  cheek-bones, 
which  gave  them  something  of  the  appearance  of  carnivorous  animals ; 
two  women,  still  young,  whose  matted  hair  was  adorned  with  the 
teeth  and  claws  of  Polar  bears  ;  and  two  children,  about  five  or  six 
years  old,  poor  little  creatures  with  intelligent  faces,  who  looked 
about  them  with  wide  wondering  eyes. 

"  I  believe  the  Esquimaux  are  always  hungry,"  said  Hobson,  "  so 
I  don't  suppose  our  guests  would  object  to  a  slice  of  venison." 

in  obedience  to  the  Lieutenant's  order,  Joliffe  brought  some 
reindeer-venison,  which  the  poor  creatures  devoured  with  greedy 
avidity  ;  but  the  young  woman  who  had  answered  in  English 
behaved  with  greater  refinement,  and  watched  Mrs  Barnett  and  the 


tike  ran  up  to  it"  ^c.  —  Page  131. 


A  NEIGHBOURLY  VISIT,  I3I 


women  of  the  fort  without  once  removing  her  eyes  from  them. 
Presently  noticing  the  baby  in  Mrs  Mac  Nab's  arms,  she  rose  and 
ran  up  to  it,  speaking  to.it  in  a  soft  voice,  and  caressing  it  tenderly. 
Indeed  if  not  exactly  superior,  the  young  girl  was  certainly  more 
civilised  than  her  companions,  which  was  especially  noticeable  when, 
being  attacked  by  a  slight  fit  of  coughing,  she  put  her  hand  before 
her  mouth  in  the  manner  enjoined  by  the  first  rules  of  civilised 
society. 

This  significant  gesture  did  not  escape  any  one,  and  Mrs  Barnett, 
who  chatted  for  some  time  with  the  Esquimaux  woman,  learned  from 
her  in  a  few  short  sentences  that  she  had  been  for  a  year  in  the 
service  of  the  Danish  governor  of  Upper  Navik,  whose  wife  was 
English,  and  that  she  had  left  Greenland  to  follow  her  family  to 
the  hunting  grounds.  The  two  men  were  her  brothers  ;  the  other 
woman  was  her  sister-in-law,  married  to  one  of  the  men,  and  mother 
of  the  two  children.  They  were  all  returning  from  Melbourne  Island, 
on  the  eastern  coast  of  English  America,  and  were  making  for  Point 
Barrow,  on  the  western  coast  of  Russian  America,  the  home  of 
their  tribe,  and  were  considerably  astonished  to  find  a  factory 
established  on  Cape  Bathurst.  Indeed  the  two  men  shook  their 
heads  when  they  spoke  of  it.  Did  they  disapprove  of  the  con- 
struction of  a  fort  at  this  particular  point  of  the  coast?  Did  they 
think  the  situation  ill-chosen  ?  In  spite  of  all  his  endeavours, 
Hobson  could  get  no  satisfactory  reply  to  these  questions,  or  rather 
he  could  not  understand  the  answers  he  received. 

The  name  of  the  young  girl  was  Kalumah,  and  she  seemed  to 
have  taken  a  great  fancy  to  Mrs  Barnett.  But  sociable  as  she  was, 
she  appeared  to  feel  no  regret  at  having  left  the  governor  of  Upper 
Navik,  and  to  be  sincerely  attached  to  her  relations. 

After  refreshing  themselves  with  the  reindeer- venison,  and 
drinking  half  a-pint  of  rum,  in  which  the  children  had  their  share, 
the  Esquimaux  took  leave  of  their  hosts  ;  but  before  saying  good- 
bye, the  young  girl  invited  Mrs  Barnett  to  visit  their  snow-hut,  and 
the  lady  promised  to  do  so  the  next  day,  weather  permitting. 

The  next  day  was  fine,  and  accompanied  by  Madge,  Lieutenant 
Hobson,  and  a  few  soldiers,  well  armed  in  case  any  bears  should  be 
prowling  about,  Mrs  Barnett  set  out  for  "  Cape  Esquimaux,"  as  they 
had  named  the  spot  where  the  little  colony  had  encamped. 

Kalumah  hastened  forward  to  meet  her  friend  of  yesterday,  and 
pointed  to  the  hut  with  an  air  of  pride.     It  was  a  large  cone  of 


132  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

snow,  with  an  opening  in  the  summit,  through  which  the  smoke 
from  the  fire  inside  made  its  way.  These  snow-houses,  called  igloos 
in  the  language  of  the  Esquimaux,  are  constructed  with  great 
rapidity,  and  are  admirably  suited  to  the  climate.  In  them  their 
owners  can  endure  a  temperature  40°  below  zero,  without  fires,  and 
without  suffering  much.  In  the  summer  the  Esquimaux  encamp 
in  tents  made  of  seal  and  reindeer  skins,  which  are  called  tupics. 

It  was  no  easy  matter  to  get  into  this  hut.  The  only  opening  was 
a  hole  close  to  the  ground,  and  it  was  necessary  to  creep  through  a 
kind  of  passage  three  or  four  feet  long,  which  is  about  the  thickness 
of  the  walls  of  these  snow  houses.  But  a  traveller  by  profession,  a 
laureate  of  the  Royal  Society,  could  not  hesitate,  and  Mrs  Paulina 
Barnett  did  not  hesitate  !  Followed  by  Madge,  she  bravely  entered 
the  narrow  tunnel  in  imitation  of  her  guide.  Lieutenant  Hobson 
and  his  men  dispensed  with  paying  their  respects  inside. 

And  Mrs  Barnett  soon  discovered  that  the  chief  difficulty  was  not 
getting  into  the  hut,  but  remaining  in  it  when  there.  The  room 
was  heated  by  a  fire,  on  which  the  bones  of  morses  were  burning ; 
and  the  air  was  full  of  the  smell  of  the  fetid  oil  of  a  lamp,  of  greasy 
garments,  and  the  flesh  of  the  amphibious  animals  which  form  the 
chief  article  of  an  Esquimaux's  diet.  It  was  suffocating  and  sick- 
ening !  Madge  could  not  stand  it,  and  hurried  out  at  once,  but 
Mrs  Barnett,  rather  than  hurt  the  feelings  of  the  young  native, 
showed  superhuman  courage,  and  extended  her  visit  over  five  long 
minutes  ! — five  centuries  !  The  two  cliildren  and  their  mother  were 
at  home,  but  the  men  had  gone  to  hunt  morses  four  or  five  miles 
from  their  camp. 

Once  out  of  the  hut,  Mrs  Barnett  drew  a  long  sigh  of  relief,  and 
the  colour  returned  to  her  blanched  cheeks. 

"Well,  madam,"  inquired  the  Lieutenant,  "  what  do  you  think  of 
Esquimaux  bouses  ? " 

"  The  ventilation  leaves  something  to  be  desired  ! "  she  replied 
simply. 

The  interesting  native  family  remained  encamped  near  Cape 
Esquimaux  for  eight  days.  The  men  passed  twelve  hours  out  of 
every  twenty-four  hunting  morses.  With  a  patience  which  none 
but  sportsmen  could  understand,  they  would  watch  for  the 
amphibious  animals  near  the  holes  through  which  they  come  up  to 
the  surface  of  the  ice-field  to  breathe.  When  the  morse  appears,  a. 
rope  with  a  running  noose  is  flung  round  its  body  a  little  below  the 


A  NEIGHBOURLY  VISIT,  1 33 


head,  and  it  is  dragged  on  to  the  ice-field,  often  with  considerable 
difficulty,  and  killed  with  hatchets.  It  is  really  more  like  fishing 
than  hunting.  It  is  considered  a  great  treat  to  drink  the  warm 
blood  of  the  walrus,  and  the  Esquimaux  often  indulge  in  it  to  excess. 

Kalumah  came  to  the  fort  every  day  in  spite  of  the  severity  of  the 
weather.  She  was  never  tired  of  going  through  the  different  rooms, 
and  watching  Mrs  Joliffe  at  her  cooking  or  sewing.  She  asked  the 
English  name  of  everything,  and  talked  for  hours  together  with 
Mrs  Barnett,  if  the  term  "  talking  "  can  be  applied  to  an  exchange 
of  words  after  long  deliberation  on  both  sides.  When  Mrs  Barnett 
read  aloud,  Kalumah  listened  with  great  attention,  although  she 
probably  understood  nothing  of  what  she  heard. 

The  young  native  girl  had  a  sweet  voice,  and  sometimes  sang 
some  strange  melancholy  rhythmical  songs  with  a  peculiar  metre, 
and,  if  we  may  so  express  it,  a  frosty  ring  about  them,  peculiarly 
characteristic  of  their  origin. 

Mrs  Barnett  had  the  patience  to  translate  one  of  these  Greenland 
sagas,  which  was  sung  to  a  sad  air,  interspersed  with  long  pauses, 
and  filled  with  strange  intervals,  which  produced  an  indescribable 
effect.  We  give  an  English  rendering  of  Mrs  Barnett's  translation, 
which  may  give  a  faint  idea  of  this  strange  hyperborean  poetry : — 

GREENLAND  SONG. 
Dark  is  the  sky. 

The  sun  sinks  wearily ; 
My  trembling  heart,  with  sorrow  filled, 
Aches  drearily ! 
My  sweet  child  at  my  songs  is  smiling  still, 
While  at  his  tender  heart  the  icicles  lie  chilL 

Child  of  my  dreams  ! 

Thy  love  doth  cheer  me  ; 
The  cru,el  biting  frost  I  brave 
But  to  be  near  thee  ! 
Ah  me,  Ah  me,  could  these  hot  tears  of  mine 
But  melt  the  icicles  around  that  heart  of  thine/ 

Could  we  once  more 

Meet  heart  to  heart. 
Thy  little  hands  close  clasped  in  mine, 
No  more  to  part. 
Then  on  thy  chill  heart  rays  from  heaven  above 
Should  fall,  and  softly  melt  it  with  the  warmth  of  love  I 


134  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

On  the  20th  December  the  Esquimaux  family  came  to  take  leavo 
of  the  occupants  of  the  fort.  Kalumah  was  sorry  to  part  with 
Mrs  Barnett,  who  would  gladly  have  retained  her  in  her  service,  but 
the  young  native  could  not  be  persuaded  to  leave  her  own 
people;  she  promised,  however,  to  return  to  Fort  Hope  in  the 
summer. 

Her  farewell  was  touching.  She  presented  Mrs  Barnett  with  a 
copper  ring,  and  received  in  exchange  a  necklace  of  black  beads, 
which  she  immediately  put  on.  Hobson  gave  the  poor  people  a 
good  stock  of  provisions,  which  they  packed  in  their  sledge  ;  and 
after  a  few  words  of  grateful  acknowledgment  from  Kalumah,  the 
whole  party  set  out  towards  the  west,  quickly  disappearing  in  the 
thick  fogs  on  the  shore. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

MERCURY   FREEZES, 

.y^  FEW  days  of  dry  calm  weather  favoured  the  operations 
5?&  of  the  hunters,  but  they  did  not  venture  far  from  the 
fort ;  the  abundance  of  game  rendered  it  unnecessary  to 
do  so,  and  Lieutenant  Hobson  could  justly  congratulate  himself  on 
having  chosen  so  favourable  a  situation  for  the  new  settlement.  A 
great  number  of  furred  animals  of  all  kinds  were  taken  in  the  traps, 
and  Sabine  and  Marbre  killed  a  good  many  Polar  hares.  Some 
twenty  starving  wolves  were  shot.  Hunger  rendered  the  latter 
animals  aggressive,  and  bands  of  them  gathered  about  the  fort,  filling 
the  air  with  hoarse  howls,  and  amongst  the  "  hummocks  "  on  the  ice- 
fields sometimes  prowled  huge  bears,  whose  movements  were  watched 
with  great  interest. 

On  the  25th  December  all  excursions  had  again  to  be  given  up. 
The  wind  veered  suddenly  to  the  north,  and  the  cold  became 
exceedingly  severe.  It  was  impossible  to  remain  out  of  doors  with- 
out being  frost-bitten.  The  Fahrenheit  thermometer  fell  to  18°  below 
zero,  and  the  gale  r^^ared  like  a  volley  of  musketry.  Hobson  to'^k 
care  to  provide  the  animals  with  food  enough  to  last  several  weeks. 

Christmas  Day,  the  day  of  home-gatherings  so  dear  to  the  heart 
of  all  Englishmen,  was  kept  with  due  solem:-ity.  The  colonists  re- 
turned thanks  to  God  for  preserving  them  through  so  many  perils ; 
and  the  workmen,  who  had  a  holiday  in  honour  of  the  day,  afterwards 
assembled  with  their  masters  and  the  ladies  round  a  well-tilled  board, 
on  which  figured  two  huge  Christmas  puddings. 

In  the  evening  a  huge  bowl  of  punch  flamed  in  the  centre  of  the 
table  ;  the  lamps  were  put  out,  and  for  a  time  the  room  was  lighted 
only  by  the  livid  flames  of  the  spirit,  the  familiar  objects  assuming 
strange  fantastic  forms.  The  spirits  of  the  soldiers  rose  as  they 
watched  the  flickering  illumination,  and  their  excitement  v/as  not 
lessened  after  imbibing  some  of  the  burning  liquid. 

But  now  the  flames  began  to  pale :  bluish  tongues  still  fitfully 


I  3 6  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TR  Y. 


licked  the  plump  sides  of  the  national  pudding  for  a  few  minutes, 
and  then  died  away. 

Strange  to  say,  although  the  lamps  had  not  been  relit,  the  room 
did  not  become  dark  on  the  extinction  of  the  flames.  A  bright  red 
light  was  streaming  through  the  window,  which  had  passed  un- 
noticed in  the  previous  illumination. 

The  revellers  started  to  their  feet,  and  looked  at  each  other  in 
astonishment. 

"  A  fire  ! "  cried  several. 

But  unless  the  house  itself  were  burning,  there  could  not  be  a 
fire  anywhere  near  Cape  Bathurst. 

The  Lieutenant  rushed  to  the  window,  and  at  once  understood 
the  cause  of  the  phenomenon.     It  was  an  eruption. 

Indeed,  above  the  western  cliffs  beyond  Walruses'  Bay  the  horizon 
was  on  tire.  The  summits  of  the  igneous  hills,  some  miles  from 
Cape  Bathurst,  could  not  be  seen ;  but  the  sheaf  of  flame  shot  up 
to  a  considerable  height,  lighting  up  the  whole  country  in  a  weird, 
unearthly  manner. 

"  It  is  more  beautiful  than  the  Aurora  Borealis  ! "  exclaimed  Mrs 
Barnett. 

Thomas  Black  indignantly  protested  against  this  assertion.  A 
terrestrial  phenomenon  more  beautiful  than  a  meteor  !  But  no  one 
was  disposed  to  argue  with  him  about  it,  for  all  hurried  out,  in  spite 
of  the  bitter  gale  and  biting  cold,  to  watch  the  glorious  spectacle  of 
the  flashing  sheaf  of  flames  standing  out  against  the  black  back- 
ground of  the  night  sky. 

Had  not  the  mouths  and  ears  of  the  party  been  cased  in  furs, 
they  would  have  been  able  to  hear  the  rumbling  noise  of  the  erup- 
tion, and  to  tell  each  other  of  the  impressions  made  upon  them  by 
this  magnificent  sight ;  but,  as  it  was,  they  could  neither  speak  nor 
hear.  They  might  well  be  content,  however,  with  gazing  upon  such 
a  glorious  scene — a  scene  which  once  looked  upon  could  never  be 
forgotten.  The  glowing  sheets  of  flames  contrasted  alike  with  the 
gloomy  darkness  of  the  heavens  and  the  dazzling  whiteness  of 
the  far-stretching  carpet  of  snow,  and  produced  effects  of  light 
and  shade  which  no  pen  or  pencil  could  adequately  portray.  The 
throbbing  reverberations  spread  beyond  the  zenith,  gradually 
quenching  the  light  of  all  the  stars.  The  white  ground  became 
dashed  with  golden  tints,  the  hummocks  on  the  ice-field  and  the 
huge  icebergs  in  the  background  reflecting  the  glimmering  colours 


//  is  mo)-e  beautiful  than  t/ie  Aurora  Borealis."  —  Page  136. 


MERCURY  FREEZES.  137 

like  SO  many  glowing  mirrors.  The  rays  of  ligbt,  striking  on  the 
edges  or  surfaces  of  the  ice,  became  bent  and  diffracted  j  the  angles 
and  varying  inclinations  on  which  they  fell  fretting  them  into 
fringes  of  colour,  and  reflecting  them  back  with  changed  and 
heightened  beauty.  It  was  like  a  fairy  scene  in  which  ice  and  snow 
combined  to  add  eclat  to  a  imlee  of  rays  in  which  luminous  waves 
rushed  upon  each  other,  breaking  into  coloured  ripples. 

But  the  excessive  cold  soon  drove  the  admiring  spectators  back  to 
their  warm  dwelling,  and  many  a  nose  paid  dearly  for  the  feast 
enjoyed  by  the  eyes. 

During  the  following  days  the  cold  became  doubly  severe.     The 
'mercurial  thermometer  was  of  course  no  longer  of  any  use  for  mark- 
ing degrees,  and  an  alcohol  thermometer  had  to  be  used.      On  the 
night  of  the  28th  to  the  29th  December  the  column  fell  to   32° 
below  zero.  ^  , 

The  stoves  were  piled  up  with  fuel,  but  the  temperature  in 
the  house  could  not  be  maintained  above  20"  degrees.  The  bed- 
rooms were  exceedingly  cold,  and  ten  feet  from  the  stove,  in  the 
large  room,  its  heat  could  not  be  felt  at  all.  The  little  baby  had 
the  warmest  corner,  and  its  cradle  was  rocked  in  turn  by  those  who 
came  to  the  fire.  0})ening  doors  or  windows  was  strictly  forbidden, 
as  the  vapour  in  the  rooms  would  immediately  have  been  converted 
into  snow,  and  in  the  passage  the  breathing  of  the  inmates  already 
produced  that  result.  Every  now  and  then  dull  reports  were  heard, 
which  startled  those  unaccustomed  to  living  in  such  high  latitudes. 
They  were  caused  by  the  cracking  of  the  trunks  of  trees,  of  which 
the  walls  were  composed,  under  the  influence  of  the  intense  cold. 
The  stock  of  rum  and  gin  stowed  away  in  the  garret  had  to  be 
brought  down  into  the  sitting-room,  as  the  alcohol  was  freezing  and 
sinking  to  the  bottom  of  the  bottles.  The  spruce-beer  made  from  a 
decoction  of  young  fir-branchlets  burst  the  barrels  in  which  it  wa^ 
kept  as  it  froze,  whilst  all  solid  bodies  resisted  the  introduction  of 
heat  as  if  they  were  petrified.  Wood  burnt  very  slowly,  and  Hobson 
was  obliged  to  sacrifice  some  of  the  walrus-oil  to  quicken  its  com- 
bustion. Fortunately  the  chimneys  drew  well,  so  that  there  was  no 
disagreeable  smell  inside,  although  for  a  long  distance  outside  the 
air  was  impregnated  with  the  fetid  odour  of  the  smoke  from  Fort 
Hope,  which  a  casual  observer  might  therefore  have  pronounced  an 
unhealthy  building. 

One  symptonj  we  must  notice  was  the  great  thirst  from  which 


133  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


every  one  suffered.  To  relieve  it,  different  liquids  had  to  be  melted 
at  the  fire,  for  it  would  have  been  dangerous  to  eat  ice.  Another 
effect  of  the  cold  was  intense  drowsiness,  which  HobsoVi  earnestly 
entreated  his  companions  to  resist.  Some  appeared  unable  to  do  so  j 
but  Mrs  Barnett  was  invaluable  in  setting  an  example  of  constant 
activity :  always  brave,  she  kept  herself  awake,  and  encouraged  others 
by  her  kindness,  brightness,  and  sympathy.  Sometimes  she  read 
aloud  accounts  of  travels,  or  sang  some  old  familiar  English  song, 
in  the  chorus  of  which  all  joined.  These  joyous  strains  roused  up 
the  sleepers  whether  they  would  or  no,  and  their  voices  soon  swelled 
the  chorus.  The  long  days  of  imprisonment  passed  wearily  by,  and 
the  Lieutenant,  consulting  the  outside  thermometer  through  the  win- 
dows, announced  that  the  cold  was  still  on  the  increase.  On  the 
31st  December,  the  mercury  was  all  frozen  hard  in  the  cistern  of 
ihe  instrument,  so  that  the  temperature  was  44°  below  freezing- 
point. 

The  next  day,  1st  January  1860,  Lieutenant  Hobson  wished 
Mrs  Barnett  a  happy  new  year,  and  complimented  her  on  the 
courage  and  good  temper  with  which  she  endured  the  miseries 
of  this  northern  winter.  The  astronomer  was  not  forgotten  in  the 
universal  interchange  of  good  wishes  amongst  the  members  of  the 
little  colony  ;  but  his  only  thought  on  entering  another  year 
was,  that  it  was  the  beginning  of  that  in  which  the  great  eclipse 
was  to  take  place.  Fortunately  the  general  health  still  remained 
good,  and  any  symptoms  jof  scurvy  were  prom^.tly  checked  by  the 
use  of  lime-juice  and  iime-lozenges. 

It  would  not  do,  however,  to  rejoice  too  soon.  The  winter  had 
still  to  last  three  months.  The  sun  would  doubtless  reappeat  above 
the  horizon  in  due  time  ;  but  there  was  n:-  reason  to  think  that  the 
cold  had  reached  its  maximum  intensity,  especially  as  in  most 
northern  countries  February  is  the  month  during  which  the  tem- 
perature fails  lowest.  However  that  might  be,  there  was  no  decrease 
in  the  severity  .f  the  weather  during  the  first  days  of  the  new  year, 
and  on  the  8th  January  the  alcohol  thermometer  placed  outside  the 
window  of  the  passage  marked  ^^°  below  zero.  K  few  degrees 
more  and  the  minimum  temperature  at  Fort  Reliance  in  1835  would 
be  reached  ! 

Jaspar  Hobson  grew  more  and  more  uneasy  at  the  continued 
severity  )f  the  cold.  He  began  to  fear  that  the  furred  animals 
would  have  to  seek  a  less  rigorous  climate  further  south^  which 


MERCUR  Y  FREEZES.  1 3  9 


would  of  course  thwart  all  bis  plans  for  hunting  in  the  early  spring. 
Moreover,  he  sometimes  heard  subterranean  rumblings,  which  were 
evidently  connected  with  the  volcanic  eruption.  The  western 
horizon  still  glowed  with  the  reflection  of  the  burning  lava,  and  it 
was  evident  that  some  great  convulsion  was  going  on  in  the  bowels 
of  the  earth.  Might  not  the  close  vicinity  of  an  active  volcano 
be  dangerous  to  the  new  fort  ?  Such  was  the  question  which  the 
subterranean  rumblings  forced  upon  the  mind  of  the  Lieutenant, 
but  he  kept  his  vague  apprehensions  to  himself. 

Of  course  under  these  circumstances  no  one  dreamt  of  leaving 
the  house.  The  animals  were  well  provided  for,  and  being  accus- 
tomed to  long  fasts  in  the  winter,  required  no  attention  from  their 
masters,  so  that  there  really  was  no  necessity  for  any  exposure 
out  of  doors.  It  was  difficult  enough  to  endure  the  inside  tempera- 
ture, even  with  the  help  of  a  plentiful  combustion  of  wood  and  oil ; 
for,  in  spite  of  every  precaution,  damp  crept  into  the  ill-ventilated 
rooms,  and  layers  of  ice,  increasing  in  thickness  every  day,  were 
formed  upon  the  beams.  The  condensers  were  choked  up,  and  one 
of  them  burst  from  the  pressure  of  the  ice. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  did  not  spare  his  fuel ;  he  was,  in  fact,  rather 
lavish  of  it  in  his  anxiety  to  raise  the  temperature,  which,  when  the 
fires  got  low — as  of  course  sometimes  happened — fell  to  15° 
Fahrenheit.  The  men  on  guard,  who  relieved  each  other  every 
hour,  had  strict  orders  to  keep  up  the  fires,  and  great  was  the 
dismay  of  the  Lieutenant  when  Sergeant  Long  said  to  iiim  one 
day — 

"  We  shall  be  out  of  wood  soon  !  " 

"  Out  of  wood  !  "  exclaimed  Hobson. 

"  I  mean  our  stock  is  getting  low,  and  we  must  lay  in  fresh  stores 
soon.  Of  course  I  know,  though,  that  it  will  be  at  the  risk  of  his 
life  that  any  one  goes  out  in  this  cold  !  " 

"  Yes,"  replied  Hobson.  "  It  was  a  mistake  not  to  build  the 
wooden  shed  close  to  the  house,  and  to  make  no  direct  communica- 
tion with  it.  I  see  that  now  it  is  too  late.  I  ought  not  to  have 
forgotten  that  we  were  going  to  winter  beyond  the  seventieth 
parallel.  But  what 's  done  can't  be  undone.  How  long  will  the 
wood  last  %  " 

"  There  is  enough  to  feed  the  furnace  and  stove  for  another  two 
or  three  days,"  replied  the  Sergeant. 

"  Let  us  hope  by  that  time  that  the  severity  of  the  cold  may 


I40  THE  I^UR  COUNTRY. 


have  decreased,  and  that  we  may  venture  across  the  court  of  the 
fort  without  danger." 

"  I  doubt  it,  sir,"  replied  Long,  shaking  his  head.  "  The  atmo- 
sphere is  very  clear,  the  wind  is  still  in  the  north,  and  I  shall  not 
be  surprised  if  this  temperature  is  maintained  for  another  fifteen 
days — until  the  new  moon,  in  fact." 

"  Well,  my  brave  fellow,"  said  the  Lieutenant,  "  we  won't  die  of 
cold  if  we  can  help  it,  and  the  day  we  have  to  brave  the  outside 


"  We  will  brave  it,  sir,"  said  Long. 

Hobson  pressed  his  subordinate's  hand,  well  knowing  the  poor 
fellow's  devotion. 

We  might  fancy  that  Hobson  and  the  Sergeant  were  exaggerating 
when  they  alluded  to  fatal  results  from  sudden  exposure  to  the 
open  air,  but  they  spoke  from  experience,  gained  from  long  resi- 
dence in  the  rigorous  Polar  regions.  They  had  seen  strong  men  fall 
fainting  on  the  ice  under  similar  circumstances ;  their  breath  failed 
them,  and  they  were  taken  up  in  a  state  of  sufifocation.  Incredible 
as  such  facts  may  appear,  they  have  been  of  frequent  occurrence 
amongst  those  who  have  wintered  in  the  extreme  north.  In  their 
journey  along  the  shores  of  Hudson's  Bay  in  1746,  Moor  and  Smith 
saw  many  incidents  of  this  kind, — some  of  their  companions 
were  killed,  struck  down  by  the  cold,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that 
sudden  death  may  result  from  braving  a  temperature  in  which 
mercury  freezes. 

Such  was  the  distressing  state  of  things  at  Fort  Hope,  when  a 
new  danger  arose  to  aggravate  the  sufferings  of  the  colonists. 


CHAPTER  XXL 

THE  LARGE  POLAR  BEARS, 

I  HE  only  one  of  the  four  windows  through  which  it  was 
possible  to  look  into  the  court  of  the  fort  was  that  opening 
at  the  end  of  the  entrance  passage.  The  outside  shutters 
had  not  been  closed  ;  but  before  it  could  be  seen  through  it  had  to 
be  washed  with  boiling  water,  as  the  panes  were  covered  with  a 
thick  coating  of  ice.  This  was  done  several  times  a  day  by  the 
Lieutenant's  orders,  when  the  districts  surrounding  the  fort  were 
carefully  examined,  and  the  state  of  the  sky,  and  of  the  alcohol 
thermometer  placed  outside,  were  accurately  noted. 

On  the  6th  January,  towards  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning,  Kellet, 
whose  turn  it  was  to  look  out,  suddenly  called  the  Sergeant,  and 
pointed  to  some  moving  masses  indistinctly  visible  in  the  gloom. 
Long,  approaching  the  window  observed  quietly — 

"  They  are  bears  !  " 

In  fact  half-a-dozen  of  these  formidable  animals  had  aucceeded 
in  getting  over  the  palisades,  and,  attracted  by  the  smoke  from  the 
chimneys,  were  advancing  upon  the  house. 

On  hearing  of  the  approach  of  the  bears,  Hobson  at  once  ordered 
the  window  of  the  passage  to  be  barricaded  inside  ;  it  was  the  only 
unprotected  opening  in  the  house,  and  when  it  was  secured  it 
appeared  impossible  for  the  bears  to  effect  an  entrance.  The  window 
was,  therefore,  quickly  closed  up  with  bars,  which  the  carpenter 
Mac-Nab  wedged  firmly  in,  leaving  a  narrow  slit  through  which  to 
watch  the  movements  of  the  unwelcome  visitors. 

"  Now,"  observed  the  head  carpenter,  "  these  gentlemen  can't  get 
in  without  our  permission,  and  we  have  time  to  hold  a  council  of 
war." 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,"  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett,  "  nothing  has  been 
wanting  to  our  northern  winter !      After  the  cold  come  the  bears." 

"Not  after,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "but,  which  is  a  serious 
matter,  with  the  cold,  and  a  cold  so  intense  that  we  cannot  venture 


142  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

outside  !  I  really  don't  know  how  we  shall  get  rid  of  these 
tiresome  brutes." 

"  I  suppose  they  will  soon  get  tired  of  prowling  about,"  said  the 
lady,  ''  and  return  as  they  came." 

Hobson  shook  his  head  as  if  he  had  his  doubts. 

"  You  don't  know  these  animals,  madam.  They  are  famished 
with  hunger,  and  will  not  go  until  we  make  them  !  " 

"  Are  you  anxious,  then  %  " 

"  Yes  and  no,"  replied  the  Lieutenant.  "  I  don't  think  the  bears 
will  get  in  ;  but  neither  do  I  see  how  we  can  get  out,  should  it 
become  necessary  for  us  to  do  so." 

With  these  words  Hobson  turned  to  the  window,  and  Mrs  Barnett 
joined  the  other  women,  who  had  gathered  round  the  Sergeant,  and 
were  listening  to  what  he  had  to  say  about  the  bears.  He  spoke 
like  a  man  well  up  in  his  subject,  for  he  had  had  many  an  encounter 
with  these  formidable  carnivorous  creatures,  which  are  often  met 
with  even  towards  the  south,  where,  however,  they  can  be  safely 
attacked,  whilst  here  the  siege  would  be  a  regular  blockade,  for  the 
cold  would  quite  prevent  any  attempt  at  a  sortie. 

Throughout  the  whole  day  the  movements  of  the  bears  were 
attentively  watched.  Every  now  and  then  one  of  them  would  lay  his 
great  head  against  the  window-pane  and  an  ominous  growl  was  heard. 

The  Lieutenant  and  the  Sergeant  took  counsel  together,  and  it 
was  agreed  that  if  their  enemies  showed  no  sign  of  beating  a  retreat, 
they  would  drill  a  few  loopholes  in  the  wBtIIs  of  the  house,  and  fire 
at  them.  But  it  was  decided  to  put  off  this  desperate  measure  for 
a  day  or  two,  as  it  was  desirable  to  avoid  giving  access  to  the  outer 
air,  the  inside  temperature  being  already  far  too  low.  The  walrus- 
oil  to  be  burnt  was  frozen  so  hard  that  it  had  to  be  broken  up  with 
hatchets. 

The  day  passed  without  any  incident.  The  bears  went  and  came, 
prowling  round  the  house,  but  attempting  no  direct  attack.  Watch 
was  kept  all  night,  and  at  four  o'clock  in  the  morning  they  seemed 
to  have  left  the  court — at  any  rate,  they  were  nowhere  to  be  seen. 

But  about  seven  o'clock  Marbre  went  up  to  the  loft  to  fetch 
some  provisions,  and  on  his  return  announced  that  the  bears  were 
walking  about  on  the  roof. 

Hobson,  the  Sergeant,  Mac-Nab,  and  two  or  three  soldiers  seized 
their  arms,  and  rushed  to  the  ladder  in  the  passage,  which  com- 
municated with  the  loft  by  a  trap-door.     The  cold  was,  however,  so 


The  bears  were  walking  about  on  the  roof,''  ^c.  —  Page  142. 


THE  LARGE  POLAR  BEARS,  I43 

intense  in  tte  loft  that  the  men  could  not  hold  the  barrels  of  their 
guns,  and  their  breath  froze  as  it  left  their  lips  and  floated  about 
them  as  snow. 

Marbre  was  right ;  the  bears  were  all  on  the  roof,  and  the  sound 
of  their  feet  and  their  growls  could  be  distinctly  heard.  Their 
great  claws  caught  in  the  laths  of  the  roof  beneath  the  ice,  and  there 
was  some  danger  that  they  might  have  sufficient  strength  to  tear 
away  the  woodwork. 

The  Lieutenant  and  his  men,  becoming  giddy  and  faint  from  the 
intense  cold,  were  soon  obliged  to  go  down,  and  Hobson  announced 
the  state  of  afl'airs  in  as  hopeful  a  tone  as  he  could  assume. 

"  The  bears,"  he  said,  "  are  now  upon  the  roof.  We  ourselves 
have  nothing  to  fear,  as  they  can't  get  into  our  rooms ;  but  they 
may  force  an  entrance  to  the  loft,  and  devour  the  furs  stowed  away 
there.  Now  these  furs  belong  to  the  Company,  and  it  is  our  duty  to 
preserve  them  from  injury.  I  ask  you  then,  my  friends,  to  aid  me 
in  removing  them  to  a  place  of  safety." 

All  eagerly  volunteered,  and  relieving  each  other  in  parties  of 
two  or  three,  for  none  could  have  supported  the  intense  severity  of 
the  cold  for  long  at  a  time,  they  managed  to  carry  all  the  furs  into 
the  large  room  in  about  an  hour. 

Whilst  the  work  was  proceeding,  the  bears  continued  their  efforts 
to  get  in,  and  tried  to  lift  up  the  rafters  of  the  roof.  In  some 
places  the  laths  became  broken  by  their  weight,  and  poor  Mac-Nab 
was  in  despair;  he  had  not  reckoned  upon  such  a  contingency  when 
he  constructed  the  roof,  and  expected  to  see  it  give  way  every 
moment. 

The  day  passed,  however,  without  any  change  in  the  situation. 
The  bears  did  not  get  in  ;  but  a  no  less  formidable  enemy,  the  cold, 
gradually  penetrated  into  every  room.  The  fires  in  the  stoves 
burnt  low  ;  the  fuel  in  reserve  was  almost  exhausted ;  and  before 
twelve  o'clock,  the  last  piece  of  wood  would  be  burnt,  and  the 
genial  warmth  of  the  stove  would  no  longer  cheer  the  unhappy  colo- 
nists. 

Death  would  then  await  them — death  in  its  most  fearful  form, 
from  cold.  The  poor  creatures,  huddled  together  round  the  stove, 
felt  that  their  own  vital  heat  must  soon  become  exhausted,  but 
not  a  word  of  complaint  passed  their  lips.  The  women  bore  their 
sufferings  with  the  greatest  heroism,  and  Mrs  Mac-Nab  pressed  her 
baby   convulsively   to   her  ice-cold  breast.     Some*  of  the  soldiers 


144  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


slept,  or  rather  were  wrapped  in  a  heavy  torpor,  which  could  scarcely 
be  called  sleep. 

At  three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  Hobson  consulted  the  thermo- 
meter hanging  in  the  large  room,  about  ten  feet  from  the  stove. 

It  marked  4"  Fahrenheit  below  zero. 

The  Lieutenant  pressed  his  hand  to  his  forehead,  and  looked 
mournfully  at  his  silent  companions  without  a  word.  His  half -con- 
densed breath  shrouded  his  face  in  a  white  cloud,  and  he  was  stand- 
ing rooted  to  the  spot  when  a  hand  was  laid  upon  his  shoulder. 
He  started,  and  looked  round  to  see  Mrs  Barnett  beside  him. 

"  Something  must  be  done,  Lieutenant  Hobson  !  "  exclaimed  the 
energetic  woman  ;  "  we  cannot  die  like  this  without  an  effort  to  save 
ourselves  !  " 

"Yes,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  feeling  revived  by  the  moral 
courage  of  his  companion — "  yes,  something  must  be  done  !  "  and 
he  called  together  Long,  Mac-Nab,  and  Rae  the  blacksmith,  as  tho 
bravest  men  in  his  party.  All,  together  with  Mrs  Barnett,  hastened 
to  the  window,  and  having  washed  the  panes  with  boiling  water, 
they  consulted  the  thermometer  outside. 

"  Seventy-two  degrees  ! "  cried  Hobson.  "  My  friends,  two  courses 
only  are  open  to  us,  we  can  risk  our  lives  to  get  a  fresh  supply  of 
fuel,  or  we  can  burn  the  benches,  beds,  partition  walls,  and  every- 
thing in  the  house  to  feed  our  stoves  for  a  few  days  longer.  A 
desperate  alternative,  for  the  cold  may  last  for  some  time  yet ;  there 
is  no  sign  of  a  change  in  the  weather." 

*'  Let  us  risk  our  lives  to  get  fuel  ! "  said  Sergeant  Long. 

All  agreed  that  it  would  be  the  best  course,  and  without  another 
word  each  one  set  to  work  to  prepare  for  the  emergency. 

The  following  were  the  precautions  taken  to  save  the  lives  of 
those  who  were  about  to  risk  themselves  for  the  sake  of  the  general 
good  : — 

The  shed  in  which  the  wood  was  stored  was  about  fifty  steps 
on  the  left,  behind  the  principal  house.  It  was  decided  that  one  of 
the  men  should  try  and  run  to  the  shed.  He  was  to  take  one  rope 
wound  round  his  body,  and  to  carry  another  in  his  hand,  one  end 
of  which  was  to  be  held  by  one  of  his  comrades.  Once  at  the  shed, 
he  was  to  load  one  of  the  sledges  there  with  fuel,  and  tie  one  rope 
to  the  front,  and  the  other  to  the  back  of  the  vehicle,  so  that  it 
could  be  dragged  backwards  and  forwards  between  the  house  and 
the  shed  without  much  danger.     A  tug  violently  shaking  one  or  the 


"  Mrs  Barnett  pressed  the  brave  man's  hand,''  ^c.  —  Page  145. 


THE  LARGE  POLAR  BEARS.  T45 

other  cord  would  be  the  signal  that  the  sledge  was  filled  with  fuel 
at  the  shed,  or  unloaded  at  the  house. 

A  very  clever  plan,  certainly  ;  but  two  things  might  defeat  it. 
The  door  of  the  shed  might  be  so  blocked  up  with  ice  that  it  would 
be  very  difficult  to  open  it,  or  the  bears  might  come  down  from 
the  roof  and  prowl  about  the  court.     Two  risks  to  be  run  ! 

Long,  Mac-Nab,  and  Rae,  all  three  volunteered  for  the  perilous 
service  ;  but  the  Sergeant  reminded  the  other  two  that  they  were 
married,  and  insisted  upon  being  the  first  to  venture. 

When  the  Lieutenant  expressed  a  wish  to  go  himself,  Mrs  Barnett 
said  earnestly,  "  You  are  our  chief ;  you  have  no  right  to  expose 
yourself.     Let  Sergeant  Long  go." 

Hobson  could  not  but  realise  that  his  office  imposed  caution,  and 
being  called  upon  to  decide  which  of  his  companions  should  go,  he 
chose  the  Sergeant.  Mrs  Barnett  pressed  the  brave  man's  hand 
with  ill-concealed  emotion  ;  and  the  rest  of  the  colonists,  asleep  or 
stupefied,  knew  nothing  of  the  attempt  about  to  be  made  to  save 
their  lives. 

Two  long  ropes  were  got  ready.  The  Sergeant  wound  one  round 
his  body  above  the  warm  furs,  worth  some  thousand  pounds  sterling, 
in  which  he  was  encased,  and  tied  the  other  to  his  belt,  on  which  he 
hung  a  tinder-box  and  a  loaded  revolver.  Just  before  starting  he 
swallowed  down  half  a  glass  of  rum,  as  he  said,  '*  to  insure  a  good 
load  of  wood." 

Hobson,  Rae,  and  Mac-Nab  accompanied  the  brave  fellow  through 
the  kitchen,  where  the  fire  had  just  gone  out,  and  into  the  passage. 
Rae  climbed  up  to  the  trap-door  of  the  loft,  and  peeping  through  it, 
made  sure  that  the  bears  were  still  on  the  roof.  The  moment  for 
action  had  arrived. 

One  door  of  the  passage  was  open,  and  in  spite  of  the  thick  furs 
in  which  they  were  wrapped,  all  felt  chilled  to  the  very  marrow  of 
their  bones ;  and  when  the  second  door  was  pushed  open,  they  re- 
coiled for  an  instant,  panting  for  breath,  whilst  the  moisture  held 
in  suspension  in  the  air  of  the  passage  covered  the  walls  and  the 
floor  with  fine  snow. 

The  weather  outside  was  extremely  dry,  and  the  stars  shone  with 
extraordinary  brilliancy.  Sergeant  Long  rushed  out  without  a 
moment's  hesitation,  dragging  the  cord  behind  him,  one  end  of  which 
was  held  by  his  companions ;  the  outer  door  was  pushed  to,  and 
Hobson,  Mac-Nab,  and  Rae  went  back  to  the  passage  and  closed 

K 


146  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

the  second  door,  behind  which  they  waited.  If  Long  did  not 
return  in  a  few  minutes,  they  might  conclude  that  his  enterprise  had 
succeeded,  and  that,  safe  in  the  shed,  he  was  loading  the  first  train 
with  fuel.  Ten  minutes  at  the  most  ought  to  suffice  for  this  opera- 
tion, if  he  had  been  able  to  get  the  door  open. 

When  the  Sergeant  was  fairly  off,  Hobson  and  Mac-Nab  walked 
together  towards  the  end  of  the  passage. 

Meanwhile  Rae  had  been  watching  the  bears  and  the  loft.  It  was 
so  dark  that  all  hoped  Long's  movements  would  escape  the  notice  of 
the  hungry  animals. 

Ten  minutes  elapsed,  and  the  three  watchers  went  back  to  the 
narrow  space  between  the  two  doors,  waiting  for  the  signal  to  be 
given  to  drag  in  the  sledge. 

Five  minutes  more.  The  cord  remained  motionless  in  their 
hands  !  Their  anxiety  can  be  imagined.  It  was  a  quarter  of  an  hour 
since  the  Sergeant  had  started,  plenty  of  time  for  all  he  had  to  do, 
and  he  had  given  no  signal. 

Hobson  waited  a  few  minutes  longer,  and  then  tightening  his  hold 
of  the  end  of  the  rope,  he  made  a  sign  to  his  companions  to  pull  with 
him.  If  the  load  of  wood  were  not  quite  ready,  the  Sergeant  could 
easily  stop  it  from  being  dragged  away. 

The  rope  was  pulled  vigorously.  A  heavy  object  seemed  to  slide 
along  the  snow.     In  a  few  moments  it  reached  the  outer  door. 

It  was  the  body  of  the  Sergeant,  with  the  rope  round  his  waist. 
Poor  Long  had  never  reached  the  shed.  He  had  fallen  fainting  to 
the  ground,  and  after  twenty  minutes'  exposure  to  such  a  tempera- 
ture there  was  little  hope  that  he  would  revive. 

A  cry  of  grief  and  despair  burst  from  the  lips  of  Mac-Nab  and  Rae. 
They  lifted  their  unhappy  comrade  from  the  ground,  and  carried 
him  into  the  passage  ;  but  as  the  Lieutenant  was  closing  the  outer 
door,  something  pushed  violently  against  it,  and  a  horrible  growl  was 
heard. 

"  Help !  "  cried  Hobson. 

Mac- Nab  and  Rae  rushed  to  their  officer's  assistance ;  but  Mrs 
Barnett  had  been  beforehand  with  them,  and  was  struggling  with 
all  her  strength  to  help  Hobson  to  close  the  door.  In  vain ;  the 
mpnstrous  brute,  throwing  the  whole  weight  of  its  body  against  it, 
would  force  its  way  into  the  passage  in  another  moment. 

Mrs  Barnett,  whose  presence  of  mind  did  not  forsake  her  now, 
seized  one  of  the  pistols  in  the  Lieutenants  belt,  and  waiting  quietly 


3Irs  Barnett  discharged  the  contents,"  ^c.  —  Page  147. 


THE  LARGE  POLAR  BEARS.  T47 

until  the  animal  shoved  its  head  between  the  door  and  the  wall, 
discharged  the  contents  into  its  open  mouth. 

The  bear  fell  backwards,  mortally  wounded  no  doubt,  and  the 
door  was  shut  and  securely  fastened. 

The  body  of  the  Sergeant  was  then  carried  into  the  large  room. 
But,  alas  !  the  fire  was  dying  out.  How  was  it  possible  to  restore 
the  vital  heat  with  no  means  of  obtaining  warmth  1 

"  I  will  go — I  will  go  and  fetch  some  wood  !  "  cried  the  blacksmith 
Rae. 

"  Yes,  Rae,  we  will  go  together !  "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett,  whose 
courage  was  unabated. 

"  No,  my  friends,  no  !  "  cried  Hobson  ;  "  you  would  fall  victims 
to  the  cold,  or  the  bears,  or  both.  Let  us  burn  all  there  is  to  burn 
in  the  house,  and  leave  the  rest  to  God  ! " 

And  the  poor  half-frozen  settlers  rose  and  laid  about  them  with 
their  hatchets  like  madmen.  Benches,  tables,  and  partition  walls 
were  thrown  down,  broken  up,  crushed  to  pieces,  and  piled  up  in  the 
stove  of  the  large  room  and  kitchen  furnace.  Very  soon  good  lires 
were  burning,  on  which  a  few  drops  of  walrus-oil  were  poured,  so 
that  the  temperature  of  the  rooms  quickly  rose  a  dozen  degrees. 

Every  effort  was  made  to  restore  the  Sergeant.  He  was  rubbed 
with  warm  rum,  and  gradually  the  circulation  of  his  blood  was 
restored.  The  white  blotches  with  which  parts  of  his  body  were 
covered  began  to  disappear  •  but  he  had  suffered  dreadfully,  and 
several  hours  elapsed  before  he  could  articulate  a  word.  He  was  laid 
in  a  warm  bed,  and  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  watched  by  him  until 
the  next  morning. 

Meanwhile  Hobson,  Mac-Nab,  and  Rae  consulted  how  best  to 
escape  from  their  terrible  situation.  It  was  impossible  to  shut  their 
eyes  to  the  fact  that  in  two  days  this  fresh  supply  of  fuel  would  be 
exhausted,  and  then,  if  the  cold  continued,  what  would  become  of 
them  all  1  The  new  moon  had  risen  forty-eight  hours  ago,  and  there 
was  no  sign  of  a  change  in  the  weather  1  The  north  wind  still 
swept  the  face  of  the  country  with  its  icy  breath ;  the  barometer 
remained  at  "  fine  dry  weather ;  "  and  there  was  not  a  vapour  to  be 
seen  above  the  endless  succession  of  ice-fields.  There  was  reason  to 
fear  that  the  intense  cold  would  last  a  long  time  yet,  but  what  was 
to  be  done  ?  Would  it  do  to  try  once  more  to  get  to  the  wood- shed, 
when  the  bears  had  been  roused  by  the  shot,  and  rendered  doubly 
dangerous  1     Would  it  be  possible  to  attack  these  dreadful  creatures 


1 48  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TK  V. 


in  the  open  air  1     No,  it  would  be  madness,  and  certain  death  for 
all! 

Fortunately  the  temperature  of  the  rooms  had  now  become  more 
bearable,  and  in  the  morning  Mrs  Joliffe  served  up  a  breakfast  of 
hot  meat  and  tea.  Hot  grog  was  served  out,  and  the  brave  Ser- 
geant was  able  to  take  his  share.  The  heat  from  the  stoves  warmed 
the  bodies  and  reanimated  the  drooping  courage  of  the  poor  colonists, 
who  were  now  ready  to  attack  the  bears  at  a  word  from  Hobson. 
But  the  Lieutenant,  thinking  the  forces  unequally  matched,  would 
not  risk  the  attempt ;  and  it  appeared  likely  that  the  day  would 
pass  without  any  incident  worthy  of  note,  when  at  about  three  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon  a  great  noise  was  heard  on  the  top  of  the  house. 

"  There  they  are  !  "  cried  two  or  three  soldiers,  hastily  arming 
themselves  with  hatchets  and  pistols. 

It  was  evident  that  the  bears  had  torn  away  one  of  the  rafters  of 
the  roof,  and  got  into  the  loft. 

"  Let  every  one  remain  where  he  is ! ''  cried  the  Lieutenant.  "  Rae, 
the  trap  ! " 

The  blacksmith  rushed  into  the  passage,  scaled  the  ladder,  and 
shut  and  securely  fastened  the  trap-door. 

A  dreadful  noise  was  now  heard — growling,  stamping  of  feet,  and 
tearing  of  claws.  It  was  doubtful  whether  the  danger  of  the  anxious 
listeners  was  increased,  or  the  reverse.  Some  were  of  opinion  that  if 
all  the  bears  were  in  the  loft,  it  would  be  easier  to  attack  them. 
They  would  be  less  formidable  in  a  narrow  space,  and  there  would 
not  be  the  same  risk  of  suffocation  from  cold.  Of  course  a  conflict 
with  such  fierce  creatures  must  still  be  very  perilous,  but  it  no  longer 
appeared  so  desperate  as  before. 

It  was  now  debated  whether  it  would  be  better  to  go  and  attack 
the~  besiegers,  or  to  remain  on  the  defensive.  Only  one  soldier  ' 
could  get  through  the  narrow  trap-door  at  a  time,  and  this  made 
Hobson  hesitate,  and  finally  resolve  to  wait.  The  Sergeant  and 
others,  whose  bravery  none  could  doubt,  agreed  that  he  was  in  the 
right,  and  it  might  be  possible  that  some  new  incident  would  occur 
to  modify  the  situation.  It  was  almost  impossible  for  the  bears  to 
break  through  the  beams  of  the  ceiling,  as  they  had  the  rafters  of 
the  roof,  so  that  there  was  little  fear  that  they  would  get  on  to  the 
ground-floor. 

The  day  passed  by  in  anxious  expectation,  and  at  night  no  one 
could  sleep  for  the  uproar  made  by  the  furious  beasts. 


"  Mingled  howls  and  screams  were  heard."  —  Page  149. 


THE  LARGE  POLAR  BEARS,  I49 

The  next  day,  about  nine  o'clock,  a  fresh  complication  compelled 
Hobson  to  take  active  steps. 

He  knew  that  the  pipes  of  the  stove  and  kitchen  furnace  ran  all 
along  the  loft,  and  being  made  of  lime-bricks  but  imperfectly  cemented 
together,  they  could  not  resist  great  pressure  for  any  length  of  time. 
Now  some  of  the  bears  scratched  at  the  masonry,  whilst  others  leant 
against  the  pipes  for  the  sake  of  the  warmth  from  the  stove ;  so  that 
the  bricks  began  to  give  way,  and  soon  the  stoves  and  furnace  ceased 
to  draw. 

This  really  was  an  irreparable  misfortune,  which  would  have  dis- 
heartened less  energetic  men.  But  things  were  not  yet  at  their  worst. 
Whilst  the  fire  became  lower  and  lower,  a  thick,  nauseous,  acrid 
smoke  filled  the  house ;  the  pipes  were  broken,  and  the  smoke  soon 
became  so  thick  that  the  lamps  went  out.  Hobson  now  saw  that 
he  must  leave  the  house  if  he  wished  to  escape  suffocation,  but  to 
leave  the  house  would  be  to  perish  with  cold.  At  this  fresh  misfor- 
tune some  of  the  women  screamed ;  and  Hobson,  seizing  a  hatchet, 
shouted  in  a  loud  voice — 

"  To  the  bears  !  to  the  bears,  my  friends  ! " 

It  was  the  forlorn-hope.  These  terrible  creatures  must  be 
destroyed.  All  rushed  into  the  passage  and  made  for  the  ladder, 
Hobson  leading  the  way.  The  trap-door  was  opened,  and  a  few 
shots  were  fired  into  the  black  whirlpool  of  smoke.  Mingled  howls 
and  screams  were  heard,  and  blood  began  to  flow  on  both  sides ;  but 
the  fearful  conflict  was  waged  in  profound  darkness. 

In  the  midst  of  the  melee  a  terrible  rumbling  sound  suddenly 
drowned  the  tumult,  the  ground  became  violently  agitated,  and  the 
house  rocked  as  if  it  were  being  torn  up  from  its  foundations.  The 
beams  of  the  walls  separated,  and  through  the  openings  Hobson  and 
his  companions  saw  the  terrified  bears  rushing  away  into  the  dark- 
ness, howling  with  rage  and  fright. 


CHAPTER  XXIL 

FIVE  MONTHS   MORE. 

VIOLENT  earthquake  had  shaken  Cape  Bathurst.  Such 
convulsions  were  probably  frequent  in  this  volcanic  region, 
and  the  connection  between  them  and  eruptions  was  once 
more  demonstrated. 

Hobson  well  understood  the  significance  of  what  had  occurred, 
and  waited  in  anxious  suspense.  He  knew  that  the  earth  might 
open  and  swallow  up  the  little  colony ;  but  only  one  shock  was  felt, 
and  that  was  rather  a  rebound  than  a  vertical  upheaval,  which  made 
the  house  lean  over  towards  the  lake,  and  burst  open  its  walls. 
Immediately  after  this  one  shock,  the  ground  again  became  firm  and 
motionless. 

The  house,  although  damaged,  was  still  habitable ;  the  breaches  in 
the  walls  were  quickly  repaired,  and  the  pipes  of  the  chimneys  were 
patched  together  again  somehow. 

Fortunately  the  wounds  the  soldiers  had  received  in  their  struggle 
with  the  bears  were  slight,  and  merely  required  dressing. 

Two  miserable  days  ensued,  during  which  the  woodwork  of  the 
beds  and  the  planks  of  the  partition  walls  were  burnt,  and  the  most 
pressing  repairs  executed  by  Mac-Nab  and  his  men.  The  piles, 
well  driven  into  the  earth,  had  not  yielded  ;  but  it  was  evident  that 
the  earthquake  had  caused  a  sinking  of  the  level  of  the  coast  on 
which  the  fort  was  built,  which  might  seriously  compromise  the 
safety  of  the  building.  Hobson  was  most  anxious  to  ascertain  the 
extent  of  the  alteration  of  elevation,  but  the  pitiless  cold  prevented 
him  from  venturing  outside. 

But  at  last  there  were  symptoms  of  an  approaching  change  in  the 
weather.  The  stars  shone  with  rather  less  brilliancy,  and  on  the 
11th  January  the  barometer  fell  slightly;  hazy  vapours  floated  in 
the  air,  the  condensation  of  which  would  raise  the  temperature  ;  and 
on  the  12th  January  the  wind  veered  to  the  south-west,  and  snow 
fell  at  irregular  intervals. 


C^/^^M^ 


"  Just  look  at  our  house  now !  "  —  Page  152. 


FIVE  MONTHS  MORE.  I5  I 


The  thermometer  outside  suddenly  rose  to  15°  above  zero,  and 
to  the  frozen  colonists  it  was  like  the  beginning  of  spring. 

At  eleven  o'clock  the  same  morning  all  were  out  of  doors.  They 
were  like  a  band  of  captives  unexpectedly  set  free.  They  were, 
however,  absolutely  forbidden  to  go  beyond  the  enceinte  of  the  fort, 
in  case  of  awkward  meetings. 

The  sun  had  not  yet  reappeared  above  the  horizon,  but  it 
approached  it  nearly  enough  to  produce  a  long  twilight,  during 
which  objects  could  be  distinctly  seen  to  a  distance  of  two  miles ; 
and  Hobson's  first  thought  was  to  ascertain  what  difference  the 
earthquake  had  produced  in  the  appearance  of  the  surrounding 
districts. 

Certain  changes  had  been  effected.  The  crest  of  the  promontory 
of  Cape  Bathurst  had  been  broken  off,  and  large  pieces  of  the  cliff 
had  been  flung  upon  the  beach.  The  whole  mass  of  the  cape 
seemed  to  have  been  bent  towards  the  lake,  altering  the  elevation 
of  the  plateau  on  which  the  fort  was  built.  The  soil  on  the  west 
appeared  to  have  been  depressed,  whilst  that  on  the  east  had  been 
elevated.  One  of  the  results  of  this  change  of  level  would  unfor- 
tunately be,  that  when  the  thaw  set  in,  the  waters  of  the  lake  and 
of  Paulina  river,  in  obedience  to  the  law  requiring  liquids  to  main- 
tain their  level,  would  inundate  a  portion  of  the  western  coast. 
The  stream  would  probably  scoop  out  another  bed,  and  the  natural 
harbour  at  its  mouth  would  be  destroyed.  The  hills  on  the  eastern 
bank  seemed  to  be  considerably  depressed,  but  the  cliffs  on  the  west 
were  too  far  off  for  any  accurate  observations  to  be  made.  The 
important  alteration  produced  by  the  earthquake  may,  in  fact,  be 
summed  up  in  a  very  few  words  :  the  horizontal  character  of  the 
ground  was  replaced  by  a  slope  from  east  to  west. 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  laughing,  "  you  were  good 
enough  to  give  my  name  to  the  port  and  river,  and  now  there  will 
be  neither  Paulina  river  nor  Port  Barnett.  I  must  say  I  have  been 
hardly  used." 

**Well,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "although  the  river  is  gone,  the 
lake  remains,  and  we  will  call  it  Lake  Barnett.  I  hope  that  it 
at  least  will  remain  true  to  you." 

Mr  and  Mrs  Joliffe,  on  leaving  the  house,  had  hurried,  one  to  the 
doghouse,  the  other  to  the  reindeer-stable.  The  dogs  had  not 
suffered  much  from  their  long  confinement,  and   rushed  into  the 


152  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TR  Y. 


court  barking  with  delight.  One  reindeer  had  died,  but  the  others^ 
though  thin,  appeared  to  be  in  good  health. 

**  Well,  madam,"  said  the  Lieutenant,  "  we  have  got  through  our 
troubles  better  than  we  could  have  expected." 

''  I  never  despaired,"  replied  the  lady.  *'  The  miseries  of  an 
Arctic  winter  would  not  conquer  men  like  you  and  your  com- 
panions." 

"  To  own  the  truth,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "  I  never  experi- 
enced such  intense  cold  before,  in  all  the  years  I  have  spent  in  the 
north  ;  and  if  it  had  lasted  many  days  longer  we  should  all  have 
been  lost. 

"The  earthquake  came  in  the  nick  of  time  then,  not  only  to 
drive  away  the  bears,  but  also  to  modify  the  extremity  of  the 
cold?" 

"  Perhaps  so,  madam.  All  natural  phenomena  influence  each 
other  to  a  certain  extent.  But  the  volcanic  structure  of  the  soil 
makes  me  rather  uneasy.  I  cannot  but  regret  the  close  vicinity  of 
this  active  volcano.  If  the  lava  from  it  cannot  reach  us,  the 
earthquakes  connected  with  it  can.     Just  look  at  our  house  now  I  " 

"  Oh,  all  that  can  be  put  right  when  the  fine  weather  comes,  and 
you  will  make  it  all  the  stronger  for  the  painful  experience  you  have 
gained," 

''  Of  course  we  shall,  but  meanwhile  I  am  afraid  you  won't  find 
it  very  comfortable." 

"  Are  you  speaking  to  me,  Lieutenant  1  to  an  old  traveller  like 
me  ?  I  shall  imagine  myself  one  of  the  crew  of  a  small  vessel,  and 
now  that  it  does  not  pitch  and  toss,  I  shall  have  no  fear  of  being 
sea-sick." 

"  What  you  say  does  not  surprise  me,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  we  all 
know  your  grandeur  of  character,  your  moral  courage  and  imper- 
turbable good  temper.  You  have  done  much  to  help  us  all  to  bear 
our  troubles,  and  I  thank  you  in  my  own  name  and  that  of  my 
men." 

*'  You  flatter  me.  Lieutenant ;  you  flatter  me." 

*'  No,  no  ;  I  only  say  what  every  one  thinks.  But  may  I  ask  you 
one  question.  You  know  that  next  June,  Captain  Craventy  is  to 
send  us  a  convoy  with  provisions,  which  will  take  back  our  furs  to 
Fort  Reliance.  I  suppose  our  friend  Thomas  Black,  after  having 
seen  his  eclipse,  will  return  with  the  Captain's  men.  Do  you  meait 
to  accompany  him  1  " 


The  ice  burst"  ^c.  —  Page  153. 


FIVE  MONTHS  MORE.  I53 


"  Do  you  mean  to  send  me  back  ? "  asked  the  lady  with  a 
smile. 

*'  O  madam  !  " 

"  Well,  my  superior  officer,"  replied  Mrs  Barnett,  extending  her 
hand  to  the  Lieutenant,  "  I  shall  ask  you  to  allow  me  to  spend 
another  winter  at  Fort  Hope.  Next  year  one  of  the  Company's 
ships  will  probably  anchor  off  Cape  Bathurst,  and  I  shall  return  in 
it.  Having  come  overland,  I  should  like  to  go  back  by  Behring 
Strait." 

The  Lieutenant  was  delighted  with  his  companion's  decision. 
The  two  had  become  sincerely  attached  to  each  other,  and  had 
many  tastes  and  qualities  in  common.  The  hour  of  separation 
could  not  fail  to  be  painful  to  both  ;  and  who  could  tell  what  further 
trials  awaited  'the  colonists,  in  which  their  combined  influence 
might  sustain  the  courage  of  the  rest  1 

On  the  20th  January  the  sun  at  last  reappeared,  and  the  Polar 
night  was  at  an  end.  It  only  remained  above  the  horizon  for  a 
few  minutes,  and  was  greeted  with  joyous  hurrahs  by  the  settlers. 
From  this  date  the  days  gradually  increased  in  length. 

Throughout  the  month  of  February,  and  until  the  15th  March, 
there  were  abrupt  transitions  from  fine  to  bad  weather.  The  fine 
days  were  so  cold  that  the  hunters  could  not  go  out ;.  and  in  the  bad 
weather  snowstorms  kept  them  in.  It  was  only  between  whiles 
that  any  outdoor  work  could  be  done  ;  and  long  excursions  were 
out  of  the  question.  There  was  no  necessity  for  them,  however,  as 
the  traps  were  in  full  activity.  In  the  latter  end  of  the  winter, 
martens,  foxes,  ermines,  wolverines,  and  other  valuable  animals 
were  taken  in  large  numbers,  and  the  trappers  had  plenty  to  do. 

In  March  an  excursion  was  ventured  on  as  far  as  Walruses'  Bay 
and  it  was  noticed  that  the  earthquake  had  considerably  altered  the 
form  of  the  cliffs,  which  were  much  depressed ;  whilst  the  igneous 
hills  beyond,  with  their  summits  wrapped  in  mist,  seemed  to  look 
larger  and  more  threatening  than  ever. 

About  the  20th  March  the  hunters  sighted  the  first  swans  migrat- 
ing from  the  south,  and  uttering  shrill  cries  as  they  flew.  A  few 
snow  buntings  and  winter  hawks  were  also  seen.  But  the  ground 
was  still  covered  with  thick,  layers  of  frozen  snow,  and  the  sun 
was  powerless  to  melt  the  hard  surface  of  the  lake  and  sea. 

The  breaking  up  of  the  frost  did  not  commence  until  early  in 
April.     The  ice  burst  with  a  noise  like  the  discharge  of  artillery. 


54  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Sudden  changes  took  place  in  the  appearance  of  the  icebergs  : 
broken  by  collisions,  undermined  by  the  action  of  the  water  once 
more  set  free,  huge  masses  rolled  over  with  an  awful  crash,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  displacement  of  their  centre  of  gravity,  causing 
fractures  and  fissures  in  the  ice-fields  which  greatly  accelerated  their 
breaking  up. 

At  this  time  the  mean  temperature  was  32°  above  zero,  so 
that  the  upper  layer  of  ice  on  the  beach  rapidly  dissolved,  whilst 
the  chain  of  icebergs,  drifted  along  by  the  currents  of  the  Polar 
Sea,  gradually  drew  back  and  became  lost  in  the  fogs  on  the 
horizon.  On  the  15th  April  the  sea  was  open,  and  a  vessel  from 
the  Pacific  Ocean  coming  through  Behring  Strait,  could  certainly 
have  skirted  along  the  American  coast,  and  have  anchored  oflf  Cape 
Bathurst. 

Whilst  the  ice  was  disappearing  from  the  ocean.  Lake  Bamett 
was  also  laying  aside  its  slippery  armour,  much  to  the  delight 
of  the  thousands  of  ducks  and  other  water-fowl  which  began  to 
teem  upon  its  banks.  As  Hobson  had  foreseen,  however,  the  level 
of  the  lake  was  affected  by  the  slope  of  the  soil.  That  part  of  the 
beach  which  stretched  away  from  the  enceinte  of  the  fort,  and 
was  bounded  on  the  east  by  wooded  hills,  had  increased  considerably 
in  extent ;  and  Hobson  estimated  that  the  waters  of  the  lake  had 
receded  five  hundred  paces  on  the  eastern  bank.  As  a  natural  con- 
sequence, the  water  on  the  western  side  had  risen,  and  if  not  held 
back  by  some  natural  barrier,  would  inundate  the  country. 

On  the  whole,  it  was  fortunate  that  the  slope  was  from  east  to 
west ;  for  had  it  been  from  west  to  east,  the  factory  must  have  been 
submerged. 

The  little  river  dried  up  as  soon  as  the  thaw  set  free  its  waters. 
It  might  almost  be  said  to  have  run  back  to  its  source,  so  abrupt 
was  the  slope  of  its  bed  from  north  to  south. 

"We  have  now  to  erase  a  river  from  the  map  of  the  Arctic 
regions,"  observed  Hobson  to  his  Sergeant.  "  It  would  have  been 
embarrassing  if  we  had  been  dependent  on  the  truant  for  drinkable 
water.  Fortunately  we  have  still  Lake  Barnett,  and  I  don't  suppose 
our  thirsty  men  will  drain  it  quite  dry." 

"Yes,  we've  got  the  lake,"  replied  the  Sergeant ;  '*but  do  you 
think  its  waters  have  remained  sweet  ? " 

Hobson  started  and  looked  at  his  subordinate  with  knitted  brows. 
It  had  not  occurred  to  him  that  a  fissure  in  the  ground  n\ight  have 


Fl  VE  MON  TliS  MORE,  1 5  5 


established  a  communication  between  the  lake  and  the  sea  !  Should 
it  be  so,  ruin  must  ensue,  and  the  factory  would  inevitably  have  to 
be  abandoned  after  all. 

The  Lieutenant  and  Hobson  rushed  to  the  lake  and  found  their 
fears  groundless.     Its  waters  were  still  sweet. 

Early  in  May  the  snow  had  disappeared  in  several  places,  and  a 
scanty  vegetation  clothed  the  soil.  Tiny  mosses  and  slender  grasses 
timidly  pushed  up  their  stems  above  the  ground,  and  the  sorrel  and 
cochlearia  seeds  which  Mrs  Joliffe  had  planted  began  to  sprout. 
The  carpet  of  snow  had  protected  them  through  the  bitter  winter ; 
but  they  had  still  to  be  saved  from  the  beaks  of  birds  and  the 
teeth  of  rodents.  This  arduous  and  important  task  was  confided  to 
the  worthy  Corporal,  who  acquitted  himself  of  it  with  the  zeal  and 
devotion  of  a  scarecrow  in  a  kitchen-garden. 

The  long  days  had  now  returned,  and  hunting  was  resumed. 

Hobson  was  anxious  to  have  a  good  stock  of  furs  for  the  agents 
from  Fort  Reliance  to  take  charge  of  when  they  arrived,  as  they 
would  do  in  a  few  weeks.  Marbre,  Sabine,  and  the  others,  therefore, 
commenced  the  campaign.  Their  excursions  were  neither  long  nor 
fatiguing:  they  never  went  further  than  two  miles  from ' Cape 
Bathurst,  for  they  had  never  before  been  in  a  district  so  well 
stocked  with  game ;  and  they  were  both  surprised  and  delighted. 
Martens,  reindeer,  hares,  caribous,  foxes,  and  ermines  passed  close 
to  their  guns. 

One  thing,  however,  excited  some  regret  in  the  minds  of  the 
colonists,  not  a  trace  was  to  be  seen  of  their  old  enemies  the  bears ; 
and  it  seemed  as  if  they  had  taken  all  their  relations  with  them. 
Perhaps  the  earthquake  had  frightened  them  away,  for  they  have  a 
very  delicate  nervous  organisation,  if  such  an  expression  can  be 
applied  to  a,  mere  quadruped.  It  was  a  pity  they  were  gone,  for 
vengeance  could  not  be  wreaked  upon  them. 

The  month  of  May  was  very  wet.  Rain  and  snow  succeeded  each 
other.  The  mean  temperature  was  only  41°  above  zero.  Fogs 
were  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  so  thick  that  it  would  often  have 
been  imprudent  to  go  any  distance  from  the  fort.  Petersen  and 
Kellet  once  caused  their  companions  grave  anxiety  by  disappearing 
for  forty-eight  hours.  They  had  lost  their  way,  and  turned  to  the 
south  when  they  thought  they  were  near  to  Walruses'  Bay.  They 
came  back  exhausted  and  half  dead  with  hunger. 

June  came  at  last,  and  with  it  really  fine  warm  weather.     The 


156  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

colonists  were  able  to  leave  off  their  winter  clothing.  They  worked 
zealously  at  repairing  the  house,  the  foundations  of  which  had  to 
be  propped  up ;  and  Hobson  also  ordered  the  construction  of  a  large 
magazine  at  the  southern  corner  of  the  court.  The  quantity  of 
game  justified  the  expenditure  of  time  and  labour  involved  :  the 
number  of  furs  collected  was  already  considerable,  and  it  was 
necessary  to  have  some  place  set  aside  in  which  to  keep  them. 

The  Lieutenant  now  expected  every  day  the  arrival  of  the 
detachment  to  be  sent  by  Captain  Craventy.  A  good  many  things 
were  still  required  for  the  new  settlement.  The  stores  were  getting 
low;  and  if  the  party  had  left  the  fort  in  the  beginning  of  May,  they 
ought  to  reach  Cape  Bathur.st  towards  the  middle  of  June.  It  will 
be  remembered  that  the  Captain  and  his  Lieutenant  had  fixed  upon 
the  cape  as  the  spot  of  rendezvous,  and  Hobson  having  constructed 
his  fort  on  it,  there  was  no  fear  of  the  reinforcements  failing  to  find 
him. 

From  the  15th  June  the  districts  surrounding  the  cape  were 
carefully  watched.  The  British  flag  waved  from  the  summit  of  the 
cliff,  and  could  be  seen  at  a  considerable  distance.  It  was  probable 
that  the  convoy  would  follow  the  Lieutenant's  example,  and  skirt 
along  the  coast  from  Coronation  Gulf.  If  not  exactly  the  shortest, 
it  was  the  surest  route,  at  a  time  when,  the  sea  being  free  from  ice, 
the  coast-line  could  be  easily  followed. 

When  the  month  of  June  passed  without  the  arrival  of  the 
expected  party,  Hobson  began  to  feel  rather  uneasy,  especially  as 
the  country  again  became  wrapped  in  fogs.  He  began  to  fear  that 
the  agents  might  lose  their  way,  and  often  talked  the  matter  over 
with  Mrs  Barnett,  Mac-Nab,  and  Rae. 

Thomas  Black  made  no  attempt  to  conceal  his  uneasiness,  for  he 
was  anxious  to  return  with  the  party  from  Fort  Reliance  as  soon  as 
he  had  seen  his  eclipse  ;  and  should  anything  keep  them  back  from 
coming,  he  would  have  to  resign  himself  to  another  winter,  a 
prospect  which  did  not  please  him  at  all  ;  and  in  reply  to  his  eager 
questions,  Hobson  could  say  little  to  reassure  him. 

The  4th  July  dawned.  No  news  !  Some  men  sent  to  the  south- 
east to  reconnoitre,  returned,  bringing  no  tidings. 

Either  the  agents  had  never  started,  or  they  had  lost  their  way. 
The  latter  hypothesis  was  unfortunately  the  more  probabla 
Hobson  knew  Captain  Craventy,  and  felt  confident  that  he  had  sent 
off  the  convoy  at  the  time  named. 


"  Us  waters  were  still  sweet."  —  Page  155. 


I 
FIVE  MONTHS  MORE.  157 

His  increasing  anxiety  will  therefore  be  readily  understood.  The 
fine  season  was  rapidly  passing  away.  Another  two  months  and 
the  Arctic  winter,  with  its  bitter  winds,  its  whirlpools  of  snow,  and 
its  long  nights,  would  again  set  in. 

Hobson,  as  we  well  know,  was  not  a  man  to  yield  to  misfortune 
without  a  struggle.  Something  must  be  done,  and  with  the  ready 
concurrence  of  the  astronomer  the  following  plan  was  decided  on. 

It  was  now  the  5th  July.  In  another  fortnight — July  18th — the 
solar  eclipse  was  to  take  place,  and  after  that  Thomas  Black  would 
be  free  to  leave  Fort  Hope.  It  was  therefore  agreed  that  if  by  that 
time  the  agents  had  not  arrived,  a  convoy  of  a  few  men  and  four  or 
five  sledges  should  leave  the  factory,  and  make  for  the  Great  Slave 
Lake,  taking  with  them  some  of  the  most  valuable  furs  :  and  if  no 
accident  befell  them,  they  might  hope  to  arrive  at  F .it  Reli- 
ance in  six  weeks  at  the  latest — that  is  to  say,  towards  the  end 
of  August. 

This  matter  settled,  Thomas  Black  shrank  back  into  his  shell,  and 
became  once  more  the  man  of  one  idea,  awaiting  the  moment  when 
the  moon,  passing  between  the  orb  of  day  and  "  himself/'  should 
totally  eclipse  the  disc  of  the  sun. 


CHAPTER  XXIIL 

THE   ECLIPSE   OF   THE    iZTH  JULY   i860. 
^HE  mists  did  not  disperse.     The  sun  shone  feebly  throngh 


thick  curtains  of  fog,  and  the  astronomer  began  to  have  a 
great  dread  lest  the  eclipse  should  not  be  visible  after  alL 
Sometimes  the  fog  was  so  dense  that  the  summit  of  the  cape  could 
not  be  seen  from  the  court  of  the  fort. 

Hobson  got  more  and  more  uneasy.  He  had  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  the  convoy  had  gone  astray  in  the  strange  land;  moreover, 
vague  apprehensions  and  sad  forebodings  increased  his  depression. 
He  could  not  look  into  the  future  with  any  confidence — why,  he 
would  have  found  it  impossible  to  explain.  Everything  apparently 
combined  to  reassure  him.  In  spite  of  the  great  rigour  of  the  winter, 
his  little  colony  was  in  excellent  health.  No  quarrels  had  arisen 
amongst  the  colonists,  and  their  zeal  and  enthusiasm  was  still 
unabated.  The  surrounding  districts  were  well  stocked  with  game, 
the  harvest  of  furs  had  surpassed  his  expectations,  and  the  Company 
might  well  be  satisfied  with  the  result  of  the  enterprise.  Even  if  no 
fresh  supply  of  provisions  arrived,  the  resources  of  the  country  were 
such  that  the  prospect  of  a  second  winter  need  awake  no  misgivings. 
Why,  then,  was  Lieutenant  Hobson  losing  hope  and  confidence? 

He  and  Mrs  Barnett  had,  many  a  talk  on  the  subject ;  and  the 
latter  did  all  she  could  to  raise  the  drooping  spirits  of  the  command- 
ing ofllcer,  urging  upon  him  all  the  considerations  enumerated  above  ; 
and  one  day  walking  with  him  along  the  beach,  she  pleaded  the 
cause  of  Cape  Bathurst  and  the  factory,  built  at  the  cost  of  so  much 
suffering,  with  more  than  usual  eloquence. 

"  Yes,  yes,  madam,  you  are  right,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  but  we 
can't  help  our  presentiments.  I  am  no  visionary.  Twenty  times  in 
my  soldier's  life  I  have  been  in  critical  circumstances,  and  have  never 
lost  presence  of  mind  for  one  instant ;  and  now  for  the  first  time  in 
my  life  I  am  uneasy  about  the  future.      If  I  had  to  face  a  positive 


THE  ECLIPSE,  I  59 


danger,  I  should  have  no  fear  ;  but  a  vague  uncertain  peril  of  which 
I  have  only  a  presentiment " 

*'  What  danger  do  you  mean  %  "  inquired  Mrs  Barnett ;  *'  a  danger 
from  men,  from  animals,  or  the  elements  % " 

"  Of  animals  I  have  no  dread  whatever,  madam ;  it  is  for  them 
to  tremble  before  the  hunters  of  Cape  Bathurst,  nor  do  I  fear  men ; 
these  districts  are  frequented  by  none  but  Esquimaux,  and  the 
Indians  seldom  venture  so  far  north." 

"  Besides,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  the  Canadians,  whose 
arrival  you  so  much  feared  in  the  fine  season,  have  never  appeared." 

"  I  am  very  sorry  for  it,  madam." 

"  What !  you  regret  the  absence  of  the  rivals  who  are  so  evidently 
hostile  to  your  Company  ?  " 

**  Madam,  I  am  both  glad  and  sorry  that*  they  have  not  come; 
that  will  of  course  puzzle  you.  But  observe  that  the  expected  con- 
voy from  Fort  Reliance  has  not  arrived.  It  is  the  same  with  the 
agents  of  the  St  Louis  Fur  Company ;  they  might  have  come,  and 
they  have  not  done  so.  Not  a  single  Esquimaux  has  visited  this  part 
of  the  coast  during  the  summer  either  " 

"And  what  do  you  conclude  from  all  this?"  inquired  Mrs 
Barnett. 

"  I  conclude  that  it  is  not  so  easy  to  get  to  Cape  Bathurst  or  to 
Fort  Hope  as  we  could  wish." 

The  lady  looked  into  the  Lieutenant's  anxious  face,  struck  with 
the  melancholy  and  significant  intonation  of  the  word  easy. 

"Lieutenant  Hobson,"  she  said  earnestly,  "if  you  fear  neither 
men  nor  animals,  I  must  conclude  that  your  anxiety  has  reference 
to  the  elements." 

"  Madam,"  he  replied,  "  I  do  not  know  if  my  spirit  be  broken, 
or  if  my  presentiments  blind  me,  but  there  seems  to  me  to  be 
something  uncanny  about  this  district.  If  I  had  known  it  better  I 
should  not  have  settled  down  in  it.  I  have  already  called  your 
attention  to  certain  peculiarities,  which  to  me  appear  inexplicable  ; 
the  total  absence  of  stones  everywhere,  and  the  clear-cut  line  of  the 
coast.  I  can't  make  out  about  the  primitive  formation  of  this  end 
of  the  continent,  I  know  that  the  vicinity  of  a  volcano  may 
cause  some  phenomena ;  but  you  remember  what  I  said  to  you  on 
the  subject  of  the  tides  % " 

"  Oh  yes,  perfectly." 

"  Where  the  sea  ought,  according  to  the  observations  of  explorers 


l6o  TtiB  FUR  COUNTRY, 


in  these  latitudes,  to  ha\re  risen  fifteen  or  twenty  feet,  it  has  scarcely 
risen  one  ! " 

"  Yes ;  but  that  you  accounted  for  by  the  irregular  distribution  of 
land  and  the  narrowness  of  the  straits." 

"  I  tried  to  account  for  it,  that  is  all,"  replied  Hobson  j  "  but  the 
day  before  yesterday  I  noticed  a  still  more  extraordinary  pheno- 
menon, which  I  cannot  even  try  to  explain,  and  I  doubt  if  the  greatest 
savants  could  do  so  either." 

Mrs  Barnett  looked  inquiringly  at  Hobson. 

"  What  has  happened'?  "  she  exclaimed. 

"  Well,  the  day  before  yesterday,  madam,  when  the  moon  was 
full,  and  according  to  the  almanac  the  tide  ought  to  have  been 
very  high,  the  sea  did  not  even  rise  one  foot,  as  it  did  before — it  did 
not  rise  at  all." 

*'  Perhaps  you  may  be  mistaken,"  observed  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  I  am  not  mistaken.  I  saw  it  with  my  own  eyes.  The  day 
before  yesterday,  July  4th,  there  was  positively  no  tide  on  the  coast 
of  Cape  Bathurst." 

*'  And  what  do  you  conclude  from  that  ? "  inquired  Mrs 
Barnett. 

"  I  conclude,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "  either  that  the 
laws  of  nature  are  changed,  or  that  this  district  is  very  peculiarly 
situated ...  or  rather  ...  I  conclude  nothing  ...  I  explain  nothing 
...  I  am  puzzled  ...  I  do  not  understand  it :  and  therefore  .  .  , 
therefore  I  am  anxious." 

Mrs  Barnett  asked  no  more  questions.  Evidently  the  total 
absence  of  tides  was  as  unnatural  and  inexplicable  as  would  be 
the  absence  of  the  sun  from  the  meridian  at  noon.  Unless  the 
earthquake  had  so  modified  the  conformation  of  the  coast  of  the 
Arctic  regions  as  to  account  for  it — but  no,  such  an  idea  could 
not  be  entertained  by  any  one  accustomed  to  note  terrestrial  pheno- 
mena. 

As  for  supposing  that  the  Lieutenant  could  be  mistaken  in  his 
observations,  that  was  impossible  ;  and  that  very  day  he  and  Mrs 
Barnett,  by  means  of  beach-marks  made  on  the  beach,  ascertained 
beyond  all  doubt  that  whereas  a  year  before  the  sea  rose  a  foot,  there 
was  now  no  tide  whatever. 

The  matter  was  kept  a  profound  secret,  as  Hobson  was  unwilling 
to  render  his  companions  anxious.  But  he  might  often  be  seen 
standing  motionless  and  silent  upon  the  summit  of  the  cape,  gazing 


He  might  be  seen  standing  motionless  and  silent"  ^c.  —  Page  100. 


THE  ECLIPSE,  l6l 


across  the  sea,  which  was  now  open,  and  stretched  away  as  far  as 
the  eye  could  reach. 

During  the  month  of  July  hunting  the  furred  animals  was  dis- 
continued, as  the  martens,  foxes,  and  others  had  already  lost  their 
winter  beauty.  No  game  was  brought  down  but  that  required  for 
food,  such  as  caribous,  Polar  hares,  &c.,  which,  strange  to  say, 
instead  of  being  scared  away  by  the  guns,  continued  to  multiply 
near  the  fort.  Mrs  Barnett  did  not  fail  to  note  this  peculiar,  and, 
as  the  event  proved,  significant  fact. 

No  change  had  taken  place  in  the  situation  on  the  15th  July. 
No  news  from  Fort  Reliance.  The  expected  convoy  did  not  arrive, 
and  Hobson  resolved  to  execute  his  project  of  sending  to  Captain 
Craventy,  as  Captain  Craventy  did  not  come  to  him. 

Of  course  none  but  Sergeant  Long  could  be  appointed  to  the 
command  of  the  little  troop,  although  the  faithful  fellow  would 
rather  not  have  been  separated  from  his  Lieutenant.  A  considerable 
time  must  necessarily  elapse  before  he  could  get  back  to  Fort  Hope. 
He  would  have  to  pass  the  winter  at  Fort  Reliance,  and  return  the 
next  summer.  Eight  months  at  least !  It  is  true  either  Mac-Nab 
or  Rae  could  have  taken  the  Sergeant's  place  ;  but  then  they  were 
married,  and  the  one  being  a  master  carpenter,  and  the  other  the 
only  blacksmith,  the  colonists  could  not  well  have  dispensed  with 
their  services. 

Such  were  the  grounds  on  which  the  Lieutenant  chose  Long,  and 
the  Sergeant  submitted  with  military  obedience.  The  four  soldiers 
elected  to  accompany  him  were  Belcher,  Pond,  Petersen,  and  Kellet, 
who  declared  their  readiness  to  start. 

Four  sledges  and  their  teams  of  dogs  were  told  off  for  the  service. 
They  were  to  take  a  good  stock  of  provisions,  and  the  most  valuable 
of  the  furs.  Foxes,  ermines,  martens,  swans,  lynxes,  musk-rats, 
gluttons,  &c.,  all  contributed  to  the  precious  convoy.  The  start 
was  fixed  for  the  mOming  of  the  19th  July,  the  day  after  the 
eclipse.  Of  course  Thomas  Black  was  to  accompany  the  Sergeant, 
and  one  sledge  was  to  convoy  his  precious  person  and  instruments. 

The  worthy  savant  endured  agonies  of  suspense  in  the  few  days 
preceding  the  phenomenon  which  he  awaited  with  so  much  im- 
patience. He  might  well  be  anxious ;  for  one  day  it  was  fine  and 
another  wet,  now  mists  obscured  the  sun,  or  thick  fogs  hid  it 
all  together ;  and  the  wind  veered  to  every  point  of  the  horizon  with 
provoking  fickleness  and  uncertainty.     What  if  during  the   few 


1 62  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


moments  of  the  eclipse  the  queen  of  the  night  and  the  great  orb 
of  day  should  be  wrapped  in  an  opaque  cloud  at  the  critical  moment, 
so  that  he,  the  astronomer,  Thomas  Black,  come  so  far  to  watch  the 
phenomenon,  should  be  unable  to  see  the  luminous  corona  or  the 
red  prominences !  How  terrible  would  be  the  disappointment !  How 
many  dangers,  how  much  suffering,  how  much  fatigue,  would  have 
been  gone  through  in  vain  ! 

"  To  have  come  so  far  to  see  the  moon,  and  not  to  see  it !  "  he 
cried  in  a  comically  piteous  tone. 

No,  he  could  not  face  the  thought,  and  early  of  an  evening  he 
would  climb  to  the  summit  of  the  cape  and  gaze  into  the  heavens. 
The  fair  Phoebe  was  nowhere  to  be  seen  ;  for  it  being  three  days 
before  new  moon,  she  was  accompanying  the  sun  in  his  daily  course, 
and  her  light  was  quenched  in  his  beams. 

Many  a  time  did  Thomas  Black  relieve  his  over-burdened  heart 
by  pouring  out  his  troubles  to  Mrs  Barnett.  The  good  lady  felt 
sincerely  sorry  for  him,  and  one  day,  anxious  to  reassure  him,  she 
told  him  that  the  barometer  showed  a  certain  tendency  to  rise,  and 
reminded  him  that  they  were  in  the  fine  season. 

**  The  fine  season  !  "  cried  the  poor  astronomer,  shrugging  his 
shoulders.  "  Who  can  speak  of  a  fine  season  in  such  a  country  aa 
this?" 

"  Well,  but,  Mr  Black,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  suppose,  for  the  sake- 
of  argument,  that  you  miss  this  eclipse  by  any  unlucky  chance,  I 
suppose  there  will  be  another  some  day.  The  eclipse  of  July  18th 
will  not  be  the  last  of  this  century." 

"  No,  madam,  no,"  returned  Black  ;  "  there  will  be  five  more  total 
eclipses  of  the  sun  before  1900.  One  on  the  31st  December  1861, 
which  will  be  total  for  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  the  Mediterranean,  and  the 
Sahara  Desert  \  a  second  on  the  22d  December  1870,  total  for  the 
Azores,  the  south  of  Spain,  Algeria,  Sicily,  and  Turkey ;  a  third  on  the 
19th  August  1887,  total  for  the  north-east  of  Germany,  the  south  of 
Russia,  and  Central  Asia ;  a  fourth  on  the  9th  August  1896,  visible  in 
Greenland,  Lapland,  and  Siberia  ;  and  lastly,  a  fifth  on  the  28th  May 
1900,  which  will  be  total  for  the  United  States,  Spain,  Algeria,  and 
Egypt." 

"  Well,  Mr  Black,"  resumed  Mrs  Barnett,  "  if  you  lose  the 
eclipse  of  the  18th  July  1860,  you  can  console  yourself  by  looking 
forward  to  that  of  the  31st  December  1861.  It  will  only  be  seven- 
teen months  I " 


THE  ECLIPSE,  1 63 


"  I  can  console  myself,  madam,"  said  the  astronomer  gravely,  "  by 
looking  forward  to  that  of  1896.  I  shall  have  to  wait  not  seven- 
teen months,  but    thirty-six  years  ! " 

"  May  I  ask  why  %  " 

"  Because  of  all  the  eclipses,  it  alone — ^that  of  9th  August  1896— 
will  be  total  for  places  in  high  latitudes,  such  as  Lapland,  Siberia, 
or  Greenland." 

"  But  what  is  the  special  interest  of  an  observation  taken  in  these 
elevated  latitudes?" 

"  What  special  interest  ?  "  cried  Thomas  Black ;  "  why,  a  scientific 
interest  of  the  highest  importance.  Eclipses  have  very  rarely  been 
watched  near  the  Pole,  where  the  sun,  being  very  little  above  the 
horizon,  is  apparently  considerably  increased  in  size.  The  disc  of 
the  moon  which  is  to  intervene  between  us  and  the  sun  is  subject 
to  a  similar  apparent  extension,  and  therefore  it  may  be  that  the 
red  prominences  and  the  luminous  corona  can  be  more  thoroughly 
examined.  This,  madam,  is  why  I  have  travelled  all  this  distance  to 
watch  the  eclipse  above  the  seventieth  parallel.  A  similar  opportunity 
will  not  occur  until  1896,  and  who  can  tell  if  I  shall  be  alive  then  ?  '* 

To  this  burst  of  enthusiasm  there  was  no  reply  to  be  made  ;  and 
the  astronomer's  anxiety  and  depression  increased,  for  the  inconstant 
weather  seemed  more  and  more  disposed  to  play  him  some  ill-natured 
trick. 

It  was  very  fine  on  the  16th  July,  but  the  next  day  it  was  cloudy 
and  misty,  and  Thomas  Black  became  really  ill.  The  feverish  state 
he  had  been  in  for  so  long  seemed  likely  to  result  in  a  serious 
illness.  Mrs  Bamett  and  Hobson  tried  in  vain  to  soothe  him,  and 
Sergeant  Long  and  the  others  could  not  understand  how  it  was 
possible  to  be  so  unhappy  for  "love  of  the  moon." 

At  last  the  great  day — the  18th  July — dawned.  According  to 
the  calculations  of  astronomers,  the  total  eclipse  was  to  last  four 
minutes  thirty-seven  seconds — that  is  to  say,  from  forty-three 
minutes  fifteen  seconds  past  eleven  to  forty-seven  minutes  fifty- 
seven  seconds  past  eleven  A.M. 

"  What  do  I  ask  \  what  do  I  ask  % "  moaned  the  astronomer,  tear- 
ing his  hair.  "  Only  one  little  corner  of  the  sky  free  from  clouds  ! 
only  the  small  space  in  which  the  eclipse  is  to  take  place  !  And 
for  how  long  1  For  four  short  minutes !  After  that,  let  it  snow, 
let  it  thunder,  let  the  elements  break  loose  in  fury,  I  should  care  no 
more  for  it  all  than  a  snail  for  a  chronometer  ! " 


164  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


It  is  not  to  be  denied  that  Thomas  Black  had  some  grounds 
for  his  fears.  It  really  seemed  likely  that  observations  would 
be  impossible.  At  daybreak  the  horizon  was  shrouded  in  mists. 
Heavy  clouds  were  coming  up  from  the  south,  and  covering  the 
very  portion  of  the  sky  in  which  the  eclipse  was  to  take  place. 
But  doubtless  the  patron  saint  of  astronomers  had  pity  on  poor 
Black,  for  towards  eight  o'clock  a  slight  wind  arose  and  swept  the 
mists  and  clouds  from  the  sky,  leaving  it  bright  and  clear ! 

A  cry  of  gratitude  burst  from  the  lips  of  the  astronomer,  and 
his  heart  beat  high  with  newly -awakened  hope.  The  sun  shone 
brightly,  and  the  moon,  so  soon  to  darken  it,  was  as  yet  invisible 
in  its  glorious  beams. 

Thomas  Black's  instruments  were  already  carefully  placed  on  the 
promontory,  and  having  pointed  them  towards  the  southern  horizon, 
he  awaited  the  event  with  calmness  restored,  and  the  coolness 
necessary  for  taking  his  observation.  What  was  there  left  to  fear  % 
Nothing,  unless  it  was  that  the  sky  might  fall  upon  his  head  !  At 
nine  o'clock  there  was  not  a  cloud,  not  a  vapour  left  upon  the  sky 
from  the  zenith  to  the  horizon.  Never  were  circumstances  more 
favourable  to  an  astronomical  observation. 

The  whole  party  were  anxious  to  take  part  in  the  observation, 
and  all  gathered  round  the  astronomer  on  Cape  Bathurst.  Gradu- 
ally the  sun  rose  above  the  horizon,  describing  an  extended  arc 
above  the  vast  plain  stretching  away  to  the  south.  No  one  spoke, 
but  awaited  the  eclipse  in  solemn  silence. 

Towards  half-past  nine  the  eclipse  commenced.  The  disc  of  the 
moon  seemed  to  graze  that  of  the  sun.  But  the  moon's  shadow  was 
not  to  fall  completely  on  the  earth,  hiding  the  sun,  until  between  forty- 
three  minutes  past  eleven  and  forty-seven  minutes  fifty-seven  seconds 
past  eleven.  That  was  the  time  fixed  in  the  almanacs,  and  every  one 
knows  that  no  error  can  creep  into  them,  established,  verified,  and 
controlled  as  they  are  by  the  scientific  men  of  all  the  observatories 
in  the  world. 

The  astronomer  had  brought  a  good  many  glasses  with  him,  and 
he  distributed  them  amongst  his  companions,  that  all  might  watch 
the  progress  of  the  phenomenon  without  injury  to  the  eyes. 

The  brown  disc  of  the  moon  gradually  advanced,  and  terrestrial 
objects  began  to  assume  a  peculiar  orange  hue,  whilst  the  atmo- 
sphere on  the  zenith  completely  changed  colour.  At  a  quarter-past 
ten  half  the  disc  of  the  sun  was  darkened,  and  a  few  dogs  which 


All  might  watch  the  progress  of  the  phenomenon-^''  ^c.  —  Page  164. 


THE  ECLIPSE,  1 65 


happened  to  "be  at  liberty  showed  signs  of  uneasiness  and  howled 
piteously.  The  wild  ducks,  thinking  night  had  come,  began  to 
utter  sleepy  calls  and  to  seek  their  nests,  and  the  mothers  gathered 
their  little  ones  under  their  wings.  The  hush  of  eventide  fell  upon 
all  animated  nature. 

At  eleven  o'clock  two-thirds  of  the  sun  were  covered,  and  all 
terrestrial  objects  became  a  kind  of  vinous  red.  A  gloomy  twilight 
set  in,  to  be  succeeded  during  the  four  minutes  of  totality  by  absolute 
darkness.  A  few  planets,  amongst  others  Mercury  and  Venus, 
began  to  appear,  and  some  constellations — Capella,  (,[.  and  ^  of 
I'aurus,  and  <p  ^f  Orion.     The  darkness  deepened  every  moment. 

Thomas  Black  remained  motionless,  with  his  eye  glued  to  the 
glass  of  his  instrument,  eagerly  watching  the  progress  of  the 
phenomenon.  At  forty-three  minutes  past  eleven  the  discs  of  the 
two  luminaries  ought  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  each  other,  that  of 
the  moon  completely  hiding  that  of  the  sun. 

"  Forty-three  minutes  past  eleven,"  announced  Hobson,  who  was 
attentively  watching  the  minute  hand  of  his  chronometer. 

Thomas  Black  remained  motionless,  stooping  over  his  instrument. 
Half  a  minute  passed,  and  then  the  astonomer  drew  himself  up, 
with  eyes  distended  and  eager.  Once  more  he  bent  over  the 
telescope,  and  cried  in  a  choked  voice — 

"  She  is  going !  she  is  going !  The  moon,  the  moon  is  going  ! 
She  is  disappearing,  running  away  ! " 

True  enough  the  disc  of  the  moon  was  gliding  away  from  that  of 
the  sun  without  having  completely  covered  it  ! 

The  astronomer  had  fallen  backwards,  completely  overcome.  The 
four  minutes  were  past.       The  luminous  corona  had  not  appeared  ! 

"  What  is  the  matter  %  "  inquired  Hobson. 

"The  matter  is,"  screamed  the  poor  astronomer,  "that  the 
eclipse  was  not  total — not  total  for  this  portion  of  the  globe  !  Do 
you  hear  1     It  was  not  to-t-a-1 !     I  say  not  to-t-a-1 !  ! " 

"  Then  your  almanacs  are  incorrect." 

"  Incorrect !  Don't  tell  that  to  me,  if  you  please.  Lieutenant 
Hobson  !  " 

"  But  what  then  %  "  said  Hobson,  suddenly  changing  countenance. 

"  Why,"  said  Black,  "  we  are  not  after  all  on  the  seventieth 
parallel!" 

"  Only  fancy !  "  cried  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  We  can  soon  prove  it,"  said  the  astronomer,  whose  eyes  flashed 


1 66  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


with  rage  and  disappointment.  "  The  sun  will  pass  the  meridian  in 
a  few  minutes.  .  .  .     My  sextant — quick  .   .  .  make  haste  ! " 

One  of  the  soldiers  rushed  to  the  house  and  fetched  the  instru- 
ment required. 

The  astronomer  pointed  it  upon  the  sun ;  he  watched  the  orb  of 
day  pass  the  meridian,  and  rapidly  noted  down  a  few  calculations. 

"  What  was  the  situation  of  Cape  Bathurst  a  year  ago,  when  we 
took  the  latitude?"  he  inquired. 

"  Seventy  degrees,  forty-four  minutes,  and  thirty-seven  seconds," 
replied  Hobson. 

"Well,  sir,  it  is  now  seventy- three  degrees,  seven  minutes,  and 
twenty  seconds !  You  see  we  are  not  under  the  seventieth  parallel !  " 

"  Or  rather  we  are  no  longer  there  ! "  muttered  Hobson. 

A  sudden  light  had  broken  in  upon  his  mind,  all  the  phenomena 
hitherto  so  inexplicable  were  now  explained. 

Cape  Bathurst  had  drifted  three  degrees  farther  north  since  the 
arrival  of  the  Lieutenant  and  his  companions  1 


END  OF  PABT  L 


PART  IT. 


CHAPTER  I. 

A    FLOATING    FORT, 

iND  so  Fort  Hope,  founded  by  Lieutenant  Hobson  on  the 
Y^  borders  of  the  Polar  Sea,  had  drifted  !  Was  the  courageous 
agent  of  the  Company  to  blame  for  this  %  No  ;  any  one 
might  have  been  deceived  as  he  had  been.  No  human  prevision 
could  have  foreseen  such  a  calamity.  He  meant  to  build  upon  a 
rock,  and  he  had  not  even  built  upon  sand.  The  peninsula  of 
Victoria,  which  the  best  maps  of  English  America  join  to  the 
Americaa  continent,  had  been  torn  suddenly  away  from  it.  This 
peninsula  was  in  fact  nothinsr  but  an  immense  piece  of  ice,  five 
hundred  square  miles  in  extent,  converted  by  successive  deposits 
of  sand  and  earth  into  apparently  solid  ground  well  clothed  with 
vegetation.  Connected  with  the  mainland  for  thousands  of  cen- 
turies, the  earthquake  of  the  8th  of  January  had  dragged  it  away 
from  its  moorings,  and  it  was  now  a  floating  island,  at  the  mercy  of 
the  winds  and  waves,  and  had  been  carried  along  the  Arctic  Ocean 
by  powerful  currents  for  the  last  three  months  ! 

Yes,  Fort  Hope  was  built  upon  ice  !  HoSson  at  once  under- 
stood the  mysterious  change  in  their  latitude.  The  isthmus — 
that  is  to  say,  the  neck  of  land  which  connected  the  peninsula  of 
Victoria  with  the  mainland — had  been  snapped  in  two  by  a  sub- 
terranean convulsion  connected  with  the  eruption  of  the  volcano 
some  months  before.  As  long  as  the  northern  winter  continued, 
the  frozen  sea  maintained  things  as  they  were ;  but  when  the  thaw 
came,  when  the  ice  fields,  melted  beneath  the  rays  of  the  sun,  and 
the  huge  icebergs,  driven  out  into  the  offing,  drew  back  to  the 
farthest  limits  of  the  horizon — when  the  sea  at  last  became  open,  the 
whole  peninsula  drifted  away,  with  its  woods,  its  cliffs,  its  pro- 
montories, its  inland  lagoon,  and  its  coast-line,  under  the  influence 
of  a  current  about  which  nothing  was  known.  For  months  this 
drifting  had   been  going  on  unnoticed  by  the  colonists,  who  even 


I/O  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


when  hunting  did  not  go  far  from  Fort  Hope.  Beach-marks,  if 
they  had  been  made,  would  have  been  useless ;  for  heavy  mists 
obscured  everything  at  a  short  distance,  the  ground  remained 
apparently  firm  and  motionless,  and  there  was,  in  short,  nothing  to 
hint  to  the  Lieutenant  and  his  men  that  they  had  become  islanders. 
The  position  of  the  new  island  with  regard  to  the  rising  and  setting 
of  the  sun  was  the  same  as  before.  Had  the  cardinal  points  changed 
their  position,  had  the  island  turned  round,  the  Lieutenant,  the 
astronomer,  or  Mrs  Barnett,  would  certainly  have  noticed  and 
understood  the  change  ;  but  in  its  course  the  island  had  thus  far 
followed  a  parallel  of  latitude,  and  its  motion,  though  rapid,  had 
been  imperceptible. 

Although  Hobson  had  no  doubt  of  the  moral  and  physical 
courage  and  determination  of  his  companions,  he  determined  not 
to  acquaint  them  with  the  truth.  It  would  be  time  enough  to  tell 
them  of  their  altered  position  when  it  had  been  thoroughly  studied. 
Fortunately  the  good  fellows,  soldiers  or  workmen,  took  little 
notice  of  the  astronomical  observations,  and  not  being  able  to  see 
the  consequences  involved,  they  did  not  trouble  themselves  about 
the  change  of  latitude  just  announced. 

The  Lieutenant  determined  to  conceal  his  anxiety,  and  seeing  no 
remedy  for  the  misfortune,  mastered  his  emotion  by  a  strong  effort, 
and  tried  to  console  Thomas  Black,  who  was  lamenting  his  dis- 
appointment and  tearing  his  hair. 

The  astronomer  had  no  doubt  about  the  misfortune  of  which 
he  was  the  victim.  .Not  having,  like  the  Lieutenant,  noticed  the 
peculiarities  of  the  district,  he  did  not  look  beyond  the  one  fact  in 
which  he  was  interested  :  on  the  day  fixed,  at  the  time  named,  the 
moon  had  not  completely  eclipsed  the  sun.  And  what  could  he 
conclude  but  that,  to  the  disgrace  of  observatories,  the  almanacs  were 
false,  and  that  the  long  desired  eclipse,  his  own  eclipse,  Thomas 
Black's,  which  he  had  come  so  far  and  through  so  many  dangers  to  see, 
had  not  been  "  total "  for  this  particular  district  under  the  seventieth 
parallel !  No,  no,  it  was  impossible  to  believe  it ;  he  could  not  face 
the  terrible  certainty,  and  he  was  overwhelmed  with  disappointment 
He  was  soon  to  learn  the  truth,  however. 

Meanwhile  Hobson  let  his  men  imagine  that  the  failure  of  the 
eclipse  could  only  interest  himself  and  the  astronomer,  and  they 
returned  to  their  ordinary  occupations ;  but  as  they  were  leaving, 
Corporal  Joliflfe  stopped  suddenly  and  said,  touching  his  cap — 


■  Fleojie,  sir,  it's  because  ufthepaj:'  —  Page  171. 


A  FLOATING  FORT.  ,  I7I 


"  May  I  ask  you  one  question,  sir  1  " 

"  Of  course,  Corporal ;  say  on/'  replied  the  Lieutenant,  who  won- 
dered what  was  coming. 

But  Joliffe  hesitated,  and  his  little  wife  nudged  his  elbow. 

"Well,  Lieutenant,"  resumed  the  Corporal,  "it's  just  about  the 
seventieth  degree  of  latitude — if  we  are  not  where  we  thought  we 
were. " 

The  Lieutenant  frowned, 

"  Well,"  he  replied  evasively,  "  we  made  a  mistake  in  our  reckon- 
ing, .  .  .  our  first  observation  was  wrong ;  .  .  .  but  what  does 
that  concern  you  1 " 

"  Please,  sir,  it 's  because  of  the  pay,"  replied  Joliffe  with  a 
scowl.  "You  know  well  enough  that  the  Company  promised  us 
double  pay." 

Hobson  drew  a  sigh  of  relief.  It  will  be  remembered  that  the 
men  had  been  promised  higher  pay  if  they  succeeded  in  settling  on 
or  above  the  seventieth  degree  north  latitude,  and  Joliffe,  who  always 
had  an  eye  to  the  main  chance,  had  looked  upon  the  whole  matter 
from  a  monetary  point  of  view,  and  was  afraid  the  bounty  would 
be  withheld. 

"  You  needn't  be  afraid,"  said  Hobson  with  a  smile ;  "  and  you 
can  tell  your  brave  comrades  that  our  mistake,  which  is  really 
inexplicable,  will  not  in  the  least  prejudice  your  interests.  We  are 
not  below,  but  above  the  seventieth  parallel,  and  so  you  will  get 
your  double  pay." 

"  Thank  you,  sir,  thank  you,"  replied  Joliffe  with  a  beaming  face. 
**  It  isn't  that  we  think  much  about  money,  but  that  the  money 
sticks  to  us." 

And  with  this  sage  remark  the  men  drew  off,  little  dreaming 
what  a  strange  and  fearful  change  had  taken  place  in  the  position 
of  the  country. 

Sergeant  Long  was  about  to  follow  the  others  when  Hobson 
stopped  him  with  the  words — 

"  Remain  here.  Sergeant  Long." 

The  subordinate  officer  turned  on  his  heel  and  waited  for  the 
Lieutenant  to  address  him. 

All  had  now  left  the  cape  except  Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  Thomas 
Black,  and  the  two  officers. 

Since  the  eclipse  Mrs  Barnett  had  not  uttered  a  word.  She 
looked  inquiringly  at  Hobson,  who  tried  to  avoid  meeting  her  eyes. 


1/2  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


The  brave  woman  seemed  rather  surprised  than  uneasy,  and  it  was 
doubtful  whether  or  no  she  understood  the  significance  of  what  had 
occurred.  Had  the  truth  flashed  upon  her  as  it  had  upon  the 
Lieutenant?  had  she,  like  him,  at  once  seen  all  the  consequences 
involved?  However  it  may  have  been,  she  said  not  a  word,  but 
leant  upon  Madge,  whose  arm  was  round  her  mistress's  waist 

The  astronomer  hurried  to  and  fro,  he  could  not  keep  still.  His 
hair  was  disordered ;  he  alternately  wrung  his  hands  and  let  them 
drop  against  his  sides.  Ejaculations  of  despair  burst  from  his 
lips ;  he  shook  his  fist  at  the  sun,  and  stared  at  it  with  distended 
eyes. 

Presently,  however,  he  grew  calmer  ;  he  felt  able  to  speak,  and 
with  crossed  arms,  flashing  eyes,  flushed  face,  and  frowning  brows, 
he  strode  up  to  the  Lieutenant. 

"  I  have  a  score  to  settle  with  you  !  "  he  cried.  "  Yes,  with  you. 
Lieutenant  Hobson,  agent  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  ! " 

The  tone,  the  attitude,  the  words,  were  uncommonly  like  a 
challenge ;  but  Hobson  felt  so  truly  sorry  for  the  poor  man's  dis- 
appointment that  he  could  not  take  offence,  and  only  looked  at  him 
quietly. 

"  Mr  Hobson,"  resumed  Black  with  ill-concealed  irritation,  "will 
you  be  kind  enough  to  inform  me  what  all  this  means?  Have  you 
anything  to  do  with  this  mystery  %  If  so,  sir,  you  have  struck  at 
those  higher  than  I,  and  you  may  come  to  repent  it !  " 

**  What  do  you  mean,  Mr  Black  ? "  inquired  Hobson  calmly. 

"I  mean,  sir,"  resumed  the  astronomer,  "that  you  were  ordered 
to  take  your  detachment  to  the  seventieth  parallel  of  lati- 
tude ! "  ' 

"  Or  beyond  it,"  said  Hobson. 

"  Beyond  it,  sir  I  "  cried  Black  ;  "  what  have  I  to  do  beyond  it? 
To  observe  the  total  eclipse  of  the  sun,  I  ought  not  to  have  crossed 
the  limits  included  in  the  seventieth  parallel ;  I  ought  to  have  remained 
in  that  portion  of  English  America,  and  here  I  am  three  degrees 
above  it ! " 

"  Well,  Mr  Black,"  replied  Hobson,  still  quietly,  "  we  were  mia- 
taken,  that  is  all ! " 

"  That  is  all !  "  screamed  the  astronomer,  exasperated  at  the  Lien- 
tenant's  calmness. 

"Let  me  remind  you,"  resumed  Hobson,  "that if  I  was  mistaken, 
you  shared  my  error — yes,  you^   Mr  Black ;  for  on   our  arrival  at 


He  shook  his  fist  at  the  sun."  —  Page  172. 


A  FLO  A  TING  FOR  T.  1/3 


Cape  Bathurst  we  took  the  latitude  of  our  position  together, — you 
with  your  instruments,  I  with  mine.  You  cannot,  then,  make  me 
responsible  for  a  mistake  you  made  yourself." 

At  this  reply  the  astronomer  was  taken  aback,  and  in  spite  of 
his  rage  had  not  a  word  to  say.  What  excuse  was  there  for  him  ? 
If  any  one  was  in  fault,  it  was  he  !  And  what  would  tlie  scientific 
men  of  Europe  think  of  him  ?  What  would  they  say  at  the  Green- 
wich Observatory  of  an  astronomer  so  awkward  as  to  make  a  mistake 
in  taking  latitude  1  Thomas  Black  make  an  error  of  two  or  three 
degrees  in  taking  the  altitude  of  the  sun  !  and  under  what  circum- 
stances !  When  the  result  would  be  to  make  him  lose  the  obser- 
vation of  a  total  eclipse,  under  conditions  which  would  not  be 
reproduced  for  a  very  long  time.  Thomas  Black  was  a  dishonoured 
savant  I 

"  But  how  ?"  he  exclaimed,  again  tearing  his  hair — "  how  could  I 
make  such  a  mistake  ?  Am  I  no  longer  fit  to  handle  a  sextant  ?  Can 
I  not  calculate  an  angle  ?  I  am  blind  !  and  if  so,  nothing  remains  for 
me  to  do,  but  to  fling  myself  head  foremost  from  this  cape  ! " 

"  Mr  Black,"  said  Hobson  gravely,  "  do  not  reproach  yourself — 
you  have  made  no  mistake — ^you  have  nothing  to  regret." 

"  Then  it 's  only  you  ! " 

"  I  am  no  more  guilty  than  you  are.  Listen  to  me,  I  beg  of  you, 
and  you  too,"  he  added,  turning  to  Mrs  Barnett,  "  and  you,  and  you, 
Madge,  and  Sergeant  Long,  but  keep  what  I  tell  you  a  profound 
secret.     There  is  no  need  to  frighten  and  dishearten  our  comrades." 

The  four  drew  near  to  the  Lieutenant  without  a  word,  but  there 
was  a  tacit  agreement  to  keep  the  secret  about  to  be  revealed  to 
them. 

"  My  friends,"  said  Hobson,  "  a  year  ago,  on  our  arrival  at  Cape 
Bathurst,  we  took  our  bearings,  and  found  that  we  were  on  the 
seventieth  degree  of  latitude,  and  if  we  are  now  beyond  that  degree 
it  is  because  Cape  Bathurst  has  drifted  I  " 

"  Drifted  !  "  cried  Thomas  Black.  "  Tell  that  to  those  who  will 
believe  it !     When  was  ;i  large  cape  known  to  drift  before  1 " 

"It  is  true,  though,  Mr  Black,"  replied  Hobson  gravely.  "The 
whole  of  the  peninsula  of  Victoria  is  nothing  more  than  an  island 
of  ice.  The  earthquake  separated  it  from  the  American  continent, 
and  now  one  of  the  great  Arctic  currents  is  bearing  it  along.** 

"  Where  1 "  asked  Sergeant  Long. 

**  Where  it  pleases  God  for  it  to  go,"  replied  the  Lieutenant, 


174  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


For  some  time  not  another  word  was  spoken.  All  involuntarily 
turned  towards  the  south,  where  the  broken  isthmus  was  situated  ; 
but  from  their  position  they  could  only  see  the  sea  horizon  on  the 
north.  Had  Cape  Bathurst  been  situated  a  few  hundred  feet  more 
above  the  level  of  the  ocean,  they  would  have  been  able  at  a  glance 
to  ascertain  the  limits  of  their  island  home. 

All  were  deeply  moved  at  the  sight  of  Fort  Hope  and  all  its 
occupants  borne  away  from  all  solid  ground,  and  floating  at  the 
mercy  of  winds  and  waves. 

"  Then,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett  at  last,  "all  the  strange 
phenomena  you  observed  are  now  explained  ! " 

"  Yes,  madam,"  he  replied,  "  everything  is  explained.  The 
peninsula  of  Victoria,  now  an  island,  which  we  thought  firm  ground 
with  an  immovable  foundation,  is  nothing  more  than  a  vast  sheet  of 
ice  welded  for  centuries  to  the  American  continent.  Gradually  the 
wind  has  strewn  it  with  earth  and  sand,  and  scattered  over  them 
the  seeds  from  which  have  sprung  the  trees  and  mosses  with  which 
it  is  clothed.  Rain-water  filled  the  lagoon,  and  produced  the  little 
river ;  vegetation  transformed  the  appearance  of  the  ground  ;  but 
beneath  the  lake,  beneath  the  soil  of  earth  and  sand — in  a  word, 
beneath  our  feet  is  a  foundation  of  ice,  which  floats  upon  the  water 
by  reason  of  its  being  specifically  lighter  than  it.  Yes,  it  is  a  sheet 
of  ice  which  bears  us  up,  and  is  carrying  us  away  ;  and  this  is  why  we 
have  not  found  a  single  flint  or  stone  upon  its  surface  !  This  is  why 
its  shores  are  perpendicular,  this  is  why  we  found  ice  ten  feet  below 
the  surface  when  we  dug  the  reindeer  pit — this,  in  short,  is  why  the 
tide  was  not  noticeable  on  the  peninsula,  which  rose  and  sank  with 
the  ebb  and  flow  of  the  waves  !  " 

"  Everything  is  indeed  explained,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  and  your 
presentiments  did  not  deceive  you ;  but  can  you  explain  why  the 
tides,  which  do  not  aflTect  us  at  all  now,  were  to  a  slight  extent  per* 
ceptible  on  our  arrival  % " 

"  Simply  because,  madam,  on  our  arrival  the  peninsula  was  still 
connected  by  means  of  its  flexible  isthmus  with  the  American 
continent.  It  offered  a  certain  resistance  to  the  current,  and  on  its 
northern  shores  the  tide  rose  two  feet  beyond  low- water  mark,  instead 
of  the  twenty  we  reasonably  expected.  But  from  the  moment  when 
the  earthquake  broke  the  connecting  link,  from  the  moment  when 
tlie  peninsula  became  an  island  free  from  all  control,  it  rose  and  sank 
with  the  ebb  and  flow  of  the  tide;  and,  as  we  noticed  together 


A  FLOATING  FORT.  175 


at  full  moon  a  few  days  ago,  no  sensible  difference  was  produced  on 
our  shores." 

In  spite  of  his  despair,  Thomas  Black  listened  attentively  to  Hob- 
son's  explanations,  and  could  not  but  see  the  reasonableness  of  his 
deductions  ;  but  he  was  furious  at  such  a  rare,  unexpected,  and,  as  he 
said,  "ridiculous"  phenomenon  occurring  just  so  as  to  make  him 
miss  the  eclipse,  and  he  said  not  a  word,  but  maintained  a  gloomy, 
even  haughty  silence. 

"  Poor  Mr  Black,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  it  must  be  owned  that  an 
astronomer  was  never  more,  hardly  used  than  you  since  the  world 
began ! " 

"  In  any  case,  however,"  said  Hobson,  turning  to  her,  **  we  have 
neither  of  us  anything  to  reproach  ourselves  with.  No  one  can  find 
fault  with  us.  Nature  alone  is  to  blame.  The  earthquake  cut  ofl 
our  communication  with  the  mainland,  and  converted  our  peninsula 
into  a  floating  island  ;  and  this  explains  why  the  furred  and  other 
animals,  imprisoned  like  ourselves,  have  become  so  numerous  round 
the  fort ! " 

'*  This,  too,  is  why  the  rivals  you  so  much  dreaded  have  not  visited 
us.  Lieutenant !  '^  exclaimed  Madge. 

"  And  this,"  added  the  Sergeant,  "  accounts  for  the  non-arrival 
of  the  convoy  sent  to  Cape  Bathurst  by  Captain  Craventy  ! " 

"  And  this  is  why,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  looking  at  the  Lieutenant, 
"I  must  give  up  all  hope  of  returning  to  Europe  this  year  at 
least ! " 

The  tone  of  voice  in  which  the  lady  made  this  last  remark  showed 
that  she  resigned  herself  to  her  fate  more  readily  than  could  have 
been  expected.  She  seemed  suddenly  to  have  made  up  her  mind 
to  make  the  best  of  the  situation,  which  would  no  doubt  give  her 
an  opportunity  of  making  a  great  many  interesting  observations. 
And  after  all,  what  good  would  grumbling  have  done  %  Recrimina- 
tions were  worse  than  useless.  They  could  not  have  altered  their 
position,  or  have  checked  the  course  of  the  wandering  island,  and 
there  was  no  means  of  reuniting  it  to  a  continent.  No;  God  alone 
could  decide  the  future  of  Fort  Hope.  They  must  bow  to  His 
will. 


CHAPTER  II. 
WHERE   ARE    W eI 

He  could  not  ascertain  ^^'^^f^':  ^^^^Z^^i^^^^^ 
ginal  na„,e  being  retaWuntU^^^^^^^^  ^^  ^^^  ^„„ 

^L^eS  ^Z.  t;X  nJon,  and   two  Ho.  angles 
must  be  ~'f  ,„a  Black  took  the  height  of  the 

Maage  declared  she  was  qu^e  r^.gn     ,      d  e. Jently  ^^^^„^^  ^  ^^^ 

of  her  mistress,  ''t ''.^T  ,t' ".""fftLgs  and  trials  her  "dear  girl" 
could  not  bear  to   hink  of  tbe  Buffermgs  a  ^        ^^^^ 

nnght  have  to  go  throughj  Je   uture^  ^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^,     g,^ 

%Td™;  threatened  the  island  floating  along  the  coast  of 

^°;:  wlt'iTy  the  currents  of  the  open  sea  to  the  high 
Polar  latitudes,  from  which  there  is  no  return. 


/  think  not."  —  Page  180. 


WHERE  ARE   WE^  I'J'J 


Or  the  current  would  take  it  to  the  south,  perhaps  through 
Behring  Strait  into  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

In  the  former  contingency,  the  colonists,  shut  in  by  ice  and  sur- 
rounded by  impassable  icebergs,  would  have  no  means  of  communi- 
cation with  their  fellow-creatures,  and  would  die  of  cold  and  hunger 
in  the  solitudes  of  the  north. 

In  the  latter  contingency,  Victoria  Island,  driven  by  the  currents 
to  the  western  waters  of  the  Pacific,  would  gradually  melt  and  go  to 
pieces  beneath  the  feet  of  its  inhabitants. 

In  either  case  death  would  await  the  Lieutenant  and  his  com- 
panions, and  the  fort,  erected  at  the  cost  of  so  much  labour  and  suf- 
fering, would  be  destroyed. 

But  it  was  scarcely  probable  that  either  of  these  events  would 
happen.  The  season  was  already  considerably  advanced,  and  in  less 
than  three  months  the  sea  would  again  be  rendered  motionless  by 
the  icy  hand  of  the  Polar  winter.  The  ocean  would  again  be  con- 
verted into  an  ice-field,  and  by  means  of  sledges  they  might  get  to 
the  nearest  land — the  coast  of  Russian  America  if  the  island  re- 
mained in  the  east,  or  the  coast  of  Asia  if  it  were  driven  to  the  west. 

"  For,"  added  Hobson,  "  we  have  absolutely  no  control  over  our 
floating  island.  Having  no  sail  to  hoist,  as  in  a  boat,  we  cannot 
guide  it  in  the  least;     Where  it  takes  us  we  must  go." 

All  that  Hobson  said  was  clear,  concise,  and  to  the  point.  There 
could  be  no  doubt  that  the  bitter  cold  of  winter  would  solder  Victoria 
Island  to  the  vast  ice-field,  and  it  was  highly  probable  that  it  would 
drift  neither  too  far  north  nor  too  far  south.  To  have  to  cross  a 
few  hundred  miles  of  ice  was  no  such  terrible  prospect  for  brave 
and  resolute  men  accustomed  to  long  excursions  in  the  Arctic 
regions.  It  would  be  necessary,  it  was  true,  to  abandon  Fort 
Hope — the  object  of  so  many  hopes,  and  to  lose  the  benefit  of  all 
their  exertions,  but  what  of  that?  The  factor}',  built  upon  a 
shifting  soil,  could  be  of  no  further  use  to  the  Company.  Sooner 
or  later  it  would  be  swallowed  up  by  the  ocean,  and  what  was  the 
good  of  useless  regrets  ?  It  must,  therefore,  be  deserted  as  soon  as 
circumstances  should  permit. 

The  only  thing  against  the  safety  of  the  colonists  was — and  the 
Lieutenant  dwelt  long  on  this  point — that  during  the  eight  or  nine 
weeks  which  must  elapse  before  the  solidification  of  the  Arctic 
Ocean,  Victoria  Island  might  be  dragged  too  far  north  or  south. 

M 


1/8  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Arctic  explorers  had  often  told  of  pieces  of  ice  being  drifted  an 
immense  distance  without  any  possibility  of  stopping  them. 

Everything  then  depended  on  the  force  and  direction  of  the 
currents  from  the  opening  of  Behring  Strait  \  and  it  would  be 
necessary  carefully  to  ascertain  all  that  a  chart  of  the  Arctic  Ocean 
could  tell.  Hobson  had  such  a  chart,  and  invited  all  who  were 
with  him  on  the  cape  to  come  to  his  room  and  look  at  it ;  but 
before  going  down  to  the  fort  he  once  more  urged  upon  them  the 
necessity  of  keeping  their  situation  a  secret. 

"It  is  not  yet  desperate,"  he  said,  "and  it  is  therefore  quite 
unnecessary  to  damp  the  spirits  of  our  comrades,  who  will  perhaps 
not  be  able  to  understand,  as  we  do,  all  the  chances  in  our 
favour." 

"  Would  it  not  be  prudent  to  build  a  boat  large  enough  to  hold 
us  all,  and  strong  enough  to  carry  us  a  few  hundred  miles  over  the 
sea  1 "  observed  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  It  would  be  prudent  certainly,"  said  Hobson,  "  and  we  will  do  it. 
I  must  think  of  some  pretext  for  beginning  the  work  at  once,  and 
give  the  necessary  orders  to  the  head  carpenter.  But  taking  to  a 
boat  can  only  be  a  forlorn  hope  when  everything  else  has  failed. 
We  must  try  all  we  can  to  avoid  being  on  the  island  when  the  ice 
breaks  up,  and  we  must  make  for  the  mainland  as  soon  as  ever  the 
sea  is  frozen  over." 

Hobson  was  right.  It  would  take  about  three  months  to  build 
a  thirty  or  thirty-five  ton  vessel,  and  the  sea  would  not  be  open 
when  it  was  finished.  *  It  would  be  very  dangerous  to  embark  the 
whole  party  when  the  ice  was  breaking  up  all  round,  and  he  would 
be  well  out  of  his  difiiculties  if  he  co;ild  get  across  the  ice  to  firm 
ground  before  the  next  thaw  set  in.  This  was  why  Hobson  thought 
a  boat  a  forlorn  hope,  a  desperate  makeshift,  and  every  one  agreed 
with  him. 

Secrecy  was  once  more  promised,  for  it  was  felt  that  Hobson 
was  the  best  judge  of  the  matter,  and  a  few  minutes  later  the  five 
conspirators  were  seated  together  in  the  large  room  of  Fort  Hope, 
which  was  then  deserted,  eagerly  examining  an  excellent  map  of  the 
oceanic  and  atmospheric  currents  of  the  Arctic  Ocean,  special  atten- 
tion being  naturally  given  to  that  part  of  the  Polar  Sea  between 
Cape  Bathurst  and  Behring  Strait. 

Two  principal  currents  divide  the  dangerous  latitudes  compre- 
hended between  the  Polar  Circle  and  the  imperfectly  known  zone, 


'•  Tkii 


carp"titer  Jixed  vpou  tin;  beach,''  ^c. — 


Page  183. 


WHERE  ARE   WE  ?  1 79 


called  the  North-West  Passage  since  M'Clure's  daring  discovery — at 
least  only  two  have  been  hitherto  noticed  by  marine  surveyors. 

One  is  called  the  Kamtchatka  Current.  It  takes  its  rise  in  the 
oflSng  outside  the  peninsula  of  that  name,  follows  the  coast  of  Asia, 
and  passes  through  Behring  Strait,  touching  Cape  East,  a  promon- 
tory of  Siberia.  After  running  due  north  for  about  six  hundred 
miles  from  the  strait,  it  turns  suddenly  to  the  east,  pretty  nearly 
following  the  same  parallel  as  M'Clure's  Passage,  and  probably 
doing  much  to  keep  that  communication  open  for  a  few  months  in 
the  warm  season. 

The  other  current,  called  Behring  Current,  flows  just  the  other 
way.  After  running  from  east  to  west  at  about  a  hundred  miles  at 
the  most  from  the  coast,  it  comes  into  collision,  so  to  speak,  with 
the  Kamtchatka  Current  at  the  opening  of  the  strait,  and  turning  to 
the  south  approaches  the  shores  of  Russian  America,  crosses  Behring 
Sea,  and  finally  breaks  on  the  kind  of  circular  dam  formed  by  the 
xA.leutian  Islands. 

Hobson's  map  gave  a  very  exact  summary  of  the  most  recent 
nautical  observations,  so  that  it  could  be  relied  on. 

The  Lieutenant  examined  it  carefully  before  speaking,  and  then 
pressing  his  hand  to  his  head,  as  if  oppressed  by  some  sad  presenti- 
ment, he  observed — 

"Let  us  hope  that  fate  will  not  take  us  to  remote  northern 
latitudes.  Our  wandering  island  would  run  a  risk  of  never  return- 
ing." 

"  Why,  Lieutenant  ? "  broke  in  Mrs  Barnett. 
"  Why,  madam  1 "  replied  Hobson  ;  "  look  well  at  this  part  of  the 
Arctic  Ocean,  and  you  will  readily  understand  why.  Two  currents, 
both  dangerous  for  us,  run  opposite  ways.  When  they  meet,  the  island 
must  necessarily  become  stationary,  and  that  at  a  great  distance 
from  any  land.  At  that  point  it  will  have  to  remain  for  the  winter, 
and  when  the  next  thaw  sets  in,  it  will  either  follow  the  Kamt- 
chatka Current  to  the  deserted  regions  of  the  north-west,  or  it  will 
float  down  with  the  Behring  Current  to  be  swallowed  up  by  the 
Pacific  Ocean," 

"  That  will  not  happen.  Lieutenant,"  said  Madge  in  a  tone  of 
earnest  conviction  ;  "  God  would  never  permit  that." 

"I  can't  make  out,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "whereabouts  in  the 
Polar  Sea  we  are  at  this  moment ;  for  I  see  but  one  current  from 
the  offing  of  Cape  Bathnrst  which  bears  directly  to  the  north-west. 


l80  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


and  that  is  the  dangerous  Kamtchatka  Current.  Are  you  not  afraid 
that  it  has  us  in  its  fatal  embrace,  and  is  carrying  us  with  it  to  the 
shores  of  North  Georgia  ?  " 

"  I  think  not,"  replied  Hobson,  after  a  moment's  reflection. 

"Why  not?" 

"  Because  it  i?  a  very  rapid  current,  madam ;  and  if  we  had  been 
following  it  for  three  months,  we  should  have  had  some  land  in 
sight  by  this  time,  and  there  is  none,  absolutely  none  ! " 

"  Where,  then,  do  you  suppose  we  are  ? "  inquired  Mrs  Bamett. 

"  Most  likely  between  the  Kamtchatka  Current  and  the  coast, 
perhaps  in  some  vast  eddy  unmarked  upon  the  map." 

"  That  cannot  be.  Lieutenant,"  replied  Mrs  Bamett,  quickly. 

"Why  not,  madam,  why  not?" 

"  Because  if  Victoria  Island  were  in  an  eddy,  it  would  have 
veered  round  to  a  certain  extent,  and  our  position  with  regard  to 
the  cardinal  points  would  have  changed  in  the  last  three  months, 
which  is  certainly  not  the  case." 

"  You  are  right,  madam,  you  are  quite  right.  The  only  explana- 
tion I  can  think  of  is,  that  there  is  some  other  current,  not  marked 
on  our  map.  Oh,  that  to-morrow  were  here  that  I  might  find  out 
our  longitude  j  really  this  uncertainty  is  terrible  !  " 

"  To-morrow  will  come,"  observed  Madge. 

There  was  nothing  to  do  but  to  wait.  The  party  therefore 
separated,  all  returning  to  their  ordinary  occupations.  Sergeant 
Long  informed  his  comrades  that  the  departure  for  Fort  Reliance, 
fixed  for  the  next  day,  was  put  off.  He  gave  as  reasons  that  the 
season  was  too  far  advanced  to  get  to  the  southern  factory  before 
the  great  cold  set  in,  that  the  astronomer  was  anxious  to  complete  his 
meteorological  observations,  and  would  therefore  submit  to  another 
winter  in  the  north,  that  game  was  so  plentiful  provisions  from 
Fort  Reliance  were  not  needed,  &c.,  &c.  But  about  all  these 
matters  the  brave  fellows  cared  little. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  ordered  his  men  to  spare  the  furred  animals 
in  future,  and  only  to  kill  edible  game,  so  as  to  lay  up  fresh  stores 
for  the  coming  winter  ;  he  also  forbade  them  to  go  more  than  two 
miles  from  the  fort,  not  wishing  Marbre  and  Sabine  to  come 
suddenly  upon  a  sea-horizon,  where  the  isthmus  connecting  the 
peninsula  of  Victoria  with  the  mainland  was  visible  a  few  months 
before.  The  disappearance  of  the  neck  of  land  would  inevitably 
have  betrayed  everything. 


WHERE  ARE   WE?  l8l 


The  day  appeared  endless  to  Lieutenant  Hobson.  Again  and 
again  he  returned  to  Cape  Bathurst  either  alone,  or  accompanied  by 
Mrs  Barnett.  The  latter,  inured  to  danger,  showed  no  fear  ;  she 
even  joked  the  Lieutenant  about  his  floating  island  being  perhaps, 
after  all,  the  proper  conveyance  for  going  to  the  North  Pole.  "  With 
a  favourable  current  might  they  not  reach  that  hitherto  inaccessible 
point  of  the  globe  ? " 

Lieutenant  Hobson  shook  his  head  as  he  listened  to  his  com- 
panion's fancy,  and  kept  his  eyes  fixed  upon  the  horizon,  hoping  to 
catch  a  glimpse  of  some  land,  no  matter  what,  in  the  distance.  But 
no,  sea  and  sky  met  in  an  absolutely  unbroken  circular  line,  confirm- 
ing Hobson's  opinion  that  Victoria  Island  was  drifting  to  the  west 
rather  than  in  any  other  direction. 

"  Lieutenant,"  at  last  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  don't  you  mean  to  make 
a  tour  of  our  island  as  soon  as  possible  ? " 

"  Yes,  madam,  of  course  ;  as  soon  as  I  have  taken  our  bearings,. 
I  mean  to  ascertain  the  form  and  extent  of  oar  dominions.  It 
seems,  however,  that  the  fracture  was  made  at  the  isthmus  itself,  so 
that  the  whole  peninsula  has  become  an  island." 

"A  strange  destiny   is   ours.    Lieutenant,"    said    Mrs    Barnett. 
"Others  return  from  their  travels  to  add  new  districts  to  geogra-' 
phical  maps,  but  we  shall  have  to  efiace  the  supposed  peninsula  of 
Victoria ! " 

The  next  day,  July  18th,  the  sky  was  very  clear,  and  at  ten 
o'clock  in  the  morning  Hobson  obtained  .a  satisfactory  altitude  of 
the  sun,  and,  comparing  it  with  that  of  the  observation  of  the  day 
before,  he  ascertained  exactly  the  longitude  in  which  they  were. 

The  island  was  then  in  157°  37'  longitude  west  from  Greenwich. 

The  latitude  obtained  the  day  before,  at  noon  almost  immediately 
after  the  eclipse  was,  as  we  know,  73°  T  20"  north. 

The  spot  was  looked  out  on  the  map  in  the  presence  of  Mrs 
Barnett  and  Sergeant  Long. 

It  was  indeed  a  most  anxious  moment,  and  the  following  result 
was  arrived  at. 

The  wandering  island  was  moving  in  a  westerly  direction,  borne 
along  by  a  current  unmarked  on  the  chart,  and  unknown  to 
hydrographers,  which  was  evidently  carrying  it  towards  Behring 
Strait.  All  the  dangers  foreseen  by  Hobson  were  then  imminent, 
if  Victoria  Island  did  not  again  touch  the  mainland  before  the 
winter. 


1 82  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


"But  how  far  are  we  from  the  American  continent  %  that  is  the 
most  important  point  just  at  present,"  said  Mrs  Barnett. 

Hobson  took  his  compasses,  and  carefully  measured  the  narrowest 
part  of  the  sea  between  the  coast  and  the  seventieth  parallel. 

"  We  are  actually  more  than  two  hundred  and  fifty  miles  from 
Point  Barrow,  the  northernmost  extremity  of  Russian  America," 
he  replied. 

"  We  ought  to  know,  then,  how  many  miles  the  island  has  drifted 
since  it  left  the  mainland,"  said  Sergeant  Long. 

"  Seven  hundred  miles  at  least,"  replied  Hobson,  after  having 
again  consulted  the  chart. 

'^  And  at  about  what  time  do  you  suppose  the  drifting  com- 
menced ? " 

"  Most  likely  towards  the  end  of  April ;  the  ice-field  broke  up 
then,  and  the  icebergs  which  escaped  melting  drew  back  to  the 
north.  We  may,  therefore,  conclude  that  Victoria  Island  has  been 
moving  along  with  the  current  parallel  with  the  coast  at  an  average 
rate  of  ten  miles  a  day." 

"  No  very  rapid  pace  after  all !  "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett. 

"Too  fast,  madam,  when  you  think  where  we  may  be  taken 
during  the  two  months  in  which  the  sea  will  remain  open  in  this 
part  of  the  Arctic  Ocean." 

The  three  friends  remained  silent,  and  looked  fixedly  at  the 
chart  of  the  fearful  Polar  regions,  towards  which  they  were  being 
irresistibly  drawn,  and  which  have  hitherto  successfully  resisted 
all  attempts  to  explore  them. 

"  There  is,  then,  nothing  to  be  done  ?  Nothing  to  try  ? "  said  Mrs 
Barnett  after  a  pause. 

"  Nothing,  madam,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  nothing  whatever.  We 
must  wait ;  we  must  all  pray  for  the  speedy  arrival  of  the  Arctic 
winter  generally  so  much  dreaded  by  sailors,  but  which  alone  can 
save  us  now.  The  winter  will  bring  ice,  our  only  anchor  of  salva- 
tion, the  only  power  which  can  arrest  the  course  of  this  wandering 
island." 


Thomaa  BlacL  would  not  even  join  the  exploniuj  jjart//."  —  Page  184. 


CHAPTER  III. 

A   TOUR  OF  THE  ISLAND. 

rROM  that  day,  July  18th,  it  was  decided  that  the  bearings 
should  be  taken  as  on  board  a  vessel  whenever  the  state  of 
the  atmosphere  rendered  the  operation  possible.  Was  not 
the  island,  in  fact,  a  disabled  ship,  tossed  about  without  sails  or 
helm. 

The  next  day  after  taking  the  bearings,  Hobson  announced  that 
without  change  of  latitude  the  island  had  advanced  several  miles 
farther  west.  Mac-Nab  was  ordered  to  commence  the  construction 
of  a  huge  boat,  Hobson  telling  him,  in  explanation,  that  he  proposed 
making  a  reconnaissance  of  the  coast  as  far  as  Russian  America 
next  summer.  The  carpenter  asked  no  further  questions,  but  pro- 
ceeded to  choose  his  wood,  and  fixed  upon  the  beach  at  the  foot  of 
Cape  Bathurst  as  his  dockyard,  so  that  he  might  easily  be  able  to 
launch  his  vessel. 

Hobson  intended  to  set  out  the  same  day  on  his  excursion  round 
the  island  in  which  he  and  his  comrades  were  imprisoned.  Many 
changes  might  take  place  in  the  configuration  of  this  sheet  of  ice, 
subject  as  it  was  to  the  influence  of  the  variable  temperature  of  the 
waves,  and  it  was  important  to  determine  its  actual  form  at  the 
present  time,  its  area,  and  its  thickness  in  different  parts.  The 
point  of  rupture,  which  was  most  likely  at  the  isthmus  itself,  ought 
to  be  examined  with  special  care  ;  the  fracture  being  still  fresh, 
it  might  be  possible  to  ascertain  the  exact  arrangement  of  the 
stratified  layers  of  ice  and  earth  of  which  the  soil  of  the  island  was 
composed. 

But  in  the  afternoon  the  sky  clouded  over  suddenly,  and  a 
violent  squall,  accompanied  with  thick  mists,  swept  down  upon  the 
fort.  Presently  torrents  of  rain  fell,  and  large  hailstones  rattled  on 
the  roof,  whilst  a  few  distant  claps  of  thunder  were  heard,  a 
phenomenon  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence  in  such  elevated 
latitudes. 


184  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

Hobson  was  obliged  to  put  off  his  trip,  and  wait  until  the  fury 
of  the  elements  abated,  but  during  the  20tb,  21st,  and  22d  July, 
no  change  occurred.  The  storm  raged,  the  floods  of  heaven  were 
let  loose,  and  the  waves  broke  upon  the  beach  with  a  deafening 
roar.  Liquid  avalanches  were  flung  with  such  force  upon  Cape 
Bathurst,  that  there  was  reason  to  dread  that  it  might  give  way  ; 
its  stability  was,  in  fact,  somewhat  problematical,  as  it  consisted 
merely  of  an  aggregation  of  sand  and  earth,  without  any  firm 
foundation.  Vessels  at  sea  might  well  be  pitied  in  this  fearful 
gale,  but  the  floating  island  was  of  too  vast  a  bulk  to  be  affected 
by  the  agitation  of  the  waves,  and  remained  indifferent  to  their 
fury. 

During  the  night  of  the  22d  July  the  tempest  suddenly  ceased. 
A  strong  breeze  from  the  north-east  dispelled  the  last  mists  upon 
the  horizon.  The  barometer  rose  a  few  degrees,  and  the  weather 
appeared  likely  to  favour  Hobson's  expedition. 

He  was  to  be  accompanied  by  Mrs  Barnett  and  Sergeant  Long, 
and  expected  to  be  absent  a  day  or  two.  The  little  party  took 
some  salt  meat,  biscuits,  and  a  few  flasks  of  rum  with  them,  and 
there  was  nothing  in  their  excursion  to  suprise  the  rest  of  the 
colonists.  The  days  were  just  then  very  long,  the  sun  only  dis- 
appearing below  the  horizon  for  a  few  hours. 

There  were  no  wild  animals  to  be  feared  now.  The  bears  seemed 
to  have  fled  by  instinct  from  the  peninsula  whilst  it  was  still 
connected  with  the  mainland,  but  to  neglect  no  precaution  each  of 
the  three  explorers  was  provided  with  a  gun.  The  Lieutenant  and 
his  subordinate  also  carried  hatchets  and  ice-chisels,  which  a 
traveller  in  the  Polar  regions  should  never  be  without. 

During  the  absence  of  the  Lieutenant  and  the  Sergeant,  the 
command  of  the  fort  fell  to  Corporal  Joliffe,  or  rather  to  his  little  wife^ 
and  Hobson  knew  that  he  could  trust  her.  Thomas  Black  could 
not  be  depended  on  ;  he  would  not  even  join  the  exploring  party  ; 
he  promised,  however,  to  watch  the  northern  latitudes  very  carefully, 
and  to  note  any  change  which  should  take  place  in  the  sea  or  the 
position  of  the  cape  during  the  absence  of  the  Lieutenant. 

Mrs  Barnett  had  endeavoured  to  reason  with  the  unfortunate 
astronomer,  but  he  would  listen  to  nothing.  He  felt  that  Nature 
had  deceived  him,  and  that  he  could  never  forgive  her. 

After  many  a  hearty  farewell,  the  Lieutenant  and  his  two  com- 
panions left  the  fort  by  the  postern  gate,  and,  turning  to  the  west, 


They  breakfasted,'"  ^c  — Page  186. 


A  TOUR  OF  THE  ISLAND,  1 85 


followed  the  lengthened  curve  of  the  coast  between  Capes  Bathurst 
and  Esquimaux. 

It  was  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning  ;  the  oblique  rays  of  the  sun 
struck  upon  the  beach,  and  touched  it  with  many  a  brilliant  tint, 
the  angry  billows  of  the  sea  were  sinking  to  rest,  and  the  birds, 
ptarmigans,  guillemots,  puffins,  and  petrels,  driven  away  by  the 
storm,  were  returning  by  thousands.  Troops  of  ducks  were 
hastening  back  to  Lake  Barnett,  flying  close,  although  they  knew  it 
not,  to  Mrs  Joliflfe's  saucepan.  Polar  hares,  martens,  musk-rats, 
and  ermines  rose  before  the  travellers  and  fled  at  their  approach, 
but  not  with  any  great  appearance  of  haste  or  terror.  The  animals 
evidently  felt  drawn  towards  their  old  enemies  by  a  common 
danger. 

"  They  know  well  enough  that  they  are  hemmed  in  by  the  sea 
and  cannot  quit  the  island,"  observed  Hobson. 

"  They  are  all  in  the  habit  of  seeking  warmer  climates  in  the 
south  in  the  winter,  are  they  not  ?  "  inquired  Mrs  Barnett. 

"  Yes,  madam,  but  unless  they  are  presently  able  to  cross  the  ice- 
field, they  will  have  to  remain  prisoners  like  ourselves,  and  I  am 
afraid  the  greater  number  will  die  of  cold  or  hunger. 

"  I  hope  they  will  be  good,  enough  to  supply  us  with  food  for  a 
long  time,"  observed  the  Sergeant,  "  and  I  think  it  is  very  fortunate 
that  they  had  not  the  sense  to  run  away  before  the  rupture  of  the 
isthmus." 

"  The  birds  will,  however,  leave  us  ? "  added  Mrs  Barnett. 

**  Oh  yes,  madam,  everything  with  wings  will  go,  they  can  traverse 
long  distances  without  fatigue,  and,  more  fortunate  than  ourselves, 
they  will  regain  terra  Jlrma.'^ 

"  Could  we  not  use  them  as  messengers  ?  *'  asked  Mrs  Barnett. 

"A  good  idea,  madam,  a  capital  idea,"  said  Hobson.  "We 
might  easily  catch  some  hundreds  of  these  birds,  and  tie  a  paper 
round  their  necks  with  our  exact  situation  written  upon  it.  John 
Ross  in  1848  tried  similar  means  to  acquaint  the  survivors  of  the 
Franklin  expedition  with  the  presence  of  his  ships,  the  Enterprise 
and  the  Investigator  in  the  Polar  seas.  He  caught  some  hundreds 
of  white  foxes  in  traps,  rivetted  a  copper  collar  round  the  neck 
of  each  with  all  the  necessary  information  engraved  upon  it,  and 
then  set  them  free  in  every  direction." 

"  Perhaps  some  of  the  messengers  may  have  fallen  into  the  hands 
of  the  shipwrecked  wanderers." 


1 86  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


"  Perhaps  so/'  replied  Hobsoii ;  "  I  know  that  an  old  fox  was 
taken  by  Captain  Hatteras  during  his  voyage  of  discovery,  wearing 
a  collar  half  worn  away  and  hidden  beneath  his  thick  white  fur. 
What  we  cannot  do  with  the  quadrupeds,  we  will  do  with  the 
birds." 

Chatting  thus  and  laying  plans  for  the  future,  the  three  explorers 
continued  to  follow  the  coast.  They  noticed  no  change ;  the  abrupt 
cliffs  covered  with  earth  and  sand  showed  no  signs  of  a  recent  altera- 
tion in  the  extent  of  the  island.  It  was,  however,  to  be  feared  that 
the  vast  sheet  of  ice  would  be  worn  away  at  the  base  by  the  action 
of  the  warm  currents,  and  on  this  point  Hobson  was  naturally 
anxious. 

By  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning  the  eight  miles  between  Capes 
Bathurst  and  Esquimaux  had  been  traversed.  A  few  traces  of  the 
encampment  of  Kalumah's  party  still  remained  ;  of  course  the  snow 
huts  had  entirely  disappeared,  but  some  cinders  and  walrus  bones 
marked  the  spot. 

The  three  explorers  halted  here  for  a  short  time,  they  intended  to 
pass  the  few  short  hours  of  the  night  at  Walruses'  Bay,  which  they 
hoped  to  reach  in  a  few  hours.  They  breakfasted  seated  on  a  slightly 
rising  ground  covered  with  a  scanty  and  stunted  herbage.  Before 
their  eyes  lay  the  ocean  bounded  by  a  clearly-defined  sea-horizon, 
without  a  sail  or  an  iceberg  to  break  the  monotony  of  the  vast  ex- 
panse of  water. 

"  Should  you  be  very  much  surprised  if  some  vessel  came  in  sight 
now,  Lieutenant?"  inquired  Mrs  Barnett. 

'*I  should  be  very  agreeably  surprised,  madam,"  replied  Hobson, 
**  It  is  not  at  all  uncommon  for  whalers  to  come  as  far  north  as  this, 
especially  now  that  the  Arctic  Ocean  is  frequented  by  whales  and 
cacholots,  but  you  must  remember  that  it  is  the  23rd  July,  and  the 
summer  is  far  advanced.  The  whole  fleet  of  whaling  vessels  is 
probably  now  in  Gulf  Kotzebue,  at  the  entrance  to  the  strait. 
Whalers  shun  the  sudden  changes  in  the  Arctic  Ocean,  and  with 
good  reason.  They  dread  being  shut  in  the  ice  ;  and  the  icebergs, 
avalanches,  and  ice-fields  they  avoid,  are  the  very  things  for  which 
we  earnestly  pray." 

"  They  will  come,  Lieutenant,"  said  Long  ;  "  have  patience,  in  an- 
other two  months  the  waves  will  no  longer  break  upon  the  shores 
of  Cape  Esquimaux." 

*'  Cape  Esquimaux  I "  observed  Mrs  Barnett  with  a  smile      "  That 


A  TOUR  OF  THE  ISLAND,  1 87 

name,  like  those  we  gave  to  the  other  parts  of  the  peninsula,  may 
turn  out  unfortunate  too.  We  have  lost  Port  Barnett  and  Paulina 
River ;  who  can  tell  whether  Cape  Esquimaux  and  Walruses'  Bay 
may  not  also  disappear  in  time  ? " 

"  They  too  will  disappear,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "  and  after 
them  the  whole  of  Victoria  Island,  for  nothing  now  connects  it  with 
a  continent,  and  it  is  doomed  to  destruction.  This  result  is  inevit- 
able, and  our  choice  of  geographical  names  will  be  thrown  away ; 
but  fortunately  the  Royal  Society  has  not  yet  adopted  them, 
and  Sir  Roderick  Murchison  will  have  nothing  to  efface  on  his 
maps," 

"  One  name  he  will,"  exclaimed  the  Sergeant, 

*'  Which  ? "  inquired  Hobson. 

"  Cape  Bathurst,"  replied  Long. 

"  Ah,  yes,  you  are  right.  Cape  Bathurst  must  now  be  removed 
from  maps  of  the  Polar  regions." 

Two  hours'  rest  were  all  the  explorers  cared  for,  and  at  one 
Wclock  they  prepared  to  resume  their  journey. 

Before  starting  Hobson  once  more  looked  round  him  from  the 
jummit  of  Cape  Esquimaux  ;  but  seeing  nothing  worthy  of  notice, 
le  rejoined  Mrs  Barnett  and  Sergeant  Long. 

"  Madam,"  he  said,  addressing  the  lady,  "  you  have  not  forgotten 
tie  family  of  natives  we  met  here  last  winter  ?" 

"  Oh  no,  I  have  always  held  dear  little  Kalumah  in  friendly 
reuembrance.  She  promised  to  come  and  see  us  again  at  Fort 
Hoje,  but  she  will  not  be  able  to  do  so.  But  why  do  you  ask  me 
aboit  the  natives  now  1 " 

"  because  I  remember  something  to  which,  much  to  my  regret, 
I  did  not  at  the  time  attach  sufficient  importance.'* 

"  What  was  that  ?  " 

"  Yoi  remember  the  uneasy  surprise  the  men  manifested  at  find- 
ing a  faBtory  at  the  foot  of  Gape  Bathurst." 

"  Oh  ^es,  perfectly." 

"  You  remember  that  I  tried  to  make  out  what  the  natives 
meant,  aid  that  I  could  not  do  so  ? " 

"  Yes,  I  remember." 

"Well,'\  added  Hobson,  "I  know  now  why  they  shook  their 
heads.  Fiom  tradition,  experience,  or  something,  the  Esquimaux 
knew  what  the  peninsula  really  was,  they  knew  we  had  not  built 
on   firm  ground.     But  as  things  had  probably  remained  as  they 


1 88  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


were  for  centuries,  they  thought  there  was  no  immediate  danger, 
and  that  it  was  not  worth  while  to  explain  themselves." 

"  Very  likely  you  are  right,"  replied  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  but  I  feel 
sure  that  Kalumah  had  no  suspicion  of  her  companion's  fears,  or 
she  would  have  warned  us." 

Hobson  quite  agreed  with  Mrs  Barnett,  and  Sergeant  Long 
observed — 

"It  really  seems  to  have  been  by  a  kind  of  fatality  that  we 
settled  ourselves  upon  this  peninsula  just  before  it  was  torn  away 
from  the  mainland.  I  suppose,  Lieutenant,  that  it  had  been  con- 
nected for  a  very  long  time,  perhaps  for  centuries." 

"  You  might  say  for  thousands  and  thousands  of  years,  Sergeant," 
replied  Hobson.  "  Remember  that  the  soil  on  which  we  are  tread- 
ing has  been  brought  here  by  the  wind,  little  by  little,  that  the 
sand  has  accumulated  grain  by  grain  !  Think  of  the  time  it  must 
have  taken  for  the  seeds  of  firs,  willows,  and  arbutus  to  become 
shrubs  and  trees  !  Perhaps  the  sheet  of  ice  on  which  we  float  was 
welded  to  the  continent  before  the  creation  of  man  ! " 

"Well,"  cried  Long,  "it  really  might  have  waited  a  few  cen- 
turies longer  before  it  drifted.  How  much  anxiety  and  how  many 
dangers  we  might  then  have  been  spared  ! " 

Sergeant  Long's  most  sensible  remark  closed  the  conversatioi, 
and  the  journey  was  resumed. 

From  Cape  Esquimaux  to  Walruses'  Bay  the  coast  ran  almost 
due  south,  following  the  one  hundred  and  twenty-seventh  merid»n. 
Looking  behind  them  they  could  see  one  corner  of  the  lagoon  its 
waters  sparkling  in  the  sunbeams,  and  a  little  beyond  the  wojded 
heights  in  which  it  was  framed.  Large  eagles  soared  above  their 
heads,  their  cries  and  the  loud  flapping  of  their  wings  breaking 
the  stillness,  and  furred  animals  of  many  kinds,  mtrtens, 
polecats,  ermines,  <fec.,  crouching  behind  some  rising  ground, 
or  hiding  amongst  the  stunted  bushes  and  willows,  gazed  inquir- 
ingly at  the  intruders.  They  seemed  to  understand  tlat  they 
had  nothing  to  fear.  Hobson  caught  a  glimpse  of  a  few  beavers 
wandering  about,  evidently  ill  at  ease,  and  puzzled  at  tie  disap- 
pearance of  the  little  river.  With  no  lodges  to  shelter  then,  and  no 
stream  by  which  to  build  a  new  home,  they  were  doomec  to  die  of 
cold  when  the  severe  frost  set  in.  Sergeant  Long  also  siw  a  troop 
of  wolves  crossing  the  plain. 

It  was  evident  that  specimens  of  the  whole  Arctic  ?auna  were 


Numerous  furred  animals"  ^c.  —  Page  188. 


A   TOUR  OF  THE  ISLAND,  1 89 


imprisoned  on  the  island,  and  there  was  every  reason  to  fear  that, 
when  famished  with  hunger,  all  the  carnivorous  beasts  would  be 
formidable  enemies  to  the  occupants  of  Fort  Hope. 

Fortunately,  however,  one  race  of  animals  appeared  to  be  quite 
unrepresented.  Not  a  single  white  bear  was  seen  !  Once  the 
Sergeant  thought  he  saw  an  enormous  white  mass  moving  about  on 
the  other  side  of  a  clump  of  willows,  but  on  close  examination 
decided  that  he  was  mistaken. 

The  coast  near  Walruses'  Bay  was,  on  the  whole,  only  slightly 
elevated  above  the  sea-level,  and  in  the  distance  the  waves  broke 
into  running  foam  as  they  do  upon  a  sloping  beach.  It  was  to  be 
feared  that  the  soil  had  little  stability,  but  there  was  no  means  of 
judging  of  the  modifications  which  had  taken  place  since  their  last 
visit,  and  Hobson  much  regretted  that  he  had  not  made  bench 
marks  about  Cape  Bat  hurst  before  he  left,  that  he  might  judge  of 
the  amount  of  sinking  or  depression  which  took  place.  He  deter- 
mined, however,  to  take  this  precaution  on  his  return. 

It  will  be  understood  that,  under  the  circumstances,  the  party  did 
not  advance  very  rapidly.  A  pause  was  often  made  to  examine 
the  soil,  or  to  see  if  there  were  any  sign  of  an  approaching  fracture 
on  the  coast,  and  sometimes  the  explorers  wandered  inland  for  half 
a  mile.  Here  and  there  the  Sergeant  planted  branches  of  willow 
or  birch  to  serve  as  landmarks  for  the  future,  especially  wherever 
undermining  seemed  to  be  going  on  rapidly  and  the  solidity  of 
the  ground  was  doubtful.  By  this  means  it  would  be  easy  to 
ascertain  the  changes  which  might  take  place. 

They  did  advance,  however,  and  at  three  o'clock  in  the  after- 
noon they  were  only  three  miles  from  Walruses'  Bay,  and  Hobson 
called  Mrs  B;irnett's  attention  to  the  important  changes  which  had 
been  effected  by  the  rupture  of  the  isthmus. 

Formerly  the  south-western  horizon  was  shut  in  by  a  long  slightly 
curved  coast-line,  formed  by  the  shores  of  Liverpool  Bay.  Now  a 
sea-line  bounded  the  view,  the  continent  having  disappeared. 
Victoria  Island  ended  in  an  abrupt  angle  where  it  had  broken  off, 
and  all  felt  sure  that  on  turning  round  that  angle  the  ocean  would 
be  spread  out  before  them,  and  that  its  waves  would  bathe  the 
whole  of  -the  southern  side  of  the  island,  which  was  once  the  con- 
necting-link between  Walruses'  Bay  and  Washburn  Bay. 

Mrs  Barnett  could  not  look  at  the  changed  aspect  of  the  scene 
without  emotion.     She  had  expected  it,  and  yet  her  heart  beat 


IQO  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


almost  audibly.  She  gazed  across  the  sea  for  the  missing  continent, 
which  was  now  left  several  hundred  miles  behind,  and  it  rushed 
upon  her  mind  with  a  fresh  shock  that  she  would  never  set  foot 
on  America  again.  Her  agitation  was  indeed  excusable,  and  it  was 
shared  by  the  Lieutenant  and  the  Sergeant. 

All  quickened  their  stei)S,  eager  to  reach  the  abrupt  angle  in  the 
south.  The  ground  rose  slightly  as  they  advanced,  and  the  layers 
of  earth  and  sand  became  thicker ;  this  of  course  was  explained  by 
tlie  former  proximity  of  this  part  of  the  coast  to  the  true  continent. 
The  thickness  of  the  crust  of  ice  and  of  the  layer  of  earth  at  the  point 
of  junction  increasing,  as  it  probably  did,  every  century,  explained 
the  long  resistance  of  the  isthmus,  which  nothing  but  some  extra- 
ordinary convulsion  could  have  overcome.  Such  a  convulsion 
was  the  earthquake  of  the  8th  January,  which,  although  it  had  only 
affected  the  continent  of  North  America,  had  sufficed  to  break  the 
connecting-link,  and  to  launch  Victoria  Island  upon  the  wide 
ocean. 

At  four  o'clock  p.m.,  the  angle  was  reached.  Walruses*  Bay, 
formed  by  an  indentation  of  the  firm  ground,  had  disappeared  !  It 
had  remained  behind  with  the  continent. 

"By  my  faith,  madam  !  "  exclaimed  the  Sergeant,  "  it's  lucky  for 
you  we  didn't  call  it  Paulina  Barnett  Bay  ! " 

"  Yes,"  replied  the  lady,  "  I  begin  to  think  I  am  an  unlucky  god- 
mother for  newly-discovered  places." 


CHAPTER  IV. 

A  NIGHT  ENCAMPMENT, 

7A  xi.^^  ^^  Hobson  had  not  been  mistaken  about  the  point  of 
^Vw  rupture.  It  was  the  isthmus  which  had  yielded  in  the 
shock  of  the  earthquake.  Not  a  trace  was  to  be  seen  of 
the  American  continent,  not  a  single  cliff,  even  the  volcano  on  the 
west  had  disappeared.     Nothing  but  the  sea  everywhere. 

The  island  on  this  side  ended  in  a  cape,  coming  to  an  almost 
sharp  point,  and  it  was  evident  that  the  substratum  of  ice,  fretted  by 
the  warmer  waters  of  the  current  and  exposed  to  all  the  fury  of  the 
elements,  must  rapidly  dissolve. 

The  explorers  resumed  their  march,  following  the  course  of  the 
fracture,  which  ran  from  west  to  east  in  an  almost  straight  line. 
Its  edges  were  not  jagged  or  broken,  but  clear  cut,  as  if  the  division 
had  been  made  with  a  sharp  instrument,  and  here  and  there  the 
conformation  of  the  soil  could  be  easily  e;xanuned.  The  banks — 
half  ice,  half  sand  and  earth — rose  some  ten  feet  from  the  water. 
They  were  perfectly  perpendicular,  without  the  slightest  slope,  and 
in  some  places  there  were  traces  of  recent  landslips.  Sergeant 
Long  pointed  to  several  small  blocks  of  ice  jdoating  in  the  offing, 
and  rapidly  melting,  which  had  evidently  been  broken  off  from  their 
island.  The  action  of  the  warm  surf  would,  of  course,  soon  eat 
away  the  new  coast-line,  which  time  had  not  yet  clothed  with  a 
kind  of  cement  of  snow  and  sand,  such  as  covered  the  rest  of  the 
beach,  and  altogether  the  state  of  things  was  very  far  from  re- 
assuring. 

Before  taking  any  rest,  Mrs  Barnett,  Hobson,  and  Long,  were 
anxious  to  finish  their  examination  of  the  southern  edge  of  the 
island.  There  would  be  plenty  of  daylight,  for  the  sun  would  not 
set  until  eleven  o'clock  p.m.  The  briliant  orb  of  day  was  slowly 
advancing  along  the  western  horizon,  and  its  oblique  rays  cast 
long  shadows  of  themselves  before  the  explorers,  who  conversed  at 


192  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


intervals  after  long  silent  pauses,  during  which  they  gazed  at  the 
sea  and  thought  of  the  dark  future  before  them. 

Hobson  intended  to  encamp  for  the  night  at  Washburn  Bay. 
When  there  eighteen  miles  would  have  been  traversed,  and,  if  he 
were  not  mistaken,  half  his  circular  journey  would  be  accomplished. 
After  a  few  hours'  repose  he  meant  to  return  to  Fort  Hope  along 
the  western  coast. 

No  fresh  incident  marked  the  exploration  of  the  short  distance 
between  Walruses'  Bay  and  Washburn  Bay,  and  at  seven  o'clock  in 
the  evening  the  spot  chosen  for  the  encampment  was  reached.  A 
similar  change  had  taken  place  here.  Of  Washburn  Bay,  nothing 
remained  but  the  curve  formed  by  the  coast-line  of  the  island,  and 
which  was  once  its  northern  boundary.  It  stretched  away  without 
a  break  for  seven  miles  to  the  cape  they  had  named  Cape  Michael. 
This  side  of  the  island  did  not  appear  to  have  suffered  at  all  in 
consequence  of  the  rupture.  The  thickets  of  pine  and  birch,  massed 
a  little  behind  the  cape,  were  in  their  fullest  beauty  at  this  time  of 
year,  and  a  good  many  furred  animals  were  disporting  themselves 
on  the  plain. 

A  halt  was  made  at  Washburn  Bay,  and  the  explorers  were  able 
to  enjoy  an  extended  view  on  the  south,  although  they  could  not 
see  any  great  distance  on  the  north.  The  sun  was  so  low  on  the 
horizon,  that  its  rays  were  intercepted  by  the  rising  ground  on  the 
west,  and  did  not  reach  the  little  bay.  It  was  not,  however,  yet 
night,  nor  could  it  be  called  twilight,  as  the  sun  had  not  set. 

"  Lieutenant,"  said  Long,  "  if  by  some  miracle  a  bell  were  now 
to  ring,  what  do  you  suppose  it  would  mean  ? " 

"  That  it  was  supper-time,"  replied  Hobson.  "  Don't  you  agree 
with  me,  Mrs  Barnett  ?  " 

"  Indeed  I  do,"  replied  the  lady  addressed,  '*  and  as  our  cloth  is 
spread  for  us,  let  us  sit  down.  This  moss,  although  slightly  worn, 
will  suit  us  admirably,  and  was  evidently  intended  for  us  by 
Providence." 

The  bag  of  provisions  was  opened ;  some  salt  meat,  a  hare  pate 
from  Mrs  Joliffe's  larder,  with  a  few  biscuits,  formed  their  frugal 
supper. 

The  meal  was  quickly  over,  and  Hobson  returned  to  the  south- 
west angle  of  the  island,  whilst  Mrs  Barnett  rested  at  the  foot  of 
a  low  fir  tree,  and  Sergeant  Long  made  ready  the  night  quarters. 

The  Lieutenant  was  anxious  to  examine  the  piece  of  ice  which 


He  was  able  to  look  closely  at  the  steep  wall"  ^c.  —  Page  193 


j 


^  1    J 


A  NIGHT  ENCAMPMENT,  1 93 

formed  the  island,  to  ascertain,  if  possible,  something  of  its  structure. 
A  little  bank,  produced  by  a  landslip,  enabled  him  to  step  down  to 
the  level  of  the  sea,  and  from  there  he  was  able  to  look  closely  at 
the  steep  wall  which  formed  the  coast.  Where  he  stood  the  soil  rose 
scarcely  three  feet  above  the  water.  The  upper  part  consisted  of  a 
thin  layer  of  earth  and  sand  mixed  with  crushed  shells ;  and  the 
lower  of  hard,  compact,  and,  if  we  may  so  express  it,  "  metallic"  ice, 
strong  enough  to  support  the  upper  soil  of  the  island. 

This  layer  of  ice  was  not  more  than  one  foot  above  the  sea- level. 
In  consequence  of  the  recent  fracture,  it  was  easy  to  see  the  regular 
disposition  of  the  sheets  of  ice  piled  up  horizontally,  and  which  had 
evidently  been  produced  by  successive  frosts  in  comparatively 
quieter  waters. 

We  know  that  freezing  commences  on  the  surface  of  liquids,  and 
as  the  cold  increases,  the  thickness  of  the  crust  becomes  greater,  the 
solidification  proceeding  from  the  top  downwards.  That  at  least  is< 
the  case  in  waters  that  are  at  rest ;  it  has,  however,  been  observed 
that  the  very  reverse  is  the  case  in  running  waters — the  ice  forming 
at  the  bottom,  and  subsequently  rising  to  the  surface. 

It  was  evident,  then,  that  the  floe  which  formed  the  foundation 
of  Victoria  Island  had  be^n  formed  in  calm  waters  on  the  shores 
of  the  North  American  continent.  The  freezing  had  evidently 
commenced  on  the  surface,  and  the  thaw  would  begin  at  the  bottom, 
according  to  a  well-known  law;  so  that  the  ice-field  would  gradually 
decrease  in  weight  as  it  became  thawed  by  the  warmer  waters 
through  which  it  was  passing,  and  the  general  level  of  the  island 
would  sink  in  proportion. 

This  was  the  great  danger. 

As  we  have  just  stated,  Hobson  noticed  that  the  solid  ice,  the  ice- 
field properly  so  called,  was  only  about  one  foot  above  the  sea-level ! 
We  know  that  four-fifths  of  a  floating  mass  of  ice  are  always  sub- 
merged. For  one  foot  of  an  iceberg  or  ice-field  above  the  water, 
there  are  four  below  it.  It  must,  however,  be  remarked  that  the 
density,  or  rather  specific  weight  of  floating  ice,  varies  considerably 
according  to  its  mode  of  formation  or  origin.  The  ice-masses  which 
proceed  from-  sea  water,  porous,  opaque,  and  tinged  with  blue  or 
green,  according  as  they  are  struck  by  the  rays  of  the  sun,  are 
lighter  than  ice  formed  from  fresh  water.  All  things  considered, 
and  making  due  allowance  for  the  weight  of  the  mineral  and 
vegetable  layer  above  the  ice,  Hobson  concluded  it  to  be  about  four 

N 


194  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


or  five  feet  thick  below  the  sea-level.  The  different  declivities  of 
the  island,  the  little  hills  and  rising  ground,  would  of  course  only 
affect  the  upper  soil,  and  it  might  reasonably  be  supposed  that  the 
wandering  island  was  not  immersed  more  than  five  feet. 

This  made  Hobson  very  anxious.  Only  five  feet  !  Setting  aside 
the  causes  of  dissolution  to  which  the  ice-field  might  be  subjected, 
would  not  the  slightest  shock  cause  a  rupture  of  the  surface  %  Might 
not  a  rough  sea  or  a  gale  of  wind  cause  a  dislocation  of  the  ice-field, 
which  would  lead  to  its  breaking  up  into  small  portions,  and  to  its 
final  decomposition  ?  Oh  for  the  speedy  arrival  of  the  winter,  with 
its  bitter  cold  !  Would  that  the  column  of  mercury  were  frozen  in 
its  cistern  !  Nothing  but  the  rigour  of  an  Arctic  winter  could  con- 
solidate and  thicken  the  foundation  of  their  island,  and  establish  a 
means  of  communication  between  it  and  the  continent. 

Hobson  returned  to  the  halting-place  little  cheered  by  his  dis- 
coveries, and  found  Long  busy  making  arrangements  for  the  night ; 
for  he  had  no  idea  of  sleeping  beneath  the  open  sky,  although  Mrs 
Barnett  declared  herself  quite  ready  to  do  so.  He  told  the  Lieu- 
tenant that  he  intended  to  dig  a  hole  in  the  ice  big  enough  to  hold 
three  persons — in  fact  to  make  a  kind  of  snow-hut,  in  which  they 
would  be  protected  from  the  cold  night  air. 

*'  In  the  land  of  the  Esquimaux,"  he  said,  "  nothing  is  wiser  than 
to  do  as  the  Esquimaux  do." 

Hobson  approved,  but  advised  the  Sergeant  not  to  dig  too  deeply, 
as  the  ice  was  not  more  than  five  feet  thick. 

Long  set  to  work.  With  the  aid  of  his  hatchet  and  ice-chisel  he 
had  soon  cleared  away  the  earth,  and  hollowed  out  a  kind  of  pas- 
sage sloping  gently  down  to  the  crust  of  ice. 

He  next  attacked  the  brittle  mass,  which  had  been  covered  over 
with  sand  and  earth  for  so  many  centuries.  It  would  not  take 
more  than  an  hour  to  hollow  out  a  subterranean  retreat,  or  rather  a 
burrow  with  walls  of  ice,  which  would  keep  in  the  heat,  and  there- 
fore serve  well  for  a  resting-place  during  the  short  night. 

Whilst  Long  was  working  away  like  a  white  ant,  Hobson  com- 
municated the  result  of  his  observations  to  Mrs  Barnett.  He  did 
not  disguise  from  her  that  the  construction  of  Victoria  Island  ren- 
dered him  very  uneasy.  He  felt  sure  that  the  thinness  of  the  ice 
would  lead  to  the  opening  of  ravines  on  the  surface  before  long ; 
where,  it  would  be  impossible  to  foresee,  and  of  course  it  would  be 
equally  impossible  to  prevent  them.     The  wandering  island  might 


" Keep  hold'"  —  Page  195. 


A  NIGHT  ENCAMPMENT,  I95 


at  any  moment  settle  down  in  consequence  of  a  change  in  its  speci- 
fic gravity,  or  break  up  into  more  or  less  numerous  islets,  the  duration 
of  which  must  necessarily  be  ephemeral.  He  judged,  therefore,  that 
it  would  be  best  for  the  members  of  the  colony  to  keep  together  as 
much  as  possible,  and  not  to  leave  the  fort,  that  they  might  all 
share  the  same  chances. 

Hobson  was  proceeding  further  to  unfold  his  views  when  cries 
for  help  were  heard. 

Mrs  Barnett  started  to  her  feet,  and  both  looked  round  in  every 
direction,  but  nothing  was  to  be  seen. 

The  cries  were  now  redoubled,  and  Hobson  exclaimed — 

"The  Sergeant  !  the  Sergeant!" 

And  followed  by  Mrs  Barnett,  he  rushed  towards  the  burrow,  and 
he  had  scarcely  reached  the  opening  of  the  snow-house  before  he 
saw  Sergeant  Long  clutching  with  both  hands  at  his  knife,  which 
he  had  stuck  in  the  wall  of  ice,  and  calling  out  loudly,  although 
with  the  most  perfect  self-possession. 

His  head  and  arms  alone  were  visible.  Whilst  he  was  digging, 
the  ice  had  given  way  suddenly  beneath  him,  and  he  was  plunged 
into  water  up  to  his  waist. 

Hobson  merely  said — 

"  Keep  hold  !  " 

And  creeping  through  the  passage,  he  was  soon  at  the  edge  of  the 
hole.  The  poor  Sergeant  seized  his  hand,  and  he  was  soon  rescued 
from  his  perilous  position. 

"  Good  God  !  Sergeant ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  what  has 
happened  ? " 

"Nothing,"  replied  Long,  shaking  himself  like  a  wet  spaniel, 
"  except  that  the  ice  gave  way  under  me,  and  I  took  a  compulsory 
bath." 

"  You  forgot  what  I  told  you  about  not  digging  too  deeply,  then,' 
said  Hobson. 

"  Beg  pardon,  sir ;  I  hadn't  cut  through  fifteen  inches  of  the  ice  ; 
and  I  expect  there  was  a  kind  of  cavern  where  I  was  working — the 
ice  did  not  touch  the  water.  It  was  just  like  going  through  a 
ceiling.  If  I  hadn't  been  able  to  hang  on  by  my  knife,  I  should 
have  slipped  under  the  island  like  a  fool,  and  that  would  have  been 
a  pity,  wouldn't  it,  madam  ? " 

"  A  very  great  pity,  my  brave  fellow/'  said  Mrs  Barnett,  pressing 
his  hand. 


196  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Long's  explanation  was  correct ;  for  some  reason  or  another — 
most  likely  from  an  accumulation  of  air — the  ice  had  formed  a  kind 
of  vault  above  the  water,  and  of'  course  it  soon  gave  way  under  the 
weight  of  the  Sergeant  and  the  blows  of  his  chisel. 

The  same  thing  might  happen  in  other  parts  of  the  island,  which 
was  anything  but  reassuring.  Where  could  they  be  certain  of 
treading  on  firm  ground  ?  Might  not  the  earth  give  way  beneath 
their  feet  at  any  minute  ?  What  heart,  however  brave,  would  not 
have  sunk  at  the  thought  of  the  thin  partition  between  them  and 
the  awful  gulf  of  the  ocean  % 

Sergeant  Long,  however,  thought  but  little  of  his  bath,  and  was 
ready  to  begin  mining  in  some  other  place.  This  Mrs  Barnett 
would  not  allow.  A  night  in  the  open  air  would  do  her  no  harm ; 
the  shelter  of  the  coppice  near  would  be  protection  enough  for  them 
all ;  and  Sergeant  Long  was  obliged  to  submit. 

The  camp  was,  therefore,  moved  back  some  thirty  yards  from  the 
beach,  to  a  rising  ground  on  which  grew  a  few  clumps  of  pines  and 
willows  which  could  scarcely  be  called  a  wood.  Towards  ten 
o'clock  the  disc  of  the  sun  began  to  dip  below  the  horizon,  and 
before  it  disappeared  for  the  few  hours  of  the  night  a  crackling 
fire  of  dead  branches  was  blazing  at  the  camp. 

Long  had  now  a  fine  opportunity  of  drying  his  legs,  of  which  he 
gladly  availed  himself.  He  and  Hobson  talked  together  earnestly 
until  twilight  set  in,  and  Mrs  Barnett  occasionally  joined  in  the 
conversation,  doing  the  best  she  could  to  cheer  the  disheartened 
Lieutenant.  The  sky  was  bright  with  stars,  and  the  holy  influence 
of  the  night  could  not  fail  to  calm  his  troubled  spirit.  The  wind 
murmured  softly  amongst  the  pines  ;  even  the  sea  appeared  to  be 
wrapt  in  slumber,  its  bosom  slightly  heaving  with  the  swell,  which 
died  away  upon  the  beach  with  a  faint  rippling  sound.  All  creation 
was  hushed,  not  even  the  wail  of  a  sea-bird  broke  upon  the  ear ;  the 
crisp  crackling  of  the  dead  branches  was  exchanged  for  a  steady 
flame,  and  nothing  but  the  voices  of  the  wanderers  broke  the  sub- 
lime, the  awful  silence  of  the  night. 

"  Who  would  imagine,"' said  Mrs  Barnett,  "that  we  were  floating 
on  the  surface  of  the  ocean  !  It  really  requires  an  eff'ort  to  realise 
it,  for  the  sea  which  is  carrying  us  along  in  its  fatal  grasp  appears 
to  be  absolutely  motionless  ! " 

"  Yes,  madam,''  replied  Hobson ;  "  and  if  the  floor  of  our  carriage 
were  solid,  if  I  did  not  know  that  sooner  or  later  the  keel  of  our 


A  NIGHT  ENCAMPMENT.  1 97 

boat  will  be  missing,  that  some  day.  its  hull  will  burst  open,  and 
finally,  if  I  knew  where  we  are  going,  I  should  rather  enjoy  floating 
on  the  ocean  like  this." 

"Well,  Lieutenant,"  rejoined  Mrs  Barnett,  "could  there  be  a 
pleasanter  mode  of  travelling  than  ours?  We  feel  no  motion. 
Our  island  has  exactly  the  same  speed  as  the  current  which  is  bear- 
ing it  away.  Is  it  not  like  a  balloon  voyage  in  the  air  %  What 
could  be  more  delightful  than  advancing  with  one's  house,  garden, 
park,  &c.  ?  A  wandering  island,  with  a  solid  insubmersible  founda- 
tion, would  really  be  the  most  comfortable  and  wonderful  conveyance 
that  could  possibly  be  imagined.  I  have  heard  of  hanging  gardens. 
Perhaps  some  day  floating  parks  will  be  invented  which  will  carry 
us  all  over  the  globe  !  Their  size  will  render  them  insensible  to  the 
action  of  the  waves,  they  will  have  nothing  to  fear  from  storms, 
and  perhaps  with  a  favourable  wind  they  might  be  guided  by 
means  of  immense  sails  !  What  marvels  of  vegetation  would  be 
spread  before  the  eyes  of  the  passengers  when  they  passed  from 
temperate  to  torrid  zones !  With  skilful  pilots,  well  acquainted 
with  the  currents,  it  might  be  possible  to  remain  in  one  latitude, 
and  enjoy  a  perpetual  spring." 

Hobson  could  not  help  smiling  at  Mrs  Barnett's  fancies.  The 
brave  woman  ran  on  with  such  an  easy  flow  of  words,  she  talked 
with  as  little  effort  as  Victoria  Island  moved.  And  was  she  not 
right  ?  It  would  have  been  a  very  pleasant  mode  of  travelling  it 
there  had  been  no  danger  of  their  conveyance  melting  and  being 
swallowed  up  by  the  sea. 

The  night  passed  on,  and  the  explorers  slept  a  few  hours.  At 
daybreak  they  breakfasted,  and  thoroughly  enjoyed  their  meal. 
The  warmth  and  rest  had  refreshed  them,  and  they  resumed  their 
journey  at  about  six  o'clock  a.m. 

From  Cape  Michael  to  the  former  Port  Barnett  the  coast  ran  in 
an  almost  straight  line  from  south  to  north  for  about'  eleven  miles. 
There  was  nothing  worthy  of  note  about  it ;  the  shores  were  low  and 
pretty  even  all  the  way,  and  seemed  to  have  suft'ered  no  alteration 
since  the  breaking  of  the  isthmus.  Long,  in  obedience  to  the 
Lieutenant,  made  bench-marks  along  the  beach,  that  any  future 
change  might  be  easily  noted. 

Hobson  was  naturally  anxious  to  get  back  to  Fort  Hope  the  same 
day,  and  Mrs  Barnett  was  also  eager  to  retuiii  to  her  friends.     It 


198  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


was  of  course  desirable  under  the  circumstances  that  the  command- 
ing officer  should  not  be  long  absent  from  the  fort. 

All  haste  was  therefore  made,  and  by  taking  a  short  cut  tlhey 
arrived  at  noon  at  the  little  promontory  which  formerly  protected 
Port  Barnett  froni  the  east  winds. 

It  was  not  more  than  eight  miles  from  this  point  to  Fort  Hope, 
and  before  four  o'clock  p.m.  the  shouts  of  Corporal  Joliffe  welcomed 
their  return  to  the  factory. 


Corporal  Joliffe  was  extremely  fond  of  him."  —  Page  199. 


CHAPTER  V. 

FROM  JULY  2STH   TO  AUGUST  20TH, 

OBSON'S  first  care  on  his  return  to  the  fort,  was  to  make 
r (^  M  inquiries  of  Thomas  Black  as  to  the  situation  of  the 
^A^  little  colony.  No  change  had  taken  place  for  the  last 
twenty-four  hours  ;  but,  as  subsequently  appeared,  the  island  had 
floated  one  degree  of  latitude  further  south,  whilst  still  retaining 
its  motion  towards  the  west.  It  was  now  at  the  same  distance  from 
the  equator  as  Icy  Cape,  a  little  promontory  of  western  Alaska, 
and  two  hundred  miles  from  the  American  coast.  The  speed  of  the 
current  seemed  to  be  less  here  than  in  the  eastern  part  of  the 
Arctic  Ocean  ;  but  the  island  continued  to  advance,  and,  much  to 
Hobsons  annoyance,  towards  the  dreaded  Behring  Strait.  It  was 
now  only  the  24th  July,  and  a  current  of  average  speed  would 
carry  it  in  another  month  through  the  strait  and  into  the  heated 
waves  of  the  Pacific,  where  it  would  melt  "  like  a  lump  of  sugar  in 
a  glass  of  water." 

Mrs  Barnett  acquainted  Madge  with  the  result  of  the  exploration 
of  the  island.  She  explained  to  her  the  arrangement  of  the  layers 
of  earth  and  ice  at  the  part  where  the  isthmus  had  been  broken  oflF ; 
told  her  that  the  thickness  of  the  ice  below  the  sea-level  was 
estimated  at  five  feet  ;  related  the  accident  to  Sergeant  Long — in 
short,  she  made  her  fully  understand  the  reasons  there  were  to  fear 
the  breaking  up  or  sinking  of  the  ice-field. 

The  rest  of  the  colony  had,  however,  no  suspicion  of  the  truth  ; 
a  feeling  of  perfect  security  prevailed.  It  never  occurred  to  any  of 
the  brave  fellows  that  Fort  Hope  was  floating  above  an  awful 
abyss,  and  that  the  lives  of  all  its  inhabitants  were  in  danger.  All 
were  in  good  health,  the  weather  was  fine,  and  the  climate  pleasant 
and  bracing.  The  baby  Michael  got  on  wonderfully ;  he  was 
beginning  to  toddle  aboiit  between  the  house  and  the  palisade  ;  and 
Corporal  Joliff"e,  who  was  extremely  fond  of  him,  was  already 
beginning  to  teach   him  to  hold  a  gun,  and  to  understand  the  first 


200  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


duties  of  a  soldier.  Oh,  if  Mrs  Joliffe  would  but  present  him  with 
such  a  son  !  but,  alas  !  the  blessing  of  children,  for  which  he  and  his 
wife  prayed  every  day,  was  as  yet  denied  to  them. 

Meanwhile  the  soldiers  had  plenty  to  do. 

Mac-Nab  and  his  men — Petersen,  Belcher,  Garry,  Pond,  and 
Hope — worked  zealously  at  the  construction  of  a  boat,  a  difficult 
task,  likely .  to  occupy  them  for  several  months.  But  as  their 
vessel  would  be  of  no  use  until  next  year  after  the  thaw,  they 
neglected  none  of  their  duties  at  the  factory  on  its  account.  Hob- 
son  let  things  go  on  as  if  the  future  of  the  factory  were  not  com- 
promised, and  persevered  in  keeping. the  men  in  ignorance.  This 
serious  question  was  often  discussed  by  the  officer  and  his  *'  statf," 
and  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  differed  from  their  chief  on  the  sub- 
ject. They  thought  it  would  .be  better  to  tell  the  whole  truth  ;  the 
men  were  brave  and  energetic,  not  likely  to  yield  to  despair,  and 
the  shock  would  not  be  great  if  they  heard  of  it  now,  instead  of 
only  when  their  situation  was  so  hopeless  that  it  could  not  be  con- 
>  ealed.  But  in  spite  of  the  justice  of  these  remarks,  Hobson  would 
not  yield,  and  he  was  supported  by  Sergeant  Long.  Perhaps,  after 
all,  they  were  right  ;  they  were  both  men  of  long  experience,  and 
knew  the  temper  of  their  men. 

And  so  the  work  of  provisioning  and  strengthening  the  fort  pro- 
ceeded. The  palisaded  enceinte  was  repaired  with  new  stakes,  and 
niade  higher  in  many  places,  so  that  it  really  formed  a  very  strong  forti- 
fication. Mac-Nab  also  put  into  execution,  with  his  chief's  approval, 
a  plan  he  had  long  had  at  heart.  At  the  corners  abutting  on  the 
lake  he  built  two  little  pointed  sentry-boxes,  which  completed  the 
defences  ;  and  Corporal  Joliffe  anticipated  with  delight  the  time 
when  he  should  be  sent  to  relieve  guard  :  he  felt  that  they  gave 
a  military  look  to  the  buildings,  and  made  them  really  imposing. 

The  palisade  was  now  completely  finished,  and  Mac-Nab,  remem- 
bering the  sufferings  of  the  lastr  winter,  built  a  new  wood  shed  close 
up  against  the  house  itself,  with  a  door  of  communication  inside,  so 
that  there  would  be  no  need  to  go  outside  at  all.  By  this  contriv- 
ance the  fuel  would  always  be  ready  to  hand.  On  the  left  side  of 
the  house,  opposite  the  shed,  Mac-Nab  constructed  a  large  sleeping- 
room  for  the  soldiers,  so  that  the  camp-bed  could  be  removed  from 
the  common  room.  This  room  was  also  to  be  used  for  meals, 
games,  and  work.  The  three  married  couples  had  private  rooms 
wjvlled  off,  so  that  the  large  house  was  relieved  of  them  as  well  as 


"  Thanks  to  the  Corporal's  unwearying  exertions,"  ^c.  —  Page  202. 


t 


FROM  JULY  2STH  TO  AUGUST  20TH.  20I 


of  all  the  other  soldiers.  A  raagazine  for  furs  only  was  also  erected 
behind  the  house  near  the  powder-magazine,  leaving  the  loft  free 
for  stores ;  and  the  rafters  and  ribs  of  the  latter  were  bound  with 
iron  cramps,  that  they  might  be  able  to  resist  all  attacks. 

Mac-Nab  also  intended  to  build  a  little  wooden  chapel,  which 
had  been  included  in  Hobson's  original  plan  of  the  factory  ;  but 
its  erection  was  put  off  until  the  next  summer. 

With  what  eager  interest  would  the  Lieutenant  have  once  watched 
the  progress  of  his  establishment !  Had  he  been  building  on  firm 
ground,  with  what  delight  would  he  have  watched  the  houses,  sheds, 
and  magazines  rising  around  him !  He  remembered  the  scheme  of 
crowning  Cape  Bathurst  with  a  redoubt  for  the  protection  of  Fort 
Hope  with  a  sigh.  The  very  name  of  the  factory,  *'  Fort  Hope,'* 
made  his  heart  sink  within  him ;  for  should  it  not  more  truly  be 
called  "  Fort  Despair  1 " 

These  various  works  took  up  the  whole  summer,  and  there  was  no 
time  for  ennui.  The  construction  of  the  boat  proceeded  rapidly. 
Mac-Nab  meant  it  to  be  of  about  thirty  tons  measurement,  which 
would  make  it  large  enough  to  carry  some  twenty  passengers  several 
hundred  miles  in  the  fine  season.  The  carpenter  had  been  fortunate 
enough  to  find  some  bent  pieces  of  wood,  so  that  he  was  able  quickly 
to  form  the  first  ribs  of  the  vessel,  and  soon  the  stem  and  sternpost, 
fixed  to  the  keel,  were  upon  the  dockyard  at  the  foot  of  Cape  Bathurst. 

Whilst  the  carpenters  were  busy  with  hatchets,  saws,  and  adzes, 
the  hunters  were  eagerly  hunting  the  reindeer  and  Polar  hares, 
which  abounded  near  the  fort.  The  Lieutenant,  however,  told  Marbre 
and  Sabine  not  to  go  far  away,  stating  as  a  reason,  that  until  the 
buildings  were  completed  he  did  not  wish  to  attract  the  notice  of 
rivals.  The  truth  was,  he  did  not  wish  the  changes  which  had 
taken  place  tp  be  noticed. 

One  day  Marbre  inquired  if  it  was  not  now  time  to  go  to  Walruses' 
Bay,  and  get  a  fresh  supply  of  morse-oil  for  burning,  and  Hobson 
replied  rather  hastily — 

"  No,  Marbre  ;  it  would  be  useless." 

The  Lieutenant  knew  only  too  well  that  Walruses'  Bay  was  two 
hundred  miles  away,  and  that  there  were  no  morses  to  be  hunted  on 
the  island. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  Hobson  considered  the  situation 
desperate  even  now.  He  often  assured  Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  and 
Long  that  he  was  convinced  the  island  would  hold  together  until  the 


202  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


bitter  cold  of  winter  should  thicken  its  foundation  and  arrest  its 
course  at  one  and  the  same  time. 

After  his  journey  of  discovery,  Hobson  estimated  exactly  the  area 
of  his  new  dominions.  The  island  measured  more  than  forty  miles 
round,  from  which  its  superficial  arrear  would  appear  to  be  about 
one  hundred  and  forty  miles  at  the  least.  By  way  of  comparison,  we 
may  say  that  Victoria  Island  was  rather  larger,  than  St  Helena,  and 
its  area  was  about  the  same  as  that  of  Paris  within  the  line  of  forti- 
fications. If  then  it  should  break  up  into  fragments,  the  separate 
parts  might  still  be  of  sufficient  size  to  be  habitable  for  some 
time. 

When  Mrs  Barnett  expressed  her  surprise  that  a  floating  ice- 
field could  be  so  large,  Hobson  replied  by  reminding  her  of  the 
observations  of  Arctic  navigators.  Parry,  Penny,  and  Franklin  had 
met  with  ice-fields  in  the  Polar  seas  one  hundred  miles  long  and 
fifty  broad.  Captain  Kellet  abandoned  his  boat  on  an  ice-field 
measuring  at  least  three  hundred  square  miles,  and  what  was 
Victoria  Island  compared  to  it  ? 

Its  size  was,  however,  sufficient  to  justify  a  hope  that  it  would 
resist  the  action  of  the  warm  currents  until  the  cold  weather  set  in. 
Hobson  would  not  allow  himself  to  doubt ;  his  despair  arose  rather 
from  the  knowledge  that  the  fruit  of  all  his  cares,  anxieties,  and 
dangers  must  eventually  be  swallowed  up  by  the  deep,  and  it  was 
no  wonder  that  he  could  take  no  interest  in  the  works  that  were 
going  on. 

Mrs  Barnett  kept  up  a  good  heart  through  it  all ;  she  encouraged 
her  comrades  in  their  work,  and  took  her  share  in  it,  as  if  she  had 
still  a  future  to  look  forward  to.  Seeing  what  an  interest  Mrs 
Joliffe  took  in  her  plants,  she  joined  her  every  day  in  the  garden. 
There  was  now  a  fine  crop  of  sorrel  and  scurvy-grass — thanks  to  the 
Corporal's  unwearying  exertions  to  keep  off  the  birds  of  every  kind, 
which  congregated  by  hundreds. 

The  taming  of  the  reindeer  had  been  quite  successful ;  there  were 
now  a  good  many  young,  and  little  Michael  had  been  partly  brought 
up  on  the  milk  of  the  mothers.  There  were  now  some  thirty  head 
in  the  herd  which  grazed  near  the  fort,  and  a  supply  of  the  herbage 
on  which  they  feed  was  dried  and  laid  up  for  the  winter.  These 
useful  animals,  which  are  easily  domesticated,  were  already  quite 
familiar  with  all  the  colonists,  and  did  not  go  far  from  the  enceinte. 
Some  of  them  were  used  in  sledges  to  carry  timber  backwards  and 


FROM  JUL Y  25 TH  TO  AUGUST  20 TH.  203 

forwards.  A  good  many  reindeer,  still  wild,  now  fell  into  the  trap 
half  way  between  the  fort  and  Port  Barnett.  It  will  be  remembered 
that  a  large  bear  was  once  taken  in  it ;  but  nothing  of  the  kind 
occurred  this  season — none  fell  victims  but  the  reindeer,  whose  flesh 
was  salted  and  laid  by  for  future  use.  Twenty  at  least  were  taken, 
which  in  the  ordinary  course  of  things  would  have  gone  down  to 
the  south  in  the  winter. 

One  day,  however,  the  reindeer-trap  suddenly  became  useless  in 
consequence  of  the  conformation  of  the  soil.  After  visiting  it  as 
usual,  the  hunter  Marbre  approached  Hobson,  and  said  to  him  in 
a  significant  tone — 

"  I  have  just  paid  my  daily  visit  to  the  reindeer-trap,  sir." 

"  Well,  Marbre,  I  hope  you  have  been  as  successful  to-day  as 
yesterday,  and  have  caught  a  couple  of  reindeer,"  replied  Hobson. 

"No,  sir,  no,"  replied  Marbre,  with  some  embarrassment. 

"  Your  trap  has  not  yielded  its  ordinary  contingent  then  ]  " 

"  No,  sir  ;  and  if  any  animal  had  fallen  in,  it  would  certainly 
have  been  drowned  !  " 

"  Drowned  ! "  cried  the  Lieutenant,  looking  at  the  hunter  with 
an  anxious  expression. 

"  Yes,  sir,"  replied  Marbre,  looking  attentively  at  his  superior  ; 
"  the  pit  is  full  of  water." 

"  Ah  ! "  said  Hobson,  in  the  tone  of  a  man  who  attached  no  im- 
portance to  that ;  "  you  know  your  pit  was  partly  hollowed  out  of 
ice  ;  its  walls  have  melted  with  the  heat  of  the  sun,  and  then  " 

"Beg  pardon  for  interrupting  you,  sir,"  said  Marbre;  "but  the 
water  cannot  have  been  produced  by  the  melting  of  ice." 

"Why  not,  Marbre?" 

"  Because  if  it  came  from  ice  it  would  be  sweet,  as  you  explained 
to  me  once  before.     Now  the  water  in  our  pit  is  salt  ! " 

Master  of  himself  as  he  was,  Hobson  could  not  help  changing 
countenance  slightly,  and  he  had  not  a  word  to  say. 

"  Besides,"  added  Marbre,  "  I  wanted  to  sound  the  trench  to 
see  how  deep  the  water  was,  and  to  my  great  surprise,  I  can  tell  you, 
I  could  not  find  the  bottom." 

"Well,  Marbre,"  replied  Hobson  hastily,  "there  is.  nothing  so 
wonderful  in  that.  Some  fracture  of  the  soil  has  established  a  com- 
munication between  the  sea  and  the  trap.  So  don't  be  uneasy 
about  it,  my  brave  fellow,  but  leave  the  trap  alone  for  the  present, 
and  be  content  with  setting  snares  near  the  fort." 


204  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Marbre  touched  his  cap  respectfully,  and  turned  on  his  heel,  but 
not  before  he  had  given  his  chief  a  searching  glance. 

Hobson  remained  very  thoughtful  for  a  few  moments.  Marbre's 
tidings  were  of  grave  importance.  It  was  evident  that  the  bottom 
of  the  trench,  gradually  melted  by  the  warm  waters  of  the  sea,  had 
given  way. 

Hobson  at  once  called  the  Sergeant,  and  having  acquainted 
him  with  the  incident,  they  went  together,  unnoticed  by  their  com- 
panions, to  the  beach  at  the  foot  of  Cape  Bathurst,  where  they  had 
made  the  bench-marks. 

They  examined  them  carefully,  and  found  that  since  they  last  did 
so,  the  floating  island  bad  sunk  six  inches. 

"  We  are  sinking  gradually,"  murmured  Sergeant  Long.  "  The 
ice  is  wearing  away." 

"  Oh  for  the  winter  !  the  winter  ! "  cried  Hobson,  stamping  his 
foot  upon  the  ground. 

But  as  yet,  alas !  there  was  no  sign  of  the  approach  of  the  cold 
season.  The  thermometer  maintained  a  mean  height  of  59°  Fahren- 
heit, and  during  the  few  hours  of  the  night  the  column  of  mercury 
scarcely  went  down  three  degrees. 

Preparations  for  the  approaching  winter  went  on  apace,  and  there 
was  really  nothing  wanting  to  Fort  Hope,  although  it  had  not  been 
revictualled  by  Captain  Craventy's  detachment.  The  long  hours  of 
the  Arctic  night  might  be  awaited  in  perfect  security.  The  stores 
were  of  course  carefully  husbanded.  There  still  remained  plenty  of 
spirits,  only  small  quantities  having  been  consumed ;  and  there  was 
a  good  stock  of  biscuits,  which,  once  gone,  could  not  be  replaced. 
Fresh  venison  and  salt  meat  were  to  be  had  in  abundance,  and 
with  some  antiscorbutic  vegetables,  the  diet  was  most  healthy  ;  and 
all  the  members  of  the  little  colony  were  well. 

A  good  deal  of  timber  was  cut  in  the  woods  clothing  the  eastern 
slopes  of  Lake  Barnett.  Many  were  the  birch-trees,  pines,  and  firs 
which  fell  beneath  the  axe  of  Mac-Nab,  and  were  dragged  to  the 
house  by  the  tamed  reindeer.  The  carpenter  did  not  spare  the 
little  forest,  although  he  cut  his  wood  judiciously  ;  for  he  never 
dreamt  that  timber  might  fail  him,  imagining,  as  he  did,  Victoria 
Island  to  be  a  peninsula,  and  knowing  the  districts  near  Cape 
Michael  to  be  rich  in  different  species  of  trees. 

Many  a  time  did  the  unconscious  carpenter  congratulate  his  Lieu- 
tenant on  having  chosen  a  spot  so  favoured  by  Heaven.    Woods,  game, 


"  We  are  sinking  gradually."  —  Page  204. 


FROM  JUL Y  25 TH  TO  AUGUST  20 TH.  20 C 

furred  animals,  a  lagoon  teeming  with  fish,  plenty  of  herbs  for  the 
animals,  and,  as  Corporal  Jolitfe  would  have  added,  double  pay  for 
the  men.  Was  not  Cape  Bathurst  a  corner  of  a  privileged  land,  the 
like  of  which  was  not  to  be  found  in  the  whole  Arctic  regions  % 
Truly  Hobson  was  a  favourite  of  Heaven,  and  ought  to  return  thanks 
to  Providence  every  day  for  the  discovery  of  this  unique  spot. 

Ah,  Mac-Nab,  you  little  knew  how  you  wrung  the  heart  of  your 
master  when  you  talked  in  that  strain  ! 

The  manufacture  of  winter  garments  was  not  neglected  in  the 
factory.  Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  Mrs  Mac-Nab,  Mrs  Rae,  and  Mrs 
Joliffe — when  she  could  leave  her  fires — were  alike  indefatigable. 
Mrs  Barnett  knew  that  they  would  all  have  to  leave  the  fort  in  the 
depth  of  winter,  and  was  determined  that  every  one  should  be 
warmly  clothed.  They  would  have  to  face  the  bitterest  cold  for  a 
good  many  days  during  the  Polar  night,  if  Victoria  Island  should 
halt  far  from  the  continent.  Boots  and  clothes  ought  indeed  to  be 
strong  and  well  made,  for  crossing  some  hundreds  of  miles  under 
such  circumstances.  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  devoted  all  their  ener- 
gies to  the  matter  in  hand,  and  the  furs,  which  they  knew  it  would 
be  impossible  to  save,  were  turned  to  good  account.  They  were 
used  double,  so  that  the  soft  hair  was  both  inside  and  outside  of  the 
clothes  ;  and  when  wearing  them,  the  whole  party  would  be  as  richly 
attired  as  the  grandest  princesses,  or  the  most  wealthy  ladies.  Those 
not  in  the  secret  were  rather  surprised  at  the  free  use  made  of  the 
Company's  property;  but  Hobson's  authority  was  not  to  be  questioned, 
and  really  martens,  polecats,  musk-rats,  beavers,  and  foxes  multi- 
plied with  such  rapidity  near  the  fort,  that  all  the  furs  used  could 
easily  be  replaced  by  a  few  shots,  or  the  setting  of  a  few  traps  ; 
and  when  Mrs  Mac-Nab  saw  the  beautiful  ermine  coat  which  had 
been  made  for  her  baby,  her  delight  was  unbounded,  and  she  no 
longer  wondered  at  anything. 

So  passed  the  days  until  the  middle  of  the  month  of  August.  The 
weather  continued  fine,  and  any  mists  which  gathered  on  the  horizon 
were  quickly  dispersed  by  the  sunbeams. 

Every  day  Hobson  took  the  bearings,  taking  care,  however,  to  go 
some  distance  from  the  fort,  that  suspicions  might  not  be  aroused ; 
and  he  also  visited  different  parts  of  the  island,  and  was  reassured 
by  finding  that  no  important  changes  appeared  to  be  taking  place. 

On  the  16th  August  Victoria  Island  was  situated  in  167°  27' 
west  longitude,   and    70°  49'   north  latitude.     It   had,  therefore. 


206  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


drifted  slightly  to  the  south,  but  without  getting  any  nearer  to  the 
American  coast,  which  curved  considerably. 

The  distance  traversed  by  the  island  since  the  fracture  of  the 
isthmus,  or  rather  since  the  last  thaw,  could  not  be  less  than  eleven 
or  twelve  hundred  miles  to  the  west. 

But  what  was  this  distance  compared  to  the  vast  extent  of  the 
ocean  %  Had  not  boats  been  known  to  be  drifted  several  thousands 
of  miles  by  currents  ?  Was  not  this  the  case  with  the  English  ship 
Resolute,  the  American  brig  Advance,  and  with  the  Fox,  all  of  which 
were  carried  along  upon  ice-fields  until  the  winter  arrested  their 
advance  1 


CHAPTER  VI. 

TEN  DA  YS  OF  TEMPEST, 

!R0M  the  17th  to  the  20th  August  the  weather  continued 
fine,  and  the  temperature  moderate.  The  mists  on  the 
horizon  were  not  resolved  into  clouds,  and  altogether  the 
weather  was  exceptionally  beautiful  for  such  an  elevated  position. 
It  will  be  readily  understood,  however,  that  Hobson  could  take  no 
pleasure  in  the  fineness  of  the  climate. 

On  the  21st  August,  however,  the  barometer  gave  notice  of  an 
approaching  change.  The  column  of  mercury  suddenly  fell  con- 
siderably, the  sun  was  completely  hidden  at  the  moment  of  culmina- 
tion, and  Hobson  was  unable  to  take  his  bearings. 

The  next  day  the  wind  changed  and  blew  strongly  from  the 
north-west,  torrents  of  rain  falling  at  intervals.  Meanwhile,  how- 
ever, the  temperature  did  not  change  to  any  sensible  extent,  the 
thermometer  remaining  at  54°  Fahrenheit. 

Fortunately  the  proposed  works  were  now  all  finished,  and  Mac- 
Nab  had  completed  the  carcass  of  his  boat,  which  was  planked  and 
ribbed.  Hunting  might  now  be  neglected  a  little,  as  the  stores 
were  complete,  which  was  fortunate,  for  the  weather  became  very 
bad.  The  wind  was  high,  the  rain  incessant,  and  thick  fogs  rendered 
it  impossible  to  go  beyond  the  enceinte  of  the  fort. 

"  What  do  you  think  of  this  change  in  the  weather.  Lieutenant  % " 
inquired  Mrs  Barnett  on  the  morning  of  the  27th  August ;  "  might 
it  not  be  in  our  favour  ?  " 

"  I  should  not  like  to  be  sure  of  it,  madam,"  replied  Hobson ; 
"  but  anything  is  better  for  us  than  the  magnificent  weather  we 
have  lately  had,  during  which  the  sun  made  the  waters  warmer  and 
warmer.  Then,  too,  the  wind  from  the  north-west  is  so  very  strong 
that  it  may  perhaps  drive  us  nearer  to  the  American  continent." 

"  Unfortunately,"  observed  Long,  "  we  can't  take  our  bearings 
every  day  now.  It 's  impossible  to  see  either  sun,  moon,  or  stars 
in  this  fog.     Fancy  attempting  to  take  an  altitude  now  ! " 


208  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

"  We  shall  see  well  enough  to  recognise  America,  if  we  get  any- 
where near  it,"  said  Mrs  Barnett.  "  Whatever  land  we  approach  will 
be  welcome.  It  will  most  likely  be  some  part  of  Russian  America 
— probably  Western  Alaska." 

"  You  are  right,  madam,"  said  Hobson  ;  "  for,  unfortunately,  in 
the  whole  Arctic  Ocean  there  is  not  an  island,  an  islet,  or  even  a 
rock  to  which  we  could  fasten  our  vessel  ! " 

"  Well/*  rejoined  Mrs  Barnett,  "  why  should  not  our  conveyance 
take  us  straight  to  the  coasts  of  Asia?  Might  not  the  currents 
carry  us  past  the  opening  of  Behring  Strait  and  land  us  on  the 
shores  of  Siberia  'i  " 

"  No,  madam,  no,"  replied  Hobson ;  "  our  ice-field  would  soon 
meet  the  Kamtchatka  current,  and  be  carried  by  it  to  the  north- 
west. It  is  more  likely,  however,  that  this  wind  will  drive  us 
towards  the  shores  of  Russian  America." 

"We  must  keep  watch,  then,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "and  ascertain 
our  position  as  soon  as  possible." 

'*  We  shall  indeed  keep  watch,"  replied  Hobson,  "  although  this 
fog  is  very  much  against  us.  If  we  should  be  driven  on  to  the  coast, 
the  shock  will  be  felt  even  if  we  cannot  see.  Let 's  hope  the  island 
will  not  fall  to  pieces  in  this  storm !  That  is  at  present  our 
principal  danger.  Well,  when  it  comes  we  shall  see  what  there  is 
to  be  done,  and  meanwhile  we  must  wait  patiently." 

Of  course  this  conversation  was  not  held  in  the  public  room, 
where  the  soldiers  and  women  worked  together.  It  was  in  her 
own  room,  with  the  window  looking  out  on  the  court,  that  Mrs 
Barnett  received  visitors.  It  was  almost  impossible  to  see  indoors 
even  in  the  daytime,  and  the  wind  could  be  heard  rushing  by  out- 
side like  an  avalanche.  Fortunately,  Cape  Bathurst  protected  the 
house  from  the  north-east  winds,  but  the  sand  and  earth  from  its 
summit  were  hurled  down  upon  the  roof  with  a  noise  like  the 
pattering  of  hail.  Mac-Nab  began  to  feel  fresh  uneasiness  about 
his  chimneys,  which  it  was  absolutely  necessary  to  keep  in  good 
order.  With  the  roaring  of  the  wind  was  mingled  that  of  the  sea, 
as  its  huge  waves  broke  upon  the  beach.  The  storm  had  become 
a  hurricane. 

In  spite  of  the  fury  of  the  gale,  Hobson  determined  on  the 
morning  of  the  28th  of  August  to  climb  to  the  summit  of  Cape 
Bathurst,  in  order  to  examine  the  state  of  the  horizon,  the  sea,  and 


"  Hobson  remained  crouching,"  ^c.  —  Page  209. 


TEN  DAYS  OF  TEMPEST,  2O9 


the  sky.     He  therefore  wrapped  himself  up,  taking  care  to  have 
nothing  about  him  likely  to  give  hold  the  wind,  and  set  out. 

He  got  to  the  foot  of  the  cape  without  much  difficulty.  The  sand 
and  earth  blinded  him,  it  is  true,  but  protected  by  the  cliff  he  had 
not  as  yet  actually  faced  the  wind.  The  fatigue  began  when  he 
attempted  to  climb  the  almost  perpendicular  sides  of  the  promon- 
tory ;  but  by  clutching  at  the  tufts  of  herbs  with  which  tbey  were 
covered,  he  managed  to  get  to  the  top,  but  there  the  fury  of  the  gale 
was  such  that  he  could  neither  remain  standing  nor  seated ;  he  was 
therefore  forced  to  fling  himself  upon  his  face  behind  the  little  cop- 
pice and  cling  to  some  shrubs,  only  raising  his  head  and  shoulders 
above  the  ground. 

The  appearance  of  sea  and  sky  was  indeed  terrible.  The  spray 
dashed  over  the  Lieutenant's  head,  and  half-a-miie  from  the  cape 
water  and  clouds  were  confounded  together  in  a  thick  mist.  Low 
jagged  rain-clouds  were  chased  along  the  heavens  with  giddy 
rapidity,  and  heavy  masses  of  vapour  were  piled  upon  the  zenith. 
Every  now  and  then  an  awful  stillness  fell  upon  the  land,  and  tl\e 
only  sounds  were  the  breaking  of  the  surf  upon  the  beach  and  the 
roaring  of  the  angry  billows  ;  but  then  the  tempest  recommenced 
with  redoubled  fury,  and  Hobson  felt  the  cape  tremble  to  its  founda- 
tions. Sometimes  the  rain  poured  down  with  such  violence  that  it 
resembled  grape-shot. 

It  was  indeed  a  terrible  hurricane  from  the  very  worst  quarter  of 
the  heavens.  This  north-east  wind  might  blow  for  a  long  time  and 
cause  all  manner  of  havoc.  Yet  Hobson,  who  would  generally  have 
grieved  over  the  destruction  around  him,  did  not  complain, — on  the 
contrary,  he  rejoiced ;  for  if,  as  he  hoped,  the  island  held  together,  it 
must  be  driven  to  the  south-west  by  this  wind,  so  much  more 
powerful  than  the  currents.  And  the  south-west  meant  land — hope 
— safety  !  Yes,  for  his  own  sake,  and  for  that  of  all  with  him,  he 
hoped  that  the  hurricane  would  last  unjbil  it  had  flung  them  upon  the 
land,  no  matter  where.  That  which  would  have  been  fatal  to  a  ship 
was  the  best  thing  that  could  happen  to  the  floating  island. 

For  a  quarter  of  an  hour  Hobson  remained  crouching  upon  the 
ground,  clutching  at  the  shrubs  like  a  drowning  man  at  a  spar, 
lashed  by  the  wind,  drenched  by  the  rain  and  the  spray,  struggling 
to  estimate  all  the  chances  of  safety  the  storm  might  afford  him. 
At  the  end  of  that  time  he  let  himself  slide  down  the  cape,  and 
fought  his  way  to  Fort  Hope. 


2IO  '  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Hobson's  first  care  was  to  tell  his  comrades  that  the  hurricane  was 
tiot  yet  at  its  height,  and  that  it  would  probably  last  a  long  time 
yet.  He  announced  these  tidings  with  the  manner  of  one  bringing 
good  news,  and  every  one  looked  at  him  in  astonishment.  Their  chief 
officer  really  seemed  to  take  a  delight  in  the  fury  of  the  elements. 

On  the  30th  Hobson  again  braved  the  tempest,  not  this  time 
climbing  the  cape,  but  going  down  to  the  beach.  What  was  his 
joy  at  noticing  some  long  weeds  floating  on  the  top  of  the  waves,  of 
a  kind  which  did  not  grow  on  Victoria  Island.  Christopher 
Columbus'  delight  was  not  greater  when  he  saw  the  sea- weed  which 
told  him  of  the  proximity  of  land. 

The  Lieutenant  hurried  back  to  the  fort,  and  told  Mrs  Barnett 
and  Sergeant  Long  of  his  discovery.  He  had  -a  good  mind  to  tell 
every  one  the  whole  truth  now,  but  a  strange  presentiment  kept 
him  silent. 

The  occupants  of  the  fort  had  plenty  to  amuse  them  in  the  long 
days  of  compulsory  confinement.  They  went  on  improving  the 
inside  of  the  various  buildings,  and  dug  trenches  in  the  court  to 
carry  away  the  rain-water.  Mac-Nab,  a  hammer  in  one  hand  and  a 
nail  in  the  other,  was  always  busy  at  u  job  in  some  corner  or  another, 
and  nobody  took  much  note  of  the  tempest  outside  in  the  daytime ; 
but  at  night  it  was  impossible  to  sleep,  the  wind  beat  upon  the 
buildings  like  a  battering-ram  \  between  the  house  and  the  cape  some- 
times whirled  a  huge  waterspout  of  extraordinary  dimensions ;  the 
planks  cracked,  the  beams  seemed  about  to  separate,  and  there  was 
danger  of  the  whole  structure  tumbling  down.  Mac-Nab  and  his 
men  lived  in  a  state  of  perpetual  dread,  and  had  to  be  continually 
on  the  watch. 

Meanwhile,  Hobson  was  uneasy  about  the  stability  of  the  island 
itself,  rather  than  that  of  the  house  upon  it.  The  tempest 
became  so  violent,  and  the  sea  so  rough,  that  there  was  really  a 
danger  of  the  dislocation  of  the  ice-field.  It  seemed  impossible  for 
it  to  resist  much  longer,  diminished  as  it  was  in  thickness  and 
subject  to  the  perpetual  action  of  the  waves.  It  is  true  that  its 
inhabitants  did  not  feel  any  motion,  on  account  of  its  vast  extent, 
but  it  suffered  from  it  none  the  less.  The  point  at  issue  was 
simply  : — Would  the  island  last  until  it  was  flung  upon  the  coast, 
or  would  it  fall  to  pieces  before  it  touched  firm  ground  ? 

There  could  be  no  doubt  that  thus  far  it  had  resisted.  As  the 
Lieutenant  explained  to  Mrs  Barnett,  Jiad  it  already  been  broken, 


TEN  DAYS   OF   TEMPEST,  211 

had  the  ice-field  already  divided  into  a  number  of  islets,  the  occu- 
pants of  the  fort  must  have  noticed  it,  for  the  diflferent  pieces  would 
have  been  small  enough  to  be  affected  by  the  motion  of  the  sea,  and 
the  people  on  any  one  of  them  would  have  been  pitched  about  like 
passengers  on  a  boat.  This  was  not  the  case,  and  in  his  daily 
observations  Lieutenant  Hobson  had  noticed  no  movement  what- 
ever, not  so  much  as  a  trembling  of  the  island,  which  appeared 
as  firm  and  motionless  as  when  it  was  still  connected  by  its 
isthmus  with  the  mainland. 

But  the  breaking  up,  which  had  not  yet  taken  place,  might 
happen  at  any  minute. 

Hobson  was  most  anxious  to  ascertain  whether  Victoria  Island, 
driven  by  the  north-west  wind  out  of  the  current,  had  approached 
the  continent.  Everything,  in  fact,  depended  upon  this,  which  was 
their  last  chance  of  safety.  But  without  sun,  moon,  or  stars, 
instruments  were  of  course  useless,  as  no  observations  could  be 
taken,  and  the  exact  position  of  the  island  could  not  be  deter- 
mined. If,  then,  they  were  approaching  the  land,  they  would  only 
know  it  when  the  land  came  in  sight,  and  Hobson's  only  means  of 
ascertaining  anything  in  time  to  be  of  any  service,  was  to  get  to 
the  south  of  his  dangerous  dominions.  The  position  of  Victoria 
Island  with  regard  to  the  cardinal  points  had  not  sensibly  altered 
all  the  time.  Cape  Bathurst  still  pointed  to  the  north,  as  it  did 
when  it  was  the  advanced  post  of  North  America.  It  was,  there- 
fore, evident  that  if  Victoria  Island  should  come  alongside  of  the 
continent,  it  would  touch  it  with  its  southern  side, — the  communi- 
cation would,  in  a  word,  be  re-established  by  means  of  the  broken 
isthmus  ;  it  was,  therefore,  imperative  to  ascertain  what  was  going 
on  in  that  direction. 

Hobson  determined  to  go  to  Cape  Michael,  however  terrible  the 
storm  might  be,  but  he  meant  to  keep  the  real  motive  of  his 
reconnaissance  a  secret  from  his  companions.  Sergeant  Long  was 
to  accompany  him. 

About  four  o'clock  p.m.,  on  the  31st  August,  Hobson  sent  for 
the  Sergeant  in  his  own  room,  that  they  might  arrange  together  for 
all  eventualities. 

"  Sergeant  Long,"  he  began,  "it  is  necessary  that  we  should, 
without  delay,  ascertain  the  position  of  Victoria  Island,  and  above 
all  whether  this  wind  has,  as  I  hope,  driven  it  near  to  the  American 
continent.'' 


212  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


"  I  quite  agree  with  yon,  sir,"  replied  Long,  "  and  the  sooner  we 
find  out  the  better.'" 

"  But  it  will  necessitate  our  going  down  to  the  south  of  the 
island." 

"  I  am  ready,  sir." 

"  I  know,  Sergeant,  that  you  are  always  ready  to  do  your  duty ; 
but  you  will  not  go  alone.  Two  of  us  ought  to  go,  that  we  may 
be  able  to  let  our  comrades  know  if  any  land  is  in  sight ;  and 
besides  I  must  see  for  myself  ...  we  will  go  together." 
"  When  you  like,  Lieutenant,  just  when  you  think  best." 
**  We  will  start  this  evening  at  nine  o'clock,  when  everybody  else 
has  gone  to  bed." 

"  Yes,  they  would  all  want  to  come  with  us,"  said  Long,  "  and 
they  must  not  know  why  we  go  so  far  from  the  factory." 

"No,  they  must  not  know,"  replied  Hobson,  "and  if  I  can.  I 
will  keep  the  knowledge  of  our  awful  situation  from  them  until  the 
end." 

"  It  is  agreed  then,  sir  ?  " 

"  Yes.     You  will  take  a  tinder-box  and  some  touchwood^  with 
you,  so  that  we  can  make  a  signal  if  necessary — if  land  is  in  sight 
in  the  south,  for  instance." 
"  Yes,  sir." 

"  We  shall  have  a  rough  journey,  Sergeant.** 
"  What  does  that  matter,  sir ;  but  by  the  way — the  lady  ? " 
"  I  don't  think  I   shall  tell  her.     She  would  want  to  go  with 
us." 

"  And  she  could  not,"  said  the  Sergeant,  "  a  woman  could  not 
battle  with  such  a  gale.  Just  see  how  its  fury  is  increasing  at  tills 
moment ! " 

Indeed  the  house  was  rocking  to  such  an  extent  that  it  seemed 
likely  to  be  torn  from  its  foundations. 

"  No,"  said  Hobson,  *'  courageous  as  she  is,  she  could  not,  she 
ought  not  to  accompany  us.  But  on  second  thought*  it  will  be  best 
to  tell  her  of  our  project.  She  ought  to  know  in  case  any  accident 
should  befall  us  "      .  . 

"  Yes,"  replied  Long,  "  we  dught  not  to  keep  anything  from  hei^ 
and  if  we  do  not  come  back  "... 
"  At  nine  o'clock  then.  Sergeant," 
"  At  nine  o'clock." 

^  A  fungua  used  as  tinder  (Folyporous  igniarius). 


The  Lieutenant  promised y  —  Page  213. 


TEN  DAYS    OF    TEMPEST,  2I3 


,    And  with  a  military  salute  Sergeant  Long  retired. 

A  few  minutes  later  Hobson  was  telling  Mrs  Barnett  of  his 
scheme.  As  he  expected  the  brave  woman  insisted  on  accompany- 
ing him,  and  was  quite  ready  to  face  the  tempest.  Hobson  did  not 
dissuade  her  by  dwelling  on  the  dangers  of  the  expedition,  he 
merely  said  that  her  presence  was  necessary  at  the  fort  during  his 
absence,  and  that-  her  remaining  would  set  his  mind  at  ease.  If 
any  accident  happened  to  him  it  would  be  a  comfort  to  know  that 
she  would  take  his  place. 

Mrs  Barnett  understood  and  said  no  more  about  going ;  but  only 
urged  Hobson  not  to  risk  himself  unnecessarily.  To  remember  that 
he  was  the  chief  officer,  that  his  life  was  not  his  own,  but  necessary 
to  the  safety  of  all.  The  Lieutenant  promised  to  be  as  prudent  as 
possible  ;  but  added  that  the  examination  of  the  south  of  the  island 
must  be  made  at  once,  and  he  would  make  it.  The  next  day  Mrs 
Barnett  merely  told  her  companions  that  the  Lieutenant  and 
the  Sergeant  had  gone  to  make  a  final  reconnaissance  before  the 
winter  set  in. 


CIIAPTEK  VII. 

A    FIRE    AND    A     CRY. 

HE  Lieutenant  and  the  Sergeant  spent  the  evening  in  the 
large  room  of  the  fort,  where  all  were  assembled  except 
the  astronomer,  who  still  remained  shut  up  in  his  cabin. 
The  men  were  busy  over  their  various  occupations,  some  cleaning 
their  arms,  others  mending  or  sharpening  their  tools.  The  women 
were  stitching  away  industriously,  and  Mrs  Paulina  Barnett  was 
reading  aloud  ;  but  she  was  often  interrupted  not  only  by  the  noise 
of  the  wind,  which  shook  the  walls  of  the  house  like  a  battering-ram, 
but  by  the  cries  of  the  baby.  Corporal  Joliffe,  who  had  undertaken 
to  amuse  him,  had  enough  to  do.  The  young  gentleman  had  ridden 
upon  his  playmate's  knees  until  they  were  worn  out,  and  the 
Corporal  at  last  put  the  indefatigable  little  cavalier  on  the  large 
table,  where  he  rolled  about  to  his  heart's  content  until  he  fell 
asleep. 

At  eight  o'clock  prayers  were  read  as  usual,  the  lamps  were 
extinguished,  and  all  retired  to  rest. 

When  every  one  was  asleep,  Hobson  and  Long  crept  cautiously 
across  the  large  room  and  gained  the  passage,  where  they  found 
Mrs  Barnett,  who  wished  to  press  their  hands  once  more. 

"  Till  to-morrow,"  she  said  to  the  Lieutenant. 

"Yes,"  replied  Hobson,  *' to-morrow,  madam,  without  fail" 

"  But  if  you  are  delayed  ? " 

"  You  must  wait  patiently  for  us,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "  for 
if  in  examining  the  southern  horizon  we  should  see  a  fire,  which  is 
not  unlikely  this  dark  night,  we  should  know  that  we  were  near  the 
coasts  of  New  Georgia,  and  then  it  would  be  desirable  for  me  to  as- 
certain our  position  by  daylight.  In  fact,  we  may  be  away  forty-eight 
hours.  If,  however,  we  can  get  to  Cape  Michael  before  midnight, 
we  shall  be  back  at  the  fort  to-morrow  evening.  So  wait  patiently, 
madam,  and  believe  that  we  shall  incur  no  unnecessary  risk." 


A   FIRE  AND  A    CRY,  215 

'*  But,"  added  the  lady,  "  suppose  you  don't  get  back  to-morrow, 
suppose  you  are  away  more  than  two  days  % " 

"  Then  we  shall  not  return  at  all,"  replied  Hobson  simply. 

The  door  was  opened,  Mrs  Barnett  closed  it  behind  the  Lieutenant 
and  his  companion  and  went  back  to  her  own  room,  where  Madge 
awaited  hej-,  feeling  anxious  and  thoughtful. 

Hobson  and  Long  made  their  way  across  the  inner  court  through 
a  whirlwind  which  nearly  knocked  them  down  ;  but  clinging  to  each 
other,  and  leaning  on  their  iron-bound  staflfs,  they  reached  the 
postern  gates,  and  set  out  be  ween  the  hills  and  the  eastern  bank  of 
the  lagoon. 

A  faint  twilight  enabled  them  to  see  their  way.  The  moon, 
which  was  new  the  night  before,  would  not  appear  above  the  horizon, 
and  there  was  nothing  to  lessen  the  gloom  of  the  darkness,  which 
would,  however,  last  but  a  few  hours  longer. 

The  wind  and  rain  were  as  violent  as  ever.  The  Lieutenant  and 
his  companion  wore  impervious  boots  and  water-proof  cloaks  well 
pulled  in  at  the  waist,  and  the  hood  completely  covering  their  heads. 
Thus  protected  they  got  along  at  a  rapid  pace,  for  the  wind  was 
behind  them,  and  sometimes  drove  them  on  rather  faster  than  they 
cared  to  go.  Talking  was  quite  out  of  the  question,  and  they  did 
not  attempt  it,  for  they  were  deafened  by  the  hurricane,  and  out  of 
breath  with  the  buffeting  they  received. 

Hobson  did  not  mean  to  follow  the  coast,  the  windings  of  which 
would  have  taken  him  a  long  way  round,  and  have  brought  him 
face  to  face  with  the  wind,  which  swept  over  the  sea  with  nothing 
to  break  its  fury.  His  idea  was  to  cut  across  in  a  straight  line 
from  Cape  Bathurst  to  Cape  Michael,  and  he  was  provided  with  a 
pocket  compass  with  which  to  ascertain  his  bearings.  He  hoped  by 
this  means  to  cross  the  ten  or  eleven  miles  between  him  and  his  goal, 
just  before  the  twilight  faded  and  gave  place  to  the  two  hours  of 
real  darkness. 

Bent  almost  double,  with  rounded  shoulders  and  stooping  heads, 
the  two  pressed  on.  As  long  as  they  kept  near  the  lake  they  did 
not  meet  the  gale  full  face,  the  little  hills  crowned  with  trees  afforded 
them  some  protection,  the  wind  howled  fearfully  as  it  bent  and 
distorted  the  branches,  almost  tearing  the  trunks  up  by  the  roots ; 
but  it  partly  exhausted  its  strength,  and  even  the  rain  when  it 
reached  the  explorers  was  converted  into  impalpable  mist,  so  that 


2l6  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

for  about  four  miles  they  did  not  suffer  half  as  much  as  they 
expected  to. 

But  when  they  reached  the  southern  skirts  of  the  wood,  where 
the  hills  disappeared,  and  there  were  neither  trees  nor  rising  ground, 
the  wind  swept  along  with  awful  force,  and  involuntarily  they 
paused  for  a  moment.  They  were  still  six  miles  from  Cape 
Michael. 

"  We  are  going  to  have  a  bad  time  of  it,"  shouted  Lieutenant 
Hobson  in  the  Sergeant's  ear. 

"  Yes,  the  wind  and  rain  will  conspire  to  give  us  a  good  beating,** 
answered  Long. 

"  I  am  afraid  that  now  and  then  we  shall  have  hail  as  well," 
added  Hobson. 

"  It  won't  be  as  deadly  as  grape-shot,"  replied  Long  coolly,  "and 
we  have  both  been  through  that,  and  so  forwards  !  " 

"  Forwards,  my  brave  comrade  ! " 

Tt  was  then  ten  o'clock.  The  twilight  was  fading  away,  dying  as 
il  drowned  in  the  mists  or  quenched  by  the  wind  and  the  rain. 
There  was  still,  however,  some  light,  and  the  Lieutenant  struck  his 
flint,  and  consulted  his  compass,  passing  a  piece  of  burning  touchwood 
over  it,  and  then,  drawing  his  cloak  more  closely  around  him,  he 
plunged  after  the  Sergeant  across  the  unprotected  plain. 

At  the  first  step,  both  were  flung  violently  to  the  ground,  but 
they  managed  to  scramble  up,  and  clinging  to  each  other  with  their 
backs  bent  like  two  old  crippled  peasants,  they  struck  into  a  kind  of 
ambling  trot. 

There  was  a  kind  of  awful  grandeur  in  the  storm  to  which 
neither  was  insensible.  Jagged  masses  of  mist  and  ragged  rain- 
clouds  swept  along  the  ground.  The  loose  earth  and  sand  were 
whirled  into  the  air  and  flung  down  again  like  grape-shot,  and  the 
lips  of  Hobson  and  his  companion  were  wet  with  salt  spray,  although 
the  sea  was  two  or  three  miles  distant  at  least.  / 

During  the  rare  brief  pauses  in  the  gale,  they  stopped  and  took 
breath,  whilst  the  Lieutenant  ascertained  their  position  as  accurately 
as  possible. 

The  tempest  increased  as  the  night  advanced,  the  air  and  water 
seemed  to  be  absolutely  confounded  together,  and  low  down  on  the 
horizon  was  formed  one  of  those  fearful  waterspouts  which  can 
overthrow  houses,  tear  up  forests,  and  which  the  vessels  whose 
safety  they  threaten   attack  with  artillery.     It  really  seemed  as  if 


"  Not  that  waijr  —  Page  217. 


A   FIRE  AND  A    CRY.  21/ 

the  ocean  itself  was  being  torn  from  its  bed  and  flung  over  the 
devoted  little  island. 

Hobson  could  not  help  wondering  how  it  was  that  the  ice-field 
which  supported  it  was  not  broken  in  a  hundred  places  in  this 
violent  convulsion  of  the  sea,  the  roaring  of  which  could  be  distinctly- 
heard  where  he  stood.  Presently  Long,  who  was  a  few  steps  in 
advance,  stopped  suddenly,  and  turning  round  managed  to  make 
the  Lieutenant  hear  the  broken  words — 

"  Not  that  way  ! " 

"Why  not?" 

"The  sea!" 

"  What,  the  sea  !  We  cannot  possibly  have  got  to  the  south- 
east coast !  " 

"  Look,  look,  Lieutenant ! " 

It  was  true,  a  vast  sheet  of  water  was  indistinctly  visible  before 
them,  and  large  waves  were  rolling  up  and  breaking  at  the  Lieu- 
tenant's feet. 

Hobson  again  had  recourse  to  his  flint,  and  with  the  aid  of  some 
lighted  touchwood  consulted  the  needle  of  his  compass  very  care- 
fully. 

"  No,"  he  said,  "  the  sea  is  farther  to  the  left,  we  have  not  yet 
passed  the  wood  between  us  and  Cape  MichaeL" 

"  Then  it  is  " 

"It  is  a  fracture  of  the  island ! "  cried  Hobson,  as  both  were 
compelled  to  fling  themselves  to  the  ground  before  the  wind  ;  "  either 
a  large  portion  of  our  land  has  been  broken  off  and  drifted  away, 
or  a  gulf  has  been  made,  which  we  can  go  round.     Forwards  !  " 

They  struggled  to  their  feet  and  turned  to  the  right  towards  the 
centre  of  the  island.  For  about  ten  minutes  they  pressed  on  in 
silence,  fearing,  not  without  reason,  that  all  communication  with  the 
south  of  the  island  would  be  found  to  be  cut  off.  Presently,  however, 
they  no  longer  heard  the  noise  of  the  breakers. 

"  It  is  only  a  gulf."  screamed  Hobson  in  the  Sergeant's  ear. 
"  Let  us  turn  round." 

And  they  resumed  their  original  direction  towards  the  south,  but 
both  knew  only  too  well  that  they  had  a  fearful  danger  to  face,  for 
that  portion  of  the  island  on  which  they  were  was  evidently  cracked 
for  a  long  distance,  and  might  at  any  moment  separate  entirely ; 
should  it  do  so  under  the  influence  of  the  waves,  they  would 
inevitably  be  drifted  away,  whither  they  knew  not.     Yet  they  did 


2l8  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


not  hesitate,  but  plunged  into  the  mist,  not  even  pausing  to  wonder 
if  they  should  ever  get  back. 

What  anxious  forebodings  must,  however,  have  pressed  upon  the 
heart  of  the  Lieutenant.  Could  he  now  hope  that  the  island  would 
hold  together  until  the  winter  ?  had  not  the  inevitable  breaking  up 
already  commenced  %  If  the  wind  should  not  drive  them  on  to  the 
coast,  were  they  not  doomed  to  perish  very  soon,  to  be  swallowed  up 
by  the  deep,  leaving  no  trace  behind  them?  What  a  fearful  prospect 
for  all  the  unconscious  inhabitants  of  the  fort ! 

But  through  it  all  the  two  men,  upheld  by  the  consciousness  of  a 
duty  to  perform,  bravely  struggled  on  against  the  gale,  which  nearly 
tore  them  to  pieces,  along  the  new  beach,  the  foam  sometimes 
bathing  their  feet,  and  presently  gained  the  large  wood  which  shut 
in  Cape  Michael.  This  they  would  have  to  cross  to  get  to  the 
coast  by  the  shortest  route,  and  tkey  entered  it  in  complete  dark- 
ness, the  wind  thundering  among  the  branches  over  their  heads. 
Everything  seemed  to  be  breaking  to  pieces  around  them,  the  dis- 
located branches  intercepted  their  passage,  and  every  moment  they 
ran  a  risk  of  being  crashed  beneath  a  falling  tree,  or  they  stumbled 
over  a  stump  they  had  not  been  able  to  see  in  the  gloom.  The 
noise  of  the  waves  on  the  other  side  of  the  wood  was  a  sufficient 
guide  to  their  steps,  and  sometimes  the  furious  breakers  shook  the 
weakened  ground  beneath  their  feet.  Holding  each  other's  hands 
lest  they  should  lose  each  other,  supporting  each  other,  and  the  one 
helping  the  other  up  when  he  fell  over  some  obstacle,  they  at  last 
reached  the  point  for  which  they  were  bound. 

But  the  instant  they  quitted  the  shelter  of  the  wood  a  perfect 
whirlwind  tore  them  asunder,  and  flung  them  upon  the  ground. 

"  Sergeant,  Sergeant !  Where  are  you  % "  cried  Hobson  with  all 
the  strength  of  his  lungs. 

"  Here,  here  !  "  roared  Long  in  reply. 

And  creeping  on  the  ground  they  struggled  to  reach  each  other ; 
but  it  seemed  as  if  a  powerful  hand  rivetted  them  to  the  spot  on 
which  they  had  fallen,  and  it  was  only  after  many  futile  efforts  that 
they  managed  to  reach  each  other.  Having  done  so,  they  tied  their 
belts  together  to  prevent  another  separation,  and  crept  along  the 
sand  to  a  little  rising  ground  crowned  by  a  small  clump  of  pines. 
Once  there  they  were  a  little  more  protected,  and  they  proceeded  to 
dig  themselves  a  hole,  in  which  they  crouched  in  a  state  of  absolute 
exhaustion  and  prostration. 


Sergeant !  vjhere  are  you  ?''  —  Page  218. 


A   FIRE   AND  A    CRY.  2ig 


It  was  half-past  eleven  o'clock  p.m. 

For  some  minutes  neither  spoke.  With  eyes  half  closed  they  lay 
in  a  kind  of  torpor,  whilst  the  trees  above  them  bent  beneath  the 
wind,  and  their  branches  rattled  like  the  bones  of  a  skeleton.  But 
yet  again  they  roused  themselves  from  this  fatal  lethargy,  and  a  few 
mouthfuls  of  rum  from  the  Sergeant's  flask  revived  them. 

"  Let  us  hope  the§e  trees  will  hold,"  at  last  observed  Hobson. 

"  And  that  our  hole  will  not  blow  away  with  them,"  added  the 
Sergeant,  crouchirg  in  the  soft  sand. 

"  Well !  "  said  Hobson,  "  here  we  are  at  last,  a  few  feet  from  Cape 
Michael,  and  as  we  came  to  make  observations,  let  us  make  them. 
I  have  a  presentiment,  Sergeant,  only  a  presentiment,  remember, 
that  we  are  not  far  from  firm  ground  !  " 

Had  the  southern  horizon  been  visible  the  two  adventurers 
would  have  been  able  to  see  two-thirds  of  it  from  their  position ; 
but  it  was  too  dark  to  make  out  anything,  and  if  the  hurricane  had 
indeed  driven  them  within  sight  of  land,  they  would  not  be  able  to 
see  it  until  daylight,  unless  a  fire  should  be  lighted  on  the  con- 
tinent. 

As  the  Lieutenant  had  told  Mrs  Barnett,  fishermen  often  visited 
that  part  of  North  America,  which  is  called  New  Georgia,  and  there 
are  a  good  many  small  native  colonies,  the  members  of  which 
collect  the  teeth  of  mammoths,  these  fossil  elephants  being 
very  numerous  in  these  latitudes.  A  few  degrees  farther  south,  on 
the  island  of  Sitka,  rises  New- Archangel,  the  principal  settlement 
in  Russian  America,  and  the  head-quarters  of  the  Russian  Fur 
Company,  whose  jurisdiction  once  extended  over  the  whole  of  the 
Aleutian  Islands.  The  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  are,  however, 
the  favourite  resort  of  hunters,  especially  since  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  took  a  lease  of  the  districts  formerly  in  the  hands  of  the 
Russians ;  and  Hobson,  although  he  knew  nothing  of  the  country, 
was  well  acquainted  with  the  habits  of  those  who  were  likely  to 
visit  it  at  this  time  of  the  year,  and  was  justified  in  thinking  that 
he  might  meet  fellow-countrymen,  perhaps  even  members  of  his 
own  Company,  or,  failing  them,  some  native  Indians,  scouring  the 
coasts. 

But  could  the  Lieutenant  reasonably  hope  that  Victoria  Island 
had  been  driven  towards  the  coast  1 

"  Yes,  a  hundred  times  yes,"  he  repeated  to  the  Sergeant  again 
and  again.    "  For  seven  days  a  hurricane  has  been  blowing  from  the 


220  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


north-east,  and  although  I  kr^)w  that  the  island  is  very  flat,  and 
there  is  not  much  for  the  wind  to  take  hold  of,  still  all  these  little 
hills  and  woods  spread  out  like  sails  must  have  felt  the  influence  of 
the  wind  to  a  certain  extent.  Moreover,  the  sea  which  bears  us 
along  feels  its  power,  and  large  waves  are  certainly  running  in  shore. 
It  is  impossible  for  us  to  have  remained  in  the  current  which  was 
dragging  us  to  the  west,  we  must  have  been  driven  out  of  it,  and 
tow^ards  the  south.  Last  time  we  took  our  bearings  we  were  two 
hundred  miles  from  the  coast,  and  in  seven  days" 

"  Your  reasonings  are  very  just.  Lieutenant,"  replied  the  Sergeant, 
"  and  I  feel  that  whether  the  wind  helps  us  or  not,  God  will  not 
forsake  us.    It  cannot  be  His  will  that  so  many  unfortunate  creatures* 
should  perish,  and  I  put  my  trust  in  Him  ! " 

The  two  talked  on  in  broken  sentences,  making  each  other^hear 
above  the  roaring  of  the  storm,  and  struggling  to  pierce  the  gloom 
which  closed  them  in  on  every  side ;  but  they  could  see  nothing, 
not  a  ray  of  light  broke  the  thick  darkness. 

About  half-past  one  a.m.  the  hurricane  ceased  for  a  few  minutes, 
whilst  the  fury  of  the  sea  seemed  to  be  redoubled,  and  the  large 
waves,  lashed  into  foam,  broke  over  each  other  with  a  roar  like 
thunder. 

Suddenly  Hobson  seizing  his  companion's  arm  shouted — 

*'  Sergeant,  do  you  hear  ? " 

"What?" 

"The  noise  of  the  sea?" 

"  Of  course  I  do,  sir,"  replied  Long,  listening  more  attentively, 
"  and  the  sound  of  the  breakers  seems  to  me  not  " 

"  Not  exactly  the  same  .  .  .  isn't  it  Sergeant ;  listen,  listen,  it  is 
like  the  sound  of  surf  !  ...  it  seems  as  if  the  waves  were  breaking 
against  rocks  !  " 

Hobson  and  the  Sergeant  now  listened  intently,  the  monotonous 
sound  of  the  waves  dashing  against  each  other  in  the  ofiing  was 
certainly  exchanged  for  the  regular  rolling  sound  produced  by  the 
breaking  of  water  against  a  hard  body  ;  they  heard  the  reverberating 
echoes  which  told  of  the  neighbourhood  of  rocks,  and  they  knew 
that  along  the  whole  of  the  coast  of  their  island  there  was  not  a 
single  stone,  and  nothing  more  sonorous  than  the  earth  and  sand  of 
which  it  was  composed  ! 

Could  they  have  been  deceived  ?  The  Sergeant  tried  to  rise  to 
liMen  better,  but  he  was  immediately  flung  down  by  the  hurricane, 


saw  their  fire;  they  will  see  oursr  —  Page  221. 


A   FIRE    AND   A    CRY.  221 

which  recommenced  with  renewed  violence.  The  lull  was  over,  and 
again  the  noise  of  the  waves  was  drowned  in  the  shrill  whistling  of 
the  wind,  and  the  peculiar  echo  could  no  longer  be  made  out. 

The  anxiety  of  the  two  explorers  will  readily  be  imagined.  They 
again  crouched  down  in  their  hole,  doubting  whether  it  would  not 
perhaps  be  prudent  to  leave  even  this  shelter,  for  they  felt  the  sand 
giving  way  beneath  them,  and  the  pines  cracking  at  their  very  roots. 
They  persevered,  however,  in  gazing  towards  the  south,  every  nerve 
strained  to  the  utmost,  in  the  effort  to  distinguish  objects  through 
the  darkness. 

The  first  grey  twilight  of  the  dawn  might  soon  be  expected  to 
appear,  and  a  little  before  half-past  two  A.M.  Long  suddenly  ex- 
claimed : 

"  I  see  it !  " 

"What?" 

"Afire!" 

"Afire?" 

*'  Yes,  there — over  there  !** 

And  he  pointed  to  the  soath-west.  Was  he  mistaken  1  No,  for 
Hobson  also  made  out  a  faint  glimmer  in  the  direction  indicated. 

"  Yes  !  "  he  cried,  "  yes.  Sergeant,  a  fire ;  there  is  land  there  !*' 

"  Unless  it  is  a  fire  on  board  ship,"  replied  Long. 

"  A  ship  at  sea  in  this  weather  ! "  exclaimed  Hobson,  "  impossible! 
No,  no,  there  is  land  there,  land  I  tell  you,  a  few  miles  from 
us!'' 

"  Well,  let  us  make  a  signal ! " 

"  Yes,  Sergeant,  we  will  reply  to  the  fire  on  the  mainland  by  a 
fire  on  our  island  !  " 

Of  course  neither  Hobson  nor  Long  had  a  torch,  but  above  their 
heads  rose  resinous  pines- distorted  by  the  hurricane. 

"  Your  flint.  Sergeant,"  said  Hobson. 

Long  at  once  struck  his  flint,  lighted  the  touchwood,  and  creeping 
along  the  sand  climbed  to  the  foot  of  the  thicket  of  firs,  where  he 
was  soon  joined  by  the  Lieutenant.  There  was  plenty  of  deadwood 
about,  and  they  piled  it  up  at  the  stems  of  the  trees,  set  fire  to 
it,  and  soon,  the  wind  helping  them,  they  had  the  satisfaction  of 
seeing  the  whole  thicket  in  a  blaze. 

"  Ah ! "  said  Hobson,  "  as  we  saw  their  fire,  they  will  see  ours  I " 

The  firs  burnt  with  a  lurid  glare  like  a  large  torch.  The  dried 
resin  in  the  old  trunks  aided  the  conflagration,   and  they   were 


222  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


rapidly  consumed.  At  last  the  crackling  ceased,  the  flames  died 
away,  and  all  was  darkness, 

Hobson  and  Long  looked  in  vain  for  an  answering  fire — nothing 
was  to  be  seen.  For  ten  minutes  they  watched,  hoping  against 
hope,  and  were  just  beginning  to  despair,  when  suddenly  a  cry  was 
heard,  a  distinct  cry  for  help.  It  was  a  human  voice,  and  it  came 
from  the  sea. 

Hobson  and  Long,  wild  with  eager  anxiety,  let  themselves  slide 
down  to  the  shore. 

The  cry  was  not,  however,  repeated. 

The  daylight  was  now  gradually  beginning  to  appear,  and  the 
violence  of  the  tempest  seemed  to  be  decreasing.  Soon  it  was  light 
enough  for  the  horizon  to  be  examined. 

But  there  was  no  land  in  sight,  sea  and  sky  were  still  blended  in. 
one  unbroken  circle. 


CHAPTER  VIIL 

MRS  PAULINA  BAKNETT^S  EXCURSION. 


"i^^HE  whole  morning  Hobson  and  Sergeant  Long  wandered 
<Q;^  about  the  coast.  The  weather  was  much  improved,  the 
^^'^^^  rain  had  ceased,  and  the  wind  had  veered  round  to  the 
south-east  with  extraordinary  suddenness,  without  unfortunately 
decreasing  in  violence,  causing  fresh  anxiety  to  the  Lieutenant,  who 
could  no  longer  hope  to  reach  the  mainland. 

The  south-east  wind  would  drive  the  wandering  island  farther 
from  the  continent,  and  fling  it  into  the  dangerous  currents,  which 
must  drift  it  to  the  north  of  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

How  could  they  even  be  sure  that  they  had  really  approached 
the  coast  during  the  awful  night  just  over.  Might  it  not  have  been 
merely  a  fancy  of  the  Lieutenant's  ?  The  air  was  now  clear,  and 
they  could  look  round  a  radius  of  several  miles;  yet  there  was 
nothing  in  the  least  resembling  land  within  sight.  Might  they  not 
adopt  the  Sergeant's  suggestion,  that  a  ship  had  passed  the  island 
during  the  night,  that  the  fire  and  cry  were  alike  signals  of  sailors 
in  distress  ?  And  if  it  had  been  a  vessel,  must  it  not  have  foundered 
in  such  a  storm  % 

Whatever  the  explanation  there  was  no  sign  of  a  wreck  to  be 
seen  either  in  the  offing  or  on  the  beach,  and  the  waves,  now  driven 
along  by  the  wind  from  the  land,  were  large  enough  to  have  over- 
whelmed any  vessel. 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,"  said  Sergeant  Long,  "what  is  to  be  done?'* 

"We  must  remain  upon  our  island,"  replied  the  Lieutenant, 
pressing  his  hand  to  his  brow  ;  "  we  must  remain  on  our  island  and 
wait  for  winter ;  it  alone  can  save  us." 

t  was  now  mid-day,  and  Hobson,  anxious  to  get  back  to  Fort 
Hope  before  the  evening,  at  once  turned  towards  Cape  Bathurst. 

The  wind,  being  now  on  their  backs,  helped  them  along  as  it  had 
done  before.  They  could  not  help  feeling  very  uneasy,  as  they  were 
naturally  afraid   that  the  island  might  have  separated  into  two 


224  ^^^  P^^  COUNTRY. 


parts  in  the  storm.  The  gulf  observed  the  nighl  before  might  have 
spread  farther,  and  if  so  they  would  be  cut  oflf  from  their  friends. 

They  soon  reached  the  wood  they  had  crossed  the  night  before. 
Numbers  of  trees  were  lying  on  the  ground,  some  with  broken 
stems,  others  torn  up  by  the  roots  from  the  soft  soil,  which  had  not 
afforded  them  sufficient  support.  The  few  which  remained  erect 
were  stripped  of  their  leaves,  and  their  naked  branches  creaked  and 
moaned  as  the  south-east  wind  swept  over  them. 

Two  miles  beyond  this  desolated  forest  the  wanderers  arrived  at 
the  edge  of  the  gulf  they  had  seen  the  night  before  without  being 
able  to  judge  of  its  extent.  They  examined  it  carefully,  and  found 
that  it  was  about  fifty  feet  wide,  cutting  the  coast  line  straight 
across  near  Cape  Michael  and  what  was  formerly  Fort  Barnett, 
forming  a  kind  of  estuary  running  more  than  a  mile  and  a  half 
inland.  If  the  sea  should  again  become  rough  in  a  fresh  storm, 
this  gulf  would  widen  more  and  more. 

Just  as  Hobson  approached  the  beach,  he  saw  a  large  piece  of  ice 
separate  from  the  island  and  float  away  ! 

"  Ah  !  "  murmured  Long,  "  that  is  the  danger  !  " 

Both  then  turned  hurriedly  to  the  west,  and  walked  as  fast  as 
they  could  round  the"  huge  gulf,  making  direct  for  Fort  Hope. 

They  noticed  no  other  changes  by  the  way,  and  towards  four 
o'clock  they  crossed  the  court  and  found  all  their  comrades  at  their 
usual  occupations. 

H'.  bson  told  his  men  that  he  had  wished  once  more  before  the 
winter  to  see  if  there  were  any  signs  of  the  approach  of  Captain 
Craventy's  convoy,  and  that  his  expedition  had  been  fruitless. 

"  Then,  sir,"  observed  Marbre,  "  I  suppose  we  must  give  up  all 
idea  of  seeing  our  comrades  from  Fort  Reliance  for  this  year  at 
least  %  " 

"I  think  you  must,"  replied  Hobson  simply,  re-entering  the 
public  room. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  were  told  of  the  two  chief  events  of  the 
exploration  :  the  fire  and  the  cry.  Hobson  was  quite  sure  that 
neither  he  nor  the  Sergeant  were  mistaken.  The  fire  bad  really 
been  seen,  the  cry  had  really  been  heard ;  and  after  a  long  consul- 
tation every  one  came  to  the  conclusion  that  a  ship  in  distress  had 
passed  within  sight  during  the  night,  and  that  the  island  had  not 
approached  the  American  coast. 

The  south-east  wind  quickly  chased  away  the  clouds  and  mists, 


"  Look,  Madge,  look  !  "  —  Page  229. 


MRS  PA  ULINA  BARNR  TT  S  EXCURSION,  22$ 

«o  that  Hobson  ho™d  to  be  able  to  take  his  bearings  the  next  day. 
The  night  was  colder  and  a  fine  snow  fell,  which  quickly  covered 
the  ground.  This  first  sign  of  winter  was  hailed  with  delight  by 
all  who  knew  of  the  peril  of  their  situation. 

On  the  2nd  September  the  sky  gradually  became  free  from 
-vapours  of  all  kinds,  and  the  sun  again  appeared.  Patiently  the 
Lieutenant  awaited  its  culmination  ;  at  noon  he  took  the  latitude, 
^nd  two  hours  later  a  calculation  of  hour-angles  gave  him  the 
longitude. 

The  following  were  the  results  obtained :  Latitude,  70°  57'  j 
longitude,  170°  30'. 

So  that,  in  spite  of  the  violence  of  the  hurricane,  the  island  had 
remained  in  much  the  same  latitude,  although  it  had  been  drifted 
somewhat  farther  west.  They  were  now  abreast  of  Behring  Strait, 
but  four  hundred  miles  at  least  north  of  Capes  East  and  Prince  of 
Wales,  which  jut  out  on   either  side  at  the  narrowest  part  of  the 


The  situation  was,  therefore,  more  dangerous  than  ever,  as  the 

island  was  daily  getting  nearer  to  the  dangerous  Kamtchatka 
Current,  which,  if  it  once  seized  it  in  its  rapid  waters,  might  carry 
it  far  away  to  the  north.  Its  fate  would  now  soon  be  decided.  It 
would  either  stop  where  the  two  currents  met,  and  there  be  shut  in 
by  the  ice  of  the  approaching  winter,  or  it  would  be  drifted  away 
and  lost  in  the  solitudes  of  the  remote  hyperborean  regions. 

Hobson  was  painfully  moved  on  ascertaining  the  true  state  of 
things,  and  being  anxious  to  conceal  his  emotion,  he  shiit  himself 
up  in  his  own  room  and  did  not  appear  again  that  day.  With  his 
chart  before  him,  he  racked  his  brains  to  find  some  way  out  of  the 
diflficulties  with  which  be  was  beset. 

The  temperature  fell  some  degrees  farther  the  same  day,  and  the 
mists,  which  had  collected  above  the  south-eastern  horizon  the  day 
before,  resolved  themselves  into  snow  during  the  night,  so  that  the 
next  day  the  white  carpet  was  two  inches  thick.  Winter  was 
coming  at  last. 

On  September  3rd  Mrs  Barnett  resolved  to  go  a  few  miles  along 
the  coast  towards  Cape  Esquimaux.  She  wished  to  see  for  herself 
the  changes  lately  produced.  If  she  had  mentioned  her  project 
to  the  Lieutenant,  he  would  certainly  have  offered  to  accompany 
her  ]  but  she  did  not  wish  to  disturb  him,  and  decided  to  go  with- 


226  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


out  him,  taking  Madge  with  her.  There  was  fliUy  nothing  to  fear, 
the  only  formidable  animals,  the  bears,  seemed  to  have  quite  de- 
serted the  island  after  the  earthquake ;  and  two  women  might,  with- 
out danger,  venture  on  a  walk  of  a  few  hours  without  an  escort. 

Madge  agreed  at  once  to  Mrs  Barnett's  proposal,  and  without  a 
word  to  any  one  they  set  out  at  eight  o'clock  a.m.,  provided  with 
an  ice-chisel,  a  flask  of  spirits,  and  a  wallet  of  provisions. 

After  leaving  Cape  Bathurst  they  turned  to  the  west.  The  sun 
was  already  dragging  its  slow  course  along  the  horizon,  for  at  this 
time  of  year  it  would  only  be  a  few  degrees  above  it  at  its  culmina- 
tion. But  its  oblique  rays  were  clear  and  powerful,  and  the  snow 
was  already  melting  here  and  there  beneath  their  influence. 

The  coast  was  alive  with  flocks  of  birds  of  many  kinds ; 
ptarmigans,  guillemots,  puffins,  wild  geese,  and  ducks  of  every 
variety  fluttered  about,  uttering  their  various  cries,  skimming  the 
surface  of  the  sea  or  of  the  lagoon,  according  as  their  tastes  led 
them  to  prefer  salt  or  fresh  water. 

Mrs  Barnett  had  now  a  capital  opportunity  of  seeing  how  many 
furred  animals  haunted  the  neighbourhood  of  Fort  Hope.  Martens, 
ermines,  musk-rats,  and  foxes  were  numerous,  and  the  magazines 
of  the  factory  might  easily  have  been  filled  with  their  skins,  but 
what  good  would  that  be  now  ?  The  inoff'ensive  creatures,  knowing 
that  hunting  was  suspended,  went  and  came  fearlessly,  venturing 
close  up  to  the  palisade,  and  becoming  tamer  every  day.  Their 
instinct  doubtless  told  them  that  they  and  their  old  enemies  were 
alike  prisoners  on  the  island,  and  a  common  danger  bound  them 
together.  It  struck  Mrs  Barnett  as  strange  that  the  two  enthusi- 
astic hunters — Marbre  and  Sabine — should  obey  the  Lieutenant's 
orders  to  spare  the  furred  animals  without  remonstrance  or  com- 
plaint, and  appeared  not  even  to  wish  to  shoot  the  valuable  game 
around  them.  It  was  true  the  foxes  and  others  had  not  yet  assumed 
their  winter  robes,  but  this  was  not  enough  to  explain  the  strange 
indifference  of  the  two  hunters. 

Whilst  walking  at  a  good  pace  and  talking  over  their  strange 
situation,  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  carefully  noted  the  peculiarities 
of  the  sandy  coast.  The  ravages  recently  made  by  the  sea  were 
distinctly  visible.  Fresh  landslips  enabled  them  to  see  new  fractures 
in  the  ice  distinctly.  The  strand,  fretted  away  in  many  places,  had 
sunk  to  an  enormous  extent,  and  the  waves  washed  along  a  level 
beach  where  the  perpendicular  shores  had  once  checked  their  ad- 


MRS  PAULINA  BARNETT S  EXCURSION.  22/ 

vance.  It  was  evident  that  parts  of  the  island  were  now  only  on  a 
level  with  the  ocean. 

"  O  Madge ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett,  pointing  to  the  long 
smooth  tracts  on  which  the  curling  waves  broke  in  rapid  succession, 
"  our  situation  has  indeed  become  aggravated  by  the  awful  storm ! 
It  is  evident  that  the  level  of  the  whole  island  is  gradually  becoming 
lower.  It  is  now  only  a  question  of  time.  Will  the  winter  come 
soon  enough  to  save  us  %     Everything  depends  upon  that." 

"  The  winter  will  come,  my  dear  girl,"  replied  Madge  with  her 
usual  unshaken  confidence.  "  We  have  already  had  two  falls  of 
snow.  Ice  is  begininng  to  accumulate,  and  God  will  send  it  us  in 
time,  I  feel  sure." 

*'  You  are  right,  Madge,  we  must  have  faith  ! "  said  Mrs  Barnett. 
"We  women  who  do  not  trouble  ourselves  about  the  scientific 
reasons  for  physical  phenomena  can  hope,  when  men  who  are  better 
informed,  perhaps,  despair.  That  is  one  of  our  blessings,  which  our 
Lieutenant  unfortunately  does  not  share.  He  sees  the  significance 
of  facts,  he  reflects,  he  calculates,  he  reckons  up  the  time  still  remain- 
ing to  us,  and  I  see  that  he  is  beginning  to  lose  all  hope." 

*'  He  is  a  brave,  energetic  man,  for  all  that,"  replied  Madge. 

"  Yes,"  added  Mrs  Barnett,  **  and  if  it  be  in  the  power  of  man  to 
save  us,  he  will  do  it." 

By  nine  o'clock  the  two  women  had  walked  four  miles.  They 
were  often  obliged  to  go  inland  for  some  little  distance,  to  avoid 
parts  of  the  coast  already  invaded  by  the  sea.  Here  and  there  the 
waves  had  encroached  half -a-mile  beyond  the  former  high- water  line, 
and  the  thickness  of  the  ice-field  had  been  considerably  reduced. 
There  was  danger  that  it  would  soon  yield  in  many  places,  and 
that  new  bays  would  be  formed  all  along  the  coast. 

As  they  got  farther  from  the  fort  Mrs  Barnett  noticed  that  the 
number  of  furred  animals  decreased  considerably.  The  poor  crea- 
tures evidently  felt  more  secure  near  a  human  habitation.  The 
only  formidable  animals  which  had  not  been  led  by  instinct  to 
escape  in  time  from  the  dangerous  island  were  a  few  wolves,  savage 
beasts  which  even  a  common  danger  did  not  conciliate.  Mrs  Barnett 
and  Madge  saw  several  wandering  about  on  the  plains,  but  they 
did  not  approach,  and  soon  disappeared  behind  the  hills  on  the 
south  of  the  lagoon. 

*'  What  will  become  of  all  these  imprisoned  animals,"  said  Madge, 


228  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


"  wheti  all  food  fails  them,  and  they  are  famished  with  hunger  in 
the  winter  ? " 

"  They  will  not  be  famished  in  a  hurry.  Madge/*  replied  Mrs 
Barnett,  "  and  we  shall  have  nothing  to  fear  from  them  ;  all  the 
martens,  ermines,  and  Polar  hares,  which  we  spare  will  fall  an  easy 
prey  to  them.  That  is  not  our  danger ;  the  brittle  ground  beneath 
our  feet,  which  may  at  any  moment  give  way,  is  our  real  peril. 
Only  look  how  the  sea  is  advancing  here.  It  already  covers  half 
the  plain,  and  the  waves,  still  comparatively  warm,  are  eating  away 
our  island  above  and  below  at  the  same  time  !  If  the  cold  does  not 
stop  it  very  soon,  the  sea  will  shortly  join  the  lake,  and  we  shall  lose 
our  lagoon  as  we  lost  our  river  and  our  port ! " 

"  Well,  if  that  should  happen  it  will  indeed  be  an  irreparable 
misfortune !  "  exclaimed  Madge. 

"  Why  ?  "  asked  Mrs  Barnett,  looking  inquiringly  at  her  com- 
panion. 

"  Because  we  shall  have  no  more  fresh  water,"  replied  Madge. 

"  Oh,  we  shall  not  want  for  fresh  water,  Madge,"  said  Mrs 
Barnett ;  "  the  rain,  the  snow,  the  ice,  the  icebergs  of  the  ocean, 
the  very  ice-field  on  which  we  float,  will  supply  us  with  that ;  no, 
no,  that  is  not  our  danger." 

About  ten  o'clock  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  had  reached  the  rising 
ground  above  Cape  Esquimaux,  but^t  least  two  miles  inland,  for  they 
had  found  it  impossible  to  follow  the  coast,  worn  away  as  it  was  by 
the  sea.  Being  rather  tired  with  the  many  detours  they  had  had  to 
make,  they  decided  to  rest  a  few  minutes  before  setting  off  on  their 
return  to  Fort  Hope.  A  little  hill  crowned  by  a  clump  of  birch 
trees  and  a  few  shrubs  afforded  a  pleasant  shelter,  and  a  bank 
covered  with  yellow  moss,  from  which  the  snow  had  melted,  served 
them  as  a  seat.  The  little  wallet  was  opened,,  and  they  shared  their 
simple  repast  like  sisters. 

Half  an  hour  later,  Mrs  Barnett  proposed  that  they  should  climb 
along  the  promontory  to  the  sea,  and  find  out  the  exact  state  of 
Cape  Esquimaux.  She  was  anxious  to  know  if  the  point  of  it 
had  resisted  the  storm,  and  Madge  declared  herself  ready  to  follow 
"  her, dear  girl"  wherever  she  went,  but  at  the  same  time  reminded 
her  that  they  were,  eight  or  nine  miles  from  Cape  Bathurst  already, 
and  that  they  must  not  make  Lieutenant  HoV)son  uneasy  by  too 
long  an  absence. 

But  some  presentiment  made  Mrs  Barnett  insist  upon  doing  as 


The  hear  seized  Kalamali  hij  the  clothes"  ^c.  —  Page  231. 


MJ^S   PAULINA   BARNETTS   EXCURSION,  229 

she  proposed,  and  she  was  right,  as  the  event  proved.  It  would 
only  delay  them  half  an  hour  after  all. 

They  had  not  gone  a  quarter  of  a  mile  before  Mrs  Barnett  stopped 
suddenly,  and  pointed  to  some  clear  and  regular  impressions  upon 
the  snow.  These  marks  must  have  been  made  within  the  last  nine 
or  ten  hours,  or  the  last  fall  of  snow  would  have  covered  them  over. 

*'  What  animal  has  passed  along  here,  I  wonder  % "  said  Madge. 

"  It  was  not  an  animal,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  bending  down  to 
examine  the  marks  more  closely,  "  not  a  quadruped  certainly,  for 
its  four  feet  would  have  left  impressions  very  different  from  these. 
Look,  Madge,  they  are  the  footprints  of  a  human  person  I  " 

"  But  who  could  have  been  here  1 "  inquired  Madge  ;  *'  none  of 
the  soldiers  or  women  have  left  the  fort,  and  we  are  on  an  island, 
remember.  You  must  be  mistaken,  my  dear ;  but  we  will  follow 
the 'marks,  and  see  where  they  lead  us." 

They  did  so,  and  fifty  paces  farther  on  both  again  paused. 

"  Look,  Madge,  look  1 "  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  seizing  her  companion's 
arm,  "  and  then  say  if  I  am  mistaken." 

Near  the  footprints  there  were  marks  of  a  heavy  body  having  been 
dragged  along  the  snow,  and  the  impression  of  a  hand. 

**  It  is  the  hand  of  a  woman  or  a  child  ! "  cried  Madge. 

"  Yes  ! "  replied  Mrs  Barnett  ;  "  a  woman  or  a  child  has  fallen 
here  exhausted,  and  risen  again  to  stumble  farther  on;  look,  the 
footprints  again,  and  farther  on  more  falls  ! " 

"  Who,  who  could  it  have  been  ? "  exclaimed  Madge. 

"How  can  I  tell?"  replied  Mrs  Barnett.  "Some  unfortunate 
creature  imprisoned  like  ourselves  for  three  or  four  months  perhaps. 
Or  some  shipwrecked  wretch  flung  upon  the  coast  in  the  storm. 
You  remember  the  fire  and  the  cry  of  which  Sergeant  Long  and 
Lieutenant  Hobson  spoke.  Come,  come,  Madge,  there  may  be 
some  one  in  danger  for  us  to  save  ! 

And  Mrs  Barnett,  dragging  Madge  with  her,  ran  along  follow- 
ing the  traces,  and  further  on  found  that  they  were  stained  with 
blood. 

The  brave,  tender-hearted  woman,  had  spoken  of  saving  some  one  in 
danger ;  had  she  then  forgotten  that  there  was  no  safety  for  any  upon 
the  island,  doomed  sooner  or  later  to  be  swallowed  up  by  the  ocean  1 

The  impressions  on  the  ground  led  towards  Cape  Esquimaux. 
And  the  two  carefully  traced  them,  but  the  footprints  presently 
disappeared,  whilst  the  blood-stains  increased,  making  an  irregular 


230  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

pathway  along  the  snow.  It  was  evident  the  poor  wretch  had  been 
unable  to  walk  farther,  and  had  crept  along  on  hands  and  knees  ; 
here  and  there  fragments  of  torn  clothes  were  scattered  about,  bits 
of  sealskin  and  fur. 

"  Come,  come,"  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  whose  heart  beat  violently. 

Madge  followed  her,  they  were  only  a  few  yards  from  Cape 
Esquimaux,  which  now  rose  only  a  few  feet  upon  the  sea-level  against 
the  background  of  the  sky,  and  was  quite  deserted. 

The  impressions  now  led  them  to  the  right  of  the  cape,  and  run- 
ning along  they  soon  climbed  to  the  top,  but  there  was  still  nothing, 
absolutely  nothing,  to  be  seen.  At  the  foot  of  the  cape,  where  the 
slight  ascent  began,  the  traces  turned  to  the  right,  and  led  straight 
to  the  sea. 

Mrs  Barnett  was  turning  to  the  right  also,  but  just  as  she  was 
stepping  on  to  the  beach,  Madge,  who  had  been  following  her  and 
looking  about  uneasily,  caught  hold  of  her  hand,  and  exclaimed — 

"  Stop  1  stop  ! " 

"  No,  Madge,  no  ! "  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  who  w5s  drawn  along  by 
a  kind  of  instinct  in  spite  of  herself. 

"  Stop,  stop,  and  look  !  "  cried  Madge,  tightening  her  hold  on  her 
mistress's  hand. 

On  the  beach,  about  fifty  paces  from  Cape  Esquimaux,  a  large 
white  mass  was  moving  about  and  growling  angrily. 

It  was  an  immense  Polar  bear,  and  the  two  women  watched  it 
with  beating  hearts.  It  was  pacing  round  and  round  a  bundle  of 
fur  on  the  ground,  which  it  smelt  at  every  now  and  then,  lifting  it 
up  and  letting  it  fall  again.  The  bundle  of  fur  looked  like  the  dead 
body  of  a  walrus. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  did  not  know  what  to  think,  whether  to 
advance  or  to  retreat,  but  presently  as  the  body  was  moved  about 
a  kind  of  hood  fell  back  from  the  head,  and  some  long  locks  of 
brown  hair  were  thrown  over  the  snow. 

"  It  is  a  woman !  a  woman  ! "  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  eager  to  rush  to 
her  assistance  and  find  out  if  she  were  dead  or  alive ! 

"  Stop  ! "  repeated  Madge,  holding  her  back  ;  "  the  bear  won't 
harm  her." 

And,  indeed,  the  formidable  creature  merely  turned  the  body  over, 
and  showed  no  inclination  of  tearing  it  with  its  dreadful  claws.  It 
went  away  and  came  back  apparently  uncertain  what  to  do.  It  had 
not  yet  perceived  the  two  women  who  were  so  anxiously  watching  it. 


It  was  the  young  Esquimaux  girl  Kalumah ! "  —  Page  231. 


MRS  PAULINA  BARNETT's  EXCURSION.  23I 


Suddenly  a  loud  crack  was  heard.  The  earth  shook,  and  it 
fieemed  as  if  the  whole  of  Cape  Esquimaux  were  about  to  be 
plunged  into  the  sea. 

A  large  piece  of  the  island  had  broken  away,  and  a  huge  piece  of 
ice,  the  centre  of  gravity  of  which  had  been  displaced  by  the  altera- 
tion in  its  specific  weight,  drifted  away,  carrying  with  it  the  bear 
and  the  body  of  the  woman. 

Mrs  Barnett  screamed,  and  would  have  flung  herself  upon  the 
broken  ice  before  it  floated  away,  if  Madge  had  not  clutched  her 
hand  firmly,  saying  quietly — 

"Stop!  stop!" 

At  the  noise  produced  by  the  breaking  off  of  the  piece  of  ice,  the 
bear  started  back  with  a  fearful  growl,  and,  leaving  the  body,  rushed 
to  the  side  where  the  fracture  had  taken  place ;  but  he  was  already 
some  forty  feet  from  the  coast,  and  in  his  terror  he  ran  round  and 
round  the  islet,  tearing  up  the  ground  with  his  claws,  and  stamping 
the  sand  and  snow  about  him. 

Presently  he  returned  to  the  motionless  body,  and,  to  the  horror 
of  the  two  women,  seized  it  by  the  clothes  with  his  teeth,  and 
carrying  it  to  the  edge  of  the  ice,  plunged  with  it  into  the  sea. 

Being  a  powerful  swimmer,  like  the  whole  race  of  Arctic  bears, 
he  soon  gained  the  shores  of  the  island.  With  a  great  exertion  of 
strength  he  managed  to  climb  up  the  ice,  and  having  reached  the 
surface  of  the  island  he  quietly  laid  down  the  body  he  had 
brought  with  him. 

Mrs  Barnett  could  no  longer  be  held  back,  and,  shaking  off 
Madge's  hold,  she  rushed  to  the  beach,  never  thinking  of  the 
danger  she  ran  in  facing  a  formidable  carnivorous  creature. 

The  bear,  seeing  her  approach,  reared  upon  his  hind  legs,  and 
came  towards  her,  but  at  about  ten  paces  off  he  paused,  shook 
his  great  head,  and  turning  round  with  a  low  growl,  quietly 
walked  away  towards  the  centre  of  the  island,  without  once  look- 
ing behind  him.  He,  too,  was  evidently  affected  by  the  mysterious 
fear  which  had  tamed  all  the  wild  animals  on  the  island. 

Mrs  Barnett  was  soon  bending  over  the  body  stretched  about  the 
snow. 

A  cry  of  astonishment  burst  from  her  lips : 

"  Madge,  Madge,  come  ! "  she  exclaimed. 

Madge  approached  and  looked  long  and  fixedly  at  the  inanimate 
body.      It  was  the  young  Esquimaux  girl  Kalumah  I 


CHAPTER   IX. 

K ALU  man's    ADVENTLRES, 

ALUMAH  on  the  floating  island,  two  hundred  miles  from  the 
American  coast.     It  was  almost  incredible  ! 

The  first  thing  to  be  ascertained  was  whether  the  poor 
creature  still  breathed.  Was  it  possible  to  restore  her  to  life  %  Mrs 
Barnett  loosened  her  clothes,  and  found  that  her  body  was  not  yet 
quite  cold.  Her  heart  beat  very  feebly,  but  it  did  beat.  The  blood 
they  had  seen  came  from  a  slight  wound  in  her  hand ;  Madge 
bound  it  up  with  her  handkerchief,  and  the  bleeding  soon  ceased. 

At  the  same  time  Mrs  Barnett  raised  the  poor  girl's  head,  and 
managed  to  pour  a  few  drops  of  rum  between  her  parted  lips.  She 
then  bathed  her  forehead  and  temples  with  cold  water,  and  waited. 

A  few  minutes  passed  by,  and  neither  of  the  watchers  were  able 
to  utter  a  word,  so  anxious  were  they  lest  the  faint  spark  of  life 
remaining  to  the  young  Esquimaux  should  be  quenched. 

But  at  last  Kalumah's  breast  heaved  with  a  faint  sigh,  her  hands 
moved  feebly,  and  presently  she  opened  her  eyes,  and  recognising 
her  preserver  she  murmured — 

"  Mrs  Barnett !  Mrs  Barnett  ! " 

The  lady  was  not  a  little  surprised  at  hearing  her  own  name. 
Had  Kalumah  voluntarily  sought  the  floating  island,  and  did  she 
expect  to  find  her  old  European  friends  on  it  ?  If  so,  how  had  she 
come  to  know  it,  and  how  had  she  managed  to  reach  the  island,  two 
hundred  miles  from  the  mainland  %  How  could  she  have  guessed  that 
the  ice-field  was  bearing  Mrs  Barnett  and  all  the  occupants  of  Fort 
Hope  away  from  the  American  coast  %  Really  it  all  seemed  quite 
inexplicable. 

"  She  lives — she  will  recover  !  "  exclaimed  Madge,  who  felt  the 
vital  heat  and  pulsation  returning  to  the  poor  bruised  body. 

"  Poor  child,  poor  child  !  "  said  Mrs  Barnett,  much  aff^ected  ;  "  she 
murmured  my  name  when  she  was  at  the  point  of  death." 

But  now  Kalumah  again  half  opened  her  eyes,  and  looked  about 


She  murmured,  'Mrs  Barnett  / '"  —  Page  232. 


KALUMAH  S   ADVENTURES,  233 

her  with  a  dreamy  unsatisfied  expression,  presently,  however,  seeing 
Mrs  Barnett,  her  face  brightened,  the  same  name  again  burst  from 
her  lips,  and  painfully  raising  her  hand  she  let  it  fall  on  that  of 
her  friend. 

The  anxious  care  of  the  two  women  soon  revived  Kalumah, 
whose  extreme  exhaustion  arose  not  only  from  fatigue  but  also 
from  hunger.  She  had  eaten  nothing  for  forty-eight  hours.  Some 
pieces  of  cold  venison  and  a  little  rum  refreshed  her,  and  she  soon 
felt  able  to  accompany  her  newly-found  friends  to  the  fort. 

Before  starting,  however,  Kalumah,  seated  on  the  sand  between 
Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge,  overwhelmed  them  with  thanks  and  ex- 
pressions of  attachment.  Then  she  told  her  story  :  she  had  not 
forgotten  the  Europeans  of  Fort  Hope,  and  the  thought  of  Mrs 
Paulina  Barnett  had  been  ever  present  with  her.  It  was  not  by 
chance,  as  we  shall  see,  that  she  had  come  to  Victoria  Island. 

The  following  is  a  brief  summary  of  what  Kalumah  related  to 
Mrs  Barnett : — 

Our  readers  will  remember  the  young  Esquimaux's  promise  to 
come  and  see  her  friends  at  Fort  Hope  again  in  the  fine  season  of 
the  next  year.  The  long  Polar  night  being  over,  and  the  month  of 
May  having  come  round,  Kalumah  set  out  to  fulfil  her  pledge. 
She  left  Russian  America,  where  she  had  wintered,  and  accompanied 
by  one  of  her  brothers-in-law,  started  for  the  peninsula  of  Victoria. 

Six  weeks  later,  towards  the  middle  of  June,  she  got  to  that  part 
of  British  America  which  is  near  Cape  Bathurst.  She  at  once 
recognised  the  volcanic  mountains  shutting  in  Liverpool  Bay,  and 
twenty  miles  farther  east  she  came  to  Walruses'  Bay,  where  her  people 
had  so  often  hunted  morses  and  seals. 

But  beyond  the  bay  on  the  north,  there  was  nothing  to  be  seen. 
The  coast  suddenly  sank  to  the  south-east  in  an  almost  straight 
line.     Cape  Esquimaux  and  Cape  Bathurst  had  alike  disappeared. 

Kalumah  understood  what  had  happened.  Either  the  whole  of 
the  peninsula  had  been  swallowed  up  by  the  waves,  or  it  was  float- 
ing away  as  an  island,  no  one  knew  whither ! 

Kalurnah's  tears  flowed  fast  at  the  loss  of  those  whom  she  had 
come  so  far  to  see. 

Her  brother-in-law,  however,  had  not  appeared  surprised  at  the 
catastrophe.  A  kind  of  legend  or  tradition  had  been  handed  down 
amongst  the  nomad  tribes  of  North  America,  that  Cape  Bathurst 
did  not  form  part  of  the  mainland,  but  had  been  joined  on  to   it 


234  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


thousands  of  years  before,  and  would  sooner  or  later  be  torn  away 
in  some  convulsion  of  nature.  Hence  tbe  surprise  at  finding  the 
factory  founded  by  Hobson  at  the  foot  of  the  cape.  But  with  the 
unfortunate  reserve  characteristic  of  their  race,  and  perhaps  also 
under  the  influence  of  that  enmity  which  all  natives  feel  for  those 
who  settle  in  their  country,  they  said  nothing  to  the  Lieutenant, 
whose  fort  was  already  finished.  Kalumah  knew  nothing  of  this 
tradition,  which  after  all  rested  on  no  trustworthy  evidence,  and 
probably  belonged  to  the  many  northern  legends  relating  to  the 
creation.  This  was  how  it  was  that  the  colonists  of  Fort  Hope 
were  not  warned  of  the  danger  they  ran  in  settling  on  such  a  spot. 

Had  a  word  in  season  been  spoken  to  Hobson  he  would  certainly 
have  gone  farther  in  search  of  some  firmer  foundation  for  his  fort 
than  this  soil,  certain  peculiarities  of  which  he  had  noticed  at  the 
first. 

When  Kalumah  had  made  quite  sure  that  all  trace  of  Cape 
Bathurst  was  gone,  she  explored  the  coast  as  far  as  the  further  side 
of  Washburn  Bay,  but  without  finding  any  sign  of  those  she  sought, 
and  at  last  there  was  nothing  left  for  her  to  do  but  to  return  to  the 
fisheries  of  Russian  America. 

She  and  her  brother-in-law  left  Walruses'  Bay  at  the  end  of  June, 
and  following  the  coast  got  back  to  New  Georgia  towards  the  end  of 
July^  after  an  absolutely  fruitless  journey. 

Kalumah  now  gave  up  all  hope  of  again  seeing  Mrs  Barnett  and 
the  other  colonists  of  Fort  Hope.  She  concluded  that  they  had  all 
been  swallowed  up  by  the  ocean  long  ago. 

At  this  part  of  her  tale  the  young  Esquimaux  looked  at  Mrs 
Barnett  with  eyes  full  of  tears,  and  pressed  her  hand  afifectionaly, 
and  then  she  murmured  her  thanks  to  God  for  her  own  preservation 
through  the  means  of  her  friend. 

Kalumah  on  her  return  home  resumed  her  customary  occupa- 
tions, and  worked  with  the  rest  of  her  tribe  at  the  fisheries  near 
Icy  Cape,  a  ppint  a  little  above  the  seventieth  parallel,  and  more 
than  six  hundred  miles  from  Cape  Bathurst. 

Nothing  worthy  of  note  happened  during  the  first  half  of  the 
month  of  April ;  but  towards  the  end  the  storm  began  which  had 
caused  Hobson  so  much  uneasiness,  and  which  had  apparently 
extended  its  ravages  over  the  whole  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  and 
beyond  Behring  Strait.  It  was  equally  violent  at  Icy  Cape  and  on 
Victoria   Island,   and,  as  the  Lieutenant  ascertained  in  taking  his 


KALUMAH*S  ADVENTURES.  235 

bearings,  the  latter  was  then  not  more  than  two  hundred  miles  from 
the  coast. 

As  Mrs  Barnett  listened  to  Kalumah,  her  previous  information 
enabled  her  rapidly  to  find  the  key  to  the  strange  events  which  had 
taken  place,  and  to  account  for  the  arrival  of  the  young  native  on 
the  island. 

During  the  first  days  of  the  storm  the  Esquimaux  of  Icy  Cape 
were  confined  to  their  huts.  They  could  neither  get  out  nor  fish. 
But  during  the  night  of  the  31st  August  a  kind  of  presentiment  led 
Kalumah  to  venture  down  to  the  beach,  and,  braving  the  wind  and 
rain  in  all  their  fury,  she  peered  anxiously  through  the  darkness  at 
the  waves  rising  mountains  high. 

Presently  she  thought  she  saw  a  huge  mass  driven  along  by  the 
hurricane  parallel  with  the  coast.  Gifted  with  extremely  keen 
sight — as  are  all  these  wandering  tribes  accustomed  to  the  long 
dark  Polar  nights — she  felt  sure  that  she  was  not  mistaken. 

Something  of  vast  bulk  was  passing  two  miles  from  the  coast, 
and  that  something  could  be  neither  a  whale,  a  boat,  nor,  at  this 
time  of  the  year,  even  an  iceberg. 

But  Kalumah  did  not  stop  to  reason.  The  truth  flashed  upon 
her  like  a  revelation.  Before  her  excited  imagination  rose  the 
images  of  her  friends.  She  saw  them  all  once  more,  Mrs  Barnett, 
Madge,  Lieutenant  Hobson,  the  baby  she  had  covered  with  kisses  at 
Fort  Hope.  Yes,  they  were  passing,  borne  along  in  the  storm  on  a 
floating  ice-field ! 

Kalumah  did  not  doubt  or  hesitate  a  moment.  She  felt  that  she 
must  tell  the  poor  shipwrecked  people,  which  she  was  sure  they 
were,  of  the  close  vicinity  of  the  land.  She  ran  to  her  hut,  seized 
a  torch  of  tow  and  resin,  such  as  the  Esquimaux  use  when  fishing 
at  night,  lit  it  and  waved  it  on  the  beach  at  the  summit  of  Icy 
Cape. 

This  was  the  fire  which  Hobson  and  Long  had  seen  when  crouch- 
ing on  Cape  Michael  on  the  night  of  the  31st  August. 

Imagine  the  delight  and  excitement  of  the  young  Esquimaux 
when  a  signal  replied  to  hers,  when  she  saw  the  huge  fire  lit  by 
Lieutenant  Hobson,  the  reflection  of  which  reached  the  American 
coast,  although  he  did  not  dream  that  he  was  so  near  it. 

But  it  quickly  went  out,  the  lull  in  the  storm  only  lasted  a  few 
minutes,  and  the  fearful  gale,  veering  round  to  the  south-east,  swept 
along  with  redoubled  violence.  ' 


236  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


Kalumah  feared  that  her  "  prey/^  so  she  called  the  floating  island, 
was  about  to  escape  her,  and  that  it  would  not  be  driven  on  to  the 
shore.  She  saw  it  fading  away,  and  knew  that  it  would  soon  dis- 
appear in  the  darkness  and  be  lost  to  her  on  the  boundless  ocean. 

It  was  indeed  a  terrible  moment  for  the  young  native,  and  she 
determined  at 'all  hazards  to  let  her  friends  know  of  their  situation. 
There  might  yet  be  time  for  them  to  take  some  steps  for  their 
deliverance,  although  every  hour  took  them  farther  from  the  con- 
tinent. 

She  did  not  hesitate  a  moment,  her  kayak  was  at  hand,  the  frail 
bark  in  which  she  had  more  than  once  braved  the  storms  of  the 
Arctic  Ocean,  she  pushed  it  down  to  the  sea,  hastily  laced  on  the 
sealskin  jacket  fastened  to  the  canoe,  and,  the  long  paddle  in  her 
hand,  she  plunged  into  the  darkness. 

Mrs  Barnett  here  pressed  the  brave  child  to  her  heart,  and  Madge 
shed  tears  of  sympathy. 

When  launched  upon  the  roaring  ocean,  Kalumah  found  the  change 
of  wind  in  her  favour.  The  waves  dashed  over  her  kayak,  it  is  true, 
but  they  were  powerless  to  harm  the  light  boat,  which  floated  on 
their  crests  like  a  straw.  It  was  capsized  several  times,  but  a 
stroke  of  the  paddle  righted  it  at  once. 

After  about  an  hour's  hard  work,  Kalumah  could  see  the  wander- 
ing island  more  distinctly,  and  had  no  longer  any  doubt  of  effecting 
her  purpose,  as  she  was  but  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  beach. 

It  was  then  that  she  uttered  the  cry  which  Hobson  and  Long 
had  heard. 

But,  alas  !  Kalumah  now  felt  herself  being  carried  away  towards 
the  west  by  a  powerful  current,  which  could  take  firmer  hold  of 
her  kayak  than  of  the  floating  island  ! 

In  vain  she  struggled  to  beat  back  with  her  paddle,  the  light  boat 
shot  along  like  an  arrow.  She  uttered  scream  after  scream,  but 
she  was  unheard,  for  she  was  already  far  away,  and  when  the  day 
broke  the  coasts  of  Alaska  and  the  island  she  had  wished  to  reach, 
were  but  two  distant  masses  on  the  horizon. 

Did  she  despair  ?  Not  yet.  It  was  impossible  to  get  back  to  the 
American  continent  in  the  teeth  of  the  terrible  v^ind  which  was  driv- 
ing the  island  before  it  at  a  rapid  pace,  taking  it  out  two  hundred 
miles  in  thirty-six  hours,  and  assisted  by  the  current  from  the  coast. 

There  was  but  one  thing  left  to  do.  To  get  to  the  island  by 
keeping  in  the  same  current  which  was  drifting  it  away. 


"  The  waves  dashed  over  her  kayak."  —  Page  236. 


kalvmah's  adventures.  237 

But,  alas !  the  poor  girl's  strength  was  not  equal  to  her  courage, 
she  was  faint  from  want  of  food,  and,  exhausted  as  she  was,  she 
could  no  longer  wield  her  paddle. 

For  some  hours  she  struggled  on,  and  seemed  to  be  approach- 
ing the  island,  although  those  on  it  could  not  see  her,  as  she  was 
but  a  speck  upon  the  ocean.  She  struggled  on  until  her  stiflfened 
arms  and  bleeding  hands  fell  powerless,  and,  losing  consciousness, 
she  was  floated  along  in  her  frail  kayak  at  the  mercy  of  winds  and 
waves. 

She  did  not  know  how  long  this  lasted,  she  remembered  nothing 
more,  until  a  sudden  shock  roused  her,  her  kayak  had  struck 
against  something,  it  opened  beneath  her,  and  she  was  plunged 
into  cold  water,  the  freshness  of  which  revived  her.  A  few  moments 
later,  she  was  flung  upon  the  sand  in  a  dying  state  by  a  large 
wave. 

This  had  taken  place  the  night  before,  just  before  dawn — that  is 
to  say,  about  two  or  three  o'clock  in  the  morning.  Kalumah  had 
then  been  seventy  hours  at  sea  since  she  embarked  ! 

The  young  native  had  no  idea  where  she  had  been  thrown, 
whether  on  the  continent  or  on  the  floating  island,  which  she  had 
so  bravely  sought,  but  she  hoped  the  latter.  Yes,  hoped  that  she  had 
reached  her  friends,  although  she  knew  that  the  wind  and  current 
had  driven  them  into  the  open  sea,  and  not  towards  the  coast ! 

The  thought  revived  her,  and,  shattered  as  she  was,  she  struggled 
to  her  feet,  and  tried  to  follow  the  coast. 

She  had,  in  fact,  been  providentially  thrown  on  that  portion  of 
Victoria  Island  which  was  formerly  the  upper  corner  of  Walruses' 
Bay.  But,  worn  away  as  it  was  by  the  waves,  she  did  not  recognise 
the  land  with  which  she  had  once  been  familiar. 

She  tottered  on,  stopped,  and  again  struggled  to  advance;  the  beach 
before  her  appeared  endless,  she  had  so  often  to  go  round  where  the 
sea  had  encroached  upon  the  sand.  And  so  dragging  herself  along, 
stumbling  and  scrambling  up  again,  she  at  last  approached  the 
little  wood  where  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  had  halted  that  very 
morning.  We  know  that  the  two  women  found  the  footprints  left 
by  Kalumah  in  the  snow  not  far  from  this  very  spot,  and  it  was  at 
a  short  distance  farther  on  that  the  poor  girl  fell  for  the  last  time. 
Exhausted  by  fatigue  and  hunger,  she  still  managed  to  creep  along 
on  hands  and  knees  for  a  few  minutes  longer. 

A  great  hope  kept  her  from  despair,  for  she  had  at  last  recognised 


238  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 

Cape  Esquimaux,  at  the  foot  of  which  she  and  her  people  had  en- 
camped the  year  before.  She  knew  now  that  she  was  but  eight 
miles  from  the  factory,  and  that  she  had  only  to  follow  the  path  she 
had  so  often  traversed  when  she  went  to  visit  her  friends  at  Fort 
Hope. 

Yes,  this  hope  sustained  her,  but  she  had  scarcely  reached  the 
beach  when  her  forces  entirely  failed  her,  and  she  again  lost  all 
consciousness.     But  for  Mrs  Barnett  she  would  have  died. 

*'  But,  dear  lady,"  she  added,  "  I  knew  that  you  would  come  to 
my  rescue,  and  that  God  would  save  me  by  your  means." 

We  know  the  rest.  We  know  the  providential  instinct  which  led 
Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  to  explore  this  part  of  the  coast  on  this 
very  day,  and  the  presentiment  which  made  them  visit  Cape  Esqui- 
maux after  they  had  rested,  and  before  returning  to  Fort  Hope. 
We  know  too — as  Mrs  Barnett  related  to  Kalumah — how  the  piece 
of  ice  had  floated  away,  and  how  the  bear  had  acted  under  the  cir- 
cumstances. 

"  And  after  all,"  added  Mrs  Barnett  with  a  smile,  "  it  was  not  I  who 
saved  you,  but  the  good  creature  without  whose  aid  you. would 
never  have  come  back  to  us,  and  if  ever  we  see  him  again  we  will 
treat  him  with  the  respect  due  to  your  preserver." 

During  this  long  conversation  Kalumah  was  rested  and  refreshed, 
and  Mrs  Barnett  proposed  that  they  should  return  to  the  fort  at 
once,  as  she  had  already  been  too  long  away.  The  young  girl 
immediately  rose  ready  to  start. 

Mrs  Barnett  was  indeed  most  anxious  to  tell  the  Lieutenant  of 
all  that  had  happened  during  the  night  of  the  storm,  when  the 
wandering  island  had  neared  the  American  continent,  but  she  urged 
Kalumah  to  keep  her  adventures  secret,  and  to  say  nothing  about 
the  situation  of  the  island.  She  would  naturally  be  supposed  to 
have  come  along  the  coast,  in  fulfilment  of  the  promise  she  had 
made  to  visit  her  friends  in  the  fine  season.  Her  arrival  would  tend 
only  to  strengthen  the  belief  of  the  colonists  that  no  changes  had 
taken  place  in  the  country  around  Cape  Bathurst,  and  to  set  at  rest 
the  doubts  any  of  them  might  have  entertained. 

It  was  about  three  o'clock  when  Madge  and  Mrs  Barnett,  with 
Kalumah  hanging  on  her  arm,  set  out  towards  the  east,  and  before 
five  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  they  all  arrived  at  the  postern  of  the 
fort. 


"  She  covered  him  with  kisses."  —  Page  239. 


CHAPTER  X 

THE  KAMTCHATKA    CURRENT. 

^E  can  readily  imagine  the  reception  given  to  Kalumali  by  all 
at  the  fort.  It  seemed  to  them  that  the  communication 
with  the  outer  world  was  reopened.  Mrs  Mac-Nab,  Mrs 
Rae,  and  Mrs  Joliffe  overwhelmed  her  with  caresses,  but  Kalumah's 
first  thought  was  for  the  little  child,  she  caught  sight  of  him  im- 
mediately, and  running  to  him  covered  him  with  kisses. 

The  young  native  was  charmed  and  touched  with  the  hospitality 
of  her  European  hosts.  A  positive  fete  was  held  in  her  honour, 
and  every  one  was  delighted  that  she  would  have  to  remain  at  the 
fort  for  the  winter,  the  season  being  too  far  advanced  for  her  to  get 
back  to  the  settlements  of  Russian  America  before  the  cold  set  in. 

But  if  all  the  settlers  were  agreeably  surprised  at  the  appearance 
of  Kalumah,  what  must  Lieutenant  Hobson  have  thought  when  he 
saw  her  leaning  on  Mrs  Barnett's  arm.  A  sudden  hope  flashed 
across  his  mind  like  lightning,  and  as  quickly  died  away  :  perhaps 
in  spite  of  the  evidence  of  his  daily  observations  Victoria  Island  had 
run  aground  somewhere  on  the  continent  unnoticed  by  any  of 
them. 

Mrs  Barnett  read  the  Lieutenant's  thoughts  in  his  face,  and  shook 
her  head  sadly. 

He  saw  that  no  change  had  taken  place  in  their  situation,  and 
waited  until  Mrs  Barnett  was  able  to  explain  Kalumah's  appear- 
ance. 

A  few  minutes  later  he  was  walking  along  the  beach  with  the 
lady,  listening  with  great  interest  to  her  account  of  Kalumah's  ad  • 
ventures. 

So  he  had  been  right  in  all  his  conjectures.  The  north-east 
hurricane  had  driven  the  island  out  of  the  current.  The  ice-field  had 
approached  within  a  mile  at  least  of  the  American  continent.  It 
had  not  been  a  fire  on  board  ship  which  they  had  seen,  or  the  cry 
of  a  shipwrecked  mariner  which  they  had  heard.      The  mainland 


240  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

had  been  close  at  hand,  and  had  the  north-east  wind  blown  hard  fo 
another  hour  Victoria  Island  would  have  struck  against  the  coast  o 
Russian  America.  And  then  at  this  critical  moment  a  fatal,  1 
terrible  wind  had  driven  the  island  away  from  the  mainland  bad 
to  the  open  sea,  and  it  was  again  in  the  grasp  of  the  irresistibL 
current,  and  was  being  carried  along  with  a  speed  which  nothing 
could  check,  the  mighty  south-east  wind  aiding  its  headlong  course 
to  that  terribly  dangerous  spot  where  it  would  be  exposed  to  cor 
trary  attractions,  either  of  which  might  lead  to  its  destruction  an( 
that  of  all  the  unfortunate  people  dragged  along  with  it. 

For  the  hundredth  time  the  Lieutenant  and  Mrs  Barnett  dig 
cussed  all  the  bearings  of  the  case,  and  then  Hobson  inquired  if  an; 
important  changes  had  taken  place  in  the  appearance  of  the  district 
between  Cape  Bathurst  and  Walruses'  Bay  % 

Mrs  Barnett  replied  that  in  some  places  the  level  of  the  coaa 
appeared  to  be  lowered,  and  that  the  waves  now  covered  tracts  0 
Band  which  were  formerly  out  of  their  reach.  She  related  what  ha( 
happened  at  Cape  Esquimaux,  and  the  important  fracture  whid 
had  taken  place  at  that  part  of  the  coast. 

Nothing  could  have  been  less  satisfactory.  It  was  evident  tha 
the  ice-field  forming  the  foundation  of  the  island  was  breaking  uj 
What  had  happened  at  Cape  Esquimaux  might  at  any  moment  b 
reproduced  at  Cape  Bathurst.  At  any  hour  of  the  day  or  night  th 
houses  of  the  factory  might  be  swallowed  up  by  the  deep,  and  th 
only  thing  which  could  save  them  was  the  winter,  the  bitter  winte 
which  was  fortunately  rapidly  approaching. 

The  next  day,  September  4th,  when  Hobson  took  his  bearings,  h 
found  that  the  position  of  Victoria  Island  had  not  sensibly  changei 
since  the  day  before.  It  had  remained  motionless  between  the  tw 
contrary  currents,  which  was  on  the  whole  the  very  best  thin, 
that  could  have  happened. 

"  If  only  the  cold  would  fix  us  where  we  are,  if  the  ice-wal 
would  shut  us  in,  and  the  sea  become  petrified  around  us, 
exclaimed  Hobson,  •"  I  should  feel  that  our  safety  was  assured.  W 
are  but  two  hundred  miles  from  the  coast  at  this  moment,  and  b 
venturing  across  the  frozen  ice-fields  we  might  perhaps  reach  eithe 
Russian  America  or  Kamtchatka.  Winter,  winter  at  any  price,  le 
the  winter  set  in,  no  matter  how  rapidly." 

Meanwhile,  according  to  the  Lieutenant's  orders,  the  preparation 
for  the  winter  were  completed.     Enough  forage  to  last  the  dogs  th 


THE  KAMTCHATKA  CURRENT.  24 1 

whole  of  the  Polar  night  was  stored  up.  .They  were  all  in  good 
health,  but  getting  rather  fat  with  having  nothing  to  do.  They 
could  not  be  taken  too  much  care  of,  as  they  would  have  to  work 
terribly  hard  in  the  journey  across  the  ice  after  the  abandonment 
of  Fort  Hope.  It  was  most  important  to  keep  up  their  strength, 
and  they  were  fed  on  raw  reindeer  venison,  plenty  of  which  was 
easily  attainable. 

The  tame  reindeer  also  prospered,  their  stable  was  comfortable, 
and  a  good  supply  of  moss  was  laid  by  for  them  in  the  magazines 
of  the  fort.  The  females  provided  Mrs  JoliflFe  with  plenty  of  milk 
for  her  daily  culinary  needs. 

The  Corporal  and  his  little  wife  had  also  sown  fresh  seeds, 
encouraged  by  the  success  of  the  last  in  the  warm  season.  The 
ground  had  been  prepared  beforehand  for  the  planting  of  scurvy- 
grass  and  Labrador  Tea.  It  was  important  that  there  should  be  no 
lack  of  these  valuable  anti-scorbutics. 

The  sheds  were  filled  with  wood  up  to  the  very  roof.  Winter 
might  come  as  soon  as  it  liked  now,  and  freeze  the  mercury  in  the 
cistern  of  the  thermometer,  there  was  no  fear  that  they  would  again 
be  reduced  to  burn  their  furniture  as  they  had  the  year  before. 
Mac-Nab  and  his  men  had  become  wise  by  experience,  and  the 
chips  left  from  the  boat-building  added  considerably  to  their  stock  of 
fuel. 

About  this  time  a  few  animals  were  taken  which  had  already 
assumed  their  winter  furs,  such  as  martens,  polecats,  blue  foxes,  and 
ermines.  Marbre  and  Sabine  had  obtained  lea-ve  from  the  Lieu- 
tenant to  set  some  traps  outside  the  enceinte.  He  did  not  like  to 
refuse  them  this  permission,  lest  they  should  become  discontented,  as 
he  had  really  no  reason  to  assign  for  putting  a  stop  to  the  collect- 
ing of  furs,  although  he  knew  full  well  that  the  destruction  of  these 
harmless  creatures  could  do  nobody  any  good.  Their  flesh  was,  how- 
ever, useful  for  feeding  the  dogs,  and  enabled  them  to  economise 
the  reindeer  venison. 

All  was  now  prepared  for  the  winter,  and  the  soldiers  worked 
with  an  energy  which  they  would  certainly  not  have  shown  if  they 
had  been  told  the  secret  of  their  situation. 

During  the  next  few  days  the  bearings  were  taken  with  the 
greatest  care,  but  no  change  was  noticeable  in  the  situation  of 
Victoria  Island ;  and  Hobson,  finding  that  it  was  motionless,  began 
to  have  fresh  hope.     Although  there  were  as  yet  no  symptoms  of 

Q 


242  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


winter  in  inorganic  nature,  the  temperature  maintaining  a  mean 
height  of  49°  Fahrenheit,  some  swans  flying  to  the  south  in  search 
of  a  warmer  climate  was  a  good  omen.  Other  birds  capable  of 
a  long-sustained  flight  over  vast  tracts  of  the  ocean  Ibegan  to  desert 
the  island.  They  knew  full  well  that  the  continent  of  America 
and  of  Asia,  with  their  less  severe  climates  and  their  plentiful 
resources  of  every  kind,  were  not  far  off,  and  that  their  wings  were 
strong  enough  to  carry  them  there.  A  good  many  of  these  birds- 
were  caught ;  and  by  Mrs  Barnett's  advice  the  Lieutenant  tied 
round  their  necks  a  stiff  cloth  ticket,  on  which  was  inscribed  the 
position  of  the  wandering  island,  and  the  names  of  its  inhabi- 
tants. The  birds  were  then  set  free,  and  their  captors  watched  them 
wing  their  way  to  the  south  with  envious  eyes. 

Of  course  none  were  in  the  secret  of  the  sending  forth  of  these 
messengers,  except  Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  Kalumah,  Hobson,  and 
Long. 

The  poor  quadrupeds  were  unable  to  seek  their  usual  winter 
refuges  in  the  south.  Under  ordinary  circumstances  the  reindeer^ 
Polar  hares,  and  even  the  wolves  would  have  left  early  in  September 
for  the  shores  of  the  Great  Bear  and  Slave  Lakes,  a  good  many- 
degrees  farther  south ;  but  now  the  sea  was  an  insurmountable  bar- 
rier, and  they,  too,  would  have  to  wait  until  the  winter  should 
render  it  passable.  Led  by  instinct  they  had  doubtless  tried  to 
leave  the  island,  but,  turned  back  by  the  water,  the  instinct  of 
self-preservation  had  brought  them  to  the  neighbourhood  of  Fort 
Hope,  to  be  near  the  men  who  were  once  their  hunters  and  most 
formidable  enemies,  but  were  now,  like  themselves,  rendered  compa- 
ratively inoffensive  by  their  imprisonment. 

The  observations  of  the  5th,  6th,  7th,  8th,  and  9th  September,, 
revealed  no  alteration  in  the  position  of  Victoria  Island.  The  large 
eddy  between  the  two  currents  kept  it  stationary.  Another  fifteen 
days,  another  three  weeks  of  this  state  of  things,  and  Hobson  felt 
that  they  might  be  saved. 

But  they  were  not  yet  out  of  danger,  and  many  terrible,  almost 
supernatural,  trials  still  awaited  the  inhabitants  of  Fort  Hope. 

On  the  10th  of  September  observations  showed  a  displacement 
of  Victoria  Island.  Only  a  slight  displacement,  but  in  a  northerly 
direction. 

Hobson  was  in  dismay  ;  the  island  was  finally  in  the  grasp  of  the 
Kamtchatka  Current,  and  was  drifting  towards  the  unknown  latitudes 


"  The  Lieutenant  tied  round  their  necks"  ^c.  —  Page  242. 


THE  KAMTCHATKA  CURRENT,  243 

where  the  large  icebergs  come  into  being ;  it  was  on  its  way  to  the 
vast  solitudes  of  the  Arctic  Ocean,  interdicted  to  the  human  race, 
from  which  there  is  no  return. 

Hobson  did  not  hide  this  new  danger  from  those  who  were  in  the 
secret  of  the  situation.  Mrs  Bamett,  Madge,  Kalumah,  and  Ser- 
geant Long  received  this  fresh  blow  with  courage  and  resignation. 

"  Perhaps,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  the  island  may  stop  even  yet. 
Perhaps  it  will  move  slowly.  Let  us  hope  on  ...  .  and  wait  ! 
The  winter  is  not  far  off,  and  we  are  going  to  meet  it.  In  any  case 
God's  will  be  done  !  " 

"  My  friends,"  said  Hobson  earnestly,  "  do  you  not  think  I  ought 
now  to  tell  our  comrades.  You  see  in  what  a  terrible  position  we 
are  and  all  that  may  await  us  !  Is  it  not  taking  too  great  a  respon- 
sibility to  keep  them  in  ignorance  of  the  peril  they  are  in  ? " 

"  I  should  wait  a  little  longer,"  replied  Mrs  Barnett  without 
hesitation ;  "  I  would  not  give  them  all  over  to  despair  until  the  last 
chance  is  gone." 

"  That  is  my  opinion  also,"  said  Long, 

Hobson  had  thought  the  same,  and  was  glad  to  find  that  his 
companions  agreed  with  him  in  the  matter. 

On  the  11th  and  12th  September,  the  motion  towards  the  north 
was  more  noticeable.  Victoria  Island  was  drifting  at  a  rate  of 
from  twelve  to  thirteen  miles  a  day,  so  that  each  day  took  them  the 
same  distance  farther  from  the  land  and  nearer  to  the  north.  They 
were,  in  short,  following  the  decided  course  made  by  the  Kamtchatka 
Current,  and  would  quickly  pass  that  seventieth  degree  which  once 
cut  across  the  extremity  of  Cape  Bathurst,  and  beyond  which  no 
land  of  any  kind  was  to  be  met  with  in  this  part  of  the  Arctic 
Ocean. 

Every  day  Hobson  looked  out  their  position  on  the  map,  and  saw 
only  too  clearly  to  what  awful  solitudes  the  wandering  island  was 
drifting. 

The  only  hope  left  consisted,  as  Mrs  Barnett  had  said,  in  the 
fact  that  they  were  going  to  meet  the  winter.  In  thus  drifting 
towards  the  north  they  would  soon  encounter  those  ice-cold  waters, 
which  would  consolidate  and  strengthen  the  foundations  of  the 
island.  But  if  the  danger  of  being  swallowed  up  by  the  waves  was 
decreased,  would  not  the  unfortunate  colonists  have  an  immense 
distance  to  traverse  to  get  back  from  these  remote  northern  regions  ? 
Had  the  boat  been  finished,  Lieutenant  Hobson  would  not  have 


244  2^^^  P^^  COUNTRY. 


hesitated  to  embark  tlie  whole  party  in  it,  but  in  spite  of  the  zealous 
efforts  of  the  carpenter  it  was  not  nearly  ready,  and  indeed  it 
taxed  Mac-Nab's  powers  to  the  uttermost  to  construct  a  vessel 
on  which  to  trust  the  lives  of  twenty  persons  in  such  a  dangerous 
sea. 

By  the  16th  September  Victoria  Island  was  between  seventy- 
three  and  eighty  miles  north  of  the  spot  where  its  course  had  been 
arrested  for  a  few  days  between  the  Behring  and  Kamtchatka  Cur- 
rents. There  were  now,  however,  many  signs  of  the  approach .  of 
winter.  Snow  fell  frequently  and  in  large  flakes.  The  column  of 
mercury  fell  gradually.  The  mean  temperature  was  still  44°  Fahren- 
heit during  the  day,  but  at  night  it  fell  to  32°.  The  sun  described 
an  extremely  lengthened  curve  above  the  horizon,  not  rising,  more 
than  a  few  degrees  even  at  noon,,  and  disappearing  for  eleven  hours 
out  of  every  twenty-four. 

At  last,  on  the  night  of  the  16th  September,  the  first  signs  of 
ice  appeared  upon  the  sea  in  the  shape  of  small  isolated  crystals 
like  snow,  which  stained  the  clear  surface  of  the  water.  As  was 
noticed  by  the  famous  explorer  Scoresby,  these  crystals  immedi- 
ately calmed  the  waves,  like  the  oil  which  sailors  pour  upon  the 
sea  to  produce  a  momentary  cessation  of  its  agitation.  These 
crystals  showed  a  tendency  to  weld  themselves  together,  but  they 
were  broken  and  separated  by  the  motion  of  the  water  as  soon  as 
they  had  combined  to  any  extent. 

Hobson  watched  the  appearance  of  the  "  young  ice  "  with  extreme 
attention.  He  knew  that  twenty-four  hours  would  sufiice  to  make 
the  ice-crust  two  or  three  inches  thick,  strong  enough  in  fact  to 
bear  the  weight  of  a  man.  He  therefore  expected  that  Victoria 
Island  would  shortly  be  arrested  in  its  course  to  the  north. 

But  the  day  undid  the  work  of  the  night,  and  if  the  speed  of  the 
island  slackened  during  the  darkness  in  consequence  of  the  obstacles 
in  its  path,  they  were  removed  in  the  next  twelve  hours,  and  the 
island  was  carried  rapidly  along  again  by  the  powerful  current. 

The  distance  from  the  northern  regions  became  daily  less,  and 
nothing  could  be  done  to  lessen  the  evil. 

At  the  autumnal  equinox  on  the  21st  of  September,  the  day  and 
night  were  of  equal  length,  and  from  that  date  the  night  gradually 
became  longer  and  longer.  The  winter  was  coming  at  last,  but  it 
did  not  set  in  rapidly  or  with  any  rigour.  Victoria  Island  was 
now  nearly  a  degree  farther  north  than  the  seventieth  parallel ;  and 


''  Hohson  vjas  in  dismay T  —  Page  242. 


THE  KAMTCHATKA  CURRENT.  245 

on  this  21st  September,  a  rotating  motion  was  for  the  first  time 
noticed,  a  motion  estimated  by  Hobson  at  about  a  quarter  of  the 
circumference. 

Imagine  the  anxiety  of  the  unfortunate  Lieutenant,  The  secret 
he  had  so  long  carefully  kept  was  now  about  to  be  betrayed  by 
nature  to  the  least  clear-sighted.  Of  course  the  rotation  altered  the 
cardinal  points  of  the  island.  Cape  Bathurst  no  longer  pointed  to 
the  north,  but  to  the  east.  The  sun,  moon,  and  stars  rose  and 
set  on  a  different  horizon,  and  it  was  impossible  that  men  like 
Mac-Nab,  Rae,  Marbre  and  others,  accustomed  to  note  the  signs  of 
the  heavens,  could  fail  to  be  struck  by  the  change,  and  understand 
its  meaning. 

To  Hobson's  great  satisfaction,  however,  the  brave  soldiers 
appeared  to  notice  nothing ;  the  displacement  with  regard  to  the 
cardinal  points  was  not,  it  was  true,  very  considerable,  and  it  was 
often  too  foggy  for  the  rising  and  setting  of  the  heavenly  bodies  to 
be  accurately  observed. 

Unfortunately  the  rotation  appeared  to  be  accompanied  by  an 
increase  of  speed.  From  that  date  Victoria  Island  drifted  at  the 
rate  of  a  mile  an  hour.  It  advanced  farther  and  farther  north, 
farther  and  farther  away  from  all  land.  Hobson  did  not  even  yet 
despair,  for  it  was  not  in  his  nature  to  do  so,  but  he  felt  confused 
and  astray,  and  longed  for  the  winter  with  all  his  heart. 

At  last  the  temperature  began  to  fall  still  lower.  Snow  fell  plenti- 
fully on  the  23d  and  24th  September,  and  increased  the  thickness 
of  the  coating  of  ice  on  the  sea.  Gradually  the  vast  ice-field  was 
formed  on  every  side,  the  island  in  its  advance  continually  broke 
it  up,  but  each  day  it  became  firmer  and  better  able  to  resist.  The 
sea  succumbed  to  the  petrifying  hand  of  winter,  and  became  frozen 
as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach,  and  on  September  27th,  when  the 
bearings  were  taken,  it  was  found  that  Victoria  Island  had  not 
moved  since  the  day  before.  It  was  imprisoned  in  a  vast  ice-field, 
it  was  motionless  in  longitude  177°  22',  and  latitude  77°  57' — 
more  than  six  hundred  miles  from  any  continent. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

A    COMMUNICATION  FROM  LIEUTENANT  HOBSON. 

g)  UCH  was  the  situation.  To  use  Sergeant  Long's  expression, 
^^^^  the  island  had  "  cast  anchor,"  and  was  as  stationary  as 
B;^?^  when  the  isthmus  connected  it  with  the  mainland.  But 
six  hundred  miles  now  separated  it  from  inhabited  countries,  six 
hundred  miles  which  would  have  to  be  traversed  in  sledges  across 
the  solidified  surface  of  the  sea,  amongst  the  icebergs  which  the  cold 
would  build  up,  in  the  bitterest  months  of  the  Arctic  winter. 

It  would  be  a  fearful  undertaking,  but  hesitation  was  impossible. 
The  winter,  for  which  Lieutenant  Hobson  had  so  ardently  longed, 
had  come  at  last,  and  arrested  the  fatal  march  of  the  island  to  the 
north.  It  would:  throw  a  bridge  six  hundred  miles  long  from  their 
desolate  home  to  the  continents  on  the  south,  and  the  new  chances 
of  safety  must  not  be  neglected,  every  effort  must  be  made  to  restore 
the  colonists,  so  long  lost  in  the  hyperborean  regions,  to  their 
friends. 

As  Hobson  explained  to  his  companions,  it  would  be  madness  to 
linger  till  the  spring  should  again  thaw  the  ice,  which  would  be  to 
abandon  themselves  once  more  to  the  capricious  Behring  currents. 
They  must  wait  until  the  sea  was  quite  firmly  frozen  over,  which  at 
the  most  would  be  in  another  three  or  four  weeks.  Meanwhile  the 
Lieutenant  proposed  making  frequent  excursions  on  the  ice-field 
encircling  the  island,  in  order  to  ascertain  its  thickness,  its  suita- 
bility for  the  passage  of  sledges,  and  the  best  route  to  take  across 
it  so  as  to  reach  the  shores  of  Asia  or  America. 

"  Of  course,"  observed  Hobson  to  Mrs  Barnett  and  Sergeant  Long, 
"  we  would  all  rather  make  for  Russian  America  than  Asia,  if  a 
choice  is  open  to  us." 

"Kalumah  will  be  very  useful  to  us,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "for  as 
a  native  she  will  be  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  whole  of 
Alaska." 

"  Yes,  indeed,"  replied  Hobson,  "  her  arrival  was  most  fortunate 


A  COMMUNICATION.  247 


for  us.  Thanks  to  her,  we  shall  be  easily  able  to  get  to  the  settle- 
ment of  Fort  Michael  on  Norton  Sound,  perhaps  even  to  New  Arch- 
angel, a  good  deal  farther  south,  where  we  can  pass  the  rest  of  the 
winter." 

"  Poor  Fort  Hope  ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett,  "  it  goes  to  my 
heart  to  think  of  abandoning  it  on  this  island.  It  has  been  built 
at  the  cost  of  so  much  trouble  and  fatigue,  everything  about  it  has 
been  so  admirably  arranged  by  you,  Lieutenant ! .  I  feel  as  if  my 
heart  would  break  when  we  leave  it  finally." 

"  You  will  not  suffer  more  than  I  shall,  madam,"  replied  Hobson, 
"  and  perhaps  not  so  much.  It  is  the  chief  work  of  my  life  ;  I  have 
devoted  all  my  powers  to  the  foundation  of  Fort  Hope,  so  imfortu- 
nately  named,  and  I  shall  never  cease  to  regret  having  to  leave  it. 
And  what  will  the  Company  say  which  confided  this  task  to  me,  for  . 
after  all  I  am  but  its  humble  agent." 

"It  will  say,"  cried  Mrs  Barnett  with  enthusiasm,  "it  will  say 
that  you  have  done  your  duty,  that  you  are  not  responsible  for  the 
caprices  of  nature,  which  is  ever  more  powerful  than  man.  It  will 
understand  that  you  could  not  foresee  what  has  happened,  for  it  was 
beyond  the  penetration  of  the  most  far-sighted  man,  and  it  will  know 
that  it  owes  the  preservation  of  the  whole  party  to  your  prudence  ^ 
and  moral  courage." 

"Thank  you,  madam,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  pressing  Mr^ 
Barnett's  hand,  "  thank  you  for  your  warm-hearted  words.  But  I 
have  had  some  experience  of  men,  and  I  know  that  success  is  always 
admired  and  failure  condemned.  But  the  wiU  of  Heaven  be 
done  ! " 

Sergeant  Long,  anxious  to  turn  the  Lieutenant  from  his  melan- 
choly  thoughts,  now  began  to  talk  about  the  preparations  for  the 
approaching  departure,  and  asked  if  it  was  not  time  to  tell  his 
comrades  the  truth. 

"  Let  us  wait  a  little  longer,'*  replied  Hobson.  "  We  have  saved 
the  poor  fellows  much  anxiety  and  worry  already,  let  us  keep  silent 
until  the  day  is  fixed  for  the  start,  and  then  we  will  reveal  the 
whole  truth." 

This  point  being  decided,  the  ordinary  occupations  of  the  factory 
went  on  for  a  few  weeks  longer. 

o 

How  different  was  the  situation  of  the  colonists  a  year  ago,  when 
they  were  all  looking  forward  to  the  future  in  happy  unconscious- 
ness ! 


248  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


A  year  ago  the  first  symptoms  of  the  cold  season  were  appearing, 
even  as  they  were  now.  The  "  young  ice  "  was  gradually  forming 
along  the  coast.  The  lagoon,  its  waters  being  quieter  than  those 
of  the  sea,  was  the  first  to  freeze  over.  The  temperature  remained 
about  one  or  two  degrees  above  freezing  point  in  the  day,  and  fell 
to  three  or  four  degrees  below  in  the  night.  Hobson  again  made 
his  men  assume  their  winter  garments,  the  linen  vests  and  furs  before 
described.  The  condensers  were  again  set  up  inside  the  house,  the 
air  vessel  and  air-pumps  were  cleaned,  the  traps  were  set  round 
the  palisades  on  different  parts  of  Cape  Bathurst,  and  Marbre  and 
Sabine  got  plenty  of  game,  and  finally  the  last  touches  were  given 
to  the  inner  rooms  of  the  principal  house. 

Although  Fort  Hope  was  now  about  two  degrees  farther  north 
than  at  the  same  time  the  year  before,  there  was  no  sensible 
difference  in  the  state  of  the  temperature.  The  fact  is,  the  distance 
between  the  seventieth  and  seventy-second  parallels  is  not  great 
enougb.  to  affect  the  mean  height  of  the  thermometer ;  on  the  con- 
trary, it  really  seemed  to  be  less  cold  than  at  the  beginning  of  the 
winter  before.  Perhaps,  however,  that  was  because  the  colonists 
were  now,  to  a  certain  extent,  acclimatised. 

Certainly  the  winter  did  not  set  in  so  abruptly  as  last  time. 
The  weather  was  very  damp,  and,  the  atmosphere  was  always 
charged  with  vapour,  which  fell  now  as  rain  now  as  snow.  In 
Lieutenant  Hobson's  opinion,  at  least,  it  was  not  nearly  cold 
enough. 

The  sea  froze  all  round  the  island,  it  is  true,  but  not  in  a  regular 
or  continuous  sheet  of  ice.  Large  blackish  patches  here  and  there 
showed  that  the  icicles  were  not  thoroughly  cemented  together. 
Loud  resonant  noises  were  constantly  heard,  produced  by  the 
breaking  of  the  ice-field  when  the  rain  melted  the  imperfectly 
welded  edges  of  the  blocks  composing  it.  There  was  no  rapid 
accumulation  of  lump  upon  lump  such  as  is  generally  seen  in 
intense  cold.  Icebergs  and  hummocks  were  few  and  scattered,  and 
no  ice-wall  as  yet  shut  in  the  horizon. 

"  This  season  would  have  been  just  the  thing  for  the  explorers  of 
the  North- West  Passage,  or  the  seekers  of  the  North  Pole,"  repeated 
Sergeant  Long  again  and  again,  "  but  it  is  most  unfavourable  for  us, 
and  very  much  against  our  ever  getting  back  to  our  own  land  ! " 

This  went  on  throughout  October,  and  Hobson  announced  that 
the  mean  temperature  was  no  lower  than  32°  Fahrenheit,  and  it  is 


"  The  wolves  came  within  musket-7-ange."  —  Page  249. 


A  COMMUNICATION.  249 


well  known  that  several  days  of  cold,  7*  or  8°  below  zero,  arc  re- 
quired for  the  sea  to  freeze  hard. 

Had  proof-  been  needed  that  the  ice-field  was  impassable,  a  fact 
noticed  by  Mrs  Barnett  and  Hobson  would  have  sufficed. 

The  animals  imprisoned  in  the  island,  the  furred  animals,  rein- 
deer, wolves,  &c.,  would  have  left  the  island  had  it  been  possible  to 
cross  the  sea,  but  they  continued  to  gather  in  large  numbers  round 
the  factory,  and  to  seek  the  vicinity  of  man.  The  wolves  came 
actually  within  musket- range  of  the  enceinte  to  devour  the  martens 
and  Polar  hares,  which  were  their  only  food.  The  famished  reindeer 
having  neither  moss  nor  herbs  on  which  to  browse,  roved  about 
Cape  Bathurst  in  herds.  A  solitary  bear,  no  doubt  the  one  to  which 
Mrs  Barnett  and  Kalumah  felt  they  owed  a  debt  of  gratitude,  often 
passed  to  and  fro  amongst  the  trees  of  the  woods,  on  the  banks  of 
the  lagoon,  and  the  presence  of  all  these  animals,  especially  of  the 
ruminants,  which  require  an  exclusively  vegetable  diet,  proved  that 
flight  was  impossible. 

We  have  said  that  the  thermometer  remained  at  freezing  point, 
and  Hobson  found  on  consulting  his  journal  that  at  the  same  time 
the  year  before,  it  had  already  marked  20°  Fahrenheit  below  zero, 
proving  how  unequally  cold  is  distributed  in  the  capricious  Polar 
regions. 

The  colonists  therefore  did  not  suffer  much,  and  were  not  confined 
to  the  house  at  all.  It  was,  however,  very  damp  indeed,  rain 
mixed  with  snow  fell  constantly,  and  the  falling  of  the  barometer 
proved  that  the  atmosphere  was  charged  with  vapour. 

Throughout  October  the  Lieutenant  and  Long  made  many 
excursions  to  ascertain  the  state  of  the  ice-field  in  the  offing  ;  one 
day  they  went  to  Cape  Michael,  another  to  the  edge  of  the  former 
Walruses'  Bay,  anxious  to  see  if  it  would  be  possible  to  cross  to  the 
continent  of  America  or  Asia,  or  if  the  start  would  have  to  be  put 
off. 

But  the  surface  of  the  ice-field  was  covered  with  puddles  of 
water,  and  in  some  parts  riddled  with  holes,  which  would  certainly 
have  been  impassable  for  sledges.  It  seemed  as  if  it  would  be 
scarcely  safe  for  a  single  traveller  to  venture  across  the  half-liquid, 
half-solid  masses.  It  was  easy  to  see  that  the  cold  had  been  neither 
severe  nor  equally  maintained,  for  the  ice  consisted  of  an  accumu- 
lation of  sharp  points,  crystals,  prisms,  polyhedrons,  and  figures  of 
every  variety,  like  an  aggregation  of  stalactites.     It  was  more  like 


250  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


a  glacier  than  a  "  field,"  and  even  if  it  had  been  practicable,  walking 
on  it  would  have  been  very  tiring. 

Hobson  and  Long  managed  with  great  difficulty  to  scramble  over 
a  mile  or  two  towards  the  south,  but  at  the  expense  of  a  vast 
amount  of  time,  so  that  they  were  compelled  to  admit  that  they 
must  wait  some  time  yet,  and  they  retumed  to  Fort  Hope  dis- 
appointed and  disheartened. 

The  first  days  of  November  came,  and  the  temperature  fell  a  little, 
but  only  a  very  few  degrees,  which  was  not  nearly  enough.  Victoria 
Island  was  wrapped  in  damp  fogs,  and  the  lamps  had  to  be  lit  during 
the  day.  It  was  necessary,  however,  to  economise  the  oil  as  much  as 
possible,  as  the  supply  was  running  short.  No  fresh  stores  had  been 
brought  by  Captain  Craventy's  promised  convoy,  and  there  were 
no  more  walruses  to  be  hunted.  Should  the  dark  winter  be  pro- 
longed, the  colonists  would  be  compelled  to  have  recourse  to  the 
fat  of  animals,  perhaps  even  to  the  resin  of  the  firs,  to  get  a  little 
light.  The  days  were  already  very  short,  and  the  pale  disc  of  the 
sun,  yielding  no  warmth,  and  deprived  of  all  its  brightness,  only 
appeared  above  the  horizon  for  a  few  hours  at  a  time.  Yes,  winter 
had  come  with  its  mists,  its  rain,  and  its  snow,  but  without  the 
long-desired  cold. 

On  the  11th  November  something  of  a  fete  was  held  at  Fort 
Hope.  Mrs  Joliffe  served  up  a  few  extras  at  dinner,  for  it  was  the 
anniversary  of  the  birth  of  little  Michael  Mac-Nab.  He  was  now 
a  year  old,  and  was  the  delight  of  everybody.  He  had  large  blue 
eyes  and  fair  curly  hair,  like  his  father,  the  head  carpenter,  who 
was  very  proud  of  the  resemblance.  At  dessert  the  baby  was 
solemnly  weighed.  It  was  worth  something  to  see  him  struggling 
in  the  scales,  and  to  hear  his  astonished  cries  !  He  actually  weighed 
thirty-four  pounds  !  The  announcement  of  this  wonderful  weight 
was  greeted  with  loud  cheers,  and  Mrs  Mac-Nab  was  congratulated 
by  everybody  on  her  fine  boy.  Why  Corporal  Joliffe  felt  that  he 
ought  to  share  the  compliments  it  is  difficult  to  imagine,  unless  it 
was  as  a  kind  of  foster-father  or  nurse  to  the  baby.  He  had  car- 
ried the  child  about,  dandled  and  rocked  him  so  often,  that  he  felt 
he  had  something  to  do  with  his  specific  weight ! 

The  next  day,  November  12th,  the  sun  did  not  appear  above  the 
horizon.  The  long  Polar  night  was  beginning  nine  days  sooner 
than  it  had  done  the  year  before,  in  consequence  of  the  difference 
in  the  latitude  of  Victoria  Island  then  and  now. 


A  COMMUNICATION,  25 1 

The  disappearance  of  the  sun  did  not,  however,  produce  any 
change  in  the  state  of  the  atmosphere.  The  temperature  was  as 
changeable  as  ever.  The  thermometer  fell  one  day  and  rose  the 
next.  Rain  and  snow  succeeded  each  other.  The  wind  was  soft, 
and  did  not  settle  in  any  quarter,  but  often  veered  round  to  every 
point  of  the  compass  in  the  course  of  a  single  day.  The  constant 
damp  was  very  unhealthy,  and  likely  to  lead  to  scorbutic  affections 
amongst  the  colonists,  but  fortunately,  although  the  lime  juice  and 
lime  lozenges  were  running  short,  and  no  fresh  stock  had  been 
obtained,  the  scurvy-grass  and  sorrel  had  yielded  a  very  good 
crop,  and,  by  the  advice  of  Lieutenant  Hobson,  a  portion  of  them 
was  eaten  daily. 

Every  effort  must,  however,  be  made  to  get  away  from  Fort  Hope. 
Under  the  circumstances,  three  months  would  scarcely  be  long 
enough  for  them  all  to  get  to  the  nearest  continent.  It  \\as  im- 
possible to  risk  being  overtaken  by  the  thaw  on  the  ice-field,  and 
therefore  if  they  started  at  all  it  must  be  at  the  end  of  November. 

The  journey  would  have  been  difficult  enough,  even  if  the  ice  had 
been  rendered  solid  everywhere  by  a  severe  winter,  and  in  this 
uncertain  weather  it  was  a  most  serious  matter. 

On  the  13th  November,  Hobson,  Mrs  Barnett,  and  the  Sergeant 
met  to  decide  on  the  day  of  dei)arture.  The  Sergeant  was  of  opinion 
that  they  ought  to  leave  the  island  as  soon  as  possible. 

'*  For,"  he  said,  "  we  must  make  allowance  for  all  the  possible 
delays  during  a  march  of  six  hundred  miles.  We  ought  to  reach 
the  continent  before  March,  or  we  may  be  surprised  by  the  thaw, 
and  then  we  shall  be  in  a  worse  predicament  than  we  are  on  our 
island." 

"  But,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  is  the  sea  firm  enough  for  us  to  cross 
it?" 

*'  I  think  it  is,"  said  Long,  "  and  the  ice  gets  thicker  every  day. 
The  barometer,  too,  is  gradually  rising,  and  by  the  time  our  prepara- 
tions are  completed,  which  will  be  in  about  another  week,  I  think, 
I  hope  that  the  really  cold  weather  will  have  set  in." 

"  The  winter  has  begun  very  badly,"  said  Hobson,  "  in  fact  every- 
thing seems  to  combine  against  us.  Strange  seasons  have  often 
been  experienced  on  these  seas  ;  I  have  heard  of  whalers  being  able 
to  navigate  in  places  where,  even  in  the  summer  at  another  time 
they  would  riot  have  had  an  inch  of  water  beneath  their  keels. 
In  my  opinion  there  is  not  a  day  to  be  lost,  and  I  cannot  sufficiently 


252  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TR  Y. 


regret  that  the  ordinary  temperature  of  these  regions  does  not  assist 
us." 

'*  It  will  later,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  and  we  must  be  ready  to 
take  advantage  of  every  chance  in  our  favour.  When  do  you  pro- 
pose starting,  Lieutenant  ? " 

^'  At  the  end  of  November  at  the  latest,"  replied  Hobson,  "  but 
if  in  a  week  hence  our  preparations  are  finished,  and  the  route 
appears  practicable,  we  will  start  then." 

"Very  well,"  said  Long,  "we  will  get  ready,  without  losing  an 
instant." 

"  Then,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  you  will  now  tell  our  companions 
of  the  situation  in  which  they  are  placed  ?  " 

"  Yes,  madam,  the  moment  to  speak  and  the  time  for  action  have 
alike  arrived." 

"  And  when  do  you  propose  enlightening  them  % " 

"  At  once.  Sergeant  Long,"  he  added,  turning  to  his  subordinate, 
who  at  once  drew  himself  up  iu  a  military  attitude,  ''  call  all  your 
men  together  in  the  large  room  to  receive  a  communication." 

Sergeant  Long  touched  his  cap,  and  turning  on  his  heel  left  the 
room  without  a  word. 

For  some  minutes  Mrs  Barnett  and  Hobson  were  left  alone,  but 
neither  of  them  spoke. 

The  Sergeant  quickly  returned,  and  told  Hobson  that  his  orders 
were  executed. 

The  Lieutenant  and  the  lady  at  once  went  into  the  large  room. 
All  the  members  of  the  colony,  men  and  women,  were  assembled  in 
the  dimly  Kghted  room. 

Hobson  came  forward,  and  standing  in  the  centre  of  the  group 
said  very  gravely — 

"  My  friends,  until  to-day  I  have  felt  it  my  du^,  in  order  to 
spare  you  useless  anxiety,  to  conceal  from  you  the  situation  of  our 
fort.  An  earthquake  separated  us  from  the  continent.  Cape 
Bathurst  has  broken  away  from  the  mainland.  Our  peninsula  is  but 
an  island  of  ice,  a  wandering  island  " 

At  this  moment  Marbre  stepped  forward,  and  said  quietly, 

"  We  knew  it,  sir  !  " 


We  knew  it,  sir  /  "  —  Page  252. 


CHAPTER  XTL 

A  CHANCE  TO  BE  TRIED. 

!hE  brave  fellows  knew  it  then  !     And  that  they  might  not 

Jt^  add  to  the  cares  of  their  chief,  they  had  pretended  to  know 
nothing,  and  had  worked  away  at  the  preparations  for  the 
winter  ^Aith  the  same  zeal  as  the  year  before. 

Tears  of  emotion  stood  in  Hobson's  eyes,  and  he  made  no  attempt 
to  conceal  them,  but  seizijig  Marbre's  outstretched  hand,  he  pressed 
it  in  his  own. 

Yes,  the  soldiers  all  knew  it,  for  Marbre  had  guessed  it  long  ago. 
The  filling  of  the  reindeer  trap  with  salt  water,  the  non-arrival  of 
the  detachment  from  Fort  Reliance,  the  observations  of  latitude  and 
longitude  taken  every  day,  which  would  have  been  useless  on  firm 
ground,  the  precautions  observed  by  Hobson  to  prevent  any  one 
seeing  him  take  the  bearings,  the  fact  of  the  animalsr  remaining  on 
the  island  after  winter  had  set  in,  and  the  change  in  the  position  of 
tlie  cardinal  points  during  the  last  few  days,  which  they  had  noticed 
at  once,  had  all  been  tt)kens  easily  interpreted  by  the  inhabitants  of 
Fort  Hope.  The  arrival  of  Kalumah  had  puzzled  them,  but  they 
had  concluded  that  she  had  been  thrown,  upon  the  island  in.  the 
storm,  and  they  were  right,  as  we  are  aware. 

Marbre,  upon  whom  the  truth  had  first  dawned,  confided  his 
suspicions  to  Mac-Nab  the  carpenter  and  Bae  the  blacksmith.  All 
three  faced  the  situation  calmly  enough,  and  agreed  that  they  ought 
to  tell  their  comrades  and  wives,  but  decided  to  let  the  Lieutenant 
think  they  knew  nothing,  and  to  obey  him  without  question  as 
before. 

"  You  are  indeed  brave  fellows,  my  friends,"  exclaimed  Mrs 
^  Barnett,  who  was  much  touched  by  this  delicate  feeling,  *'  you  are 
true  soldiers !  " 

"  Our  Lieutenant  may  depend  upon  us,"  said  Mac-Nab,  "he  has 
done  his  duty,  and  we  will  do  ours." 


254  ■  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


"I  know  vou  will,  dear  comrades,"  said  Hobson,  "and  if  only- 
Heaven  will  help  and  not  forsake  us,  we  will  lielp  ourselves." 

The  Lieutenant  then  related  all  that  had  happened  since  the 
time  when  the  earthquake  broke  the  isthmus,  and  converted  the 
districts  round  Cape  Bathurst  into  an  island.  He  told  how,  when 
the  sea  became  free  from  ice  in  the  spring,  the  new  island  had  been 
drifted  more  than  two  hundred  miles  away  from  the  coast  by  an 
unknown  current,  how  the  hurricane  had  driven  it  back  within 
sight  of  land,  how  it  had  again  been  carried  away  in  the  night  of  the 
31st  August,  and,  lastly,  how  Kulumah  had  bravely  risked  her  life 
to  come  to  the  aid  of  her  European  friends.  Then  he  enumerated 
the  changes  the  island  had  undergone,  explaining  how  the  warmer 
waters  had  worn  it  away,  and  his  fear  that  it  might  be  carried  to 
the  Pacific,  or  seized  by  the  Kamtchatka  Current,'  concluding  his 
narrative  by  stating  that  the  wandering  island  had  finally  stopped  on 
the  27th  of  last  September. 

The  chart  of  the  Arctic  seas  was  then  brought,  and  Hobson 
pointed  out  the  position  occupied  by  the  island — six  hundred  miles 
from  all  land. 

He  ended  by  saying  that  the  situation  was  extremely  dangerous, 
that  the  island  would  inevitably  be  crushed  when  the  ice  broke  up, 
and  that,  before  having  recourse  to  the  boat — which  could  not  be 
used  until  the  next  summer — they  must  try  to  get  back  to  the 
American  continent  by  crossing  the  ice-field. 

"  We  shall  have  six  hundred  miles  to  go  in  the  cold  and  darkness 
of  the  Polar  night.  It  will  be  hard  work,  my  friends,  but  you  know 
as  well  as  I  do  that  there  can  be  no  shrinking  from  the  task." 

"  When  you  give  the  signal  to  start,  Lieutenant,  we  will  follow 
you,"  said  Mac-Nab. 

AH  being  of  one  mind,  the  preparations  for  departure  were  from 
that  date  rapidly  pushed  forward.  The  men  bravely  faced  the  fact 
that  they  would  have  six  hundred  miles  to  travel  under  very  trying 
circumstances.  Sergeant  Long  superintended  the  works,  whilst 
Hobson,  the  two  hunters,  and  Mrs  Barnett,  often  went  to  test  the  firm- 
ness of  the  ice-field.  Kalumah  frequently  accompanied  them,  and 
her  remarks,  founded  on  experience,  might  possibly  be  of  gi-eat  use 
to  the  Lieutenant.  Unless  they  were  prevented  they  were  to  start 
on  the  20th  November,  and  there  was  not  a  moment  to  lose. 

As  Hobson  had  foreseen,  the  wind  having  risen,  the  temperature 
fell  slightly,  and   the   column  of  mercury  marked  24°  Fahrenheit. 


A  CHANCE  TO  BE  TRIED,  255 

Snow,  which  soon  became  hardened,  replaced  the  rain  of  the  preced- 
ing days.  A  few  naore  days  of  such  cold  and  sledges  could  be 
used.  The  little  bay  hollowed  out  of  the  cliffs  of  Cape  Michael  was 
partly  filled  with  ice  and  snow ;  but  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that 
its  calmer  waters  froze  more  quickly  than  those  of  the  open  sea, 
which  were  not  yet  in  a  satisfactory  condition. 

The  wind  continued  to  blow  almost  incessantly,  and  with  con- 
siderable violence,  but  the  motion  of  waves  interfered  with  the 
regular  formation  and  consolidation  of  the  ice.  Large  pools  of  water 
occurred  here  and  there  between  the  pieces  of  ice,  and  it  was  impos- 
sible to  attempt  to  cross  it. 

"  The  weather  is  certainly  getting  colder,"  observed^  Mrs  Barnett 
to  Lieutenant  Hobson,  as  they  were  exploring  the  south  of  the 
island  together  on  the  10th  November,  "  the  temperature  is  becom- 
ing lower  and  lower,  and  these  liquid  spaces  will  soon  freeze  over." 

"  I  think  you  are  right,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "  but  the  way 
in  which  they  will  freeze  over  will  not  be  very  favourable  to  our 
plans.  The  pieces  of  ice  are  small,  and  their  jagged  edges  will 
stick  up  all  over  the  surface,  making  it  very  rough,  so  that  if  our 
sledges  get  over  it  at  all,  it  will  only  be  with  very  great  difficulty." 

"  But,"  resumed  Mrs  Barnett,  "  if  I  am  not  mistaken,  a  heavy 
fall  of  snow,  lasting  a  few  days  or  even  a  few  hours,  would  suffice 
to  level  the  entire  surface  ! " 

"  Yes,  yes,"  replied  Hobson,  "  but  if  snow  should  fall,  it  will 
be  because  the  temperature  has  risen  ;  and  if  it  rises,  the  ice-field 
will  break  up  again,  so  that  either  contingency  will  be  against 
us  ! " 

"  It  really  would  be  a  strange  freak  of  fortune  if  we  should 
experience  a  temperate  instead  of  an  Arctic  winter  in  the  midst  of 
the  Polar  Sea ! "  observed  Mrs  Barnett. 

*'  It  has  happened  before,  madam,  it  has  happened  before.  Let 
me  remind  you  of  the  great  severity  of  last  cold  season ;  now  it  has 
been  noticed  that  two  long  bitter  winters  seldom  succeed  each  other, 
and  the  whalers  of  the  northern  seas  know  it  well.  A  bitter  winter 
when  we  should  have  been  glad  of  a  mild  one,  and  a  mild  one 
when  we  so  sorely  need  the  reverse.  It  must  be  owned,  we  have 
been  strangely  unfortunate  thus  far  !  And  when  I  think  of  six 
hundred  miles  to  cross  with  women  and  a  child  !".... 

And  Hobson  pointed  to  the  vast  white  plain,  with  strange  irre- 
gular markings  like  guipure  work,  stretching  away  into  the  infinite 


256  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


distance.  Sad  and  desolate  enough  it  looked,  the  imperfectly  frozen 
surface  cracking  every  now  and  then  with  an  ominous  sound.  A 
pale  moon,  its  light  half  quenched  in  the  damp  mists,  rose  but  a  few 
(Icg-rees  above  the  gloomy  horizon  and  shot  a  few  faint  beams  upon 
the  melancholy  scene.  The  half-darkness  and  the  refraction  com- 
bined doubled  the  size  of  every  object.  Icebergs  of  moderate 
height  assumed  gigantic  proportions,  and  were  in  some  cases  dis- 
torted into  the  forms  of  fabulous  monsters.  Birds  passed  overhead 
with  loud  flapping  of  wings,  and  in  consequence  of  this  optical 
illusion  the  smallest  of  them  appeared  as  large  as  a  condor  or  a  vul- 
ture. In  the- midst  of  the  icebergs  yawned  apparently  huge  black 
tunnels,  into  which  the  boldest  man  would  scarcely  dare  to  venture, 
and  now  and  then  sudden  convulsions  took  place,  as  the  icebergs, 
worn  away  at  the  base,  heeled  over  with  a  crash,  the  sonorous  echoes 
taking  up  the  sounds  and  carrying  them  along.  The  rapid  changes 
resembled  the  transformation  scenes  of  fairyland,  and  terrible  indeed 
must  all  those  phenomena  have  appeared  to  the  luckless  colonists 
who  were  about  to  venture  across  the  ice-field  ! 

In  spite  of  her  moral  and  physical  courage  Mrs  Barnett  could  not 
control  an  involuntary  shudder.  Soul  and  body  alike  shrunk  from 
the  awful  prospect,  and  she  was  tempted  to  shut  her  eyes  and  stop 
her  ears  that  she  might  see  and  hear  no  more.  When  the  moon 
was  for  a  moment  veiled  behind  a  heavy  cloud,  the  gloom  of  the 
Polar  landscape  became  still  more  awe-inspiring,  and  before  her 
mind's  eye  rose  a  vision  of  the  caravan  of  men  and  women 
struggling  across  these  vast  solitudes  in  the  midst  of  hurricanes, 
snow-storms,  avalanches,  and  in  the  thick  darkness  of  the  Arctic 
night  ! 

Mrs  Barnett,  however,  forced  herself  to  look  ;  she  wished  to  accus- 
tom her  eyes  to  these  scenes,  and  to  teach  herself  not  to  shrink  from 
facing  their  terrors.  But  as  she  gazed  a  cry  suddenly  burst  from 
her  lips,  and  seizing  Hobson's  hand,  she  pointed  to  a  huge  object, 
of  ill-defined  dimensions,  moving  about  in  the  uncertain  light,  scarcely 
a  hundred  paces  from  where  they  stood. 

It  was  a  white  monster  of  immense  size,  more  than  a  hundred 
feet  high.  It  was  pacing  slowly  along  over  the  broken  ice,  bound- 
ing from  one  piece  to  another,  and  beating  the  air  with  its 
huge  feet,  between  which  it  could  have  held  ten  large  dogs  at  least. 
It,  too,  seemed  to  be  seeking  a  practicable  path  across  the  ice — it, 
too,    seemed  anxious  to  fly  from  the  doomed  island.     The  ice  gave 


"  It  was  a  Polar  bear."  —  Page  257. 


A  CHANCE  TO  BE  TRIED.  25/ 

way  beneath  its  weight,  and  it  had  often  considerable  difficulty  in 
regaining  its  feet. 

The  monster  made  its  way  thus  for  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
across  the  ice,  and  then,  its  farther  progress  being  barred,  it  turned 
round  and  advanced  towards  the  spot  where  Mrs  Barnett  and  the 
Lieutenant  stood. 

Hobson  seized  the  gun  which  was  slung  over  his  shoulder  and 
l)reseuted  it  at  the  animal,  but  almost  immediately  lowering  the 
weapon,  he  said  to  Mrs  Barnett — 

"  A  bear,  madam,  only  ^  bear,  the  size  of  which  has  been  greatly 
magnified  by  refraction." 

It  was,  in  fact,  a  Polar  bear,  and  Mrs  Barnett  drew  a  long 
breath  of  relief  as  she  understood  the  optical  illusion  of  which  she 
had  been  the  victim.     Then  an  idea  struck  her. 

"It  is  my  bear  !  "  she  exclaimed,  "  the  bear  with  the  devotion  ol 
a  Newfoundland  dog  !  Probably  the  only  one  still  on  the  island. 
But  what  is  he  doing  here  '^  " 

"  He  is  trying  to  get  away,"  replied  Hobson,  shaking  his  head. 
"  He  is  trying  to  escape  from  this  doomed  island,  and  he  cannot 
do  so  !  He  is  proving  to  us  that  we  cannot  pass  where  he  has  had 
to  turn  back  !  " 

Hobson  was  right,  the  imprisoned  animal  had  tried  to  leave  the 
island  and  to  get  to  the  continent,  and  having  failed  it  was  return- 
ing to  the  coast.  Shaking  its  head  and  growling,  it  passed  some 
twenty  paces  from  the  two  watchers,  and,  either  not  seeing  them  or 
disdaining  to  take  any  notice  of  them,  it  walked  heavily  on 
towards  Cape  Michael,  and  soon  disappeared  behind  the  rising 
ground. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  and  Mrs  Barnett  returned  sadly  and  silently 
to  the  fort. 

The  preparations  for  departure  went  on  as  rapidly,  however,  as  if 
it  were  possible  to  leave  the  island.  Nothing  was  neglected  to  pro- 
mote the  success  of  the  undertaking,  every  possible  danger  had  to 
be  foreseen,  and  not  only  had  the  ordinary  difficulties  and  dangers 
of  a  journey  across  the  ice  to  be  allowed  for,  but  also  the  sudden 
changes  of  weather  peculiar  to  the  Polar  regions,  which  so  obstin- 
ately resist  every  attempt  to  explore  them. 

The  teams  of  dogs  required  special  attention.  They  were 
allowed  to  run  about  near  the  fort,  that  they  might  regain  the  activity 

R 


258  THE  FUR  CO  UN  TR  Y, 


of  which  too  long  a  rest  had,  to  some  extent,  deprived  them,  and 
they  were  soon  in  a  condition  to  make  a  long  march. 

The  sledges  were  carefully  examined  and  repaired.  The  rough 
surface  of  the  ice-field  would  give  them  many  violent  shocks,  and 
they  were  therefore  thorouglily  overhauled  by  Mac-Nab  and  his 
men,  the  inner  framework  and  the  curved  fronts  being  carefully 
repaired  and  strengthened. 

Two  large  waggon  sledges  were  built,  one  for  the  transport  of 
provisions,  the  other  for  the  peltries.  These  were  to  be  drawn  by 
the  tamed  reindeer,  which  had  been  well  trained  for  the  service. 
The  peltries  or  furs  were  articles  of  luxury  with  which  it  was  not 
perhaps  quite  prudent  to  burden  the  travellers,  but  Hobson  was 
anxious  to  consider  the  interests  of  the  Company  as  much  as  possible, 
although  he  was  resolved  to  abandon  them,  en  route,  if  they  harassed 
or  impeded  his  march.  No  fresh  risk  was  run  of  injury  of  the  furs, 
for  of  course  they  would  have  been  lost  if  left  at  the  factory. 

It  was  of  course  quite  another  matter  with  the  provisions,  of 
which  a  good  and  plentiful  supply  was  absolutely  necessary.  It 
was  of  no  use  to  count  on  the  product  of  the  chase  this  time.  As 
soon  as  the  passage  of  the  ice-field  became  practicable,  all  the  edible 
game  would  get  on  ahead  and  reach  the  mainland  before  the 
caravan.  One  waggon  sledge  was  therefore  packed  with  salt  meat, 
corned  beef,  hare  pat^s,  dried  fish,  biscuits — the  stock  of  which  was 
unfortunately  getting  low — and  an  ample  reserve  of  sorrel,  scurvy- 
grass,  rum,  spirits  of  wine,  for  making  warm  drinks,  &c.  &c. 
Hobson  would  have  been  glad  to  take  some  fuel  with  him,  as  he 
would  not  meet  with  a  tree,  a  shrub,  or  a  bit  of  moss  throughout 
the  march  of  six  hundred  miles,  nor  could  he  hope  for  pieces  of^ 
wreck  or  timber  cast  up  by  the  sea,  but  he  did  not  dare  to  overload 
his  sledges  with  wood.  Fortuijately  there  was  no  lack  of  warm 
comfortable  garments,  and  in  case  of  need  they  could  draw  upon 
the  reserve  of  peltries  in  the  waggon. 

Thomas  Black,  who  since  his  misfortune  had  altogether  retired 
from  the  world,  shunning  his  companions,  taking  part  in  none  of 
the  consultations,  and  remaining  shut  up  in  his  own  room,  re- 
appeared as  soon  as  the  day  of  departure  was  definitely  fixed.  But 
even  then  he  attended  to  nothing  but  the  sledge  which  was  to  carry 
his  person,  his  instruments,  and  his  registers.  Always  very  silent,  it 
was  now  impossible  to  get  a  word  out  of  him.  He  had  forgotten 
everything,  even  that  he  was  a  scientific  man,  and  since   he   had 


Two  large  wagon  sledges  were  built."  —  Page  258. 


A    CHANCE    TO  BE    TRIED.  259 


been  deceived  about  the  eclipse,  since  the  solution  of  the  problem 
of  the  red  prominences  of  the  moon  had  escaped  him,  he  had  taken 
no  notice  of  any  of  the  peculiar  phenomena  of  the  high  latitudes, 
such  as  the  Aurora  Borealis,  halos,  parhelia,  &c. 

During  the  last  few  days  every  one  worked  so  hard  that  all  was 
ready  for  the  start  on  the  morning  of  the  18th  November. 

But,  alas  !  the  ice-field  was  still  impassable.  Although  the  ther- 
mometer had  fallen  slightly,  the  cold  had  not  been  severe  enough 
to  freeze  the  surface  of  the  sea  with  any  uniformity,  and  the  snow 
which  fell  was  fine  and  intermittent.  Hobson,  Marbre,  and  Sabine 
went  along  the  coast  every  day  from  Cape  Michael  to  what  was 
once  the  corner  of  the  old  Walruses'  Bay.  They  even  ventured  out 
about  a  mile  and  a  half  upon  the  ice-field,  but  were  compelled  to 
admit  that  it  was  broken  by  rents,  crevasses,  and  fissures  in  every 
direction.  Not  only  would  it  be  impossible  for  sledges  to  cross  it, 
it  was  dangerous  for  unencumbered  pedestrians.  Hobson  and  his 
two  men  underwent  the  greatest  fatigue  in  these-  short  excursions, 
and  more  than  once  they  ran  a  risk  of  being  unable  to  get  back 
to  Victoria  Island  across  the  ever-changing,  ever-moving  blocks  of 
ice, 

Really  all  nature  seemed  to  be  in  league  against  the  luckless 
colonists. 

Oh  the  18th  and  19th  November,  the  thermometer  rose,  whilst 
the  barometer  fell.  Fatal  results  were  to  be  feared  from  this 
change  in  the  state  of  the  atmosphere.  Whilst  the  cold  decreased 
the  sky  became  covered  with  clouds,  which  presently  resolved 
themselves  into  heavy  rain  instead  of  the  sadly-needed  snow,  the 
column  of  mercury  standing  at  34°  Fahrenheit.  These  showers 
of  comparatively  warm  water  melted  the  snow  and  ice  in  many 
places,  and  the  result  can  easily  be  imagined.  It  really  seemed  as 
if  a  thaw  were  setting  in,  and  there  were  symptoms  of  a  general 
breaking  up  of  the  ice-field.  In  spite  of  the  dreadful  weather, 
however,  Hobson  went  to  the  south  of  the  island  every  day,  and 
every  day  returned  more  disheartened  than  before. 

On  the  20th,  a  tempest  resembling  in  violence  that  of  the  month 
before,  broke  upon  the  gloomy  Arctic  solitudes,  compelling  the 
colonists  to  give  up  going  out,  and  to  remain  shut  up  in  Fort 
Hope  for  two  days. 


CHAPTER  XIIL 
ACKOSS    THE    ICE-FIELD. 

T  last,  on  the  22d  of  November,  the  weather  moderated.  In 
a  few  hours  the  storm  suddenly  ceased.  The  wind  veered 
round  to  the  north,  and  the  thermometer  fell  several 
degrees.  A  few  birds  capable  of  a  long-sustained  flight  tookvwing 
and  disappeared.  There  really  seemed  to  be  a  likelihood  that  the 
temperature  was  at  last  going  to  become  what  it  ought  to  be  at  this 
time  of  the  year  in  such  an  elevated  latitude.  The  colonists  might 
well  regret  that  it  was  not  now  what  it  had  been  during  the  last 
cold  season,  when  the  column  of  mercury  fell  to  72°  Fahrenheit 
below  zero. 

Hobson  determined  no  longer  to  delay  leaving  Victoria  Island, 
and  on  the  morning  of  the  2  2d  the  wliole  of  the  little  colony  was 
ready  to  leave  the  island,  which  was  now  firmly  welded  to  the  ice- 
field, and  by  its  means  connected  with  the  American  continent,  six 
hundred  niiles  away. 

At  half-past  eleven  a.m.,  Hobson  gave  the  signal  of  departure.  ^  The 
sky  was  grey  but  clear,  and  lighted  up  from  the  horizon  to  the 
zenith  by  a  magnificent  Aurora  Borealis.  The  dogs  were  harnessed 
to  the  sledges,  and  three  couple  of  reindeer  to  the  waggon  sledges. 
Silently  they  wended  their  way  towards  Cape  Michael,  where  they 
would  quit  the  island,  properly  so  called,  for  the  ice-field. 

The  caravan  at  first  skirted  along  the  wooded  hill  on  the  east  of 
Lake  Barnett,  but  as  they  were  rounding  the  corner  all  paused  to 
look  round  for  the  last  time  at  Cape  Bathurst,  which  they  were 
leaving  never  to  return.  A  few  snow-encrusted  rafters  stood  out  in 
the  light  of  the  Aurora  Borealis,  a  few  white  lines  marked  the 
boundaries  of  the  enceinte  of  the  factory,  a  white  mass  here  and 
there,  a  few  blue  wreaths  of  smoke  from  the  expiring  fire  never  to 
be  rekindled  ;  this  was  all  that  could  be  seen  of  Fort  Hope,  now 


ACROSS    THE   ICE-FIELD,  26 1 

useless  and  deserted,  but  erected  at  the  cost  of  so  much  labour  and 
so  much  anxiety. 

"  Farewell,  farewell,  to  our  poor  Arctic  home ! "  exclaimed  Mrs 
Barnett,  waving  her  hand  for  the  last  time;  and  all  sadly  and 
silently  resumed  their  journey. 

At  one  o'clock  the  detachment  arrived  at  Cape  Michael,  after  having 
rounded  the  gulf  which  the  cold  had  imperfectly  frozen  over.  Thus 
far  the  difficulties  of  the  journey  had  not  been  very  great,  for  the 
ground  of  the  island  was  smooth  compared  to  the  ice-field,  which  was 
strewn  with  icebergs,  hummocks,  and  packs,  between  which,  practic- 
able passes  had  to  be  found  at  the  cost  of  an  immense  amount  of 
fatigue. 

Towards  the  evening  of  the  same  day  the  party  had  advanced 
several  miles  on  the  ice-field,  and  a  halt  for  the  night  was  ordered ; 
the  encampment  was  to  be  formed  by  hollowing  out  snow-houses  in 
the  Esquimaux  style.  The  work  was  quickly  accomplished  with  the 
ice-chisels,  and  at  eight  o'clock,  after  a  salt  meat  supper,  every  one 
had  crept  into  the  holes,  which  are  much  warmer  than  anyboay 
would  imagine. 

Before  retiring,  however,  Mrs  Barnett  asked  the  Lieutenant  how 
far  he  thought  they  had  come. 

"  Not  more  than  ten  miles,  I  think,"  replied  Hobson. 

*'  Ten  from  six  hundred  ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett.  *'  At  this  rate, 
it  will  take  us  three  months  to  get  to  the  American  continent ! " 

"  Perhaps  more,  madam,"  replied  Hobson,  "  for  we  shall  not  be 
able  to  get  on  faster  than  this.  We  are  not  travelling  as  we  were 
last  year  over  the  frozen  plains  between  Fort  Reliance  and  Cape 
Bathurst ;  but  on  a  distorted  ice-field  crushed  by  the  pressure  of 
the  icebergs,  across  which  there  is  no  easy  route.  I  expect  to  meet 
with  almost  insurmountable  difficulties  on  the  way;  may  we  be 
able  to  conquer  them  !  It  is  not  of  so  much  importance,  however, 
to  march  quickly  as  to  preserve  our  health,  and  I  shall  indeed 
think  myself  fortunate  if  all  my  comrades  answer  to  their  names  in 
the  roll-call  on  our  arrival  at  Fort  Reliance.  Heaven  grant  we  may 
have  all  landed  at  some  point,  no  matter  where,  of  the  American 
continent  in  three  months'  time ;  if  so,  we  shall  never  be  able  to 
return  thanks  enough." 

The  night  passed  without  incident ;  but  during  the  long  vigil 
which  he  kept,  Hobson  fancied  he  noticed  certain  ill-omened  trem- 
blings on  the  spot  he  had  chosen  for  his  encampment,  and  could 


262  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

not  but  fear  that  the  vast  ice-field  was  insufficiently  cemented,  and 
that  there  would  be  numerous  rents  in  the  surface  which  would 
greatly  impede  his  progress,  and  render  communication  with  firm 
ground  very  uncertain.  Moreover,  before  he  started,  he  had 
observed  that  none  of  the  animals  had  left  the  vicinity  of  the  fort, 
and  they  would  certaii!ly  have  sought  a  warmer  climate  had  not  their 
instinct  warned  them  of  obstacles  in  their  way.  Yet  the  Lieutenant 
felt  that  he  had  only  done  his  duty  in  making  this  attempt  to  restore 
his  little  colony  to  an  inhabited  land,  before  the  setting  in  of  the 
thaw,  and  whether  he  succeeded  or  had  to  turn  back  he  would  have 
no  reason  to  reproach  himself. 

The  next  day,  November  23d,  the  detachment  could  not  even- 
advance  ten  miles  towards  the  east,  so  great  were  the  difficulties 
met  with.  The  ice-field  was  fearfully  distorted,  and  here  and 
there  many  layers  of  ice  were  piled  one  upon  another,  doubtless 
driven  along  by  the  irresistible  force  of  the  ice-wall  into  the  vast 
funnel  of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  Hence  a  confusion  of  masses  of  ice, 
which  looked  as  if  they  had  been  suddenly  dropped  by  a  hand 
incapable  of  holding  them,  and  strewn  about  in  every  direction. 

It  was  clear  that  a  caravan  of  sledges,  drawn  by  dogs  and  rein- 
deer, could  not  possibly  get  over  these  blocks  ;  and  it  was  equally 
clear  that  a  path  could  not  be  cut  through  them  with  the  hatchet  or 
ice-chisel.  Some  of  the  icebergs  assumed  extraordinary  forms,  and 
there  were  groups  which  looked  like  towns  falling  into  ruins.  Some 
towered  three  or  four  hundred  feet  above  the  level  of  the  ice-field, 
and  were  capped  with  tottering  masses  of  debris,  which  the  slightest- 
shake  or  shock  or  gust  of  wind  would  bring  down  in  avalanches. 

The  greatest  precautions  were,  therefore,  necessary  in  rounding 
these  ice-mountains,  and  orders  were  given  not  to  speak  above  a 
whisper,  and  not  to  excite  the  dogs  by  cracking  the  whips  in  these 
dangerous  passes. 

But  an  immense  amount  of  time  was  lost  in  looking  for  practicable 
passages,  and  the  travellers  were  worn  out  with  fatigue,  often  going 
ten  miles  round  before  they  could  advance  one  in  the  required  direc- 
tion towards  the  east.  The  only  comfort  was  that  the  ground  still 
remained  firm  beneath  their  feet. 

On  the  24th  November,  however,  fresh  obstacles  arose,  which 
Hobson  really  feared,  with  considerable  reason,  would  be  insurmount- 
able. 

After  getting  over  one  wall  of  ice  which  rose  some  twenty  miles 


Some  of  the  icebergs  assumed  extraordinary  forms ."  —  Page  262. 


ACROSS    THE   ICE-FIELD,  263 

fronuVictoria  Island,  the  party  found  themselves  on  a  mucli  less 
undulating  ice-field,  the  different  portions  of  which  had  evidently 
not  been  subjected  to  any  great  pressure.  It  was  clear  that  in  con- 
sequence of  the  direction  of  the  currents  the  influence  of  the  masses 
of  permanent  ice  in  the  north  had  not  here  been  felt,  and  Hobson 
and  his  comrades  soon  found  that  this  ice-field  was  intersected 
with  wide  and  deep  crevasses  not  yet  frozen  over.  The  temperature 
here  was  comparatively  warm,  and  the  thermometer  maintained  a 
mean  height  of  more  than  34°  Fahrenheit.  Salt  water,  as  is 
well  known,  does  not  freeze  so  readily  as  fresh,  but  requires  several 
degrees  of  cold  below  freezing  point  before  it  becomes  solidified,  and 
the  sea  was  therefore  still  liquid.  All  the  icebergs  and  floes  here  had 
come  from  latitudes  farther  north,  and,  if  we  may  so  express  it, 
lived  upon  the  cold  they  had  brought  with  them.  The  whole  of 
the  southern  portion  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  was  most  imperfectly 
frozen,  and  a  warm  rain  was  falling,  which  hastened  the  dissolution 
of  what  ice  there  was. 

On  the  24th  November  the  advance  of  the  travellers  was  abso- 
lutely arrested  by  a  crevasse  full  of  rough  water  strewn  with  small 
icicles — a  crevasse  not  more  than  a  hundred  feet  wide,  it  is  true,  but 
probably  many  miles  long. 

For  two  whole  hours  the  party  skirted  along  the  western  edge  of 
this  gap,  in  the  hope  of  coming  to  the  end  of  it  and  getting  to  the 
other  side,  so  as  to  resume  their  march  to  the  east,  but  it  was 
all  in  vain,  they  were  obliged  to  give  it  up  and  encamp  on  the  wrong 
side. 

Hobson  and  Long,  however,  proceeded  for  another  quarter  of  a 
mile  along  the  interminable  crevasse,  mentally  cursing  the  mildness 
of  the  winter  which  had  brought  them  into  such  a  strait. 

**  We  must  pass  somehow,"  said  Long,  *'  for  we  can't  stay  where 
*we  are." 

"  Yes,  yes,"  replied  the  Lieutenant,  "  and  we  shall  pass  it,  either  by 
going  up  to  the  north,  or  down  to  the  south,  it  must  end  somewhere. 
But  after  we  have  got  round  this  we  shall  come  to  others,  and  so 
it  will  go  on  perhaps  for  hundred  of  miles,  as  long  as  this  uncertain 
and  most  unfortunate  weather  continues  !  " 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,  we  must  ascertain  the  truth  once  for  all  before 
we  resume  our  journey,"  said  the  Sergeant. 

"  We  must  indeed.  Sergeant,"  replied  Hobson  firmly,  "  or  w 
shall  run  a  risk  of  not  having  crossed  half  the   distance  b  tween  u 


264  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


and  America  after  travelling  five  or  six  hundred  miles  out  qf  our 
way.  Yes,  before  going  farther,  I  must  make  quite  sure  of  the 
state  of  the  ice-field,  and  that  is  what  I  am  about  to  do." 

And  without  another  word  Hobson  stripped  himself,  plunged 
into  the  half-frozen  water,  and  being  a  powerful  swimmer  a  few 
strokes  soon  brought  him  to  the  other  side  of  the  crevasse,  when  he 
disappeared  amongst  the  icebergs. 

A  few  hours  later  the  Lieutenant  reached  the  encampment,  to 
which  Long  had  already  returned,  in  an  exhausted  condition.  He 
took  Mrs  Barnett  and  the  Sergeant  aside,  and  told  them  that  the 
ice-field  was  impracticable,  adding — 

"  Perhaps  one  man  on  foot  without  a  sledge  or  any  encumbrances 
might  get  across,  but  for  a  caravan  it  is  impossible.  The 
crevasses  increase  towards  the  east,  and  a  boat  would  really  be 
of  more  use  than  a  sledge  if  we  wish  to  reach  the  American 
coast." 

"  Well,"  said  Long,  "  if  one  man  could  cross,  ought  not  one  of 
us  to  attempt  it,  and  go  and  seek  assistance  for  the  rest." 

*'  I  thought  of  trying  it  myself,"  replied  Hobson. 

"  You,  Lieutenant  !  " 

"  You,  sir !  "  cried  Mrs  Barnett  and  Long  in  one  breath. 

These  two  exclamations  showed  Hobson  how  unexpected  and 
inopportune  his  proposal  appeared.  How  could  he,  the  chief  of  the 
expedition,  think  of  deserting  those  confided  to  him,  even  although 
it  was  in  their  interests  and  at  great  risk  to  himself.  It  was  quite 
impossible,  and  the  Lieutenant  did  not  insist  upon  it. 

"  Yes,"  he  said,  "  I  understand  how  it  appears  to  you,  my  friends, 
and  I  will  not  abandon  you.  It  would,  indeed,  be  quite  useless 
for  any  one  to  attempt  the  passage  ;  he  would  not  succeed,  he  would 
fall  by  the  way,  and  find  a  watery  grave  when  the  thaw  sets  in. 
And  even  suppose  he  reached  New  Archangel,  how  could  he  come 
to  our  rescue  %  Would  he  charter  a  vessel  to  seek  for  us  %  Suppose 
he  did,  it  could  not  start  until  after  the  thaw.  And  who  can  tell 
where  the  currents  will  then  have  taken  Victoria  Island,  either  yet 
farther  north  or  to  the  Behring  Sea  ! 

"  Yes,  Lieutenant,  you  are  right,"  replied  Long  ;  "  let  us  remain 
together,  and  if  we  are  to  be  saved  in  a  boat,  there  is  Mac-Nab*s 
on  Victoria  Island,  and  for  it  at  least  we  shall  not  have  to  wait ! " 

Mrs  Barnett  had  listened  without  saying  a  word,  but  she  under- 
stood that  the  ice-field  being  impassable,  they  had  now  nothing  to 


We  must  iMss  somehow."  —  Page  263. 


ACROSS    THE   ICE-FIELD.  265 

depend  on  but  the  carpenter's  boat,  and  that  they  would  have  to  wait 
bravely  for  the  thaw. 

"  What  are  you  going  to  do,  then  1  "  she  inquired  at  last, 

"  Ileturn  to  Victoria  Island." 

"  Let  us  return  then,  and  God  be  with  us  !  " 

The  rest  of  the  travellers  had  now  gathered  round  the  Lieutenant, 
and  he  laid  his  plans  before  them. 

At  first  all  were  disposed  to  rebel,  the  poor  creatures  had  been 
counting  on  getting  back  to  their  homes,  and  felt  absolutely  crushed 
at  the  disappointment,  but  they  soon  recovered  their  dejection  and 
declared  themselves  ready  to  obey. 

Hobson  then  told  them  the.  results  of  the  examination  he  had 
just  made.  They  learnt  that  the  obstacles  in  their  way  on  the  east 
were  so  numerous  that  it  would  be  absolutely  impossible  to  pass 
with  the  sledges  and  their  contents,  and  as  the  journey  would  last 
several  months,  the  provisions,  &c.,  could  not  be  dispensed  with. 

"  We  are  now,"  added  the  Lieutenant,  "  cut  oflf  from  all  com- 
munication with  the  mainland,  and  by  going  farther  towards  the 
east  we  run  a  risk,  after  enduring  great  fatigues,  of  finding  it 
impossible  to  get  back  to  the  island,  now  our  only  refuge.  If  the 
thaw  should  overtake  us  on  the  ice-field,  we  are  lost.  I  have  not 
disguised  nor  have  I  exaggerated  the  truth,  and  I  know,  my  friends, 
that  I  am  speaking  to  men  who  have  found  that  I  am  not  a  man  to 
turn  back  from  difiiculties.  But  I  repeat,  the  task  we  have  set 
ourselves  is  impossible  ! " 

The  men  trusted  their  chief  implicitly.  They  knew  his  courage 
and  energy,  and  felt  as  they  listened  to  his  words  that  it  was 
indeed  impossible  to  cross  the  ice. 

It  was  decided  to  start  on  the  return  journey  to  Fort  Hope  the  next 
day,  and  it  was  accomplished  under  most  distressing  circumstances. 
The  weather  was  dreadful,  squalls  swept  down  upon  the  ice-field, 
and  rain  fell  in  torrents.  The  difficulty  of  finding  the  way  in  the 
darkness  through  the  labyrinth  of  icebergs  can  well  be  imagined  i 

It  took  no  less  than  four  days  and  four  nights  to  get  back  to  the 
island.  Several  teams  of  dogs  with  their  sledges  fell  into  the 
crevasses,  but  thanks  to  Hobson's  skill,  prudence,  and  devotion,  he 
lost  not  one  of  his  party.  But  what  terrible  dangers  and  fatigues 
they  had  to  go  through,  and  how  awful  was  the  prospect  of  another 
winter  on  the  wandering  island  to  the  unfortunate  colonists ! 


CHAPTER    XIV. 

THE   WINTER  MONTHS, 

J  HE  party  did  not  arrive  at  Fort  Hope  until  the  28th,  after 

j»^  a  most  arduous  journey.  They  had  now  nothing  to  depend 
on  but  the  boat,  and  that  they  could  not  use  until  the 
sea  was  open,  which  would  not  be  for  six  months. 

Preparations  for  another  winter  were  therefore  made.  The 
sledges  were  unloaded,  the  provisions  put  back  in  the  pantry,  and 
the  clothes,  arms,  furs,  &c.,  in  the  magazines.  The  dogs  returned 
to  their  dog-house,  and  the  reindeer  to  their  stable. 

Great  was  the  despair  of  Thomas  Black  at  this  return  to  seclu- 
sion. The  poor  astronomer  carried  his  instruments,  his  books,  and 
his  MSS.  back  to  his  room,  and  more  angry  than  ever  with  "  the 
evil  fate  which  pursued  him,"  he  held  himself  aloof  from  every- 
thing which  went  on  in  the  factory. 

All  were  again  settled  at  their  usual  winter  avocations  the  day 
after  their  arrival,  and  the  monotonous  winter  life  once  more  com- 
menced. Needlework,  mending  the  clothes,  taking  care  of  the  furs, 
some  of  which  might  yet  be  saved,  the  observation  of  the  weather, 
the  examination  of  the  ice-field,  and  reading  aloud,  were  the  daily 
occupations.  Mrs  Barnett  was,  as  before,  the  leader  in  everything, 
and  her  influence  was  everywhere  felt.  If,  as  sometimes  happened, 
now  that  all  were  uneasy  about  the  future,  a  slight  disagreement 
occurred  between  any  of  the  soldiers,  a  few  words  from  Mrs  Barnett 
soon  set  matters  straight,  for  she  had  acquired  wonderful  power 
over  the  little  world  in  which  she  moved,  and  she  always  used  it 
for  the  good  of  the  community. 

Kalumah  had  become  a  great  favourite  with  everybody,  for  she 
was  always  pleasant  and  obliging.  Mrs  Barnett  had  undertaken 
her  education,  and  she  got  on  quickly,  for  she  was  both  intelligent 
and  eager  to  learn.  She  improved  her  English  speaking,  and  also 
taught  her  to  read  and  write  in  that  language.     There  were,  however, 


THE    WINTER   MONTHS.  267 

twelve  masters  for  Kalumah,  all  eager  to  assist  in  this  branch  of 
her  education,  as  the  soldiers  had  all  been  taught  reading,  writing, 
and  arithmetic  either  in  England  or  in  English  colonies. 

The  building  of  the  boat  proceeded  rapidly,  and  it  was  to  be 
planked  and  decked  before  the  end  of  the  month.  Mac-Nab  and 
«ome  of  his  men  worked  hard  in  the  darkness  outside,  with  no  light 
but  the  flames  of  burning  resin,  whilst  others  were  busy  making  the 
rigging  in  the  magazines  of  the  factory.  Although  the  season  was 
now  far  advanced,  the  weather  still  remained  very  undecided.  The 
cold  was  sometimes  intense,  but  owing  to  the  prevalence  of  west 
winds  it  never  lasted  long. 

Thus  passed  the  whole  of  December,  rain  and  intermittent  falls 
of  snow  succeeded  each  other,  the  temperature  meanwhile  varying 
from  26°  to  34°  Fahrenheit.  The  consumption  of  fuel  was  moderate, 
although  there  was  no  need  to  economise  it,  the  reserves  being 
considerable.  It  was  otherwise  with  the  oil,  upon  which  they 
depended  for  light,  for  the  stock  was  getting  so  low  that  the 
Lieutenant  could  at  last  only  allow  the  lamps  to  be  lit  for  a  few 
hours  every  day.  He  tried  using  reindeer  fat  for  lighting  the  house, 
but  the  smell  of  it  was  so  unbearable  that  every  one  preferred  being 
in  the  dark.  All  work  had  of  course  to  be  given  up  for  the  time, 
and  very  tedious  did  the  long  dark  hours  appear. 

Some  Auroras  Borealis  and  two  or  three  lunar  halos  appeared  at 
full  moon,  and  Thomas  Black  might  now  have  minutely  observed  all 
these  phenomenon,  and  have  made  precise  calculations  on  their  inten- 
sity, their  coloration,  connection  with  the  electric  state  of  the  atmo- 
sphere, and  their  influence  upon  the  magnetic  needle,  &c.  But  the 
astronomer  did  not  even  leave  his  room.  His  spirit  was  completely 
crushed. 

On  the  30th  December  the  light  of  the  moon  revealed  a  long 
■circular  line  of  icebergs  shutting  in  the  horizon  on  the  north  and 
east  of  Victoria  Island.  This  was  the  ice- wall,  the  frozen  masses  of 
which  were  piled  up  to  a  height  of  some  three  or  four  hundred 
feet.  Two-thirds  of  the  island  were  hemmed  in  by  this  mighty 
barrier,  and  it  seemed  probable  that  the  blockade  would  become 
yet  more  complete. 

The  sky  was  clear  for  the  lirst  week  of  January.  The  new  year, 
1861,  opened  with  very  cold  weather,  and  the  column  of  mercury 
fell  to  8°  Fahrenheit.     It  was  the  lowest  temperature  that  had  yet 


268  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


been  experienced  in  this  singular  winter,  although  it  was  anything 
but  low  for  such  a  high  latitude. 

The  Lieutenant  felt  it  his  duty  once  more  to  take  the  latitude 
•and  longitude  of  the  island  by  means  of  stellar  observations,  and 
found  that  its  position  had  not  changed  at  all. 

About  this  time,  in  spite  of  all  their  economy,  the  oil  seemed 
likely  to  fail  altogether.  The  sun  would  not  appear  above  the 
horizon  before  early  in  February,  so  that  there  was  a  month  to  wait, 
during  which  there  was  a  danger  of  the  colonists  having  to  remain 
in  complete  darkness.  Thanks  to  the  young  Esquimaux,  however, 
a  fresh  supply  of  oil  for  the  lamps  was  obtained. 

On  the  3rd  January  Kalumah  walked  to  Cape  Bathurst  to 
examine  the  state  of  the  ice.  All  along  the  south  of  the  island 
the  ice-field  was  very  compact,  the  icicles  of  which  it  was  com^ 
posed  were  more  firmly  welded  together,  there  were  no  liquid  spaces 
between  them,  and  the  surfiice  of  the  floe,  though  rough,  was  per- 
fectly firm  everywhere.  This  was  no  doubt  caused  by  the  pressure 
of  the  chain  of  icebergs  on  the  horizon,  which  drove  the  ice  towards 
the  north,  and  squeezed  it  against  the  island. 

Although  she  saw  no  crevasses  or  rents,  the  young  native  noticed 
many  circular  holes  neatly  cut  in  the  ice,  the  use  of  which  she  knew 
perfectly  well.  They  were  the  holes  kept  open  by  seals  imprisoned 
beneath  the  solid  crust  of  ice,  and  by  which  they  came  to  the  surface 
to  breathe  and  look  for  mosses  under  the  snow  on  the  coast. 

Kalumah  knew  that  in  the  winter  bears  will  crouch  patiently  near 
these  holes,  and  watching  for  the  moment  when  the  seal  comes  out 
of  the  water,  they  rush  upon  it,  hug  it  to  death  in  their  paws,  and 
carry  it  off.  She  knew,  too,  that  the  Esquimaux,  not  less  patient 
than  the  bears,  also  watch  for  the  appearance  of  these  animals,  and 
throwing  a  running  noose  over  their  heads  when  they  push  them  up, 
drag  them  to  the  surface. 

What  bears  and  Esquimaux  could  do  might  certainly  also  be  done 
by  skilful  hunters,  and  Kalumah  hastened  back  to  the  fort  to  tell 
the  Lieutenant  of  what  she  had  seen,  feeling  sure  that  where  these 
holes  were  seals  were  not  far  ofiF. 

Hobson  sent  for  the  hunters,  and  the  young  native  described  to 
them  the  way  in  which  the  Esquimaux  capture  these  animals  in  the 
winter,  and  begged  them  to  try. 

She  had  not  finished  speaking  before  Sabine  had  a  strong  rope 
with  a  running  noose  ready  in  his  hand,  and  accompanied  by  Hobson, 


THE    WINTER   MONTHS.  269 


Mrs  Barnett,  Kalumah,  and  two  or  three  soldiers,  the  hunters 
hurried  to  Cape  Bathurst,  and  whilst  the  women  remained  on  the 
beach,  the  men  made  their  way  to  the  holes  pointed  out  by 
Kalumah.  Each  one  was  provided  with  a  rope,  and  stationed 
himself  at  a  diflferent  hole. 

A  long  time  of  waiting  ensued — no  sign  of  the  seals,  but  at  last 
the  water  in  the  hole  Marbre  had  chosen  began  to  bubble,  and  a 
head  with  long  tusks  appeared.  It  was  that  of  a  walrus,  Marbre 
flung  his  running  noose  skilfully  over  its  neck  and  pulled  it  tightly. 
His  comrades  rushed  to  his  assistance,  and  with  some  difficulty  the 
huge  beast  was  dragged  upon  the  ice,  and  despatched  with 
hatchets. 

It  was  a  great  success,  and  the  colonists  were  delighted  with  this 
novel  fishing.  Other  walruses  were  taken  in  the  same  way,  and 
furnished  plenty  of  oil,  which,  though  not  strictly  of  the  right  sort, 
did  very  well  for  the  lamps,  and  there  was  no  longer  any  lack  of 
light  in  any  of  the  rooms  of  Fort  Hope. 

The  cold  was  even  now  not  very  severe,  and  had  the  colonists 
been  on  the  American  mainland  they  could  only  have  rejoiced  in  the 
mildness  of  the  winter.  They  were  sheltered  by  the  chain  of  ice- 
bergs from  the  north  and  west  winds,  and  the  month  of  January 
passed  on  with  the  thermometer  never  many  degrees  below  freezing 
point,  so  that  the  sea  round  Victoria  Island  was  never  frozen  hard. 
Fissures  of  more  or  less  extent  broke  the  regularity  of  the  surface 
in  the  offing,  as  was  proved  by  the  continued  presence  of  the  rumi- 
nants and  furred  animals  near  the  factory,  all  of  which  had  become 
strangely  tame,  forming  in  fact  part  of  the  menagerie  of  the 
colony. 

According  to  Hobson's  orders,  all  these  creatures  were  unmolested. 
It  would  have  been  useless  to  kill  them,  and  a  reindeer  was  only 
occasionally  slaughtered  to  obtain  a  fresh  supply  of  venison.  Some 
of  the  furred  animals  even  ventured  into  the  enceinte,  and  they 
were  not  driven  away.  The  martens  and  foxes  were  in  all  the 
splendour  of  their  winter  clothing,  and  under  ordinary  circumstances 
would  have  been  of  immense  value.  These  rodents  found  plenty  of 
moss  under  the  snow,  thanks  to  the  mildness  of  the  season,  and  did 
not  therefore  live  upon  the  reserves  of  the  factory. 

It  was  with  some  apprehensions  for  the  future  that  the  end  of 
the  winter  was  awaited,  but  Mrs  Barnett  did  all  in  her  power  to- 
brighten  the  monotonous  existence  of  her  companions  in  exile. 


270  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Only  one  incident  occurred  in  the  month  of  January,  and  that 
one  was  distressing  enough.  On  the  7th,  Michael  Mac-Nab  was 
taken  ill — severe  headache,  great  thirst  and  alternations  of  shivering 
and  fever,  soon  reduced  the  poor  little  fellow  to  a  sad  state.  His 
mother  and  father,  and  indeed  all  his  friends,  were  in  very  great 
trouble.  No  one  knew  what  to  do,  as  it  was  impossible  to  say  what 
his  illness  was,  but  Madge,  who  retained  her  senses  about  her,  advised 
cooling  drinks  and  poultices.  Kalumah  was  indefatigable,  remaining 
day  and  night  by  her  favourite's  bedside,  and  refusing  to  take  any 
rest.  ^ 

About  the  third  day  there  was  no  longer  any  doubt  as  to  the 
nature  of  the  malady.  A  rash  came  out  all  over  the  child's  body, 
and  it  was  evident  that  he  had  malignant  scarlatina,  which  would 
certainly  produce  internal  inflammation. 

Children  of  a  year  old  are  rarely  attacked  with  this  terrible  disease, 
but  cases  do  occasionally  occur.  The  medicine-chest  of  the  factory 
was  necessarily  insufficiently  stocked,  but  Madge,  who  had  nursed 
several  patients  through  scarlet  fever,  remembered  that  tincture 
of  belladonna  was  recommended,  and  administered  one  or  two  drops 
to  the  little  invalid  every  day.  The  greatest  care  was  taken  lest  he 
should  catch  cold ;  he  was  at  once  removed  to  his  parents'  room, 
and  the  rash  soon  came  out  freely.  Tiny  red  points  appeared  on 
his  tongue,  his  lips,  and  even  on  the  globes  of  his  eyes.  Two  days 
later  his  skin  assumed  a  violet  hue,  then  it  became  white  and  fell 
off  in  scales. 

It  was  now  that  double  care  was  required  to  combat  the  great 
internal  inflammation,  which  proved  the  severity  of  the  attack. 
Nothing  was  neglected,  the  boy  was,  in  fact,  admirably  nursed,  and 
on  the  20th  January,  twelve  days  after  he  was  taken  ill,  he  was 
pronounced  out  of  danger. 

Great  was  the  joy  in  the  factory.  The  baby  was  the  child  of  the 
fort,  of  the  regiment !  He  was  bom  in  the  terrible  northern,  lati- 
tudes, in  the  colony  itself,  he  had  been  named  Michael  Hope,  and 
he  had  come  to  be  regarded  as  a  kind  of  talisman  in  the  dangers 
and  difficulties  around,  and  all  felt  sure  that  God  would  not  take 
him  from  them. 

Poor  Kalumah  would  certainly  not  have  survived  him  had  he 
died,  but  he  gradually  recovered,  and  fresh  hope  seemed  to  come 
back  when  he  was  restored  to  the  little  circle. 

The  23d  of  January  was  now  reached,  after  all  these  distressing 


THE    WINTER  MONTHS.  2/1 

alternations  of  hope  and  fear.  The  situation  of  Victoria  Island  had 
not  changed  in  the  least,  and  it  was  still  wrapped  in  the  gloom  of 
the  apparently  interminable  Polar  night.  Snow  fell  abundantly  for 
some  days,  and  was  piled  up  on  the  ground  to  the  height  of  two 
feet. 

On  the  27th  a  somewhat  alarming  visit  was  received  at  the  fort. 
The  soldiers  Belcher  and  Pond,  when  on  guard  in  front  of  the 
enceinte  in  the  morning,  saw  a  huge  bear  quietly  advancing  towards 
the  fort.  They  hurried  into  the  large  room,  and  told  Mrs  Barnett 
of  the  approach  of  the  formidable  carnivorous  beast. 

*'  Perhaps  it  is  only  our  bear  again,"  observed  Mrs  Barnett  to 
Hobson,  and  accompanied  by  him,  and  followed  by  the  Sergeant, 
Sabine,  and  some  soldiers  provided  with  guns,  she  fearlessly  walked 
to  the  postern. 

The  bear  was  now  about  two  hundred  paces  off,  and  was  walking 
along  without  hesitation,  as  if  he  had  some  settled  plan  in  view. 

"  I  know  him  !  "  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  "  it  is  your  bear,  Kalumah, 
your  preserver  ! " 

"  Oh,  don't  kill  my  bear  ! "  exclaimed  the  young  Esquimaux. 

"  He  shall  not  be  killed,"  said  the  Lieutenant ;  "  don't  injure  him, 
my  good  fellows,"  he  added  to  the  men,  **  he  will  probably  return 
as  he  came." 

"  But  suppose  he  intends  coming  into  the  enceinte  1 "  said  Long, 
who  had  his  doubts  as  to  the  friendly  propensities  of  Polar  bears. 

"  Let  him  come,  Sergeant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  *'  he  is  a  prisoner 
like  ourselves,  and  you  know  prisoners  " 

"Don't  eat  each  other,"  added  Hobson.  "  True,  but  only  when 
they  belong  to  the  same  species.  For  your  sake,  however,  we  wilj 
spare  this  fellow-sufferer,  and  only  defend  ourselves  if  he  attack  us. 
I  think,  however,  it  will  be  as  prudent  to  go  back  to  the  house. 
We  must  not  put  too  strong  a  temptation  in  the  way  of  our  carni- 
vorous friend ! " 

This  was  certainly  good  advice,  and  all  returned  to  the  large 
room,  the  windows  were  closed,  but  not  the  shutters. 

Through  the  panes  the  movements  of  the  visitor  were  watched. 
The  bear,  finding  the  postern  unfastened,  quietly  pushed  open  the 
door,  looked  in,  carefully  examined  the  premises,  and  finally  entered 
the  enceinte.  Having  reached  the  centre,  he  examined  the  buildings 
around  him,  went  towards  the  reindeer  stable  and  dog-house, 
listened  for  a  moment  to  the  bowlings  of  the  dogs  and  the  uneasy 


2/2  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


noises  made  by  the  reindeer,  then  continued  his  walk  round  the 
palisade,  and  at  last  came  and  leant  his  great  head  against  one  of 
the  windows  of  the  large  room. 

To  own  the  truth  everybody  started  back,  several  of  the  soldiers 
seized  their  guns,  and  Sergeant  Long  began  to  fear  he  had  let  the 
joke  go  too  far. 

But  Kalumah  came  forward,  and  looked  through  the  thin  parti- 
tion with  her  sweet  eyes.  The  bear  seemed  to  recognise  her,  at 
least  so  she  thought,  and  doubtless  satisfied  with  his  inspection^  he 
gave  a  hearty  growl,  and  turning  away  left  the  enceinte,  as  Hobson 
had  prophesied,  as  he  entered  it. 

This  was  the  bear's  first  and  last  visit  to  the  fort,  and  on  his 
departure  everything  went  on  as  quietly  as  before. 

The  little  boy's  recovery  progressed  favourably,  and  at  the  end  of 
the  month  he  was  as  rosy  and  as  bright  as  ever. 

At  noon  on  the  3rd  of  February,  the  northern  horizon  was  touched 
with  a  faint  glimmer  of  light,  which  did  not  fade  away  for  an  hour, 
and  the  yellow  disc  of  the  sun  appeared  for  an  instant  for  the  first 
time  since  the  commencement  of  the  long  Polar  night. 


Everybody  started  back:'  —  Page  272. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

A  LAST  EXPLORING  EXPEDITION, 

(,ROM  this  date,  February  3rd,  the  sun  rose  each  day  higher 
above  the  horizon,  the  nights  were,  however,  still  very 
long,  and,  as  is  often  the  case  in  February,  the  cold  in- 
creased, the  thermometer  marking  only  1°  Fahrenheit,  the  lowest 
temperature  experienced  throughout  this  extraordinary  winter. 

"  When  does  the  thaw  commence  in  these  northern  seas  % "  inquired 
Mrs  Barnett  of  the  Lieutenant. 

"  In  ordinary  seasons,"  replied  Hobson,  "  the  ice  does  not  break 
up  until  early  in  May  ;  but  the  winter  has  been  so  mild  that  unless 
a  very  hard  frost  should  now  set  in,  the  thaw  may  commence  at  the 
beginning  of  April.     At  least  that  is  my  opinion." 

"  We  shall  still  have  two  months  to  wait  then  % " 

"  Yes,  two  months,  for  it  would  not  be  prudent  to  launch  our 
boat  too  soon  amongst  the  floating  ice ;  and  I  think  our  best  plan 
will  be  to  wait  until  our  island  has  reached  the  narrowest  part  of 
Behring  Strait,  which  is  not  more  than  two  hundred  miles  wide." 

"  What  do  you  mean  % "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett,  considerably 
surprised  at  the  Lieutenant's  reply.  *'  Have  you  forgotten  that  it 
was  the  Kaintchatka  Current  which  brought  us  where  we  now  are, 
and  which  may  seize  us  again  when  the  thaw  sets  in  and  carry  us 
yet  farther  north  %  " 

"  I  do  not  think  it  will,  madam  ;  indeed  I  feel  quite  sure  that  that 
will  not  happen.  The  tliaw  always  takes  place  from  north  to  south, 
and  although  the  Kamtchatka  Current  runs  the  other  way,  the  ice 
always  goes  down  the  Behring  Current.  Other  reasons  there  are 
for  my  opinion  which  I  cannot  now  enumerate.  But  the  icebergs 
invariably  drift  towards  the  Pacific,  and  are  there  melted  by  its 
warmer  waters.  Ask  Kalumah  if  I  am  not  right.  She  knows  these 
latitudes  well,  and  will  tell  you  that  the  thaw  always  proceeds  from 
the  north  to  the  south." 


274  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

Kalumah  when  questioned  confirmed  all  that  the  Lieutenant  had 
said,  so  that  it  appeared  probable  that  the  island  would  be  drifted 
to  the  south  like  a  huge  ice-floe,  that  is  to  say,  to  the  narrowest  part 
of  Behring  Strait,  which  is  much  frequented  in  the  summer  by  the 
fishermen  of  New  Archangel,  who  are  the  most  exp^fienced  mariners 
of  those  waters.  Making  allowance  for  all  delays  they  might  then 
hope  to  set  foot  on  the  continent  before  May,  and  although  the  cold 
had  not  been  very  intense  there  was  every  reason  to  believe  that  the 
foundations  of  Victoria  Island  had  been  thickened  and  strengthened 
by  a  fresh  accumulation  of  ice  at  the  base-,  and  that  it  would  hold 
together  for  several  months  to  come. 

There  was  then  nothing  for  the  colonists  to  do  but  to  wait  patiently, 
— still  to  wait ! 

The  convalescence  of  little  Michael  continued  to  progress  favour- 
ably. On  the  20th  of  February  he  went  out  for  the  first  time, 
forty  days  after  he  was  taken  ill.  By  this  we  mean  that  he  went 
from  his  bedroom  into  the  large  room,  where  he  was  petted  and 
made  much  of.  His  mother,  acting  by  Madge's  advice,  put  off 
weaning  him  for  some  little  time,  and  he  soon  got  back  his 
strength.  The  soldiers  had  made  many  little  toys  for  him  during 
his  illness,  and  he  was  now  as  happy  as  any  child  in  the  wide 
world. 

The  last  week  of  February  was  very  wet,  rain  and  snow  falling 
alternately.  A  strong  wind  blew  from  the  north-west,  and  the 
temperature  was  low  enough  for  large  quantities  of  snow  to  fall ; 
the  gale,  however,  increased  in  violence,  and  on  the  side  of  Cape 
Bathurst  and  the  chain  of  icebergs  the  noise  of  the  tempest  was 
deafening.  The  huge  ice-masses  were  flung  against  each  other,  and 
fell  with  a  roar  like  that  of  thunder.  The  ice  on  the  north  was 
compressed  and  piled  up  on  the  shores  of  the  island.  There  really 
seemed  to  be  a  danger  that  the  cape  itself — which  was  but  a  kind 
of  iceberg  capped  with  earth  and  sand — would  be  flung  down. 
Some  large  pieces  of  ice,  in  spite  of  their  weight,  were  driven  to  the 
very  foot  of  the  palisaded  enceinte  ;  but  fortunately  for  the  factory 
the  cape  retained  its  position  ;  had  it  given  way  all  the  buildings 
must  inevitably  have  been  crushed  beneath  it. 

It  will  be  easily  understood  that  the  position  of  Victoria  Island, 
at  the  opening  of  a  narrow  strait  about  which  the  ice  accumulated  in 
large  quantities,  was  extremely  perilous ,  for  it  might  at  any  time  be 
swept  by  a  horizontal  avnlnnche,  or  crushed  beneath  the  huge  blocks 


It  was  dashed  upon  the  icefield  with  a  fearful  crash."  —  Page  277. 


A  LAST  EXPLORING  EXPEDITION,  2/5 

of  ice  driven  inland  from  the  oflBng,  and  so  become  engulfed  before 
the  thaw.  This  was  a  new  danger  to  be  added  t  ■  all  the  others 
already  threatening  the  little  band.  Mrs  Barnett,  seeing  the 
awful  power  of  the  pressure  in  the  offing,  and  the  violence  with 
which  the  moving  masses  of  ice  crushed  upon  each  other,  realised 
the  full  magnitude  of  the  peril  they  would  all  be  in  when  the  thaw 
commenced.  She  often  mentioned  her  fears  to  the  Lieutenant,  and 
he  shook  his  head  like  a  man  who  had  no  reply  to  make. 

Early  in  March  the  squall  ceased,  and  the  full  extent  of  the  trans- 
formation of  the  ice-field  was  revealed.  It  seemed  as  if  by  a  kind  of 
glissade  the  chain  of  icebergs  had  drawn  nearer  to  the  island.  In  some 
parts  it  was  not  two  miles  distant,  and  it  advanced  like  a  glacier  on 
the  move,  with  the  difference  that  the  latter  has  a  descending  and 
the  ice-wall  a  horizontal  motion.  Between  the  lofty  chain  of  ice-moun- 
tains the  ice-field  was  fearfully  distorted :  strewn  with  hummocks, 
broken  obelisks,  shattered  blocks,  overturned  pyramids,  it  resem- 
bled a  tempest-tossed  sea  or  a  ruined  town,  in  which  not  a  building 
or  a  monument  had  remained  standing,  and  above  it  all  the  mighty 
icebergs  reared  their  snowy  crests,  standing  out  against  the  sky  with 
their  pointed  peaks,  their  rugged  cones,  and  solid  buttresses,  forming 
a  fitting  frame  for  the  weird  fantastic  landscape  at  their  feet. 

At  this  date  the  little  vessel  was  quite  finished.  This  boat  was 
rather  heavy  in  shape,  as  might  have  been  expected,  but  she  did 
credit  to  Mac-Nab,  and  shaped  as  she  was  like  a  barge  at  the 
bows,  she  ought  the  better  to  withstand  the  shocks  of  the  floating 
ice.  She  might  have  been  taken  for  one  of  those  Dutch  boats  which 
venture  upon  the  northern  waters.  Her  rig,  which  was  completed, 
consisted,  like  that  of  a  cutter,  of  a  mainsail  and  a  jib  carried  on 
a  single  mast.  The  tent  canvass  of  the  factory  had  been  made  use 
of  for  sailcloth. 

This  boat  would  carry  the  whole  colony,  and  if,  as  the  Lieutenant 
hoped,  the  island  were  drifted  to  Behring  Strait,  the  vessel  would 
easily  make  her  way  to  land,  even  from  the  widest  part  of  the 
passage.  There  was  then  nothing  to  be  done  but  wait  for  the 
thaw. 

Hobson  now  decided  to  make  a  long  excursion  to  the  south  to 
ascertain  the  state  of  the  ice-field,  to  see  whether  there  were  any 
signs  of  its  breaking  up,  to  examine  the  chain  of  icebergs  by  which 
it  was  hemmed  in,  to  make  sure,  in  short,  whether  it  would  really  be 
useless  to  attempt  to  cross  to  the  American  continent.     Many  inci- 


2j6  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


dents  might  occur,  many  fresh  dangers  might  arise  before  the  thaw, 
and  it  would  therefore  be  but  prudent  to  make  a  reconnaissance  on 
the  ice-field.  • 

The  expedition  was  organised  and  the  start  fixed  for  March  7tb. 
Hobson,-  Mrs  Barnett,  Kalumah,  Marbre,  and  Sabine  were  to  go, 
and,  if  the  route  should  be  practicable,  they  would  try  and  find  a 
passage  across  the  chain  of  icebergs.  In  any  case,  however,  they 
were  not  to  be  absent  for  more  than  forty-eight  hours. 

A  good  stock  of  provisions  was  prepared,  and,  well  provided  for 
every  contingency,  the  little  party  left  Fort  Hope  on  the  morning 
of  the  7th  March  and  turned  towards  Cape  Michael. 

The  thermometer  then  marked  32°  Fahrenheit.  The  atmosphere 
was  misty,  but  the  weather  was  perfectly  calm.  The  sun  was  now 
above  the  horizon  for  seven  or  eight  hours  a  day,  and  its  oblique 
rays  afforded  plenty  of  light. 

At  nine  o'clock,  after  a  short  halt,  the  party  descended  the  slope 
of  Cape  Michael  and  made  their  way  across  the  ice-fields  in  a  south- 
easterly direction.  On  this  side  the  ice-wall  rose  not  three  miles 
from  the  cape. 

The  march  was  of  course  very  slow.  Every  minute  a  crevasse 
had  to  be  turned,  or  a  hummock  too  high  to  be  climbed.  It  was 
evident  that  a  sledge  could  not  have  got  over  the  rough  distorted 
surface,  which  consisted  of  an  accumulation  of  blocks  of  ice  of  every 
shape  and  size,  some  of  which  really  seemed  to  retain  their  equili- 
brium by  a  miracle.  Others  had  been  but  recently  overturned,  as 
could  be  seen  from  the  clearly  cut  fractures  and  sharp  corners.  Not 
a  sign  was  to  be  seen  of  any  living  creature,  no  footprints  told  of 
the  passage  of  man  or  beast,  and  the  very  birds  had  deserted  these 
awful  solitudes. 

Mrs  Barnett  was  astonished  at  the  scene  before  her,  and  asked 
the  Lieutenant  how  they  could  possibly  have  crossed  the  ice-fields 
if  they  had  started  in  December,  and  he  replied  by  reminding  her 
that  it  was  then  in  a  very  different  condition  ;  the  enormous  ]ires- 
sure  of  the  advancing  icebergs  had  not  then  commenced,  the  surface 
Df  the  sea  was  comparatively  even,  and  the  only  danger  was  from  its 
insufficient  solidification.  The  irregularities  which  now  barred  their 
passage  did  not  exist  early  in  the  winter. 

They  managed,  however,  to  advance  towards  the  mighty  ice-wall, 
Kalumah  generally  leading  the  way.  Like  a  chamois  on  the  Alpine 
rocks,  the  young  girl  firmly  treaded  the  ice-masses  with  a  swiftness 


A  LAST  EXPLORING  EXPEDITION.  2'J'J 


of  foot  and  an  absence  of  hesitation  whicli  was  really  marvellous. 
She  knew  by  instinct  the  best  way  through  the  labyrinth  of  icebergs, 
and  was  an  unerring  guide  to  her  companions. 

About  noon  the  base  of  the  ice-wall  was  reached,  but  it  had  taken 
three  hours  to  get  over  three  miles. 

The  icy  barrier  presented  a  truly  imposing  appearance,  rising  as 
it  did  more  than  four  hundred  feet  above  the  ice-field.  The  various 
strata  of  which  it  was  formed  were  clearly  defined,  and  the  glisten- 
ing surface  was  tinged  with  many  a  delicately-shaded  hue.  Jasper- 
like  ribbons  of  green  and  blue  alternated  with  streaks  and  dashes 
of  all  the  colours  of  the  rainbow,  strewn  with  enamelled  arabesques, 
sparkling  crystals,  and  delicate  ice-flowers.  No  cliff,  l}(>wever  strangely 
distorted,  could  give  any  idea  of  this  marvellous  half  opaque,  half 
transparent  ice- wall,  and  no  description  could  do  justice  to  the  won- 
derful effects  of  chiara-oscuro  pro(iuced  upon  it. 

It  would  not  do,  however,  to  approach  too  near  to  these  beetling 
cliffs,  the  solidity  of  which  was  very  doubtful.  Internal  fractures 
and  rents  were  already  commencing,  the  work  of  destruction  and 
decomposition  was  proceeding  rapidly,  aided  by  the  imprisoned 
air-bubbles  ;  and  the  fragility  of  the  huge  structure,  built  up  by  the 
cold,  was  manifest  to  every  eye.  It  could  not  survive  the  Arctic 
winter,  it  was  doomed  to  melt  beneath  the  sunbeams,  and  it  contained 
material  enough  to  feed  large  rivers. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  had  warned  his  companions  of  the  danger  of 
the  avalanches  which  constantly  fall  from  the  summits  of  the  ice- 
bergs, and  they  did  not  therefore  go  far  along  their  base.  That  this 
prudence  was  necessary  was  proved  by  the  falling  of  a  huge  block, 
at  two  o'clock,  at  the  entrance  to  a  kind  of  valley  which  they  were 
about  to  cross.  It  must  have  weighed  more  than  a  hundred  tons, 
and  it  was  dashed  upon  the  ice-field  with  a  fearful  crash,  bursting 
like  a  bomb-shell.     Fortunately  no  one  was  hurt  by  the  splinters. 

From  two  to  five  o'clock  the  explorers  followed  a  narrow  winding 
path  leading  down  amongst  the  icebergs  ;  they  were  anxious  to  know 
if  it  led  right  through  them,  but  could  not  at  once  ascertain.  In 
this  valley,  as  it  might  be  called,  they  were  able  t^  examine  the 
internal  structure  of  the  icy  barrier.  The  blocks  of  which  it  was 
built  up  were  here  arranged  with  greater  symmetry  than  outside.  In 
some  places  trunks  of  trees  were  seen  embedded  in  the  ice,  all,  how- 
ever, of  Tropical  not  Polar  species,  which  had  evidently  been  brought 
to  Arctic  regions  by  the  Gulf  Stream,  and  would  be  taken  back  to 


278  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

the  ocean  when  the  thaw  should  have  converted  into  water  the  ice 
which  now  held  them  in  its  chill  embrace. 

At  five  o'clock  it  became  too  dark  to  go  any  further.  The  travel- 
lers had  not  gone  more  than  about  two  miles  in  the  valley,  but  it 
was  so  sinuous,  that  it  was  impossible  to  estimate  exactly  the  dis- 
tance traversed. 

The  signal  to  halt  was  given  by  the  Lieutenant,  and  Marbre  and 
Sabine  quickly  dug  out  a  grotto  in  the  ice  with  their  chisels,  into 
which  the  whole  party  crept,  and  after  a  good  supper  all  were  soon 
asleep. 

Every  one  was  up  at  eight  o'clock  the  next  morning,  and  Hobson 
decided  to  follow  the  valley  for  another  mile,  in  the  hope  of  finding 
out  whether  it  went  right  through  the  ice-wall.  The  direction  of 
the  pass,  judging  from  the  position  of  the  sun,  had  now  changed  from 
north  to  south-east,  and  as  early  as  eleven  o'clock  the  party  came  out 
on  the  opposite  side  of  the  chain  of  icebergs.  The  passage  was 
therefore  proved  to  run  completely  through  the  barrier. 

The  aspect  of  the  ice-field  on  the  eastern  side  was  exactly 
similar  to  that  on  the  west.  The  same  confusion  of  ice-masses,  the 
same  accumulation  of  hummocks  and  icebergs,  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
reach,  with  occasional  alternations  of  smooth  surfaces  of  small  extent, 
intersected  by  numerous  crevasses,  the  edges  of  which  were  already 
melting  fast.  The  same  complete  solitude,  the  same  desertion,  not 
a  bird,  not  an  animal  to  be  seen. 

Mrs  Barnett  climbed  to  the  top  of  a  hummock,  and  there 
remained  for  an  hour,  gazing  upon  the  sad  and  desolate  Polar 
landscape  before  her.  Her  thoughts  involuntarily  flew  back  to  the 
miserable  attempt  to  escape  that  had  been  made  five  montLs  before. 
Once  more  she  saw  the  men  and  women  of  the  hapless  caravan 
encamped  in  the  darkness  of  these  frozen  solitudes,  or  struggling 
against  insurmountable  difficulties  to  reach  the  mainland. 

At  last  the  Lieutenant  broke  in  upon  her  reverie,  and  said — 

"  Madam,  it  is  more  than  twenty-four  hours  since  we  left 
the  fort.  We  now  know  the  thickness  of  the  ice-wall,  and  as  we 
promised  not  to  be  away  longer  than  forty-eight  hours,  I  think  it 
is  time  to  retrace  our  steps." 

Mrs  Barnett  saw  the  justice  of  the  Lieutenant's  remark.  They 
had  ascertained  that  the  barrier  of  ice  was  of  moderate  thickness,  that 
it  would  melt  away  quickly  enough  to  allow  of  the  passage  of  Mac- 
Nab's  boat  after  the  thaw,  and  it  would  therefore  be  well  to  hasten 


/  think  it  is  time  to  retrace  our  steps."  —  Page  278. 


A  LAST  EXPLORING  EXPEDITION.  279 

back  lest  a  snow-storm  or  change  in  the  weather  of  any  kind  should 
render  return  through  the  winding  valley  difficult. 

The  party  breakfasted  and  set  out  on  the  return  journey  about 
one  o'clock  p.m. 

The  night  was  passed  as  before  in  an  ice- cavern,  and  the  route 
resumed  at  eight  o'clock  the  next  morning,  March  9th. 

The  travellers  now  turned  their  backs  upon  the  sun,  as  they  were 
making  for  the  west,  but  the  weather  was  fine,  and  the  orb  of  day, 
already  high  in  the  heavens,  flung  some  of  its  rays  across  the  valley 
and  lit  up  the  glittering  ice-walls  on  either  side. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Kalumah  were  a  little  behind  the  rest  of  the 
party  chatting  together,  and  looking  about  them  as  they  wound 
through  the  narrow  passages  pointed  out  by  Marbre  and  Sabine. 
They  expected  to  get  out  of  the  valley  quickly,  and  be  back  at  the 
fort  before  sunset,  as  they  had  only  two  or  three  miles  of  the  island 
to  cross  after  leaving  the  ice.  This  would  be  a  few  hours  after  the 
time  fixed,  but  not  long  enough  to  cause  any  serious  anxiety  to  their 
friends  at  home. 

They  made  their  calculation  without  allowing  for  an  incident 
which  no  human  perspicacity  could  possibly  have  foreseen. 

It  was  about  ten  o'clock  when  Marbre  and  Sabine,  who  were 
some  twenty  paces  in  advance  of  the  rest,  suddenly  stopped  and 
appeared  to  be  debating  some  point.  When  the  others  came  up, 
Sabine  was  holding  out  his  compass  to  Marbre,  who  was  staring  at 
it  with  an  expression  of  the  utmost  astonishment. 

"  What  an  extraordinary  thing  ! "  he  exclaimed,  and  added, 
turning  to  the  Lieutenant — 

"  Will  you  tell  me,  sir,  the  position  of  the  island  with  regard  to 
the  ice-wall,  is  it  on  the  east  or  west? " 

"  On  the  west,"  replied  Hobson,  not  a  little  surprised  at  the 
question,  "you  kn.w  that  well  enough,  Marbre." 

"I  know  it  well  enough!  I  know  it  well  enough!"  repeated 
Marbre,  shaking  his  head,  "  and  if  it  is  on  the  west,  we  are  going 
wrong,  and  away  from  the  island  !  " 

"  What,  away  from  the  island  !  "  exclaimed  the  Lieutenant,  struck 
with  the  hunter's  air  of  conviction. 

"  We  are  indeed,  sir,"  said  Marbre  ;  "  look  at  the  compass ;  my 
name  is  not  Marbre  if  it  does  not  show  that  we  are  walking  towards 
the  east  not  the  west !  " 

"  Impossible  ! "  exclaimed  Mrs  Barnett. 


280  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


'^  Look,  madam,"  said  Sabine. 

It  was  true.  The  needle  pointed  in  exactly  the  opposite  direction 
to  that  expected.     Hobson  looked  thoughtful  and  said  nothing. 

"  We  must  have  made  a  mistake  when  we  left  the  ice-cavern  this 
morning,"  observed  Sabine,  "  we  ought  to  have  turned  to  the  left 
instead  of  to  the  right/' 

"  No,  no,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  *'  I  am  sure  we  did  not  make  a 
mistake  ! " 

"But  " said  Marbre. 

*' But, "  interrupted  Mrs  Barnett,  "look  at  the  sun.  Does  it 
no  longer  rise  in  the  east?  Now  as  we  turned  our  backs  on  it 
this  morning,  and  it  is  still  behind  us,  we  must  be  walking  towards 
the  west,  so  that  when  we  get  out  of  the  valley  on  the  western  side 
of  the  chain  of  icebergs,  we  must  come  to  the  island  we  left 
there." 

Marbre,  struck  dumb  by  this  irrefutable  argument,  crossed  his 
arms  and  said  no  more. 

"  Then  if  so,"  said  Sabine,  "  the  sun  and  the  compass  are  in 
complete  contradiction  of  each  other  ] " 

"  At  this  moment  they  are,"  said  Hobson,  "  and  the  reason  is 
simple  enough ;  in  these  high  northern  latitudes,  and  in  latitudes 
in  t  e  neighbourhood  of  the  magnetic  pole,  the  compasses  are  some- 
ti  les  disturbed,  and  the  deviation  of  their  needles  is  so  great  as 
entirely  to  mislead  travellers." 

"  All  right  then,"  said  Marbre,  "  we  have  only  to  go  on  keeping 
our  backs  to  the  sun." 

"  Certainly,"  replied  Lieutenant  Hobson,  *'  there  can  be  no 
hesitation  which  to  choose,  the  sun  or  our  compass,  nothing  disturbs 
the  sun." 

The  march  was  resumed,  the  sun  was  still  behind  them,  and 
there  was  really  no  objection  to  be  made  to  Hobson's  theory, 
founded,  as  it  was,  upon  the  position  then  occupied  by  the  radiant 
orb  of  day. 

The  little  troop  marched  on,  but  they  did  not  get  out  of  the 
valley  as  soon  as  they  expected.  Hobson  had  counted  on  leaving 
the  ice-wall  before  noon,  and  it  was  past  two  when  they  reached 
the  opening  of  the  narrow  pass. 

Strange  as  was  this  delay,  it  had  not  made  any  one  uneasy,  and 
the  astonishment  of  all  can  readily  be  imagined  when,  on  stepping 
on  to  the  ice  field,  at  the  base  of  the  chain  of  icebergs,  no  sign  wa.s 


A  LAST  EXPLORING  EXPEDITION.  28 1 

to  be  seen  of  Victoria  Island,  which  ought  to  have  been  opposite  to 
them. 

Yes ! — The  island,  which  on  this  side  had  been  such  a 
conspicuous  object,  owing  to  the  height  of  Cape  Michael  crowned 
with  trees,  had  disappeared.  In  its  place  stretched  a  vast  ice-field 
lit  up  by  the  sunbeams. 

All  looked  around  them,  and  then  at  each  other  in  amazement. 

"  The  island  ought  to  be  there  !  "  cried  Sabine. 

"  But  it  is  not  there,"  said  Marbre.  "  Oh,  sir — Lieutenant — where 
is  it  %  what  has  become  of  it  '\ " 

But  Hobson  had  not  a  word  to  say  in  reply,  and  Mrs  Barnett 
was  equally  dumfounded. 

Kalumah  now  approached  Lieutenant  Hobson,  and  touching  his 
arm,  she  said — 

"  We  went  wrong  in  the  valley,  we  went  up  it  instead  of  down 
it,  we  shall  only  get  back  to  where  we  were  yesterday  by  crossing 
the  chain  of  icebergs.     Come,  come  ! " 

Hobson  and  the  others  mechanically  followed  Kalumah,  and  trust- 
ing in  the  young  native's  sagacity,  retraced  their  steps.  Appear- 
ances were,  however,  certainly  against  her,  for  they  were  now  walking 
towards  the  sun  in  an  easterly  direction. 

Kalumah  did  not  explain  her  motives,  but  muttered  as  she  went 
along — 

*'  Let  us  make  haste  ! " 

All  were  quite  exhausted,  and  could  scarcely  get  along,  when 
they  found  themselves  on  the  other  side  of  the  ice-wall,  after  a  walk* 
of  three  hours.  The  night  had  now  fallen,  and  it  was  too  dark  to 
see  if  the  island  was  there,  but  they  were  not  long  left  in  doubt. 

At  about  a  hundred  paces  off,  burning  torches  were  moving  about, 
whilst  reports  of  guns  and  shouts  were  heard. 

The  explorers  replied,  and  were  soon  joined  by  Sergeant  Long  and 
others,  amongst  them  Thomas  Black,  whose  anxiety  as  to  the  fate  of 
his  friends  had  at  last  roused  him  from  his  torpor.  The  poor 
fellows  left  on  the  island  had  been  in  a  terrible  state  of  uneasiness, 
thinking  that  Hobson  and  his  party  had  lost  their  way.  They 
were  right,  but  what  was  it  that  had  made  them  think  so  % 

Twenty-four  hours  before,  the  immense  ice-field  and  the  island 
had  turned  half  round,  and  in  consequence  of  this  displacement 
they  were  no  longer  on  the  west,  but  on  the  east  of  the  ice-wall ! 


CHAPTER  XVL 

THE  BREAK-UP  OF  THE  ICE. 

.yJ^O  hours  later  all  had  returned  to  Fort  Hope,  and  the  next 
^*g  day  the  sun  for  the  first  time  shone  upon  that  part  of  the 
coast  which  was  formerly  on  the  west  of  the  island. 
Kalumah,  to  whom  this  phenomenon  was  familiar,  had  been  right, 
and  if  the  sun  had  not  been  the  guilty  party  neither  had  the 
compass  I 

The  position  of  Victoria  Island  with  regard  to  the  cardinal 
points  was  again  completely  changed.  Since  it  had  broken  loose 
from  the  mainland  the  island — and  not  only  the  island,  but  the  vast 
ice-field  in  which  it  was  enclosed — had  turned  half  round.  This 
displacement  proved  that  the  ice-field  was  not  connected  with  the 
continent,  and  that  the  thaw  would  soon  set  in. 

"  Well,  Lieutenant,"  said  Mrs  Barnett,  "  this  change  of  front  is 
certainly  in  our  favour.  Cape  Bathurst  and  Fort  Hope  are  now 
turned  towards  the  north-east,  in  other  words  towards  the  point 
nearest  to  the  continent,  and  the  ice- wall,  through  which  our  boat 
could  only  have  made  its  way  by  a  difficult  and  dangerous  passage, 
is  no  longer  between  us  and  America.  And  so  all  is  for  the  best,  is 
it  not  ? "  added  Mrs  Barnett  with  a  smile. 

"  Indeed  it  is,"  replied  Hobson,  who  fully  realised  all  that  was 
involved  in  this  change  of  the  position  of  Victoria  Island. 

No  incident  occurred  between  the  10th  and  21st  March,  but 
there  were  indications  of  the  approaching  change  of  season.  The 
temperature  varied  from  43°  to  50°  Fahrenheit,  and  it  appeared 
likely  that  the  breaking  up  of  the  ice  would  commence  suddenly. 
Fresh  crevasses  opened,  and  the  unfrozen  water  flooded  the  surface 
of  the  ice.  As  the  whalers  poetically  express  it,  the  "  wounds  of 
the  ice-field  bled  copiously,"  and  the  opening  of  these  "wounds" 
was  accompanied  by  a  sound  like  the  roar  of  artillery.  A  warm 
rain  fell  for  several  hours,  and  accelerated  the  dissolution  of  the 
solid  coating  of  the  ocean. 


THE  BREAK-UP  OF  THE  ICE,  283 

The  birds,  ptarmigans,  puffins,  ducks,  &c.,  which  had  deserted 
the  island  in  the  beginning  of  the  winter,  now  returned  in  large 
numbers.  Marbre  and  Sabine  killed  a  few  of  them,  and  on  some 
were  found  the  tickets  tied  round  their  necks  by  the  Lieutenant 
several  months  before.  Flocks  of  white  trumpeter  swans  also 
reappeared,  and  filled  the  air  with  their  loud  clarion  tones ;  whilst 
the  quadrupeds,  rodents,  and  camivora  alike  continued  to  frequent 
the  vicinity  of  the  fort  like  tame  domestic  animals. 

Whenever  the  state  of  the  sky  permitted,  which  was  almost  every 
day,  Hobson  took  the  altitude  of  the  sun.  Sometimes  Mrs  Barnett, 
who  had  become  quite  expert  in  handling  the  sextant,  assisted  him, 
or  took  the  observation  in  his  stead.  It  was  :.ow  most  important 
to  note  the  very  slightest  changes  in  the  latitude  and  longitude  of 
the  island.  It  was  still  doubtful  to  which  current  it  would  be 
subject  after  the  thaw,  and  the  question  whether  it  would  be  drifted 
northi  or  south  was  the  chief  subject  of  the  discussions  between  the 
Lieutenslnt  and  Mrs  Barnett. 

The  brave  lady  had  always  given  proof  of  an  energy  superior  to 
that  of  most  of  her  sex,  and  now  she  was  to  be  seen  every  day 
braving  fatigue,  and  venturing  on  to  the  half  decomposed,  or 
*'  pancake "  ice,  in  all  weathers,  through  snow  or  rain,  and  on  her 
return  to  the  factory  ready  to  cheer  and  help  everybody,  and  to 
superintend  all  that  was  goiwg  on.  We  must  add  that  her  efforts 
were  ably  seconded  by  the  faithful  Madge. 

Mrs  Barnett  had  compelled  herself  to  look  the  future  firmly  in 
the  face,  and  although  she  could  not  fail  to  fear  for  the  safety  of  all, 
and  sad  presentiments  haunted  her,  she  never  allowed  herself  to 
betray  any  uneasiness.  Her  courage  and  confidence  never  seemed 
to  waver,  she  was  as  ever  the  kind  encouraging  friend  of  each  and 
all,  and  none  could  have  dreamt  of  the  conflict  of  spirit  going  on 
beneath  her  quiet  exterior  demeanour.  Lieutenant  Hobson's 
admiration  of  her  character  was  unbounded,  and  he  had  also  entire 
confidence  in  Kalumah,  often  trusting  to  her  natural  instinct  as 
implicitly  as  a  hunter  to  that  of  his  dog. 

The  young  Esquimaux  was,  in  fact,  very  intelligent,  and  familiar 
from  babyhood  with  the  phenomena  of  the  Polar  regions.  On  board 
a  whaler  she  might  have  advantageously  replaced  many  an  ice- 
master  or  pilot,  whose  business  it  is  to  guide  a  boat  amongst  the 
ice. 

Every  day  Kalumah  went  to  examine  the  state  of  the  ice-field. 


284  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


The  nature  of  the  noise  produced  by  the  breaking  of  the  icebergs  in 
the  distance  was  enough  to  tell  her  how  far  the  decomposition  had 
advanced.  No  foot  was  surer  than  hers  upon  the  ice,  no  one  could 
spring  more  lightly  forwards  than  she  when  her  instinct  told  her 
that  the  smooth  surface  was  rotten  underneath,  and  she  would  scud 
across  an  ice-field  riddled  with  fissures  without  a  moment's  hesita- 
tion. 

From  the  20th  to  the  30th  March,  the  thaw  made  rapid  progress. 
Rain  fell  abundantly  and  accelerated  the  dissolution  of  the  ice.  It 
was  to  be  hoped  that  the  ice-field  would  soon  open  right  across,  and 
that  in  about  fifteen  days  Hobson  would  be  able  to  steer  his  boat  into 
the  open  sea.  He  was  determined  to  lose  no  time,  as  he  did  not 
know  but  that  the  Kamtchatka  Current  might  sweep  the  island  to 
the  north  before  it  could  come  under  the  influence  of  the  Behring 
Current. 

"  But,"  Kalumah  repeated  again  and  again,  "  there  is  no  fear  of 
that,  the  breaking  up  of  the  ice  does  not  proceed  upwards  but 
downwards.  The  danger  is  there ! "  she  added,  pointing  to  the 
south  in  the  direction  of  the  vast  Pacific  Ocean. 

The  young  girl's  confidence  on  this  point  reassured  Hobson,  for 
he  had  no  reason  now  to  dread  the  falling  to  pieces  of  the  island  in 
the  warm  waters  of  the  Pacific.  He  meant  everybody  to  be  on 
board  the  boat  before  that  could  happen,  and  they  would  not 
have  far  to  go  to  get  to  one  or  the  other  continent,  as  the  strait  is 
in  reality  a  kind  of  funnel  through  which  the  waters  flow  between 
Cape  East  on  the  Asiatic  side  and  Cape  Prince  of  "Wales  on  the 
American. 

This  will  explain  the  eager  attention  with  which  the  slightest 
change  in  the  position  of  the  island  was  noticed.  The  bearings 
were  taken  every  day,  and  everything  was  prepared  for  an  approach- 
ing and  perhaps  sudden  and  hurried  embarkation. 

Of  course  all  the  ordinary  avocations  of  the  factory  were  now 
discontinued.  There  was  no  hunting  or  setting  of  traps.  The 
magazines  were  alieady  piled  up  with  furs,  most  of  which  would  be 
lost.  The  hunters  and  trappers  had  literally  nothing  to  do ;  but 
Mac-Nab  and  his  men,  having  finished  their  boat,  employed  their 
leisure  time  in  strengthening  the  principal  house  of  the  fort,  which 
would  probably  be  subjected  to  considerable  pressure  from  the 
accumulation  of  ice  on  the  coast  during  the  further  progress  of  the 
thaw,  unless  indeed  Cape  Bathurst  should  prove  a  sufficient  protec- 


It  is  a  frost -rime ."  —  Page  288. 


THE  BREAK-UP  OF  THE  ICE.  285 

tion.  Strong  struts  were  fixed  against  the  outside  walls,  vertical 
props  were  placed  inside  the  rooms  to  afford  additional  support  to 
the  beams  of  the  ceiling,  and  the  roof  was  strengthened  so  that  it 
could  bear  a  considerable  weight.  These  various  works  were  com- 
pleted early  in  April,  and  their  utility,  or  rather  their  vital  import- 
ance, was  very  soon  manifested. 

Each  day  brought  fresh  symptoms  of  returning  spring,  which 
seemed  likely  to  set  in  early  after  this  strangely  mild  Polar  winter. 
A  few  tender  shoots  appeared  upon  the  trees,  and  the  newly-thawed 
sap  swelled  the  bark  of  beeches,  willows,  and  arbutus.  Tiny  mosses 
tinged  with  pale  green  the  slopes  under  the  direct  influence  of  the 
sunbeams  ]  but  they  were  not  likely  to  spread  much,  as  the  greedy 
rodents  collected  about  the  fort  pounced  upon  and  devoured  them 
almost  before  they  were  above  the  ground. 

Great  were  the  sufferings  of  Corporal  Joliffe  at  this  time.  We 
know  that  he  had  undertaken  to  protect  the  plot  of  ground  culti- 
vated by  his  wife.  Under  ordinary  circumstances  he  would  merely 
have  had  to  drive  away  feathered  pilferers,  such  as  guillemots  or 
puffins,  from  his  sorrel  and  scurvy-grass.  A  scarecrow  would  have 
been  enough  to  get  rid  of  them,  still  more  the  Corporal  in  person. 
But  now  all  the  rodents  and  ruminants  of  the  Arctic  fauna  con- 
bined  to  lay  siege  to  his  territory  ;  reindeer,  Polar  hares,  musk-rats, 
shrews,  martens,  »fec.,  braved  all  the  threatening  gestures  of  the  Cor- 
poral, and  the  poor  man  was  in  despair,  for  whilst  he  was  defending 
one  end  of  his  field  the  enemy  was  preying  upon  the  other. 

It  would  certainly  have  been  wiser  to  let  the  poor  creatures  enjoy 
unmolested  the  crops  which  could  be  of  no  use  to  the  colonists,  as 
the  fort  was  to  be  so  soon  abandoned,  and  Mrs  Barnett  tried  to  per- 
suade the  angry  Corporal  to  do  so,  when  he  came  to  her  twenty 
times  a  day  with  the  same  wearisome  tale,  but  he  would  not  listen 
to  her : 

"  To  lose  the  fruit  of  all  our  trouble  ! "  he  repeated;  "  to  leave  an 
establishment  which  was  prospering  so  well !  To  give  up  the  plants 
Mrs  Joliffe  and  I  sowed  so  carefully  !  .  .  .  O  madam,  sometimes 
I  feel  disposed  to  let  you  all  go,  and  stay  here  with  my  wife  !  I 
am  sure  the  Company  would  give  up  all  claim  on  the  island  to 
us" 

Mrs  Barnett  could  not  help  laughing  at  this  absurd  speech,  and 
sent  the  Corporal  to  his  little  wife,  who  had  long  ago  resigned  herself 
to  the  loss  of  her  sorrel,  scurvy-grass,  and  other  medicinal  herbs. 


286  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

We  must  here  remark,  that  the  health  of  all  the  colonists  remained 
eood,  they  had  at  least  escaped  illness  ;  the  baby,  too,  was  now  quite 
well  again,  and  throve  admirably  in  the  mild  weather  of  the  early 
spring. 

The  thaw  continued  to  proceed  rapidly  from  the  2nd  to  the  6th 
April.  The  weather  was  warm  but  cloudy,  and  rain  fell  frequently 
in  large  drops.  The  wind  blew  from  the  south-west,  and  was  laden 
with  the  heated  dust  of  the  continent.  Unfortunately  the  sky  was 
80  hazy,  that  it  was  quite  impossible  to  take  observations,  neither 
sun,  moon,  nor  stars  could  be  seen  through  the  heavy  mists,  and 
this  was  the  more  provoking,  as  it  was  of  the  greatest  importance  to 
note  the  slightest  movements  of  the  island. 

It  was  on  the  night  of  the  7th  April  that  the  actual  breaking  up 
of  the  ice  commenced.  In  the  morning  the  Lieutenant,  Mrs  Bar- 
nett,  Kalumah,  and  Sergeant  Long,  had  climbed  to  the  summit  of 
Gape  Bathurst,  and  saw  that  a  great  change  had  taken  place  in  the 
chain  of  icebergs.  The  huge  barrier  had  parted  nearly  in  the 
middle,  and  now  formed  two  separate  masses,  the  larger  of  which 
seemed  to  be  moving  northwards. 

Was  it  the  Kamtchatka  Current  which  produced  this  motion  ? 
Would  the  floating  island  take  the  same  direction  ?  The  intense 
anxiety  of  the  Lieutenant  and  his  companions  can  easily  be 
imagined.  Their  fate  might  now  be  decided  in  a  few  hours,  and  if 
they  should  be  drifted  some  hundred  miles  to  the  north,  it  would 
be  very  difficult  to  reach  the  continent  in  a  vessel  so  small  as 
theirs. 

Unfortunately  it  was  impossible  to  ascertain  the  nature  or  extent 
of  the  displacement  which  was  going  on.  One  thing  was,  however, 
evident,  the  island  was  not  yet  moving,  at  least  not  in  the  same 
direction  as  the  ice-wall.  It  therefore  seemed  probable  that 
whilst  part  of  the  ice-field  was  floating  to  the  north,  that  portion 
immediately  surrounding  the  island  still  remained  stationary. 

This  displacement  of  the  icebergs  did  not  in  the  least  alter  the 
opinion  of  the  young  Esquimaux.  Kalumah  still  maintained  that 
the  thaw  would  proceed  from  north  to  south,  and  that  the  ice- wall 
would  shortly  feel  the  influence  of  the  Behring  Current.  To  make 
herself  more  easily  understood,  she  traced  the  direction  of  the 
current  on  the  sand  with  a  little  piece  of  wood,  and  made  signs 
that  in  following  it  the  island  must  approach  the  American  con- 
tinent.    No  argument  could  shake  her  conviction  on  this  point,  and 


THE  BREAK-UP  OF  THE  ICE,  28/ 

it  was  almost  impossible  not  to  feel  reassured  when  listening  to  the 
confident  expressions  of  the  intelligent  native  girl. 

The  events  of  the  8th,  9th,  and  10th  April,  seemed,  however,  to 
prove  Kalumah  to  be  in  the  wrong.  The  northern  portion  of  the  chain 
of  icebergs  drifted  farther  and  farther  north.  The  breaking  up  of 
the  ice  proceeded  rapidly  and  with  a  great  noise,  and  the  ice-field 
opened  all  round  the  island  with  a  deafening  crash.  Out  of  doors 
it  was  impossible  to  hear  one's  self  speak,  a  ceaseless  roar  like  that 
of  artillery  drowned  every  other  sound. 

About  half  a  mile  from  the  coast  on  that  part  of  the  island  over- 
looked by  Cape  Bathurst,  the  blocks  of  ice  were  already  beginning 
to  crowd  together,  and  to  pile  themselves  upon  each  other.  The 
ice- wall  had  broken  up  into  numerous  separate  icebergs,  which  were 
drifting  towards  the  north.  At  least  it  seemed  as  if  they  were  mov- 
ing in  that  direction.  Hobson  became  more  and  more  uneasy,  and 
nothing  that  Kalumah  could  say  reassured  him.  He  replied  by 
counter-arguments,  which  could  not  shake  her  faith  in  her  own 
belief. 

At  last,  on  the  morning  of  the  1 1th  April,  Hobson  showed  Kalumah 
the  last  icebergs  disappearing  in  the  north,  and  again  endeavoured 
to  prove  to  her  that  facts  were  against  her. 

*'No,  no  !"  replied  Kalumah,  with  an  air  of  greater  conviction 
than  ever,  "  no,  the  icebergs  are  not  going  to  the  north,  but  our 
island  is  going  to  the  south  !  " 

She  might  perhaps  be  right  after  all,  and  Hobson  was  much 
struck  by  this  last  reply.  It  was  really  possible  that  the  motion  of 
the  icebergs  towards  the  north  was  only  apparent,  and  that  Victoria 
Island,  dragged  along  with  the  ice-field,  was  drifting  towards  the 
strait.  But  it  was  impossible  to  ascertain  whether  this  were  really 
the  case,  as  neither  the  latitude  nor  longitude  could  be  taken. 

The  situation  was  aggravated  by  a  phenomenon  peculiar  to  the 
Polar  regions,  which  rendered  it  still  darker  and  more  impossible  to 
take  observations  of  any  kind. 

At  the  very  time  of  the  breaking  up  of  the  ice,  the  tempera- 
ture fell  several  degrees.  A  dense  mist  presently  enveloped  the 
Arctic  latitudes,  but  not  an  ordinary  mist.  The  soil  was  covered 
with  a  white  crust,  totally  distinct  from  hoar-frost — it  was,  in  fact, 
a  watery  vapour  which  congeals  on  its  precipitation.  The  minute 
particles  of  which  this  mist  was  composed  formed  a  thick  layer  on 
trees,  shrubs,   the  walls  of  the  fort,  and  any  projecting  surfaces 


288  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


which  bristled  with  pyramidal  or  prismatic  crystals,  the  apexes  of 
which  pointed  to  the  wind. 

Hobson  at  once  understood  the  nature  of  this  atmospheric 
phenomenon,  which  whalers  and  explorers  have  often  noticed  in 
the  spring  in  the  Polar  regions. 

"It  is  not  a  mist  or  fog,"  he  said  to  his  companions,  "it  is  a  'frost- 
rime,'  a  dense  vapour  which  remains  in  a  state  of  complete  con- 
gelation." 

But  whether  a  fog  or  a  frozen  mist  this  phenomenon  was  none 
the  less  to  be  regretted,  for  it  rose  a  hundred  feet  at  least  above  the 
level  of  the  sea,  and  it  was  so  opaque  that  the  colonists  could  not 
see  each  other  when  only  two  or  three  paces  apart. 

Every  one's  disappointment  was  very  great.  Nature  really  seemed 
determined  to  try  them  to  the  uttermost.  When  the  break  up  of 
the  ice  had  come  at  last,  when  the  wandering  island  was  to  leave 
the  spot  in  which  it  had  so  long  been  imprisoned,  and  its  movements 
ought  to  be  watched  with  the  greatest  care,  this  fog  prevented  all 
observations. 

This  state  of  things  continued  for  four  days.  The  frost-rime  did 
not  disappear  until  the  15th  April,  but  on  the  morning  of  that  date 
a  strong  wind  from  the  south  rent  it  open  and  dispersed  it. 

The  sun  shone  brightly  once  more,  and  Hobson  eagerly  seized 
his  instruments.  He  took  the  altitude,  and  found  that  the  exact 
position  of  Victoria  Island  was  then  :  Latitude,  69°  57' ;  longitude, 
179°  33'. 

Kalumah  was  right,  Victoria  Island,  in  the  grasp  of  the  Behring 
Current,  was  drifting  towards  the  south. 


" He  took  the  altitude"  —  Page  288. 


CHivPTER  XVIT. 

THE     A  VALANCHE, 

colonists  were  then  at  last  approaching  the  more 
frequented  latitudes  of  Behring  Sea.  There  was  no  longer 
any  danger  that  they  would  be  drifted  to  the  north,  and 
all  they  had  to  do  was  to  watch  the  displacement  of  the  island,  and 
to  estimate  the  speed  of  its  motion,  which  would  probably  be  very 
unequal,  on  account  of  the  obstacles  in  its  path.  Hobson  most 
carefully  noted  every  incident,  taking  alternately  solar  and  stellar 
altitudes,  and  the  next  day,  April  16th,  after  ascertaining  the 
bearings,  he  calculated  that  if  its  present  speed  were  maintained, 
Victoria  Island  would  reach  the  Arctic  Circle,  from  which  it  was  now 
separated  at  the  most  by  four  degrees  of  latitude,  towards  the 
beginning  of  May. 

It  was  probable  that,  when  the  island  reached  the  narrowest 
portion  of  the  strait,  it  would  remain  stationary  until  the  thaw  broke 
it  up,  the  boat  would  then  be  launched,  and  the  colonists  would 
set  sail  for  the  American  continent. 

Everything  was  ready  for  an  immediate  embarkation,  and  the 
inhabitants  of  the  island  waited  with  greater  patience  and  confidence 
than  ever.  They  felt,  poor  things,  that  the  end  of  their  trials  was 
surely  near  at  last,  and  that  nothing  could  prevent  their  landing  on 
one  side  or  the  other  of  the  strait  in  a  few  days. 

This  prospect  cheered  them  up  wonderfully,  and  the  gaiety 
natural  to  them  all,  which  they  had  lost  in  the  terrible  anxiety 
they  had  so  long  endured,  was  restored.  The  common  meals  were 
quite  festal,  as  there  was  no  need  for  economising  the  stores  under 
present  circumstances.  The  influence  of  the  spring  became  more 
and  more  sensibly  felt,  and  every  one  enjoyed  the  balmy  air,  and 
breathed  more  freely  tlian  before. 

During  the  next  few  days,  several  excursions  were  made  to  the 
interior  of  the  island  and  along  the  coast.  Everywhere  the  furred 
nnimals,  &c.,  still  abounded,  for  even  now  they  could  not  cross  to 

T 


290  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


the  continent,  the  connection  between  it  and  the  ice-field  being 
broken,  and  their  continued  presence  was  a  fresh  proof  that  the 
island  was  no  longer  stationary. 

No  change  had  taken  place  on  the  island  at  Cape  Esquimaux, 
Cape  Michael,  along  the  coast,  or  on  the  wooded  heights  of  the 
interior,  and  the  banks  of  the  lagoon.  The  large  gulf  which  had 
opened  near  Cape  Michael  during  the  storm  had  closed  in  the 
winter,  and  there  was  no  other  fissure  on  the  surface  of  the 
soil. 

During  these  excursions,  bands  of  wolves  were  seen  scudding 
across  parts  of  the  island.  Of  all  the  animals  these  fierce  carni- 
vorous beasts  were  the  only  ones  which  the  feeling  of  a  common 
danger  had  not  tamed. 

Kalumah's  preserver  was  seen  several  times.  This  worthy  bear 
paced  to  and  fro  on  the  deserted  plains  in  melancholy  mood,  pausing 
in  his  walk  as  the  explorers  passed,  and  sometimes  following  them 
to  the  fort,  knowing  well  that  he  had  nothing  to  fear  from  them. 

On  the  20th  April  Lieutenant  Hobson  ascertained  that  the 
wandering  island  was  still  drifting  to  the  south.  All  that  remained 
of  the  ice-wall,  that  is  to  say,  the  southern  portion  of  the  icebergs, 
followed  it,  but  as  there  were  no  bench  marks,  the  changes  of  position 
could  only  be  estimated  by  astronomical  observations. 

Hobson  took  several  soundings  in  different  parts  of  the  ground, 
especially  at  the  foot  of  Cape  Bathurst,  and  on  the  shores  of  the 
lagoon.  He  was  anxious  to  ascertain  the  thickness  of  the  layer 
of  ice  supporting  the  earth  and  sand,  and  found  that  it  had 
not  increased  during  the  winter,  and  that  the  general  level  of  the 
island  did  not  appear  to  have  risen  higher  above  that  of  the  sea. 
The  conclusion  he  drew  from  these  facts  was,  that  no  time  should 
be  lost  in  getting  away  from  the  fragile  island,  which  would  rapidly 
break  up  and  dissolve  in  the  warmer  waters  of  the  Pacific. 

About  the  25th  April  the  bearing  of  the  island  was  again  changed, 
the  whole  ice-field  had  moved  round  from  east  to  west  twelve 
points,  so  that  Cape  Bathurst  pointed  to  the  north-west.  The  last 
remains  of  the  ice-wall  now  shut  in  the  northern  horizon,  so  that 
there  could  be  no  doubt  that  the  ice-field  was  moving  freely  in  the 
strait,  and  that  it  nowhere  touched  any  land. 

The  fatal  moment  was  approaching.  Diurnal  or  nocturnal 
observations  gave  the  exact  position  of  the  island,  and  consequently 
of  the  ice-field.     On  the  30th  of  April,  both  were  together  drifting 


THE  AVALANCHE,  2QI 


across  Kotzebue  Sound,  a  large  triangular  gulf  running  some 
distance  inland  on  the  American  coast,  and  bounded  on  the  south 
by  Cape  Prince  of  Wales,  which  might,  perhaps,  arrest  the  course  of 
the  island  if  it  should  deviate  in  the  very  least  from  the  middle  of 
the  narrow  pass. 

The  weather  was  now  pretty  fine,  and  the  column  of  mercury 
often  marked  50°  Fahrenheit.  The  colonists  had  left  off  their 
winter  garments  some  weeks  before,  and  held  themselves  in 
constant  readiness  to  leave  the  island.  Thomas  Black  had  already 
transported  his  instruments  and  books  into  the  boat,  which  was 
waiting  on  the  beach.  A  good  many  provisions  had  also  been 
embarked  and  some  of  the  most  valuable  furs. 

On  the  2d  of  May  a  very  carefully  taken  observation  showed 
that  Victoria  Island  had  a  tendency  to  drift  towards  the  east,  and 
consequently  to  reach  the  American  continent.  This  was  fortunate, 
as  they  were  now  out  of  danger  of  being  taken  any  farther  by  the 
Kamtchatka  Current,  which,  as  is  well  known,  runs  along  the  coast 
of  Asia.     At  last  the  tide  was  turning  in  favour  of  the  colonists  ! 

"I  think  our  bad  fortune  is  at  last  at  an  end,"  observed 
Sergeant  Long  to  Mrs  Barnetf,  "and  that  our  misfortunes  are 
really  over ;  I  don't  suppose  there  are  any  more  dangers  to  be 
feared  now." 

"  I  quite  agree  with  you,"  replied  Mrs  Barnett,  "  and  it  is  very 
fortunate  that  we  had  to  give  up  our  journey  across  the  ice-field  a 
few  months  ago ;  we  ought  to  be  very  thankful  that  it  was  impas- 
sible!" 

Mrs  Barnett  was  certainly  justified  in  speaking  as  she  did,  for 
what  fearful  fatigues  and  sufferings  they  would  all  have  had  to 
undergo  in  crossing  five  hundred  miles  of  ice  in  the  darkness  of  the 
Polar  night ! 

On  the  5th  May,  Hobson  announced  that  Victoria  Island  had 
just  crossed  the  Arctic  Circle.  It  had  at  last  re-entered  that  zone  of 
the  terrestrial  sphere  in  which  at  one  period  of  the  year  the  sun 
does  not  set.  The  poor  people  all  felt  that  they  were  returning  to 
the  inhabited  globe. 

The  event  of  crossing  the  Arctic  Circle  was  celebrated  in  much 
the  same  way  as  crossing  the  Equator  for  the  first  time  would  be 
on  board  ship,  and  many  a  glass  of  spirits  was  drank  in  honour 
of  the  eve  nt. 

There  was  now  nothing  left  to  do  but  to  wait  till  the  broken  and 


292  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


half-melted  ice  should  allow  of  the  passage  of  the  boat,  which  was 
to  bear  the  whole  colony  to  the  land. 

During  the  7th  May  the  island  turned  round  to  the  extent  of 
another  quarter  of  its  circumference.  Cape  Bathurst  now  pointed 
due  north,  and  those  masses  of  the  old  chain  of  icebergs  which  still 
remained  standing  were  now  above  it,  so  that  it  occupied  much  the 
same  position  as  that  assigned  to  it  in  maps  when  it  was  united  to 
the  American  continent.  The  island  liad  gradually  turned  com- 
pletely round,  and  the  sun  had  risen  successively  on  every  point  of 
its  shores. 

The  observations  of  the  8th  May  showed  that  the  island  had 
become  stationary  near  the  middle  of  the  passage,  at  least  forty 
miles  from  Cape  Prince  of  Wales,  so  that  land  was  now  at  a  com- 
paratively short  distance  from  it,  and  the  safety  of  all  seemed  to  be 
secured. 

In  the  evening  a  good  supper  was  served  in  the  large  room, 
and  the  healths  of  Mrs  Barnett  and  of  Lieutenant  Hobson  were 
proposed. 

The  same  night  the  Lieutenant  determined  to  go  and  see  if  any 
changes  had  taken  place  in  the  ice-field  on  the  south,  hoping  that  a 
practicable  passage  might  have  been  opened. 

Mrs  Barnett  was  anxious  to  accompany  him,  but  he  persuaded 
her  to  rest  a  little  instead,  and  started  off,  accompanied  only  by 
Sergeant  Long. 

Mrs  Barnett,  Madge,  and  Kiilumah  returned  to  the  principal  house 
after  seeing  them  off,  and  the  soldiers  and  women  had  already  gone 
to  bed  in  the  different  apartments  assigned  to  them. 

It  was  a  fine  night,  there  was  no  moon,  but  the  stars  shone  very 
brightly,  and  as  the  ice-field  vividly  reflected  their  light,  it  was 
possible  to  see  for  a  considerable  distance. 

It  was  nine  o'clock  when  the^  two  explorers  left  the  fort  and 
turned  towards  that  part  of  the  coast  between  Port  Barnett  and 
Cape  Michael.  They  followed  the  beach  for  about  two  miles,  and 
found  the  ice-field  in  a  state  of  positive  chaos.  The  sea  was  one 
vast  aggregation  of  crystals  of  every  size,  it  looked  as  if  it  had 
been  petrified  suddenly  when  tossing  in  a  tempest,  and,  alas,  there 
was  even  now  no  free  passage  between  the  ice-masses — it  would  be 
impossible  for  a  boat  to  pass  yet. 

Hobson  and  Long  remained  on  the  ice-field  talking  and  looking 
about  them  until  midnight,  and  then  seeing  that  there  was   still 


When  an  unexpected  noise,"  ^c.  —  Page  293. 


THE  A  VALANCHE.    ^  293 

nothing  to  do  but  to  wait,  they  decided  to  go  back  to  Fort  Hope 
and  rest  for  a  few  hours. 

They  had  gone  some  hundred  paces,  and  had  reached  the  dried- 
up  bed  of  Paulina  River,  when  an  unexpected  noise  arrested  them. 
It  was  a  distant  rumbling  from  the  northern  part  of  the  ice-field, 
and  it  became  louder  and  louder  until  it  was  almost  deafening. 
Something  dreadful  was  going  on  in  the  quarter  from  which  it  came, 
and  Hobson  fancied  he  felt  the  ice  beneath  his  feet  trembling,  which 
was  certainly  far  from  reassuring. 

"  The  noise  comes  from  the  ch3,in  of  icebergs,"  exclaimed  Long, 
"  what  can  be  going  on  there  ? " 

Hobson  did  not  answer,  but  feeling  dreadfully  anxious  he  rushed 
towards  the  fort  dragging  his  companion  after  him: 

*'  To  the  fort !  to  the  fort,"  he  cried  at  last,  "the  ice  may  have 
opened,  we  may  be  able  to  launch  our  boat  on  the  sea  ! " 

And  the  two  ran  as  fast  as  ever  they  could  towards  Fort  Hope  by 
the  shortest  way. 

A  thousand  conjectures  crowded  upon  them.  From  what  new 
phenomenon  did  the  unexpected  noise  proceed  %  Did  the  sleeping 
inhabitants  of  the  fort  know  what  was  going  on  %  They  must  cer- 
tainly have  heard  the  noise,  for,  in  vulgar  language,  it  was  loud 
enough  to  wake  the  dead. 

Hobson  and  Long  crossed  the  two  miles  between  them  and  Fort 
Hope  in  twenty  minutes,  but  before  they  reached  the  enceinte  they 
saw  the  men  and  women  they  had  left  asleep  hurrying  away  in 
terrified  disorder,  uttering  cries  of  despair. 

The  carpenter  Mac-Nab,  seeing  the  Lieutenant,  ran  towards  him 
with  his  little  boy  in  his  arms. 

"  Look,  sir,  look  !  "  he  cried,  drawing  his  master  towards  a  little 
hill  which  rose  a  few  yards  behind  the  fort. 

Hobson  obeyed,  and  saw  that  part  of  the  ice-wall,  which,  when  he 
left,  was  two  or  three  miles  off  in  the  offing,  had  fallen  upon  the  coast 
of  the  island.  Cape  Bathurst  no  longer  existed,  the  mass  of  earth  and 
sand  of  which  it  was  composed  had  been  swept  away  by  the  icebergs 
and  scattered  over  the  palisades.  The  principal  house  and  all  the 
buildings  connected  with  it  on  the  north  were  buried  beneath  the 
avalanche.  Masses  of  ice  were  crowding  upon  each  other  and 
tumbling  over  with  an  awful  crash,  crushing  everything  beneath 
them.  It  was  like  an  army  of  icebergs  taking  possession  of  the 
island. 


294  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


The  boat  which  had  been  built  at  the  foot  of  the  cape  was 
completely  destroyed.  The  last  hope  of  the  unfortunate  colonists 
was  gone  ! 

As  they  stood  watching  the  awful  scene,  the  buildings,  formerly 
occupied  by  the  soldiers  and  women,  and  from  which  they  had 
escaped  in  time,  gave  way  beneath  an  immense  block  of  ice  which 
fell  upon  tliem.  A  cry  of  despair  burst  from  the  lips  of  the  house- 
less outcasts. 

"And  the  others,  where  are  they?"  cried  the  Lieutenant  in 
heart-rending  tones. 

"There  !  "  replied  Mac-Nab,  pointing  to  the  heap  of  sand,  earth, 
and  ice,  beneath  which  the  principal  house  had  entirely  disappeared. 

Yes,  the  illustrious  lady  traveller,  Madge,  Kalumah,  and  Thomas 
Black,  were  buried  beneath  the  avalanche  which  had  surprised  them 
in  their  sleep  I 


"  It  was  like  an  army  of  icebergs.''  —  Page  293. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

ALL  AT    WORK. 

FEARFUL  catastrophe  bad  occurred.  The  icfe-wall  had 
been  flung  upon  the  wandering  island,  the  volume  below 
the  water  being  five  times  that  of  the  projecting  part,  it 
had  come  under  the  influence  of  the  submarine  currents,  and,  open- 
ing a  way  for  itself  between  the  broken  ice-masses,  it  had  fallen 
bodily  upon  Victoria  Island,  which,  driven  along  by  this  mighty 
propelling  force,  was  drifting  rapidly  to  the  south. 

Mac-Nab  and  his  companions,  aroused  by  the  noise  of  the  ava- 
lanche dashing  down  upon  the  dog-house,  stable,  and  principal  house^ 
had  been  able  to  escape  in  time,  but  now  the  work  of  destruction 
was  complete.  Not  a  trace  remained  of  the  buildings  in  which  they 
had  slept,  and  the  island  was  bearing  all  its  inhabitants  with  it  to 
the  unfathomable  depths  of  the  ocean  !  Perhaps,  however,  Mrs 
Barnett,  Madge,  Kalumah,  and  the  astronomer,  were  still  living ! 
Dead  or  alive  they  must  be  dug  out. 

At  this  thought  Hobson  recovered  his  composure  and  shouted — 

"  Get  shovels  and  pickaxes  !  The  house  is  strong  !  it  may  have 
held  together  !     Let  us  set  to  work  !  " 

There  were  plenty  of  tools  and  pickaxes,  but  it  was  really  impos- 
sible to  approach  the  enceinte.  The  masses  of  ice  were  rolling  down 
from  the  summits  of  the  icebergs,  and  some  parts  of  the  ice-wall 
still  towered  amongst  the  ruins  two  hundred  feet  above  the  island. 
The  force  with  which  the  tossing  masses,  which  seemed  to  be  surg- 
ing all  along  tlie  northern  horizon,  were  overthrown  can  be  imagined  ; 
the  whole  coast  between  the  former  Cape  Bathurst  and  Cape  Esqui- 
maux was  not  only  hemmed  in,  .but  literally  invaded  by  these 
moving  mountains,  which,  impelled  by  a  force  they  could  not  resist, 
had  already  advanced  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  inland. 

Every  moment  the  trembling  of  the  ground  and  a  loud  report 


296  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

gave  notice  that  another  of  these  masses  had  rolled  over,  and  there 
was  a  danger  that  the  island  would  sink  beneath  the  weight  thrown 
upon  it.  A  very  apparent  lowering  of  the  level  had  taken  place 
all  along  that  part  of  the  const  near  Cape  Bathurst,  it  was  evidently 
gradually  sinking  down,  and  the  sea  had  already  encroached  nearly 
as  far  as  the  lagoon. 

The  situation  of  the  colonists  was  truly  terrible,  unable  as  they 
were  to  attempt  to  save  their  companions,  and  driven  from  the 
enceinte  by  the  crashing  avalanches,  over  which  they  had  no  power 
whatever.  They  could  only  wait,  a  prey  to  the  most  awful  fore- 
bodings. 

Day  dawned  at  last,  and  how  fearful  a  scene  was  presented  by 
the  districts  around  Cape  Bathurst !  The  horizon  was  shut  in  on 
every  side  by  ice-masses,  but  their  advance  appeared  to  be  checked 
for  the  moment  at  least.  The  ruins  of  the  ice-wall  were  at  rest, 
and  it  was  only  now  and  then  that  a  few  blocks  rolled  down  from 
the  still  tottering  crests  of  the  remaining  icebergs.  But  the  whole 
mass — a  great  part  of  its  volume  being  sunk  beneath  the  surface 
of  the  sea — was  in  the  grasp  of  a  powerful  current,  and  was  driving 
the  island  along  with  it  to  the  south,  that  is  to  say,  to  the  ocean, 
in  the  depths  of  which  they  would  alike  be  engulfed. 

Those  who  were  thus  borne  along  upon  the  island  were  not  fully 
conscious  of  the  peril  in  which  they  stood.  They  had  their  comrades 
to  save,  and  amongst  them  the  brave  woman  who  had  so  won  all 
their  hearts,  and  for  whom  they  would  gladly  have  laid  down  their 
lives.  The  time  for  action  had  come,  they  could  again  approach  the 
palisades,  and  there  was  not  a  moment  to  lose,  as  the  poor  creatures 
had  already  been  buried  beneath  the  avalanche  for  six  hours. 

We  have  already  said  that  Cape  Bathurst  no  longer  existed. 
Struck  by  a  huge  iceberg  it  had  fallen  bodily  upon  the  factory, 
breaking  the  boat  and  crushing  the  dog-house  and  stable  with  the 
poor  creatures  in  them.  The  principal  house  next  disappeared 
-beneath  the  masses  of  earth  and  sand,  upon  which  rolled  blocks  of 
ice  to  a  height  of  fifty  or  sixty  feet.  The  court  of  the  fort  was  filled 
up,  of  the  palisade  not  a  post  was  to  be  seen,  and  it  was  from 
beneath  this  accumulation  of  earth,  sand,  and  ice,  that  the  victims 
w^re  to  be  dug  out. 

Before  beginning  to  work  Hobson  called  the  head  carpenter  to 
him,  a  d  asked  if  he  thought  the  house  could  bear  the  weight  of 
the  avalanche. 


ALL  AT  WORK.  297 


"  I  think  so,  sir,"  replied  Mac-Nab ;  "  in  fact,  I  may  almost  say  I 
am  sure  of  it.  You  remember  how  we  strengthened  it,  it  has  been 
*  casemated,'  and  the  vertical  beams  between  the  ceilings  and  floors 
must  have  offered  great  resistance  ;  moreover,  the  layer  of  earth  and 
sand  with  which  the  roof  was  first  covered  must  have  broken  the 
shock  of  the  fall  of  the  blocks  of  ice  from  the  icebergs." 

"  God  grant  you  may  be  right,  Mac-Nab,"  replied  Hobson,  "  and 
that  we  may  be  spared  the  great  grief  of  losing  our  friends  !  " 

The  Lieutenant  then  sent  for  Mrs  Joliffe,  and  asked  her  if  plenty 
of  provisions  had  been  left  in  the  house. 

"  Oh,  yes,"  replied  Mrs  Joliffe,  *'  there  was  plenty  to  eat  in  the 
pantry  and  kitchen." 

"  And  any  water  % " 

"  Yes,  water  and  rum  too." 

"  All  right,  then,"  said  Hobson,  "  they  will  not  be  starved — but 
how  about  air  1 " 

To  this  question  Mac-Nab  could  make  no  reply,  and  if,  as  he 
hoped,  the  house  had  not  given  way,  the  want  of  air  would  be  the 
chief  danger  of  the  four  victims.  By  prompt  measures,  however, 
they  might  yet  be  saved,  and  the  first  thing  to  be  done  was  to  open 
a  communication  with  the  outer  air. 

All  set  to  work  zealously,  men  and  women  alike  seizing  shovels 
and  pickaxes.  The  masses  of  ice,  sand,  and  earth,  were  vigorously 
attacked  at  the  risk  of  provoking  fresh  downfalls  ;  but  the  proceed- 
ings were  ably  directed  by  Mac-Nab. 

It  appeared  to  him  best  to  begin  at  the  top  of  the  accumulated 
masses,  so  as  to  roll  down  loose  blocks  on  the  side  of  the  lagoon. 
The  smaller  pieces  were  easily  dealt  with,  with  pick  and  crowbar,  but 
the  large  blocks  had  to  be  broken  up.  Some  of  great  size  were  melted 
with  the  aid  of  a  large  fire  of  resinous  wood,  and  every  means 
was  tried  to  destroy  or  get  rid  of  the  ice  in  the  shortest  possible 
time. 

But  so  great  was  the  accumulation,  that  although  all  worked 
without  pause,  except  when  they  snatched  a  little  food,  there  was  no 
sensible  diminution  in  its  amount  when  the  sun  disappeared  below 
the  horizon.  It  was  not,  however,  really  of  quite  so  great  a  height 
as  before,  and  it  was  determined  to  go  on  working  from  above  through 
the  night,  and  when  there  was  no  longer  any  danger  of  fresh  falls 
Mac-Nab  hoped  to  be  able  to  sink  a  vertical  shaft  in  the  compact 
mass,  so  as  to  admit  the  outer  air  to  the  house  as  soon  as  possible. 


.298  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


All  night  long  the  party  worked  at  the  excavation,  attacking  the 
masses  with  iron  and  heat,  as  the  one  or  the  other  seemed  more 
likely  to  be  effective.  The  men  wielded  the  pickaxe  whilst  the 
women  kept  up  the  fires  ;  but  all  were  animated  by  one  purpose — 
the  saving  of  the  lives  of  Mrs  Bamett,  Madge,  Kalumah,  and  the 
astronomer. 

When  morning  dawned  the  poor  creatures  had  been  buried  for 
thirty  hours  in  air  necessarily  very  impure  under  so  thick  a 
cover. 

The  progress  made  in  the  night  had  been  so  great  that  Mac-Nab 
prepared  to  sink  his  shaft,  which  he  meant  to  go  straight  down  to  the 
top  of  the  house  ;  and  which,  according  to  his  calculation,  would  not 
have  to  be  more  than  fifty  feet  deep.  It  would  be  easy  enough  to 
sink  this  shaft  through  the  twenty  feet  of  ice ;  but  great  difficulty 
would  be  experienced  when  the  earth  and  sand  were  reached,  as, 
being  very  brittle,  they  would  of  course  constantly  fill  in  the  shaft, 
and  its  sides  would  therefore  have  to  be  lined.  Long  pieces  of 
wood  were  prepared  for  this  purpose,  and  the  boring  proceeded. 
Only  three  men  could  work  at  it  together,  and  the  soldiers  relieved 
each  other  constantly,  so  that  the  excavation  seemed  likely  to  pro- 
ceed rapidly. 

As  might  be  supposed  the  poor  fellows  alternated  between  hope 
and  fear  when  some  obstacle  delayed  them.  When  a  sudden  fall 
undid  their  work  they  felt  discouraged,  and  nothing  but  Mac-Nab'a 
steady  voice  could  have  rallied  them.  As  the  men  toiled  in  turn  at 
their  weary  task  the  women  stood  watching  them  from  the  foot  of  a 
hill,  saying  little,  but  often  praying  silently.  They  had  now  nothing 
to  do  but  to  prepare  the  food,  which  the  men  devoured  in  their 
short  intervals  of  repose. 

The  boring  proceeded  without  any  very  great  difficulty,  but  the 
ice  was  so  hard  that  the  progress  was  but  slow.  At  the  end  of  the 
second  day  Mac-Nab  had  nearly  reached  the  layer  of  earth  and 
sand,  and  could  not  hope  tr  aet  to  the  top  of  the  house  before  the 
end  of  the  next  day. 

Night  fell,  but  the  work  was  continued  by  the  light  of  torches. 
A  '*  snow-house  "  was  hastily  dug  out  in  one  of  the  hummocks  on 
the  shore  as  a  temporary  shelter  for  the  women  and  the  little  boy. 
The  wind  had  veered  to  the  south-west,  and  a  cold  rain  began  to  fall, 
accompanied  with  occasional  squalls ;  but  neither  the  Lieutenant 
noi  his  men  dreamt  of  leaving  off  work. 


ALL  AT  WORK.  299 


Now  began  the  worst  part  of  the  task.  It  was  really  impossible 
to  bore  in  the  shifting  masses  of  sand  and  earth,  and  it  became 
necessary  to  prop  up  the  sides  of  the  shaft  with  wood,  the  loose 
earth  being  drawn  to  the  surface  in  a  bucket  hung  on  a  rope.  Of 
course  under  the  circumstances  the  work  could  not  proceed  rapidly, 
falls  might  occur  at  any  moment,  and  the  miners  were  in  danger  of 
being  buried  in  their  turn. 

Mac-Nab  was  generally  the  one  to  remain  at  the  bottom  of  the 
narrow  shaft,  directing  the  excavation,  and  frequently  sounding  with 
a  long  pick,  but  as  it  met  with  no  resistance,  it  was  evident  that  it 
did  not  reach  the  roof  of  the  house. 

When  the  morning  once  more  dawned,  only  ten  feet  had  been 
excavated  in  the  mass  of  earth  and  sand,  so  that  twenty  remained 
to  be  bored  through  before  the  roof  of  the  house  could  be  reached, 
that  is  to  say,  if  it  had  not  given  way,  and  still  occupied  the  position 
it  did  before  the  fall  of  the  avalanche- 
It  was  now  fifty-four  hours  since  Mrs  Barnett  and  her  com- 
panions were  buried  ! 

Mac-Nab  and  the  Lieutenant  often  wondered  if  they  on  their  side 
had  made  any  effort  to  open  a  communication  with  the  outer  air. 
They  felt  sure  that  with  her  usual  courage,  Mrs  Barnett  would  have 
tried  to  find  some  way  out  if  her  movements  were  free.  Some 
tools  had  been  left  in  the  house,  and  Kellet,  one  of  the  carpenter's 
men,  remembered  leaving  his  pickaxe  in  the  kitchen.  The  prisoners 
might  have  broken  open  one  of  the  doors  and  begun  to  pierce  a  gallery 
across  the  layer  of  earth.  But  such  a  gallery  could  only  be  driven 
in  a  horizontal  direction,  and  would  be  a  much  longer  business  than 
the  sinking  of  a  shaft  from  above,  for  the  masses  flung  down  by 
the  avalanche,  although  only  sixty  feet  deep,  covered  a  space  more 
than  five  hundred  feet  in  diameter.  Of  course  the  prisoners  could 
not  be  aware  of  this  fact,  and  if  they  should  succeed  in  boring  their 
horizontal  gallery,  it  would  be  eight  days  at  least  before  they  could 
cut  through  the  last  layer  of  ice,  and  by  that  time  they  would  be 
totally  deprived  of  air,  if  not  of  food. 

Nevertheless  the  Lieutenant  carefully  went  over  every  portion  of 
the  accumulation  himself,  and  listened  intently  for  any  sounds  of 
subterranean  digging,  but  he  heard  nothing. 

On  the  return  of  day  the  men  toiled  with  fresh  energy,  bucket 
after  bucket  was  drawn  to  the  surface  of  the  shaft  loaded  with  earth. 
The  clumsy  wooden  props  answered  admirably  in  keeping  the  earth 


300  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


from  filling  in  the  pit,  a  few  falls  occurred,  but  they  were  rapidly 
checked,  and  no  fresh  misfortunes  occurred  throughout  the  day, 
except  that  the  soldier  Garry  received  a  blow  on  the  head  from  a 
falling  block  of  ice.  The  wound  was  not  however  severe,  and  he 
would  not  leave  his  work. 

At  four  o'clock  the  shaft  was  fifty  feet  deep  altogether,  having 
been  sunk  through  twenty  feet  of  ice  and  thirty  of  sand  and  eartk 

It  was  at  this  depth  that  Mac-Nab  had  expected  to  reach  the  roof 
of  the  house,  if  it  had  resisted  the  pressure  of  the  avalanche. 

He  was  then  at  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  and  his  disappointment 
and  dismay  can  be  imagined  when,  on  driving  his  pickaxe  into 
the  ground  as  far  as  it  would  go,  it  met  with  no  resistance 
whatever. 

Sabine  was  with  him,  and  for  a  few  moments  he  remained  with 
his  arms  crossed,  silently  looking  at  his  companion. 

"  No  roof  then  ? "  inquired  the  hunter. 

"  Nothing  whatever,"  replied  the  carpenter,  "  but  let  us  work  on, 
the  roof  has  bent  of  course,  but  the  floor  of  the  loft  cannot  have 
given  way.  Another  ten  feet  and  we  shall  come  to  that  floor,  or 
else  " 

Mac-Nab  did  not  finish  his  sentence,  and  the  two  resumed  their 
work  with  the  strength  of  despair. 

At  six  o'clock  in  the  evening,  another  ten  or  twelve  feet  had  been 
dug  out. 

Mac-Nab  sounded  again,  nothing  yet,  his  pick  still  sunk  in  the 
shifting  earth,  and  flinging  it  from  him,  he  buried  his  face  in  his 

hands  and  muttered — 

« 

"  Poor  things,  poor  things  !  "  He  then  climbed  to  the  opening  of 
the  shaft  by  means  of  the  wood- work. 

The  Lieutenant  and  the  Sergeant  were  together  in  greater  anxiety 
than  ever,  and  taking  them  aside,  the  carpenter  told  them  of  his 
dreadful  disappointment. 

"Then,"  observed  Hobson,  "the  house  must  have  been  crushed 
by  the  avalanche,  and  the  poor  people  in  it " - 

"  No  !  "  cried  the  head-car  >enter  with  earnest  conviction,  "no,  it 
cannot  have  be^en  crushed,  it  must  have  resisted,  strengthened  as  it 
was.     It  cannot— it  cannot  have  been  crushed  !" 

"  "Well,  then,  what  has  happened  ? "  said  the  Lieutenant  in  a 
broken  voice,  his  eyes  filling  with  tears. 

"  Simply  this,"  replied  Mac- Nab,  "  the  house  itself  has  remained 


"  Poor  things !  poor  things  !  "  —  Page  300. 


ALL  AT  WOI^K.  3OI 


intact,  but  the  ground  on  which  it  was  built  must  have  sunk.  The 
house  has  gone  through  the  crust  of  ice  which  forms  the  foundation 
of  the  island.  It  has  not  been  crushed,  but  engulfed,  and  the 
poor  creatures  in  it '''- 

"  Are  drowned  ! "  cried  Long. 

"  Yes,  Sergeant,  drowned  without  a  moment's  notice — drowned 
like  passengers  on  a  foundered  vessel !  " 

For  some  minutes  the  three  men  remained  silent.  Mac-Nab's 
idea  was  probably  correct  Nothing  was  more  likely  than  that  the 
ice  forming  the  foundation  of  the  island  had  given  way  under  such 
enormous  pressure.  The  vertical  props  which  supported  the  beams  of 
the  ceiling,  and  rested  on  those  of  the  floor,  had  evidently  aided  the 
catastrophe  by  their  weight,  and  the  whole  house  had  been  engulfed. 

"  Well,  Mac-Nab,"  said  Hobson  at  last,  "  if  we  cannot  find  them 
aUve  " 

"  "We  must  recover  their  bodies,"  added  the  head  carpenter. 

"  And  with  these  words  Mac-Nab,  accompanied  by  the  Lieutenant, 
went  back  to  his  work  at  the  bottom  of  the  shaft  without  a  word 
to  any  of  his  comrades  of  the  terrible  form  his  anxiety  had  now 
assumed. 

The  excavation  continued  throughout  the  night,  the  men  reliev- 
ing each  other  every  hour,  and  Hobson  and  Mac-Nab  watched  them 
at  work  without  a  moment's  rest. 

At  three  o'clock  in  the  morning  Kellet's  pickaxe  struck  against 
something  hard,  which  gave  out  a  ringing  sound.  The  head  carpenter 
felt  it  almost  before  he  heard  it. 

"  We  have  reached  them  !  *'  cried  the  soldier,  "  they  are  saved." 

**  Hold  your  tongue,  and  go  on  working,"  replied  the  Lieutenant 
in  a  choked  voice. 

It  was  now  seventy-six  hours  since  the  avalanche  fell  upon  the 
house ! 

Kellet  and  his  companion  Pond  resumed  their  work.  The  shaft 
must  have  nearly  reached  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  Mac-Nab  there- 
fore felt  that  all  hope  was  gone. 

In  less  than  twenty  minutes  the  hard  body  which  Kellet  had 
struck  was  uncovered,  and  proved  to  be  one  of  the  rafters  of  the 
roof.  The  carpenter  flung  himself  to  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  and 
seizing  a  pickaxe  sent  the  laths  of  the  roof  flying  on  every  side.  In 
a  few  moments  a  large  aperture  was  made,  and  a  figure  appeared  at 
it  which  it  was  difficult  to  recosjnise  in  the  darkness. 


302  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


It  was  Kalumah  ! 

*'  Help  !  help  ! "  sbe  murmured  feebly. 

Hobson  let  himself  down  through  the  opening,  and  found  himself 
up  to  the  waist  in  ice-cold  water.  Strange  to  say,  the  roof  had  not 
given  way,  but  as  Mac-Nab  had  supposed,  the  house  had  sunk,  and 
was  full  of  water.  The  water  did  not,  however,  yet  fill  the  loft,  and 
was  not  more  than  a  foot  above  the  floor.  There  was  still  a  faint 
hope ! 

The  Lieutenant,  feeling  his  way  in  the  darkness,  came  across  a 
motionless  body,  and  dragging  it  to  the  opening  he  consigned  it  to 
Pond  and  Kellet.     It  was  Thomas  Black. 

Madge,  also  senseless,  was  next  found ;  and  she  and  the  astro- 
nomer were  drawn  up  to  the  surface  of  the  ground  with  ropes,  where 
the  open  air  gradually  restored  them  to  consciousness. 

Mrs  Barnett  was  still  missing,  but  Kalumah  led  Hobson  to  the  very 
end  of  the  loft,  and  there  he  found  the  unhappy  lady  motionless  and 
insensible,  with  her  head  scarcely  out  of  the  water. 

The  Lieutenant  lifted  her  in  his  arms  and  carried  iier  to  the 
opening,  and  a  few  moments  later  he  had  reached  the  outer  air  with 
his  burden,  followed  by  Mac-Nab  with  Kalumah. 

Every  one  gathered  round  Mrs  Barnett  in  silent  anxiety,  and 
poor  Kalumah,  exhausted  as  she  was,  flung  herself  across  her 
friend's  body. 

Mrs  Barnett  still  breathed,  her  heart  still  beat  feebly,  and  revived 
by  the  pure  fresh  air  she  at  last  opened  her  eyes. 

A  cry  of  joy  burst  from  every  lip,  a  cry  of  gratitude  to  Heaven 
for  the  great  mercy  vouchsafed,  which  was  doubtless  heard  above. 

Day  was  now  breaking  in  the  east,  the  sun  was  rising  above  the 
horizon,  lighting  up  the  ocean  with  its  brilliant  beams,  and  Mrs 
Barnett  painfully  staggered  to  her  feet.  Looking  round  her  from 
the  summit  of  the  new  mountain  formed  by  the  avalanche,  which 
overlooked  the  whole  island,  she  murmured  in  a  changed  and  hollow 
voice — 

"The  sea!  the  sea  !  " 

Yes,  the  ocean  now  encircled  the  wandering  island,  the.  sea  was 
open  at  last,  and  a  true  sea-horizon  shut  in  the  view  from  east  to 
west. 


"  A7id  a  figure  appeared"  ^c.  —  Page  301. 


CHAPTER    XIX. 

BEHRINQ  SEA, 

HE  island,  driven  by  the  ice-wall,  had  then  drifted  at  a  great 
speed  into  Behring  Sea,  after  crossing  the  strait  with- 
out running  aground  on  its  shores  !  It  was  still  hurrying 
on  before  the  icy  barrier,  which  was  in  the  grasp  of  a  powerful  sub- 
marine current,  hastening  onwards  on  to  its  inevitable  dissolution 
in  the  warmer  waters  of  the  Pacific,  and  the  boat  on  which  all  had 
depended  was  useless ! 

As  soon  as  Mrs  Barnett  had  entirely  recovered  consciousness,  she 
related  in  a  few  words  the  history  of  the  seventy-four  hours  spent  in 
the  house  now  in  the  water.  Thomas  Black,  Madge,  and  Kalumah 
had  been  aroused  by  the  crash  of  the  avalanche,  and  had  rushed  to 
the  doors  or  windows.  There  was  no  longer  any  possibility  of 
getting  out,  the  mass  of  earth  and  sand,  which  was  but  a  moment 
before  Cape  Bathurst,  completely  covered  the  house,  and  almost 
immediately  afterwards  the  prisoners  heard  the  crash  of  the  huge  ice- 
masses  which  were  flung  upon  the  factory. 

In  another  quarter  of  an  hour  all  felt  that  the  house,  whilst 
resisting  the  enormous  pressure,  was  sinking  through  the  soil  of 
the  island.  They  knew  that  the  crust  of  the  ice  must  have  given 
way,  and  that  the  house  would  fill  with  water ! 

To  seize  a  few' provisions  remaining  in  the  pantry,  and  to  take 
refuge  in  the  loft,  was  the  work  of  a  moment.  This  the  poor  crea- 
tures did  from  a  dim  instinct  of  self-preservation,  but  what  hope 
could  they  really  have  of  being  saved !  However,  the  loft  seemed 
likely  to  resist,  and  two  blocks  of  ice  abutting  from  the  roof  saved 
it  from  being  immediately  crushed. 

Whilst  thus  imprisoned  the  poor  creatures  could  hear  the  constant 
falls  from  the  icebergs,  whilst  the  sea  was  gradually  rising  through 
the  lower  rooms.     They  must  either  be  crushed  or  drowned  ! 

But  by  little  short  of  a  miracle,  the  roof  of  the  house,  with  its 


304  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

strong  framework,  resisted  the  pressure,  and  after  sinking  a  certain 
depth  the  house  remained  stationary,  with  the  water  rather  above 
the  floor  of  the  loft.  The  prisoners  were  obliged  to  take  refuge 
amongst  the  rafters  of  the  roof,  and  there  they  remained  for  many 
hours.  Kalumah  devoted  herself  to  the  service  of  the  others,  and 
carried  food  to  them  through  the  water.  They  could  make  no 
attempt  to  save  themselves,  succour  could  only  come  from  without. 

It  was  a  terrible  situation,  for  breathing  was  difficult  in  the 
vitiated  air  deficient  as  it  was  in  oxygen,  and  charged  with  a  great 
excess  of  carbonic  acid  ...  A  few  hours  later  Hobson  would  only 
have  found  the  corpses  of  his  friends  ! 

The  horror  ot  the  position  was  increased  by  the  gushing  of  the 
water  through  the  lower  rooms,  which  convinced  Mrs  Barnett  that 
the  island  was  drifting  to  the  south.  She  had,  in  fact,  guessed  the 
whole  truth  ;  she  knew  that  the  ice-wall  had  heeled  over  and  fallen 
upon  the  island,  and  concluded  that  the  boat  was  destroyed.  It 
was  this  last  fact  which  gave  such  terrible  significance  to  her  first 
words  when  she  looked  around  her  after  her  swoon — 

"  The  sea  !  the  sea  !  " 

Those  about  her,  however,  could  think  of  nothing  yet  but  the 
fact,  that  they  had  saved  her  for  whom  they  would  have  died,  and 
^vith  her  Madge,  Kalumah,  and  Thomas  Black.  Thus  far  not  one 
of  those  who  had  joined  the  Lieutenant  in  his  disastrous  expedition 
had  succumbed  to  any  of  the  fearful  dangers  through  which  they 
had  passed. 

But  matters  were  not  yet  at  their  worst,  and  fresh  troubles  were 
soon  to  hasten  the  final  catastrophe. 

Hobson's  first  care  after  Mrs  Barnett's  recovery  was  to  take  the 
bearings  of  the  island.  It  was  useless  now  to  think  of  quitting  it, 
.IS  the  sea  was  open  and  their  boat  destroyed.  A  few  ruins  alone 
remained  of  the  mighty  ice-wall,  the  upper  portion  of  which  had 
crushed  Cape  Bathurst  whilst  the  submerged  base  was  driving  the 
island  to  the  south. 

The  instruments  and  maps  belonging  to  the  astronomer  were 
found  in  the  ruins  of  the  house,  and  were  fortunately  uninjured. 
The  weather  was  cloudy,  but  Hobson  succeeded  in  taking  tho 
altitude  of  the  sun  with  sufficienct  accuracy  for  his  purpose. 

We  give  the  result  obtained  at  noon  on  the  1 2th  May.  Victoria 
Island  was  then  situated  in  longitude  168°  12'  west  of  Greenwich, 
and  in  latitude  63°  37'  N.  The  exact  spot  was  looked  out  on  the  chart. 


"  Examining  the  state  of  the  sea"  ^c.  —  Page  307. 


BEHRING    SEA.  305 


and  proved  to  be  in  Norton  Sound,  between  Cape  Tchaplin  on  the 
Asiatic  and  Cape  Stephens  on  the  American  coast,  but  a  hundred 
miles  from  either. 

"  We  must  give  up  all  hope  of  making  the  land  of  the  continent 
then  !  "  said  Mrs  Barnett. 

"Yes,  madam,"  replied  Hobson  ;  "  all  hope  of  that  is  at  an  end  ; 
the  current  is  carrying  us  with  great  rapidity  out  into  the  offing, 
and  our  only  chance  is,  that  we  may  pass  within  sight  of  a  whaler," 

''  Well,  but,"  added  Mrs  Barnett,  "if  we  cannot  make  the  land  of 
either  continent,  might  not  the  current  drive  us  on  to  one  of  the 
islands  of  Behring  Sea  1 " 

There  was,  in  fact,  a  slight  possibility  that  such  a  thing  might 
happen,  and  all  eagerly  clutched  at  the  hope,  like  a  drowning  man  at 
a  plank.  There  are  plenty  of  islands  in  Behring  Sea,  St  Lawrence^  St 
Matthew,  Nunivak,  St  Paul,  George  Island,  &c.  The  wandering 
island  was  in  fact  at  that  moment  not  far  from  St  Lawrence,  which 
is  of  a  considerable  size,  and  surrounded  with  islets ;  and  should 
it  pass  it  without  stopping,  there  was  yet  a  hope  that  the  cluster  of 
the  Aleutian  Islands,  bounding  Behring  Sea  on  the  south,  might 
arrest  its  course. 

Yes  !  St  Lawrence  might  be  a  harbour  of  refuge  for  the  colonists, 
and  if  it  failed  them,  St  Matthew,  and  the  group  of  islets  of  which 
it  is  the  centre,  would  still  be  left.  It  would  not  do,  however,  to 
count  upon  the  Aleutian  Islands,  which  were  more  than  eight 
hundred  miles  away,  and  which  they  might  never  reach.  Long, 
long  before  they  got  so  far,  Victoria  Island,  worn  away  by  the  warm 
sea-waves,  and  melted  by  the  rays  of  the  sun,  which  was  already  in 
the  sign  of  Gemini,  would  most  likely  have  sunk  to  the  bottom  of 
the  ocean. 

There  is,  however,  no  fixed  point  beyond  which  floating  ice  does 
not  advance.  It  approaches  nearer  to  the  equator  in  the  southern 
than  in  the  northern  hemisphere.  Icebergs  have  been  seen  off  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope,  at  about  thirty-six  degrees  south  latitude,  but 
those  which  come  down  from  the  Arctic  Ocean  have  never  passed 
forty  degrees  north  latitude.  The  weather  conditions,  which  are  of 
course  variable,  determine  the  exact  locality  where  ice  will  melt ;  in 
severe  and  prolonged  winters  it  remains  solid  in  comparatively  low 
latitudes,  and  vice  versa  in  early  springs. 

Now  the  warm  season  of  1861  had  set  in  very  early,  and  this 
would  hasten  the  dissolution  of  Victoria  Island.     The  watjers  of 

u 


306  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Behring  Sea  had  already  changed  from  blue  to  green,  as  the  great 
navigator  Hudson  observed  they  always  do  on  the  approach  of 
icebergs,  so  that  a  catastrophe  might  be  expected  at  any  moment. 

Hobson  determined  to  do  his  best  to  avert  the  coming  misfortune, 
and  ordered  a  raft  to  be  constructed  which  would  carry  the  whole 
colony,  and  might  be  guided  to  the  continent  somehow  or  other. 
There  was  every  chance  of  meeting  vessels  now  that  the  whaling 
season  had  commenced,  and  Mac-Nab  was  commissioned  to  make  a 
large  solid  raft  which  would  float  when  Victoria  Island  was  engulfed. 

But  first  of  all,  it  was  necessary  to  construct  some  shelter  for  the 
homeless  inhabitants  of  the  island.  The  simple  plan  appeared  to 
be  to  dig  out  the  old  barracks,  which  had  been  built  on  to  the  prin- 
cipal house,  and  the  walls  of  which  were  still  standing.  Every  one 
set  to  work  with  a  hearty  good-will,  and  in  a  few  days  a  shelter  was 
provided  from  the  inclemencies  of  the  fickle  weather. 

Search  was  also  made  in  the  ruins  of  the  large  house,  and  a 
good  many  articles  of  more  or  less  value  were  saved  from  the  sub- 
merged rooms — tools,  arms,  furniture,  the  air  pumps,  and  the  air 
vessel,  &c. 

On  the  13th  May  all  hope  of  drifting  on  to  the  island  of  St 
Lawrence  had  to  be  abandoned.  When  the  bearings  were  taken,  it 
was  found  that  they  were  passing  at  a  considerable  distance  to  the  east 
of  that  island  ;  and,  as  Hobson  was  well  aware,  currents  do  not  run 
against  natural  obstacles,  but  turn  them,  so  that  little  hope  could 
be  entertained  of  thus  making  the  land.  It  is  true  the  network  of 
islands  in  the  Catherine  Archipelago,  scattered  over  several  degrees 
of  latitude,  might  stop  the  island  if  it  ever  got  so  far.  But,  as  we 
have  before  stated,  that  was  not  probable,  although  it  was  advancing 
at  great  speed.;  for  this  speed  must  decrease  considerably  when  the  ice- 
wall  which  was  driving  it  along  should  be  broken  away  or  dissolved, 
unprotected  as  it  was  from  the  heat  of  the  sun  by  any  covering  of 
earth  or  sand. 

Lieutenant  Hobson, ^Mrs  Barnett,  Sergeant  Long,  and  the  head 
carpenter  often  discussed  these  matters,  and  came  to  the  conclusion 
that  the  island  could  certainly  never  reach  the  Aleutian  group  with 
so  many  chances  against  it. 

On  the  14th  May,  Mac-Nab  and  his  men  commenced  the  con- 
struction of  a  huge  raft.  It  had  to  be  as  high  as  possible  above  the 
water,  to  prevent  the  waves  from  breaking  over  it,  so  that  it  was 
really  a  formidable  undertaking.     The  blacksmith,  Rae,  had  fortu- 


BEHRING  SEA,  30/ 


nately  found  a  large  number  of  the  iron  bolts  which  had  been 
brought  from  Fort  Keliance,  and  they  were  invaluable  for  firmly 
fastening  together  the  different  portions  of  the  framework  of  the 
raft. 

We  must  describe  the  novel  site  for  the  building  of  the  raft  sug- 
gested by  Lieutenant  Hobson.  Instead  of  joining  the  timbers  and 
planks  together  on  the  ground,  they  were  joined  on  the  surface  of 
the  lake.  The  different  pieces  of  wood  were  prepared  on  the  banks, 
and  launched  separately.  They  were  then  easily  fitted  together 
on  the  water.  This  mode  of  proceeding  had  two  advantages  : — 
1.  The  carpenter  would  be  able  at  once  to  judge  of  the  point  of  flota- 
tion, and  the  stability  which  should  be  given  to  the  raft.  2.  When 
Victoria  Island  melted,  the  raft  would  already  be  floating,  and 
would  not  be  liable  to  the  shocks  it  would  receive  if  on  land  when 
the  inevitable  break-up  came. 

Whilst  these  works  were  going  on,  Hobson  would  wander  about 
on  the  beach,  either  alone  or  with  Mrs  Barnett,  examining  the  state 
of  the  sea,  and  the  ever-changing  windings  of  the  coast-line,  worn 
by  the  constant  action  of  the  waves.  He  would  gaze  upon  the  vast 
deserted  ocean,  from  which  the  very  icebergs  had  now  disappeared, 
watching,  ever  watching,  like  a  shipwrecked  mariner,  for  the  vessel 
which  never  came.  The  ocean  solitudes  were  only  frequented  by 
cetacea,  which  came  to  feed  upon  the  microscopic  animalculae  which 
fonn  their  principal  food,  and  abound  in  the  green  waters.  Now 
and  then  floating  trees  of  different  kinds,  which  had  been  brought 
by  the  great  ocean  currents  from  warm  latitudes,  passed  the  island 
on  their  way  to  the  north. 

On  the  1 6th  May,  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  were  walking  together 
on  that  part  of  the  island  between  the  former  Cape  Bathurst  and 
Port  Barnett.  It  was  a  fine  warm  day,  and  there  had  been  no 
traces  of  snow  on  the  ground  for  some  time  ;  all  that  recalled  the 
bitter  cold  of  the  Polar  regions  were  the  relics  left  by  the  ice-wall 
on  the  northern  part  of  the  island  ;  but  ev^n  these  were  rapidly 
melting,  and  every  day  fresh  waterfalls  poured  from  their  summits 
and  bathed  their  sides.  Very  soon  the  sun  would  have  completely 
dissolved  every  atom  of  ice. 

Strange  indeed  was  the  aspect  of  Victoria  Island.  But  for  their 
terrible  anxiety,  the  colonists  must  have  gazed  at  it  with  eager 
interest.  The  ground  was  more  prolific  than  it  could  have  been  in 
any  former  spring,  transferred  as  it  was  to  milder  latitudes.     The 


308  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


little  mosses  and  tender  flowers  grew  rapidly,  and  Mrs  Joliffe's 
garden  was  wonderfully  successful.  The  vegetation  of  every  kind, 
hitherto  checked  by  the  rigour  of  the  Arctic  winter,  was  not  only 
more  abundant,  but  more  brilliantly  coloured.  The  hues  of  leaves 
and  flowers  were  no  longer  pale  and  watery,  but  warm  and  glowing, 
like  the  sunbeams  which  called  them  forth.  The  arbutus,  willow, 
birch,  fir,  and  pine  trees  were  clothed  with  dark  verdure ;  the  sap — 
sometimes  heated  in  a  temperature  of  68**  Fahrenheit — burst  open 
the  young  buds ;  in  a  word,  the  Arctic  landscape  was  completely 
transformed,  for  the  island  was  now  beneath  the  same  parallel  of 
latitude  as  Christiania  or  Stockholm,  that  is  to  say,  in  one  of  the 
finest  districts  of  the  temperate  zones. 

But  Mrs  Barnett  had  now  no  eyes  for  these  wonderful  phenomena 
of  nature.  The  shadow  of  the  coming  doom  clouded  her  spirit. 
She  shared  the  feeling  of  depression  manifested  by  the  hundreds  of 
animals  now  collected  round  the  factory.  The  foxes,  martens, 
ermines,  lynxes,  beavers,  musk-rats,  gluttons,  and  even  the  wolves, 
rendered  less  savage  by  their  instinctive  knowledge  of  a  common 
danger,  approached  nearer  and  nearer  to  their  old  enemy  man,  as  if 
man  could  save  them.  It  was  a  tacit,  a  touching  acknowledgment 
of  human  superiority,  under  circumstances  in  which  that  superiority 
could  be  of  absolutely  no  avail. 

No  !  Mrs  Barnett  cared  no  longer  for  the  beauties  of  nature,  and 
gazed  without  ceasing  upon  the  boundless,  pitiless,  infinite  ocean  with 
its  unbroken  horizon. 

"  Poor  Madge  !  "  she  said  at  last  to  her  faithful  companion  ;  "  it 
was  I  who  brought  you  to  this  terrible  pass — you  who  have  followed 
me  everywhere,  and  whose  fidelity  deserved  a  far  different  recom- 
pense !     Can  you  forgive  me  ? " 

"  There  is  but  one  thing  I  could  never  have  forgiven  you,"  replied 
Madge, — "  a  death  I  did  not  share  ! '' 

"  Ah,  Madge  ! "  cried  Mrs  Barnett,  *'  if  my  death  could  save  the 
lives  of  all  these  poor  people,  how  gladly  would  I  die ! " 

"  My  dear  girl,"  replied  Madge,  "  have  you  lost  all  hope  at 
last  ?"  - 

"I  have  indeed,*'  murmured  Mrs  Barnett,  hiding  her  face  on 
Madge's  shoulder. 

The  strong  masculine  nature  had  given  way  at  last,  and  Mrs 
Barnett  was  for  a  moment  a  feeble  woman.  Was  not  her  emotion 
excusable  in  so  awful  a  situation  % 


Mrs  Burnett  sobbed  aloud."  —  Page  309. 


BEHRING   SEA  309 


Mrs  Bamett  sobbed  aloud,  and  large  tears  rolled  down  her 
cheeks. 

Madge  kissed  and  caressed  her,  and  tried  all  she  could  to  reassure 
her  ;  and  presently,  raising  her  head,  her  poor  mistress  said — 

"Do  not  tell  them,  Madge,  how  I  have  given  way — do  not  betray 
that  I  have  wept." 

"  Of  course  not,"  said  Madge,  "  and  they  would  not  believe  me  if  I 
did.  It  was  but  a  moment's  weakness.  Be  yourself,  dear  girl ;  cheer 
up,  and  take  fresh  courage.*' 

"  Do  you  mean  to  say  you  still  hope  yourself  %  "  exclaimed  Mrs 
Baimett,  looking  anxiously  into  her  companion's  face. 

"  I  still  hope  !  "  said  Madge  simply. 

But  a  few  days  afterwards,  every  chance  of  safety  seemed  to  be 
indeed  gone,  when  the  wandering  island  passed  outside  the  St 
Matthew  group,  and  drifted  away  from  the  last  land  in  Behring 
Sea  ! 


CHAPTER  XX. 

IN     THE     OFFING. 

ICTORIA  Island  was  now  floating  in  the  widest  part  of 
Behring  Sea,  six  hundred  miles  from  the  nearest  of  the 
Aleutian  Islands,  and  two  hundred  miles  from  the  nearest 
land,  which  was  on  the  east.  Supposing  no  accident  happened,  it 
would  be  three  weeks  at  least  before  this  southern  boundary  of 
Behring  Sea  could  be  reached. 

Could  the  island  last  so  long  ?  Might  it  not  burst  open  at  any 
moment,  subject  as  it  was  even  now  to  the  constant  action  of  tepid 
water,  the  mean  temperature  of  which  was  more  than  60°  Fahren- 
heit? 

Lieutenant  Hobso u  pressed  on  the  construction  of  the  raft  as 
rapidly  as  possible,  and  the  lower  framework  was  already  floating  on 
the  lagoon.  Mac-Nab  wished  to  make  it  as  strong  as  possible,  for 
it  would  have  a  considerable  distance  to  go  to  reach  the  Aleutian 
Islands,  unless  they  were  fortunate  enough  to  meet  with  a  whaler. 

No  important  alteration  had  lately  taken  place  in  the  general  con- 
figuration of  the  island.  Reconaissances  were  taken  every  day,  but 
great  caution  was  necessary,  as  a  fracture  of  the  ground  might  at 
any  moment  cut  off  the  explorers  from  the  rest  of  the  party. 

The  wide  gulf  near  Cape  Michael,  which  the  winter  had  closed, 
had  reopened  gradually,  and  now  ran  a  mile  inland,  as  far  as  the 
dried- up  bed  of  the  little  river.  It  was  probable  that  it  was  soon  to 
extend  to  the  bed  itself,  which  was  of  course  of  little  thickness,  having 
been  hollowed  out  by  the  stream.  Should  it  do  so,  the  whole  district 
between  Cape  Michael  and  Port  Barnett,  bounded  on  the  west  by 
the  river  bed,  would  disappear — that  is  to  say,  the  colonists  would 
lose  a  good  many  square  miles  of  their  domain.  On  this  account 
Hobson  warned  every  one  not  to  wander  far,  as  a  rough  sea  would  be 
enough  to  bring  about  the  dreaded  catastrophe. 

Soundings  were,  however,  taken  in  several  places  with  a  view  to 
ascertaining  where  the  ice  was  thickest,  and  it  was  found  that,  near 
Cape  Bathurst,  not  only  was  the  layer  of  earth  and  sand  of  greater  • 


The  lower  framework  was  already  fioating  "  ^c.  —  Page  310. 


IN   THE   OFFING,  311 


extent — which  was  of  little  importance — but  the  crust  of  ice  was 
thicker  than  anywhere  else.  This  was  a  most  fortunate  circum- 
stance, and  the  holes  made  in  sounding  were  kept  open,  so  that  the 
amount  of  diminution  in  the  base  of  the  island  could  be  estimated 
every  day.  This  diminution  was  slow  but  sure,  and,  making  allow- 
ance for  the  unfortunate  fact  that  the  island  was  drifting  into 
warmer  waters,  it  was  decided  that  it  was  impossible  for  it  to  last 
another  three  weeks. 

The  next  week,  from  the  19th  to  the  25th  May,  the  weather 
was  very  bad.  A  fearfal  storm  broke  over  the  island,  accompanied 
by  flash  after  flash  of  lightning  and  peals  of  thunder.  Tlie  sea 
rose  high,  lashed  by  a  powerful  north-west  wind,  and  its  waves 
broke  over  the  doomed  island,  making  it  tremble  ominously.  The 
little  colony  were  on  the  watch,  ready  on  an  emergency  to  embark 
in  the  raft,  the  scaffolding  of  which  was  nearly  finished,  and  some 
provisions  and  fresh  water  were  taken  on  board. 

Rain  heavy  enough  to  penetrate  to  the  ice-crust  fell  in  large 
quantities  during  this  storm,  and  melted  it  in  many  places.  On  the 
slopes  of  some  of  the  hills  the  earth  was  washed  away,  leaving  the 
white  foundations  bare.  These  ravines  were  hastily  filled  up  with 
soil  to  protect  the  ice  from  the  action  of  the  warm  air  and  rain,  and 
but  for  this  precaution  the  soil  would  have  been  everywhere  per- 
forated. 

Great  havoc  was  caused  amongst  the  woods  by  this  storm  ;  the 
earth  and  sand  were  washed  away  from  the  roots  of  the  trees,  which 
fell  in  large  numbers.  In  a  single  night  the  aspect  of  the  country 
between  the  lake  and  the  former  Port  Barnett  was  completely 
changed.  A  few  groups  of  birch  trees  and  thickets  of  firs  alone 
remained — a  fact  significant  of  approaching  decomposition,  which 
no  human  skill  could  prevent  !  Every  one  knew  and  felt  that 
the  ephemeral  island  was  gradually  succumbing — every  one,  except 
perhaps  Thomas  Black,  who  was  still  gloomily  indifferent  to  all  that 
was  going  on. 

On  the  23d  of  May,  during  the  storm,  the  hunter  Sabine  left  the 
house  in  the  thick  fog,  and  was  nearly  drowned  in  a  large  hole  which 
had  opened  during  the  night  on  the  site  formerly  occupied  by  the 
principal  house  of  the  factory. 

Hitherto,  as  we  are  aware,  the  house,  three-quarters  submerged, 
and  buried  beneath  a  mass  of  earth  and  sand,  had  remained  fixed  in 
the  ice-crust  beneath  the  island ;  but  now  the  sea  had  evidently 


3 1 2  THE  FUR  COUNT R  Y. 


enlarged  the  crevasse,  and  the  house  with  all  it  contained  had  sunk 
to  rise  no  more.  Earth  and  sand  were  pouring  through  this  fissure, 
at  the  bottom  of  which  surged  the  tempest-tossed  waves. 

Sabine's  comrades,  hearing  his  cries,  rushed  to  his  assistance,  and 
were  just  in  time  to  save  him  as  he  was  still  clinging  to  the  slippery 
walls  of  the  abyss.  He  escaped  with  a  ducking  which  might  have 
had  tragic  consequences. 

A  little  later  the  beams  and  planks  of  the  house,  which  had  slid 
under  the  island,  were  seen  floating  about  in  the  offing  like  the 
spars  of  a  wrecked  vessel.  This  was  the  worst  evil  the  storm  had 
wrought,  and  would  compromise  the  solidity  of  the  island  yet  more, 
as  the  waves  would  now  eat  away  the  ice  all  round  the  crevasse. 

In  the  course  of  the  25th  May,  the  wind  veered  ta  the  north-east, 
and  although  it  blew  strongly,  it  was  no  longer  a  hurricane  ; 
the  rain  ceased,  and  the  sea  became  calmer.  After  a  quiet  night 
the  sun  rose  upon  the  desolate  scene,  the  Lieutenant  was  able 
to  take  the  bearings  accurately,  and  obtained  the  following 
result : — 

At  noon  on  the  25th  May,  Victoria  Island  was  in  latitude  56°  13', 
and  longitude  170°  23'. 

It  had  therefore  advanced  at  great  speed,  having  drifted  nearly 
eight  hundred  miles  since  the  breaking  up  of  the  ice  set  it  free  in 
Behring  Strait  two  months  before. 

This  great  speed  made  the  Lieutenant  once  more  entertain  a 
slight  hope.  He  pointed  out  the  Aleutian  Islands  on  the  map  to  his 
comrades,  and  said — 

"  Look  at  these  islands  ;  they  are  not  now  two  hundred  miles 
from  us,  and  we  may  reach  them  in  eight  days." 

"  Eight  days  ! "  repeated  Long,  shaking  his  head ;  "  eight  days  is  a 
long  time." 

"  I  must  add,"  continued  Hobson,  "  that  if  our  island  had  fol- 
lowed the  hundred  and  sixty-eighth  meridian,  it  would  already  have 
reached  the  parallel  of  these  islands,  but  in  consequence  of  a 
deviation  of  the  Behring  current,  it  is  bearing  in  a  south-westerly 
direction." 

The  Lieutenant  was  right,  the  current  seemed  likely  to  drag  the 
island  away  from  all  land,  even  out  of  sight  of  the  Aleutian  Islands, 
which  only  extend  as  far  as  the  hundred  and  seventieth  meridian. 

Mrs  Barnett  examined  the  map  in  silence.  She  saw  the  pencil- 
mark  which  denoted  the  exact  spot  then  occupied  by  the  islands 


He  escaped  with  a  ducking."  —  Page  312. 


IN   THE   OFFING,  313 


The  map  was  made  on  a  large  scale,  and  the  point  representing  the 
island  looked  but  a  speck  upon  the  vast  expanse  of  the  Behring  Sea. 
She  traced  back  the  route  by  which  the  island  had  come  to  its  pre- 
sent position,  marvelling  at  the  fatality,  or  rather  the  immutable 
law,  by  which  the  currents  which  had  borne  it  along  had  avoided 
all  land,  sheering  clear  of  islands,  and  never  touching  either  con- 
tinent ;  and  she  saw  the  boundless  Pacific  Ocean,  towards  which  she 
and  all  with  her  were  hurrying. 

She  mused  long  upon  this  melancholy  subject,  and  at  last 
exclaimed  suddenly — 

"  Could  not  the  course  of  the  island  be  controlled  ?  Eight  days 
at  this  pace  would  bring  us  to  the  last  island  of  the  Aleutian 
group." 

"  Those  eight  days  are  in  the  hands  of  God,"  replied  Lieutenant 
Hobson  gravely  ;  "  we  can  exercise  no  control  upon  them.  Help 
can  only  come  to  us  from  above ;  there  is  nothing  left  for  us  to 
try." 

"  I  know,  I  know  !  "  said  Mrs  Barnett  \  **  but  Heaven  helps  those 
who  help  themselves.     Is  there  really  nothing  we  can  dol" 

Hobson  shook  his  head  doubtfully.  His  only  hope  was  in  the 
raft,  and  he  was  undecided  whether  to  embark  every  one  on  it  at 
once,  contrive  some  sort  of  a  sail  with  clothes,  &c.,  and  try  to  reach 
the  nearest  land,  or  to  wait  yet  a  little  longer. 

He  consulted  Sergeant  Long,  Mac-Nab,  Rae,  Marbre,  and  Sabine, 
in  whom  he  had  great  confidence,  and  all  agreed  that  it  would  be 
unwise  to  abandon  the  island  before  they  were  obliged.  The  raft, 
constantly  swept  as  it  would  be  by  the  waves,  could  only  be  a  last 
resource,  and  would  not  move  at  half  the  pace  of  the  island,  still 
driven  towards  the  south  by  the  remains  of  the  ice- wall.  The  wind 
generally  blew  from  the  east,  and  would  be  likely  to  drift  the  raft 
out  into  the  offing  away  from  all  land. 

They  must  still  wait  then,  always  wait ;  for  the  island  was  drift- 
ing rapidly  towards  the  Aleutians.  When  they  really  approached  the 
group  they  would  be  able  to  see  what  it  would  be  best  to  do. 

This  was  certainly  the  wisest  course  to  take.  In  eight  days,  if 
the  present  speed  were  maintained,  the  island  would  either  stop  at 
the  southern  boundary  of  Behring  Sea,  or  be  dragged  to  the  south- 
west to  the  waters  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  where  certain  destruction 
awaited  it. 

But  the  adverse  fate  which  seemed  all  along  to  have  followed  the 


314  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 


hapless  colonists  had  yet  another  blow  in  store  for  them  :  the 
speed  on  which  they  counted  was  now  to  fail  them,  as  everything 
else  had  done. 

During  the  night  of  the  26th  May,  the  orientation  of  the  island 
changed  once  more ;  and  this  time  the  results  of  the  displacement 
were  extremely  serious.  The  island  turned  half  round,  and  the 
icebergs  still  remaining  of  the  huge  ice-wall,  which  had  shut  in  the 
northern  horizon,  were  now  on  the  south. 

In  the  morning  the  shipwrecked  travellers — vyhat  name  could  be 
more  appropriate  % — saw  the  sun  rise  above  Cape  Esquimaux  instead 
of  above  Port  Barnett. 

Hardly  a  hundred  yards  off  rose  the  icebergs,  rapidly  melting,  but 
still  of  a  considerable  size,  which  till  then  had  driven  the  island 
before  them.  The  southern  horizon  was  now  partly  shut  in  by 
them. 

What  would  be  the  consequences  of  this  fresh  change  of  position  % 
Would  not  the  icebergs  now  float  away  from  the  island,  with  which 
they  were  no  longer  connected  ? 

All  were  oppressed  with  a  presentiment  of  some  new  misfor- 
tune, and  understood  only  too  well  what  Kellet  meant  when  he 
exclaimed — 

*'  This  evening  we  shall  have  lost  our  '  screw  ! ' " 
By  this  Kellet  meant  that  the  icebergs,  being  before  instead  of 
behind  the  island,  would  soon  leave  it,  and  as  it  was  they  which 
imparted  to  it  its  rapid  motion,  in  consequence  of  their  very  great 
draught  of  water — their  volume  being  six  or  seven  feet  below  the 
sea  level  for  every  one  above — they  would  now  go  on  without  it, 
impelled  by  the  submarine  current,  whilst  Victoria  Island,  not 
deep  enough  in  the  water  to  come  under  the  influence  of  the  current, 
would  be  left  floating  helplessly  on  the  weaves. 

Yes  !  Kellet  was  right ;  the  island  would  then  be  like  a  vessel  with 
disabled  masts  and  a  broken  screw. 

No  one  answered  the  soldier's  remark,  and  a  quarter  of  an  hour 
had  not  elapsed  before  a  loud  cracking  sound  was  heard.  The 
summits  of  the  icebergs  trembled,  large  masses  broke  away,  and 
the  icebergs,  irresistibly  drawn  along  by  the  submarine  current, 
drifted  rapidly  to  the  south. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

THE   ISLAND  BECOMES  AN   ISLET» 

„.^HREE  hours  later  the  last  relics  of  the  ice- wall  had  disap- 

IlK  peared,  proving  that  the  island  now  remained  stationary, 
and  that  all  the  force  of  the  current  was  deep  down  below 
the  waves,  not  on  the  surface  of  the  sea. 

The  bearings  were  taken  at  noon  with  the  greatest  care,  and 
twenty-four  hours  later  it  was  found  that  Victoria  Island  had  not 
advanced  one  mile. 

The  only  remaining  hope  was  that  some  vessel  should  sight  the 
poor  shipwrecked  creatures,  either  whilst  still  on  the  island,  or  after 
they  had  taken  to  their  raft. 

The  island  was  now  in  54°  33'  latitude,  and  177"  19'  longitude, 
several  hundred  miles  from  the  nearest  land,  namely,  the  Aleutian 
Islands. 

Hobson  once  more  called  his  comrades  together,  and  asked  them 
what  they  thought  it  would  be  best  to  do. 

All  agreed  that  they  should  remain  on  the  island  until  it  broke 
up,  as  it  was  too  large  to  be  affected  by  the  state  of  the  sea,  and  only 
take  to  the  raft  when  the  dissolution  actually  commenced.  Once  on 
the  frail  vessel,  they  must  wait. 

Still  wait ! 

The  raft  was  now  finished.  Mac-Nab  had  made  one  large  shed 
or  cabin  big  enough  to  hold  every  one,  and  to  afford  some  little 
shelter  from  the  weather.  A  mast  had  been  prepared,  which  could 
be  put  up  if  necessary,  and  the  sails  intended  for  the  boat  had  long 
been  ready.  The  whole  structure  was  strong,  although  clumsy  ;  and 
if  the  wind  were  favourable,  and  the  sea  not  too  rough,  this  rude 
assortment  of  planks  and  timbers  might  save  the  lives  of  the  whole 
party. 

"Nothing."  observed  Mrs  Barnett, — "nothing  is  impossible  to 
Him  who  rules  the  winds  and  waves." 


3l6  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Hobson  carefully  looked  over  the  stores  of  provisions.  The 
reserves  had  been  much  damaged  by  the  avalanche,  but  there  were 
plenty  of  animals  still  on  the  island,  and  the  abundant  shrubs  and 
mosses  supplied  them  with  food.  A  few  reindeer  and  hares  were 
slaughtered  by  the  hunters,  and  their  flesh  salted  for  future 
needs. 

The  health  of  the  colonists  was  on  the  whole  good.  They  had 
suffered  little  in  the  preceding  mild  winter,  and  all  the  mental  trials 
they  liad  gone  through  had  not  affected  their  physical  well-being. 
They  were,  however,  looking  forward  with  something  of  a  shrink- 
ing horror  to  the  moment  when  they  would  have  to  abandon 
their  island  home,  or,  to  speak  more  correctly,  when  it  abandoned 
them.  It  was  no  wonder  that  they  did  not  like  the  thought  of 
floating  on  the  ocean  in  a  rude  structure  of  wood  subject  to  all  the 
caprices  of  winds  and  waves.  Even  in  tolerably  fine  weather  seas 
would  be  shipped  and  every  one  constantly  drenched  \vith  salt- 
water. Moreover,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  men  were  none  of 
them  sailors,  accustomed  to  navigation,  and  ready  to  risk  their  lives 
on  a  few  planks,  but  soldiers,  trained  for  service  on  land.  Their 
island  was  fragile,  it  is  true,  and  rested  on  a  thin  crust  of  ice  ;  but 
then  it  was  covered  with  a  productive  soil,  trees  and  shrubs  flourished 
upon  it,  its  huge  bulk  rendered  it  insensible  to  the  motion  of  the 
waves,  and  it  might  have  been  supposed  to  be  stationary.  They 
had,  ill  fact,  become  attached  to  Victoria  Island,  on  which  they  had 
lived  nearly  two  years  ;  every  inch  of  the  ground  had  become  fami- 
liar to  them ;  they  had  tilled  the  soil,  and  had  come  safely  through 
so  many  perils  in  their  wandering  home,  th;it  in  leaving  it  they 
felt  as  if  they  were  parting  from  an  old  and  sorely-tried  friend. 

Hobson  fully  sympathised  with  the  feelings  of  his  men,  and  under- 
stood their  repugnance  to  embarking  on  the  raft ;  but  then  he  also 
knew  that  the  catastrophe  could  not  now  be  deferred  much  longer, 
and  ominous  symptoms  already  gave  warning  of  its  rapid  approach. 

We  will  now  describe  this  raft.  It  was  thirty  feet  square,  and 
its  deck  rose  two  feet  above  the  water.  Its  bulwarks  would  there- 
fore keep  out  the  small  but  not  the  large  waves.  In  the  centre  the 
carpenter  had  built  a  regular  deck-house,  which  would  hold  some 
twenty  people.  Bound  it  were  large  lockers  for  "the  provisions  and 
water- casks,  all  firmly  fixed  to  the  deck  with  iron  bolts.  The  mast, 
thirty  feet  high,  wa^  fastened  to  the  deck-house,  and  strengthened 
with    stays  attached  to  the  corners  of  the  raft.      This  mast  was  to 


THE  ISLAND  BECOMES  AN  ISLET,  317 

have  a  square  sail,  which  would  only  be  useful  when  the  wind  was 
aft.  A  sort  of  rudder  was  fixed  to  this  rough  structure,  the  fittings 
of  which  were  necessarily  incomplete. 

Such  was  the  raft  constructed  by  the  head  carpenter,  on  which 
twenty-one  persons  were  to  embark.  It  was  floating  peacefully  "on 
the  little  lake,  strongly  moored  to  the  shore. 

It  was  certainly  constructed  with  more  care  than  if  it  had  been 
put  together  in  haste  on  a  vessel  at  sea  doomed  to  immediate 
destruction.  It  was  stronger  and  better  fitted  up  ;  but,  after  all,  it 
was  but  a  raft. 

On  the  1st  June  a  new  incident  occurred.  Hope,  one  of  the 
soldiers,  went  to  fetch  some  water  from  the  lake  for  culinary 
purposes,  and  when  Mrs  Joliflfe  tasted  it,  she  found  that  it  was 
salt.  She  called  Hope,  and  said  she  wanted  fresh,  not  salt 
water. 

The  man  replied  that  he  had  brought  it  from  the  lake  as  usual, 
and  as  he  and  Mrs  Joliflfe  were  disputing  about  it,  the  Lieutenant 
happened  to  come  in.  Hearing  Hope's  repeated  asertions  that  he 
had  fetched  the  water  from  the  lake,  he  turned  pale  and  hurried 
to  the  lagoon. 

The  waters  were  quite  salt ;  the  bottom  of  the  lake  had  evidently 
given  way,  and  the  sea  had  flowed  in. 

The  fact  quickly  became  known,  and  every  one  was  seized  with  a 
terrible  dread. 

"  No  more  fresh  water  ! "  exclaimed  all  the  poor  creatures 
together. 

Lake  Bamett  had  in  fact  disappeared,  as  Paulina  River  had  done 
before. 

Lieutenant  Hobson  hastened  to  reassure  his  comrades  about 
drinkable  water. 

"There  will  be  plenty  of  ice,  my  friends,"  he  said.  "We  can 
always  melt  a  piece  of  our  island,  and,"  he  added,  with  a  ghastly 
attempt  at  a  smile,  "  I  don't  suppose  we  shall  drink  it  all." 

It  is,  in  fact,  well  known  that  salt  separates  from  sea- water  in 
freezing  and  evaporation.  A  few  blocks  of  ice  were  therefore 
"disinterred,"  if  we  may  so  express  it,  and  melted  for  daily  use, 
and  to  fill  the  casks  on  board  the  raft. 

It  would  not  do,  however,  to  neglect  this  fresh  warning  given  by 
nature.  The  invasion  of  the  lake  by  the  sea  proved  that  the  base 
of   the   island  was  rapidly  melting.     At  any  moment  the  ground 


3l8  THE  FUR  COUNTRY. 

might  give  way,  and  Hobson  forbade  bis  men  to  leave  the  factory,  as 
they  might  be  drifted  away  before  they  were  aware  of  it. 

The  animals  seemed  more  keenly  alive  than  ever  to  approaching 
danger;  they  gathered  yet  more  closely  round  the  firmer  part,  and 
after  the  disappearance  of  the  fresh-water  lake,  they  came  to  lick 
the  blocks  of  ice.  They  were  all  uneasy,  and  some  seemed  to  be 
seized  with  madness,  especially  the  wolves,  who  rushed  wildly 
towards  the  factory,  and  dashed  away  again  howling  piteously.  The 
furred  animals  remained  huddled  together  round  the  large  well 
where  the  principal  house  had  formerly  stood.  There  were  several 
hundreds  of  them,  of  different  species,  and  the  solitary  bear  roamed 
backwards  and  forwards,  showing  no  more  hostility  to  the  quad- 
rupeds than  to  men. 

The  number  of  birds,  which  had  hitherto  been  considerable,  now 
decreased.  During  the  last  few  days  all  those  capable  of  long- 
sustained  flight — such  as  swans,  <fec.,  migrated  towards  the  Aleutian 
Islands  in  the  south,  where  they  would  find  a  sure  refuge.  This 
significant  and  ominous  fact  wa^  noticed  by  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge, 
who  were  walking  together  on  the  beach. 

"  There  is  plenty  of  food  for  these  birds  on  the  island,"  observed 
Mrs  Barnett,  *'  and  yet  they  leave  it — they  have  a  good  reason,  no 
doubt." 

"  Yes,"  replied  Madge  ;  "  their  instinct  of  self-preservation  makes 
them  take  flight,  and  they  give  us  a  warning  by  which  we  ought 
to  profit.     The  animals  also  appear  more  uneasy  than  usual." 

Hobson  now  decided  to  take  the  greater  part  of  the  provisions 
and  all  the  camping  apparatus  on  board  the  raft,  and  when  that  was 
done,  to  embark  with  the  whole  party. 

The  sea  was,  however,  very  rough,  and  the  waters  of  the  former 
lake — now  a  kind  of  Mediterranean  in  miniature — were  greatly 
agitated.  The  waves,  confined  in  the  narrow  space,  dashed  moun- 
tains high,  and  broke  violently  upon  the  steep  banks.  The  raft 
tossed  up  and  down,  and  shipped  sea  after  sea.  The  embarkation 
of  provisions,  &c.,  had  to  be  put  off. 

Every  one  wished  to  pass  one  more  quiet  night  on  land,  and 
Hobson  yielded  against  his  better  judgment,  determined,  if  it  were 
calmer  the  next  day,  to  proceed  with  the  embarkation. 

The  night  was  more  peaceful  than  had  been  expected ;  the  wind 
went  down,  and  the  sea  became  calmer  ;  it  had  but  been  swept  by 
one  of  those  sudden  and  brief  hurricanes  peculiar  to  these  latitudes. 


The  embarkation  of  provislo7is,  ^c,  had  to  be  put  off."  —  Paj^e  318. 


THE  ISLAND  BECOMES  AN  ISLET.  319 

At  eight  o'clock  in  the  evening  the  tumult  ceased,  and  a  slight 
surface  agitation  of  the  waters  of  lake  and  sea  alone  remained. 

It  was  some  slight  comfort  that  the  island  would  not  now  be 
broken  up  suddenly,  as  it  must  have  done  had  the  storm  continued. 
Its  dissolution  was,  of  course,  still  close  at  hand,  but  would  not,  it 
was  hoped,  be  sudden  and  abrupt. 

The  storm  was  succeeded  by  a  slight  fog,  which  seemed  likely  to 
thicken  during  the  night.  It  came  from  the  north,  and  owing  to 
the  changed  position  of  the  island,  would  probably  cover  the  greater 
part  of  it. 

Before  going  to  bed,  Hobson  went  down  and  examined  the  moor- 
ings of  the  raft,  which  were  fastened  to  some  strong  birch-trees.  To 
make  security  doubly  sure,  he  tightened  them,  and  the  worst  that 
could  now  happen  would  be,  that  the  raft  would  drift  out  on  to  the 
lagoon,  which  was  not  large  enough  to  be  lost  upon  it. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE  FOUR  FOLLO  WING  DA  YS. 

^^HE  night  was  calm,  and  in  the  morning  the  Lieutenant  re- 
solved to  order  the  embarkation  of  everything  and  every- 
body that  very  day.  He,  therefore,  went  down  to  the  lake 
to  look  at  the  raft. 

The  fog  was  still  thick,  but  the  sunbeams  were  beginning  to 
struggle  through  it.  The  clouds  had  been  swept  away  by  the 
hurricane  of  the  preceding  day,  and  it  seemed  likely  to  be  hot. 

When  Hobson  reached  the  banks  of  the  lake,  the  fog  was  still  too 
dense  for  him  to  make  out  anything  on  its  surface,  and  he  was 
waiting  for  it  to  clear  away,  when  he  was  joined  by  Mrs  Barnett, 
Madge,  and  several  others. 

The  fog  gradually  cleared  off,  drawing  back  to  the  end  of  the 
lake,  but  the  raft  was  nowhere  to  be  seen. 

Presently  a  gust  of  wind  completely  swept  away  the  fog. 

The  raft  was  gone  !  There  was  no  longer  a  lake  !  The  boundless 
ocean  stretched  away  before  the  astonished  colonists  ! 

Hobson  could  not  check  a  cry  of  despair ;  and  when  he  and  his 
companions  turned  round  and  saw  the  sea  on  every  side,  they 
realised  with  a  shock  of  horror  that  their  island  was  now  nothing 
more  than  an  islet ! 

During  the  night  six-sevenths  of  the  district  once  belonging  to 
Cape  Bathurst  had  silently  floated  away,  without  producing  a  shock 
of  any  kind,  so  completely  had  the  ice  been  worn  away  by  the  con- 
stant action  of  the  waves,  the  raft  had  drifted  out  into  the  offing, 
and  those  whose  last  hope  it  had  been  could  not  see  a  sign  of  it  on 
the  desolate  sea. 

The  unfortunate  colonists  were  now  overwhelmed  with  despair  ; 
their  last  hope  gone,  they  were  hanging  above  an  awful  abyss  ready 
to  swallow  them  up;  and  some  of  the  soldiers  in  a  fit  of  madness 
were  about  to  throw  themselves  into  the  sea,  when  Mrs  Barnett 


He  tightened  them"  ^c.  —  Page  319. 


THE   FOUR   FOLLOWING   DAYS.  321 

flung  herself  before  them,  entreating  them  to  desist.  They  yielded, 
some  of  them  weeping  like  children. 

The  awful  situation  of  the  colonists  was  indeed  manifest  enough, 
and  we  may  well  pity  the  Lieutenant  surrounded  by  the  miserable 
despairing  creatures.  Twenty-one  persons  on  an  islet  of  ice  which 
must  quickly  melt  beneath  their  feet !  The  wooded  hills  had  disap- 
peared with  the  mass  of  the  island  now  engulfed  ;  not  a  tree 
was  left.  There  was  no  wood  remaining  but  the  planks  of  the 
rough  lodging,  which  would  not  be  nearly  enough  to  build  a  raft 
to  hold  so  many.  A  few  days  of  life  were  all  the  colonists  could 
now  hope  for;  June  had  set  in,  the  mean  temperature  exceeded 
68°  Fahrenheit,  and  the  islet  must  rapidly  melt. 

As  a  forlorn  hope,  Hobson  thought  he  would  make  a  reconais- 
sance  of  his  limited  domain,  and  s6e  if  any  part  of  it  was  thicker 
than  where  they  were  all  now  encamped.  In  this  excursion  he  was 
accompanied  by  Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge. 

"  Do  you  still  hope  1 "  inquired  the  lady  of  her  faithful  com- 
panion, 

*'  I  hope  ever  I  "  replied  Madge. 

Mrs  Barnett  did  not  answer,  but  walked  rapidly  along  the 
coast  at  the  Lieutenant's  side.  No  alteration  had  taken  place 
between  Cape  Bathurst  and  Cape  Esquimaux,  that  is  to  say,  for  a 
distance  of  eight  miles.  It  was  a't  Cape  Esquimaux  that  the 
fracture  had  taken  place,  and  running  inland,  it  followed  a  curved 
line  as  far  as  the  beginning  of  the  lagoon,  from  which  point  the 
shores  of  the  lake,  now  bathed  by  the  waves  of  the  sea,  formed  the 
new  coast-line.  Towards  the  upper  part  of  the  lagoon  there  was 
another  fracture,  running  as  far  as  the  coast,  between  Cape  Bathurst 
and  what  was  once  Port  Barnett,  so  that  the  islet  was  merely  an 
oblong  strip,  not  more  than  a  mile  wide  anywhere. 

Of  the  hundred  and  forty  square  miles  which  once  formed  the 
total  superficial  area  of  the  island,  only  twenty  remained. 

Hobson  most  carefully  examined  the  new  conformation  of  the 
islet,  and  found  that  its  thickest  part  was  still  at  the  site  of  the 
former  factory.  He  decided,  therefore,  to  retain  the  encampment 
where  it  was,  and,  strange  to  say,  the  instinct  of  the  quadrupeds  still 
led  them  to  congregate  about  it. 

A  great  many  of  the  animals  had,  however,  disappeared  with  the 
rest  of  the  island,  amongst  them  many  of  the  dogs  which  had  escaped 
the  former  catastrophe.     Most  of  the  quadrupeds  remaining  were 

X 


322  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


rodents  ;  and  the  be^r,  which  seemed  terribly  puzzled,  paced  round 
and  round  the  islet  like  a  caged  animal. 

About  five  o'clock  in  the  evening  the  three  explorers  returned  to 
the  camp.  The  men  and  women  were  gathered  together  in  gloomy 
silence  in  the  rough  shelter  still  remaining  to  them,  and  Mrs  Joliffe 
was  preparing  some  food.  Sabine,  who  was  less  overcome  than  his 
comrades,  was  wandering  about  in  the  hope  of  getting  some  fresh 
venison,  and  the  astronomer  was  sitting  apart  from  every  one,  gazing 
at  the  sea  in  an  absent  indifferent  manner,  as  if  nothing  could  ever 
rouse  or  astonish  him  again. 

The  Lieutenant  imparted  the  results  of  his  excursion  to  the 
whole  party.  He  told  them  that  they  were  safer  where  they  were 
than  they  would  be  on  any  other  spot,  and  he  urged  them  not  to 
wander  about,  as  there  were  signs  of  another  approaching  fracture 
half  way  between  the  camp  and  Cape  Esquimaux.  The  superficial 
area  of  the  islet  would  soon  be  yet  further  reduced,  and  they  could 
do  nothing,  absolutely  nothing. 

The  day  was  really  quite  hot.  The  ice  which  had  been  "  dis- 
interred "  for  drinkable  water  melted  before  it  was  brought  near  the 
fire.  Thin  pieces  of  the  ice-crust  of  the  steep  beach  fell  off  into  the 
sea,  and  it  was  evident  that  the  general  level  of  the  islet  was^ 
being  lowered  by  the  constant  wearing  away  of  its  base  in  the  tepid 
waters. 

No  one  slept  the  next  night.  Who  could  have  closed  his  eyes 
with  the  knowledge  that  the  abyss  beneath  might  open  at  any 
moment  % — who  but  the  little  unconscious  child  who  still  smiled  in 
his  mother's  arms,  and  was  never  for  one  instant  out  of  them  ? 

The  next  morning,  June  4th,  the  sun  rose  in  a  cloudless  sky.  No 
change  had  taken  place  in  the  conformation  of  the  islet  during  the 
night. 

In  the  course  of  this  day  a 'terrified  blue  fox  rushed  into  the  shed, 
and  could  not  be  induced  to  leave  it.  The  martens,  ermines,  polar 
hares,  musk-rats,  and  beavers  literally  swarmed  upon  the  site  of 
the  former  factory.  The  wolves  alone  were  unrepresented,  and  had 
probabljf  all  been  swallowed  up  with  the  rest  of  the  island.  The 
bear  no  longer  wandered  from  Cape  Bathurst,.  and  the  furred  ani- 
mals seemed  quite  unconscious  of  its  presence;  nor  did  the  colonists 
notice  it  much,  absorbed  as  they  were  in  the  contemplation  of  the 
approaching  doom,  which  had  broken  down  all  the  ordinary  dis- 
tinctions of  race. 


THE   FOUR  FOLLOWING  DAYS,  323 


A  little  before  noon  a  sudden  hope — too  soon  to  end  in  dis- 
appointment— revived  the  drooping  spirits  of  the  colonists. 

Sabine,  who  had  been  standing  for  some  time  on  the  highest  part 
of  the  islet  looking  at  the  sea,  suddenly  cried — 

''  A  boat !  a  boat !  " 

It  was  as  if  an  electric  shock  had  suddenly  ran  through  the 
group,  for  all  started  up  and  rushed  towards  the  hunter. 

The  Lieutenant  looked  at  him  inquiringly,  and  the  man  pointed 
to  a  white  vapour  on  the  horizon.  Not  a  word  was  spoken,  but 
all  watched  in  breathless  silence  as  the  form  of  a  vessel  gradually 
rose  against  the  sky. 

It  was  indeed  a  ship,  and  most  likely  a  whaler.  There  was  no 
doubt  about  it,  and  at  the  end  of  an  hour  even  the  keel  was 
visible. 

Unfortunately  this  vessel  appeared  on  the  east  of  the  islet,  that 
is  to  say,  on  the  opposite  side  to  that  from  which  the  raft  had 
drifted,  so  that  there  could  be  no  hope  that  it  was  coming  to  their 
rescue  after  meeting  with  the  raft,  which  would  have  suggested  the 
fact  of  fellow-creatures  being  in  danger. 

The  question  now  was,  would  those  in  this  vessel  perceive  the 
islet  %  Would  they  be  able  to  make  out  signals  on  it  ?  Alas  !  in 
broad  daylight,  with  a  bright  sun  shining,  it  was  not  likely  they 
would.  Had  it  been  night,  some  of  the  planks  of  the  remaining 
shed  might  have  made  a  fire  large  enough  to  be  seen  at  a  considerable 
distance,  but  the  boat  would  probably  have  disappeared  before  the 
darkness  set  in  ;  and,  although  it  seemed  of  little  use,  signals  were 
made,  and  guns  fired  on  the  islet. 

The  vessel  was  certainly  approaching,  and  seemed  to  be  a  large 
three-master,  evidently  a  whaler  from  New  Archangel,  which  was 
on  its  way  to  Behring  Strait  after  having  doubled  the  peninsula  uf 
Alaska.  It  was  to  the  windward  of  the  islet,  and  tacking  to 
starboard  with  its  lower  sails,  top  sails,  and  top-gallant  sails  all  set. 
It  was  steadily  advancing  to  the  north.  A  sailor  would  have  seen  at 
a  glance  that  it  was  not  bearing  towards  the  islet,  but  it  might  even 
yet  perceive  it,  and  alter  its  course. 

"  If  it  does  see  us,"  whispered  Hobson  in  Long's  ear,  "  it  is  more 
likely  to  avoid  us  than  to  come  nearer." 

The  Lieutenant  was  right,  for  there  is  nothing  vessels  dread  more 
in  these  latitudes  than  the  approach  of  icebergs  and  ice-floes  ;  they 
look  upon  them  as  floating  rocks,  against  which  there  is  a  danger 


324  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


of  striking,  especially  in  the  night,  and  they  therefore  hasten  to 
change  their  course  when  ice  is  sighted  ;  and  this  vessel  would  most 
likely  do  the  same,  if  it  noticed  the  islet  at  all. 

The  alternations  of  hope  and  despair  through  which  the  anxious 
watchers  passed  may  be  imagined,  but  cannot  be  described.  Until 
two  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  they  were  able  to  believe  that  Heaven 
had  at  last  taken  pity  on  them — that  help  was  coming — that  their 
safety  was  assured.  The  vessel  continued  to  approach  in  an  oblique 
direction,  and  was  presently  not  more  than  six  miles  from  the  islet. 
Signal  after  signal  was  tried,  gun  after  gun  fired,  and  some  of  the 
planks  of  the  shed  were  burnt. 

All  in  vain — either  they  were  not  seen,  or  the  vessel  was  anxious 
to  avoid  the  islet. 

At  half-past  two  it  luffed  slightly,  and  bore  away  to  the  north- 
east. 

In  another  hour  a  white  vapour  was  all  that  was  visible,  and  that 
soon  disappeared. 

On  this  the  soldier  Kellet  burst  into  a  roar  of  hysterical  laughter, 
and  flinging  himself  on  the  ground,  rolled  over  and  over  like  a 
madman. 

Mrs  Bamett  turned  and  looked  Madge  full  in  the  face,  as  if  to 
ask  her  if  she  still  helped,  and  Madge  turned  away  her  head. 

On  this  same  ill-fated  day  a  crackling  noise  was  heard,  and  the 
greater  part  of  the  islet  broke  off,  and  plunged  into  the  sea.  The 
cries  of  the  drowning  animals  rent  the  air,  and  the  islet  was  reduced 
to  the  narrow  strip  between  the  site  of  the  engulfed  house  and  Cape 
Bathurst.     It  was  now  merely  a  piece  of  ice. 


Mrs  Bamett  turned  and  looked  Madge  full  in  the  face"  —  Page  324. 


CHAPTER  XXIIL 

ON  A    PIECE   OF  ICE. 

PIECE  of  ice,  a  jagged  triangular  strip  of  ice,  measuring 
one  hundred  feet  at  its  base,  and  scarcely  five  hundred  in 
its  greatest  extent ;  and  on  it  twenty-one  human  beings, 
some  hundred  furred  animals,  a  few  dogs,  and  a  large  bear,  which 
was  at  this  moment  crouching  at  the  very  edge  ! 

Yes !  all  the  luckless  colonists  were  there.  Not  one  had  yet 
been  swallowed  up.  The  last  rupture  had  occurred  when  they 
were  all  in  the  shed.  Thus  far  fate  had  spared  them,  probably 
that  they  might  all  perish  together. 

A  silent  sleepless  night  ensued.  No  one  spoke  or  moved,  for  the 
slightest  shake  or  blow  might  suffice  to  break  the  ice. 

No  one  would  touch  the  salt-meat  served  round  by  Mrs  Joliffe. 
What  would  be  the  good  of  eating  1 

Nearly  every  one  remained  in  the  open  air,  feeling  that  it  would 
be  better  to  be  drowned  in  the  open  sea  than  in  a  narrow  wooden 
shed. 

The  next  day,  June  5th,  the  sun  shone  brightly  down  upon  the 
heads  of  t^e  doomed  band  of  wanderers.  All  were  still  silent,  and 
seemed  anxious  to  avoid  each  other.  Many  gazed  with  troubled 
anxious  eyes  at  the  perfect  circle  of  the  horizon,  of  which  the 
miserable  little  strip  of  ice  formed  the  centre.  But  the  sea  was 
absolutely  deserted — not  a  sail,  not  an  ice-floe,  not  an  islet !  Their 
own  piece  of  ice  was  probably  the  very  last  floating  on  the  Behring 
Sea. 

The  temperature  continued  to  rise.  .  The  wind  had  gone  down, 
and  a  terrible  calm  had  set  in,  a  gentle  swell  heaved  the  surface  of 
the  sea,  and  the  morsel  of  earth  and  ice,  which  was  all  that  was  left 
of  Victoria  Island,  rose  and  sank  without  change  of  position,  like  a 
wreck — and  what  was  it  but  a  wreck  ? 

But  a  wreck,  a  piece  of  woodwork,  a  broken  mast,  or  a  few 
planks,  remain  floating ;  they  offer  some  resistance  to  the  waves,  they 


326  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


will  not  melt ;  but  this  bit  of  ice,  this  solidified  water,  must  dissolve 
with  the  heat  of  the  sun  ! 

This  piece  of  ice  had  formed  the  thickest  part  of  the  island,  and 
this  will  explain  its  having  lasted  so  long.  A  layer  of  earth  and 
plenty  of  vegetation  covered  it,  and  the  base  of  ice  must  have  been 
of  considerable  thickness.  The  long  bitter  Polar  winters  must 
have  "fed  it  with  fresh  ice,"  in  the  countless  centuries  during 
which  it  was  connected  with  the  mainland.  Even  now  its  mean 
height  was  five  or  six  feet  above  the  sea  level,  and  its  base  was 
probably  of  about  the  same  thickness.  Although  in  these  quiet 
waters  it  was  not  likely  to  be  broken,  it  could  not  fail  gradually 
to  melt,  and  the  rapid  dissolution  could  actually  be  watched  at  the 
edges,  for  as  the  long  waves  licked  the  sides,  piece  after  piece  of 
ground  with  its  verdant  covering  sank  to  rise  no  more. 

On  this  5th  June  a  fall  of  tiiis  nature  occurred  at  about  one 
o'clock  P.M.,  on  the  site  of  the  shed  itself,  which  was  very  near  the 
edge  of  the  ice.  There  was  fortunately  no  one  in  it  at  the  time, 
and  all  that  was  saved  was  a  few  planks,  and  two  or  three  of  the 
timbers  of  the  roofs.  Most  of  the  cooking  utensils  and  all  the 
astronomical  instruments  were  lost.  The  colonists  were  now 
obliged  to  take  refuge  on  the  highest  part  of  the  islet,  where  nothing 
protected  them  from  the  weather,  but  fortunately  a  few  tools  had 
been  left  there,  with  the  air  pumps  and  the  air-vessel,  which  Hobson 
had  employed  for  catching  a  little  of  the  rain-water  for  drinking 
purposes,  as  he  no  longer  dared  to  draw  for  a  supply  upon  the  ice, 
every  atom  of  which  was  of  value. 

At  about  four  o'clock  p.m.,  the  soldier  Kellet,  the  same  who  had 
already  given  signs  of  insanity,  came  to  Mrs  Barnett  and  said 
quietly — 

"  I  am  going  to  drown  myself,  ma'am." 

"  What,  Kellet  %  "  exclaimed  the  lady. 

"  I  tell  you  I  am  going  to  drown  myself,"  replied  the  soldier. 
"  I  have  thought  the  matter  well  over  :  there  is  no  escape  for  us,  and 
I  prefer  dying  at  once  to  waiting  to  be  killed." 

"  Kellet !  "  said  Mrs  Barnett,  taking  the  man's  hand  and  looking 
into  his  face,  which  was  strangely  composed,  '*  you  will  not  do 
that?" 

"Yes,  I  will,  ma'am  ;  and  as  you  have  always  been  very  good  to 
us  all,  I  wanted  to  wish  you  good-bye.     Good-bye,  ma'am !  " 

And  Kellet  turned  towards  the  sea.     Mrs  Barnett,  terrified  at  his 


ON  A   PIECE   OF  ICE.  32f 

munner,  threw  herself  upon  him  and  held  him  back.  Her  cries 
brought  Hobson  and  Long  to  her  assistance,  and  they  did  all  in  their 
power  to  dissuade  the  unhappy  man  from  carrying  out  his  purpose, 
but  he  was  not  to  be  moved,  and  merely  shook  his  head. 

His  mind  was  evidently  disordered,  and  it  was  useless  to  reason 
with  him.  It  was  a  terrible  moment,  as  his  example  might  lead 
some  of  his  comrades  to  commit  suicide  also.  At  all  hazards  he 
nmst  be  prevented  from  doing  as  he  threatened. 

"  Kellet,"  said  Mrs  Barnett  gently,  with  a  half  smile,  "  we  have 
always  been  very  good  friends,  have  we  not  % " 

"  Yes,  ma'am,"  replied  Kellet  calmly. 

**  Well,  Kellet,  if  you  like  we  will  die  together,  but  not  to-day.** 

"  What,  ma'am  ?  " 

"  No,  my  brave  fellow,  I  am  not  ready ;  but  to-morrow,  to-morrow 
if  you  like." 

The  soldier  looked  more  fixedly  than  ever  at  the  courageous 
woman,  and  seemed  to  hesitate  an  instant ;  then  he  cast  a  glance  of 
fierce  longing  at  the  sea,  and  passing  his  hand  over  his  eyes,  said — 

"  To-morrow  ! " 

And  without  another  word  he  quietly  turned  away  and  went 
back  to  his  comrades. 

"  Poor  fellow  ! "  murmured  Mrs  Barnett  ;  "  I  have  asked  him  to 
wait  till  to-morrow,  and  who  can  say  whether  we  shall  not  all  be 
drowned  by  that  time  !  " 

Throughout  that  night  Hobson  remained  motionless  upon  the 
beach,  pondering  whether  there  might  not  yet  be  some  means  to 
check  the  dissolution  of  the  islet — if  it  might  not  yet  be  possible 
to  preserve  it  until  they  came  in  sight  of  land  of  some  sort. 

Mrs  Barnett  and  Madge  did  not  leave  each  other  for  an  instant. 
Kalumah  crouched  like  a  dog  at  the  feet  of  her  mistress,  and  tried 
to  keep  her  warm.  Mrs  Mac-Nab  wrapped  in  a  few  furs,  the 
remains  of  the  rich  stores  of  Fort  Hope,  had  fallen  into  a  kind  of 
torpor,  with  her  baby  clasped  in  her  arms. 

The  stars  shone  with  extraordinary  brilliancy,  and  no  sounds 
broke  the  stillness  of  the  night  but  the  rippling  of  the  waves  and 
the  splash  of  pieces  of  ice  as  they  fell  into  the  sea.  The  colonists, 
stretched  upon  the  ground  in  scattered  groups,  were  as  motionless 
as  corpses  on  an  abandoned  wreck. 

Sometimes  Sergeant  Long  rose  and  peered  into  the  night-mists, 
but  seeing  nothing,  he  resumed  his  horiz9ntal  position.     The  bear. 


328  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


looking  like  a  great  white  snowball,  cowered  motionless  at  the  very 
edge  of  the  strip  of  ice. 

This  night  also  passed  away  without  any  incident  to  modify  the 
situation.  The  grey  morning  dawned  in  the  east,  and  the  sun  rose 
and  dispersed  the  shadows  of  the  night. 

The  Lieutenant's  first  care,  as  soon  as  it  was  light,  was  to  examine 
whe  piece  of  ice.  Its  perimeter  was  still  more  reduced,  and,  alas  ! 
its  mean  height  above  the  sea  level  had  sensibly  diminished.  The 
waves,  quiet  as  they  were,  washed  over  the  greater  part  of  it ;  the 
summit  of  the  little  hill  alone  was  still  beyond  their  reach.  , 

Long,  too,  saw  the  changes  which  had  taken  place  during  the 
night,  and  felt  that  all  hope  was  gone. 

Mrs  Barnett  joined  Lieutenant  Hobson,  and  said  to  him — 

*'  It  will  be  to-day  then  % " 

"  Yes,  madam,  and  you  will  keep  your  promise  to  Kellet !  " 

"  Lieutenant  Hobson,"  said  the  lady  solemnly,  "  have  we  done 
all  in  our  power  %  " 

"  We  have,  madam." 

"  Then  God's  will  be  done  !  *» 

One  last  attempt  was,  however,  made  during  the  day.  A  strong 
breeze  set  in  from  the  offing,  that  is  to  say,  a  wind  bearing  to 
the  south-east,  the  direction  in  which  were  situated  the  nearest  of 
the  Aleutian  Islands.  How  far  off  no  one  could  say,  as  without 
instruments  the  bearings  of  the  island  could  not  be  taken.  It  was 
not  likely  to  have  drifted  far,  however,  unless  under  the  influence  of 
the  current,  as  it  gave  no  hold  to  the  wind. 

Still  it  was  just  possible  that  they  might  be  nearer  land  than  they 
thought.  If  only  a  current,  .the  direction  of  which  it  was  im- 
possible to  ascertain,  had  taken  them  nearer  to  the  much-longed- 
for  Aleutian  Islands,  then,  as  the  wind  was  bearing  down  upon 
those  very  islands,  it  might  drive  the  strip  of  ice  before  it  if  a  sail 
of  some  kind  could  be  concocted.  The  ice  had  still  several  hours 
to  float,  and  in  several  hours  the  land  might  come  in  sight,  or,  if 
not  the  land,  some  coasting  or  fishing  vessel. 

A  forlorn  hope  truly,  but  it  suggested  an  idea  to  the  Lieutenant 
which  he  resolved  to  carry  out.  Could  not  a  sail  be  contrived  on 
the  islet  as  on  an  ordinary  raft  %  There  could  be  no  difficulty  in 
that ;  and  when  Hobson  suggested  it  to  Mac-Nab,  he  exclaimed— 

"  You  are  quite  right,  sir ; "  adding  to  his  men,  "  bring  out  all 
the  canvas  there  is  ! " 


A  beam  ....  was  sunk  decn  into  tlia  earth,"  ^'^r.  —  PaQ;e  329. 


ON  A   PIECE   OF  ICE,  329 

Every  one  was  quite  revived  by  this  plan,  slight  as  was  the  chance 
it  afforded,  and  all  lent  a  helping  hand,  even  Kellet,  who  had  not 
yet  reminded  Mrs  Bamett  of  her  promise. 

A  beam,  which  had  once  formed  part  of  the  roof  of  the  barracks, 
was  sunk  deep  into 'the  earth  and  sand  of  which  the  little  hill  was 
composed,  and  firmly  fixed  with  ropes  arranged  like  shrouds  and  a 
stay.  '  A  sail  made  of  all  the  clothes  and  coverlets  still  remaining, 
fastened  on  to  a  strong  pole  for  a  yard,  was  hoisted  on  the  mast. 
This  sail,  or  rather  collection  of  sails,  suitably  set,  swelled  in  the 
breeze,  and  by  the  wake  it  left,  it  was  evident  that  the  strip  of 
ice  was  rapidly  moving  towards  the  south-east. 

It  was  a  success,  and  every  one  was  cheered  with  newly- awakened 
hope.  They  were  no  longer  stationary ;  they  were  advancing  slowly, 
it  was  true,  but  still  they  were  advancing.  The  carpenter  was 
particularly  elated  ;  all  eagerly  scanned  the  horizon,  and  had  they 
been  told  that  no  land  could  be  sighted,  they  would  have  refused 
to  believe  it. 

So  it  appeared,  however ;  for  the  strip  of  ice  floated  along  on  the 
waves  for  three  hours  in  the  centre  of  an  absolutely  circular  and 
unbroken  horizon.     The  poor  colonists  still  hoped  on. 

Towards  three  o'clock,  the  Lieutenant  took  the  Sergeant  aside, 
and  said  to  him — 

"  We  are  advancing  at  the  cost  of  the  solidity  and  duration  of 
our  islet." 

"  What  do  you  mean,  sir  ? " 

"  I  mean  that  the  ice  is  being  rapidly  fretted  away  as  it  moves 
along.  Its  speed  is  hastening  its  dissolution,  and  since  we  set  sail 
it  has  diminished  one-third." 

"Are  you  quite  sure  %  " 

"  Absolutely  certain.  The  ice  is  longer  and  flatter.  Look,  the  sea 
is  not  more  than  ten  feet  from  the  hill !  " 

It  was  true,  and  the  result  was  what  might  naturally  have  been 
expected  from  the  motion  of  the  ice. 

"  Sergeant,"  resumed  Hobson,  "  do  you  think  we  ought  to  take 
down  our  sail  1 " 

"  I  think,"  replied  Long,  after  a  moment's  reflection,  "  that  we 
should  consult  our  comrades.  We  ought  all  to  share  the  respon- 
sibility of  a  decision  now." 

The  Lieutenant  bent  his  head  in  assent,  and  the  two  returned  to 
their  old  position  on  the  little  hilL 


330  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


Hobson  put  the  case  before  the  whole  party. 

"  The  speed  we  have  given  to  the  ice,"  he  said,  "  is  causing  it  to 
wear  away  rapidly,  and  will  perhaps  hasten  the  inevitable  catastrophe 
by  a  few  hours.  My  friends,  you  must  decide  whether  we  shall 
still  go  on." 

"  Forwards  !  "  cried  all  with  one  voice. 

So  it  was  decided,  and,  as  it  turned  out,  the  decision  was  fraught 
with  consequences  of  incalculable  importance. 

At  six  o'clock  P.M.  Madge  rose,  and  pointing  to  a  point  on  the 
south-east,  cried — 

"  Land ! "  . 

Every  one  started  up  as  if  struck  by  lightning.  Land  there  was 
indeed,  on  the  south-east,  twelve  miles  from  the  island. 

"  More  sail !  more  sail !  "  shouted  Hobson. 

He  was  understood,  and  fresh  materials  were  hastily  brought. 
On  the  shrouds  a  sort  of  studding  sail  was  rigged  up  of  clothes,  furs, 
everything,  in  short,  that  could  give  hold  to  the  wind. 

The  speed  increased  as  the  wind  freshened,  but  the  ice  was  melt- 
ing everywhere ;  it  trembled  beneath  the  feet  of  the  anxious  watchers, 
and  might  open  at  any  moment.  But  they  would  not  think  of  that ; 
they  were  buoyed  up  with  hope ;  safety  was  at  hand,  on  the  land 
they  were  rapidly  nearing.  They  shouted — they  made  signals — they 
were  in  a  delirium  of  excitement. 

At  half-past  seven  the  ice  was  much  nearer  the  land,  but  it  was 
visibly  melting,  and  sinking  rapidly  ;  water  was  gushing  from  it,  and 
the  waves  were  washing  over  it,  sweeping  off  the  terrified  quad- 
rupeds before  the  eyes  of  the  colonists.  Every  instant  they  expected 
the  whole  mass  to  be  engulfed,  and  it  was  necessary  to  lighten  it 
like  a  sinking  vessel.  Every  means  was  tried  to  check  the  dissolu- 
tion ;  the  earth  and  sand  were  carefully  spread  about,  especially  at 
the  edges  .of  the  ice,  to  protect  it  from  the  direct  influence  of  the 
sunbeams  ;  and  furs  were  laid  here  and  there,  as  being  bad  conductors 
of  heat.  But  it  was  all  of  no  avail  \  the  lower  portion  of  the  ice 
began  to  crack,  and  several  fissures  opened  in  the  surface.  It  was 
now  but  a  question  of  moments  ! 

Night  set  in,  and  there  was  nothing  left  for  the  poor  colonists  to 
do  to  quicken  the  speed  of  the  islet.  Some  of  them  tried  to  paddle 
about  on  planks.     The  coast  was  still  four  miles  to  windward. 

It  was  a  dark  gloomy  night,  without  any  moon,  and  Hobson, 
whose  heroic  courage  did  not  even  now  fail  him,  shouted — 


ON  A   PIECE    OF  ICE,  33 1 


*'  A  signal,  my  friends  !  a  signal ! '' 

A  pile  was  made  of  all  the  remaining  combustibles — two  or  three 
planks  and  a  beam.  It  was  set  fire  to,  and  bright  flames  soon  shot 
up  ;  but  the  strip  of  ice  continued  to  melt  and  sink.  Presently  the 
little  hill  alone  remained  above  water,  and  on  it  the  despairing 
wretches,  with  the  few  animals  left  alive,  huddled  together,  the  bear 
growling  fiercely. 

The  water  was  still  rising,  and  there  was  no  sign  that  any  one  on 
land  had  seen  the  signal.  In  less  than  a  quarter  of  an  hour  they 
must  all  be  swallowed  up. 

Could  nothing  be  done  to  make  the  ice  last  longer?  In  three 
hours,  three  short  hours,  they  might  reach  the  land,  which  was  now 
but  three  miles  to  windward. 

"  Oh  I "  cried  Hobson,  "  if  only  I  could  stop  the  ice  from  melting ! 
I  would  give  my  life  to  know  how  !     Yes,  I  would  give  my  life  !  " 

"  There  is  one  way,"  suddenly  replied  a  voice. 

Tt  was  Thomas  Black  who  spoke,  the  astronomer,  who  had  not 
opened  his  lips  for  so  long,  and  who  had  long  since  appeared  dead 
to  all  that  was  going  on. 

"  Yes,"  he  continued,  "  there  is  one  way  of  checking  the  dissolu- 
tion  of  the  ice — there  is  one  way  of  saving  us  all." 

All  gathered  eagerly  round  the  speaker,  and  looked  at  him  inquir- 
ingly.   They  thought  they  must  have  misheard  what  he  said. 

"  Well  ?  "  asked  Hobson,  "  what  way  do  you  mean?  " 

"  To  the  pumps  !  "  replied  Black  simply. 

Was  he  mad  ?  Did  he  take  the  ice  for  a  sinking  vessel,  with 
ten  feet  of  water  in  the  hold  ? 

The  air  pumps  were  at  hand,  together  with  the  air  vessel,  which 
Hobson  had  been  using  as  a  reservoir  for  drinking  water,  but  of 
what  use  could  they  bel  Could  they  harden  the  ice,  which  was 
melting  aU  over  % 

"  He  is  mad  !  "  exclaimed  Long. 

"  To  the  pumps  ! "  repeated  the  astronomer  \  "  fill  the  reservoir 
with  air ! " 

"  Do  as  he  tells  you  !  "  cried  Mrs  Barnett. 

The  pumps  were  attached  to  the  reservoir,  the  covelr  of  which 
was  closed  and  bolted.  The  pumps  were  then  at  once  set  to  work, 
and  the  air  was  condensed  under  the  pressure  of  several  atmos- 
pheres.    Then  Black,  taking  one  of  the  leather  pipes  connected  witl> 


332  THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


the  reservoir,  and  opening  the  cock,  let  the  condensed  air  escape, 
walking  round  the  ice  wherever  it  was  melting. 

Every  one  was  astonished  at  the  effect  produced.  Wherever  the 
air  was  projected  by  the  astronomer,  the  fissures  filled  up,  and  the 
surface  re-froze. 

*'  Hurrah !  hurrah  ! "  shouted  all  with  one  voice. 

It  was  tiring  enough  to  work  the  pumps,  but  there  were  plenty 
of  volunteers.  The  edges  of  the  ice  were  again  solidified,  as  if 
under  the  influence  of  intense  cold. 

"  You  have  saved  us,  Mr  Black,"  said  Lieutenant  Hobson. 

*'  Nothing  could  be  more  natural,"  replied  the  astronomer 
quietly. 

Nothing,  in  fact,  could  have  been  more  natural ;  and  the  physical 
effect  produced  may  be  described  as  follows  : — 

There  were  two  reasons  for  the  relegation: — First,  under  the 
pressure  of  the  air,  the  water  vaporised  on  the  surface  of  the  ice 
produced  intense  cold,  and  the  compressed  air  in  expanding 
abstracted  the  heat  from  the  thawed  surface,  which  immediately 
re-froze.  Wherever  the  ice  was  opening  the  cold  cemented  the  edges, 
so  that  it  gradually  regained  its  original  solidity. 

This  went  on  for  several  hours,  and  the  colonists,  buoyed  up  by 
hope,  toiled  on  with  unwearying  zeal. 

They  were  nearing  the  coast,  and  when  they  were  about  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  it,  the  bear  plunged  into  the  sea,  and 
swimming  to  the  shore,  soon  disappeared. 

A  few  minutes  afterwards  the  ice  ran  aground  upon  a  beach,  and 
the  few  animals  still  upon  it  hurried  away  in  the  darkness.  The 
colonists  "  disembarked,"  and  falling  on  their  knees,  returned  thanks 
to  God  for  their  miraculous  deliverance.  ^ 


The  colonists,  falling  on  their  knees,  returned  thanks  to  God."  —  Page  332. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

CONCLUSION, 

fT  was  on  the  island  of  Blejinic,  the  last  of  the  Aleutian  gronp, 
at  the  extreme  south  of  Behring  Sea,  that  all  the  colonists  of 
Fort  Hope  at  last  landed,  after  having  traversed  eighteen 
hundred  miles  since  the  breaking-up  of  the  ice.  They  were  hospit- 
ably received  by  some  Aleutian  fishermen  who  had  hurried  to  their 
assistance,  and'  were  soon  able  to  communicate  with  some  English 
agents  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company. 

After  all  the  details  we  have  given,  it  is  needless  to  dwell  on  the 
courage  and  energy  of  the  brave  little  band,  which  had  proved  itself 
worthy  of  its  noble  leader.  We  know  how  all  struggled  with  their 
misfortunes,  and  how  patiently  they  had  submitted  to  the  will  of 
God.  We  have  seen  Mrs  Barnett  cheering  every  one  by  her  example 
and  sympatliy  ;  and  we  know  that  neither  she  nor  those  with  her 
yielded  to  despair  when  the  peninsula  on  which  Fort  Hope  had 
been  built  was  converted  into  a  wandering  island,  when  that  island 
became  an  islet,  and  the  islet  a  strip  of  ice,  nor  even  when  that 
strip  of  ice  was  melting  ber"»ath  the  combined  influence  of  sun  and 
waves.  If  the  scheme  of  the  Company  was  a  failure,  if  the  new 
fort  had  perished,  no  one  could  possibly  blame  Hobson  or  his  com- 
panions, who  had  gone  through  such  extraordinary  and  unexpected 
trials.  Of  the  nineteen  persons  under  the  Lieutenant's  charge,  not 
one  was  missing,  and  he  had  even  two  new  members  in  his  little 
colony,  Kalumah  and  Mrs  Barnett's  godson,  Michael  Mac-Nab. 

Six  days  after  their  rescue  the  shipwrecked  mariners  arrived  at 
New  Archangel,  the  capital  of  Russian  America, 

Here  the  friends,  bound  together  by  so  many  dangers  shared,  must 
part,  probably  for  ever  !  Hobson  and  his  men  were  to  return  to 
Fort  Reliance  across  English  America,  whilst  Mrs  Barnett,  accom- 
panied by  Kalumah,  who  would  not  leave  her,  Madge,  and  Thomas 
Black,  intended  to  go  back  to  .furore  vid  San  Francisco  and  the 
United  States. 


334 


THE  FUR  COUNTRY, 


But  whilst  they  were  still  altogether,  the  Lieutenant,  addressing 
Mrs  Barnett,  said  with  considerable  emotion — 

"  God  bless  you,  madam,  for  all  you  have  been  to  us  You  have 
been  our  comforter,  our  consoler,  the  very  soul  of  our  little  would; 
and  I  thank  you  in  the  name  of  all." 

Three  cheers  for  Mrs  Barnett  greeted  this  speech,  and  each 
soldier  begged  to  shake  her  by  the  hand,  whilst  the  women  embraced 
her  affectionately. 

The  Lieutenant  himself  had  conceived  so  warm  an  affection  for 
the  lady  who  had  so  long  been  his  friend  and  counsellor,  that  he 
could  not  bid  her  good-bye  without  great  emotion. 

"  Can  it  be  that  we  shall  never  meet  again  ?  "  he  exclaimed. 

"  No,  Lieutenant,*'  replied  Mrs  Barnett ;  "  we  must,  we  shall 
meet  again.  If  you  do  not  come  and  see  me  in  Europe,  I  will 
come  back  to  you  at  Fort  Reliance,  or  to  the  new  factory  you  will 
found  some  day  yet." 

On  hearing  this,  Thomas  Black,  who  had  regained  the  use  of  his 
tongue  since  he  had  landed  on  terra  jirma^  came  forward  and  said, 
with  an  air  of  the  greatest  conviction — 

"  Yes,  we  shall  meet  again  in  thirty-six  years.  My  friends,  I 
missed  the  eclipse  of  1860,  but  I  will  not  miss  that  which  will 
take  place  under  exactly  similar  conditions  in  the  same  latitudes  in 
1896.  And  therefore  I  appoint  a  meeting  with  you.  Lieutenant, 
and  with  you,  my  dear  madam,  on  the  confines  of  the  Arctic  Ocean 
thirty-six    years  hence." 


A/i 


14  DAY  IJSF 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  dae  on  the  last  date  stamped  below, 
or  on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  Renewals  only: 

Tel.  No.  642-3405 
Renewals  may  be  made  4  days  i>rior  to  date  due. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


1C7'-  S  y.' 


■h 


T^ 


REC'DLD  WI\K    oro-xno 


LD2lA-40m-3,'72 
(Qll73sl0)476-A-32 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


yC/P97uo 


